/^
r
^ ^
Mfs
^A-
s?S
^:^^m^
r
^V>.' ■ -..
A
AAA-A
..0
1
<^g . ^
LI BR ARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA.
Received Cy/rr2/ ^ , i8(^67'
i A ccessions No^^ ^ J. fiS shelf No. '^^3- - ■
f I ^f '^ 6^ — 6^(\6ci
OLCO/lf ^
^^a, >c>c/
Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2007 witin funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.arcliive.org/details/elementarygreekgOOgoodricli
AN
ELEMENTARY
GREEK GRAMMAR.
BY
WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Ph.D.,
ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD COLLEGE.
REVISED AND ENLARGED EDITION.
BOSTaN':
GINN AND HEATH.
1881.
Copyright^ 1879,
By William W. Goodwin.
l^^' , PREFACE
This Grammar is partly a revised edition of the
Elementary Greek Grammar published in 18T0, and
partly an independent work. The part whicl; precedes
the Inflection of the Verb contains the substance of the
former edition revised and enlarged, with many additions
to the Paradigms. The part relating to the Inflection of
the Verb, §§ 88 — 127, has been entirely re-written, and
increased from fifty to one hundred pages. Part III.,
on the Formation of Words, is entirely new. The Syn-
tax is in most parts substantially the same as in the
former edition ; but some changes and numerous addi-
tions have been made, the chief increase being in the
sections on the Prepositions. Part V., on Versification,
is almost entirely new, and is based to a great extent on
the Rhythmic and Metric of J. H. H. Schmidt, which
has just been published in an English translation by
Professor J. W. White. I have not followed Schmidt,
however, in making all iambic and anapaestic verses
trochaic and dactylic ; and I have followed the ancient
authorities in recognizing cyclic anapaests as well as
cyclic dactyls. I have adopted the modern doctrine of
log-aoedic verses, which enlarges their dominion and
reduces them to a uniform f measure, thus avoiding
iv PREFACE.
many of the incongruities which beset the common
theory of these verses.
The Catalogue of Verbs is increased from nineteen to
thirty-two pages, and contains a greater number of verbs
and gives the forms more completely than the former one.
The object has still been to present only the strictly
classic forms of each verb, and thereby to save the learner
from a mass of detail which he may never need. It is
surprising how simple many formidable verbs become
when all later and doubtful forms are removed. In pre-
paring the Catalogue I liave relied constantly on Veitch's
Greek Verbs, Irregular and Defective, a work in the
Clarendon Press Series, for which every classical scholar
will bless the author.
It will be seen that the enlargement has been made
chiefly in the part relating to the Inflection of the Verb.
There I have adopted (§ 108) the division of verbs in w
into eight classes which is employed by G. Curtius : this
reduces many of the apparent irregularities of the Greek
verb to rule and order. In the former edition I adopted
Hadley's addition of a class of " reduplicating " verbs.
I have omitted this class as unnecessary in my present
arrangement. Of the six verbs (apart from verbs in fit
and verbs in cr/co)) which composed this class, ^u^voy^ai^
X(TX<^i and iriirTCti are now assigned by Curtius to his
" mixed class " ; the first syllable of tUtgd is now not
considered a reduplication by Curtius ; filfivo) is used
only in the present stem ; while rirpday seern^s too late a
form to affect classification. The chief innovation which
I have now ventured to make in the classification of Cur-
tius relates to the large class of verbs which add e- to the
PREFACE. V
stem in certain tenses not belonging to the present stem.
I have no thought of disputing the remark of Curtius
that this phenomenon and the addition of e- in the pres-
ent stem (as in Bok-, So/ce-o)) are to be explained on simi-
lar principles. But it seems obvious that the former is
not, like the latter, a process by which the present stem
is formed from the simple stem, and it therefore has no
place in the classification which we are here considering.
Further, the addition of €- in other tenses than the pres-
ent occurs in every one of the eight classes of Curtius, so
that it must confuse the classification to introduce it
there at all. I have therefore included this among the
modifications of the stem explained in § 109, thus class-
ing it with such phenomena as the addition of a- in
certain verbs and other modifications which affect only
special tenses. (See § 109, 8.i) In § 120, 1, I have
followed the doctrine of F. D. Allen, stated in the
American Philological Transactions for 1873 (pp. 5-19),
by which Homeric forms like opoay for opdco are explained
by assimilation.
I fear I may have offended many scholars in giving the
present stems of Xvgj, \eyco, XetTro), &c. as Xv-, X67-, Xetir-^
&c., and not as \vo(e)-, \e<yo{e)-^ Xeuirro^e)-^ &c. I have
been careful to state in sevei:al places (see footruotes,
pp. 82 and 144) that the latter is the better approved and
more correct form of expression ; but I have not ventured
to make the first attempt at a popular statement of the
tense stems with the variable vowel-attachment. A slight
reflection showed me that this must be made by a pro-
1 See also the Proceedings of the American Philological Association for
1879.
Tl PREFACE.
fessional etymologist, who can settle, at least consistently,
the many doubtful questions which still beset the subject
of tense stems. I was finally decided by finding that
G. Curtius himself had made no change in this respect
in the latest edition (1878) of his Schulgrammatik, and
continued to call \i>-, Xey-, Xetw-, &c. present stems,
evidently thinking the other forms too cumbrous for a
school-book. I have had no hesitation in following his
example.
The sections on the Syntax of the Verb contain a con-
densed statement of the principles which I have explained
at greater length in a larger work. Syntax of the Moods
and Tenses of the Greek Verb^ to which I must refer more
advanced students, and especially teachers, for a fuller
exposition of this subject.^ I must still confess myself
unable to give any general definitions which shall include
all the uses of either the indicative, the subjunctive, or
the optative, and yet be accurate enough to meet modern
scientific demands. The truth must be recognized that
these moods were not invented deliberately to express
certain definite classes of ideas to the exclusion of all
others, and then always held rigidly to these pre-deter-
mined uses. On the contrary, their various uses grew up
gradually, as language was developed and found new ideas
to express. Both the Greek and the Latin inherited most
of their modal forms through a line of ancestors now lost,
1 For a still fuller explanation of the classification of conditional sen-
tences here introduced, with the corresponding arrangement of relative
clauses, I must refer to articles in the Transactions of the American Philo-
logical Association for 1873 and 1876, printed also in the Journal of Phi-
lology, Vol. V. No. 10, pp. 186-205, and Vol. viii. No. 15, pp. 18-38,
PREFACE. VU
and each language employed these forms, partly in con-
formity with tradition, and partly to suit its own peculiar
needs and tendencies of thought. We must have a far
better knowledge of the uses of the moods in the original
Indo-European tongue and of the earliest uses in both
Greek and Latin than we are likely ever to get from our
present stock of material, before we can hope to trace
historically each use of the moods in the classic languages.
Investigations made through the Sanskrit, like those of
Delbriick, are looking in the right direction ; but scholars
differ widely in their interpretation of the results thus
obtained, and the moods are used too vaguely in Sanskrit
(compared with Greek or Latin) to be decisive in the
comparison. We know enough, however, not to be sur-
prised when we find the same idea expressed in Latin by
the past tenses of the subjunctive, and in Greek by the
past tenses of the indicative, especially when we find the
two constructions coincide in a few instances in Homeric
Greek.
Much that is contained in the Notes of this Grammar,
especially all in the smallest type, is intended to be used
for reference, or to be read by the more interested pupils
as they study the remainder of the book. A great change
has gradually come upon the study of grammar in these
practical days ; and no teacher (it is hoped) now believes
in cramming pupils in advance with grammatical details
which they are not expected to use or even understand
until they have learnt the language in some other way.
I am strongly of the opinion that a pupil should begin to
translate easy sentences from Greek into English and from
English into Greek as soon as he has learnt the forms
^'^^li PREFACE.
absolutely necessary for tlie process. The true time to.
teach each principle of grammar (beyond the most general
rules, which every student of Greek will have already) is
the moment when the pupil is to meet with it in reading
or writing ; and no grammar which is not thus illustrated
as it is taught ever becomes a reality to the pupil. But*
it is not enough for a learner merely to meet each con-
struction or form in isolated instances ; for he may do this
repeatedly, and yet know little of the general principle
which the single example partially illustrates. Men saw
apples fall and the moon and planets roll ages before the
principle of gravitation was thought of. It is necessary,
therefore, not merely to bring the pupil face to face with
the facts of a language by means of examples carefully
selected to exhibit them, but also to refer him to a state-
ment of the general principles which show the full
meaning of the facts and their relation to other prin-
ciples.^ In other words, systematic practice in reading
and writing must be supplemented from the beginning by
equally systematic reference to the grammar. Mechanics
are not learnt by merely observing the working of levers
and pulleys, nor is chemistry by watching experiments
on gases; although no one would undertake to teach
either without such practical illustrations. I have, there-
fore, no faith in classical scholarship which is not based
on a solid foundation of grammar ; while I still believe
that more attention to practical illustration than has
generally been paid is urgently needed, and that the
^ These objects seem to me to "be admirably attained in the First Lessons
in Greek, which was prepared by my colleague, Professor J. W. White, to
be used in connection with this Grammar.
PREFACE. IX
study of grammar may tlius be relieved of most of its
traditional terrors and made what it should be, a means,
not an end. These remarks apply especially to syntax,
the chief principles of which have always seemed to me
more profitable for a pupil in the earlier years of his
classical studies than the details of vowel-changes and
exceptional forms which are often thought more seasona-
ble. The study of Greek syntax, properly pursued,
gives the pupil an insight into the processes of thought
of a highly cultivated people ; and while it stimulates his
own powers of thought, it teaches him habits of more
careful expression by making him familiar with many
forms of statement more precise than those to which he
is accustomed in his own language. The Greek syntax,
as it was developed and refined by the Athenians, is a
most important chapter in the history of thought, and
even those whose classical studies are limited to the
rudiments cannot afford to neglect it entirely.
One of the best practical illustrations of any language,
ancient or modern, one which is available even for those
who have no teachers, is committing to memory passages
of its best literature, and using them as a basis for both
oral and written exercises. This "natural method," which
has proved so successful in teaching modern languages,
can be made of great advantage in classical education by
a skilful teacher ; although I am convinced that in the
ancient languages it should always be accompanied by
careful grammatical study, and especially by constant
reference to a systematic grammar. As an important
aid, however, it cannot be too highly commended, and it
can hardly begin too early.
X PREFACE.
I have not thought that the subject of Pronunciation,
in its only practical form, belongs properly to Greek
grammar. The question of the ancient sound of the
Greek letters is too extensive, and involves too much
learned discussion and controversy, to be treated in a
work like this. A very different question, it seems to
me, is the practical one. How are boys to be taught to
pronounce Greek in our schools? Even if we had a
complete ancient account of Greek pronunciation, — '
which we are very far from having, — it would be a much
harder task to teach boys of the present day to follow
it than it would be to teach them to pronounce French
or German by rules without the help of the voice. The
chief practical considerations here are simplicity and
uniformity. For more than a generation, until very re-
cently, there has been no system of pronouncing Greek
in the United States which could claim notice on the
ground of uniformity. Only our oldest scholars remember
the prevalence of the so-called " English system," which
uses Englisji vowel-sounds and Latin accents ; and this
would now be unintelligible in most of our schools and
colleges. My own efforts have been exerted merely
towards bringing some order out of this chaos. Our
scholars have generally assumed that the written accents
should be used ; and, whatever theory of ancient accent
we may hold, it will be admitted that the Greeks marked
the first syllable of dvOpcoiroi, and the Romans the first
syllable of homines, in the same way. The English vowel-
sounds are not easily combined with Greek accents,
especially when a short penultimate is accented, as in
TTpayfidrcDV* Harvard College has for the past eighteen
PREFACE. Xi
years recommended schools to use the Greek accents, and
to pronounce a as ct in father, rj and e as e in fete and
men, t as i in machine, leaving further details to each
teacher's discretion. The American Philological Asso-
ciation has twice recommended the same; and to this
extent some degree of uniformity has thus been secured
within the last ten years. The other sounds have generally
remained as they are in the English system, with the
exception of ov, which is generally pronounced like ou
in group. Perhaps the majority pronounce av like ou in
house (as the Germans do). To those who ask my advice,
I am in the habit of recommending the following system,
which I follow chiefly from its simplicity, and because it
is adopted by more scholars in the United States than
any other, not pretending that all the sounds (^e.g-. those
of €L and the aspirated consonants) rest on a scientific
basis: —
a as a in father, 7; as e in fete, e as e in men, i as i in
machine, « as o in note, v as French u; short vowels
merely shorter than the long vowels ; — a* as at in aisle,
et as ei in height, 01 as oi in oil, vt as ui in quit or wi in
with, av as ou in house, ev as eu in feud, ov as ou in group;
a, 77, ft), like a, t}, co; — the consonants as in English,
except that 7 before /c, 7, f, and x ^^^ the sound of n,
but elsewhere is hard; that 6 is always like th in thin;
and that ^ i^ always hard, like German ch. I have
always pronounced f like English z, but it would prob-
ably be more correct to give it the sound of soft ds (not
that of German z), as it is a double consonant (§ 6, 2).
Many scholars prefer to pronounce ei like ei in eight ;
and this has much to be said in its favor on several
xu PREFACE.
grounds. I do not think we have any positive knowl-
edge of the sound of et before it reached the sound of i
(our ee), and I have held to that of ei in height simply
to avoid another change from, both English and German
usage.
I need not enumerate here the familiar works to which
I am indebted for most of the facts of Greek Grammar.
These have been collected so often and so thoroughly, that
there is little room for originality except in the form of
presentation. The best examples of every principle have
already been used scores of times, and I have never
hesitated to use them again. I must again acknowledge
my deep obligations to the late Professor Hadley for his
kind permission to use the valuable material in his pub-
lished works, and for the friendly aid and advice on
which I constantly depended for many years. The influ-
ence of his profound learning and his noble example will
long survive in American scholarship. I am greatly
indebted to all who have given me their counsel during
the preparation of this book. I must mention particularly
Professors F. D. Allen, Addison Hoge, M. W. Humphreys,
and J. W. White. Professor Caskie Harrison of Sewanee,
Tennessee, has done me the great kindness of sending me
an elaborate criticism of Part I. and the whole Syntax
of my former edition, with discussions of many of the
most important points. I have often been aided by his
remarks in revising these portions of my work ; and even
when I could not agree with his opinions, his criticisms
have shown me some weak points in my former state-
ments.
PREFACE. xni
My special thanks are due to Mr. Henry Jackson, of
Trinity College, Cambridge, who has kindly read the
proofs of the English edition, published at the same time
with this, and has given me many valuable suggestions
during the printing.
W. W. GOODWIN.
Harvard College, Cambridge,
October, 1879.
CONTENTS,
Page
iNTRODrcTiON. — The Greek Language and Dialects ... 1
PART I.— LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
§ 1. The Alphabet 6
§§ 2, 3. Vowels and Diphthongs 6
§ 4. Breathings 6, 7
§§ 5-7. Consonants and their Divisions 7, 8
§ 8. Collision of Vowels. — Hiatus ...... 8
§ 9. Contraction of Vowels 8-10
§ 10. Synizesis 10
§ 11. Crasis 10, 11
§ 12. Elision . 11, 12
§ 13. Movable Consonants 12
§ 14. Metathesis and Syncope ....... 13
§§ 15-17. Euphony of Consonants 13-16
§ 18. Syllables and their Division 17
§§ 19, 20. Quantity of Syllables 17, 18
§§ 21-23. General Principles of Accent . . . . . 18-20
§ 24. Accent of Contracted Syllables . . . ' . . . 20, 21
§ 25. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives 21, 22
§ 26. Accent of Verbs . . 22, 23
§§ 27, 28. Enclitics . .23,24
§ 29. Proclitics . 24, 25
§ 30. Dialectic Changes in Letters 25
§31. Punctuation-Marks 25
xvi CONTENTS.
PART IL— INFLECTION.
§ 32. Definitions. — Inflection, Boot, Stem, Ending ... 26
§ 33. Numbers, Genders, Cases 26, 27
NOUNS.
§ 34. Three Declensions of Nouns 28
§§ 35, 36. Stems and Terminations of First Declension . . .28, 29
§ 37. Paradigms of First Declension 29, 30
§ 38. Contract Nouns of First Declension 30, 31
§ 39. Dialects of First Declension 31
§§ 40, 41. Stems and Terminations of Second Declension . . 31, 32
§ 42. 1. Paradigms of Second Declension 32, 33
2. Attic Second Declension 33
§ 43. Contract Nouns of Second Declension . . . . 33, 34
§ 44. Dialects of Second Declension 34
§ 45. Stems and Case-endings of Third Declension . . .34, 35
Note. Comparison of Case-endings in the Three Declensions 35
§ 46. Nominative Singular of Third Declension .... 36, 37
§ 47. Accusative Singular of Third Declension . . , . 37
§ 48. Vocative Singular of Third Declension .... 38
§ 49. Dative Plural of Third Declension 39
§ 50. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Mute or
Liquid Stems 39-41
§§ 51-56. Paradigms of Nouns of Third Declension with Stems in
S or Vowel Stems (chiefly contract) .... 42-47
§ 57. Syncopated Nouns of Third Declension . . , . 47, 48
§ 58. Gender of Third Declension 49
§ 59. Dialects of Third Declension 49
§ 60. Irregular Nouns . 49-52
§ 61. Local Endings, -di, -dev, -Se, &c 52
ADJECTIVES.
§§ 62-64. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions . . 63, 54
§ 65. Contract Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions . 54-56
§ 66. Adjectives of the Third Declension 56, 57
§ 67. First and Third Declensions combined .... 57-59
§ 68. Participles in -<av, -as, -ets, -v$, -ws 59-61
§ 69. Contract Participles in -awv, -euv, -ouv . . . . 61, 62
§ 70. Declension of fi^yas, iroXis, and Tpaos ..... 62, 63
CONTENTS. xvii
Comparison of Adjectives.
§ 71. Comparison by -repos, -raros 64
§ 72. Comparison by -luv, -kttos 64, 65
§ 73. Irregular Comparison 65, 66
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
§ 74. Adverbs formed from Adjectives ...... 67
§ 75. Comparison of Adverbs , , 67
NUMERALS.
§ 76. Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and Numeral Adverbs . , 68, 69
§ 77. Declension of Cardinal Numbers, &c 69, 70
THE ARTICLE.
§ 78. Declension of 6, ^j, t<5 71
PRONOUNS.
§ 79. Personal and Intensive Pronouns . . , . . 71-73
§ 80. Reflexive Pronouns 73, 74
§ 81. Reciprocal Pronoun ...,..,, 74
§ 82. Possessive Pronouns ........ 74
§ 83. Demonstrative Pronouns . . . . . . . 74, 75
§§ 84, 85. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns . . . . 76, 77
§ 86. Relative Pronouns , . 77, 78
§ 87. Pronominal Adjectives and Adverbs . , , , . 78, 79
VERBS.
§§ 88-91. Voices, Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons . . 79-81
§ 92. Tense Stems. — Principal Parts of a Greek Verb . . . 81-84
§ 93. Conjugation. — Two Forms : Verbs in w and Verbs in fii . 8iy 85
COirjUGATION OF VERBS IJT fl.
§ 94. Present Stem of Verbs in w 85
§ 95. 1 . Synopsis of the Regular Verb in w . . . . 85-91
2. Meaning of the Forms of the Verb . , . . . 92, 93
§ 96. Paradigm of the Regular Verb in w 94-110
§ 97. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verbs with
Consonant Stems 111-114
§98. Contract Verbs in aw, cw, and ow 116-118
xvm
CONTENTS.
Augment.
§ 99. Syllabic and Temporal Augment and Reduplication
defined 119
§ 100. Augment of Imperfect and Aorist Indicative . . . 119, 120
§ 101. Augment of Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect . 120, 121
§ 102. Attic Reduplication 122
§ 103. Augment of Diphthongs 122
§ 104. Syllabic Augment prefixed to a Vowel . . . . 123
§ 105. Augment of Compound Verbs . . . . . 123, 124
§ 106. Omission of Augment 124
Verbal Steins.
§§ 107, 108. Formation of Present from Simple Stem. — Eight
Classes of Verbs in w 125-131
§ 109. Modification of the Stem in certain Tenses . . , 131-135
§ 110. Formation of the Seven Tense-Stems .... 135-141
§ 111. Table of Tense-Stems . 141
Personal Endings.
§ 112. Table of Personal Endings. — Connecting Vowel . . 142-144
§113. 1. Connecting Vowels of the Indicative . . . 144,145
2. Personal Endings of Indicative with Connecting Vowel 145, 146
§ 114. Terminations of the Subjunctive 146
§ 115. Terminations of the Optative 146-148
§ 116. Terminations of the Imperative ..... 148, 149
§ 117. Terminations of the Infinitive, Participles, and Verbal
Adjectives 149, 150
§ 118. Periphrastic Forms 150, 151
Dialects.
§ 119. Dialectic and Poetic Forms of Verbs in w. . . . 151-153
§ 120. Special Dialectic Forms of Contract Verbs . . . 154, 155
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN jtt.
§§ 121, 122. General Character of Verbs in fii. — Two Classes . 156-158
§ 123. 1. Synopsis of Verbs in -rjfii, -ojfxif -vfu . . . 158, 159
2. Paradigms of peculiar Tenses 159-165
3. Full Synopsis of Indicative 165, 166
§ 124. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the /Ki-form . . . 167
§ 125. Enumeration of the fii-forms . . . . . 168-170
§ 126. Dialectic Forms of Verbs in fii 170-172
§ 127. Irregular Verbs in m. — Paradigms .... 172-179
CONTENTS. xix
PART m.— FORMATION OF WORDS.
§ 128. 1. Simple and Compound Words . . . . . 180
2. Verbals and Denominatives 180, 181
3. Suffixes . 181
§§ 129, 130. Formation of Simple Words .... 182-187
§ 131. Formation of Compound Words 187-189
§ 132. Meaning of Compounds . . . . . . 189, 190
PART rV^. — SYNTAX.
§ 133, Subject, Predicate, Object 191, 192
§ 134. 1. Subject Nominative (of Finite Verbs) ... 192
2. Subject Accusative (of Infinitive) .... 192
3. Subject of Infinitive omitted 192
Notes. Subj. Nom. omitted. Impersonal Verbs, &c. . 192, 193
§ 135. Subject Nominative and Verb 193, 194
§ 136. Predicate in same Case as Subject . . . . ' . 194, 195
§ 137. Apposition ......... 195, 196
ADJECTIVES.
§ 138. Adjectives agreeing with Nouns . . . . . 196-198
§ 139. Adjective used as a Noun 198, 199
THE ARTICLE.
§ 140. Homeric Use of the Article (as Pronoun) . . .199, 200
§ 1 41. Attic Use of the Article (as Definite Article) . . 200, 201
§ 142. Position of the Article 201-204
§ 143. Pronominal Article in Attic {b ixiv , . . 6 5^, &c.). . 204, 205
PRONOUNS.
§§ 144, 145. Personal and Intensive Pronouns .... 205, 206
§ 146. Reflexive Pronouns . . . . , . . 2O6 207
§ 147. Possessive Pronouns 207
§ 148. Demonstrative Pronouns 208
§ 149. Interrogative Pronoun , , 208
§ 150. Indefinite Pronoun 209
§ 151. Relative Pronoun as related to its Antecedent . . . 209, 210
§ 152. Relative with omitted Antecedent .... 210
§§ 153, 154. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives . . 210-212
§ 155. Relative in Exclamations, &c 212
§ 156. Relative Pronoun not repeated in a new Case . . . 212
XX
CONTENTS.
THE CASES.
I. Nominative and Vocative.
§ 157. 1. Nominative, as Subject or Predicate
2. Vocative used in addressing
212
213
II. Accusative.
Remark. — Various Functions of the Accusative
§ 158. Accusative of Direct (External) Object .
§ 159. Cognate Accusative (of Internal Object)
1. Accusative of Specification {Synecdoche)
2. Adverbial Accusative
Accusative of Extent of Time or Space
Terminal Accusative (Poetic)
Accusative after N^ and Md .
§160.
§161.
§162.
§163.
Two Accusatives with Verbs signifying
§ 164. To ask, teach, clothe, conceal, deprive, divide, &c. .
§ 165. To do anything to or say anything of a Person .
§ 166. To name, appoint, consider, &c. (Predicate Accusative)
213
213
213-215
215
215
216
216
216
217
217, 218
218
III. Genitive.
Remark. — Various Functions of the Genitive ....
§ 167. Genitive after Nouns (Adnominal) ....
§ 168. Partitive Genitive (specially)
§ 169. 1. Genitive after Verbs signifying to he, become, belong, &c.
2. Partitive Genitive after Verbs signifying to name,
make, &c. . .
§ 170. Partitive Genitive after other Verbs . . .
§ 171. Genitive after Verbs signifying
1. To take hold of, touch, claim, hit, miss, begin, &c. .
2. To taste, smell, hear, remember, forget, desire, spare,
neglect, admire, despise, &c
3. To rule or comtnand . . .
§172. 1. Genitive after Verbs of i^tiZwess and JFa?7i . ' .
2. Accusative and Genitive after Verbs signifying to fill
§ 173. Causal Genitive, —
1. After Verbs expressing Praise, Pity, Anger, Envy, &c.
2. After Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, &c.
3. In Exclamations
218
219, 220
220
221
221
221, 222
222
222, 223
223
222
223, 224
224
224, 225
225
CONTENTS.
XXI
§176.
174. Genitive as Ablative. — Genitive of Separation .
175. 1. ,, „ Genitive after Comparative
, ,, Genitive with Verbs of surpass-
ing, being inferior, &c. . . . .
, ,, Genitive of Source
, ,, Genitive (Poetic) of Agent or
Instrument
§ 177. Genitive after Compound Yerbs . .
§ 178. Genitive of Price or Value
Note. Genitive after &^ios and d^i6w
§ 179. 1. Genitive of Time within which . . . . ,
2. Genitive of Place within which (Poetic) .
§ 180. Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives
§ 181. Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting Posses-
sion, &c
§ 182. Genitive with Adverbs
§ 183. Genitive Absolute (see also § 278, 1) . . . .
225
225, 226
226
226
226
226
227
227
227
227
227, 228
228
229
229
IV. Dative. ^
Eemaek. — Various Functions of the Dative .... 230
§ 184. Dative expressing to or for : —
1. Dative of Indirect Object , 230
2. Dative after certain Intransitive Verbs . . . 230, 231
3. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage .... 231, 232
Note 6. Ethical Dative 232
4. Dative of Possession (with elfil, &c.) .... 232
5. Dative denoting that with respect to which, &c. . 232
§ 185. Dative after Adjectives kindred to preceding Verbs . •. 232
§ 186. Dative of Besemblajice, Union, and Approach . . 233
Note 1. Dative after Verbs signifying to discourse with or
contend with 233
§ 187. Dative after Compound Verbs 233
§ 188. 1. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instrument . 234
Note 2. Dative after xP^'-of^^h W5e . . . . 234
2. Dative of Degree of Difference (with Comparatives) . 234
3. Dative of ^^m< (with Perf. and Plup. Pass.) . . 234
4. Dative of Agent (with Verbal in -rhs or -t^op) . . 235
5. Dative of Accompaniment (sometimes with a6r6s) . 235
§ 189. Dative of Time 235
§ 190. Dative of Place (Poetic) 236
Note 1. Occasional Use in Prose (Names of Attic Demes) 236
XXn CONTENTS.
PREPOSITIONS.
§§ 191, 192. Prepositions with. Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 238-242
§ 193. Prepositions in Composition taking their own Cases . . ^242
ADVERBS.
§ 194. Adverhs qualifying Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs • 243
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
Voices.
§ 195. Active Voice . 243
§ 196. Passive Voice 243
§ 197. Agent after Passive Verbs {virS and Genitive) . . . 244
Note 2. Passive Construction when Active has two Cases 244
§ 198. Cognate Accusative made Subject of Passive . . . 244, 245
§ 199. Middle Voice (three Uses) 245, 246
Tenses.
Tenses of the Indicative.
§ 200. Tenses of the Indicative (Time of each) .... 246-248
§ 201. Primary and Secondary Tenses of Indicative . . 248
Tenses of Dependent Moods.
§ 202. N'ot in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) , 248
1. Distinction between Present and Aorist in this Case 249
2. Perfect not in Indirect Discourse (seldom used) . . 249
3. Future Infinitive not in Indirect Discourse (exceptional) 250
4. Future Optative (used only in Indirect Discourse) . 250
§ 203. Optative and Infinitive in Indirect Discourse . . 250, 251
Note 1. Present Infinitive and Optative includes
Imperfect 251
Note 2. Infinitive after Verbs of Hoping, Promising, &c.
(two Constructions allowed) 251
§ 204. Tenses of the Participle , 252
Gnomic and Iterative Tenses.
§ 205. 1. Gnomic Present, expressing Habit or General Truth . 252
2. Gnomic Aorist „ „ „ „ . 252, 253
3. Gnomic Perfect ,, ,, „ „ , 253
§ 206. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with &v , . . . 253
CONTENTS.
XXlll
The Particle "Av.
'Ay .
207. Two Uses of the Adverb
208. "Av with the Indicative
1. Never with Present or Perfect
2. With Future (chiefly Homeric)
3. With Secondary Tenses (see § 222)
209. "Av with the Subjunctive
210. "Av with the Optative (always in Apodosis)
211. "Ay with the Infinitive and Participle (in Apodosis)
212. Position of &v. — 'Av repeated, or used in Ellipsis
253, 254
254
254
254
254
254, 255
255
255, 256
256
The Moods.
General Statement and Classification.
§213 1. Various Uses of Indicative 256,257
2. Various Uses of Subjunctive 257
3. Various Uses of Optative 258
4. The Imperative 258
6. The Infinitive 258
§ 214. Classification of Constructions of Moods . , . , 259
I. Final and Object Clauses after tva, «s, 6ir«s, H-^.
215. Three Classes of these Clauses
Note 1. Negative Particle in these Clauses
216. Final Clauses (after all the Final Particles) : —
1. With Subjunctive and Optative . . . .
2. With Subjunctive after Secondaiy Tenses
3. With Secondary Tenses of Indicative
217. Object Clauses with Sttws after Verbs of Striving, &c.
Note 4. "Ottws or Sttws fi-^ with Fut. Ind. (elliptically)
218. Object Clauses with /xi^ after Verbs of Fearing, &c.
Note 2. MiJ or Sirus fi-fj used elliptically ,
Note 3. Mi} with Present or Past Tenses of Indicative
260,
259
260
260
, 261
261
261, 262
262
262
262
262, 263
II. Conditional Sentences.
219. 1. Definition of Protasis and Apodosis , , . . 263
2. Use of av (Horn. Ki) in Protasis and Apodosis . . 263
3. Negative Particles in Protasis and Apodosis . . . 263
220. Classification of Conditional Sentences .... 263-267
XXIV CONTENTS.
Four Forms of Ordinary Protasis.
% 221. Present and Past Conditions with simple Indicative . . 267
Note. Future sometimes used in these Conditions . 267
§ 222. Present and Past Conditions with Secondary Tenses of In-
dicative ipLv in Apodosis) 267, 268
Note 1. "Av sometimes omitted in the Apodosis . . 268
Note 2. "ESet, ixPWt &c. with Infin. in Apodosis
(without &v) . 268
§ 223. Future Conditions. — Subjunctive with Uv in Protasis . 269
Note 1. Future Indicative with et in Protasis . . 269
Note 2. Et (without &v or k4) in Protasis (Homeric) . 269
§ 224. Future Conditions. — Optative in Protasis and Apodosis 269, 270
Note. "Xv very rarely omitted here .... 270
Present and Past General Suppositi&ns.
% 225. Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis .... 270
Note 1. Indicative with el (occasionally) . . 270, 271
Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences.
§ 226. 1. Protasis contained in Participle or other "Word . . 271
2. Protasis omitted. — Potential Indie, or Opt. with &v 271, 272
3. Infin. or Partic. in Indirect Discourse forming Apodosis 272, 273
4. Infin. (not in Indirect Discourse) forming Apodosis . 273
§ 227. 1. Protasis and Apodosis of difi'erent Classes . . . 273,274
2. A^ introducing an Apodosis 274
§ 228. Ei after Verbs of JFondering (^au/idfw), &c. . . . 274
III. Belative and Temporal Sentences.
§ 229. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent explained . . 274, 275
§ 230. Relative with Definite Antecedent . . . . 275
§231. Relative with Indefinite Antecedent. — Conditional Relative 275
§ 232. Four Forms of Conditional Relative Sentence (corresponduig
to those of ordinary Protasis, §§ 221-224) . . 275, 276
§ 238. Conditional Relative Sentences in Present and Past General
Suppositions (as in Protasis, § 225) . . . 276, 277
Note 1. Indicative with 6<ttis, for Subj. with 6s Av . 277
§ 234. Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences . . 277
§ 235. Assimilation in Conditional Relative Sentences . . 277, 278
§ 236. Relative Clauses expressing Purpose^ &c. (with Fut. Ind.) 278
CONTENTS. • XXV
Note 1. Subj. and Opt. in this Construction (Homeric) 278
Note 2. 'E^' ^ or ^0' ^e with Future Indicative . . 278
§ 237. "fitrre (sometimes ws) with Indicative .... 279
§ 238. Causal Relative Sentences 279
Temporal Particles signifying Un tilj B efo re that.
§ 239. Constructions after ?ws, ^ore, axp*, &c., until . . 279, 280
§ 240. Upiv with the Finite Moods (see also § 274) . . 280, 281
Note. Uplv ij, irporepov ij, irpbadev ij, used like irpiy . 281
IV. Indirect Discourse.
§ 241. Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions . . . 281
Note. Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse . 281
§ 242. General Principles of Indirect Discourse. — Use of av. —
Negative Particles 281, 282
Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse.
§ 243. Indie, and Opt. after 8tl or ws, and in Indirect Questions 282, 283
Note 1. Pres. Opt. occasionally represents Imperfect 283
§ 244. Subj. or Opt. in Indirect Questions, representing Interroga-
tive Subj. . 284
§ 245. Indie, or Opt. with dv (unchanged) .... 284
§ 246. Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotations . . . 285
Note. "When Infinitive is said to be in Indirect Discourse 285
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences.
% 247. Rule for Dependent Clauses in Indirect Quotation . . 285, 286
Note 1. .One Verb changed to Optative, while another
is unchanged 286
Note 2. When Dependent Aor. Indie, can be changed to
Optative 286
§ 248. Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse, indepen-
dently of the rest of the Sentence. — Four Classes . 287, 288
§ 249. 1. "Ottws used for ws in Indirect Quotation (rare) . , 288
2. Homeric Use of 6 for firi (rare) 288
V. Causal Sentences.
§ 250. Causal Sentences with Indicative .... 288, 289
Note. Optative sometimes used after Past Tenses (see
§248) 289
XXVi COKTENTS.
VI. Expression of a Wish.
§ 251. 1. Optative in "Wishes (with or without eWc, &c.) . . 289
2. Indicative in "Wishes (with ef^e, &c.) , . . 290
Note 1. "QipeXov with Infinitive in Wishes . , , 290
VII. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, Exhortations,
and Prohibitions.
§ 252. Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, &c. . . . 290
§ 253. First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations . . 290, 291
§ 254. Present Imper. or Aor. Subj. in Prohibitions . . . 291
VIII. Subj. like Put. Indie, in Homer. — Interrog. Subj.— Subj. and
Put. Indie, with ov |i.^.
§ 255. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as simple Future , . 291
§256. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt) . . 291
§ 257. Subjunctive and Future Indicative with oiJ /a^ . . , 292
The Infinitive.
§ 258. Infinitive as Verbal Noun ...'... 292
§ 259. Infinitive as Subject (Nom. or Accus.) or Predicate (Nom.) 292
§ 260. Infinitive as Object of a Verb:—
1. Not in Indirect Discourse (chiefly Present and Aorist) . 293
2. In Indirect Discourse (with Time of Tenses preserved) 293, 294
§ 261. Infinitive with Adjectives, Nouns, and Adverbs . . 294
§ 262. 1. Infinitive {with the Article) after a Preposition , , 295
2. Infinitive (with the Article) as Genitive or Dative . 295
§ 263. 1. Infinitive (with or without rod and fi-n) after Verbs of
Hindrance, &c 295
Note. Double Negative /at; o^ with this Infinitive 295, 296
2. Infinitive with rb or rb ii-q (or rh firj ov) after Verbs of
Negative Meaning 296
§ 264. Infinitive with Adjuncts and the Article, as Noun . . 296
§ 265. Infinitive expressing a Purpose 296, 297
§ 266. Infinitive after Cbare or ws 297
§ 267. Infinitive after i<p' $ or eV qn-e , , . . ' 297, 298
§ 268. Absolute Infinitive (generally with us or 8(tov) . . , 298
Note. "Ekwv ehai, willingly, rb vvv elmt, &c. , . 298
§ 269. Infinitive as Imperative . . . . . . . 298
§ 270. Infinitive expressing a Wish (like Optative) . . . 298
CONTENTS. XXVU
§ 271. Infinitive in Laws, Treaties, Proclamations, &c. , 298, 299
§ 272. Infinitive (with or withont t6) expressing Surprise . 299
§ 273. Infinitive in Narration (with Verb of Saying understood) 299
§ 274. Infinitive with irpiv (see also § 240) . . , . , 29^
The Participle.
§ 275. Participle as "Verbal Adjective. — Three Uses . , . 299
§ 276. 1. Participle with a Noun (expressing simple Attribute) . 300
2. Participle with Article = he who or those who with a Verb 300
§ 277. Participle defining the CircuTnstances of an Action : —
1-6. Various Relations denoted by this Participle . 300, 301
Notes. Various Adverbs used with this Participle 301, 302
§ 278. 1. Genitive Absolute (see also § 183) .... 302
2. Accusative Absolute (of Impersonal Verbs) . . 302
§ 279. Participle with Verbs (like Infinitive) : —
1. "With Verbs signifying to begin, cease, repent, &c. , . 303
2. With Verbs signifying to perceive, find, or represent . 303
3. With wepcopdco and e<popd(t}, overlook, &c. . . 803, 304
4. With Xavdduu}, Tvyxo.v(a, and (pddvaj . . , , 304
§ 280. Participle (like Infin.) in Indirect Discourse (see § 246) 304, 305
Note 1. A^X6s or <pavep6s elpn with Participle . . . 305
Note 2. "Sivoida and avYytyvdffKu with a Participle in
Nom. or Dat 806
Verbal Adjectives in -rfos and -t^ov.
§ 281. 1. Personal Construction of Verbal in -rios . , . 305
2. Impersonal Verbal in -riov (or -r^a) , . . 306
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
§ 282. 1. Direct and Indirect Interrogatives .... 306
2. Direct Interrogatives, — *H, S,pa, oi, nr), fiuv . . 306
8. "AXXoTiiJ; or dXXoTt; 307
4. Indirect Questions with et (Homeric ij ot ijk) , , 307
6. Alternative Questions, — lidrepov . . . ^, &c. , . . 307
NEGATIVES.
§ 283. 1, 2. OiJ or fxv with Indie, Subj., Opt, and Imper. . 307, 308
3. Negative with Infinitive , 308
4. 5. Negative with Participles and Adjectives . . 808
"j^xviii CONTENTS.
6. M77 with Infin, after Verbs with Negative Idea (§263) 308
7. Mr? 01) with Infinitive (after Negative Leading Verb) . 309
8. 9. Two or more Negatives in one Clause . , . 309, 310
PART v.— VERSIFICATION.
§ 284. Foot. — Ictus. — Ehythm and Metre. — Arsis and Thesis 311, 312
§ 285. 1. Long and Short Syllables. — Times .... 312
2. Enumeration of Feet 313, 314
3. Place of the Ictus in a Foot . . . . . . 314
4. Anacrusis . 314
§ 286. 1. Eesolution and Contraction . . . . 314, 315
2. Syncope 315
3. Irrational Time . 315
4. Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest 315
5. Syllaba Anceps ........ 315
§ 287. 1. Rhythmical Series and Verse . . . . . 315,316
2. Close of Verse 316
3. Catalexis ,...*... 316
4. Pauses 316
§ 288. 1. Caesura 316
2. Diaeresis 316, 317
§ 289. 1. Verses 317
2. Monometers, Dimeters, &c. ..... . 317
3. Rising and Falling Rhythms 317
4. Systems and Strophes 318
§§ 290, 291. Trochaic Rhythms 318, 319
§§ 292, 293. Iambic Rhythms 319, 320
§§ 294, 295. Dactylic Rhythms 321, 322
§§ 296, 297. Anapaestic Rhythms . . . . . 322, 323
§ 298. Anapaestic Systems 323
Note. Iambic and Trochaic Systems .... 323
§•§ 299, 300. Logaoedic Rhythms 323-325
§ 301. Rhythms with Feet of Five or Six Times . . 325, 326
§ 302. Dochmiacs 326
APPENDIX.
Catalogue of Verbs . . 329-360
Indexes 361-
TABLE OF PARALLEL REFERENCES.
This includes all cases in which references to the former edition are affected by
changes in numbering made in the new edition; except those in §§ 88-132 and
Part v., which are too much changed to malce any such comparison possible.
Old Edition.
§ 3 (paragraph 2).
§ 4, 1, Note.
§ 7 (par. 2).
§ 9, 4, Note.
§ 13, 2.
§ 16, 1, Note.
§ 16, 5 (par. 2), &
Notes 1 & 2.
§ 16, 5, N. 3.
§ 19, 1, Note.
§ 25, 3, Note.
§ 29, Note.
§ 37, 2, N. 2.
§ 42, 2, Note.
§ 47, Note.
§ 53, 2, N. 1.
§ 54 (par. 2).
§ 56, 1, Note.
§ 59, 1 (par. 2).
§ 59, 2.
§ 59, 3.
§ 59, 4.
§70 (end).
§ 70, Note.
§ 72, 1 (last line).
§ 72, 2 (end).
§ 77, 2, N. 4 (end).
§79, 1, N.2 (last
4 par.).
§ 82, Note.
New Edition.
§ 3, Note.
§ 4, 1, Note 1.
§ 7, Note.
§ 9, 4, Notes 2 & 1.
§ 13, 2 & 3
§ 16, 1, N. 2.
§ 16, 6, and Notes 1
&2.
§ 16, 6, Notes 3 & 4.
§ 19, 1, Note 1.
§ 25, 3, Notes 1, 2, 3.
§ 29, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 37, 2, Notes 2 & 3.
§ 42, 2, Note 1.
Omitted.
Omitted.
§ 54, Note.
§ 56, Note.
§ 59, 2.
§ 53, 1, N. 3.
§ 53, 3, N. 4.
§ 52, 2, N. 4.
§ 70, N. 1.
§ 70, N. 2.
§ 72, 1, Note.
§ 72, 2, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 77, 2, N. 5.
§ 79, 1, Notes 3-6.
§ 82, Notes 1 «& 2.
§ 134, 2 (par. 2).
§ 141, N. 6 (par. 2).
§ 142, 1 (par. 3).
§ 142, 2, N. 5.
§ 142, 4, N. 1 & 2.
§ 145, 1 (par. 3).
§ 159, (par. 3).
§ 163, Note.
§ 166, N. 1.
§ 173, 1 (par. 3).
§ 134, 3.
§ 141, N. 7.
§ 142, 1, Note (end).
§ 142, 2, N. 6.
§ 142, 4, Notes 5 & 6.
§ 145, 1, Note.
§ 159, Remarlc.
§ 163, Notes 1 & 2.
Included in § 164.
§ 173, 1, N. 1.
Old Edition.
§ 173, 1, Note.
§ 180, 2, N. 1.
§ 184, 3, N. 5.
§ 184, 3, N. 6.
§ 189, Note.
§ 190, Note.
§ 191, 1, 2, 3.
§ 192, 1-6.
§ 195, Note.
§ 201 (par. 5).
§ 206 (par. 3).
§ 207, 2 (par. 3).
§ 210 (par. 2).
§ 213, 1 (par. 4).
§ 219, 3 (par 2).
§ 220 (last par.).
§ 223 (par. 3).
§ 224, Note.
§ 225 (par. 3).
§225 (par. 4). •
§ 226, 2 (par. 3).
§ 226, 3.
§ 226, 3, Note.
§ 228 (par. 3).
§ 232, 3 (par. 3).
§ 235, Note.
§ 239, 2, Note.
§ 242, 1 (par. 3).
§ 242, 3 (par. 2).
§ 244 (par. 3).
§251, 2, N. 1
(par. 2).
§ 260, 1 (par. 3).
§261,1, Note.
§261, 2 (par. 3).
§263, 2 (par 3).
§ 269 (last clause).
§ 279, 1.
§ 279, 2 & Note.
§ 283, 8 (par. 2).
§ 283, Note.
Ifew Edition.
§ 173, 1, N. 2.
§ 180, 1, Notes 1 & J
§ 184, 3, N. 6.
§ 184, 3, N. 5.
§ 189, Notes 1 «& 2.
§ 190, Notes 1 «& 2.
§ 192, 1, 2, 3.
§ 191, 1.-VI.
§ 195, Notes 1 & 2.
§ 201, Rem.
§ 206, Rem.
§ 207, 2, R«m.
§ 210, Note.
§ 213, 1, Rem.
§ 219, 3, Note.
§ 220, Rem. 1.
§ 223, Rem.
§ 224, N. 1.
§ 225, Rem.
§ 225, N. 2.
§ 226, 2, N. 1.
§ 226, 3 «& 4.
§ 226, 4, N. 1.
§ 228, Note.
§ 232, 3, N.
§ 235, 2.
§ 239, 2, N. 1.
§ 242, 1, Note.
§ 242, 3, Note.
§ 244, N. 2.
§ 251, 2, N. 2.
§ 260, 1, N. 1.
§ 261, 1, N. I.
§ 261, 2, Rem.
§ 263, 2, Note.
§ 269, Note.
§ 279, 1 & 2.
§ 279, 4 & Note.
§ 28.3, 9.
§ 283, 1, Note.
GREEK GRAMMAR.
INTRODUCTION,
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS.
The Greek language is the language spoken by the Greek
race. In the historic period, the people of this race called
themselves by the name Hellenes^ and their language Hellenic.
We call them Greeks^ from the Roman name Graeci. Thfey
were divided into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians. The
Aeolians inhabited Aeolia (in Asia), Lesbos, Boeotia, and
Thessaly ; the Dorians inhabited Peloponnesus, Doris, Crete,
some cities of Caria (in Asia), with the neighboring islands,
Southern Italy,, and a large part of Sicily ; the lonians in-
habited Ionia (in Asia), Attica, many islands in the Aegean
Sea, and some other places.
In the early times of which the Homeric poems are a record
(before 850 B.C.), there was no such division of the whole
Greek race into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians as that which
was recognized in historic times ; nor was there any common
name of the whole race, like the later name of Hellenes.
The Homeric Hellenes were a small tribe in South-eastern
Thessaly, of which Achilles was king ; and the Greeks in
general were called by Homer Achaeans, Argives, or
Danaans.
2 INTRODUCTION.
The dialects of the Aeolians and the Dorians are known as
the Aeolic and Doric dialects. In the language of the lonians
we must distinguish the Old Ionic, the New Ionic, and the
Attic dialects. The Old Ionic o r E]3i o is the language of
the Homeric poems, the oldest Greek literature. The New
Ionic was the language of Ionia in the fifth century B.C., as
it appears in Herodotus and Hippocrates. The Attic was
the language of Athens during her period of literary eminence
(from about 500 to 300 b.c.).^
The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form
of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of
Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated,
for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of
the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic
has no claim on the ground of age or primitive forms, in
respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects.
The literary and political importance of Athens caused her
dialect gradually to supplant the others wherever Greek was
spoken ; but, in this very extension to regions widely sepa-
rated, the Attic dialect itself was not a little modified by
various local influences, and lost some of its early purity.
The universal Greek language which thus arose is called the
Common Dialect. This begins with the Alexandrian period,
the time of the literary eminence of Alexandria in Egj^t,
which dates from the accession of Ptolemy II. in 285 b.c.
The name Hellenistic is given to that form of the Common
Dialect which was used by the Jews of Alexandria who made
1 The name Ionic includes both the Old and the New Ionic, but not tlie
Attic. When the Old and the New Ionic are to be distinguished in tlie
present work, Ep. (for Epic) or Horn, (for Homeric) is used for the former,
and Hdt. or Herod. (Herodotus) for the latter.
INTRODUCTION. 3
the Septuagint version of the Old Testament (283-135 b.c.)
and by the writers of the New Testament, all of whom were
Hellenists (i.e. foreigners who spoke Greek) . The language
which has been spoken by the Greeks during the last seven
centuries is called Modern Greek or Romaic.
The Greek is descended from the same original language
with the Indian (i.e. Sanskrit), Persian, German, Slavonic,
Celtic, and Italian languages, which together form the Indo-
European (sometimes called the Aryan) family of languages.
Greek is most closely connected with the Italian languages
(including Latin) , to which it bears a relation similar to the
still closer relation between French and Spanish or Italian.
This relation accounts for the striking analogies between
Greek and Latin, which appear in both roots and termina-
tions ; and also for the less obvious analogies between Greek
and the German element in English, which are seen in a few
words like me, is, know, &c.
PART
'i^IFOV^\^^
LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS.
THE ALPHABET.
1.
The Greek alphabet
bas twenty-
■four letters ; —
Forr
a.
Equivalent.
Name.
A
a
a
''AX<i>a
Alpha
B
b
Brjra
Beta
r
y
g
rdfifia
Gamma /
A
8
d
Aekra
Delta
E
€
e (^shorf)
*E -y^Ikov
Epsilon
Z
r
z
Zr)Ta
Zeta
H
V
e (long)
"Hra
Eta
e
e^
th
Grjra
Theta
I
c
i
^Icora
Iota
K
K
k or hard c
KaiTira
Kappa
A
\
1
Adfi^Ba
Lambda
M
/*
m
Mv
Mu
N
V
n
Nv
m
H
f
X
m
Xi
o (short)
*0 fUKpOV
Omicron
n
TT
P
m
Pi
p
P
r
'p&
Rho
X
G 9
s
Styfia
Sigma
T
T
t
Tav
Tau
T
V
u or y
'r yjrlXdv
Upsilon
$
^
pb
^l '
Phi
X
X
kb
XI
Chi
w
^
ps
Wl
Psi
n
Q)
(long)
"il ixerfa
Omega
Remark. The Greek v was represented by the Latin y, and was prob-
ably pronounced somewhat like the French u or the German ti. For
remarks on Pronunciation see the Preface.
6 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 2.
Note 1. At the end of a word the form s is used, elsewhere the
form 0-; thus, avo-Taa-is.
Note 2. Two obsolete letters — Vau or Digamma (F or g) equivalent
to V or W, and Koppa ( <p ), equivalent to Q — and also the character
San(p)), a form of Sigma, are used as numerals (§ 76), The first of these
had not ejitirely disappeared in pronunciation when the Homeric poems
were composed, and the metre -of many verses in these is explained only
by admitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are
explained only on the supposition that F has been omitted: see § 53, 3,
N. 1; §54, N.; §108, XL, 2.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
§ 2. The vowels are a, e, 77, t, 0, ew, and v. Of these,
6 and are always short ; 77 and « are always long ; a, 4,
and V are sometimes short and sometimes long, whence
they are called doubtful vowels.
Note. A, e, 77, o, and « from their pronunciation are called open
vowels ; i and v are called close vowels.
§ 3. The diphthongs (^Bl-<f)6oyyocy double sounds^ are
at, av, 6L, 6u, oij ov, rjv, vl, a, y, (p. These are formed by
the union of an open vowel with a close one ; except vi,
which is formed of the two close vowels. The union of
a long vowel (a, 77, &>) with c forms the (so called) im-
proper diphthongs a, rj, «. The Ionic dialect has also a
diphthong wu.
Note. In a, 77, a, the t is now written below the first vowel, and
is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line ;
as in THI KQMQIAIAI, r^ Kcona^ia, and in '^Qix^to, cox^ro. This i
was written as an ordinary letter as long as it was pronounced,
that is, until the first century B.C.
BREATHINGS.
§ 4. 1. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of
a Avord has either the rovgh breathing (') or the smooth
breathing ('). The rough breathing shows that the
vowel is aspirated^ i.e. that it is preceded by the sound
§ 6.] CONSONANTS. 7
of Ji ; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not
aspirated. Thus opwvy seeing^ is pronounced horon ; but
opiaVi of mountains^ is pronounced or on.
Note 1. A diphtliong takes the breathing (like the accent) upon
its second vowel. But a, »;, and a take it upon the first vowel, even
when the i is written in the line. Thus oi^cTai, evcbpalvco, Ai/lkoi/;
but wx^ro or "nLxeTo, aSw or "Aibco, ydeiv or "HiSeiv. On the other
hand, the breathing of didios CAidios) shows that a and i do not
form a diphthong.
•
Note 2. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. When this
character was taken to denote long e (which once was not distinguished
from e), half of it I was used for the rough breathing ; and afterwards the
other half i was used for the smaoth breathing. From- these fragments
came the later signs ' and '.
2. The consonant p is generally written p at the begin-
ning of a word. In the middle of a word pp is often
written pp. Thus prjrcop (rhetor), orator ; dpp7}To<iy urir
speakahle ; Hvppo^, Pyrrhus Qp = rrk).
CONSONANTS.
§ 5. 1. The consonants are divided into
labials, tt, ^, <^, /x,j
palatals, k, y, ^,
Unguals, t, 8, 0, or, X, v, p.
2. The double consonants are ^, i/a, t,. H is composed of k
and o- ; i/^, of tt and a-. Z generally arises from a combination
of 6 with a soft s sound (originally dj) ; hence it has the
effect of two consonants in lengthening a preceding vowel
(§19,2).
§ 6. By another classification, the consonants are divided
into semivowels and mutes.
1 . The semivowels are X, /*, v, p, and o- ; of which the first
four are called liquids, and o- is called a sibilant. M and v
8 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 7.
are also called nasals ; to which must be added y before k,
y, x> or ^, where it has the sound of v, as in ayKvpa (ancora) ,
anchor.
2. The mutes are of three orders ; —
smooth mutes, tt, k, t,
middle mutes, y8, y, 8,
row^A mutes, <^, x> 0.
These again correspond in the folio wihg classes : —
labial mutes, tt, )8, 0,
palatal mutes, k, y, x>
lingual mutes, t, S, ^.
Note. Mutes of the same ord^r are called co-ordinate ; those of
the same class are called cognate. The smooth and rough mutes,
with 0-, I, and >//-, are called surd (hushed sounds) ; the other con-
sonants and the vowels are called sonant.
§ 7. The only consonants which can stand at the end of a
Greek word are v, p, and s. If others are left at the end in
forming words (cf. § 46, 1), they are dropped.
Note. Tiie only exceptions are found in the proclitics (§ 29)
tK and ovK (or ov^), which have other forms, e^ and ou. Final |
and >/r (ko- and tto-) are no exceptions.
EUPHONY OF VOWELS.
COLLISION OF VOWELS. HIATUS.
§ 8. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a diph-
thong was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In the
middle of a word this could be avoided by contraction (§9).
Between two words — where it is called hiatus, and was
especially offensive — it could be avoided by crasis (§ 11), by
elision (§ 12), or by adding a movable consonant (§ 13) to the
former word.
CONTRACTION OF VOWELS.
§ 9. Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong,
are often united by contraction in a single long vowel or a
§9.] EUPHONY OF VOWELS. ^
diphthong ; as ^iXeco, <I>l\w ; <}>l\€€, </)iAet ; rifxae, rt/xa. It
seldom takes place unless the former vowel is open (§ 2,
Note).
The regular use of contraction is one of the characteristics
of the Attic dialect. It follows these general principles : —
1. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (§3) simply
unite in one syllable ; as ret^a, t€l^€l ; yipdi, yipai ; pai(rTo<s,
paCTTOS.
2. If one of the vowels is o or w, they are contracted into w.
But €0, oo, and o€ give ov. Thus S-qXoyjre, S-qXCire ; (fxXioxn,
<f>iX5)(rL ; TLfidofJiev, rt/xw/xcv ; rifjidiafjievy t(,/x(u/acv ; SrjXoia, 8rjX,(o ; —
but yei'eos, yevovs ; ttAoos, irXovs ; voc, vov.
Note. In contract adjectives in oos (§ 65) o is dropped before a
and T]y M and 3 ; as dTrXoo, drrXa ; dTrXojy, d^rX^ ; dTrXoat, dTrXat ; dTrXd^;,
drrXj}.
3. If the two vowels are a and c (or rj), the first vowel
sound prevails, and we have d or rj. Aa gives d, €>/ or rje gives
1; ; but €€ gives «. Thus, cri/Aac, ert/xa ; rt/Aai^c, Tt/xdre ; rci^^ctx,
rei^^ ; /xvaa, /Avd ; ^tXei/rc, ^tX^rc ; TiftijcvTOS, Tt/x^vros ; €<^tXcc,
c^tXct.
Note. In the first and second declensions, ca becomes 5 in the
dual and plural, and in all numbers after a vowel or p (§§ 38, 65) ;
it also becomes d in the third declension whenever it follows a
vowel (§52, 2, N. 2; § 53, 3, N. 3). In the dual of the third
declension ee sometimes becomes ?; (§ 52, 2; § 53, 1, N. 2). In the
accusative plural of the third declension eds generally becomes eis
(§ 51, 2).
4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong
beginning with the same vowel. Further, c is always ab-
sorbed before 01, and in contract nouns and adjectives also
before at. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diph-
thong is contracted with the Jirst vowel of the diphthong, and
the second vowel disappears unless it can be retained as iota
subscript (§ 3) in a, 17, or w. Thus, /avaat, /xvat ; /xma, fjiva.;
<^tX€€t, <^tXet ; (fiiXe^i <^t^0 j S-qXooiy 8rj\oL ; voo), vw ; 8rjX6ov, SrjXov ;
<^iXeot, <f>iko2 ; )(pv(r€OLj xP^^-ot ; ^(pvo-cat, xpva-ai (cf. aTrXoat,
10 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§10.
aTrXat) ; Ttjaact, Tifxa. ; Tifxay, Tijxa ; TL/xdoL, Ttuw ; Ttfxdov, rt/xco ;
cjiiXeov, (faXov ', Aveat, Xvrj (v. Note 1) ; XvrjaL, Xvy ', fiefjivrjoiOy
jjLe/MV<^o ; TrAttKoets, 7rXaKo9s (v. N. 2).
Note 1. In the second person singular of the passive and middle,
eai (for ecrai) gives a form in et as well as that in tj ; as Xveai, Xvrj
or Xvei. (See § 113, 2, N. 1.)
Note 2. In verbs in do), oct and o?/ give ot; as brjXoeis, driXols'^
brjXoT}, drfXol (cf. aTrXorj, aTrXfj, 2, Note). Infinitives in deiv and dfti'
lose I in the contracted form; as rifxaeivy Tifxau; drjXoeiv, 8r)\ovp (§ 98,
N. 5).
5. The close vowels (t and v) are contracted with a follow-
ing vowel in some forms of nouns in tg and vs of the third
declension. (See § 53, 1, N. 3 ; § 53, 2.)
Remark. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declen-
sion, contraction is confined to certain cases ; see §§ 53, 67. For exceptions
in the contraction of verbs see § 98, Notes 1, 2, 3.
STNIZESIS.
§ 10. In poetry, two successive vowels, not forming a
diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the sake
of the metre, without being contracted. This is called si/ni-
zesis (a-vvilrjo-L^, settling together). Thus, ^cot may make but
one syllable in poetry ; a-T^Oea or -xpva-iio may make but two.
CRASIS AND ELISION.
§11.-1. A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word is often
contracted with one at the beginning of the following word.
This is called crasis (Kpdcns, mixture). The coronis (') is
placed over the contracted S3-Ilable. The first of the two
words is generally an article, a relative pronoun, or KaL
Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction (§9), but
with these modifications : —
{a.) A diphthong at the end of th^ first word drops its last
vowel before crasis takes place.
§12.] CRASIS AKD ELISION. . 11
(b) The article drops its final vowel or diphthong in crasis
before a. The particle roc drops ot before a ; and kul drops
at before rjy av, evj ovj and the words €i, cts, ot, at.
2. The following are examples of crasis : —
To ovofiOf ToxSvofia'^ to, ayadd, raya^a; ro evavrlov, rovvavriov'^ 6 e/c,
ovk; 6 eVt, ov7ri\ to Ifiariov, Bolfidriov (§ 17, 1); a av, av'^ koL av, Kiivj
Koi dra, mra'^ — 6 dvr)p, dvrjp; oi dbeXcfiOL, ddeX(Poi'^ ra dv8pi, rdvdpi'^
TO avro, TavTO ; tov avTov, tovtov 5 — rot dv^ tov (^p.evToi dv, fxevTav) ;
rot dpay Tapa] — kol uvtos, kuvtos', koL avTrj, ;(avr7/ (§ 17, 1); Kai et,
Kel ; Koi ov, Kov \ KOL oi, xol ? KOL at, ■)(al' So €yo> oiSa, eycoda | Si duBpcoTrCj
a>v6p(OTr€ I Tjj iirap^y Trjirapfj j 7rpoex^^> irpov^oiv.
Note 1. K the first word is an article or relative with the rough
breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable,
taking the place of the coronis ; as in dv, dvrjp.
ISToTE 2. In crasis, erepos takes the form dreposf —whence Barepovy
BaTepcOykc. (§11, 1, &; §17,1.)
Note 3. Crasis, like contraction (§ 10), may be left to pronun-
ciation in poetry. Thus, p.r] ov makes one syllable in poetry; so p.r)
eldevaiy ijrel ov.
Note 4. A short vowel at the beginning of a word is sometimes
dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong. This is called aphaeresis
{dtpaipea-iSy taking off^. Thus, /x?) 'yco for pJi] eyco; ttoO Vrij/ for ttoO
IdTiv 5 eycb '(fidvTjv for iya> €<pdvr)v.
Note 5. Crasis is much more common in poetry than in prose.
§ 12. 1. A short final vowel may be dropped when the
next word begins with a vowel. This is called elision. An
apostrophe ( ' ) marks the omission. jE.g.
At e'/xoO for 8id ip.ov 5 ai/r' iKeivqs for avri eKcivqs '•, \iyoip dv for Xe-
yot/xt dv ; aXX' €vBvs for dKkd evBvs , eV dvBpoiira for eVi dvBpaira. So
€<p^ €Tep(o] vvxff okqv for vvKTa o\t]v (§ 17, 1; 16, 1).
2. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it comes
before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here no apos-
trophe is used. U.g.
'ATT-atreo) ((itto and aiTeco), 8i-e^aXov (8id and c/3aXor). So d(j)-aip€<o
(•Itto and alp^coy § 17, 1) ; 8ex-VH-^P^^ (St/ca and r^p^pa).
12 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§13.
Note 1. The poets sometimes elide at in the verbal endings fiai,
<rai, raij and ardat. So oi in ot/ioi, and rarely in fioi.
Note 2. The prepositions yrfpi and Trpo, the conjunction on, that,
and datives in t of the third declension, are not elided in Attic
Greek. The form or stands for ore, when.
Note 3. The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel even before a con-
sonant. Thus in Homer we find dp, &v, kolt, and irdp, for &pa, dvd, Hard,
and irapd. In composition, Kdr assimilates its t to a following consonant
and drops it before two consonants; as /cd/3^a\e and KdKrave, for Kari^aXe
and Kari^KTave ; — but Kardaveiv for Karadaveiv (§ 15, 1).
Note 4. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers
(as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use.
I • MOVABLE CONSONANTS.
§ 13. 1. Most words ending in o-t, and all verbs of the
third person ending in c, add v when the next word begins
with a vowel. This is called v movable. E.g.
Haari hlhaxn TavTa\ but Traaiv edaK^v eKelva. So bldaxri /xoi; but
bldaxnv efioi.
f
Note 1. *Eoti takes p movable, like third persons in o-i. The
Epic Ke (for av) adds v before a vowel. The enclitic vvv has an
Epic form vv. Many adverbs in -Sep (as TrpoaOep) have poetic forms
in -de.
Note 2. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of
a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in
poetry, to make position (§ 19, 2).
2. Ov, not, becomes ovk before a smooth vowel, and ov;^
before a rough vowel ; as ovk avrds, oix ovtos. Mi} inserts k
in firjK-iri, no longer, (like ovK-ert) .
*EK,from, becomes ii (cks) before a vowel; as e/c TrdAews,
but €^ aOTCOS.
3. OvTW9, thus, and some other words may drop s before a
consonant ; as ovtws ixu, ovtu) 8ok€i.
16.] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 13
METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE.
§ 14. 1. Metathesis is the transposition of two letters in a
word ; as in Kparos and KdpTo<s, strength ; Odpcros and 6pd(ros,
courage. (See § 109, 7, a.)
2. Syncope is the omission of a vowel from the middle of a
word ; as in Trarepos, irarpos (§ 57) ; 7m}(ro/x,at for ireTrjaofxaL
(§ 109, 7, i).
Note 1. When p. is brought before p or X by syncope or meta-
thesis, it is strengthened by inserting ^; as pea-rjp^pla, midday, for
p€(TTjp(^e)pia (/LtcVoy . and rjpepa)', /xe'/i/SXeoKO, Epic perfect of /3Xo)o-Kco,
go, from stem poX-, pXo-, (/iXw-, § 109, 1), pe-pXa-Ka, pe-p^Xm-Ko.
At the beginning of a word such a p, is dropped before ^ ; as in
^poTos, mortal, from stem pop-, ppo- (cf. Lat. morior, die), p^po-ros,
^poTos; so /3XiTra>, ^aA:e honey, from stem peXtr- of peXt, honey (cf.
Latin me^), by syncope pXir-, p/3Xir-, /3Xir-, ^Xltt<o (§ 108, IV.).
Note 2. So 5 is inserted after p in the oblique cases of dvrjp, man
(§ 57, 2), when the v is brought by syncope before p; as dvdpos for
dvepos, dv-pos.
EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS.
§ 15. 1. A rough consonant (§ 6, 2) is never doubled;
but 7r<^, Kx, and tO are always written for </></>, )(x, and 66.
Thus ^a7r<f>(x)f BaK;(09, Kar6av€tv, not %a<ji<^oi, Ba;)(;(09, Ka66av€LV
(§ 12, N. 3). So in Latin, Sappho^ Bacchus.
2. Initial p is doubled when a vowel precedes it in forming
a compound word ; as in dvappLTrrw (dvd and piTrrw) . So
after the syllabic augment ; as in tppi-n-Tov (imperfect of pltttw) .
But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in €vpoo<;, cvpovs.
§ 16. The following rules apply chiefly to euphonic
changes made in the final consonant of a stem in adding the
endings, especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of
verbs : —
14 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§16.
1. Before a lingual mute (t, S, ^), a labial or palatal mute
must be of the same order (§ 6, Note), and another lingual
must be changed to o-. E.g.
TeVpiTJTat (for Terpi^-rai), dedcKrai (for SfSe;(-rat), TrXexOrjvat (for
TrXeK-drjvai), eXetCpOrjv (ioT i\€i.7r-dr)v), ypd^drjv (for ypa(f>-8r]v). IleTreicr-
TttL (TTCTTCLO-Tai), €7reLcrdr}P (JiveiO-Orjv), fjCTTai, (^d-Tai), I'oTe (Id-re^.
IsToTE 1. 'Ek, /rom, in composition retains k unchanged; as in
Note 2. No combinations of different mutes, except those here
included and those mentioned in § 15, 1, are allowed in Greek.
When any such arise, the first mute is dropped; as in TreVetKa (for
TreTreiO-Ka). When y stands before k or ;(, as in o-vy-xeo) {(xvv and
j^eo)), it is not a mute but a nasal (§ 6, 1).
2. No mute can stand before o- except tt and k (in \p and ^) .
B and <^ become ir before o- ; y and x become k ; t, 8, and d
are dropped. E.g.
Tpiyjroi (for rpL^-o-ai), ypdyjra) (for ypa(j)-cra)), Xe^co (for Xey-cro))
VTfiVo) (for Tret^-crco), acrco (for aS-crco), croDp-aai (for cro)p.ar-ai), eXTri'crt
(for iknid-o-i). So (i)\€\//> (tor (fiXef3-s), iXiris (for ep^TrtS-s), w^ (for
i/vxr-s). See examples under § 46, 2.
3. Before /x, a labial mute (tt, /3, <f)) becomes /x; a palatal
mute (k, x) becomes y ; and a lingual mute (r, 8, 0) becomes
AeXeLfifiai (for XeXet7r-/>iai), Terptfifxai (for Terpi^-p-ai), yiypappai
(for y€ypa(f)-ixaL), TreVXey/xat (for 7re7rXeK-/xat), Terevyfiai (forVeTev^-
/xai), ^(T/xai (for rjd-fiai), Treneia-fJiai (for 7re7rei^-/xat).
Note. When yy^t or /i/i^a would thus arise, they are shortened to y/A or
)it;ti ; as eX^yxw, eXi^Xey-fiai, (for ^\7?Xeyx-yu,ai, iXTjXeyy-fiat) ; KdfnrTw, KiKafi-
fiat (for K€Ka/jiTr-/j,ai, KeKafXfi-fiat) ; tt^/attw, ir^Trefifxai (for TreTrefitr-fiai, irerrefiiX'
fmc). (See § 97, N. 2.)
'Ek here also remains unchanged, as in iK-fiavddpca.
■ 4. In passive and middle endings, o- is dropped between
two consonants. -£^.^.
AeXft^^e (for XeXciTT-cr^f, § 16, 1), yeypa<^6e (for yeypac^-a^e),
y€ypd<p6ai (for yeypa(^-a-6ai), 7recf)dvdaL (for 7re(pav-adai).
Note. In the verbal endings o-at and o-o, o- is often dropped after
a vowel; as in Xve-aai, Xveai, Xvjj, or Xvet (§ 9, 4, N. 1). Stems in
§16.] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. 15
f o- of the third declension also drop o- before a vowel or another <r.
(See § 52, 1, Note.)
5. Before a labial mute (tt, ^, <f>) v becomes jw, ; before a
palatal mute (k, y, -^ it becomes y (§ 6, 1). ^.^.
'EftTriTrra) (for eV-7ri7rrco), avfi^aLVOi (for avv-^aivo)), efxcfyavfjs (for
€P-<Pavrjs). 2vyx^(i> (for o-uv-^ew), avyyevrjs (for avv-yevrjs) .
6. Before another liquid v is changed to that liquid ; before
o- it is generally dropped and the preceding vowel is length-
ened (e to ct, o to ov) . J5J.^.
'EXXftTTCo (for eV-XetTTQ)) e/x/xei/o) (for €i/-fX€Vco), crvppeai (for (rvv-peco).
MeXds {for fxeXav-s), els (for eV-y), Xvovai (for Xuo-vcn, § 112, 2, Note).
So eo-7r6io--/xai (from o-7reVSco) for ecnrevd-fiai, icnreva-fiat (§ 16, 3).
Note 1. The combinations irr, i/S, v^, are often dropped together
before a (§ 16, 2 and 6), and the preceding vowel is lengthened, as
above (§ 16, 6) ; as vrao-i (for iravT-ai), yiyds (for ytyavrs), Xeovcrt
(for XfovT-cri), TiQelcri (dat. plur. for Tidevr-a-i), rideis (for TiBevr-s),
dovs (for dovT-i), o-Treio-co (for o-Trei/S-o-o), Xvovaa (for Xuoi/r-o-a),
Xv^eio-a (for XvBevr-ara) , Trdaa (for Trai^-tra).
Note 2. N standing alone before on of the dative plural is
dropped without lengthening the vowel; as daifioa-i (ioi daiixov-a-i).
Compare ndai (for Travr-ai), N. 1.
So j/r in adjectives in eis, but never in participles; as xaptfo"i (for
)(api€VT-(Ti) ; but TiOela-i, as given above.
Note 3. The preposition ev is not changed before o-, p, or f.
2vv becomes aver- before cr and a vowel, but o-u- before cr and a con-
sonant or before ^. Thus, cVpaTrro), avao-iTos, av^vyos.
NoTB 4. Some verbs in i/w change i/ to o- before fiai in the perfect
middle (§ 109, 6, Note) as (f)alv(o, 7re(f)aa-fjiai (for 7r€<pav-p.ai) ; and
the V reappears and is retained before crai in the second person, as in
7r€<pav-a-ai. (See § 97, 4, with N. 2.)
7. The following changes occur when t, representing an
original j of the root ja (pronounced ya), follows the final
consonant of a stem.
(a) Palatals (k, y, x) and rarely other mutes with such an C be-
come aa (later Attic tt) ; as (fyvXaaa-co (stem (jivXaK-) for (jyvXaK-i-co ;
riao-cov, worse, for tjk-i-cov (§ 73) ; rdo-a-co (ray-), for Tay-t-ca; iXdaacov,
less, for eXa;(;-i-a)j^ (comp. of piKpos, § 73) ; Tapdacr-ai (rapax-) > for
Tapa;(-i-a); Kopvcra-co {Kopvd-), for Kopvd-L-oa.
(b) A (sometimes y or yy) with i forms ^; as (^pd^-a (cf)pab-), for
<f)pa8-i-a}', Kopl^-oa {Kop-ib-), for ko/u.iS-i-(b ; /cpd^-o) (jcpay-) , for /cpay-i-co;
fit^coi' (Ion.) or fiei^av (comp. of fieyas, great), for fieyi-av (§ 73).
16 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§ 17.
(c) A with I forms XX; as fiSXkov, more (comp. of fidK-a), for
liaX-i-ov', oTeXX-o) (oreX-), for crreX-t-w; aXKo-fiai (dX-), Zeop, for
dX-i-o/xai (cf. Lat. salio)] aXKos, other, for dX-i-os (ct Lat. alius).
(d) N and o with t undergo metathesis (§ 14, 1), and i is then
contracted with the preceding vowel ; as (paiv-co (^av-), for ^av-t-oi
(cf . Lat. fug-i-o from stem fug.) ; reiv-o) (rev-), for T€P-L-a> ; d^eivav
(a/u.ei/-), better, for a/xej^-i-a)!/ ; x^'^P^^ (stem x^P~)» "^orse, for x^p-t-cov
(§73); Kei-pco (xfp-), for Kep-i-oj; KpiW (/cpiv-), for Kptv-L-co (ti be-
coming i) dfivpo) (afjLvv-), for a/ivi/-i-a); (riJpo) for (rvp-i-o) (u't becoming
v). So fieXaLva (fem. of {xeXas, black, stem p-eXav-) for fifXav-i-a
(§67); croDTeipa (fem. of acoTrjp, saving, saviour, stem, acorep-), tor
aoyrep-i-a.
§ 17. 1. When a smooth mute (tt, k, t) is brought before
a rough vowel (either by elision or in forming a compound
word) , it is itself made rough. B.g,
*A(f)iT]pLi (for dTr-lrjfii), Kadaipeo) (for Kar-aipeo)), a<^' Siv (for otto av),
vvxff oXtjv (for vvKTa oXr)v, § 12, 1 ; §16,1).
So in crasis, where the rough breathing may affect even a conso-
nant not immediately preceding it. (See examples in § 11, 2.)
Note. The Ionic dialect does not observe this principle, but has
(for example) an'' ov, dnir)p.L (from dno and tqp.i).
2. In reduplications (§101, 1) an initial rough mute is
always made smooth, to avoid two rough consonants in suc-
cessive syllables. E.g.
Ile(f)vKa (for (p€(f)vKa) , perfect of ^vo) ; Kexrjva (for x^X*/"") ' P^rf'
of xao-Kco ; T€0r]Xa (for BedrjXa) , perf . of 6aKXa>. So in tl-Oijixi (for'
ei-er]fii), § 121, 3.
Note. A similar change takes place in a few verbs which origi-
nally had two rough consonants in the stem ; as rpecfxo (stem Tpe0-
for 6pi(\>-), nourish, fut. dpe-^^oa, aor. pass. Wpecftdrjv; rpexo (jpfX' ^'^^
6p€X-)i ^"^' f^^- Ope^ofiai; erdcfirfv, from ddnrco (racf)- for da(})-), bury;
see also OpvuTco, rv^co, and stem (jdan-), in the Catalogue of Verbs.
So in eTvdrjv (for iOvBrjv) from Ovoi, and fTeOrjv (for eOeOrjv) from
rlBrifii. So in Bpi^, hair, gen. rpixos (stem rpt^- for dpix') ; and in
raxv9, swift, comparative dda-a-oiv for dax-ifov, § 16, 7, a). Here the first
aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost. See § 110, VI. N. 3.
3. The ending 6l of the first aorist imperative passive be-
comes Tt after Or]- of the tense stem (§ 116, 3) ; as XvOtjtl (for
kvOrj-dt) , (jidvOrp-L (for (fiavO-q-OL) ; but <l>d\rq-6i.
§19.] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLE^^ 17
SYLLABLES.
§ 18. 1. A Greek word has as many syllables
has separate vowels or diphthongs. The syllable next
to the last is called the penult (pen-ultima, almost last') ;
the one before the penult is called the antepenult.
2. A pure syllable is one whose vowel or diphthong
immediately follows another vowel or diphthong ; as the
last syllable of <f>iXe(a, ol/cta, 'X^pvcreo'^. .
Note. In most editions of the Greek authors, the following rules
are observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line : —
1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin
a word (which can be seen from the Lexicon) , and mutes followed
by ft or V, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combi-
nations of consonants are divided : thus, c-;^o), e-yw, i-ane-pa, ve-Krap^
a-KpLT], de-a-p-os, p.(-Kp6vy rrpd-ypa-Tos, 7rpd(T-aa>, eX-Tris, iv-hov.
2. Compound words are divided into their original parts ; but
when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in compo-
sition, the compound is divided like a simple word : thus Trpoa-d-yat
(from irpos and ayco) ; but Tra-pd-yo) (from napd and ayco).
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES.
§ 19. 1. A syllable is long by nature when it has a
long vowel or a diphthong ; as in rl/jbiji kt€lv(o.
2. A syllable is long by position when its vowel is fol-
lowed by two consonants or a double consonant ; as in
OpTV^.
3. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a mute
and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e, either long or
short) ; as in t6kvov, vttvo^, v^pc<;. But in Attic poetry
such a syllable is generally short ;" in other poetry it is
generally long.
Note 1. A middle mute (jS, y, b) before \. p,, ov v generally
lengthens a preceding vowel ; as in dyuas, /3t/3Xioi/, boypa.
18 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§20.
Note 2. E in e/c is long when a liquid follows, either in compo-
sition or in the next word ; as cKXeya, €k vccov (both -« -).
§ 20. The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once.
Thus 7} and w and all diphthongs are long by nature ; c and o
are short by nature. (See § 2.)
When a, t, and v are not long by position, their quantity
must generally be learned by observation. But it is to be
remembered that
1. Every vowel arising from contraction or crasis is long;
as a in yepd (for yepaa) , ctKcov (for a€K(i>v) , and kov (for Kttt av) .
2. The endings a? and v? are long when v or vr has been
dropped 'before o- (§ 16, 6, and N. 1).
3. The accent often shows the quantity of a vowel. (See
§21, 1; §22.)
The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will be
stated below in the proper places.
ACCENT.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
§ 21. 1. There are three accents, the acute^ ('), the
grave (^), and the circumflex ("). The acute' can stand
only on one of the last three syllables of a word, the cir-
cumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only
on the last. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable
long by nature.
Remark. The marks of accent were invented by Aristophanes of
Byzantium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 b. c, in order to teach
foreigners the correct accent in pronouncing Greek. By the ancient
theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was
said to have the grave accent ; and the circumflex, originally formed
tlins '\ was said to result from the union of an acute and a following
grnvf^.
§ 22.] ACCENT. 19
Note 1. The grave accent is rarely used except in place of the
acute in the case mentioned in § 23, 1, and occasionally on the
indefinite pronoun tIs, ti (§ 84).
Note 2, The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second
vowel of a diphthong. (See § 4; 1, Note 1.)
2. A word is called oxytone (^sharp-toned) when it has the
acute on the last syllable ; par oxytone^ when it has the acute
on the penult ; propar oxytone^ when it has the acute on the
antepenult.
A word is called perispomenon when it has the circumflex
on the last sjdlable ; properispomenon^ when it has the circum-
flex on the penult. These terms refer to the shape of the
mark ( ^ " ~ ) as twisted^ or circumflexed^ Trepto-Troj/xei/o?.
A word is called barytone {grave or flat-toned) when its last
syllable has no accent, i.e. when (on the ancient theory) it
has the grave accent.
3. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible
(§ 22), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especially
the case with verbs (§ 26). (See § 25, 1, Note.)
§ 22. 1. The antepenult cannot be accented if the
last syllable is long either by nature or by position.
If accented, it takes the acute ; as TreXe/cy?, avOpayiro^;.
2. The penult, if accented, takes the circumflex if it is
long by nature and if at the same time the last syllable is
short by nature; as firiXov, vrjcrof;, rj\i^. Otherwise, if
accented, it takes the acute.
Note 1. Final ai and oi are considered short in determining the
accent; as avdpoonoi, vtjo-oc: except in the optative mood, and in the
adverb o'lkoi, at home ; as rifxrjo-ai, ttolt^o-ol (not Tifirja-at or ttoItjo-oi).
Note 2. Genitives in ews and ewv from nouns in is and uy of the third
declension (§ 53, 1, N. 2), all cases of nouns and adjectives in ws and cju
of the Attic second declension (§ 42, 2), and the Ionic "genitive in eui of the
first (§ 39, 3), allow the acute on the antepenult ; as dvur/eioi/, voXeus,
Trjpcu {Trjprjs). For ibairep, oWe, &e., see § 28, N. 3.
20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§23.
§ 23. 1. An oxytone changes its acute to the grave
before other words in the same sentence ; as Tot'9 itovtj-
poif^ dvOpco7rov<; (for tou? 7ropr)pov<; avOpcairov^i),
Note. This change is not made before enclitics (§ 28) nor before
an elided syllable (§ 24, 3), nor in the interrogative tLs^ tI (§ 84).
It is generally made before a comma, but not before a colon.
2. When a dissyllabic preposition follows its case, it throws
its accent back to the penult ; as tovtiov iripi, about these.
This is called anastrophe {avaaTpo<l>rj^ turning hack) .
This occurs in Attic prose only with Trepi, but in the poets with
All the dissyllabic prepositions except avd, hia, dfi(f)i, and dvri- In
Homer it occurs when a preposition follows a verb from which it is
separated by tmesis (§ 191, N. 3); as oXea-as ano, having destroyed.
Anastrophe takes place also when a preposition stands for itself
compounded with cVrtV ; as ndpa for Trdpfo-riv-
ACCENT OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES.
§ 24. 1 • A contracted syllable is accented if either of the
original sjdlables had an accent. If it is a penult or ante-
penult, the accent is regular (§ 22). If it is a final sjdlable,
it is circnmflexed ; but if the original word had the acute on
the last syllable, this is retained, ^.g.
Tipdipevos from npaopevos, ^tXeire from (juXeere, ripS) from ripdoi ;
but /3ej3a)s from /SejSawy. This proceeds from the ancient principle
(§21, 1, Rem.) that the circumflex comes from ' and', never from
* and ' ; so that ripdo) gives ri/ia>, but ^e^das gives ^f/3<Bp.
Note. If neither of the original syllables had an accent, the
accent is not affected by contraction ; as ripa for ripac.
Some exceptions to Ihe rule of § 24, 1 will be noticed under the
declensions. (See § 43, N'ote; § 65.)
2. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that of
the second remains ; as rayaOa for ra dyaOd, cywSa for cyw otSa,
Kara for Kal etra/ xaAAa for ra aAXa.
3. In elision, ox3^tone prepositions and conjunctions lose
their accent with the elided vowel ; other ox3'tones throw the
§25.] ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 21
accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to
the grave (§ 23, 1, Note). E.g.
'Ett' avT<5 for cVi avra, dXX' ciTre*/ for oiXKa eiircv, (})Tjfi iya> for ^rjyX
cyco, Acd/c' CTTJ; for <aKa enr).
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
§ 25. 1 . The place of the accent in the nominative singu-
lar must generally be learned by observation. The other cases
accent the same syllable as the nominative, if the last syllable
permits (§ 22) ; otherwise, the following s^^llable. E.g.
0dXa(r(ra, Bakd(rcrqs, 0aKa<r(Tav, 6aKa<T(raL, BaXda-fraLs ; Kopa^, Kopaxos,
KopaKfs, KopoKav; Trpayfitty Trpdyparos, TrpayfidTcov] 68ovs, odoPTos, odovraVf
obovcnv.
The kind of accent is determined as usual (§ 22); as vrj(Tos,
v^a-ov, v^aov, i/^trot, vrjaois. (See also § 25, 2.)
Note. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent
(§21, 3) : — {a) contracted adjectives in oos (§ 43, N. 3): (6) the neuter
singular and vocative singular of adjectives in uv, ov (except those in
<f>p(»3P, compounds of (fipriv), and the neuter of comparatives in wv; as evbal-
IJ.UP, eijdatfxov (§ 66); ^eXriuv, p^Xriov (§ 72, 2); but Sai(f)p<i)v, Sat(f>pov :
(c) many barytone compounds in 17s in all forms ; as aiiTapKTjs, adrapKes,
gen. pi. avrdpKUJv ; <f)L\a\Tfj6r]s, (piXdXrjdes ; but aXrid-qs, dXrfdis ; — this in-
cludes vocatives like Sc^Kpares, Arj/xoadeves (§ 52, 2, N. 1): (d) the vocative
of syncopated nouns in rip (§57), of compound proper names in uv, as
'Aydfxefxvov, KirofxeSov (except KaKe^aXfiov), and of ' AiroXXwv, HoaeibCiv,
ffur-^p, saviour, and (Hom. ) Sdrip, brother-in-law, — voc. "AttoXXoj', Ilda-ei-
dov, (rCrrep, 8dep.
2. The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxytones
of the first and second declensions is circumflexed. In the
Jirst declension, wv of the genitive plural is circumflexed
(§36, Note), except in the feminine of barytone adjectives
and participles in 09, which is spelt and accented like the
masculine and neuter. E.g.
TipijSi ripj], Tipaiv, Tipmv, Tipais] Beov, 6ea, dfoiv, Semv, Beois', also
StKcoi/, So^aij/ (from diKT], 86^a), but d^icov, Xeyofievcav (fern. gen. plur.
of a^tos, Xfyd/iei/os, § 62, 3).
Note. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension
(§ 42, 2) are exceptions.
22 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§26.
3. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent the
last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers : here
o)v and oiv are circumflexed. U.g.
Or]s, servant, ydrjTos, 6-qri., BrjToiv, 6t}t5>v, Orjai-
Note 1. Hois, child, Tpois, Trojan, Say, torch, bfias, slave, (^Ss,
light, ous, ear, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive
dual and plural ; so nas, all, in both genitive and dative plural : as
TTOLS, naidos, naibi, Traicrt, but Traidcov ; ttcls, ttuvtos, ttuvtI, Travrcov, ttckti.
Note 2. The interrogative ris, tIvos, t'lvi, &c., always accents the
first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles; as wi/, ovtos, ovtl,
ovTcav, oval] ^ds, ^dvTos.
Note 3. Some further exceptions occur in irregular nouns, and
others will be noticed under the different declensions.
accent of verbs.
§ 26- Verbs throw the accent as far back as the last
syllable permits ; as ^ovXevut, /SovXevo/xev, j^ovXevova-tv ; 7rap€)(oy,
7rdp€)(€y d7ro8t8o)/>tt, aTrdSoTC.
Note 1. This applies to compound as well as simple verbs. But
the accent (in compound verbs) can never precede the augment :
thus, irapiixov (not irdpnxov). So when the verb begins with a long
vowel or a diphthong not augmented ; as i^evpov (not e^evpov).
Note 2. Participles in their inflection are accented as nouns
(§ 25, 1), not as verbs. Thus, ^ovXevav has in the neuter ^ovXevov
(not ^ovXevov) ; cpiXecov, ^tXa>v, has (jiiXeop (not (piXeov), cfiiXovP
(§ 69).
Note 3. The chief exceptions to the principle just stated (§ 26)
are these : —
(1.) The following forms accent the penult : the first aorist
active infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive, the perfect
passive infinitive and participle, and all infinitives in vai or fiev
(except those in fxcvai). Thus, ^ovXevo-ai, yeveaOai, "KeXva-Bai, XeXv-
fxevos, la-rdvai, dibovai, XeXvKevai, bofiev and dofxevm (both Epic for
dovuai) .
Add the compounds of So's, es, Bes, and crx^s ; as aTrdSos.
(2.) The following forms have the acute on the last syllable: the
second aorist active participle, participles in eis, ovs, vs, and as, and
§2S.] EI^CLITICS. 28
present participles in as from verbs in fii. Thus, Xinav, XvBeis,
didovs. deiKvvs, XeXvKois, lards (pres.), but Xvaas and arrjaas (aor.).
Add the imperatives I8e, ctVe, eX^e, evpe, and Xa/Se.
(3.) The following circumflex the last syllable : the second aorist
active infinitive in eiv, and the second person singular of the second
aorist middle imperative in ov, except when the latter is com-
l)ounded with a dissyllabic preposition (not elided). Thus, Xmelvj
XiTToi), npodoii, diroXov, d^-ov (but KardOov, irtpibov).
Note 4. For optatives in oi and ai see § 22, Note 1. Some other
exceptions occur, especially in iiTegular verbs (like ei>i and (pvf^.) See
also § 122, N. 2.
ENCLITICS.
§ 27. An enclitic is a word which loses its own accent, and
is pronounced as if it were part of the preceding word ; as
avOpwTTOL T€ (like Jwminesque in Latin) . The enclitics are :
1. The personal pronouns /xov (jaet'), //oi, /xc ; aov (a-io, o-cv)',
a-oL (tol), o-e (re, rtV, tu, accus.) ; ov, ot, c, and (in poetry)
<T(f>icrL (with Ionic or poetic (r(f>i, a-cjiiv, <r(f>e, (T^we, (r(f>(x)LVy cr</)€(oi/,
<T0ett9, cr<j&a9, acfiea, eo, ev, e^ej/, fXLv, vlv, § 79, 1).
2. The indefinite pronoun rU, rt, in all its forms ; also the
indefinite adverbs ttov, tto^i, ttt;, ttoc', iroOev, Trore, Trto, TTclis.
These must be distinguished from the interrogatives ft?, ttov,
TTTJ, &c. (§ 87).
3. The present indicative of ei/x.i', be, and of c^iy/At, say,
except the forms et and <f>y^.
4. The particles ye, re, rot, 7r6p, vw (not vvv) ; and the Epic
K€ (or KeV), ^ij»/, and pa. Also the inseparable -Be in o8c,
Tovo-Se, &c. (not Se, &«<) ; and -^e and -^t in ct^e and vai^c
(§28, N. 3).
§ 28. The word before an enclitic retains its own accent,
and never changes a»final acute to the grave (§ 23, 1).
1 . If its last syllable is accented, the accent of the enclitic
is merely dropped ; as rijxaL re, rifiwy re, ao<f>6s rts, koXcus <f>r]a-Lv.
24 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [§29.
2. If its last syllable is unaccented and it has not the acute
on the penult, it receives from the enclitic an acute on the
last syllable as an additional accent, while the enclitic loses
its accent ; as avOponros ns, Set^ov /x,ot, TratSes Ttvcs, ovtos icmv,
3. If it has the acute on the penult, it receives no second
accent. A monosyllabic enclitic here drops its accent ; a
dissyllabic enclitic retains it. Thus, rovrov yc, ttoo-os rt?,
dvbp€<s Tivcs (but TratScs rives) , ovto) cfiyjcTLV (but ovrds <j>y]<TLv) .
Note 1. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis
falls upon them: this occurs especially (1) when they begin a sen-
tence, (2) when the preceding syllable is elided. The personal
pronouns generally retain their accent after an accented preposition ;
here e/xoO, efioi, and efxe are used (except in irpos pe)' The personal
pronouns of the third person are not enclitic when they are direct
reflexives (§ 144, 2) ; erc^tVt never in Attic prose. 'Eo-ri at the
. beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies existence or possibility j
becomes eort; so after ovk, prj, d, a>s, Kai, dXX' (for dXXa), and tovt
(for TOVTO).
Note 2. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes
an acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as
ci Tis ri (Tol (l>r]criv, if any one is saying anything to you.
Note 3. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound
word, the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate
word. Thus, ovtlpos, wrivi, divrivav, aa-Trep, &(tt€, ol8e, Tovade, eire,
oijT€, pfjT€j are only apparent exceptions to § 22.
PROCLITICS.
§ 29, A proclitic is a word which has no accent, and is
pronounced as if it were part of the following word. The
proclitics are the articles 6, y, oi, at, and the particles ci, ws,
ov {ovK, ovx), "S (es)? ^K (e|), ev {dv) .
Note 1. Ov takes the acute at the end of a sentence; as ttws yap
ov] for why not? 'Q.s and sometimes ck and cV take the acute when
^in poetry) they follow their noun; as /caiceoi/ €^,from evils ; Beos coy,
I as a God. 'ils is accented also when itmeans thus ; as &>? elTTev,thus
he spoke. This use of coy is chiefly poetic; but Koi wy, even thus, and
V ov8* &s or pr}b' &s, not even thus, sometimes occur in Attic prose.
§81.] DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS. 25
Note 2. When 6 is used for the relative os (§ 140), it is accented
(as in Od, ii. 262) ; and many editors accent all articles when they
are demonstrative, as in //. i. 9, o yap ^ao-iXrji xoXw^eis.
DIALECTIC CHANGES IN LETTERS.
§ 30. 1. The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of rf
where the Attic has d ; and the Doric by the use of d where
the Attic has ry. Thus, Ionic yeverj for yevca, Irja-Ofiat for Ida-OfxaL
(from tao/x,at, § 109, 1) ; Doric Tt/xdcrw for rt/Ar^o-w (from ri/Aao)) .
But an Attic d caused by contraction (as in Tifxd from Tt/xac) ,
or an Attic -q lengthened from € (as in (^tArjorw from KJxXio)) ,
§ 109, 1), is never thus changed.
2. The Ionic often has «, ov, for Attic c, o ; and -^t for
Attic €L in nouns and adjectives in eto?, eiov ; as ^cti/os for
^cVos, ixovvo<s for /Ltoi/os ; Paa-iXyjtos for /JatrtActos.
3. The Ionic does not avoid successive vowels, like the
Attic; and it therefore very often omits contraction (§9).
It contracts co and eov into ev (especially in Herodotus) ; as
TTOtcv/xcv, 7roL€V(ri (from 7rot€o/xev, Troieovcrt), for Attic TTOtov/xcv,
TTOLova-L. Herodotus does not nse v movable (§ 13, 1). See
also § 17, 1, Note.
PUNCTUATION MARKS.
§ 31. The Greek uses the comma ( , ) and the period ( . )
like the English. It has also a colon, a point above the
line ( • ) , which is equivalent to the English colon and semi-
colon. Its mark of interrogation ( ; ) is the same as the
English semicolon. The mark of exclamation (!) is some-
times used in modern editions of Greek authors.
PAET IL
INFLECTION.
§ 32. 1. Inflection is a change in the form of a
word, made to express its relation to other words. It
includes the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns,
and the conjugation of verbs.
2. Every inflected word has a fundamental part, which
is called the stem. To this are appended various letters
or syllables, called endings^ to form cases, tenses, persons,
numbers, &c.
Note. Most words contain a still more primitive element than
the stem, which is called the root. Thus, the stem of the verb n/xao),
honor, and that of the noun rt/xij, is rijxa-, that of Wo-tf, payment^
recompeme, is no-t-, that of rifxios, held in honor, is tlixlo-, that of
Tiixrjfia (Tifir]iiaTos), valuation, is rifxijfiar-] but all these stems are
developed from one root, tl-, which is seen pure in the verb n'to,
honor. In tl(o, therefore, the stem of the verb and the root are the
same.
The stem itself may be modified and assume various forms in
different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same verbal stem may
in different tenses appear as XtTr-, Xenr-, and Xoitt-; and the same
nominal stem may appear as rifxa- and rt/x?/-.
§ 33. 1. There are three numbers ; the singular, the
dual, and the plural. The singular denotes one object,
the plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used
to denote two objects, but even here the plural is more
common.
§ 33.] INFLECTION 27
2. There are three genders ; the masculine, the fem-
inme, and the neuter.
Note 1. The grammatical gender in Greek is very often different
from the natural gender. Especially many names of things are
masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine, femi-
nine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take the
form adapted to either of these genders. The gender is often indi-
cated by prefixing the article ; as (6) ai/^p, man ; (Ji) ywrj, woman ;
(to) npayfia, tiling. (See § 78.)
J^OTE 2. Nouns which may be either masculine or feminine are
said to be of the common gender: as (6, fj) deos, God or Goddess.
Names of animals which include both sexes, but have only one
grammatical gender, are called epicene (JmKoi.vos) ; as 6 a^ros, the
eagle ; ij aka>irr}^^ the fox.
Note 3. The gender must often be learned by observation. But
names of males are generally masculine, and names of females fem-
inine. Most names of rivers^ winds, and months are masculine; and
most names of countries, to2vns, trees, and islands are feminine. Most
nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine ; as 17 dperr], virtue,
eXnU, hope. Diminutive nouns are neuter; as Traihlov, child. Other
rules are given under the declensions (§§ 35, 40, 58) and in § 129.
3. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive, dative^
accusative, and vocative.
The nominative and vocative phiral are always alike.
In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are
alike in all numbers ; and in the plural these cases end
in a. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are
always alike ; and the genitive and dative dual are always
alike.
Note 1. The cases have in general the same meaning as the cor-
responding cases in Latin ; as Nom. a man (as subject) , Gen. of a
man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a man (as object), Voc. man.
The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the
Greek genitive and dative. (See Remark before § 157.)
Note 2. All the cases except the nominative and vocative are
called oblique cases.
28
INFLECTION.
M.
NOUNS.
§ 34. There are three declensions of nouns, in which
also all adjectives and participles are included.
These correspond in general to the first three declensions
in Latin. (See § 45, 2, Note) . The first is sometimes called
the A declension^ and the second the declension ; these two
together are sometimes called the Vowel declension, as opposed
to the third or Consonant declension (§ 45, 1). The principles
which are common to adjectives, participles, and substantives
are given under the three declensions of nouns.
Note. The name noun {8vofia), according to ancient usage, includes
hoth substantives and adjectives. But by modem custom noun is often
used as synonymous with substantive, and it is so used in the present
work.
FIRST DECLENSION.
§ 35. Stems of the first declension end originally in a,
which is often modified into tj in the singular. The nom-
inative singular of f eminines ends in a or ?; ; that of mas-
culines ends in a? or t;?.
§ 36. The following table shows the terminations in all the
cases of this declension. These consist of the final a (or rj) of
the stem united with the case-endings (§ 32,2). See § 45, 2, N.
Singular.
Dual.
Plural. •
Feminine.
Masculine.
Masc. and Fern.
3fasc. and Fern.
N.
a n]
as Tis
N. at
G.
ds or Tjs Tis
ov (for ao)
N. A. y. d
G. «v (for d«v)
D.
if. OTJi Tl
^ Tl
G. D. aiv
D. ais
A.
av Tiv
dv TJV
A. ds
V.
a t]
d a or Tl
V. ai
§37.]
FIRST DECLENSION.
29
Note. Here, as in most cases, the relation of the stem to the termina-
tions must be explained by reference to the earlier forms of the language.
Thus, uu of the genitive plural (§ 25, 2) is contracted from the Homeric
diov (§ 39); and ov of the genitive singular comes from the Homeric ao
(through a form eo) by contraction. The stem in a may thus be seen in
all the cases of oiKia and rafiias, and (with the change of a to 77 in the
singular) also in all the other paradigms. (See § 45, 2, Note.) The forms
in a and rj have no case-endings.
§ 37. 1. The nouns (1^) tc/jltj, honor^ (97) ot/ctia, house,
(?;) %a)/9a, land, (77) Movcra, Muse, (0) ttoXlttj^;, citizen,
(0) Ta/u,ta9, steward, are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
Tl|A^
olKCd
X«pa
Mov<ra
iroXCTirjs
rafjiCas
G.
Tlfii^S
oUCas
X<ipas
MovoTjs
■JTOX^TOV
Ta\LCov
D.
Tljl^
oiKCtf.
X»p<j
Movcrg
ttoXCtt]
Ta|xt(2k
A.
TlJl^V
olKCdv
X<&pav
Movo-av
iroXiTqv
Tttfxtav
V.
TIH.^
olKCd
X(&pa
Dual.
Mov<ra
iroXtra
Ta|JiCd
N. A. V.
Tifjid
oIkCcL
X«pa
Mov<ra
iroXCra
Tap.Ca
G.D.
Tifiaiv
oUCaiv
X»paiv
Plural
Movo-aiv
iroXtraiv
rafiCaiv
N.
Ti)i.aC
oUfai
X«3pat
Movo-ai
iroXiTtti
Ta|i.£tti
G.
Tinwv
oIkiwv
X»p«v
Movo-wv
iroXiTwv
Tap.iwv
D.
Tijiais
oUiais
X«pais
Mov<rais
iroXCTais
Tap-iais
A.
Tijids
oIkCols
X»pas
Movo-as
TToXixas
Tap.ias
V.
Ti|iaC
oIkCou
X«pai
Movcrai
iroXiTai
ra\iiai
The following show varieties of quantity and accent : —
udXaa-aa, sea, 6aX.dcr(T7]<s, Oa\d(r(rr], OaXacra-av ; PI. OdXaacraL, &C.
ye(f>vpa, bridge, y€cf>vpa<s, y€cf>vpa, yicfivpav ; PI. y€<f>vpaL, &C.
(TKLd, shadow, o-Kcas, crKta, a-Kidv ; PI. a-KLac, ctklwv, o-Ktat?, &C
yvwfxrj, opinion, yvw/xi;?, yvw/XT/, yvw/xrjv ; PI. yi/w/Aat, yvw/xwi/, &C.
W€tpa, attempt, Trctpa?, Tretpa, Trctpav ; PI. Tretpat, TTctpoiv, &C.
2. Nouns ending in a preceded by e, l, or p, and a few
proper names, retain a throughout the singular, and are
30 INFLECTION. [§38.
declined like olKia or ;^a)/9a (those with d like yicj^vpa or
Trelpa). Other nouns in a are declined like Movcra.
Note 1. The nouns in rjs which have a in the vocative singular
(like ttoXlttjs) are chiefly those in rqs, national appellatives (like
Ilepa-rjs, a Persian, voc. Tlepcra), and compounds (like yeM-fxerprjs,
a (/eumeter, voc. yecoixerpa). Afam'nrjs, master, has voc. becnroTa.
Most other nouns in t^s have the vocative in rj ; as Kpovldrjs, son of
Kronos, Kpovidr].
Note 2. The termination a of the nominative singular is always
short when the genitive has r]s. It is generally long when the gen-
itive has ay; the exceptions, which can always be seen by the accent
(§ 22), are chiefly (a) most nouns ending in pa preceded by a diph-
thong or by V (as p,olpa, ye(f)vpa), (b) most abstract nouns formed
from the stems of adjectives in rjs or oos (as dXrjdeia, evuoia), (c)
most compounds in cia (as fieaoyeLo), {(I) common nouns in eia and
rpia designating females (as (iaa-iXeia, queen, -^akrpia, female harper^ :
but jSaaiXfiay kingdom (with d) .
Note 3. Av of the accusative singular and a of the vocative sin-
gular agree in quantity with a of the nominative. The quantity
of all other vowels may be seen from the table in § 36.
Note 4. The nouns in a always have recessive accent (§ 21, 3).
Contract Nouns of the First Declension.
§ 38. Most nouns in aa, ea, and ea?, are contracted
(§ 9). Mvda, fjbva, mina, avKea, avfcrj^ fig-tree^ and ^Epfjui-
a<i, 'Epfjirj^, Hermes (^Mercury) ^ are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
{ixvda.)
fJLVd
{(TVKea) (TUKTJ
CEpfikas)
'EpiiTis
G.
{ixvdai)
fxvas
{(TVKeai) (ruKfjs
('Epfieov)
*Ep(j.ov
D.
(fxpda)
|i.V^
{(TVKeg.) (TVK^
CEpm^a)
•Epixfi
A.
(fit'dav)
(ivdv
(avKeav) <ruKi]V
('Epfj.tav)
'Ep|xf]v
V.
{fMvda)
|iva
Dual.
('Epfxea)
'Epfifi
N. A. V.
invda)
Hvd
(avKea) (rvKO.
(Epfiea)
'Ep|xa
G. D.
(fjLvdaiv)
jAvaiv
(avKeuLv) (TVKaiv
{'Ep/xeaiv) 'Epn-aiv
5 41.] SECOND DECLENSION. 31
Plural.
N. (jj.vdai) ftvau {avKiai) <rvKal (Ep/xeai) 'Epfiai
G. (jxvadp) jivwv (<TVK€Q}v) crvKUiV (Ep/xeuv) 'Ep|iwv
D. (fU'daLs) |ivats (cu/ceats) orvKais ('EpfieaLs) 'Epjxais
A. (jivdas) (j,vds • (crvKeas) <rvKa<s ('Ep/j.eas) 'Epjxds
V. (jxvdac) jJLvai {(xvKeaC) <ruKai {'Epfxeai) 'Epfxai
Note 1. Bopeas, North wind, which appears uncontracted in Attic,
has also a contracted form Boppas, (with irregular pp), gen. (of Doric
form, § 39, 3) Boppa, dat. Boppa, ace. Boppav, voc. Boppa.
Note 2. For ea contracted to d in the dual and the accusative plural,
see § 9, 3, Note. For contract adjectives of this class, see § 65.
Dialects.
§ 39. 1. Ionic r), rjs, rj, rjv, in the singular, for a, as, a, dv. Doric
a, as, a, dv, for j;, &c. in the same cases. (See § 30.)' The Ionic
.generally uses the uncontracted forms of contract nouns.
2. Nom. Sing. Hom. sometimes a for rjs ; as imroTa for ImroTrjs,
horseman. (Compare Latin poeta = 7roir)Tr]s.)
3. Gen. Sing. For ov, Hoin. do, ea, sometimes a>; as *Arpft§ao,
'Arpeideco, /Sopeoj: Hdt. (co, rarely 4co for eeo) (sometimes foj in old
Attic proper names) : Doric a (rarely in Attic nouns in as).
4. Gen. Plur. Hom. dav, ecov (whence, by contraction," Attic cov,
Doric du) ; as vaxrrdav, vavreav (Att. vavrwv) : Hdt. eutv.
5. Bat. Plur. Poetic aiai, Hom. rjai, lys; Hdt. rjs', as rifxalai,
Movarjcri or Mov(rT]s (for Movaais} .
SECOND DECLENSION.
§ 40. The nominative singular of most nouns of the
second declension ends in o? or op (gen. ou). Those in
o9 are masculine, rarely feminine ; those in op are neuter.
Note. The stem of nouns of this declension ends in o, which is
sometimes lengthened to co. It becomes e in the vocative singular;
and a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plm-al of neuters.
§ 41. The following table shows the terminations of nouns
in o? and ov in this declension, that is, the final o of the stem
(with its modifications) united with the case-endings : —
32
Singular.
Masc. S Fern. Neuter.
N. OS ov
G. ov (for oo)
D. ^ for 01 )
A. ov
V. c ov
INFLECTION.
[§42.
Dual.
Plural.
Masc, Fern., & Neuter.
Masc. db Fern. Neut.
N. 01. a
N. A. V. CO (for o)
G. MV (for owv)
G. D. oiv
D. ois
A. ovs (for ovs) a-
V. 01 d
Note. Looking at the original forms of these terminations (§ 36, Note),
we see the stem in o in all the cases except in the vocative singular in e and
the neuter plural in a. (See § 45, 2, Note.)
§ 42. 1- The nouns (o) X6709, word^ (17) i/tJo-o?, island.,
(0, rf) dvOptoTTOf;, man or human being, (97) 0S09, road,
(to) hoipoVi gift, are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
X<57os
v<)o-os
dvepcotros
686s
Swpov
G.
X<5"yov
v^o-ov
dvGpwirou
680V
8<^poxi
D.
XoYw
v^o-<s)
av9pwira>
68<?
Sccpc^
A.
X670V
viio-ov
dvOpcDTTov
68o'v
8«pov
V.
X<Jy«
vfio-€
dvOpwire
Dual
68€
8»pov
N. A. V.
X<$Yo>
v^o-«
dvOpwirw
68(^
8c5p«
G. D.
Xo-yoiv
v^o-oiv
dv9p»irotv
Plural.
6801V
8«poiv
N.
X<Syoi
V^0"0t
fiv9p«iroi
680C
8»pa
G.
Uy^v
vi\T<av
dv9p«Tr«v
68(;;v
8wpwv
D.
Xo-yois
vi^o-ois
dv9p«irois
6801$
8(0pois
A.
Xo-yovs
v^o-ovs
dv9p«'irovs
680VS
8»pa
V.
U-iOK
vfi<roi
dv9p«Troi
hhoL
8c»pa
Thus decline vo/ao?, law, Ktr8wo$, danger, iroTafio^, river,
pio% life, OdvaTo<s, death, o-vkov, fig, t/xariov, outer garment.
§43.]
SECOND DECLENSION.
33
Note. The nominative in o? is sometimes used for thei vocative
in e; as w (piXos (§ 157, Note). Qeos, God, has always deos as
vocative. *A8eX<^oy, brother, has voc ade\(f)€.
2. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this de-
clension end in «? (gen. cd), and a few neuters in cov
(gen. G)). This is often called the Attic declension. The
nouns (6) ve(o<;, temple, and (^t6^ dvayyeoov, hall, are thus
declined : —
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
N. A.
G.
D.
vccos
V6(0
V€Cp
V6(&V
V€«S
avco-yecDV
dvw'ycid
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
N. A. V.
G. D.
veo)
V€«pV
&V(OY€Ci>
dv(OY€a>v
Plural.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
N. A. V.
G.
D.
VC(p
V€<OV
V6«S
V€(OS
V€<p
avcoYCtf
dvw7€(i)v
dvcoYct^
The accent of these nouns is irregular (N. 2). (See § 22, N. 2;
and § 25, 2, Note. See also § 53, 1, N. 2.)
Note 1. Some masculines and feminines of tl^is class may drop
V of the accusative singular; as Xaycoy, accus. \ayuiv or Xayw. So
"xBois, toi/''aBoov or^A^co; Koos, TTjv Kcop or I^(^; and K/tos, Tetos, MiVcos.
"Ews, dawn, has regularly tj^i/^Eo).
Note 2. ^ Most nouns in ews which follow the Attic declension have
older forms in dos or 770s (with reversed quantity); as Hqm. Xaos, people,
Att. Xet6s ; Dor. pads, Ion. »'i76s, Att. vecb^ ; Horn. Mei/Ados, Att. Me^^Xews.
In words like MevAews, the original £^ccent is retaine4. (See § 53^5, N. 1 ;
§ 54, Note.) ^■. , -
Contract Nouns of the Second Declension* '
§ 43. Many nouns in €09, 009, eov, and oop are con-
tracted. ]Vo'o9, Z/0O9, mind, and oariov, oa-rqvv, lone, are
thus declined ; —
34
INFLECTION.
[§44.
Singular
.
Dual.
Plural.
N. (p6os)
VOVS
N. '
{p6oi) vol
G. (POOV)
VOV
N.A.V. {^iw) v«
G.
(powp) vwv
D. {p6(p)
v^
G, D. (j'ootz') voiv
D.
(wots) vois
A. (I'OOJ')
vovv
A.
(pdovs) voiis
V. (pbe)
VOV
V.
{v6oi) vol
N.A.Y. (6(rT^v)
OOTOVV
N.A,Y. (otrr^o,) 6(rT(4
N.V.A
(JxTTia) otrra.
G. {6(rT^ov)
OOTOV
G. D. (dar^oip) octtoiv
G.
{6a-Tiu}p) 6<rT«v
D. (o(rT^v)
OOTT^
D.
(6(rr^ots) oo-rois
For the forms in eop and oov, which are generally adjectives, see
§65.
Note. The accent of these contract forms is irregular in seve-
ral points : —
1. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual contract €<o and
oo) into w (not <o). See § 24, 1.
2. Adjectives in eo? circumflex the last syllable of all contract
forms; , as ^P^o-eos, xP^^'^^^ (not ;^puaous, § 24, 1), golden. So Kaveov,
Kavovv, basket. Except a> in the dual, just mentioned.
3. The contracted forms of compounds in oos follow the accent of
the contracted nominative singular; as avTinvoos, avTinvovs, blowing
against, gen. avriTrvoov, qlvtIttvov (not dvTnrvov) , &C.
For ea contracted to d in the neuter plural, see § 9, 3, Note.
Dialects.
§ 44. 1. Gen. Sing. Epic oto (for o/o), Doric o> (for oo); as
Beoio, fieyako}. Attic ov is contracted from oo.
2. Gen. arid Dat. Dual. Epic ouv for oiv\ as trmouv.
3. Dat. Plur. Tonic and poetic oio-i for ois ; as Imroian.
4. Ace. Plur. Doric my or op for ouy; as vofiai, ras \vkos-
5. The Ionic generally omits contraction.
y
THIRD DECLENSION.
§ 45. 1. This declension includes all nouns not be-
longing to either the first or the second. Its genitive
singular ends in 09 (sometimes 0)9).
§45.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
35
KoTE. This is often called the Consonant Declension (§ 34), because the
stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems, however, end in a
close vowel (i or u), some in a diphthong, and a few in o. The last two are
snpposed to have ended originally in a consonant {F or a). See § 63, 3 ;
§ 54 ; § 55.
2. The stem of a noun of the third declension cannot
always be determined by the nominative singular ; but it is
generally found by dropping os (or w?) of the genitive.
The cases are formed by adding to the stem the following
endings (which here are not united with any letter of the
stem) : —
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
Masc. d; Fern.
NeuL
Masc.
, Fem.f Neut.
Masc.
ib Fern.
Neut.
N. s
None.
N.
€S
a
G. OS, «s
N. A.
V. €
G.
fOV
D. I
G. D.
OIV
D.
crl
A. d or V
None.
A.
ds
&
V. None, or like N.
None.
Y.
CS
d
Note. The following comparison shows the relations of the
case-endings in the three declensions : —
Sing. — Norn. 1st decl. masc. s; 2nd masc. and fern, s, neut. v
(Lat. s, m); 3rd masc. and fern. $■ (Lat. s).
Gen. 1st masc. o, fem. s', 2nd o or lo, making ov or oio with o of
the stem. (cf. Lat. i) ; 3rd os (Lat. is).
Dat. All decl. t; 1st and 2nd i in a, 77, a (Lat. «, ai, qe, o).
Accus. Masc. and fem. 1st and '2nd v for /x (Lat. m) ; 3rd v
(Lat. m), or a for av or a/x (Lat. em), cf. Tvpcri-v with Lat. turri-m,
6-b6vT-a{y) with Lat. dent-em.
Dual. N. A. V. 1st and 2nd a and o of stem lengthened to a and
0) ; 3rd e.
G. D. 1st and 2nd iv] 3rd oiv.
Plur. — Norn. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd t; making ai and ot
with a and o of the stem (cf. Lat. i)\ 3rd es (Latin es ; neut. 3rd
a (Lat. a).
(ren. eoj/; in 1st and 2nd contracted with a or o of the stem to oav
(cf. Lat. t/m, om).
Dat. 1st and 2nd tp (older la-i) ; 3rd o-t.
Accus. Masc. and fem. 1st and 2nd s (for vs), as and ovs coming
from dvs and 01/? (Lat. a*-, os); 3rd a? (for oj/y) retaining a (Lat. ci):
neut. 3rd a (Lat. a).
The vocative is either like the nominative or without a case-
ending.
36 INFLECTION. * [§ 46.
FORMATION OF CASES.
Nominative Singular.
§ 46. The forms of the nominative singular of this de-
clension are numerous, and must be learned partl}^ by
practice. The following are the general principles on which
the nominative is formed from the stem.
1. In neuters, the nominative singular is generally the
same as the stem. Stems ending in t (including vr) regu-
larly drop the T (§ 7) . JS.g.
2w/za, body, aatfiar-os', fieXai/ (neuter of fiiXas), Mack, fjLe\av-os,
Xvcrap (neuter of Xvaas), having loosed, XvaavT-os; irav, all, iravT-os]
TiBev, placing, ndevr-os ; x^P^'^"' 9^(^ceful, xaptei""-os ; dibov, giving, 8i-
dovTos, Xeyov, saying, Xeyoj/r-os; beiKvvv (y), showing, heiKvvvr-oi. For
the masculine nominatives of these adjectives and participles, see
below, § 46, 2, 3, and Note 1.
Some neuter stems in ar change r to s in the nominative, and
a few to p; as repas, prodigy, repar-os; rinap, liver, rjirar-os.
2. Masculine and feminine stems (except those included
under 3 and 4) form the nominative singular by adding s and
making the needful euphonic changes (§ 16). U.g.
^vXa^, guard, ^uXa/c-os; yvyjr, vulture, yvir-os', ^Xex//-, vein, (f)\e^-6s
(§ 16, 2); eXiris (for eXnids), hope, iXirid-os (§ 16, 2); x^P^^j grace,
XapiT-os', opvLS, bird, opv[6-os', vv^, night, vv<t-6s', pda-ri^, scourge,
pdarCy-os; ordXmy^, trumpet, ardXinyy-os. So Aid?, Ajax, A'lavr-os
(§ 16, 6, N. 1) ; Xvcras, Xvcravr-os ; rrds, iravT-os', rideis, Tideur-os; xapt-
eis, xapievr-os; deiKvvs (v), SeiKvvi/T-os. (The neuters of the last five
words, Xva-av, irdv, ridev, x^P^^^, and deiKvvv, are given under § 46, 1.)
3. Masculine and feminine stems in v and p lengthen the
last vowel, if it is short, but are otherwise unchanged in the
nominative. U.g.
Alav, age, alav-os ', daificov, divinity, 8aifxov-os ', Xip.r}v, harbor, Xi/xev-
os', Bfjp, beast, 6rjp-6s', drjp, air, dep-os.
Exceptions are /xeXd?, black, peXav-og', rdXas, wretched, rdXav-os',
els, one, iv-6s; ktcls, comb, ktcv-os', pis, nose, piv-6s; which add s.
4. Mascuhne stems in ovt generally drop t, and form the
nominative like stems in v (§ 46, 3). ^.g.
Aecop, lion, Xeovr-os ; Xeyav, speaking, Xeyovr-os ', a>v, being, ovt-os.
§ 47.] , THIRD DECLENSION. 37
Note 1. Masculine participles from verbs in w/ui change ovt to
ov? (§ 46, 2); as hihovsi giving, 8tS6n--os' (§ 16, 6, N. 1). So a few
nouns in ous; as ohovs, tooth, oSdin-os. Neuters in oin-- are regular
(§ 46, 1). In TTou?, TTod-os, foot, -obs becomes -ovS'
Note 2. The perfect active participle (§ 68) , with a stem in ot^
forms its nominative in (os (masc.) and os (neut.) ; as XeXu/ccbs, hav-
ing loosed, XeXv/cds, gen. XeXv/cdr-os.
Note 3. For nominatives in 77s (es) and os, gen. eoj, see § 52, 1, Note.
A few other peculiar formations in contract nouns will be noticed below,
§§ 53-56.
Accusative Singular.
§ 47. 1 . Most masculines and feminines with stems ending
in a consonant form the accusative singular by adding a to
the stem ; as <j>vXa$ (^uXuk-) , <f>vXaKa ; Xitov (Xcovt-) , liorij Xe-
ovra.
2. Nouns in t?, v?, av?, and ov?, if the stem ends in a vowel
or diphthong, change 9 of the nominative to v ; as TrdXt?, state,
'ttoXlv ', i)(Ov<i, Jish, i^^w ; vav?, ship^ vavv ', ySov?, ox, (iovv.
But if the stem ends in a consonant, barytones of these
classes have v in prose (rarely a) and v or a in poetrj^ while
others have only the form in a ; as cptg, strife, tpw (poet, also
IptSa) ; opvcs, bird, opviv (poet. opviOa) ; cueXTrtg, hopeful, cveXinv
(e^eXTTtSa) ; while cX7rt9, hope, has only IXiriha ; Trovs (ttoS-) ,
foot, n-dSa ; 'TTttts {jraih-), child, TratSa.
Note 1. 'AttoXXcdi/ and lloo-etSwx' {Uoa-cihdoiv) contract the accusa-
tive into 'AttoXXo) and Hoaubwy after dropping v.
For a similar contraction of ova into <», and of ov€s and ovas into
OVS, see the declension of comparatives, § 72, 2.
Note 2. For accusatives in ea (for ccra, efa) from nouns in 77s and evs,
see § 52, 1, Note, and § 53, 3, N. 1 ; and for those in w (for oa or «a) from
nouns in w or ws, see § 55.
38 INFLECTION. [§48.
Tocatlve Singular.
^ § 48. 1. The vocative singular of masculines and femi-
nines is generally the same as the nominative.
2. But in the following cases, it is the same as the stem : —
(a) In barytones with stems ending in a liquid ; as Saifxiov
(Sat/xov-) , divinity^ VOC. Sol/xov ; p-qrayp (prjTop-) , speaker, VOC.
pyJTop', oix)<f>p(iiv (a-oifjipov-) <, continent, voc. (Tu)(f>pov.
But if the last syllable is accented, the vocative is the same
as the nominative ; as Xi/xiji/ (Ai/acv-) , harbor, voc. XtfjLijv ; aWrjp
{aWep-), sky, VOC. aWrjp,
(b) In barytone nouns and adjectives whose stems end in
VT, final T of fhe stem being dropped (§ 7) ; as ytyag (ytyavr-),
ffiant,\OC. yiyav ; keoiv ■ {XeovT-), lion, \0C. XeW ; x^P''^^^ (x*"
pLcvT-) , graceful, voc. xctptev.
But all participles of the third declension have the vocative
and nominative alike. (Compare Auwv, loosing, voc. Xv(ov,
with AeW, lion, voc. Xiov.)
(c) In nouns and adjectives in ts (except those in I9 Tvos) ,
CV9, t;?, and avs. These drop s of the nominative to form the
vocative; as rvpavm (rvpawiS-), tyranny, voc. rvpawi (§ 7) ;
TToXt? (ttoXi-) , s^a^e, voc. ttoXl ; t^^i^'s, iX^'^' > ^acrtXcv?, /SaariXev
(§ 53, 3, N. 1) ; ypai)?, ypav (§54, Note) ; Trals (for Trai,?),
Trat (for Trat). So in ^ov<s, Pov (§ 54), and sometimes in
OtStVovs, OtStVov, Oedipus.
(d) In nouns and adjectives in t;?, gen. €05 (ov^). These
form the vocative in cs (§ 52) ; as SwKparT;?, voc. :SwKpaT€s
(v. Note) ; TpLrjpr)<s, voc. rpirjpes ; oXtjOt]?, VOC. oXyjOk.
Note. For the recessive accent of many vocatives, as 'Aydfiefivov, 'ZdjKpa-
res, 'AiroXXov, KaKbbaLjiov, see § 25, 1, Note.
3. Nouns in w, gen. 0^9 (§ 55), form the vocative in ot. So
a few in uiv, gen. oi)s (§ 55, N. 2) ; as aT^Swv, voc. dT^Sou
§50.]
THIRD DECLENSION.
39
Dative Plural.
§ 49. The dative plural is formed by adding on to the
stem. ^.g.
^vKa^ ((f)v\aK-), (f)v\a^i', pfjrap (prjrop-), prjTopcri; iXiris (i\m8-),
eXnicn; novs (ttoS-), Troai ', Xea>v (Xeovr-), Xeovtrt ; Sai/uo)!/. (8at/A0J/-),
baifioai ', Tide is (rt^cKr-), Tt^eicrt ; ;;^apiety (xaptepr-), ;;^apieo-t ; ioTas
{ioTavT-), toracrt ; deiKVVs (deiKvvvT-), deiKvixri ', /3acriXevp (/SacrtXfu-),
jSao-tXeCcrt ; ^ovs (^ov-), ^ovcrl; ypavs (ypav-), ypavai (§ 54). ITor the
euphonic changes, see § 16, 2 and 6, with notes.
For a change in syncopated nouns, see § 57.
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
§ 50. The following are examples of the most com-
mon forms of nouns of the third declension with, mute or
liquid stems.
For the formation of the cases of these nouns, see §§ 46 —
49. For euphonic changes in nearly all, see § 16, 2 and § 46.
For special changes in Xecoj/ and yiyas, see § 16, 6, N. 1.
I. Masculines and Feminines.
6 (<|>vXdK-)
watchman.
vein.
{o-aX-iri'Y'Y-) b (Xeovr-)
trumpet. lion.
Singular
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
cf>vXa|
()>vXaKOS
^vXttKl
<|)vXaKtt
(j>vXa§^
4,x.pds
4,x.pc
4>X€pa
4>X€4,
Dual.
crdXiriYl
o-dXirLYyos
ordXiriyyt
crdXiriyYa
ordXiri-yg
X€'a)v
Xe'ovTOS
Xe'ovTi
XcoVTtt
Xwv
N. A. Y.
G. D.
<|)vXaKe
4>vXdK0iv
4,X4pe
<t>X6poiv
Plural.
o-dXiriYye
a-aXirlyyoiv
XfovTC
XcdvTOiv
N.V.
G.
D.
A.
4>vXaK€s
<{>vXdK(i)v
4>vXa^i
()>vXaKas
<|,Xe'p€s
<|)X€p«V
<j>Xex{/£
c|,XePas
o-dXiriYycs
(TaXirtyYWv
o-dXiri-ylt
o-dXiriYYas
X€OVT€S
XcdvTwv
Xc'ovo-i
Xwvras
40
INFLECTION-.
[§50
6 (YiYavT.)
^ (XajiiraS-)
^ (IXirtS-)
6 T| (opvlO-)
giant.
Singular.
hope.
bird.
K
yC^as
XajJLTrds
IXttCs
fipvis
G.
•yf-yavTOS
Xa(jnrd8os
a-irCSoS
^pviGos
D.
^("yavTi
XafiirdSi
IXorCSt
6pvkdi
A.
•yt-yavTa
Xap-irdSa
IXirCSa
£pvkv (6pvi6a)
V.
•yC-yav
Xajjnrds
Dual
IXuC
6pvi
N. A. V.
yiyavrt
Xa|iirdS€
IXirCSe
dpviOe
G. D.
'Y'''y<*'VTOiv
Xa|j.irdSoiv
Plural.
cXtt^Soiv
6pv£6oiv
N. V.
yCycLvrts
XafXTrdSes
€X7r£8€s
«pvie€$
G.
•yi-yavTCDV
Xa[JLird8a>v
IXir{8a)v
6pv£da)v
D.
yiyda-i
Xa^Jiirdo'i
IXiriVt
Spvko-i
A.
•yC-yavras
XafiirdSas
€Xir(8as
SpvtOas
o (iroificv-)
6 (al«v-)
6 (t|76|XOV-)
6 (Sainov-)
shepherd.
age.
Singular.
leader.
divinity.
K.
iroiH-^v
al(&v
•hy^v-^v
Salfuov
G.
WOlji^VOS
altovos
T|"y€|JLOVOS
SaCfjLovos
D.
iroi(i^vi
alwvi
Tj-yenovt
8a£|xovi.
A.
TTOlfJLCVa
alwva
^Y€|M>va
8a£|ji.ova
V.
WOIJX^V
au&v
Dual.
^-yejM&v
Satfiov
N. A. V.
iroiM^ve
aUv€
^76HOV€
8al(M)V6
G. D.
Trok|Ji^voiv
alwvotv
Flural.
i^"y6(Jidvoiv
8ai)iidvoiv
N. Y.
iroijw'ves
al«v€s
ilJYCfiovcs
8aC|jLovcs
G.
iroifJi^vwv
alwvcov
i\yili6v<av
8ai|xdva)V
D.
iroiiieo-k
alwo-i
T|7€|ld0-l
8aC|ioo-i
A.
iroiiuvas
aluvas
Ti76|jidvfts
8aC|M>vas
§ 50.] THIRD DECLENSION. 41
^(^T,Top-) 6(eiiT-) 6{aK-)
o (erip-) Tj (Aiv-)
orator. hired man. salt.
feeosi.
nose.
Singular.
N.
^^Twp e^s
BXs
e^p
i^ls
G.
pTJTOpOS OtITo's
dXds
etjpos
five's
D.
P'^TOpi 9t]t£
d\£
erjpt
jSivC
A.
^^Topa Gtjto
&Xa
ef]pa
piva
V.
pflTOp O-^IS
e^p
fiCs
N. A. V.
^^Topc fl-fiTe
&\€
efip€
^tv.
G. D.
pTJTOpOlV 0T|TOIV
oXoiv
0i]poiv pivoiv
Plural.
N. Y.
p^TOpCS 6flT€S
&X€S
e<ip€s
^tV€S
G.
pTlTo'pWV eTJTWV
i\«v
6t]p<0v
piVttV
D.
pTJTOpO-t 9T]<r£
dX(r£
0Tlpo-£
^lo-l
A.
p^Topas efJTas
II
. Neuters.
Oripas
pivas
TO (<r<i>|Mir-)
TO (ircpaT-)
t6 (^iraT-)
*0(^y.
ewe?.
Singular.
liver.
N. A.y.
<ro)(jka
ir^pas
^jirop
G.
o-(&|xaTOS
ireparos
Tjiraros
D.
ar^fJiaTb
ir^aTfc
ijlTttTt
N. A. V.
<r«naT€
irepare
■fjiraTe
G.D.
cr(i){idTOiv
TrepdToiv
Plural.
Tjirdroiv
N. A. V,
o'iwjA.aTa
iKpara
fj-iraTa
G.
orupLdrttV
. irepdTttV
TJirdTwv
D.
<r(o|jLaari
ircpao-i.
■fjircuTi
42 INFLECTION. [§ 51.
STEMS ENDING IN 2, OR IN A VOWEL OR DIPHTHONG.
§ 51. 1. Most nouns of the third declension in which
a vowel of the stem directly precedes a vowel in the
case-ending are contracted in some of their cases.
2. The contracted nominative and accusative plural
have the same form. (See, however, § 53, 3, N. 3.)
Note. The collision of vowel sounds in these nouns is often caused
by dropping the final consonant of the stem, usually o or F. (See § 45, 1,
Note.)
STEMS IN ES.
§ 52. 1. Nouns in t;? and o?, gen. eo9, are contracted
whenever e'of the stem precedes a vowel.
Note. A comparison of kindred languages shows that the original
stem of these nouns ended in etr, in which c is dropped before a vowel or
another cr in the case-ending (§ 16, 4, Note.) The genitive Y^veos, there-
fore, stands for an original form 7ej'e(r-os, which, however, is never found
in Greek. (See § 56, Note.) The proper substantive stems change es
to 05 in the nominative singular (as in 7eVos, reixos); the adjective stems
lengthen es to 77s in the masculine and feminine, and retain es in the neu-
ter. (See § 66.) A few adjectives in 17/9775 are used substantively, as
rpL-fjpiiji {triply fitted^ sc. I'aCs), trireme.
2. The nouns (ff) rpiripT}^ (rptTy/oecr-), trireme^ and (to)
761/09 Qyevea-^, race, are thus declined : —
Singular.
K
Tpi^pTlS
Y^/os
G.
{rptTfipeos)
Tpl^pOVS
(yiveos)
•y^vovs
D.
(rpiT^pel-)
Tpll^pCk
(7em)
"y€V€l
A.
{Tpi-Zipea)
Tpil^pTl
•ycvos
V.
rpifipcs
Dual.
■y^vos
-
N. A. V.
(rpi-fipee)
Tpil^pTl
(ykvee)
yivr^
G. D.
(rpL-qpioLv)
TpiTJpOtV
{yeveow)
'ycvotv
§53] THIRD DECLENSION.
Plural.
N. V.
(rptTjpees)
Tpi^pClS
(ykv.a)
•y^
G.
{Tpi-npii^v)
Tpi^pWV
'yevecDV
■ycvwv
D.
Tpi^p€<rt
Y€'ve<ri
A.
(rpi-npeas)
Tpl^pClS
(yevca)
7^
Note 1- Like the singular of rpirjprjs are declined proper names
in T}s, gen. (cos) ovs, as ArjfioadePTjs, 2(OKpa.Tr]s: for accusatives in t}v
see § 60, 1 (6) ; and for the accent of the vocatives Arjfioa-deues^
2a)Kpar€s, &c., see § 25, 1, Note. Tpirjprjs has recessive accent in
the contracted genitive and dative dual and gen. plural. Some other
adjectives in rjs have this in all forms (§ 25, 1, N. ; § 66).
Note 2. When the termination ca is preceded by a vowel, it is
generally contracted into d ; as vyir)s, healthy, accus. sing. vyUa, vyid
(sometimes 171^) ; XP^°^» ^^^t, N. A. V. plur. XP^^ ^^ the dual, ee
is irregularly contracted into rj.
Note 3. Proper names in KKerjs are doubly contracted in the
dative, sometimes in the accusative. UepiKkeijSj Pericles, is thus
declined (see also § 59, 3) : —
N.
{UepiKXerjs)
IlepiKXfis
G.
(UepiKXeeos)
HepiKX^ovs
D.
{ne/3t/c\eei)
(Ile/JiKXeet) IlcpkicXct
A.
(UepiKXeea)
IIcpiKXcd (poet. UepiKXij)
V.
{UepiKXees)
ncpCicXets
Note 4.
In proper names in
KXeTjs Homer has ijos, iji, rjor, Herodotus
^os (for eeos),
et, e'a. In adjectives
in erjs Homer sometimes contracts ee to
et: as, eJUKXeij
J, ace. plur. 6^/cXetas for ei)/cXeeas.
stems in I, T, or ET.
§ 53. Nouns in t? and c (stems in i), v? and v (stems
in L»), contract only the dative singular, and the nomina-
tive, accusative, and vocative plural. Nouns in eu? gener-
ally contract only the dative singular and the nominative
and vocative plural.
1. Most stems in £, with a few in v, change their final
A or u to € in all cases except the nominative, accusative,
and vocative singular.
The nouns (77) TroXt?, citi/ (stem ttoXi-), 7r^;^u9, cubit
(tti/^u), and da-Tv^ city (do-ri;-), are thus declined : —
4A
INFLECTION.
[§53.
Singular.
K
wdXis
irfjxvs
d<rro
G.
TrdXews
irifJX€(as
d<rT€OS
(poet. do-Tcws)
D.
(7r6Xe-0
ir<$X6i
(TTT^Xei) ir^X^'-
(dto-rei')
do-Tei
A.
iroXiv
TTfixW
do-TU
V.
iroXt
wiixv
Surrv
N. A. V.
V($XC€
irifiX€€
d<rT6e
G. D.
iroX^oiv
irTjx^oiv
Plural.
doT^oiv
N. V.
(7r6Xees)
ir<JX€is
(iri/ix€€s) ir^x^^S
(^(TTCa)
tt<mj
G.
iroXewv
ir^Xewv
do-T^iov
D.
woXcoT.
ir^X€<rt
6.<ma-i
A.
(7r6Xeas) ir<JX€is
(TT^X^as) -nix^^S
(darea)
a<m]
Note 1. Nouns in i are declined like aarv] as (ro) o-iVdn-t mus-
tard, gen. a-ivdneos, dat. (a-ivdnei), a-ivciTrci, &c.
Note 2. The genitives in eas and ecov of nouns in i? and vs ac-
cent the antepenult. So genitives in eas of nouns in v. The dual
rarely contracts ee to r] or et.
Note 3. The original i of the stem of nouns in ts (Attic gen. ews) is
retained in Ionic. Thus, irdXis, irdXtos, (TrdXu) iroXi, ttoXlp ; plur. irdXies,
iroXiwv; Horn. iroXieaa-t (Hdt. irdXiai), irdXias (Hdt. iroXis). Homer has
also irbXei (with voXei) and 7r6Xeo-t in the dative. There are also Epic
forms ir6X7]os, 7r6X77i; irdXrjes, TrdXrjas. The Attic poets have a genitive in
COS. The Ionic has a genitive in eos in nouns in us of this class.
2. Most nouns in i;<? retain v and are regular ; as (o)
Ix^v^ (t;^^u-), /sA, which is thus declined : —
SiTigular.
Z>wa^.
Plural.
N.
ixei&s
N.
IX0V.S
G.
IxOvos
N. A. y. ixe^€
G.
i\Qvo>v
D.
Ixeit (Hom. Ixev7)
G. D. IxOvoiv
D.
IxOvo-i
A.
ixBvv
A.
UxeOas) 1x055
V.
IxOv
Note 1. "Eyxe^vs, eel, is declined like IxBvs in the singular, and
like ntjxvs in the plui-al.
§54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 45
Note 2. Adjectives in vs are declined in the masculine like
TTTJxvs, and in the neuter like aa-rv. But the masculine genitive ends
in (OS (like the neuter) ; and eos and ea are not contracted. (See
§ 67.) "Aarv is the principal noun in y; its genitive aareois is
poetic.
3. Nouns in ev? retain ev in the nominative and voca-
tive singular and dative plural ; as (6) ySao-tXeO?, king
(stem /^ao-tXeu-), which is thus declined : —
Dual.
Singular.
N. PaoriXevs
G. PaoriXcws
D. (^aaiXeC) patriXci
A. pao-iXe'a
V. PatriXcv
N. A. V. Pa<rtX^€
G. D. Pao-tX^oiv
Plural.
N. V. (fiaacXhs) pao-iXcts
G. Pao-iXc(i)v
D. Pao-iXcvo-i
A. Pao-kX^ds
Note 1. The stem of nouns in eu? changed ev to €/="(§ 1, Note
2) before a vowel of the ending. Afterwards Fwas dropped, leav-
ing the stem in e. (See § 54, Note.) The cases of these nouns
are therefore perfectly regular, except in cos of the genitive, and
long a and as of the accusative, where ewy, ed, eds come (by inter-
change of quantity) from the Epic t]os, rjd, rjds (Note 4).
Note 2. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) have rjs (con-
tracted from TJ€s, N. 4) in the nominative plural of nouns in cvs; as
iTrnrjs, ^aa-ikrjs, for Imrels, /Sao-iXets. In the accusative plural, edy
usually remains uncontracted ; but here els is sometimes found,
rarely ^s.
Note 3. When a vowel precedes, ecos of the genitive singular
may be contracted into as, and ea of the accusative singular into a;
rarely eas of the accusative plural into as, and ecov of the genitive
plural into au. Thus, Tleifjaievs, Peiraeus, gen Tleipaiews, Tleipaiajs,
accus. Ileipaiea, Uetpaia', [xoeu'r] a TchvJ of measure ; gen. ^ofwy, xowff,
ace. xo^ct' X°"' X°^'*^' X°^^ 5 Acopteus, Dorian^ gen. plur. Acopte'coi/, Aeo-
pitoj/, ace. Aapuast Acopids.
Note 4. In nouns in evs, the Doric and Ionic have e.g. ^acrtkios for
PacriXiojs ; the Epic has pacriXijos, ^aaiXrfC, j8a<rtX^a ; ^aatXTJes, ^aaiX-^uu,
fiacnXrjeffai, paaiXrjas.
STEMS IN OT OR AT.
§ 54, The nouns (o, 17) ySovs, ox or cow (stem Pov-), (17)
ypavs, oZc? woman (stem ypau-), and (17) vavs, ship (stem vav-),
are thus declined : —
46
INFLECTION.
[§55.
Singular.
N.
Povs
7pa{is
vavs
G.
Poos
7pa6s
veto?
D.
Pot
7pd£
VTl£
A.
povv
-ypavv
vaiiv
V.
Pov
Ypau
-Dual.
vav
N. A. V.
P<5.
7pa€
vile
G.D.
pootv
Ypttoiv
veoiv
N. V.
P<J€S
7pa€S
VTies
G.
Po<Sv
7pdwv
V€(5v
D.
povo-C
7pavo-£
vavo-i
A.
Poiis
Ypavs
vavs
Note. The stems of these nouns became /SoF-, ypaF-, and vaF- before
a vowel of the ending (compare the Latin hov-ia and nav-is). Afterwards
F was dropped, leaving /3o-, ypd-, and m-. (See § 53, 3, N. 1.) In Doric
and Ionic, mus is much more regular in its declension than in Attic : —
Dor. »'aDs, pd6s, vdl, vavv ; pi. mcs, vaidv, vavai or udeaai, vdai.
Ion. P7)vs, vr}6s or veSs, vrji, vrja or v^a ; pi. I'^es or j'^es, vr]unf or vew»',
VT^ycf (u-rieacri or v^eaat), vijai or v^as.
In Attic, it changes pa- to yc- or v?;-.
^— STEMS IN OR CI.
§ 55. Some feminines in to contract 6o<;, ot, 6a in the sin-
gular into ov?, ot, and w, and form the vocative singular irregu-
larl}- in ol. The dual and plural (which rarel}^ occur) follow
the second declension. *Hxoi (17), echoy is thus declined : —
Singul
ar.
Dual.
Plural
N.
^X«
N. V. fixot
G.
(.-hxooi)
i\Xo^
N. A. V. f,x«
G. -?,x«v
D.
{■nxoi)
•flXoi
G. D. -^xo^v
D. ^xots
A.
{vx6a)
^x«
A. Tjxovs
V.
^Xol
§57.] THIRD DECLENSION. 47
Note 1. AtSw?, fiJiame, and the Ionic rjays, morning, form their
oblique cases like rjxoy (but with <5, not to, in the accusative singu-
lar) ; as aida>s, aldovs, aldoi, aldco, — Tjtoy, rjovs, ^oi. rja.
Nouns in cos, gen caos are regular, but are sometimes contracted;
as rjpios, hero, rjpioos, ^pio'ii or fjpco, rjpcoa or ijpa), &c.
Note 2. A few nouns in wj/ (uKoiv, image, and arjdav, niglitingale')
occasionally have forms like those of nouns in co ; as gen. (Ikovs,
ar]bovs', accus fiKO); VOC. ar^hoi.
Note 3. The uncontracted forms of these nouns in oos, 6t and
6a are not used. Herodotus has an accusative singular in ovv\ as
*lovp for 'lo), from 'iw, /o, gen. 'lovs.
stems in as, or in as and AT.
§ 56. 1. Neuters in as, gen. ao?, are contracted when the
a of the stem is followed by a vowel ; as (to) yepas, prize, which
is thus declined : —
Singular.
N.A.V. "yepas
G. (yipaos;) yipois
D. (y^po-'O "ytpai
Dual.
N.A.V. {yepae) yipa
G. D. (yepdoiv) yiptfV
Plural.
N.A.V. {yepaa) yipd
G. (yepd'jov) -yepwv
D. yipatn
2. A few neuters in a?, gen. aros, drop t and are contracted
like yipa<s ; in Attic prose only (to) Kcpa?, horti, gen. K€pdTo<i
(/cepao?) Kcpcos ; dat. KepoLTL (Kcpat) Kcpai; ])\uY. Kepdra (Kcpaa)
Kcpd ; gen. Kepdrmv (Kcpacov) Keptuv ; dat. K€paaL.
Note. The original stem of nouns in as, gen. aos, is supposed to
have ended in ao- (§ 52, 1, Note), which dropped a before a vowel or <r, but
retained it in the nominative. Neuters in as, aros, which drop t, have one
stem in at and another in as, the latter aj^pearing in the nominative sin-
gular.
Syncopated Xouus.
§ 57. Some nouns in r}p (stem in cp), gen. cpo?, are sj'n-
copated (§ 14, 2) by dropping € in the genitive and dative
singular. In the dative plural, they change cp to pa before
a-L. The accent is irregular ; the syncopated genitive and da-
tive being oxytone (except in ^rjfjLTJrrjp) , and the vocative
48
INFLECTIOK.
l§57.
singular having recessive accent (§ 25, 1, Note), and ending
in €p as in barytones (§ 48, 2, a).
1. UaTT^p (6), father, and Ovydrrjp (^rj), daughter, are thus
declined : —
Singular.
K.
G.
D.
A.
y.
irariip
{iraripos)
{iraripL)
Trarepa
irdTcp
iraTpos
irarpf
Dual.
0v7dTTip
(dvyar^pos)
(dvyaripi)
Qvyaripa
Qvyarm
0t)7aTpos
OvyarpC
N. A. V.
G. D.
irar^pe
irar^poiv
Plural.
Ovyaript
Ovyaripoiv
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
<7raT€p€S
iraWpwv
iraTpdo-t
irarcpas
fjff
lift
Note 1. Mrjrrjp (17), mother, and yaa-rrjp (fj), hdly, are declined
and accented like narfjp. Thus, prjrrjp has (prjrepos) prjTpos, and (prj-
T€pi) pr]Tpi; plur. prjrepes, prjTepoiV, &c.
*A(TTr]p (o), s/ar, has dtTTpdai in the dative plural, but is otherwise
regular (without syncope).
Note 2. The uncontracted forms of all these nouns are often used by
the poets, who also syncopate other cases of dvydriqp.
2. *Ai/7jp (6), man, drops c whenever a vowel follows cp, and
inserts 8 in its place (§ 14, N. 2). It is thus declined : —
Singular.
Dual.
Plural.
N.
dvTJp
N.
V. (dvipes) &v8p€S
G.
(audpos) dvSpds
N. A. V. (dpipe &v8p€)
G.
{dp^pcau) dvSpoiv
D.
(dpepL) dv8pC
G. D. (dpipoip) dvSpoiv
D.
dv8pd<ri
A.
{dv^pa) dvSpa
A.
{dp^pas) &v8pas
V.
dvcp
3. The proper name Ar)p.rjTr]p syncopates all the oblique
cases, and then accents the Jirst syllable. Thus, gen. (Ary/xr;-
T€po<s ) A-i^p,r]Tpo<s ; dat. (Arj/jn/jTepL) Aiy/xiyrpt ; accus. (A>7/x>yTcpa)
Arj/xrjTpa ', VOC. dL-qfxrjTcp. ^
§ 60.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 4^
Gender ot the Third Declension.
§ 58. The gender of many nouns in this declension must
be learned by observation. A few general rules ^ however, may
be given.
1 . The following are masculine : substantives ending in
dvy Tjv, €v?, most of those in rjp, wp, and wi/ (gen. wvos), and all
that have vto<s in the genitive. Except (rj) (fypi^v, mind,
2. The following are feminine : those in av?, t7j<; (gen. r>7-
Tos), as (gen. aSos), <o or ws (gen. ovs), and most of those
in IS.
3. The following are neuter : those in a, «, v, apy op, os, and
as (gen. aros Or aos) .
Dialects.
§ 59. 1. Gen, and Dat. Dual. Homeric ouv for otir.
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric cao-i, eo-t, cro-t, for <n.
3. Most of the uncontracted forms enclosed in () in the para-
digms, which are not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or
Herodotus ; and some of them occur in the Attic poets. For spe-
cial dialectic forms of some of these nouns, however, see § 52, 2,
N. 4: § 53, 1, N. 3, and 3, K 4; § 54, Note; § 55, N. 3.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
§ 60. 1. («) Nouns which belong to more than one de-
clension are called heterocUtes. Thus o-kotos, darkness^ is usu-
ally declined like Xoyo? (§ 41), but sometimes like yeVos
(§ 52, 2). So OtStVovs, Oedipus^ has genitive OtStVoSos or
OiStVov, dative OtStVoSt, accusative OtStVoSa or Olhurow.
{h) Especiall}^, proper names in 77s (gen. cos) of the third
declension (except those in K\ir}$) have also an accusative in
-qv like those of the first ; as Arjfxoa-Oivrj^y accus. Arjfioa-Oivrjv or
Arjfxoa-OivT]^ SwKparT^s, ^(HKpaTyjv OX %ii)Kparr). So nOUns in ds
(gen. avros or avos) have poetic forms like the first declen-
4
50 INFLECTION. [§ 60.
sion ; as no\v8a/xa9, voc. IloXvSa/xa (Horn.) ; Ata?, accus.
Aiai/.
2. Nouns which are of different genders in different cases
are called heterogeneous; as (6) air os, corn ^ plur. (ra) o-tra ;
(6) h€<TfxQ<i^ chain ^ (ot) Sea-fxoi and (ra) Sea-jxd.
3. Defective nouns have only certain cases ; as omp,
dream^ 6(fieXo<;, use (only nom. and accus.) ; (t^i/) i/i<^a, swow
(only accus.).
4. Indeclinable nouns have one form for all cases. These
are chiefly foreign words, as 'A8a/x, 'lo-parjX ; and names of
letters, "Akcfyay B^ra, &c.
5. The following are the most important irregular nouns : —
I. '^Aidrjs, HadeSy gen. ov, &c. regular. Horn. 'AlBtjs, gen. ao or
tm, dat. ,J7, ace. rjv; also *At6os, "Ai'St (from stem *AV8-).
<- 2. am| (6), l-m^r, auuKTos, &e., voc. am^ (poet. <W, in addressing
Gods).
3. "Aprjs, AreSj^ApeoSi or "Ape©?, ("Apet) ''Apet, (^ApcaYhpr) or^AprjUy
'Apes (also 'Apes).
4. Stem (dpv), gen. (rov or r^s) api;o?, /«m/>, dpvi, apva\ pi. api/ey,
dpvcov, dpvdai, lipuas. In the nom. sing. dp.v6i (2d decl.) is used.
*- 5. yoKa (to)^ milk, ydXaKTos, ydXaKTi, SiC.
I. 6. ydia; (jo)-, knee, yovaros^ yovari, &c. (from stem yowir-); Ton.
and poet, yovvaros, yovvariy &c. ; llom. also gen. yovvos, dat. yovvl^
pi. youi'a, yovvoiv, yovv€(T(TU
7. yijj/jj (ij), W{/e, yvvaiKos. yvvaiKt, yvvaiKa, yvpai] dual yvvaL<€j
yvvaiKoiv; pi. yvvoLKes, yvvaiKav, yvvai^i, ywaiKaS'
8. SeVSpoi; (to), /ree, ou, reg. (Ion. fieVSpf oi/) . dat. sing. 8ei/8p«;
pi. dev8p€(Ti.
9. 8opu (to), spear (ci. yow), bdparos, 86paTi or Sopi'; pi. dopaTa,
&c. Ion. and poet, dovparos, &c. ; also gen. Sovpos, dat. fioupi, 6opi,or
dopei', dual SoOpe; pi. dovpa, dovpau, dovpeo-ai.
10. Zfvs (iEol. Aevs)j -^eu.s', Alos, Ait, Ai'a, Zeu. Ion. and poet. Ztj-
voSf Zrjvif Zrjva.
II. Ge'pis (t)), Justice (also as proper name, Themis), gen. Gept-
8os, Oinio-Tos, QefiiTos, Qifiios (Hdt.) ; dat. QeynaTi \ acc. Qepnara or
§60.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 51
Gefiiv; voc. e/ftt; pi. Befjuares, Oifiia-Tas'-, all lon. or poet. In Attic
prose, indeclinable in defiis earCjfas est.
12. 6pi^ (rj), Jiair, rpixos, Tpixh &c., 6pi^t (§ 17, 2, Note).
13. Kapd (to), head, poetic; in Attic only nom., accus., and voc.
sing. Horn. Kapi], gen. KaprjTos, Kap^aros, Kpdaros, Kparos', dat. Kapj/rt,
Kaprjari, Kpdari, Kpdri (trag. Kapq) ; acc. (tou) Kpdra, (to) Kaprj or /cap ;
plur. nom. Kapd, KaprjuTa, KpduTa, gen. KpuToyp; dat. Kpaai', acc. like
nom. with (rovs) KpaTas; nom. and acc. pi. also Kaprjpa, gen. Kapr)-
V(OP.
14. Kpipov (to), lily, ov, &c. In plural also Kpipca (Hdt.) and Kpi-
V€(ri.
C- 15. KvoiP (6, T]), dog, voc. kvop: the rest from stem *cvv-, /cuvo?, Kvpiy
Kvpa, pi. Kvues, Kvpatp, Kvai, KVPaS'
16. \as (6), stone, Hom. \aas, poetic; gen. \dos (or Xdov)^ dat.
Xai*, acc. \dap, \ap ; dual Xae ; plur. Xawv, Xaecro-i.
17. XiTra (Hom. XiV, generally with iKala, oil), fat, oil: proba-
bly \iiTa is neut. accus., and Xi'rr* is dat. for XtTrt. See Lexicon.
18. fidpTvs (6, fj), loiiness, fidpTvpos, &c., dat. pi. iidpTvai.
19. p.d(TTi^ (fj), whip, gen. fxdaTtyoSf &c., Hom. dat. ixdarl, acc.
fidarip-
^ 20. ois (f)), sheep, ol6s, oil, oiv', pi. oJes, oIojp, olaip, olas. Hom. ois,
oios, OLP, oces, 010)1/, otea-a-t (olecri, occrcn), ois. Aristoph. has dat. ot.
^ 21. opeipos (6), opeipop (to), dream, gen. ov; also opap (to), gen,
opeipaTOs, dat. oi/eipart; plur. opeipara, opciparoup, opeipaai.
22. oo-cre (tw), dual, eyes, poetic; plur. gen. oaacop, dat. oa-arois or
oo-(rowrt.
23. oppts (6, fj), bird, see.§ 50. Also, from stem opi/t-, pi. Sppeis,
opp€a>u, acc. oppeis or opj/i;.
, 24. ou? (to), ear, toros-, wrt; pi. ^Ta, qotcop (§ 25, 3, N. 1), wo-t.
Hom. also gen. ovaTos; pi. oCaTa, ovaai.
25. nw^ (^), Pnyx, Uvkpos, Uvkpi, UiiKpa (for IIi/vk-os, &c.).
/ 26. irp€(T^vs (6), oW man, elder (properly adj.), poetic, acc npe-
tr^vp (as adj.), voc. TrptV/Su; pi. irpea^eis (Ep. npea^rjes), chiefs, elders:
the common word in this sense is Trpea-^vTrjs, distinct from Trpea^ev-
rfjs. ripeo-jSu? == ambassador, w. gen. npeaiSeas, is rare and poetic in
sing.; but common in prose in plur., rrfiealSeis, TrpcVjSecoi/, np€(r^€ai,
TrpeVjSfts (like n^x^s): Trpeo-jScur^y, ambassador, is common in sing.,
but rare in plural.
^ 27. nvp (to) , fire, nvpos, nvpl ; pi. (to) irvpd, esp. loatch-fres.
28. (TiT€os or (TTreios (to), cave, Epic; g-TreiovSf air^i, (nreicDP, aTtfjeaat
or (TTrecrai.
52 INFLECTION. [§61.
!- 29. vScop (jo)^ water, vdaros, vdari, &c., dat. plur. v8a<Ti.
'■ 30. vioj (6), son, viov, &c. reg. ; also (from stem vu-') vleo?, (via)
vieT, (utea), vUe, vleuiv, (vUes) vUls, viicov, vUa-i, (vteas) vUls. liom.
also gen. vlos, dat. vli, ace. via, dual ulfj pi. vfes, i^tao"tj via?.
f 31. ;)(etp (17), hand, p^fipo?, ^"pi? &c. ; but;(fpoTi/ (poet, x^^poiv) and
;(fpo-i (poet. x^'-P^^^'' o^* X^^P^^O '• post, also x^pos? X^P*' ^^•
32. (xoos) xovs (6), a measure, x"^^^ X°^^ X^^^^ X^^^^> X^"^ (p^- ^o^St
§ 54). Att. also gen. xof-i^^ &c. (§ 53, 3, N. 3).
33. ix^os) xows (6), mound, xoos, xoi. Xoi^J' (like /Sows, § 54).
i> 34. XP'*'^ (o)' ^^'"> xP'"'"^^' XP^'^'^f XP^'""? poet, also xpoo^j XP°^»
Xpoa; dat. xp<p (only iii f'" XP9' ^(^o,?').
LOCAL ENDINGS.
§ 61. These endings ma}^ be added to the stem of a noun
or pronoun to denote place : —
-61, denoting where; as aXXo^t, elsewhere; ovpavoOi, in
heaven,
-Oev, denoting Wicwce ; as oLKo6ev,from home; avToOcv, from
the very spot.
-8c, (-^€ or -o-e) , denoting whither ; as MeyapaSc, to Megara ;
otKttSe (irreg.), homeward.
Note 1. In Homer, the forms in -61 and -6iv are governed by a
preposition as genitives; as 'iXio^i ivpo, hefore Ilium; i^ aXoOev, from
the sea.
Note 2. Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found
with the ending t in the singular and m in the plural; as 'la^/iot, at
the Isthmus ; oIkoi (oIko-i), at home; 'AOrjvrja-i, at Athens. These
forms (and indeed those of § 61) are commonly classed among
adverbs.
Note 3. The Epic ending <^i or ^iv forms a genitive or dative
in both singular and plural. It is sometimes locative, as Kkialrjcjyi. in
the tent ; and sometimes it has other meanings of the genitive or
dative, as i3ij;^t, with violence. So after prepositions; as irapa vaixpiy
hy the ships.
§62. J ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 53
ADJECTIVES.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
§ 62. 1. Most adjectives in o«? have three endings, o?,
rj, ov. The masculine and neuter are of the second de-
clension, and the feminine is of the first; as ao(j)6<;,
aocj)!], <T0(l>6v, wise.
2. If a vowel or p precedes 09, the feminine ends in d ;
as afto9, d^La, a^iovy worthy. But adjectives in 009 have
07] in the feminine, except those in poo<; ; as a7r\oo9,
dirXoTj, dirXooVi simple ; ddpoo^y dOpoa, ddpoov, crowded.
3. ^o(f>6^y wise, and a|to9, worthy^ are thus declined : —
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
<ro<[>ds
(ro(f>ov
<ro4>w
<ro<|>dv
<ro(j>f]s
o-o<}>fi
<ro<|>TJv
0-04,^
<ro4>dv
o-o<|)ov
(ro({>(C
<ro<j)dv
<ro(j>dv
Dual.
>os
d|lov
diCa
dgias
d^ttt
d^iav
d|ia
agiov
d|Cov
dlCcp
dgiov
dgtov
N. A. V.
G.D.
<ro<{>(&
O"0«j>0lV
<ro(|)d
(ro<}>aiv
0-04) Ji
<ro<j>oiv
Plural.
d|Ca>
dgi'okv
d|i'a
dgCaiv
d^l'o)
dgCoiv
N. V.
G.
D.
(ro(f>oC
<ro<|)wv
<ro({>ois
o-o<|)aC
o-o<j>wv
o-o(t>ais
<ro<j>d
<ro4)wv
(ro({>ois
d^lois
d|iai
d^Ccdv
d^tats
d^icov
d|£ois
A. a'o<j>ovs (ro<t>ds o-o<|>d d|Covs d^ias &|ia
So fxaKpos, fiaKpa, fxaKpoVy long ; gen. /lUKpov, /xafcpa?, fiaKpov ;
dat. fiaKptOy ficucpa, p.aKp^ ; acc. fxaKpov, p-aKpav, fiaKpoVj &C. , like
All participles in os are declined like o-o<^os.
54
INFLECTION.
[§63.
Note. Proparoxytones in os have recessive accent also in the
feminine ; as a|tos, ci^iai (not d^lai. like d^id). For the accent of
(ou in the feminine of the genitive plural of barytones, see § 25, 2.
§ 63. Some adjectives in os, especially compounds, have
only two endings, os and ov, the feminine being the same as
the masculine. They are declined like o-o<^os, omitting the
feminine; as oAoyos, aXoyov; gen. dA.oyov; dat. dA-oyw, &c.
Note. Some adjectives in os may be declined with either two
or three endings.
§ 64. A few adjectives of the second declension end in
OS and wv, and are declined like vews and avwycwv (§ 42, 2).
"lAcws, gracious, and dyrjp(x)Sj free from old age, are thus de-
clined : —
Singular.
N. V.
G.
D.
a€«v
Dual.
L-^i\pm
d^ifipw
d7^p<p
d7^p«v
d7^p«v
dyifipw
d7^p({i
d-YTJpwv
N. A. V.
G. D.
aea>v
V\«pv
Plural.
dY^pca
ay^ptpv
dv^po,
dYip^v
N. V.
G.
D.
A.
tXcwv
aecps
a€«
I'Xcwv
aeo)
dv^pio
d-yTJpwv
dynpws
d7^p«S
a7^pw
d-y^pwv
dv^ptps
dYifjpw
For the accent of iXfws, see § 22, Note 2.
§ 65. Many adjectives in cos and oos are contracted. Xpv-
creo<;, golden^ dpyu/jcos, of silver, and (XTrAo'os, Simple, are thus
declined : —
/
N.
(XpiJo-eos)
Xpv<rovs
(XPi^o-^a)
Xpvo-f]
iXpiffeov)
Xpvo-ovv
G.
{Xpvueov)
Xpvo-ov
(X/awo-^as)
Xpvo-f]S
{XPV<X€0V)
Xpv<rou
D.
ixpvaeu})
Xpv<r<3
(Xpv^o-^g)
XpVOrTJ
(Xpvcr^v)
Xpv<r«p
A.
iXPv<T€ov)
Xpv<rovv
(Xpuo-e'ai')
Xpvo-iiv
{Xpv<Teov)
Xpvo-ovv
§65.] ADJECTIVES— FIllST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 55
G. (xpv(y^oiv) xpvo-okv
N. (xp^(J'€oi) xpvo-oi
G. (xpi'C^wj') \pv(r(av
D. (xpi'O'^ots) xpv<roi$
A. ixpvaiovs) xpv<rovs
Dual.
(xpvo-^a)
(Xpuo'e'ati')
Plural.
(XpiJo-eat)
{Xpv(reo}v)
(Xpi'O'^atj)
(xpvo-^aj)
Xpvo-a
Xpvoratv
(xpfcr^otv) xpvfTOiv
Xpv<rai
Xpv<rwv
Xpvo-ats
Xpvo-ds
(XpiJo-ea) \pva-a.
(Xpva'4(ov) "jfjpva-iov
(XP^ceois)
(XP^aca)
Xpvo-ots
Xpvo-a
^ Ck
■■ CM
Singular. ^
N.
G.,
D.
A.
{dpyipeo^) dp^vpovs
(dpyvpiov) dpYvpoO
{dpyvp4({}) dpYvpw
{dpyjjpeov) dpYvpovv
{dpyvpiaj
(dpyvp^as)
idpyvp^q.)
{dpyvpiav)
Dual.
dpYvpa
dpYvpds
dpYvp^
dpYvpav
(dpy\jp€ov) dpYvpovv
(dpyup^ov) dpYvpov
{dpyvp^<{}) dpYvpw
{dpy6p€ov) dpYvpoiiv
N.
G.
(dpyvpiu) dp7vp(&
(dpyvpioLv) dpYvpoiv
(dpyvpka)
{dpyvpiaiv)
Plural.
dpYvpa
dpYvpaiv
{dpyvpio}) dpYvpw
(dpyvpioip) dpYvpoiv
N.
G.
D.
A.
(dpyOpeoi) dp-yvpot
{dpyvpioju) dpYupwv
(dpyvp'eoi^) dpYvpois
{apyvpiovi) dpYvpovs
{dpyipeai)
{dpyvpkwv)
(dpyvpeais:)
(dpyvp^as)
dpYvpat
dpYupwv
dpYupais
dpYvpas
(dpyipea) dpyvpa
{dpyvpiuv) dpYvpwv
(dpyvp^ois) dpY^pots
(dpyvpea) dpYvpd
N. (dirXSos) dirXovs
G. {dir\6ov) dirXov
D. (d7rX6v) dirX^
A. {drXdov) dirXovv
N. (a7rX6w) dirXu
G. (dTrXootf) dTrXoiv
Singular.
{dir\6rj) dirX'S)
{dTr\6r]s)
{dir\6r])
{dirXorjv)
Dual.
dirXT]S
dirXfi
dirXTiv
(dTrXoa) dirXd
(dirXdaiu) duXaiv
{dir\6ov) dirXovv
{dirXdov) dirXov
(airXoy) dirX^
(d7rX6oj') dirXovv
{dir\6fjj) dirXcS
idirXSoiv) dirXoiv
M
INFLECTION.
[§66.
N. (a7rX(5ot) dirXoi
G. {atrXocov) dirXtSv
D. "(d7rX6ots) dirXois
A. (d7rX6oi's) dorXovs
Plural.
(cLTrXoai)
(d7rX6a7j')
(aTrXoais)
'(d7rX6as)
dirXai
dirXwv
dirXais
dirXds
(dTrXoa) d'lrXd
(dTrXowj') dTrXwv
(dTrXoots) dirXois
(dTrXoa) dirXd
For the accent, see § 43, Note. For irregular contraction, see
§ 9, 2, Note; and § 9, 3, Note. No distinct vocative forms occur.
THIRD DECLENSION.
§ 66. Adjectives belonging only to tlie third declen-
sion have two endings, the feminine being the same as
the masculine. Most of these end in t;? and e?, or in (ov
and ov. 'AXtjOtJ^, true^ ireTrcovy ripe^ and evBalfMav, happi/,
are thus declined : —
Singular.
M. F. N.
N. dXtje^S dXTi0es
G. (dX^j^^os) dXt^Oovs
D. {aXrjdi'C) dXTjOei
A. (flKrtdka) dXtiGf] dXTi0^s
V. dXrie^
Dual.
N. A. V. (oX-neke) dXTi0T)
G. D. (akriOeoLv) dX-qOoiV
Plural.
N. V. (dXTj^ees) dXriGcis (dX7;^ea) dXTi0t|
G. (p.\7}6ku}v) dXT]6(3v
D. dXtieeVt
A. (okTidta^) dXT]6eis (dX7;^eo) dXTjOt]
Singular.
M. F. N.
N. irerrwv ir^irov
G. ir^irovos
D. ire'irovt
A. . ir^irova ir^irov
V. ir^irov
M. F. N.
€iu8aC|jt,(i}v €{l8ai(JLOV
€v8aifi.ovos
€v8aip,ovt
cv8aC|j.ova €{!8ai|xov
eiS8ai|iov
§ 67.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 57
Dual.
N. A. V. ir^irov«
€v8aC|iov€
G. D. ireirdvoiv
Plural.
€v8ai|idvoiv
N. V. ir^irov€S ireVova
e48at|iov€s evSatnova
G. ireirdvwv
e{l8ai{JLdvwv
D. ire'iroo'i
€v8a((io(n,
A. ir^irovas ir^irova
€v8tt((iovas €v8aljiovtt
For the accent of the form exjdaifiov see § 25, 1, Note.
Note 1. One adjective in av, ckwj/, eKovaa, €k6v, toilling, has
three endings, and is declined like participles in cav (§ 68). So its
compound, aK<ov (ae/ccji/), unwilling, oKovaa, Z.kov.
Note 2. The poetic i8pt?, knowing^ has ace. Ibpiv, voc. iSpt, nom.
pi. i5pt€y.
Note 3. Adjectives compomided of nomis and a prefix are
generally declined like those nomis ; as evcXnis, hopeful, gen. evc'X-
TTiSos; fvxapis, graceful, gen. evxdpiros (§ 50). But comi3ounds of
TraTrjp and fi^Tjyp end in top (gen. opos), and those of iroXis in is
(gen. idos).
Note 4. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one
ending, which is both masculine and feminine; as (f)vyds, (f>vyd8os,^
fugitive; anan, oTraiSoy, childless; dyvas, dyvu>Tos, unknown; avakKis,
dvakKidos, weak. The oblique cases occasionally occur as neuter.
A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first declen-
sion, ending in as or rjs', as yevmbas, noble, gen. yevvddov*
FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED.
§ 67. 1. Most adjectives of tliis class end in u9, eta, v,
or in et?, ecra-a, ev.
Three end in a?, — Tra?, iraaa, iravy all; fieka^, fiiXaivaj
fiiXavy black; and Td\a<;, Tokatva, ToKaVi wretched.
2. rXvKv<;, sweety x^pieL^^ graceful., 7rd<;, all, and fiiXa^,
black, are thus declined : —
Singular.
N. yVvkiIs YXvKcta -yXvKv
G. 7\vK€OS ■yXvKtias -YXyKcos
D. (y\vKiC) -yXvKefc "ikvKdq. (yXvKiX) -yXv^t
A. ^XvKvv ■yXvKciav ^Xvkv
V. YXvki» . •yXvKcta -yXvKV
58
INFLECTION.
[§
Dual
N.
A. V,
YXvK^e
yXvKiia
yXvkIc
G.
D.
■yXvKeoiv'
yXvKiCaiv
Plural.
'yXvKeoiv
N.
V.
(yXvKks) -yXvKcis -YXuKctai
YXvKc'a
G.
•yXuKcwv
■yXvKciwv
■yXuKewv
D.
•yXvKc'cri
YXvKcCais
•yXvKc'o-t
A.
{yXvKias) y\
.VKcis 'yXvKeias
YXvKca
Singular.
N.
\apUis
XapCca-o-a
Xopfcv
G.
XapicvTos
Xapic'o-o-Tis
Xapi€VTOS
D.
XapUvri
Xapw'o-o-ti
XaptcvTt
A.
XapCcvra
Xapico-o-av
Xctpttv
V.
Xaptcv
Xapleo-ora
Dual.
XapCev
N.
A. V.
XapCevTc
XapicVo-a
Xap£€VT€
G.
D.
Xapi^VTOiv
Xapi^o-o-aiv
PUral.
XapUvTOkv
N.
XapUvres
XapUcro-ai
XapCevra
G.
\apUvT(av
Xapiecro-wv
XapievTwv
D.
XapUa-i
Xapico-o-ais
Xap£€<ri
A.
Xaptevras
Xapi€'(r<ras
XapievTtt
V.
XapUvTcs
\a.pUfTfrax
XopCcvra
Singular.
'
N.
was iratra
irav p.^Xas
)ji.cXaiva |i€Xav
G.
iravTos irdoTis
TTttVTos jic'Xavos
|i6XaCvT]s jAcXavos
D.
iravrC "jracrg
TravxC fJLcXavi
jAcXaCvT) fiAavt
A.
TrdvTO voLQ-av
irav jxtXava
fxcXaivav (Jtc'Xav
V.
lie'Xav
fxe'Xaiva ficXav
Dual.
N. A. V.
G. D.
p.(Xav€ |Ji(Xa(va fxtXavc
txcXdvoiv fxcXaCvaiv fxeXdvoiv
§68.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 59
Plural.
N.
irdvT€S
irao-ai
irdvTa
|j.^Xav€S
G.
TrdvTwv
irao-wv
irdvTwv
(jLcXdvwv
D.
TrdoT,
irdo-ais
irdo-t
(jLcXao-i
A.
irdvras
irdcras
irdvTtt
(jLcXavas
V.
p.£Xavcs
fieXaivai |j.cXava
|jLeXaivwv |JL€Xdv(i)V
(leXaCvais )J.eXa(ri
[leXaivas |ieXava
ficXaLvai (teXava
For the feminine of /xe'Xas, see § 16, 7, Ql).
Note 1. The Ionic feminine of adjectives in vs ends in ca or
€t;. Hom«r has evpfa (for tvpvv) as accusative of eupvs, tcide. For
the dative plural of adjectives in eis, see § 16, 6, N. 2.
Note 2. Some adjectives in T^ets, jyeo-o-a, ^ei/, contract these end-
ings to ,^y, Tjaaa^ ^v; and some in dfty, oeaaa, ofv, contract these to
oCp, ovaaa, ovv\ as rifxijfis^ riyirjeacTa, Tifxrjev, — Tiixfjs, Ttfxrja-aa, Tifirjv, —
valualAe; gen. rt/xj^fj/ros, Tip.r)eaaT]s, — TifirjVTOs, Tin^(T<rTjs, &C. So
TrXaKoeis, nXaKoeaaa, likaKOiv — irKaKovs, TrXaKovaaa, nXoKovv, — Jlal ;
gen. TrXaKOfVTosi nXaKoeaarjs, — TrXaKoiiPTOs, TrXaKoiKra-rjs ] but not (f)a>-
v^eiSy cf)(ov^€a(ra, cfxovrjevj vocal.
Note 3. One adjective in rjv, — T€pT]v, repetva, Tfpev. tender (Latin
tenej'), gen. repevos, Tepeiurjs, repei/o?. &c., — is declined after the
analogy of fifXas. So aparjv (or appr}v)y aparev, male, gen. ap(T€voSi
which has no feminine form.
§ 68. To this class belong all active and all aorist
passive participles. Avwv, loosing^ lard^y erecting^ rt^ei?,
placing^ heiKvv^y showing (present active participles of
\vwy l'(TT7}/jii, Tt67]fiiy and BeLfcvv/uuL), and XeXu/cco?, having
loosed (perfect active participle of Xuw), are thus de-
clined : —
Singular.
Xvov i<rrds icrrdora iordv
XvovTos tcrrdvTos i<rTd<rT]S icrTdvTOS
XvovTi lo-TdvTt icrrdoTi tcrrdvTt
Xvov icrrdvTa i<rra<rav i(rra.v
Xvov lOT-ds ia-raa-a la-rav
N.
Xi;a>v
Xvov<ra
G.
XvOVTOS
Xvov<rT]s
D.
XvOVTl
Xvovo-T)
A.
Xvovra
Xvovo-av
V.
XV6>V
Xvov<ra
Dual.
N.V.A. XvovT€ Xvovo-a Xvovt€
0. D XvdvTOiv Xvovcaiv XvdvToiv
io-rdvT€ lOT-do-a icrrdvTe
lo-TdvTOtv lO'Tda'aiv icrrdvToiv
60
INFLECTION.
[§68.
Plural.
N. V. XvovT€S Xvovcat Xvovra
G. ■ XvovTwv Xvov<r(Sv Xvovtwv
D. Xvovcrt Xvovo-ais Xvovo-i
A. Xvovras Xvovo-as Xvovxa
lorrdvTcs to-Tolo-at lOTavra
la-TavTwv to-Taorwv io-toLvtwv
ItTTclo-t ItTTdcrais lo-rdo-i
lirravTas l<rTd<ras icTTdvTa
The accent of the neuter singular appears in povkevtou, ^ovXev-
ovaa, ^ovXevop. (§ 26, N. 2.)
Singular.
N. BciKVvs SciKvvo-a SciKVvv riQiCs riGctcra tiO^v
G. SetKvvvTos 86iKvva-t]s Scikvvvtos tiGcVtos Ti0£larT]s tiOc'vtos
D. 8€lKVVVTl 8€lKVV(r|| SctKVVVTU TlOe'vTl Tl0€t<rTJ TiOe'vTt
A. 8eiKvuvTtt 8€tKvvo-av 8€tKvvv Ti06VTa Ti0eio-av tiOc'v
V. 8€UKVVS 8€lKVV0-a 8CIKVVV TlOeCs Tl0€tO-a T10€V
Jhcal.
N.A.V. SctKVVVTC 8€tKVi3(ra 8€IKVVVT€ T10^VT€ Tl9da-a Tl.0eVT€
G. D. 86lKVVVTOI,V 8€tKVV0-aiV 8€IKVVVT01V TlGc'VTOtV Tt0eio-aiV T10€'VTOIV
Plural.
N. V. 8€iKvvvT€S 8€iKvv<rai SciKvvvra riQivn^ Ti0€i(rai Ti0£'vTtt
G. 8€lKVt5vTa>V 8€tKVV<r«V 8€IKVVVT6)V TtGeVTWV Tl0€l<r<OV tv0€'vt«v
D. 86iKvi)(ri 8ekKVv<rais 8€iKvv(rt Ti0€tort Ti0€ko-ais Ti0ctcrt •
A. . 8€iKvvvTas 8€iKVV(ras 8€iKVvivTa TtG^vras Tt06ioros Tt0^vTtt
Singular.
N.
XcXuKcos
X^XvKDta
XeXvKds
G.
X€Xvk<5tos
XeXvKvias
XeXvKdros
D.
XtXvKOTt
XcXvKvi<;i
XeXvKOTt
A.
XeXvKOTa
XcXvKvtav
XeXvkos
V.
XcXvKi&s
XcXvKvia
Dual.
XcXvKds
N. A. y.
XeXvK^re
KtXvKuCa
XtXuKOTC
G. D.
XtXvKdroiv
XeXvKviaiv
XeXuKOTOiv
§ 69.] ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 61
Plurah
N. y.
Xc\vK<$T6S
XeXvKviai
, XeXvKora
G.
XeXvKOTcov
XeXvKviwv
XcXvKOTttV
D.
XeXvKd(ri
XeXvKviais
XeXvKoci
A.
XeXvKoras
XeXvKvias
XeXvKora
NToTE. All participles in (ov are declined like \va>v: for ova-a in
the feminine, for oi/r-o-a, see § 16, 6, N. 1. Participles in ovs are
declined like Xvov, except in the nominative and vocative singular;
as fiiSouff, StSoOo-a, hihov, giving; gen. bihovros, hibovar}s \ dat. hihovri,
tibova-jj, &c. Aorist active participles in as are declined like taras ;
as Xvcras, "Kixraa-a, Xvarav, having loosed; gen. XixravTos, 'Kvcrda-rjs ; dat.
Xvo-avTi, Xvado-t], &c. Aorist passive participles in eis are declined
likeri^fts-; us Xvdfls, \v6elaa, XvOev, loosed ; gen. \v6evTos,\v6€i(Tr]s;
dat. \v6kim, Xvdfiarj, &c. When the accent differs from that of the
paradigm, it follows the general principle (§ 25, 1). See § 117, 2.
§ 69. Participles in dcov, ecov, and ocov are contracted.
Tcfidcov, ri/jb(ov, honoring, and (j)c\ecov, (pckcov, loving, are
(declined as follows : —
N. {rifiaiov) Ti\i(av
Singular.
{rifxaovaa) Ti}JLc5(ra (rifmov) ri|i.c5v
G. (Ti/idovTos) TifjLwvTOS {TifjLaoijo-rjs) Tk)i,(d(rr]S {ti/jiAovtos) thji«vtos|
D. {rifmovTi) TifjLwvTi {TL/j.ao6<T7}) Ti|JL(6(rg {rifidouTi) ti)jlwvti
{TifjLOLOvaav) Ti\i(aarav {{Tifmov) rifjiuv
(xi/^doi'cra) Tijiuca {rifidou) riuuv
A. {rifidovTa) ri[Lu>vTa
V. {Tljxduv) Tl)JL(0V
Dual.
N. (Ttytidoj'Te) ri|iwvT€ {Tifiaoia-a) Tifi(o(ra (rifidovre) rifiuvrc
G. (TifiadvToiv) Ti|JL«SvTOiv (Tt;ctaoiJa-atJ') Ti{JL(0(raiv (TifiadPToiv) ri^utvrow
N. (rt/Ac£o»'res) ri^JitovTCS
G. (TifxadvTWv) Ti(uavT(i)v
D. (ri/idouo-t) Ti)xw(ri
A. (rifidovras) ri^icovras
V. (rt/idoj'Tes) TtjiwvTCS
Plural.
(riixdovcrai) Ti|j.ci><rai (rifidovTa) TifJic^vra
(rt/iaouo-wv) rifioxruv {Ti/naopruv) tijk&vtuv
(rt/iaoiycratj) Tip,c&orais {rifidovcrt) Tkp.&>(ri
(rt/iaoi/cras) Tip,w<ras (riyudoj^a) Ti|iwvTa
(rt/iciouo-at) Ti|i,(o(rai. . (rifidoPTo) ti|ji«vto
62
INFLECTION.
[§70.
Singular.
N. (jf)CK4(j}v) <{>i\wv {<}>L\eovaa) <}>iXo€(ra {(fnXiov) c|>iXovv
G. {(piXeovTos) <})iXovvTos (^iXeoucnjs) <j>iXot»<rT]s (^tXeoi/ros) <{>iXovvtos
D. {(piX^ovTi) 4>i,XovVTi {(piXeoOarj) <})iXovo-t) (jpLkeovTi) <^iXovvTi
A. {(f>i.\iovTa) <J>tXovvTa {(pCkiovaav) (}>iXou(rav {(J)l\^ov) <{>iXovv
V. {(ptX^wv) ^CKiav {jpCKiovaa) <j>iXoO(ra {(piXeov) <|>iXovv
N. (tpiX^ovre) <|>iXoCvt€ (0tXeoi5(ra) ({>iXov(ra ((ptX^ovre) 4>iXovvtc
G. {(piXedyroip) <}>iXoi»vtoiv (jpiX^odaaiv) 4>iXov(rabV (^tXeoirotj') <}>iXovvtoiv
Plural.
N. {(piXiovrei) <})iXovvt€S {(piXiovcrai) <}>iXov{rai {(piXiovra) ^iKovvra
G. (^tXeojo-wv) ({>iXovVT(i)v (^tXeouo-tDj/) (}>iXov(r(ov {(f)iX€6uTU}v) <{>iXoi!)vT(i)V
D. (^(pLX^ovai) (|>iXov(n. (^tXeoucrats) <|>iXov(rais (^iXeovtrt) (|>iXo€(ri
A. (0iX^oj/Tas) <}>iXovvTas (0iXeoucras) 4>LXovaras ((fiiXeovTo) <)>iXovvTa
V. (0tX^oj'Tes) ({>iXovvT€s {(piX^ovffai) (j>LXov(rai ((piXeovTo) ^ikovvra
The present participles of verbs in oeo (contracted oi) are declined
like (piX^v, the contracted form of cpiXeayv. Thus drjXayv, dTjXova-a,
8t)\ovv, manifest hi fj : gen. 8r;Xoi)i/Tos, St^Xowott;? ; dat. 8j;Xo0i/Tt, drjXovarj,
&c. The uncontracted form of verbs in oto is not used. § 98, Rem.
Note. A few second perfect participles in aas of the fii- form
(§ 124) have coo-a in the feminine, and retain w in the oblique cases.
They are contracted in Attic; as {eo-radys, ea-Taaxra, ca-raos), contr.
eoTO)?, eVrtoo-a, cVroy (irregular for co-tcds), standing : gen. fo-Twrof,
iaroiarjSi coroiroff, &C. But reOvfws, reOvcuxra^ reBveos, (lead, from
6vf](TK(iD, always remains uncontracted. See § 110, iv. (d), N. 3.
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
§ 70. The irregular adjectives, /iiiya<;, great, ttoXu?,
much, and 7rpdo<;, mild, are thus declined : —
Singular.
G. fte-yaXou |t€"ydXT]s (jlcy^^o^
D. }Ji€-ydX(0 H^c-ydXt] |iC7dX(p
A. [iCYav (jtc-ydXTiv H«Ya
V. (JLC-ydXc jwydXr] pAya.
iroXvs TToXX^ iroXv
iroXXov itoXXtjs iroXXov
oroXXu iroXXirj iroXXu
iroXvv TToXXi^v TToXii
§70.]
X ■-'-.r
ADJECTIVES— IRREGULAR DECLENSION.
N. A. V. jieyAXe* firydXa
G. D. |jLpydXoiv )Ji€-yd\aiv
Dual,
^eydXci)
{jLC-yoXoiv
Plural.
63
N. Y. |i€"y<lXoi |ji€-ydXai jic^dXa ircXKoC iroXXaC iroXXd
G. p^-ydXcDv lic-ydXuv ^cydXwv iroWcflv iroWoiv iroXXwv
D. (Jic-ydXois (JLC'ydXais (jkcyoXois ttoWois iroXXais iroXXois
A. |trydXovs K-c-ydXas jWYOiXa iroXXovs iroWds iroXXd
Sitigular.
N.
•irpaos
irpaeia
irpdov
G.
irpdov
irpae£as
irpdov
D.
-irpdo)
irpacCci
irpd(j>
A.
irpdov
irpociav
Dual.
irpdov
N. V.
irpdo)
irpaefa
irpdo)
G. D.
irpdoiv
irpacCaiv
Flural.
irpdoiV
N. A.
irpaoi, '
irpaeis
irpaeiai
irpaca
G.
irpaccDV
irptuiwv
irpaeW
D.
irpdois,
irpoio-b
irpactais
irpdois, irpato-t
A.
irpdovs
irpaeCas
irpaea
Note 1. Most of the forms of /x^as and iroKM are derived from stems
in Of fxeyaXo' and ttoXXo-. UoWds, rj, 6v, is found in Homer and Herodo-
tus, declined regularly throughout. In Homer, ttoXj^s has forms ttoX^os,
TToX^cs, iro\i(>}v, &c., which must not be confounded with Epic forms of
t6Xis (§ 53, 1, N. 3).
Note 2. Il/oaos has two stems, one irpao- (written also irpq.o-') from
which the masculine and neuter are generally formed ; and one irpav (never
irpq.}}-) from which the feminine and some other forms come (§ 67, 2).
There is an Epic form irptjius (Lyric Trpdi^j) coming from the latter stem.
The forms belonging to the two stems differ in accent.
\
^ INFLECTION. [§71.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
I. Comparison by -repos, -Taros,
§ 71. Most adjectives add T6po<; to the stem to form
tlie comparative, and TaTo<i to form the superlative.
Stems in o with a short penult change o to o) before repo?
and raro^. E-g*
Kov(f)os (kov(^o-), ligJit, /cou^orfpos, lighter^ Kov(f)6TaTos, lightest.
'2o(j)6s (^(ro(f)o-), wise, (TO(}>d)Tcpos, wiser, aocfxaraToSj toisesU
2eixv6s (o-e/xz/o-), august, affivorepos, a-ffivoTaros.
HtKpos (niKpo-), bitter, niKporepos, ttlkpotutos.
*0^vs (o^u-), sharp, o^vrepos, o^VTaros.
MeXa? (/leXai'-), black, ficXavrepos, ficKavTaros.
*AXr}Br}s (aXrjOecr-), true, aXrjOioTepos, okrjdeaTaTOS' (§ 52, 1).
Note 1. Stems in o do not lengthen o to o if the penultimate
vowel is followed by a mute and a liquid (§ 19, 3). See niKpos
above.
Note 2. Meo-oy, middle, and a few others, drop os and add aire'
pos and airaTOs ', as peaos, peaaiTepos, peaaiTaTos.
Note 3. Adjectives in oos drop o? and add eo-repos and foraros,
which are contracted with o to ovarcpos and ouo-raros ; as {evvoos)
evuovs, well-disjjosed , evuovarepos, (vvoixrraTos.
Note 4. Adjectives in cov add eerrepos and eararos to the stem ;
as a<jii(f)pa)v (a-(ii(^pov-), prudent, aoiK^povidTepos, acocjipovea-TaTos.
Note 5. Adjectives in eis change final cvt- of the stem to eo--,
and add rtpos and raros ; as x^P'-^'-s (x<^pi'^vT-) > graceful, x'^P'-^^'^^P^^^
XapieararoS'
II. Comparison by -i«v, -kttos.
§ 72. 1. Some adjectives in v? and po? are compared
by changing these endings to icov and tcrro?. JE^.^.
*H8u9, siveet, fjSiav, ^Sto-roj.
Taxvs,sivifi, Taxioov (commonly 6a(T(T(ov, § 17, 2, N.), Taxt<rrw.
Aicrxpos, hase, alcrx^^^^i atV;^tcrro?.
*E;f^po?, hostile, exSicov, fx^iaTOS.
Kvbpos (poet.), glorious, Kvdiwv, kvBkttos.
Note. Some adjectives have both lav, laros and rfpos, rarot.
73.] IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 05
2. Comparatives in lav, neuter lop, are thus declined : —
Dual.
N. A. V. iiUovi
G. D. ^SwJvotv
Singular.
N.
G.
D.
A.
■^SCovos
ifjSCovi
^SCova ifiUo ijSiov
PZwraZ.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V. ifilov€S TJSlovs TJSkova T]8Ca>
ifiiotn.
ifilovas ifiCovs i\Biovai ^S£a>
Note 1. The terminations -ova, -oves, -ovas may drop v, and be
contracted into -a> and -ous (§ 47, N. 1). The vocative singular of
these comparatives seems not to occur. For the recessive accent iu
the neuter singular, see § 25, 1, Note.
Note 2, The irregular comparatives iu av (§ 73) are declined
like iJSiojK.
HI. Irregular Comparison.
§ 73, 1 . The following are the most important cases of
ii'regular comparison : —
1. dYaOos, goodf L^iivav (§ 16, 7),
{ap€i(av\ fipio-TOSy
PcXtCuV, , P^TIOTOS,
(piXrepos), {jSeXraros),
KpiC<r<r<av or KpiCrrav (Kp(<r(r<av), KpArwrros,
{<f>4prepo%),
{<f>epTaTos,
<t>kpUTTO%\
XipMV {\(al<tsv, \<alT€pos),
XwOTOS.
2. KOKos, bad.
KttKCttV (KaK(X)T€pOs),
KaKltTTOS,
Xdpuv (xfpciw),
X€ipiO-TOS,
(Xeiporepos, x^P^iorepos),
i\a-<r0v or iiTTCov {^a<T(av),
(^/fto-Toj, rare) ;
adv. "fiKKTTeu
8. KoXos, hcauUfulf
KaWCwv,
KdWlO-TOS.
4. \Uy<i% great.
HicCSiov (At^M § 1(5, 7),
li^YlCTTOS.
66
INFLECTION.
[§73.
5.
p,tKp<5s, small,
(Horn. IXdx^wt,
fem. of IXoxvs),
JltKpdTCpOS,
^d<r<r«v or O^&rrtav (§16, 7),
p.€Cwv
liiKpdTaros,
O^dxi<rros,
(jieiaroi, rare).
6.
dXtyos. Z^'«^^'
(uTT-oX/fwi', raiJier less),
iXC-ywTTOs.
7.
ir€VTis(7re»'77r-),j70or, ircv^oTrcpos,
ircv^OTaTOS. -
8.
iroXvs, WMC^,
irXcCwv or irX^wv,
irXcicTTOs.
9.
(Ion. p7}i8ioi),
{pvirepoi),
(prjiraTOi, fn^iffTOi).
10.
<|>CXos, f^ear,
«},£XT€pOS,
^iXaCrepos (rare),
(0tXi«v, rare),
<}>iX(6Tcpos (rare).
<|>CXTaTOs,
^iXaiTaros (rare).
Ionic or poetic forms are in ( ).
Note. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words
will be found in the Lexicon : —
altrxpos, aXyciPos, apna^, a(f)6ovos, a)(apis, jSa^vy, jSXa^. /SpaSus, ye-
paios, yXvKVS, fmXrja- jkov, e7rt;;(apif, rjc-vxos, Ibios, taos, XdXoy, fioKap,
fiQKpos, peos, nakaios, iraxvs, Trentov^ Trt'eof, ttXj^ctios, npea^vs, npovpyov,
npoaios, (rnovdalos, axoXalos, yj/^evbrjs, wkvs.
2. Some comparatives and superlatives have no positive,
but their stem generally appears in an adverb or preposition.
*Avoi}T€pos, upper, ava>TaTos, uppermost, from ava, tip : nporepoSf
former, npcoTo^ or npaTiaTos,, first, irom Trpo, he/ore: Kararfpos, loicer^
KaTO)TaTos, lowest, from Kara), flownirnrd.
ISee in the Lexicon ayxorepos, dcpaprepoi, Kepblcov, oTrXorepor, npoadt-
repos, piyiov (nenter), vneprfpoi, va-repos, vyj/icov, (f)advT€po5, with their
regular superlatives ; also (o-xaros and KT)8taTos.
3. Comparatives and superlatives ma}^ be formed from
nouns, and even from pronouns. U.g.
Bao-iXfuy, Icing, j3ao-tXfvrfpoy, a (jrealer king, ^aaiXevTaros, the greaf-
cst king : KkiTTTT)^, thief, KXcrrTlaTcpos. KXeTrTiaraTos', kvcov, flog, Kvvrfpos,
more impvflent, kvptotos, most impudent. So avros, self, avroraTOf, his
very self, ipsissimus.
§75.] ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 67
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
§ 74. 1. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjec-
tives. Their form (including the .accent) is found by-
changing V of the genitive plural masculine to <?. U.g.
^tXoff, dearly, from (^iKo^ ; biKaim, Justh/ (SiKato?) ; (ro(})aSf loUely
{(ro<\)6i)', f}8e<07, sweet/.// (rj8vi, gen. pliir. fjdecav) , dXrjdas., truly (aKr]-
6r)9, gen. plur. aXrjdeov, d\r}6d)u) ; (rac^oiy (Ionic <ra(f)t<o^), plainly
((ra(f)r}s, gen. plur. aacpeau, aa(})cov) ; ttovtcos, wholly (nds, gen. plur.
Note Adverbs are occasionally formed thus from participles ;
as dia(f}ep6vTa)i, differently, from dia(j)ipa)v (diacf)€p6vTa>v) ; Ttray/xfi/cos,
regularly, from reTayfievos {raa-aa), order).
2. The neuter accusative of an adjective (either singu-
lar or plural) may be used as an adverb. U.g.
IIoXu and ttoXXo, much (ttoXv?) ; fieya or fieyaXa, greatly (jieyas) ;
also fieydXas, § 74, 1; jxovov, only (fxovos, alone).
Note. Other forms of adverbs with various terminations will
be learnt by practice. See § 129.
§ 75, The neuter accusative singular of the com-
parative of. an adjective forms the comparative of the
corresponding adverb ; and the neuter accusative plural
of the superlative forms the superlative of the adverb.
U.g.
2o(f)as (a-o^oi), wisely; aocpcirepov, more wisely: (To^araTa. most
wisely. *Kkr]6m^ (dXrjBqs), truly: dXrjOearfpov, dXtjOeaTara. 'HSfco?
(f]8vs), sweetly, rjdLo-^, ijdiara. Xapievrcas (xapUi<:), gracefully: X"P^^"
(TTepov, xopteo-rara. 2<o(fip6va>9 (^(raxppayu) , prudently ; (Ta)(f)pove(rT€pov,
fraxPpoveaTara.
Note 1. Other adverbs generally form a comparative in repa,
and a superlative in Tarco; as nvco, above, dv(OTepa>, dvcoTdro).
A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in repcos', as j3e-
/Satorcpo)?, more firmly, for ^i^aiorepov, from fie^alas.
Note 2. MaXa, much, very, has comparative fidWov (for fxdkiov,
§ 16, 7), more, raOier; superlative /LtdXiora, most, especially.
68
INFLECTION.
[§76.
NUMERALS.
§ 76, The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives,
and the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows : —
Sign
1. Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
1
a'
cts, jita, ^v, o?i,e
7rp<5Tos, first
&ira^, once
2
P'
8uo, two
8€UT€pos, second
8is, tvjixie
3
V
Tpcis, Tpi'a
TpiTOS
TpCs
4
8'
Tcororopcs, T€<ro-apa
TtTapTOS
TCTpdKlS
5
c'
TTCVT*
irc'iJLirTO?
TTCVTaKlS
6
r'
^5
iKTO^
l^ttKlS
7
r
lirrd
^p8ojjtos
cirrdKis
8
i'
6kt(&
6"y8oos
6KTdKlS
9
e-
lvv€'a
^VttTOS
€vdKis
10
t'
8€'Ka
84KaTos
8cKdKis
11
ta'
^vScKOb
6v8€'KaTOS
€v8eKdKis
12
tP'
SttfScKa
8«8€KaTOS
8(*)8€KdKis
13
17'
TpicTKaiSeKa
Tpi(rKai8€KaT0S
14
18'
Tcccrapco-KaiSeKa
T€<r<rapaKai8£KaTos
15
l€'
irevTCKaiScKa
TTCVTCKaiStKaTOS
16
IT
CKKaiScKa
6KKai8eKaTos
17
if
€'7rTaKat86Ka
C'7rTaKai8£KaTos
18
^V
OKTCOKaiScKa
iKTcuKaiScKaros
19
te-
cvveaKaiScKa
IvveaKaiScKaTOS
20
k'
cI'koci
cIkocttos
clKOO-dKlS
21
Ka
els Kttl €l'KO<ri or
€l'KO(ri 6ts
irpwTOS Kal cIkoo-tos
30
V
TpidKOVTa
TpiCtKOO-TOS
TptaKOvrdKis
40
V-'
Tccro-apdEKOvra
TcorcrapaKOO-Tos
T€o-o-ap oiKO vrdKis
50
v'
TrevTTJKOVTa
TrevrqKOcrTos
irevniKOVTdKis
60
r
ll-^KOvra
€|tiKO<rTds
I^TiKOvrdKis
70
0'
eP8o|i,^KovTa
€p8ofX'r]KO<rTos
ip80|lTlK0VTdKlS ,
80
it'
67801/] Kovra
678011 KOO-TOS
o^SoiiKovrdKis
90
9'
Ivcv-liKovTa
€V€vtikoo-t6s
IV€VT]KOVTdKlS
100
p'
iKardv
CKaTOO^^S
CKarovrdKis
200
<r'
8iaKda-ioi, ai, a
8iaKoo"ioo'T6s
8taK00-idKis
300
T
TpiaKoo-ioi, at, a
TpiaKO<rioo-T<Js
400
v'
TCTpaKoo-ioi, ai, a
TtTpaKOO-lOO-T^S
§77.]
NUMERALS.
69
Sign. Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverb.
500 <j>' irevrdKOorioi, at, a ircvTaKoo-ioo'Tos
600 x' €|aKdo-iot, ai, a €^aKoo-ioo-T(Js
700 xj/' lirTdxoo-tot, at, a lirTaKotrtoo-Tos
800 w' oKTCiKdo-tot, at, a oKraKoo-tocrrds
900 ^' cvaKoo-tot, at, d IvaKoo-too-rds
1000 p. \i\\.o}., at, a X''^'^°°"'''os Xi'^i'^'^^'S
2000 ^P 8t<rxtXtot, at, a 8t<rxtXtooTds
•3000 ^7 Tpto-xiXtot, at, a rpto-xtXtoo-Tos
10000 / }j.^ptot, at, a (JLvptoo-rds (ivptdxts
Above 10,000, bvo ixvpiud^s, 20,000, rfi>tif fxvpiddes, 30,000, &c.
were used. ^'
Note. The dialects have the following peculiar forms: —
1 — 4. See § 77, Note 1.. Epic TpiraTo^, rerparos. -
12. Doric and Ionic bvathcKa', Poetic bvoKaibcKa.
20. Epic WiKO(n\ Doric etKari.
30, 80, 200, 300. Ionic rpLrjKovra, dybcoKovTa, bLrjKoa-ioi, rpirjKomoi.
40. Herod. rea-aeprjicovTa.
§ 77. 1. The cardinal numbers eh, one^ Zvo, two,
TpeU, three., and reacrape^ (or Terrape^)^ four., are thus
declmed : —
N.
€ts
fiCd
2v
G.
Ivds
jitds
Ivo's
N. A
8vo
D. '
kvi
jit^
Ivl
G. D.
Svoii^
A.
^va
IJiCav
?v
N.
rpcis
rpCa
Wo-o-apcs
T6<r(raptt
G.
rptiv
T€o-crdpwv
D.
TpitrC
T€o-<rapo-i
A.
Tpets
TpCa
T^cropapas
T€'<r<rapa
Note 1. Homer has fem. m, Z^?, &c., for /x:a; and tw for evt.
Homer has Syo) for Svo, and forms 8oia), boiol (declined regularly).
For hvdv, hvuiv, hvoiai, and other forms, see the Lexicon. Ai;o is
sometimes indeclinable. Herodotus has rea-aepesj and the .poets
have Terpdoi.
70 • INFLECTION. [§77.
XoTE 2. The compounds oiSeis and firjdfist no one, none, are de-
clined like els. Thus, oudeis, ovdefJLia, ovdeu', gen. ovdevo:,.. oidffiias', dat.
oideu', ovdffjiia ; ace. ovdha, ovdfuiav, ovdev, &c. riural foi ins some-
tinies occur; as ovdeves, ovbivccv. ovdeai, ovdevas, [xrjdeves, &c. When
ov8e or firjde is separated from ch (as by a preposition or by au), the
negative is more emphatic; as e^ ovbev6s,Jrom no one; ovS* e^ iuos,
jrom not even one.
Note 3. Both is expressed by a^K^iui, ambo, a/i^oii/; and by o/mc^o-
reposj generally plural, diJ.(p6Tepoi, ai, a.
2. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclinable.
The higher numbers in lol and all the ordinals are declined
regularly, like other adjectives in os.
Note 1. When rpeh Ka\ SeVa and reaa-apei koi BUa are used for
13 and 14, the first part is declined. In ordinals we may say Tpiros
Koi dsKaros, &C.
Note 2. (a) In compound expressions like 21, 22, &c., 31, .32,
&c., 121, 122, &c., the numbers can be connected by /cm in either
order; but if <ai is omitted, the larger precedes. Thus, els kqI eUoaty
one and twenty, or €i/cocrt Ka\ els, twenty and one ; but (without kuL) only
ciKoffi els, twenty-one.
(b) The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 29, 38 and 39, &c. are often
expressed by ei^os (or dvolv) deoures e'lKoai (rpidKOvra, reaaapaKOvra, &c.) ;
as err] evos deovra rpiaKovTa, 29 years.
Note 3. With collective nomis in the singular, especially rf ittttw,
cavalry, the numerals in tot sometimes appear in the singular; as
rr]v diuKoaiav "nrnoVf the {troop of) 200 cavalry (200 horse) ; dtniis pvpia
Kai TfTpaKoma (Xen. An. i. 7, 10), 10,400 s/iteWs (i.e. men with
shields).
Mvpioi means ten thousand ; pvploi, innumerable. Mvpios sometimes
has the latter sense ; as pvpios xpovos, countless time : pxtpia nevia, in-
calculable poverty. For pvpia as numeral, see above.
Note 4. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters ; the two obso-
lete letters, Vau, and Kojjpa, and the character San, denoting 6, 90, and 900.
(See § 1, N. 2.) The last letter in a numerical expression has an accent
above. Thousands begin anew with a, with a stroke below. Thus, ^ao^rf,
1868 ; ,i8x«f', 2625 ; ,6/ce', 4025 ; ,jSy,' 2003 ; <P/jl', 540 ; pd', 104. (See § 76,
second column.)
Note 5. The letters of the ordinary Greek alphabet are often used to
number the books of the Iliad and Odyssey, each poem having twenty-four
books.
§<9.]
THE ARTICLE — PRONOUNS.
71
\
THE ARTICLE.
§ 78. The definite article 6 (stem to-),
ihe^ is thus de-
clined : —
Singular.
DitaL
Phiral.
N. 6 i\ r6
N.
ot al Td
G. TOV TTJS TOV
N. A. T<& (Td) Tl5
G.
T«V
D. T<p Tl5 T<p
G. D. TOlV (Tttiv) TOtV
D.
Toi? Tats TOtS
A. TOV TT]V TO
A.
Tovs Ttts rd
Note 1. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the in-
definite Tts (§ 84) may be transhited by a or an ; as avOpoanos tis, a
certain man^ often sinipl}- a man.
NoTK 2. The feminine dual forms to. and rati/ (especially ra) are
rare, and to) and rolv are generally used for all genders. (§ 138,
N. 5). The regular nominatives rol and ral are Epic and Doric;
and the article has the usual dialectic forms of the first and second
declensions, as roio, touv, Tdoiv, Tolai, rfjai, tjjS'
PRONOUNS.
Personal and Intensive Pronoun*.
§ 79. 1. The personal pronouns are iyo), I, crv, thou,
and ov (genitive), of him, of her, of it. Avto^, himself
is used as a personal pronoun for him, her, it, &c. in the
oblique cases, but never in the nominative. They are
thus declined ; —
Singular.
N.
ht<i
0^
—
avTos
o^
avT^
G.
IjlOV, jiOV
0-ov
0^
avTov
avTiis
avTov
D.
i\t.oC, |ioC
o-oC
ot
avTw
OVTTJ
avTcu
A.
IKjU
0-€'
Dual.
avTov
avT^jv
avr^
N. A.
v»
0'<j>W
(<r<t>iod)
aVTM
a^rd
avTM
G. D
v«pv
o-<|>(^v
{crcpmi')
avToiv
avrakv
avToiv
72
INFLECTION.
[§7
P/?6mZ.
N.
^futs
*|l€ts
o-4>€iS (<r<p^a)
avToi
avTttC
avrd
G.
T|}JL«V
V^U>V
cr<{>(3v
avTtov
avTwv
avTwv
D.
^|11V
v\tXv
o-<j)i<ri
avTots
avrais
avTots
A.
V)|ias
{»|j.ds
<r({>ds ((T<f)^a)
avrovs
avrds
avrd
Note 1. AvrSs in the nominative of all numbers, and as an adjec-
tive pronoun in the oblique cases, is intensive, like ipse (§ 145, 1);
except in 6 avros, the same (§ 79, 2). In the oblique cases it is the
ordinaiy personal pronoun of the third person (§ 145, 2).
For the uses of ov, ol, &c. see § 144, 2. In Attic prose, o-^oje,
acfxaiv, cr<^ca, never occur; ov and e (chiefly Epic) very rarely; oi,
acfyelsf acfiav, acfiio-iy cr<pas, being the only common foi'ms. The ora-
tors seldom use this pronoun at all, and the tragedians use chiefly
a(f)iv (not acpi) and acpe (Notes 2 and 3).
Note 2. The following is the Ionic declension of ey<a, o-v, and
ov. The forms in ( ) are not used by Herodotus.
ing. N.
iyd, (ey^p)
fflJ (jlJVT])
G.
CfieO, fJL€v, from e/M^o
do, (rev
('h)eJi
{ifieio, ifxideu)
{<T€io, ciOcv)
(do, Wev)
D.
ifiol, fioL
<Tol, Toi {Tetv)
d iio:)
A.
ifi^, fi^
ai
HiO
hial. N.
A.
(vwi; 1*16)
{p^Qi'C, (r<f)(I})
((T^WO
G.
D.
{vwCy)
(cr^wii', a^Qp)
(o-^wtj/)
*lur. N.
i)fxe7s (dfifiei)
{/fxeis (i^fifjies)
G.
T]ixiix}v {r]/jL€Lu}v)
vfniijiv (vfxeiuv)
0-0^0?!' {(r<f>el(i}v)
D.
rjfuv (dfifii)
VfJUV (ijfJ.fXl)
<T(f>l(JL, <r<pi{v)
A.
i]fj.iai {dfi/xe)
vfxeas {ijfji./J.e)
a(p^a$ (a<f>e'ias), <T(f>i
Herodotus has also o-^fl? and <T^ia in the plural of the third
person, which are not found in Homer.
Note 3. 2<;^e is used as both singular and plural, him, her, it^
them, by the tiagedians.
Note 4. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a per-
sonal pronoun in all genders, and in both singular and plural. The
Ionic form ixlv is used in all genders, but only in the singular.
Note 5. The poets sometimes shorten the final syllable of 17^111',
T]Hai, vfiiv, vftay, and acpas. changing the circumflex to the acute, as
i)fiiv, rjfids, &c. ; and sometimes accenting rjfuv, ^nas, &c.
Note 6. Herodotus has alreoiv in the feminine (not in the mas-
culine or the neuter) for amoiv (§ 39). See § S3, N. 3. The Ionic
contracts 6 avros into totroy or utvTos, and to avro into tcovto (§'3j.
80."
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
73
Note 7. The Doric has e/xtV (for Attic i/wl); a/t^s, afi^uv, a/uif, a/jJ
(for i)fi€is, T]ixQ3v, i]/xlv, rjfJi.ds); tO (for <rij); t^o, rev, revs, tcoO (for aoij); tLv
(for aoi); vfiis and v/me (for v/xels and vfj.ai); Xv for ol ; besides many of the
Ionic and poetic forms already mentioned.
2. AvTo^ preceded by the article means the same ; as
auro9 avr)p, the same man ; top avrov iroXe^oVj the same
war. (See § 142, 4, N. 6.)
Note. Avtos is often contracted with the article ; as ravrov for
rov avTov; ravTw for tm ayroi; ravrfj for rfj av^fj (not to be con-
founded with TavTj] from ouros). In the contracted form the neuter
singular has tuvto or ravrov.
Kellexive Pronouns.
§ 80. The reflexive pronouns are ifMavrov, i/jLavTrj<;,
of myself; creavrov, o-eavrrj<;, of thyself; and eavrov, iav-
T^9, of himself herself itself They are thus declined : —
Singular.
Masc. Fern.
G. IfxavTov e)i,avTf]s
D. l|i.avTw ijiavT-Q
A. €(tavTov i^a.vTf\v
Plural.
Masc.
■qiJLuv avT<3v
Tifi.iv avrots TJixtv avrais
iqiwls avTOvs TJfJids avrds
Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern.
G. . (TcavTov or oravrov ccavrf]? or crairrTJs iuuv avrtov
D. (Tcavrta) or <rawT<3 <r€atrrTJ or «ravTTJ ii|xtv avTois viiiv avrats
A. <r€a\»T6v or c-avrov o-eavrriv or o-avnjv vfids avrovs vfids avrds
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
G.
latrroO
eavrrjs
lavTOw^
iavrtay
lavTwv
lavrwv
D.
lavT^
laVTTJ
lavTw
eavTOis
lawais
cavrois
A.
cavTov
lavHjv
lavTo
lavTovs
lavrds
lavrd
contracted into
G.
avTov
aiiTTis
avTov
avTwv
avTwv
airwv
D.
avT<p
aviTTJ
avTw
avTOts
avrais
avrois
A.
avTov
ain-iiv
avTO
avTovs
avrds
avrd
^ The contracted forms avrov, &c. must not be confounded with
avTov^ &c. from alro^. For o-0aij/ avrav, &c. see Note.
74 INFLECTION. [§ 81.
Note. The reflexives are compounded of the personal pronouns
and auroy, which appear separately in the pkiral of the first and
second persons. In Homer they are separated in all persons and
numbers; as crot auT<». ol avra, € avrrju. Even in Attic prose a^a>v
avTa>p, ad)iaiv avrols (avraii), (T(f)as avTOvs (avrds), often OCCUr. He-
rodotus has eiieavTov, (TeavTov, tcouroO.
Keciprocal Pronoun.
§ 81. The reciprocal pronoun is oXXtjXodv, of one
another, used only in the dual and plural. It is thus
declined : —
Diml. Plural.
G. dXX'^Xoiv oXX-tjXaiv aXXijXoiv oXXi^Xwv aXXijXuv dXXijXuv
D. dXXrjXoiv dXX-rjXaiv aXXijXoiv oXXt^Xois dXXtjXais dXXijXois
A. aXXi^Xw dXXijXa dXXTJXw dXXijXovs dXXtjXas &XXT]Xa
' Possegsive Pronouns.
§ 82. The possessive pronouns are e/io?, mi/, <ro9, thi/,
T)fjL€T€po<;, our, vfjLeTepo<;, your, o-<l)erepo<;, their, and the
poetic o?, his. They are declined like adjectives in o?.
Note 1. Homer has dual possessives vatrfpos, of m.« two, (r^xot-
Tfpos, of you two ; also reoi (Doric) for aos, eo? for os, apos and dpo^
(a) foi' T)p€T€pos (in Attic poetry for epos), vpos (y) for vperepos, a(f)6s
for a-<f)€Tepos.
Note 2. "Os not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed
by the genitive of airdy, as 6 Trarfjp avrov, his father.
r
Demonstrative Pronouns.
§ 83. The demonstrative pronouns are ovto^ and oSe,
this, and eKelvo^, that. They are thus declined ; —
Singular.
N.
o5tos
aVTT]
TOVTO
&8€
fjSc
T^SC
G.
TOVTOV
TttVTIlS
TOVTOV
T0v8€
TflO-8€
TOv8«
D.
rovTcp
Tavq]
TOVTW
T«86
Tfi8€
ToiSe
A.
TOVTOV
TaVT1]V
TOVTO
T0V8«
Tijv8«
t68c
§83.]
DEMONSTRATIVE
PRONOUNS.
Dual.
N. A.
TOVTW
Tttvra
TOVTW
T(&86 Td8€
Tu8c
G. D.
TOWTOtV
Tavraiv
TOVTOIV
Plural
Totv8€ Taiv8«
T0iv8€
N.
OVTOl
a«Tai
Tttvra
ol'8€ al'86
T<£8e
G.
TOVTCOV
TOVTWV
TOVTWV
Tuv8e TtlivSe
T(0V8€
D.
TOVTOIS
TttVTaiS
TOVTOIS
T0t<r8€ Tai<r8€
Toicr8€
A.
TOVTOVS
TaVTttS
Tavra
Toi5cr8€ Tdo-Sc
T<18€
75
Singular.
N. iK€ivos iKilvT] Ikcivo
G. cKcivov ^K(£vT]s IkcCvov
D. iKiivta CKcCvxi iKtivff
A. Ik€ivov 4KeiVT]v Ikcivo
Plural.
N. Ikcivoi iKCkvai iKctva
G. Ikc^vwv ckc^vwv IkcCvcdv
D. Ikclvois cKcfvais ^Kclvoit
A. ^Keivovs ^KcCvas iKciva
N. A.
G. D.
IkcCvcu
IkcCvolv
Dual.
iKcCva
eKcfvaiv
lK€kV<i>
Ikcivo IV
Note 1. *EkcIvos is regular except in the neuter iKelvo. "oSf is
merely the article 6 with the inseparable particle -6e added. For
its accent, see § 28, N. 3.
Other demonstratives will be found among the pronominal adjec-
tives (§ 87, 1).
Note 2. The demonstratives, including some adverbs (§ 87, 2),
may be emphasized by the addition of long t, before which a short
vowel is dropped. Thus ovroa-i, avrrji, rovri; 66i, rjdi, ro^t'; rovrovi,
ravTi, TOVTOivl', ToaovTocrii iobi, ovTcoaL
Note 3. Herodotus has rovreav in the feminine (not in the mas-
culine or the neuter) for tovtcov. (For aireuv, see § 79, 1, N. 6.)
Homer has roio-Stcro-t or roladttn for rolabf. Keipos is Ionic and
poetic for (Kelvos.
76 INFLECTION. l§ 84.
Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns.
§ 84. 1. The interrogative pronoun r/?, rt, who f
which? what? always takes the acute on the first syllable.
The indefinite pronoun rk, rt, any one, some one, is en-
clitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last syllable.
2. These pronouns are thus declined : —
Interkogative.
Singidar.
Indefinite
'•
N. '
tCs
t£
tIs
tI
G.
t£vos, tow
TIVOS, TOV
D.
Mvi, rtf
Tivf, T<{>
A.
rlva
tC
Dual,
Tivd
rl
N. A.
tCv€
Tive'
G. D.
tCvoiv
Plural.
TIVOIV
N.
tCv€S
rCva
TIV^S
Tivd
G.
tIvcdv
TIVWV
D.
tCo-i
TwrC
A.
rCvas
rfva
Tivds
Tivd
For the indefinite plural nva there is a form arra (Ionic aaa-a').
Note 1. Ovtis and firjTis, poetic for ovBels and tirjdels, no one, are
declined like rls.
Note 2. The acute accent of r/? is never changed to the grave
(§ 23, 1, Note). The forms tis and ti of the indefinite pronoun
seldom occur with the grave accent, as they are enclitic (§ 27).
The Ionic has reo and rev for rov, rew for tw, recou for rlvcov, and
TeoKTi for rial ; also the same forms as enclitics for rov, t<o, &c.
3. "A\Xo<;, other, is declined like avro^; (§ 79, 1), hav-
ing dWo in the neuter singular.
§ 85. The indefinite helva, such a one, is sometimes
indeclinable, and is sometimes declined as follows : —
§8(5.]
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
77
Singular.
Plural,
(All Genders.)
(Masc.)
N. .
8€iva
Selves
G.
Sctvos
8e£v»v
D.
Sctvt
A.
Sciva
Scivas
Relative Pronouns.
§ 86. The relative pronouns are o?, rf, 6, who., and
ocrTi9, ^Ti?, o Tt, whoever. They are thus declined : —
Singular.
Dual.
P/wraZ.
N.
8s
^
8
N
oC aX &
G.
oO
^s
oS
N. A.
& & &
G.
C0V wv £v
D.
^
^
^
G. D.
oiv atv olv
D.
ois ats ols
A.
8v
fiv
8
A.
oiis &$ &
Singular.
N.
8(rTis
fins
8x1
G.
oStivos, 8tov
-fjOTlVOS
oSrtvos, 8tow
D.
WTIVI, OTW
IQTIVI
wTivi, Stco
A.
•
8vTiva
/ '
. -fivTiva
DXLOI.
8tu
N. A.
firive
&TIV€
&r\.vi
G. D.
olvTivoiv
alvTtvoiv
Plural.
olvTivoiv
N.
otrives
atrives
&riva
G.
C&VTlVCtfV, 8t«v
^VTIVWV
^VTIVCOV, 8tCi)V
D.
olo-Twri, 8x010-1 aio-Tio-i
olo-Tio-i, 8toio-i
A.
o<Jo^iv
as
&o-Tivas
&tiva
Note 1. "Oo-n? is compounded of the relative o? and the indefi-
nite Ttr, and is called the indejiniie relative. Each part is declined
separately. For the accent see § 28, N. 3. It has a plural form
arra (Tonic aaaa), from a arra (§ 84, 2), for ariva. "O Ti is thus
wiitten (sometimes o, n) to distinguish it from on, that.
78
INFLECTION.
[§87.
Note 2. Homer has oov, erfs, for ov, rjs. The following are the
peculiar Homeric forms of oans : —
Singular.
N. 6tis 8 m
G. 8tcv, 8ttco, Sttcv
D. 8T€a>
A. Sriva 8 m
Plural.
Stcwv
firivas
Herodotus has orev, orec^, oTfoiv, orcoiai, and aaaa (Note 1).
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
§ 87. 1 • There are man}^ pronominal adjectwes which cor-
respond to each other in foim and meaning. The following
are the most important : —
InterrogatiTC. Indefinite.
vbaos; howmuchl voa-ds, of a cer-
quantus ? tain quantity.
jroios; of what iroi6s, of a cer-
kind ? quails ? tain kind.
Demonstratire.
(rocros), Toadade,
TO(rouTos, so
much, tantus.
(rotos), Toi6a5€,
ToiovTOi, such,
talis.
Relative.
6aos, oirda-os, as
much, as muny,
quantus.
olos, owdios, -of
tchich kind,
[such] as, qua-
Hs.
wrjXlKos ; how old?
how large ?
•Khnpo^ ; which of TrSrepoi (or irore-
the two. p6s), one of two
(rare).
(T7]\iKos), TijXt- tjXLkos, OTTiyXkoS,
Kdcrde, r-qXiKov- of which age or
Tos, so old or size, [as old] as,
so large. [as large] as.
(repos, the one or oirdrfpoi, which-
the other {of er".r of the two.
two).
The pronouns tI%, tU, &c. form a corresponding series : —
rls ; who ? rU, any one. 88e, odros, this, 8s, 6<ttis, who,
this one. which.
Note. T6(ros and rotos seldom occur in Attic prose, ttjXIkos never.
To(r6<r5e, rotdaSe, and TrjXtKdade are deeUned like t6<tos and roioj ; as
TOffdaSe, roariSe, roaovSe, &c., — rotoaSe, roidde (d), toi6v5€, (See § 28,
Note 3.) ToffouTos, ToiouTos, and TrjXiKovros are tlecHned Hke oBros (omit-
§88.]
VERBS.
79
ting the first t in toijtov, tovto, &c.), except that the neuter singular has
or ov; as toioOtos, TOiaOrr), toioOto or toiovtov ; gen. tolo^tov, roiau-
rrjs, &c.
2. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other,
like the adjectives given above. Such are the following : —
InterrogatiTC.
rroO; ichcre ?
Indefinite. DemonstratiTC. Relatiye.
■jroi, somcvjJiere. (tuda), ivravda, o5, Sttou, where.
iK€i, there.
T^: which way? tt?, some way, (rij), riJSe, raiJTT;, ^, 8irr], which way,
how? someJioiO. this way, thus, as.
Trot; whither ? vol, to some c/ccto-e, thither, ol, Sirot, whither.
place,
■irbdevi whence? irodh, from {rodev), {^vSeu), 6d€v, oirddev,
some place. Uddev, thence. whence.
TTus; how? T(is, in some way, (rw$), (ws), t55e, us, birus, i7i which
somehow. oiiTus, thics. way, as.
Tbn; when? totc, at some rSre, tJien. 5tc, oirdre, when.
time.
TT-nvlKOL ; at what {ttjuLko), trjuiKd- ijylKa, dTrrjvlKa, at
time? 5e, rtjuiKavTa, which time,
at that time. when.
Note. There are no demonstratives corresponding to ttou and Trot, and
equivalents of different form are given above. Forms which seldom or never
occur in Attic prose are in ( ). *'Ei'^a and ej'^ei'are relatives in prose, %rhere,
whence ; as demonstratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like ^vda
KOI €p6a, here and there, 4vB^v koX ivdev, on both sides.
The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (§ 27, 2.)
VERBS
^
^
§ 88. 1. The Greek verb has three voiceB^ the active,
middle, and passive.
Note. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject
performs an action* m/)o« hhm^elf oy for his oini benefit (§ 100), but
sometimes it is not distinpfuished from the active voice in meaning.
The passive differs from the middle in form in only two tenses, the
future and the aorist.
80 INFLECTION. [§ 89,
2. Deponent verbs are those which have no active
voice, but are used in the middle or passive forms with
an active sense.
Note. Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the
middle form. A few, which have an aorist (sometimes a future) of
the passive form, are called passive deponents; while the others are
called middle deponents.
§ 89. There are five moods^ the indicative, subjunc-
tive, optative, imperative, and infinitive. To these are
added, in the conjugation of the verb, participles of all
the principal tenses.
Note. The first four moods, as opposed to the infnitive^ are
called finite moods. The last four, as opposed to the indicative, are
called dependent moods.
§ 90. 1. There are seven tenses^ the present, imper-
fect, perfect, pluperfect, aorist, future, and future perfect.
The imperfect and pluperfect are found only in the in-
dicative. The future and future perfect ai^e wanting in
the subjunctive and imperative. The future perfect be-
longs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes has
the meaning of the active or middle.
2. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect in-
dicative are called primary (or principal) tenses ; the
imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called
secondary (or historical) tenses.
Note 1. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in
all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the second
future (passive) . These tenses are generally of more primitive forma-
tion than i\\Q first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, &c. Veiy few verbs
have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the two forms gen-
erally diifer in meaning (§ 92, 5).
Note 2. The aorist corresponds to the indefinite' ov liislorical'^Qr-
fect in Latin, and the Greek perfect corresponds generally to the
English perfect or to the definite perfect in Latin.
Note 3. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the paradigm
of the regular verb (§ 96), therefore, includes parts of three different
verbs.
§92.] TENSE STEMS. 81
§ 91. There are three numbers^ as in nouns, the singu-
lar, the dual, and the plural.
In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and opta-
tive, there are three persons in each number, the first,
the second, and the third ; in each tense of the impera-
tive there are tvro, the second and the third.
Note. The first person dual is the same as the first person plural, ex-
cept in a very few poetic forms (§ 113, N. 3). This person is therefore
omitted in the paradigms.
Tense Stems.
§ 92. 1. In a verb which has but one stem, hke Xvw, the
stem is the fundamental part which appears in all forms of the
verb (§ 32, 2). In Xuw this fixed part is Av-, which is seen
equally (though with change in the quantity of v) in Xv-w,
t-Xv-oVj Xv-o-w, e-Av-cra, Xe-Av-Ka, cXc-Xv-Kctv, Xi-Xv-fiai, iXe-Xv-fJirjVt
€-Xv-OrjVf Xv-Oi^a-ofxaL. So in Xey-a>, ttXc/c-w.
2. The stem which is the basis of the present and imper-
fect, however, is often not the same as the stem which appears
in some or all of the other tenses. Thus in XciVw (§ 95), we
find the stem XciTr- in most of the tenses ; but in the second
aorists e-Xt7r-ov and c-Xitt-o/xt^i/ we find the stem XXir-. In ^aiVw
(§ 95) we have <f>aLv- only in the present and imperfect, and a
stem 4>av' (sometimes in the form <f>r]V') as the basis of the
other tenses. Again, in /jLavOdvio, learn, we have the stem fxaO-
in e/xaOov ; and in XafjLJSdvoi, take, we have Xa/3- in eXafiov. (See
the Catalogue of Verbs.) As these stems Xitt-, tjidv-, /aS^-,
Xa/3-, are simpler and more primitive than XetTr-, <f>aLv, fiav6av-,
XayujSav-, they are called the simple stems of these verbs.
Note. The simple stem, or (in verbs like Xu-o), Xcy-^) the sin-
gle stem, is often identical with tlie root (§ 32, 2, Note) ; as Xitt-,
Xa/3-, Xv-, Xey-, nXtK-. In other verbs the stem is formed by adding
a suffix to the root ; as in Tifid-o> the single stem rifxa- (the same as
that of the noun rifir], § 37, 1) is formed from the root rt- by adding
fia ; so in <f)aiva> the simple stem cfyav- is itself derived from the root
<j)a-. The term simple stem or stem (if there is but one) denotes the
6
82 INFLECTION. [§ 92.
simplest form which appears in the conjugation of a verb, whether
it is the same as the root or not.
3. The stems of verbs are called vowel stems or consonant
stems, and the latter are called mute stems (including labial^
palatal, and lingual stems) or liquid stems, according to their
final letter. Thus we name the stems of ^tA.eco {(fuXe-) , ActTro)
(ActTT-, AtTT-), rpifio) (rpt/?-), ypa^co (ypa<^-), ttA-ckw (TrXex-),
€J>€vy(ji {(f>€vy-j ^vy-), Tret^co (Tret^-, ttW-) , <^atV(o (^atv-, (j>av-^,
(TTcXXu) (crreXA-, o-reA.-).
Note. A verb which has a vowel stem in all its tenses is called
a pure verb ; and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem in all its
tenses is called a mute or a liquid verb.
4. It will be seen bj^the s^mopsis (§ 95), that even the sin-
gle stem Xv- appears in several modified forms in different tenses
of Avo) ; as Av-, Avo--, AcAvk-, and Av^e- (or Xv6r]-) enlarged to
XvOrja--. In <^ati/o> the simple stem <f>av- appears also as <l>wi
TTCf^av-^ <f>av6€- (or <f)av6r)-), <^avc(ry)-, and <f)avr)a-. In AetVoj WB
find Xeiij/-, XeActTT-, Aet<^^c(7;)- ; and Aitt- is modified in Xc-Xoltt-.
The form of stem which belongs to each tense (or group of
tenses) is called a tense stem, and the forms of the verb which
are based upon it constitute a tense system.
The following tense stems ^ are distinguished in the Greek
verb : —
I. Tlie Present stem, of the present and imperfect of all
voices ; as Xv- in Av-w, l-Ar-ov, Au-o/>tat, l-Xv-ofx-qv ; ^atv- in <^atVa),
€(f>aLv-0Vy &C. ; AciTT- in AeiV-o), eAeiTT-ov, ActV-o/xat, &C.
II. The Future stem, of the future active and middle ; as
Avor-, in Xv(T'(jd, Xva-ofjiai ; Xenf/- in Acii/^-o), XcL\l/-ofxaL ; <^av€- in
((f>av€-(i>) cfiavw, (c^ave-o/xai) ffiavovfxaL. The last foiTD (in c) be-
longs to liquid stems.
* The term tense stem is here used, in conformity with general usage in
elementary works, to denote the fixed form which (with certain internal
modifications) is the basis of a tense. Strictly, the present stem of Xe7a; is
Xey- + a variable vowel (o or e) ; the aorist stem of Xi^w is Xucr- -^ o or e,
&c. : see § 112, 4. This variable element is not included in the tense stems
as they are here given.
§92.] TENSE STEMS. 83
III. The FiRST-AoRisT stem, of the aorist active and mid-
dle ; as Xva- in e-Avcr-a, i-kv(T-d-fX7]v ; (j^rjv- in e-cfir]v-a, i'(f>r)v-a.ixT]v,
The last form (without a) belongs to hquid stems.
IV. The Perfect stem, of the perfect, pluperfect, and fu-
ture perfect. Of this there are four forms : (a) The Perfect-
Middle stem ; as AeAi;- in AeAv/xat and iXeXv-fxyv, XeXenr- in
XiXcL/ji-fxaL and IXeXeLfJL-firjv (§ 16, 3), 7r€cf>av- in 7rc<^acr-/>iat and
i-n-ecfidcr-fjirjv (§ 16, 6, N. 4). (6) The Perfect-Active stem; as
XcXv-K- in AeAvK-a and c-AcAuk-civ, -jrecfiav-K- (§ 16, 5) in 7r€<t>ay-Ka
and €-rr€<f>0Ly-K€Lv. (c) The Future- Perfect stem; as AeAv-o-- in
XeXva-o/xai, AeActi/^- in AeAcii/^-o/^at. {d) The Second- Perfect stem ;
as AcAotTT- in AeAotTr-a and c-AeAotV-eti/, 7r€(j>r]v- in Tre^T^v-a and
i-7r€<pT^V-€LV.
V. The Second- AoRiST stem, of the second aorist active and
middle ; as XXtt- in c-Aitt-ov and i-Xnr-6firjv.
VI. The First Passive stem, of the first aorist and the first
future passive ; as (a) Av^e- (or XvOr)-) in i-XvOrj-v and (XvOi-o))
XvOQ) (subj.), X€L<f>0€{r])- in i-Xd(^6y]-v and (Aet<^^e-o)) Ack^^w
(subj.), cfiavO€{r])- in i-tpdvOrj-v and {(fiavOi-oi) cjiavOu) (subj.) ;
(p) XvOrja- in XvOT^a-Ofxai, Xcicj^Orja- in XeLcfiOrjcT-ofxai.
VII. The Second Passive stem, of the second aorist and
the second future passive ; as {a) <fiave{r)) in €-<l>dvr]-v and
{<f>av€-oi) (f>avu) (subj.) ; {b) KJiavrjcr- in cf>avr](r-oixaL.
Note. The three verbs Xi5a>, XeiTrw, and 0atVw, from which the preced-
ing examples are taken, give a general idea of the most common forms which
the seven tense stems assume.
5. T\\Q principal parts of a Greek verb (bv giving which we
describe the verb) are the first person singular of the present,
future, first aorist, and (first or second) perfect indicative
active, the perfect and (first or second) aorist indicative pas-
sive, with the second aorist (active or middle) when one
occurs. E.g.
Avay, Xvcro), Tkvcra^ XeXvAca, Xe'Xv/xat, iXvdrjv.
AfiTTO), X6t\^a>, XeXoiTra, XeXei/xjuat, iXeicfidTjv, eXinov.
^aivo), ^ai/o), €(f)r)paj 7re<fiayKa (aud Tri^rjua), irecpaafiai, €(j)av6T)v (aud
84 INFLECTION. [§93.
npdo-o-o), do, Trpd^cOf cTrpa^a, 7reVpa;^a (2 pf. TreTipaya) , TreTrpay/xat,
€7rpaxBr)u.
SrcAXo), send, oreXcS, ecrrfiXa, ccrraX/ca, ecrraXfiai, ((rTaXrjv.
We thus give every tense system which is in use, with two tenses
formed from the perfect stem. Verbs with two perfects active, like
Trpao-o-o), or with two aorists passive, like ^aivco, are very rare.
6. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the present,
future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative, ^.g.
BovXofuu, loish, ^ovXrja-ofiai, ^e^ovXrjfiai, e^ovXrjOrjv.
Ttyvofiai, become, yevrja-Ofiai, yeyevt] p.ai, ey€v6p.T]v.
(Aldeoixat) aldovfmi, reaped, aldeaofxai, jjdeo-fiai, ]^8e(T6T]V.
2K€TrT0fiai, vieiv, aiC€\l/ofiat,, ecrKeufiai, icKc-^aiirjv.
-^
Conjugation.
§ 93. 1. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices,
moods, tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order.
2. These various parts of the verb are formed as
follows : —
(a). By modifications of the stem itself in forming the dif-
ferent tense steins (§92,4). These are explained in § § 107-1 1 1 .
{h). In all cases, by adding certain syllables to the tense
stems ; as in Xv-ofxev, AvV-crc, XeAv-rat, XeXvK-are. These S3'ila-
bles and their composition are explained in §§ 112-117.
(c). In the secondary tenses of the indicative, b}' also pre-
fixing € to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant), or
lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short vowel) ;
as in €-Xv-ov, c-Xvcr-e, l-(jirjv-aTO, i-XeXvK-eLV, and in ^Kov-ov, r^Kovcr-a,
imperfect and aorist of aKovui, to hear. This prefix or length-
ening does not belong to the tense stem, but disappears in the
dependent moods and in the participle.
A prefix, seen in Ae- of AeAv/ca and XcAct/x/jtai, in ttc- of ttc-
<f)a(TfjLaL, and € of ecrraXfjiaL (§ 97, 4), for which a lengthening of
the initial vowel is found in rjXXayfxai (dAAay-) from dAXacro-w
(§ 97, 4), belongs to the perfect tense stem, and remains in
all the moods and in the participle.
These prefixes and lengthenings {c), called augment {increase),
are explained in §§ 99-106.
§ 95.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN n. 85
3. There are two principal forms of conjugation of
Greek verbs, that of verbs in o) and that of verbs
in fjLi.
Note. Verbs in /xi form a small class, compared with those in w, and are
distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the-present and second-
aorist systems, in the other systems agreeing with verbs in w. The conju-
gation of the latter is therefore given first, and under this head are stated
the general principles which belong equally to both conjugations.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
§ 94. The present stem of a verb in w is found by drop-
ping (0 of the present indicative active, or ofiai of the present
indicative middle ; as \v(j} (A.v-), XetVo) (A,et7r-), Trpda-acj (jrpaa-a-) ;
jSovkofxaL (/8ovX-), yiyvofxaL (ytyv-).
Note. The simple stem, when there is one distinct from the present
stem, must be learnt by observation and by familiarity with the principles
upon which the present stem is formed from the simple stem (§108).
§ 95. 1. The following synopses include : —
I. All the tenses of Xv(i>, loose.
II. All the tenses of XetVcD, leave ; the second perfect and
pluperfect active and the second aorist active and middle be-
ing in heavy- faced t3'pe.
III. All the tenses of <^atV(o, show ; the future and aorist
active and middle and the second aorist and second future
passive being in heavy-faced type.
The synopsis of Xvw, with the forms in heavier type in the synop-
ses of Xf tTTo) and dyaiuo), will thus show the full conjugation of the verb
in (b; and only these forms are inflected in § 96. For the peculiar
inflection of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of verbs
with consonant stems, see § 97.
Note. The paradigms in § 96 include the perfect imperative active of
Xi5w, Xeiircj, and <paivu, although it is hardly possible that this tense can
actually have been formed in any of these verbs. As it occurs, however, in
some verbs (§ 118, 2, Note), it is given here to complete the illustration of
the forms. For the perfect subjunctive and optative active, which are
more common in periphrastic forms, see § 118, 2.
F»r the quantity of v in Xi/w, see § 109, 1, N. 1.
86
I INFLECTION.
[§95,
Tense-stem.
I. XO-
II. \V<T- .
III. \v<r-
IV, (b) \e\v-K-
I. \v(a.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present
Imperfect
Future
Aorist
Perfect
Pluperfect
Indicative.
Xvo)
'{Kvov
Xv<r«
X^XvKa
^€XVK€IV
Subjunctive.
Xvo)
Xvcw
XeXvKO) or
XcXvKws &
MIDDLE
1 VOICE.
I. x^.
j Present
( Imperfect
X^lojiai
eXvdjiTjv
Xv«jj.at
II. \v<r-
Future
Xv<ro(Jiai
III. XyV-
Aorist
IXvo-dfJLTJV
Xi&o-wjiat
IV. (a) XeXi?.
j Perfect
i Pluperfect
XcXvjxai
IXeXvjjiTjv
XcXvjic'vos &
I.
IV.
Xu-
(a) XeXir-
IV.
(c) XeXi7-<r.
VL
(a) Xu6'e(i7).
VI.
(&) Xv^T^-o--
PASSIVE VOICE.
Present and Imperfect ) „
Perfect and Pluperfect S ^"""^ ""' '"^ ^*'^^-
Future Perfect XcXvo-ofjiai
Aorist IXvOtiv
Future Xu0Vjoro|jiai
Xv0« (for \vQiu})
§95.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN a
87
I.
\iia.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Optative,
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Xvoi|xb
Xvc
Xilciv
Xvwv
Xv(roi.|JLb
Xv<r€iv
Xvcrwv
Xvtrai^t
Xv<rov
X{krai
Xvo-as
XcXvKOb|ii. or
[XO.vK£,§95,l,N.]
XcXvKcvcu
XcXvK(6s
MIDDLE ^
^OICE.
XvoC|ii]V
\fK^
Xv€<reai
Xv<Jn€vo«
XwroC|ir|v
X^<r€<reat
Xv(r6}i€vos
Xv<raijJLtpf
Xvo-ai
Xv(ra(r6(u
X\Krd|Jicvo$
XcXv(ji^vos €l^ip^
X4Xv(ro
X€Xv<r0ai
XcXvpivos
PASSIVE VOICE.
XcXvo-oCjjLTjv
Xv0€Ct]V
Xv0'»]<roC}i.'qv
Xv0T]Tt
XeXiJo-co-eai
XeXv<r6fUV0$
XvOiivai
XvOefs
Xv6i^(r€<r0ai
Xv0T](rrffi.€Vost
88
INFLECTION.
[§95.
Tense-stem.
I. XetTT-
II. Xetf-
for Xc£7r-<r-
III. [Xcit/^-]
IV. (d) XeXotT-
(§ 109, 3)
V. XtTT-
II. XcCtto) (Xiir-).
ACTIVE VOICE.
{ Present
( Imperfect
Future
Aorist
Indicative,
Xe^TTW
^Xet7roi»
[iXeiypa, &c.]
2 Perfect X^oiira
2 Pluperfect IXeXoCirciv
2 Aorist ^iirov
Subjunctive,
Xe/irw
Not in good use.
XeXoCiro) or
XcXoiir^s &
\iva
MIDDLE VOICE.
I. XeiTT-
j Present
( Imperfect
\elTO/mi XdvufMi
iXeiirS/irjv
II. Xet^.
Future
Xeirpofmi
[V. (a) XeXctT-
As Passive.
J Perfect
( Pluperfect
\4\eififxai (§ 16, 3) XcXct/x/i^vos tB
V. XtTT.
2 Aorist
^XiTTOiiTiv XCirwjiat
PASSIVE VOICE.
T.r' ^r; ^ ^'T* ^^f if^P'f "* I Same as in Middle.
IV. (a) XeXetrr- Perfect and Pluperfect )
^^- [g\^g"^J^^^'^^" I Aorist iX€l<pdvy ^ Xet^^w (for Xet^^^w)
VI. (6) Xeupdij-ff- Future XfKpd-^ao/xai
95.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
89
II. XeCirw (Xtir-).
ACTIVE VOICE.
Optative.
Imperative. Infinitive.
Participle.
XelTroifMC
XetTre Xeiireiv
\eLir<i}u
\ei\J/oifii
\eLfi
\€itp(av
XcXoCiroi(xi or [X^oiire, §95, N.] XcXoiir^vat
XcXoiirws cCi)V
XCiroi|u
XCvc
Xiir€tv
XcXoiircos
Xmtmv
MIDDLE VOICE.
\e\eififiipos etrjv \i\ei\J/o
\e\€t<peai (§ 16, 1 & 4) \e\eififihof
XiiroCiAt)v XiiFot)
Xiir^<r6ai
Xiir<$(i,cvo$
PASSIVE VOICE.
XcXei^polfirjit
XeXeLrJ/eaOai
\€\€i\l/6fievos
Xei^delTjy
\el<f>0riTi
\€i<pdi]uai
\ei<peeis
\ei<f>9r}<rotfniP
'Kei<l>di^<T€a0at
\et<f>dT}(x6fiepoi
90
INFLECTION.
[§95.
Tense-stem.
I. 0ai»'-
II. (pave-
Ill. <j>-nv'
III. ^aiyta (<|»av-).
ACTIVE VOICE.
Indicative.
J Present i^alvoi
\ Imperfect €<paivov
Future (^Sv^ui) 4>avw
Aorist ^T]va
IV. (h) ire^ajK- for j Perfect iri(f}ayKa
7re0a;'-/c-(§16,5) j Pluperfect iTrecpdyKeiv
Subjunctive,
(poUpa
iretfxiyKta or
ireipayKCjs Cb
IV. (d) 7re<pr)v-
(§109,3)
1 2 Perfect Tritprjva.
\ 2 Pluperf. iirefpi^veiv
I Tre(p7]vo} or
1 ire^rjvws (B
•
MIDDLE VOICE.
I. ^aiv-
Present (palvo/ML
Imperfect i<paiv6fi7]v
dxdvuiiMi
II. 4>av€-
Future ((paviofiai) ()>avov)JLai>
III. (Pvv
Aorist ^(j>i]vd|j,T)v
(j>^V<0(Uli
IV. (a) 7r60av-
1 Perfect 7ri(f>aa-fiac
( Pluperfect iiretpdaixriv
PASSIVE VOICE.
ire^aa-zievos c5
I. (paiP'
IV. (a) fl-e^av-
Present and Imperfect ) «
Perfect and Pluperfect )
a« m Middle.
VI. (a) <pave€{7i)-
Aorist icpdvOyjv
ipavOG} (for (pavd^ta)
VI. (J)
Future Wanting.
VII. (a) ^av^i;).
2 Aorist c(f>(£vT)v
<j>avfi (for ^av^w)
VII. (&) 0av7;(r-
2 Future ({>avi^<ro|xak
§95.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN O.
91
III. <)>a£va> (<|»av-).
ACTIVE VOICE.
^^.
-^
Optative,
<f>aipoifii
Imperative.
Infinitive.
■^^
((fxivhifii) <f>avoi)ji,i.
ov ((paveoirjp) <{>avoCi)V
irecpdyKoifii or
( Trc<f>T^voifj,i or
( ireipTjPijjs elrjv
(ipapietv) (|>av€iv {^aveuv) <[>avtav
(ftTivov 4>f)vai (|>'^va$
[7r^0a7icc, § 95, N. ] ireipayKhaL ve<payK(S)S
[iriip'qve, § 95, N.] ve<p7]v4vac
Tr€(pr]vd)S
tpaivoiiiiffv
MIDDLE VOICE.
<l>alvov (f>aip€ffdat
{(f>aP€oifirip) <{>avoC)LT)V
(|>T]va£(Miv <)>T)vai
(f>aip6/i€Pos
j (4>apee<T6ai) { (<f>ap€6fi€P0i)
\ 4>avci(r0ai \ ^avovficvos
<f>il]va(rdai <j>T]vd}j,€vos
'ir€<l>dpdai (§ 16, 4) Tre^affnepos
PASSIVE VOICE.
ipapOetrjv
^aveCTiv
<|>avT|(rot}iT]v
<pdv9r)Ti
<j>dvt]Ob
^ap6i]pai
<f>avT]vai
<f>av6Cs
<f>avi]<r($|xevos
92
INFLECTION.
[§95.
2. The following table shows the meaning of each tense of
Xvo), Xdiroi, and <^aivoi, in the indicative, imperative, infinitive,
and participle of the active voice : —
I. Avw.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Pres.
I loose or am
loosi'tig.
Loose thou.
To loose or to he
loosing.
Loosing.
Imp.
I loosed or
was loosing.
Fut.
I shall loose.
•
To he about to
loose.
Ahout to loose.
Aor.
I loosed.
Loose thou.
To loose or to
Having loosed
(§202,1.)
have loosed.
or loosing.
Perf.
I have loosed.
(§118, 2, N.)
To have loosed.
Having loosed.
Plup.
I had loosed.
The middle of \vu> commonly means to release for one^s self, or
to release some one belonging to oneh- self, hence to ransom (a captive)
or to deliver (one's friends from danger). See § 199, 3.
In the passive the tenses are changed merely to suit that voice;
as I am loosed, I was loosed, I shall he loosed, I have been loosed, &c.
The future perfect passive means / shall have been loosed (i.e. before
some future event refeiTed to).
II. AcCttco.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Pres.
I leave ov am
leaving.
Leave thou.
To leave or to
he leaving.
Leaving.
Imperf.
I left or was
leaving.
Fut.
I shall leave.
To he ahout to
leave.
About to leave.
2 Perf.
I have left (some-
times / have
failed or am
wanting).
(§118, 2, N.)
To have left.
Having left.
2 Plup.
I had left.
2 Aor.
Heft.
Leave thou.
To leave or to
Having left or
(§202, 1.)
have left.
leaving.
The passive of XetVo) is used in all tenses, with the meanings
/ am left, I was left, I have been left, I had been left, I shall have been
left, I was left, 1 shall be left. It also means lam inferior {lejl behind).
§95.]
TENSES.
93
The middle of XetVo) means properly to remain (leave one^s self), in
which sense it differs little (or not at all) from the passive. But the
2nd aor. eXiirofirjv often means I left, for myself (^a a memorial or monu-
ment) : so with the present and future middle in composition. 'EXt-
nonrjv in Homer sometimes means I was left behind or was inferior^
like the passive.
III. #aCv«.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Pres.
/ show or am
showing.
Show thou.
To show.
Shewing.
Imperf.
I showed or was
showing.
Fut.
I shall show.
To be about to
show.
About to shxyw.
Aor.
I showed.
Show thou.
To shoio or to
Having shown
(§ 202, 1.)
have shown.
or showing.
1 Perf.
I have shown.
(§118, 2, N.)
To have shown.
Having shown.
1 Plup.
I had shovm.
2 Perf.
I have appeared.
(§118,2,N.)
To Jiave ap-
peared.
Having ap-
peared.
2 Plup.
I Jiad appeared.
The passive of ^aiW means properly to he shown or made evident ;
the middle, to appear (show one's self). But these two meanings are
often hard to distinguish, and it is therefore sometimes impossible
to decide whether (f)aLPOfiai, Tre^ao-ftai, &c. are passive or middle. The
2nd fut. pass. cf)avfi(rofiai, I shall appear or be shown, does not differ
in sense from the fut. mid. (ftavovfiai ; but i(f)dv6rjv is generally pas-
sive, / was shown, yvhiie €(j)dvijv is / appeared. The aor. mid. f(pT}pd-
ur}p is transitive, 1 showed , it is rare and poetic in the simple form,
but d7r€<l)rjvdfir)u is common in the meaning / declared.
Note. The meaning of the various forms of the subjunctive
and optative cannot be fully understood until the constructions are
explained in the Syntax. But the following examples will make
them clearer than a mere translation of the forms, some of which
(e.g. tlie future optative) cannot be used alone: —
Ava>fjLev (or Xixroifxfv) avrov, let us loose him , fxf} \v(rr]s avrov, do not
loose him. 'Eai/ Xvw (or \va-a>) avrov, ;^atpi7(ret, if I (shall) loose him,
he will rejoice. "EpxofJiai, Iva avTou Xv<o (or Ai^o-o)), / am coming that I
may loose him. Ei'^e \voiin. (or Xvo-ai/ni) avrov, O that I may loose him.
El Xvotftt (or Xvo-m/Lii) avrov, xalpoi av, if I should loose him, he would
rejoice. *li\6ov tva avrov Xvoi/ut (or XuVat/xt), / caine that I miyht loose
him. ErTroi/ on, avrhv Xvot/xt, / said that I was loosing him ; elnov on
avrov \va-aifii, T said that I had loosed himj ftnov on avrbv \va-oipi, I
said thati would loose him. For the dijfference between the present
and aoiist in these moods, see § 202, 1; for the perfect, see § 202, 2.
94 INFLECTION. [§ 96.
§ 96. Avco in all its tenses, and XeLrrco and cfyalvay in
I. Xva)(Xv),
PRESENT.
^c^m
Indicative,
Subjunctive.
Optative.
S. -52.
(3.
Xt;«
XiTis
Xvoiiii.
Xilois
X^i
-la:
XV€T0V
XV€T0V
AVTITOV
XVTJTOV
XvOlTOV
Xvo£tt|v
p.-] 2.
(3.
Xl30|J.€V
-Xv€T€
Xvovo-i
Xv«|Jl€V
XVT1T€
XvOXTb
IMPERFECT.
XV01|&€V
XV01T€
Xvoiev
SJ2.
(3.
IXvov
-M
IXv'€TOV
aV€'TT]V
p. -^2.
(3.
IXV0)J,6V
eXvcTt
avov
FUTURE.
S. <2.
C3.
Xvo-w
XV0-€IS
Xvo-ei
Xvo-oi|ii
~ Wo-ots
Xvp-oi
-■\l:
Xvo-cTOv
XvcrcTOV
XvO-OlTOV
\v(roCrr\v
(1.
P. i2.
(3.
Xvo-oficv
XvcrcTC
Xvo-ovo-i
Xv<roi|JL€V
XvoroiT6
Xv<roi.€V
5 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ft. 96
the tenses above mentioned (§ 95), axe thus inflected : —
to loose.
Voice.
Imperative.
(2. XC
■J 3. Xv
V€
XWto)
PRESENT.
Infinitive.
Xveiv
Participle.
Xvwv, Xvovo-a,
Xvov (§ 68)
-■!
2. Xverov
3. Xv^Twv
P.
{I
Xver€
Xv^Toxrav
or XvdvTttv
FUTURE.
Xvo-etv
XiJo-Mv, Xw<rotKra,
Xvo-ov (§ 68)
96
INFLECTION.
[§ 96.
Active Vpice of
AORIST.
Indicative.
Siibjv^nctive,
Optative.
S. < 2.
(3.
tkva-a.
tKvcro.%
avo-6
XvO-M
Xv'<rT|s
XvoTi
Xv(rai}Jii
Xwrais, Xvo-eias
Xvo-at, Xvo-cic
Mi
IXvo-arov
Xv«rT]TOV
Xv<rr]TOV
Xv<raiTov
Xvora^Tiiv
P. -5 2.
(3.
l\vo-ap.ev
^\v<raT€
2Xv<rav
Xv<ro)jji,€V
Xv<n|T€
Xv<ro)<rt
. Xwo-aijjLcv
Xv(raiT6
Xv<rcuev, Xvo-ciav
\
PERFECT.
^•li:
X^XvKa
XcXvKas
X^VKC
XeXvKO) (§ 95, 1,
XcXvKTjS
XcXvKT]
, N.) XeXiJKOijii (§95, 1,N.)
XeXvKois
XcXvKOl
HI
XeXvKarov
XcXvKarov
XcXt5KT]T0V
X€XVKT]T0V
XcXvKOlTOV
XcXvko£tt]v
(3.
X€XvKa|l€V
XcXvKarc
XcXvKao-i
XcXvK(d)JL€V
X€XVKT]T€
XeXvKCDo-i
PLUPERFECT. >
XeXvKoi(j.cv
XcXvKOlT€
XcXvKoicv
S. ^2.
(3.
IXcXvKciv
cXeXi^KCis
IXeXvK€t
MS
IXeXvKciTov
^XcXvKClTTlV
4.
cXcXvKClfiCV
cXcXvKetTc
IXcXvKeo-av
or IXeXvKcwrav
§ 96.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ft.
Xvo) {continued).
AORIST.
97
Imperative. Infinitive,
Participle.
Ml
Xv<rov Xvcrai
Xv<rdT«
Xvo-as, Xv(raaro^
Xv<rav (§ 68)
"■{l
Xtiorarov
Xvo-drcov
p. js.
Xv<raT€
Xv<rdT(i)(rav
or Xv(rdvT6)V
PERFECT.
^■\l
X€'XvK€ (§95, 1, N.) XcXvK^vat
XcXvKero)
XeXvKws, XcXvKvta,
XcXvK<5s (§ 68)
Ma:
XcXvKcrov
XcXvK^TCOV
MI:
XcXvKCTC
XeXvK^Toxrav
98
INFLECTION.
[§ 96.
PRESENT.
Xvta
Middle
Indicative.
(1. Xv
5. •] 2. \v
(3. Xv
Xvo(Jiai
Xv-jj, \-6ti
Xverai.
M::
XiJc«r6ov
Xveo-Oov
(.3.
Xv6|jLe6a
Xtieo-Oe
3. Xiiovrai
Subjunctive.
Kv<a\uxi
Xt^T)
XiJTjrai
Xvt]<r0ov
X\JT](r0ov
Xvwficda
Xv'TjorOe
Xvctfvrai
XvotfiT]V
Xvoio
XlJoiTO
XiSo<.(r6ov
Xvoio-Otjv
XvoificOa
Xi{oio-0«
XlJoiVTO
IMPERFECT.
1. IXvd^TlV
2. cXvov
. 3. IXv6TO
Ma!
(1. l\vi
p.-] 2. IXv
( 3. fkvi
IKvitrQov
lkvi<rQr\v
i\v6\uQa
IXveorOc
cXvovTO
FUTURE.
C 1. Xt{(ro(iiai
S. < 2. X^o-^i, XiJo-tt
( 3. XtJ<r€Tai
IB. Xv
XvorccrOov
Xvo-€o-0ov
ri. Xvc
•] 2. Xvc
(3. Xvc
Xv(r($)jic8a
Xv<r«r96
3. Xv<rovTai
Xv<roC(i.T)v
Xvo-oio
XvO-OLTO
XiJ<roi<r0ov
XvoroC(r0T]V
XvcroCp.€0a
Xv<roi(r0«
XiJo-oivTO
§ 96.]
(continued).
Voice.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN 12.
99
PRESENT.
Imperative.
\ 2. X^lc
LVOV
Xve(r0(i)
Infinitive, Participle.
Xveo-dab Xvd(j,cvos, Xvoh^vt],
Xvo|i€vov (§ 62, 3.)
(3. Xv.
P. •J2. Xw
Xv€(rdov
Xv€or6(i>v
Xv€<r0€
Xv^crdaxrav
or X«^<r0«v
FUTURE.
XvflrctrOai
Xv<r(S(i€Vo$, -T), -ov
(§62,3.)
100
INFLECTION.
[§96.
AORIST.
Middle
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Optative.
^•li:
€\v(ra>
IXvo-aro
\va-ay.ax
\vat\T<u,
Xv(raC|iT]v
Xvoraio
Xv<raiTo
-■\l
cXticrao-Oov
IXv<rd<r0T]v
\varr\a-Qov
Xv<rr]<r0ov
Xv<rai<r0ov
Xv<ra£o-0T]v
v.] 2.
€Xvo-d}JLc6a
iXvaaa-Qt
IXvo-avTO
Xv<r«(Ji60tt
X^<rTi<r0€
Xi^a-ttvrai
PERFECT.
Xv{rat}X€0a
X\i<rai<r0€
Xvo-aivTO
S. -^2.
(3.
XcXvo-ai
X^vrat
XeXvfi^vos «S
X€Xv}jL€vos fis
XcXv|l€VOS i3
-\i
X€Xu<r0ov
XeXvo-eov
XcXviMVO) -JlTOV
XcXviie'vo) fjTOv
XcXvjit'vo) ctiiTov or cItov
XeXvii^vw clifiTTiv or eUrrjv
(3.
XeXtJ|i€0a
Xavo-0«
X^vvrai
XeXvfJicvoi w)j.€V
XcXv^JL^VOk ■fJTe
XcXviw'voi «<rt
PLUPERFECT.
XeXvjji^voi €l't]|i€v or ctji-cv
XcXv(i€Vot cttiTc or cItc
XeXv{i€voi. cCiicray or dev
S. ^2.
IXcXvjMiv
IXeXvo-o
(3.
eXcXvTo
»■«;
IX€Xv<r0ov
IX6Xt5o-0Tiv
.
P. i2.
IX€Xt;(i60a
IXai;<r0«
(3.
IXtXvVTO
§ 96.]
CONJUGATION OF VEKBS IN ft.
101
ifiontiniied
Voice.
).
AORIST.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
-u
Xv<rai
\v(rd<r0(a
XiJ<ra<r0ai
Xvo-dfi€Vos, -"H, -ov
(§62,3)
»!i
Xvora<r6ov
Xvard(r6a)v
p. js.
Xvorao-0€
Xso-do-Ooxrav
or Xvo-d(r0«v
PERFECT.
Al
X^v<ro
XcXvo-dtt
XcXvo-Ou
X^v|Uvos, -1], -ov
(^ 62, 3)
Al
XA.W0OV
XcXvo-6(i)v
p.) 3.
Xc'Xvo-Oe
X€X\;<r0a>crav
or XcXt{<r0«v
)2
INFLECTION.
[§ 96.
Passive
Present,
Imperfect, Perfect, and
FUTURE PERFECT.
Indicative.
Subjunctive,
Optative.
(3.
XtXvo-ofiaw
XeXiJo-Tj, XcXxjo-et
XcXvo-cTM
X€Xv(rol|JLT|V
XcXtio-oio
XcXvoroiTO
-■{I
XeXvcrco-Oov
X€Xi><r€<r0ov
X€Xv(roi<r0ov
XcXv<ro£cr0T]V
P.-] 2!
(3.
XcXvcroixeOa
XcXv(r«r0€
XeXvo-ovrai
AORIST.
XeXvo-oC|j.c0a
XtXv(roicr0e
XtXva-oivTO
(1.
(3.
IX^Otiv
Xv0u
Xv0fis
Xv05
Xv0c^v
-It
av0TiT»]v
XvOt^TOV
Xv0TJTOV
\vQilr\TOV, Xv0€tTOV
XvOd'iqTTlV, Xv0€lTTlV
p. ^2.
C3.
IXv0Tl|16V
CXV0T1T€
€Xv0i]<rav
Xt»0«|X6V
Xv0TiT€
Xv0«o-t
FUTURE.
Xv0€£t1HCV, Xv0€l|A€V
\vQdr\rij Xu0€it6
Xv0(CT)<rav, Xv0et€v
0-
Xv0rj(ro|i.ai
Xv0Ti(rT|, Xv0^(
Xv0'q<r€Tai
Tft
Xv0T](ro()iT]v
Xv0iio-oio
Xv0^<roiTo
-\l
Xt>0Vi(r€<r0ov
Xv0Ti(r€<r0ov
Xv0T]O-OtOr0OV
Xv0Ti<ro£o-0T]v
0-
PJ2.
< 3.
Xv0Ti(rofJL€0a
Xv0ii(r£<r0€
Xv0'i]<rovTai
Xv0T]<roi[jL€0a
Xv0'q<rot<r0€
XvOtjo-oivto
§ 96.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN il.
103
{continued).
Voice.
Pluperfect Passive, same as Middle.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Imperative. Infinitive. Participle,
XeXvo-eo-Oai Xe\v<r6fi.cvos, -r\, -ov
(§ 62, 3)
AORIST.
p. 12.
XvOt^Tl
XtlO^TU
Xv0TJTOV
XvG^TWV
Xv0t]T6
XvO^TftMTaV
or XvOevTwy
Xv0f)vai
XvOtCs, Xv6ct(ra, Xv6{v
(§68)
FUTURE.
Xv6'n(r«r6at
Xv0T]oro|xcvos, -T], -ov
(§ 62, 3)
04
INFLECTION.
[§96.
II. X€C-ir«
SECOND PEKFECT.
Active
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Optative.
(1.
S.^2.
(3.
X^Xoiira
X^Xoiiras
XeXoiirc
XeXo^iro)
XcXoiirgS
XcXoiirg
-M
\i\0C7rar0v
XcXoiiraTov
X€XotTrT]TOV
XcXotmiTov
XcXoiiroiTov
XcXoiTTOlTTJV
0-
PJ2.
(3.
XcXolirafJicv
XcXoiiraTc
XcXoiTrdo-k
X€Xo£ira)|i€V
XeXotmiTe
XcXoiirwo-i
Isl
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
1'
(3.
IXeXolireiv
IXcXoCircLS
IXeXoCircv
C 2. IXcXotirciTov
< 3. IXcXonr€iTT]v
cXcXoCireiixev
4XeXo£irei.T€
4XeXo£ir6(rav
or IXcXoCircicav
1^
(3.
Hi
1'
(3
SECOND AOmST.
^iirov XC-rra XCiroifii
^tires XCiTTis XCirois
^iire Xtirxi XCirot
IKClTiTOV XClTTlTOV XtlTOtTOV
IXnr4TT]v XtTTTjTOV XiitoCttiv
IX£'n-o|Jk€V XCir«(jLcv XCiroi|i,cv
2. IXiircT* XCiTTiTe XCitoitc
3. gXwrov Xiir«<rt XCiroiev
f 96,1 CONJj
JGATION OF VERBS
IN a. 1
(\iT, ft to leave.
~
Voice,
SECOND PERFECT.
Imperative,
InfinUive,
Participle.
g 52. XaOMTC
1 3. XeXoiir^TW
XeXoiirevac
XcXoiirws, XeXoiirvia,
XcXoiirds (§ 68)
•pv ( 2. XeXoCircTov
* i 3. XeXonr^TWV
p 5 2. XeXoCirrre
' \ 3. XcXonr^TOKTOV
105
SECOND AORIST.
{I
XCire
Xiir^TM
{I
p 52. Xiirerov
Xiir^Twv
XCir€T€
XiTreTttoray
or XiirdvTwv
Xiirciv
Xtirc&v, Xiirovorc^ Xiiroy
(§68)
106
INFLECTION.
■■IS:
(3.
SECOND AORIST.
Indicative. Subjunctive.
XCiqj
XCin)TC^
X£Trr]<r0ov
X£in]<r0ov
Xiir(o|A€6a
X£uT](r06
XCTTWVTaL
^ 1. IXtiroiJLTiv
S. ■( 2. IXiirov
( 3. IXiircTO
j)^ ^ 2. IXCirctrOov
cXiir^cr&qv
IXi7r($|X€6a
IXCTr€<r0€
iXfirovTO
Indicative.
CI. ((paviw) (|>av(o
•S 2. (0av^eis) 4>av€is
( 3. {(paviei) c]>avei
p. j2
2. (^ai'eeroj') ({>aveiTov
3. (^af^erov) <}>av€iTov
((pai^iofieu) <}>avovficv
2. (^aj'^ere) <{>avciTC
3. {tpapiovffi) ^avovai
FUTURE.
XeCirw
Middle
Optative.
Xiirotii-qv
Xiiroio
XCiroiTO
XCiroto-Oov
XnroC<r0T]V
Xi'iro£(JL60a
XtTroi<r0e
XCiroiVTO
III. ^aCva
Active
Optative,
((pavdoifxi) <f>avoiiJ.i, or {(paueoiTjv) (f'avol'qv
{(pavhis) (|>avois, or ((paveoLrjs) <)>avoiT]S
{(Pavioi) <|>avoi, or {4>a-veolr)) <}>avoiT)
{(pavioiTov) <{>avoiTOV, or ((paveoLriTou) (|>avoCT]rov
((paveoiTrjv) (f>avoiTT)v, or (0aj'eot^r77»')<j>avoi^TT]V
{(f)av€Oifiev) (|>avoip«v, or {(paueoirifiev) <f>avoCT|^cv
{(pavioLTe) <{>avoiT€, or ((paveolTjTt) <}>avoiT]T6
(^aj'^oie;') <{>avoieV| or {4)av€oiriaav) ({>avoCT]<rav
AORIST.
S.J2.
(3.
m
Indicative.
f<}>T]va
?<|)Tivas
€<}>^VaTOV
l<|>T]vdTTlV
€<})11VaT€
SubjunMive.
<j>'<lVT]TOV
<}>'^VT1T0V
Optative.
4>i(]vai|ii
<|>irivais or 4)'^v€ias
<f>-/ivai or <}>'qvei€
<t>^vaiTov
(|>'r]vai|XEV
«j>TJvaiT€
<{>iiv(U€v or (j>i]V6iav
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN fl.
107
{conlinued).
Voice.
SECOND AORIST.
Imperative,
Infinitive.
Participle.
Mi
Xiirov
XtireVew
Xkireo-Ooi
Xnr<5fji€vos, -^, -ov
(§ 62, 3)
^■{l
X£ir€<r0ov
XiireVBwv
'M
X£ir€<re€
Xtir^o-Oftxrav
or Xnr€<r0«v
^
{(pap-) , to show.
Voice,
FUTURE.
Infinitive,
(tpavieiv) 4>avciv
Participle.
{^ai^uv) <f>av»v
(§ 69)
AORIST.
Imperative.
-{I
HI
Ma:
4>T]vd.TC0
<|)'^vaTov
<|>T]vdT(i)V
<}>"^VaT6
^i]vdTa)(rav
or (|>T|vdvTMV
Infinitive.
<|>f)vai
4>'^vds, <{>^vd(ra, (|>T)vav
(§ 68)
108
SJ2.
(3.
-Si
P.-] 2.
(3.
INFLECTION.
[§ 96.
<}>aCva)
FUTURE.
Middle
Indicative.
Optative.
{(Paviofiai)
((paviri, (pavh
{(paveerai)
<|>avov[i,ai
i) <j)avfi, <j>av€i
<|)av€iTai
(ipaveoifiTjv) 4)avoCnTjv
{(pav^oio) (j>avoio
{(pavioLTo) <})avoiTo
(ipavietrdov)
{(jxivUadov)
<|>av€ior0ov
({>aveio-6ov
(4>avioiadov) <f>avoi(r6ov
{<pau€oi<T07]v) <j)avoi<r6Tiv
{(paved fieda)
((pavieade)
(<f)aviouTai)
lil
((paveolfxeOa) ^avoi[iiQa
{(pavhiade) 4>avot<r0€
{(paviotyro) <j)avoiVTO
AORIST.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Optative.
S. ^2.
C3.
€(|>T]vd|iT]V
C<j)T]VaTO
(p1]VT]Tai
«}>ijvaiTo
"11
l(j>i]vao-6ov
|<j>T)vdo-6T]V
<|)T1VT1O-0OV
(|>i]vaio-0ov
c|)TivaC<r0T]v
v.] 2.
(3.
l<j)T]vd(M0a
€<J>ijvao-0€
44>iivavTO
<)>T]vco(ji€0a
«pT]VT](P0€
(j>ljVb>VTai
SECOND AORIST.
<f>Tiva£fJi€0a
<|)Tlvaio-0€
<|)ijvaivTo
Passi\
0'
B.)2.
(3.
l4>dVT,V
l4>dvTlS
4«|>dvT,
<f)avw
<})avfis
4)avfi
(}>avckT]s
<i>avcCi)
m::
l<j)dvT)TOV
<|>avfjTov
^avfjTov
^avcCi^TOv or 4>aveiT0V
<j>av6iifiT'riv or ^aviirriv
p.-] 2!
(3.
l<|»dvT,»i€y
l<|»dvT,T€
€<{>dvT]o-av
<|)av<S}i€V
4>avf]T€
<|)av«<rt
<}>avcC'q|Ji€V or (|>avct(jL€V
<j>av€CtiT€ or <}>av€iT€
<)>avcCT](rav or <j>av€i€V
§ 96.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN SI
109
(continited).
Voice.
FUTURE.
Infinitive.
Participle.
((pavhadai) ^avila^u
{(pavedfieuos) <|>avotJ(i€VOS, -tj, -ov
- (§ 62, 3)
Imperative,
( 2. 4>fjvai.
Is.
4>T]vd(r0tf
•Q j 2. 4>'^va(rBov
( 3. 4)Tivder0wv
p ^ 2. ^-qvaa-Qi
'U. ' ' '
4>iivd<r0«<rav
or (}>T]vd(r6a)V
Voice.
AORIST.
Infinitive.
(j>^va(r6(u
Participle.
^vd|ievos, -1], -ov
(§ 62, 3)
SECOND AORIST.
g J2, <^VT|0t
3. (|>aWJT(i>
D.
( 2. ()>din^Tov
av^jTwv
5 2. <|>dvT]T€
X 3. iai
<)>av{)vai <^vcis, 4>av€i(ra, 4>av^v
(§ 68)
<|>av'/jTw<rav
or (|>av^vT(i)v
110 INFLECTION.
\ ^oivM (continued),
SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE.
[§ 96.
Indicative.
( 1. (|>avi](ro|xai
•s 2. 4>avij<rT), <j)C
( 3. <|>aviricr€Tau
Optative.
(f>avT]<roC)iT)v
Infinitive.
4)av'»]<r€o-0ai
<|>aVT|0-OlTO
S. •^ 2. 4>avij<rT), (f>avT)(r€i 4)avTi<roto
3. <|>aviricr€Tau
■Q ^ 2. «f>avTjoP€o-0ov
Participle,
(f>aVT]0-0(t€VOS,
-Tl,-ov(§62,3)
(3.
<})av'<i<r€(r0ov
<|>avT)(rd|ie9a
<|)avij<r6o-96
<{>av^(rovTai
<|)avi^<roi<r0ov
<{>avT)(ro£(r0T)V
(t>avT]orof)JLC0a
<|>avTJ<roi(r0€
<j)avT]<roivTO
Note 1. The uncontracted forms of the future active and middle
of (}>aiva), enclosed in ( ) above, and of other futures with liquid
stems, are not Attic, but are found in Homer and Herodotus. So
with some of the uncontracted forms of the aorist subjunctive passive
in ea>, &c.
Note 2. The tenses of XftVa) and (jiaivo) which are not inflected
above follow the corresponding tenses of Xvoj ; except the perfect
and pluperfect middle, for which see § 97. AeXeiix-fiai is inflected
like rerpifi-fiai (§ 97, 3), and 7r€<^ao--/xat is inflected in § 97, 4.
Note 3. Some of the dissyllabic forms of Xvm do not show the
accent so well as corresponding forms with three or more syllables.
The correct accent will be seen in the following forms of kcoXvo), to
hinder : —
Pres. Imp. Act. Aor. Opt. Act.
Aor. Imp. Act. Aor. Imp. Mid.
111
K(i>X\$(rai|J.i
KwXvo-ais or -iJ<r€ias
K»Xv(rai or -terete
K(tfXv(rov
KuXvo-dro)
KuXvo-arov
3 ^
III
&c.
&c.
&c.
&C.
Aor. Infill. Act. KwXvo-ai.
The three forms KcoXi^o'at, KcoXCo-at, and KiiiKv(Tai (Xvtrat, Xvaat, and
XCo-at) are distinguished in form only by the accent. See § 26, with
N. 3(1) ; and§22, N. 1.
f!>
§97.]
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE.
lU
Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of
Consonant Steins.
§ 97. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect middle arm'
sive, many euphonic changes (§ 16) occur when a final
consonant of the stem comes before an initial ytt, t, cr, or
(tQ of the ending (§ 118).
2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person
plural of these tenses is formed by the perfect participle
and etVt, are, and ^crai/, were^ the present and imperfect
of et>t, he (§ 127).
3. These tenses of Tpt/3ft) (stem T/9t/3-), ruh^ irXeKco
QiikeK-^, weave., ireidci} QrreiO-^^ persuade^ and a-TeWco
(^(TTeW-, o-reX-, <7TaX-), send, are thus inflected : — r^
Perfect Indicative.
^^•
T^Tpi|xp.ai
ire'irXc-yiiai
TrcVtierjiat
{<rraX|Mu
S.]2.
T€Tpt\|/at
ire'irXe^at
ire'ircKrai
ccrraXo-ak
(3.
TCTpiirTai
ircirXeKTat
irc'-ireto-Tat
lo-TaXrat
Mi
T€Tpi<j>eOV
ire'irXcxQov
triirna-Qov
cVtoXOov
T6'Tpi<|>0OV
-rriirXixQov
ircircKrOov
i'orraXeov
^^•
T€Tpi|l}Jl€0a
ircirXeYixeGa
ircireitrncOa
ia-ToX^iQa
p.] 2.
T€Tpi<}>e6
ireirXexOe
ircireio-Oe
co-TttXec
(3.
TCTpip,|J.eVO|.
ircirXc-yixe'vot
ireireio-jj^vot
ca-raXfi^voi.
€l<rC
da-C
€l<rC
AH
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
Siibj. Terpi(i|i€vos <3 TrcirXc'Yp.Evos & ireir€io-(i^vos (S l(rraX)jivos <S
Perfect Imperative.
«•{::
T€'Tpii|;o
ir^trXtlo
irlircioro
?<rraXflPO
T€Tp£<j>0«
ircirXexOw
•ir€ir€C<r0«
4(rTdX0(a
Ma.-
T^Tpi<j>0OV
ir^irXexOov
'Tre''ir6i(r0ov
4'<rTaX0ov
T€Tp(<j>0a»V
TTfrrXi^Qav
'Tr€ir€((r0a)V
4o-TdX0(i)v
-\l
T€Tpi<f>0€
triirXexQi
'ir^ir€i<r0€
?<rTaX0€
T6Tpt<j)0«(rav
irerrKixQaa'av
'ir€ir€t<r0a)<rav
4<rTdX0(i)<rav
or T€Tp£4>0«V
or irtTrXe'xOwv
or •jrCTrci<r0wv
or €<rTdX0«v
,112
INFLECTION.
[§97.
Ferfect Infinitive and Participle,
Infinitive T€Tpt<J>0ai ircirXexGat Treircia-Oai ^trrdXOai
Participle TCTpifxiievos ircirXe-Yjitvos ircircwrjwvos €<rTa\|iivos
^1
p. •J2.
13.
1. €TeTpC)l.)J.1]V
2. krirpv^o
3. iTCTpiirro
lT£Tpi({>90V
CTerpC<|>9T)v
4T€Tp{)J.|JLc6a
4TtTpuj>0€
T€Tpi.)l.(JL€VOI.
•Jjo-av
Pluperfect Indicative.
iTreirXe-yiiTjv circirc^a-p.Tiv
circ'irXe^o
lircirXocTO
lircirXcxOov
lircTrXe'xGTiv
cireirXe'-yp.cOtt
lircirXcxO*
ircirXeyiJtevot
fjo-av
^trcircio-o
cTreircwTTO
lirc'ircio-Oov
lirerrcfo-OTiv
lireireCo-p.cOa
circirtio-Gc
TTcirctcrp.cvoi
€OrTdX|lT]V
€<rTaXcro
'i<rraXro
€crTaX0ov
€<rTaX0Tiv
e(rTdX|ic0a
€OrTaX0€
loTaXiievoi
-fjo-av ^
4. The same tenses of (reXect)) reXcG, (stem reXe-, § 109,
2), finish^ ^alv(o (cjidv-), sJiow^ aXkacKTw {aXKar^-)^ exchange^
and i\eyx^ C^^IX'^^ convict, are thus inflected : —
Perfect
Indicative.
^^•
TCTeXco-|iai,
iri<)>ao-p.ai
i^XXaYnai
IXTfjXcYJMlt
a.U.
T€T^X€<rai
Tr€'<j>av<rai
i^XXalai
a^X€7|ai
(3.
T€T€X«rTai
ir€'<j>avTat
•J^XXaKTttu
IXi^Xc^KTai.
-la:
TerA.6<r0ov
'ir6'<|>av0ov
<^XXax0ov
IX-qKtyxQov
T€TcXc<r0ov
'jr€'<|>av0ov
<jXXax0ov
iXilXiyX^ov
^'•
TCT€X^(r|i€0a
'jr€<J)d(r}j.€0a
ir|XXd7|J^€0a
eX'r]X€7p.e0a
p.] 2.
T6t4X€O-0€
'ire(|>av0e
4iXXax06
^X^XcYxe^
(3.
TCTCXCO-JJL^VOI
'ire4>a(rtievoi
^XXa^jJievot
eXTjXc-yiJLevoi
eUrC
clcrC
€l(r£
€l(r£
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
SuhJ. T-iTcXco-nevos <S ir€<|)a(rjUvos *5 -qXXa-yiievos tS IX-qXe-ytievos c5
Opt. „ eV „ 6\:t]v „ €% „ cttjv*
Perfect Imperative.
reriKioro
T6T€X€<r0«
T6TA.€(r0OV
TCTcXeo-Owv
TCT€X€(r0€
T€T€X^<r0a)<rav
or T6T6X€<r0«V
'n'€4>av<ro
ir«|>dv0a>
'n'^<}>av0ov
'irc()>dv0(i>v
irc(}>dv0cD(rav
or 7r€4>dv0a)V
■fjXXolo
T|XXdx0«
■{lXXax0ov
■flXXdxOwv
i^XXax0€
'^XXdx0worav
or if|XXdx0«v
IX^Xr/fo
IXtiXcyxOw
or €XtiX^yx0»v
§97.]
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE.
113
Perfect Infinitive and Partici2)le.
Inf. TeT€X^o-0at ir6<}>dv6ai '^XXax^ai
Fart. TCTeXco-fJi^vos 7rc4»a<r|i^vos -^iXXaYiJi^vos
i 3. €T(
p. •<2.
(3.
1. lTcrcX^<r|i.T)v
2. IrcTcXeo-o
3. CTCTCXCO-TO
€T€T€XCO-0OV
cTeXeVOtjv
lT€T€X6O-|l€0a
€T€T^€<r0€
TeTcXco-jie'vot
■^<rav
Pluperfect Indicative.
^ir€<(>d(rfi'r]V 'jjWd^fJ.Tjv
lire4>av<ro
€'7r€(j>aVT0
^•ire(f>av6ov
^•n-€4>dv0Tiv
Iirc<}>av6e
ir€<|>a(r)j.evoi
■fjo-av
ij\Xa|o
i^XXaKTO
<]XXax0ov
T|XXdx0iiv
iP|XXd7jji,€9a
ijXXax0€
^T]X^'yX®*''
IXT)Xey|i^vos
IXTiX^YIiilv
IX^Xe^^o
IXl^Xc^KTO
tXVjXe-yxOov
eXTjXiTx^Tiv
IXr]X^-Y}i.e0a
eX^Xc-yx^e
eXi]X€Yp^voi
^<rav
Note 1. The regular third person plural in these tenses (rerpi^-
vrat, eTrenXfK-vTo, &c. formed like XeXv-vrai, eXeXw-i/To) could not be
pronounced. The periphrastic form is necessary also when <r is
added to a vowel stem in these tenses (§ 109, 2), as in rrreXeo-fxat.
On the other hand, when final 1/ of a stem is dropped in these tenses
(§ 109, 6), the regular forms in vrai and vro are used; as /cXtVo,
K€Kki-fiaiy KeKkivrai (not K€K\i]i€POt flai).
Note 2. The euphonic changes in these tenses follow the prin-
ciples stated in § 16, 1-4. Thus T€Tpifi-fxai is for TeTpi^-fiai (§ 16, 3);
Terpi^ai for Terpi^-aai (§ 16, 2); TerpiTr-TaL for rerpi^-Tai (§ 16, 1);
TeTpi({)-6ov for T€Tpi^-a6ou, Terpi^-Bov (§ 16, 4 and 1). So TvctiKey-pai
is for TTfTrXeK-p-ai (§ 16,3); nenXex-^ov for nenXfK-o-Oov (§ 16, 4 and 1).
Ueneicr-pm is ior neneid-fiaL (§ 16, 3); TreneL-aai for TreneiB-aai (§ 16,
2); 7r€n(i(r-Tai for irciveiB-Tai. (§ 16, 1); TreTreia-Oov for -ncneiO-aBov
(§ 16, 4 and 1). "-EaTaX-Bov is for fffraX-adov (§ 16, 4); earaX-de
for ((TTaX-aOf.
'In T€TeX€-a-p.ai, <r is added to the stem before p. and r (§ 109, 2),
the stem remaining pure before o-; lingual stems change the lingual
(t, S, 6) to <T before /li and t (§ 16, 1 and 3) and before 6 (for o-^,
§ 16, 4); these two classes of verbs therefore inflect these tenses
alike, though on different principles. On the other hand, the cr
before p. in n€(f)aapai and iivf^acrpr^v is a substitute for v of the stem
(§ 16, 6, N. 4) ; which v reappears before all other letters, causing
the o- of a6 to be dropped in uBov, o-^e, &c. (§ 16, 4). In the fol-
lowing comparison the distinction is shown by the hyphens: —
T€T^e-cr-}ttti
7r6'ir€io--}JLai
ir^<)>a(r-|i.ai.
TCTcXc-cai
ircVct-o-at
'irc4)av-orai
T6T€'X6-<r-Tai
•ire'ir€ur-Tat
'ire<|>av-Tai
T€T€Xe-(r0c
8
ire'<j>av-0€
114 ■ INFLECTION. [§97.
Tn ^\ay-fjiai no change was required (§ 16, 3) ; p^\a-^ai is for
fjWay-aai (§ 16, 2); ^'XXaK-rai for j^XXay-rat (§ 16, 1); fjXXav-Gop ioT
T)\\ay-(r6ov (§ 16, 4 and 1), cf. irenXex'^^^ (above). In (XrjXey-fiai,
yyfi (lor yxfi, § 16, 3) drops one y (§ 16, 3, Note); Aj^Xey^at and
fXi)\cyK-Tai are for eXrjXfyx-o-ai and eXrjXeyx-TUi (§ 16, 1, 2); eX^Xfyj^-
$€ is lor (XrjXeyx-o-de (§ 16, 4) ; see also § 102.
Note 3. (a) All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect
these tenses like Terpifji-fiai, &c. ; as XftVo), XeXeifi-fiai] ypdcfyo) (ypa^-),
write, ye'ypn/i-/iai (§ 16, 3); piiTTio (pi(^-), throw, eppifx-fxai. But
when final pn of the stem is reduced to p before /m (§ 16, 3, Note),
the original tt recurs before other consonants; as KaprrTa) (Kapir-),
hend, K€Kap-pai, KCKap^ai, K^Kaprr-Tai, KeKap(^-6f', Trepnco (irfpTr-), send,
n€TT€p-pai, 7r€7r€p\j^ai, TreTrepn-Tai, TreVf /x^-^e : compare with the latter
Irene p-pai from Treaarco (Trejr-), cook, inflected Trene-^ai, ire-nen-Tai,
nenecp-dey &C.
(h) All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like TrenXey-pai and
^XXay-/Liat; as rrpdcrcroi (npdy-), do, neTrpay-pai ; Tapd(r(rco {rapax'),
confuse, Terapay-pai ', (f)vXdiT(Ta) (<^i;Xa.<-), 7Te(f)vXay-pai. But when y
before p represents yy, as in eXtjXey-pai from eXeyx-(o (end of N. 2),
the second palatal of the stem recurs before other consonants.
(c) All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like irenda--
paL, &C.; as (Ppd^(o {(f)pa8-), tell, 7re(f)pa(T-pai, TreCJipa-aai, Tre<f)paa-Tai ',
(61^(0 (eOld-), accustom, e'idicr pai, eWi-aat. eWia-Tai, e'idia-6e, elOiar-dai;
pluf. eWia-priv, eidi-(ro, eWKr-ro ; a-nev8a> ((rnevd-^, pour, e(T7rei(r-pai
(§ 16, 6), for ecrirevb-p.ai, i(nrev(T-p.ai, (§ 16, 3), eairei-aai,, ecnreia-rai,
fa7rei(r-0e.
(d) Most ending in v (those in du- and ijv- of verbs in mvco or
vvco) are inflected like necjiaa-pai, changing v to a- before p (§ 16, 6,
N. 4), and retaining i/ elsewhere; as ixpaivM (u0ay-), fveare, v(pa(r-prti,
v(f)av-(Tai, v<pav-TaL, v(f)au-6e, v(pdu Sat; (TTjpaiv(o {(rrjpdv-), sJwiC, aeal]-
paar-pai', piaivax (pidv-), pollute, pepjaa-pai. Rarely such a v becomes
p.. as in 6^vv-a>, sharpen, a)$vp-p.2i (later ^^va-pai); and even then
the V recurs before other consonants, as ut^w-aai, w^w-rai.
When final j/ of a stem is dropped (§ 109, 6), as in kXIvch, hend,
KeKXi pat, the stem becomes a vowel-stem, and is inflected like
\fXv-pai.
(e) Those ending in X or p are inflected like eardX-pai; as dyyeXXa
(ayyfX-), announce, ^yyeX-pai; jitpto (dp-), I'alse, rip-pai', eyeipoi (eyep-),
rouse, eyrjyep-pat', 7reipa> (rrep-), pierce, Trerrap-paL (§ 109, 4); no
change being made except the dropping of a in (r$ after X or p
(§ 16, 4), as iu rjyyeK-Bf and €yr}yep-6ai.
§98.]
CONTRACT VERBS.
115
Contract Verbs.
§ 98. Verbs in aw, ew, and ow are contracted in the
present and imperfect. These tenses of ti/jluco (jL^a-)^
honor^ (pLXio) (</)fcX6-), love, and BrjXoot) (St^Xo-), manifest^
are thus inflected : —
ACTIVE.
Present Indicative.
(^'
(ri/idw)
Tl|XW
(</.iXe'w)
<)>i\(5
{8vX6u)
8tiXa>
s.
2.
(Tt/ideis)
TlJi^S
(0t\^eis)
4)iX€is
(drjXdeis)
StjXois
(3.
(ri/idei)
Tl|l^
(^tXe'eO
<},lX6l
{SrjXdeO
8tiXoi
Tv
!'
(rt/xcieroj')
Tip.dTOV
(^tX^eroi')
4)lX€lT0V
{dr]X6eTov)
8t|Xowtov
D.
(Tt/xderoi')
TlfldTOV
(^tX^ero;/)
<})tX€lTOV
{drjXoeTOu)
8t]Xovtov
li:
(Tt;u.do/(xei')
Ti)i(3|ji.ev
(0tXeo/i€J')
<j>iXov}«v
(SrjXoofieu)
8T]Xovp,€V
P.
(rt/adeTc)
Tl(ldT€
{(piX^ere)
<j>lX€lT€
(577X6ere)
StjXovtc
(Tifxdovai)
Tip.WO-1
(j^iXeovai)
<{>iXovo-i
(8r)X6ov(ri)
8TiXov<n
i
Present Subjunctive.
ri.
(rt/idw)
TIH»
(0tX^w)
c|>iX<5
{Sr,X6u})
8tiX«
a
•2.
(Ti/xdr?s)
Ti|iqLs
(0iX^77s)
«j>iXfis
(8vX6vs)
8-^X019
(3.
(ri/idT?)
Tip.a
((^iX^T?)
<|>lXTi
(577X67?)
8tiXoi
n
«:
(xt^dTyToi')
Tip,dTOV
((piX^Tjrov)
4)lXfjT0V
(577X677x01')
St^Xwtov
x/*
{Ttfid-nTOP)
Tijidrov
{4>L\ey}T0v)
<|>tX'qTOV
{dyjXorjTOp)
8iiX«Tov
^^•
{TtfJLdci}IJ.€P)
Tijjiwfiev
((pLX^ufiet^)
4>iX(5p.6v
(SrjXSoifjiev)
8t^X»}i€v
p.
- 2.
(rt/xdTjre)
Ttp,dT6
(cptX^Vre)
<|)lX71T€
{SrjXorjre)
8t|X«T6
(3.
(ri/idwcrt)
Ti|Ji«<n
(0tX^a>(rt)
<j>iX«cn
{dr]X6ci}<ri)
8T]Xb>(n
Present Optative.
n.
(rijudotjui)
TlflW|Xl
((ptX^oifii)
<|)iXot|it
(Sr)\6oifxi)
8tiXoi|ii
G.
■" 2.
{rifxdoii)
TlJXipS
(0iX^ots)
<|)iXois
(577X601S)
8t)Xois
(3.
{Ti/idoi)
Tl|i«p
(0tX^oO
<j)iXoi
(577X6ot)
8tiXot
D.
It
(ri/xdoiTov)
TlftWTOV
(0lX^OtTOl')
<|>lXoiTOV
(577X6o£roi')
8t]XoiTOV
(Ti/xaoiTTjv)
Tl[l,<tfTTJV
(0tXeotT7;j')
4)lXoiTT]V
(577X001x77^)
8llX0lTT]V
n.
(TlfJLdoifJLev)
Tl|la)[JL€V
((piXeoijULep)
(|>iXoi(tev
(577X6ot;aei')
8T]Xotjt€V
P
J2.
(ri/xdoiTe)
Tl|l<pT€
((pLXioire)
4>iXoiTe
(577X6o£xe)
8tiXoit6
I
(3.
{TL/xdoUf)
Tl|i«€V
((piXeoiev)
({>iXoicv
(57;X6otc»')
8i]Xokcv
116
INFLECTION.
(1. (r.
5.-J2. (r,
(3. (ri
or
ifiaolrjv)
ifxaoir])
(2. (jtfxaoiriTov)
(. 3.
(3.
(jL[Jiaoi.-qT'qv)
(TifiaoiTjfjiev)
(Ti/xaoir]Te)
[Ti/jLaoirja-av
Tl(JL«T)V
Tl|JI,(UT]S
Tl^(t>T]TOV
TIJJIWI^TTJV
((pLXeoirjv)
(<pcX(oir)s)
{(piXeoLrf)
(^iXcoLrjTov)
{(pLXeoirjTTju)
Ti(iwT]jJi€V (^iXeolTjfiei')
Ti(iwT)T6 (<piX€oir)Te)
Ti(xwTj<rav] {(piXeoirjaav)
<f>lXolT]V
(f>lXoiT]S
c{>lXo^T)
4>iXoCt]tov
<})tXoiTJTT]V
<(>lXo£T]|iCV
<J>iXo£tJT€
(j>iXokT](rav
or
(SrjXoolrjv)
{SrjXooirjs)
(driXoolrj)
(hrjXoolrjTov)
(drjXoof^Trjv)
{dr}Xooirj/X€j/)
(S-rjXooirjTe)
[5r]Xoolr]aav
[§98.
8t]XoCt]v
8t]Xo£t]s
8i]XoIt]
8t]XoCtjtov
8T]XoiiriTT)v
8t]XoCt]^cv
8i]Xotr]T6 -
8T]Xo£T]o-av]
Present Imperative.
g 52. (Tlf^ae)
' i 3. (Tifxa^TOj)
5 2. (Tifiderov)
' i 3. (ri/xa^Tuu)
TljxdTOV
TlJJtdTWV
2. (Tifxaere) Ti(JidT6
(0tXee)
((ptXciTUji)
(ff>LX^€TOv)
((piXetTuv)
{(piX^ere)
<f>iXe£Ta)
<}>lXciTOV
(|>LXeiTitfv
<}>iXeiTc
(S^Xoe)
(drjXo^TU))
(SrjXSeTov)
(5t]Xo^tuv)
(8r)X6€Te)
8^Xov
8t]Xovtw
8t)Xovtov
8l]XoviTWV
811X0VT6
3. {TCfxa^Twaav) TinaTw<rav ((piXedrcoaau) ^iXelTwo-av {drjXo^rwaau) STjXovTwo-av
or or or or or or
(rinadvTUv) Tijx<ivT«v {(PiXedpTuv) <|>iXovvTiav {b-qXobvTwv) StiXovvtwv
Present Infinitive,
{ri/xdeiu) Tifiav (<f>tX4(Lv) <j)iX6iv (dTjXdeiv) 8tiXovv
Present Pariicijjle (see § 69).
(Ti[xduv) Tinwv {(j)CX4uv) «|)iX(Sv {8rjX6uv) 8t|X«v
Imperfect.
S. -^2.
(3.
(irlfxaov)
((TifJLaei)
(Mfiae)
lTi|ias
€Tt(ia
(IcpiXeov)
(e<f>iXees)
(e^tXee)
i(f>aovv
(eSiJXooi')
(eS^Xoes)
(eS^Xoe)
l8^Xovv
^S^Xovs
ISVjXov
-■\l
(iTifxdeTOv)
(iri/ia^Trjp)
CTlfJldTOV
6Tt(ldTT]V
(f^tA^erof)
(((piXe^TTjv)
4<}>lX€lT0V
(iSrjXveTOv)
(edriXo^TTju)
l8l^X0VT0V
48-qXoiiTTiV
"li;
(irifjidofiev)
(iri/xdeTe)
(iTifxaov)
ItI|JI<0|1€V
cTifidrc
CTljXWV
(k^LX^Ofxeu)
(e0(Xf'er6)
(e^i'Xeoi')
l4>lXov(l€V
l<}>lX€tT€
4<j>iXouv
(e5r]X6o/j.€v)
(edrjXSeTe)
(eoTjXoov)
48T]X0V|i<V
48'I]X0VT«
48ViXovv
98.]
CONTRACT VEEBS.
117
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
(\. (Tifidofiai)
< 2. (rtfidrijTifide
( 3. (ri/iderai)
TlH«|Jlttt
{(f)i\eofjLai) <j>tXo€jJLat
{drjXoofjLai) 8T)Xo{)(iai
s.
ft)Ti|xa
(<^iXe'77,0iX^et)<j>iXin. «l>i^«^
(5'>;X677,5T7X6et)8TjXot
Tindrai
(^tX^erat) 4>iX6iTat
(5);X6eTai) S-qXovrai
D
( 2. (TCfj.d€<rdou)
Tind<r0ov
{(pcXieaeov) <})iX6i<r0ov
{briXbeadop) 8T]Xo{i<r0ov
( 3.. (Tifideadop)
Tifido-Gov
{(piXeeadov) <j)iX€i<r0ov
{dTjXoeadop) 8i]Xoi)<r0ov
( 1. {Ti/JLaS/xeda)
Ti(jL(o(jie6a
{(piXeo/jieda) ^iXovjJ.€0a
(drjXoo/xeda) 8T]Xov(Ji€0a
P.
■< 2. (TLfideffde)
Tindo-0€
{<t>L\iead€) <|)iX€i<r0€
{d-nXoeade) 8TiXov<r0€
( 3. (Ti/Mdovrai)
Tiftuvrai
Present Subjunctive.
{5T]X6ovTat) 8T)XovvTai
( 1. (Ti/iidco/xai)
Ti(ia>(tai
{(piX^u/xai) <}>iX»(J.at
(5T)X6ci)fiat) 8T]Xw|xat
S.
j 2. (rt^dTj)
Tlfl^
(0tX^77) <t>tXti
(drjXorj) Sii\\oi
( 3. (TCfxdrjTai)
Tifidrai
{<f>i\^T)Tai) <|>iXfiTai
{5rjX6T]TaL) 8TiXwTat
D.
( 2. {TLfid-qadov)
■ ( 3. (TLtid-qadov)
Tindo-Oov
((piX^rjadov) <j>iXri<r0ov
{driXdrjadov) 8T]XcIi<r0ov
Tijido-Oov
{(f)iXi'n(Tdov) 4)iXT]<r0ov
{8T]X67](Tdop) 8TjX«(r0ov
( 1 . (rtfxawfMeda)
Tl(l.«fX€0a
((piXeufxeda) <j)iXcG(Ji€0tt
{5r)Xod)fie6a) 8T]Xu}X€0a
P.
< 2. (TwdT^cr^e)
Tind<r0€
{(piXe-naee) <i>tXf]o-0€
{dvXdrjaee) 8iiX<S<r0€
(3 (Tt/idwj'Tai)
Tt|J,»VTai
{(piXicafTaL) <{>iXc»vTai
Present Optative.
{SrjXouvTai) 8T]X«VTat
ri. (TifiaoLix-nv)
TlJiWRV
{(PiXeoiiiiTjv) <}>iXoC|M]v
(SrfXoolfjLTjp) 8T]Xoi|Jt.TlV
S.
•s 2. (riyuctoto)
TlflWO
{4>LXeoio) <j)tXoio
{8t}X6olo) 8-qXoio
(3. (rifidoiTo)
ti|X(3to
{4)iXioiTo) <J)iXoi:to
(dTjXdoLTo) 8tiXoito
T)
^ 2. (TifjLdotcrdov)
( 3. (Ti/jiaoicr6r]v)
Tin(3<r0ov
{(j)iX€oia6ov) <}>iXot<r0ov
(drjXooKTdou) 8T]Xor<r0ov
Um
Tint5o-0iiv
{(fytXeoLadrjv) cj>iXoto-0T]V
{drjXooiadrjv) 8T]Xoi<r0T]V
(1. (ri/xaoifieda) Tifjiw|jic0a
{(piXiol^ieda) <j)iXoi|i€0a
(8r]Xooi/xe6a) 8T]XoifJi€0a
P.
•< 2. (rifidoiaee)
Tijiw<r0€
{<f>iX^oi<r0€) 4>iXoio-0€
{57]X6oL<Tee) 8T)Xoi<r0€
\
V3. (TlfldotKTo)
TIJXWVTO
{(pLX^OlVTo) <})tXoiVTO
Present Pmperative.
{8riX6oiPTo) 8|jlXoivto
s.
f 2. (Ti)tt(£ov)
( 3. (rifiadadu)
Tl(l.U
(<f>iXeov) ^\Xov
(S-nXdov) StiXov
TipLdo-0a>
{(juXeiaOio) ^\.\d<rQa
{8r]Xoi(r6ui) 8T]Xov<r0(i>
D
( 2. (rifideadov)
i 3. (Ttfia^aduu)
Ti[idcr0ov
{(pLXeeadov) <|)iX€r<r0ov
(SrjXoeadop) 8t]Xow0ov
u.
Ti[j.d(r0(i>v
{(j)LXe4adwv) <|>tX€io-0a)V
{8riXo^adojv) 8T|Xov(r0a)V
(2. (rifideaee)
Tindor0€
((f>iXe€(rde) <}>iX€io-0€
(SrjXdeaee) 8TiXo€(r0€
P.
) 3. (rifiaiadu-
Tind<r0«<rav (^tXe^o-^w- <|>tX€£or0«o-av (STjXoiadu}- 8T]\ov<r0ft)o-a>
1 aav or
or
ffav or or
(rav or or
V. Tifia^aduf)
Ti[jLd(r0<DV
<f>iXe^adu}v) 4>iX€{o-0ft)V
SrjXoiadcov) 8T)Xovo-0tty
118
INFLECTION.
[§98.
{rifideaOat) Ti|xaor0aL
{rifiad/xevos) Tip.w|i6V0S
(3.
(iTiiJ.a6fJL7]v)
{eriimdov)
3. (eTiixdeTo)
€TI|JL(0(J.T]V
eTl|lU)
CTijidro
(2. {€ TLfjt.de a 6 Of) €Tip,d<r9ov
1 3. (e
P. •<!2
TCfxaeadrju) €Tip,dcr0T]V
{ertfjiaoixeda) CTi)i.(io|X€9a
2. {eTLjxdeade) €Ti|xd(rd6
(.3. {eTLjxdoVTo) €Tip,WVTO
Present Infinitive.
{(piXieadai) <|)iX€i<r0at
Present Participle.
(0tXe6/Aevos) ({>iXov|jl€VOS
Imperfect.
(((piXeSixTjv) c<f>iXot)|j.T]v
(ecpiXiov) €(|>iXov
{€(pl\i€T0) €<}>lX€lTO
{i(pL\ee<x6ov) e(|>iX€i(rdov
{kcfyCkeiadriv) c(|>iX€C(r6T]v
(e^tXeo/ueda) ecfx-XoviicGa
{e<pL\4ea6e) l^iXiia-Qt
(e0tX^OVTo) €<j>lX0VVT0
(5T;X<5e<r^at) 8T]Xov(r9ai.
{5TJ\o6/jievos) STiXotifxevos
{IdrjXoS/xrjv) lBi]\ovii.r\v
{l8rj\6ov) ISi^Xov
{eSrjXoeTo) eSTjXoiiTO
(tSrjXdeadov) l8T]Xo€cr6ev
(kb'i)XoiadT}v) £8T]Xoii<r6T|v
(jebriXobixeOa) €8T]Xov(i€6a
ik8T}Xbeade) eS-qXovade
(JdrjXbovTo) e8TjXo\)vTO
Remark. The imcontracted forms of these tenses are never used in
Attic Greek. Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Homer ; those ot
verbs in cw are common in Homer and Herodotus ; but those of verbs in
003 are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see § 120.
XoTE 1. Dissyllabic verbs in eco contract only ee and fei. Thus
TrXc'o), .sa//, has pres. TrXeo), TrXet?, TrXet, TrXeiroi/, TrXco/xev, TrXf Ire, TrXc'ovo-t j
imperf. enXeov, enXas, enXei, &c. ; infin. TrXeTi'; partic. nXecov.
Aeco, hind, is the only exception, and is contracted in most forms;
as bnvai, dovfj-ai, dovvraif ebovv, partic. ficoi/, dovv. Ae'w, to tccint, is
contracted like ttXc'co.
Note 2. A few verbs in aco have rj for a in the contracted forms;
as 8i\f/d<o, 8t\l/a>, tliirst, bt-^fjs, 8i\|/-.^, di-^^re ; imperf. fSt>//-coi/, ebtylrrjs,
fBlyj/r)] infin. diyj/^rju. So ^dco, live, kpoco, sci'ape, Tretvao), hunger^ afidat
smear, XP""> ff^^^ oracles, with xpf^o/xai, and yj/dco, rub.
Note 3. 'Piy6a>, shiver, has infinitive piyatu (with piyovv), and
other similar forms in w. 'idpoco, sweat, has ISpwcrt, l8p<or), idpav-
Tl, &C.
Note 4. The third person singular of the imperfect active does
not take 1/ movable in the contracted form; thus e^iX« or f^/Xcfj/
gives e(f)IXei (never ecjitXeiv). Except exp^v or xp^^ (fo^* ^'XP^^^> ^^®
Note 2), and a very few jwetic forms.
Note 5. The present infinitive active of verbs in aco and ow (in
av and ovv, not av and olv) is probably contracted from forms in aeu
and oeu. The infinitive in ev is Doric (§ 119, 14, c). See § 9, 4,
N. 2.
Note 6. The optative active in onja-av is very rare, and perhaps was
never used except (contracted) in verbs in ew. (See § 115, 4.)
§100.] AUGMENT. 113
AUGMENT.
§ 99. 1. In the secondary tenses of the indicative,
and in the perfect and future perfect of all the moods and
the participle, the stem of the verb receives an augment
(i.e. increase') at the beginning.
2. There are three kinds of augment, syllabic augment,
temporal augment, and reduplication.
(a) The syllabic augment prefixes e to verbs beginning
with a consonant ; as Xvw, eXvov:
(5) The temporal augment lengthens the first syllable
of verbs beginning with a vowel or a diphthong ; as ayo),
lead^ rj^ov ; olKeco, ol/ccj, dwells ^KTjaa,
((?) The reduplication prefixes the initial consonant fol-
lowed by 6 in forming the perfect stem of verbs beginning
with a consonant ; as Xvca, \e-XvKa ; 7/oa(/)o), write, yi-
ypacfia. For Attic reduplication, see § 102.
Remark. There is an important distinction between the aug-
ment of the imperfect and aorist, which does not belong to the
tense stem and never appears except in the indicative, and the redu-
Elication or other augment of the perfect and future perfect, which
elongs to the perfect stem, and is therefore retained in all the
moods and the participle.
Imperfect and Aorist Indicative.
§ 100. 1. The imperfect and aorist indicative of
verbs beginning with a consonant have the syllabic
augment e. E.g.
Ayco, eXvov, e\v(Ta,i\v6fxr)v, €\v(rafiT}v, iXv^rju; ypa(f>'', icrite, eypac^oi',
€ypa\|/'a, i'ypdcprjv; piVro), throic, (ppirrrov, (fjpL(()riv (foT pp see § 15,2).
For the pluperfect of these verbs, see § 101, 4.
2. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs begin-
ning with a short vowel have the temporal augment,
which lengthens the initial vowel ; d and e become ij, and
t^ o, ij become I, cj, v. E.g.
120 INFLECTION. [§101.
"Ayo), lead., ^yov, fjx6r)v\ iXavva, drive, ffkavvov, iKfTeva) (T), implore ^
iKcrfvov (c)» lK€T€V(Ta (r) ; ovetSi^w, reproach, wveidi^ov ; vfipl^oi (v),
insult, v^plcrOrjviy)', aKo\ov$ito^ accompany, rjKoXovdrjaa', 6p66(o, erect^
fopdoia-a.
For the augment of verbs beginning with a diphthong, see § 103.
Note 1. If the initial vowel is already long, no change takes
place in it, except that a generally becomes rj by augment; as
dOXeca {a6- contr. from d(6-), struggle, ^6\r}(ra. Both a and r] are
found in dvakio-KOi and dvaXoa) ; see also dio) (poetic) , hear.
Note 2. BovXopxii, loish, dvvafiai, be able, and /LteXXw, intend, often
add the temporal augment to the syllabic ; as €^ov\6p.T]v or r)^ovX6-
firjv, e^ovXrjOrju or rj^ovXf]6r}V ', idvvdfiTjv or ribvvdp.r}v, edvi^Tj6r]V or rjdvvrj^
Otjp] efieXXov or ^/leXXo;/.
Note 3. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods
and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; as ne-
(f)pa8ov from <ppd^<o, tell; nemdop from ireiOo) (ni6-}, persuade ; re-
TapTTofxTjv (§ 109, 4, N. 1) from Tepirui, delight; KeKXojirjv and KfKXoficvog
(§ 109, 7, b) from KiXop.aL., command ; fjpapov from dpapio-KOi (dp), Join;
apopov from opwpn (op-), rouse ; nenaXuiv (partic.) from naXXco (naX-),
shake; KeKdfico (subj.) from Kapvo) (kq/x-), so XeXd^w from Xayxdvco;
irf^i8€(T6ai, inf. irom ^ei5o/xai (^id-), spare, so Xe-XaOeadat, Xe-Xa^eadai,
In the indicative a syllabic augment may be prefixed to the redupli-
cation ; as €K€KX6ixr]v, tTre^i/ov (from cj)€v-) , €7r€(f)padov.
Note 4. "Ayw, lead, has a second aorist with Attic reduplication
(§ 102), rjyayov (ay-ay-), which adds the temporal augment in the
indicative, subj. dyayo), opt. dydyotfii, inf. dyayiiv, part, dyaycoi';
mid. rjyayofxrjv, dydycofiai, &c., — all in Attic prose. See also the ao-
rists ^ueyKa and fjvfyKov (from stem ivex-, €V-€V€k-, eveyK-) of (ptpo)',
oXoXkou (for dX-aXeK-ov) of dXe|a), ward off; and ivivl-nov of ivinroi
(evijT-), chide.
Note 5. In Homer a liquid (especially X) may be doubled like p
(§ 15, 2), after the augment e; as eXXaxov for eXaxov. So sometimes
(t; as ea-aeiovTO from o-ftw.
Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect,
§ 101. 1. Most verbs beginning with a consonant
augment the perfect and future perfect in all their forms
by prefixing that consonant followed by e. This is called
reduplication. JE.g,
Avco, Xe-XvKa, Xe-Xvpai, Xe-XvK(vai, Xe-XvKa>Si Xe-Xvfievos', ypd(J)a>, ye~
ypacpa, ye-ypd(fi6ai.. So Bvco, sacrifice, ri-OvKa (§ 17, 2); ^aiVto (<^av-)y
show, TT€-(}iaap.aL, 7r€-<j)dv6aL ', }(alv(t>, gape, KC-xrjva.
§ 101.] AUGMENT. 121
Note. Five verbs have €i as augment in the perfect instead of
the reduplication : \ayxdv(o (Kax-), obtain by lot, €d\.T)xa, (iXrjyfiai', Xafj.-
^dvoi (XojS-), take, etXrj^a, etXrjmiai. (poet. XeXT^/i/xat) ; Xc'-yo), collect, in
compos., -e'iXoxa, -elXfyfiai with -XcXeyfxat {bia-Xeyofxai, discuss, has 8i-
(iXcynai); ficipofxat (fi€p-), obtain part, ([jxaprai, it is fated ; stem (pe-),
€iLpr)Ka, have said, cIprjfjLai, fut. pf. elprjcrofiai (see clnou). See also eday.
An irregular reduplication appears in Homeric deidoiKu and tei-
bta^ from deiba>, fear.
2. Verbs beginning witb two consonants (except a
mute and a liquid), with a double consonant (J", f, -^/r), or
with p have the simple syllabic augment e in all forms of
the perfect and future perfect, ^.g,
SreXXo), send, earaXKa', (rjTeo}, seek, e^rjTrjKa', ^€v8<o, lie, tx/^-fucr/iai,
eyJAfva-fjLtvos'^ piivToi, throw, eppifxpai, €pp'i(f)6ai. (for pp see § 15, 2).
Note 1. Verbs beginning with yv, and some others beginning
with a mute and a liquid, take e instead of the reduplication ; as yi/o)-
pi^w, recognize, iyvwpiKa; yiyvdxTKa (yvo-), know, eyvaxa', but KXeia>,
shut, KeKXeiKa (regularly).
Note 2. Mifivrja-Ka (iiva-), remind, has p.€p.vr]fiai (memini), remem-
ber , and Krdonai, acquire, has both KeKTrjfMai and eKTrip.ai, possess. See
also Homer, pf. pass, of pinro) and pvn6(o.
3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel have the tem-
poral augment in all forms of the perfect and future
perfect. U.ff.
"Ayco, lead, ^;^a, ^ypai, rjyfievos', aKoXovdeay, folloiv, rjKoXovBrjKa, rjKo-
Xov6r)Kevai', opSoo), erect, copdcoixai; 6pi(a), bound , copiKa, (opi(rfj.ai; aTijjioay,
dishonor, r}Tip.<cKa, ^ri/ioj/xai, fut. pf , rjTifioxropiai ; the fut. pf . is very
rare in verbs which have the temporal augment.
4. When the perfect has the reduplication, the pluper-
fect generally prefixes to this the syllabic augment e.
But when the perfect has the syllabic augment e (or et)
or the temporal augment, the pluperfect and the perfect
are augmented alike. JE.g.
Auo), XeXvKtt, iXcXvKftv, XeXvpai, iXeXvfirjv', orcXXft), earaXKa, coroA-
Kdu, earaXfiaLf iardXfirjv ; Xap^dvo). e'iXr]cf)a, elXrjCfyeiv ; ayye'XXo), announce,
TjyyeXKa, fjyyeXicdv, rjyyeXpai^ r)yyiXfxr}V.
Note. The reduplicated pluperfect sometimes omits the addi-
tional syllabic augment ; as imrovBtcrav, ireirroiKftrav.
122 INFLECTION. [§102.
Attic Reduplication.
§ 102, Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o augment
the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two
letters to the common temporal augment. This is called
the Attic reduplication. E.g.
^Apooi, plough, dp-ripofiai; ifieci, vomit, efir)p.€Ka; €\(y)(a>, prove, e\^-
Xey/iat, eXrjXeyfirjv ', eXavvui (iXa-), drive, eXtjXaKa, iXrjXaixai', aKOvo), hear,
dK^Koa (§ 110, IV. d, N. 1).
Other verbs which have the Attic reduplication are dycipa, aXci0o),
aXe'o), eyeipdi, tpeifio), ep^op-ai, ea6l(o, oXXvfii, op.vvp.i, opvTToi, 0epa). See
also, lor Ionic or poetic forms, alpe(o, dXdopai, dXvKreai, dpapiaKa, ipei-
TTO), €)(^u>, TJp,vci}, (oSu-) o So) 8 utT/xot, o^o), opdoi (on"co7ra) , 6pey(o, opwfMi.
The Auic reduplication (so called by the Greek grammarians) is not
peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer.
Note 1. 'Eyeipto (eyep-), rouse, has 2 perf. iyp-i^yopa (for iy-rjyop-a,
of. § 109, 3), but fy-r)y€piiai. For the Attic reduplication in fjyayov,
2 aor. of ayco, in fjveyKa and fjvey<ov of </)ep<i), and in Homeric dXaXKov
of aXe'lo), see § 100, 2, N. 4.
Note 2. The pluperfect rarely takes an augment in addition to
the Attic reduplication. But dKovu), hear, dKrjKoa, generally has Y]Kr)-
Koeiv in Attic; and aTr-wXcbXei (of d7T-6XXvp.i, aTr-dXcoXa), w/xco/xoKfi
(of ofivvp.1, 6p.a>p.oKa), and bL-(opa>pvKTo (oi Bi-opvcra(o. 8i-op(i)pvypai)
occur in Attic prose. See Homeric pluperfects of eXavva and epeida.
Augment of Diphthongs.
§ 103. Verbs beginning with a diphthong take the
temporal augment on the first vowel of the diphthong,
at or a becoming rj, ot becoming w. U.g.
Airt'o), ask, yTrja-a; oIk€<o, dicell, ^Kr}(ra, (OKrjfievos', av^dvca, increase f
rjv^Tjaa, Tjv^rjpai, rjv^Tjdrju'^ adco, sing, ^dov.
Note. Ou is never augmented. Ei and ev are generally without
augment; but MSS. and editors differ in regard to many forms, as
eiKaaa or jjKacra (fiKa^oj, likeii), tvbov or r^vbov (evSw, sleep), evprjKa and
evpedrjv or rjvprjKa and rjvpeBqv {evpLaK(i),jind), €i)^dp.r}v or rjv^dprjv (ev-
Xopai, pray). Editions vary also in the augment of avalvco, dry, and
of some verbs beginning with oi, as olaKoa-Tpocpia), steer.
§105.] AUGMENT. 123
Syllabic Augment before a Vowel.
§ 104. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syl-
labic augment, as if they began with a consonant. 'When «
follows the augment, c€ is contracted into u. E.g.
*Q0€(o (<o6-), push, eaaa, ecoo-/xat, c(i>a6r]v'^ aXlaKofxai., be captured,
eaXa>/ca, 2 aor. edXcoj/ (or {fk(iiv)\ ayvvyn (ay-), break, ea^a, 2 pt. eaya;
e/jSu), do, Ionic, 2 pt'. eopya', wviofiai, bug, iuivov^irjv, ike. ; iOi^o), accus-
tom, eXdia-Uy etBiKa (from ie3-) ; e'ao), permit, eidaa, eid/ca.
These verbs are, further, eXio-o-o), cXkcd, eTrw, epydi^onai, epnay or
ioTzt^oi, earidat, e^co, trjui (e-}, with the aorists eidov and elXov (atpto)),
the perfects etcoOa {Fed-y bid- for Fa>6-) and eot/ca (t/c-) , and plpf . f torri^-
K€iv (for ceo-r-) of larrjixi. See also Ionic and poetic forms under
dv8dp<o, OTTTO), €tfio/xai, etXo), eiTroj/, eipo), cXtto), ewvfii, l^q>, and e^ojxaL.
Note 1. 'Opdco, .see, and dj/-oiya). o/)en, generally take the tempo-
ral augment after the syllabic; as eapoiv, (capaKa (or (opdKo), ioopdpat;
dv-ecpyov, dv-ca^a (rarely fjvoiyov, rjvoi^a, § 105, N. 3). Homer has
frjvdiwou from dvbdvo), please : etovoxoet imp. of oivoxoeoo, pour wine ;
and 2 plpf. iajXTtei and ewpyet from cXttu) and epSeo. 'Eoprd^o), ieep
holiday (Hdt. oprd^oj) has Attic imp. (a)pTa(,ov.
Note 2. This form of augment is explained on the supposition that
these verbs originally began with the consonant F or some other consonant,
which was afterwards dropped : thus el5ov, saw, is for ^Ftdov (cf. Latin
vicl-i) ; ^opya is for FeFopya, from stem Fepy- (§ 110, IV. d), cf. Eng. work
(German fVerk) ; and ^piru, creep, is for ff-epwu (cf. Latin serpo).
Augment of Compound Verbs.
§ 105. 1. In compound verbs, the augment follows
the preposition. Prepositions (except Trepv and Trpo)
drop a final vowel before the augment e. U.g.
npocr-ypdcfxi), Trpoa-ey pa(f)ou, 7rpocr-y€ypa(f)a', cl(r-dy(o, fla-'Tjyov (§ 26,
N. 1); €K-3dXX<a, €^-fj3aXXoi/ (§ I'ij 2); avX-Xeyo), crvv-fXeyov, avp.-
TrXfKO), avv-enXeKov (§ 16, 5) ; cru'y-;^6a), (Tvv-exeov, avy-K€\vKa', avaKfvd^cOy
avueiTKeva^ou (§ 16, 6, N. 3) ; dno-^aXXco, dir-e^aXXov ; — but Trept-
e^aXXov and Trpo-eXeyoi/. See § 131, 7.
Note 1. Ilpo' may be contracted with the augment; as npovXeyov
and irpovjSai.vou, for irpoeXeyov and npoe^aivov.
Note 2. Some verbs not themselves compounds, but derived from
jiouns or adjectives- compounded with prepositions (called indirect
124 INFLECTION". [§ 106.
compounds), are augmented after the preposition; as vnoTrrevto (from
vfroTTTos), suspect, vTrayirrevov^ as if the verb were from vtto and
oTrreuo); aTToXoyeofiai, defend one^s self, aTr-eXoyrjcrdixTjv ; see also €kkXi]-
aid^Q). JJapavofxeb), transgress law, Traprjvofxovv, &c. is very irregular.
KaTTjyopeo) (from Karrjyopos) , accuse, has Kar-qyopovv (not iKaTrjyopovv) .
See bLaiTdta and didKoveo) in the Catalogue of verbs.
Note 3. A few verbs take the augment before the preposition,
and others have both augments ; as KaBt^ofim, sit, UaOeCeTo ; KaOlCo,
eKadiCoV, KadevBio, sleep, eKaOevbov and Ka6r)v8ov (Ep. Kadevbov) ; dv€x<^j
r]Pfix6p,r)v, rjveaxdp.r]V (or rjvaxdprjv). See dcjiirjfii, dix(f)uvvvp.i, dp.^i-
yvoeo), afXTrlo-xofiaL, eVo;(Xea), and dfx(j)ia^r]r€a>, dispute, T]fx(Pia^TjTovv and
r}fi(})€(T^r)Tovv (as if the last part were -(r/S^rfo)).
2. Indirect compounds of Svo--, ill, and occasionally those
of €v, well, are augmented after the adverb, if the following
part begins with a vowel. JS.g,
Ava-apearTea),be displeased^ bvarjpearovv'^ eicpyerea, do good, el-qpyk-
rrjKa (or eyrpy-).
Note. In other cases, compounds of Svo-- are augmented at the
beginning, and those of ev generally omit the augment.
3. Other indirect compounds are augmented at the begin-
ning. See, however, oSoTroiew. ^
Omission of Augment.
§ 106. 1. In the imperfect and aorist, the temporal aug-
ment is often omitted b}^ Herodotus ; as in dfxci/BeTo and dpei-
if/aro (for rjfiiL^eTo and r)ix€L\l/aTo) ; and both temporal and
syllabic augment by the Epic and L3Tic poets, as in oficXeov,
txpVj 8coK€ (for oi/JLcXeoVj €t;(Ov, cScoKe).
Note. The reduplication or augment of the perfect stem is very rarely
omitted. But Homer has dix'^'^°-'- for SeS^xarai, from 5^xo/iai, receive ;
and Herodotus occasionally omits the temporal augment, as in KaTappdoSrj-
Kas (for Kar-rjpp-), and he makes iiraXiKXoyrjTO as plpf. of TaXiXXoy^u,
2. The Attic poets sometimes omit the augment in (lyric) choral pas-
sages, seldom in the dialogue of the drama. In Attic prose we have xpijv
for ixprjv (impf. of XP^)* i^usi-
{—
§108.] VERBAL STEMS,
£ms.
VERBAL STEMS.
Formation of the Present Stem from the Simple Stent.
§ 107. That we may know to what present any verbal
form is to be referred, we must understand the relations whicTi
exist in different classes of verbs between the present stem
and the simple stem (§ 92, 2). When these are not identical
(as the}' are in Xvco), the present stem is generalh^ an enlarged
form of tlie simple stem ; as in kottt-uj (kott-), strike, /xavOdv-o)
{fiaO-), learn, 8ok€-io (8o/c-), believe. In a few very irregular
verbs, however, there is no connection to be seen between the
present stem and the stem or stems which are in use in other
tenses; as in cfiipw (</>e/3-), bear, fut. oicrw (ot-), aor. rjveyKa
(^iueyK-).
§ 108. Verbs in <o are divided into eight classes with
reference to the formation of the present stem from the simple
stem.
I. First Class. (Stem unchanged.) Here the present is
formed directly from the "single stem of the verb ; as in kv-w,
loose, Xcy-o), say, TrAeK-w, weave, ayo), lead, ypdcf>-(i), write.
Note. The pure verbs of this class which irregularly retain a short
vowel in certain tenses are given in § 109, 1, N. 2 ; those which insert a-
in certain tenses, in § 109, 2 ; and the verbs which add e to the stem in
some or all tenses not of the present system (as ^ovXafiai), in § 109, 8.
These and other verbs of this class which are peculiar in their inflection will
be found in the Catalogue of Verbs.
II. Second Class. (Lengthened Stems.) 1. This includes
all verbs with mute simple stems which form the present stem
by lengthening a short vowel, d to rj, i to a (sometimes to I),
V to €v (sometimes to v) ; as ttjk-oj (raK-), melt, XctV-oi (Xltt-),
leave, (^evy-w (<^uy-), Jlee, rpifS-u) (TpXjS-), rub, i^v;(-w (^l/vx-),
cool.
Here belong, further, KrjSoi (/caS-), "K^dco (Xa^-), a^Troj (o-an-), aXei-
<^co (dXicf)-), cpftTTO) (f'prTT-), 7761^0) (nid-), a'ti^co (ari^-), (TTeix<>> (o'ti'X')'
ipfidofxai (<|)i8-), ^Xl/3a) (^Xt/3-), nvtyoi {nvXy-), nevOofia!. (nvd-), Tiv\ai
126 INFLECTION. [§108.
(rvx-)^ Tv(f)(o (tv^-), (^piyoi {^pvy-)\ with Ionic or poetic ip^Koa
(fpiK), ep€vyop.at (ipvy), KeuSco (ku6-), Tp.T]yM (r/xay-), and (dan- or
Ta(f)-) stem oi reSrjna and ctckPov] see also el'/cco (Ik-)- Tpcbyco (jpity-)
irregularly lengthens a to «.
2. Six verbs in ew with stems in v belong bj^ formation to
this class. These originally lengthened v to eu, which became
€f (§ 1, N. 2) before a vowel, and finally dropped F and left c ;
as TrAv-, ttAcv-, ttAcF-w, xXc-cd, 5ai7.
These verbs are ^ew (6v-)y run, vea (vu-), .sw/w, n\e(o (ttXiJ-), .<?«//,
TTi/eo) (tti/v-), breathe, pea> {pi)-), flow, x^^ (x^")' pour. The poetic
trevo) (cru-), wr^e, has this formation, with 6v retained.
Note. Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem, as
Tr]K- in rrfKoi, uev- in (i/efo)) veco, in all tenses except in the second per-
fect, second aorist, and second passive tense systems ; as (f)€vya>, (j)(v-
^Ofxai, effivyov; TrjK(o, ttj^co, reTTjKa, iTaKrjv', pea (for peFa), pevaopai,
(ppvrjv. Exceptions are the perfect middle of aXei</)(u, epeUoi, (pflnco,
o-rei'/So), revxo, the perfect active of pea and rpl^co, and most tenses of
Xeoi and ctcuo). The lengthened stem of the second perfect (as in re-
TTjKa, XeXotTra, &c.) is explained on the general principle, § 109, 3.
III. Third Class. ( Verbs in tttw, or T Class.) Simple labial
(tt, yS, <f>) stems generall}' add r, and thus form the present in
TTToj (§ 16, 1) ; as KOTTT-d) (kott-), cut, jSXdTTT-u) (jSka/S-) , hurt,
ptTTT-oi (pi^-), throw.
Here the exact form of the simple stem cannot be determined
from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the stem is to
bs found in the second aorists ckotttjv, e/3Xa/3?/v, and eppicprjv; and in
Kokv-rrTO) (kuXu/S-), corer^ it is seen in koXv^-tj, hut.
The verbs of this class are aVr-a) (a(^-), ^dTTT-a (/3*?0-), ^Xdnr-oi
(/3Xa/3-), 6d7rT-(o (racfi-)., Opv-rrr-co (rpvc^-), KoXv-rrT-co (xaXv/S-), KdpnT-w
(xa/MTT-), K\e7TT-(0 (xXfTT-), KOTTT-CO (kOTT") , Kpl/TTT-Oi (^KpV^- OY KpvCf)-) ,
KV7rT-(o (kvcJ)-), pdnT-co (pd(j)-), plirr-co {pX({)-), o-Kdnr-u) ((TKa(f>-), ckc-
TTTOp-ai ((7X677-), (TKrjnTO) (o-Kf/TT-) , (TKOiTTTOi) ((TKfOTr-) , TUTTTCi) (rUTT") , witll
Homeric and poetic yvdp.irT(o (yvapir-), ivlnrw (cVrTr-), and fidpTTTot
{fxapTT-). TiKTco (rex-), probably for tckt-co, belongs here.
IV. Fourth Class. (Iota Class.) This includes all verbs
in which occur any of the euphonic changes arising from the
addition of i to the simple stem in forming the present stem
(§ 16, 7). There are three divisions : —
1 . ( Ve7'bs in a-am or ttm and ^w.) (a) Presents in o-o-oj {rriji)
generally' come from palatal stems, k, y, or x with t becoming
§108.] VERBAL STEMS. 127
o-a- (tt). These liaA^e futures in ^o>; as irpaa-croi (Trpdy-), c?o,
fut. TTpa^co; fjia\a.(T(r<j) (/AaXttK-, seen in /xttXa/co's), soften^ fut. /i,a-
Aci^'o) ; Tapacraoi (rapa;^-, seen in rapa^^ry) , confuse^ fut. rapa^u).
See § 16, 7 («).
See also Krjpvaa-fo (ktjpvk-), (f>v\d<r(Ta> (<f)v\aK-), irrrjo-aa} (ttti/k-),
<^pl(T(Tco (^cftpLK-), aWaaato (aXXoy-), pdaaoi (/xa-y-), Tao-cro) (ray-),
TrXfjo-o-o) (7rX7;y-), opuo-cro) (ppv)(-)j in the Catalogue, and many other
verbs in cro-o).^
Note, A few presents in o-o-o) (rrco) come from lingual stems,
and have futures in o-o); as tpeaaco, row (from stem eper-, seen in
€peTT]s,7'oioer), aor. ^peaa (§ 16, 2). So also appo-noi (tut. appoa-o)),
/SXiTTO) (peXir-, § 14, N. 1), XtVcrofiat (Xir-), Trdo-cro), 7rXd(rcra>, TTTiaraa},
with d<f)d(ra(t) (Hdt.), and poetic t/ido-crco, Kopvaraco (/copi/^-), vlacropat.
One has a labial stem, neaaco (TrtTr-), c()o^*, fut. ttc'^o).
(6) Presents in ^w ma}^ come from stems in 8 and have fu-
tures in crio, or from stems in y (or yy) and have futures in $(o ;
as (fypd^o) (^pa8-), say, fut. <jipdcru>. 2 aor. (Epic) Trc^paSov ; ko-
p,t^co (ko/xiS-, seen in kopllStJ), carry, fut. KopLia-a)] pe^oi (pcy-), c^o,
poetic, fut. pe^co; /cAd^oj (KAayy-, compare clango), scream, fut.
KAdy^w. See § 16, 7 (^•).
See also dpTrdfo) (apTrdS-), Bavpd^co (Oavpab-)., ep/^o) (epiS-), ifoa
(tS-), vopl^oi (i/opiS-), ofo) (o8-), TTfAdfo) (TreXdS-), o-to^oo ((rto8-). X"C'»'
(;(dS-) ; Kod^o) (<pdy-), (r(f)d((o {acfidy-) , pv^ca {pvy-), (jrumhle ; (Takiri^o)
(craXmyy-): witli Ionic or poetic ^aa-rd^a l(:ia(TTd8-) , Kpi^a (jipXy-),
Tpi^u) (rpty-), TrXd^ci) (TrXayy-) ; &C.
XoTE 1. Some verbs in ^(x> have stems both in S and y ; as irai^a
(rraiS-, Traty-), />/«?/, fut. Trat^oOjuat (§ 110, II. N. 2), aor. eTraiaa. See
also poetic fo^'ms of dpTrd^co and vdaa-o).
Note 2. Nt'Cw (wjS-), tras/i, has a labial stem.
2. ( FerSs t^2VA lengthened Liquid Stems.) (c) Presents in
AAca are formed from simple stems in A with added t, At becom-
ing AA ; as o-tcAAw, send, for o-rcA-t-w ; dyycAAw, announce, for
dyyeA-i-w; cr<f>dXX(i), trip up, for (r(f>aX-L-oi. See § 16, 7 (c).
See also /SdXAo) (/3dX-), ^dXXo) (^dX-), oKeXko) (dxeX-), TrdXXo) (TrdX-),
I^icfXXo) ((TKeX-) , TeXXo) (reX-), aXXopai (dX-), &c.
* (</) Presents in aivw, cti/a>, aipw, and eipw are formed from
/ simple stems in av, ev, ap, and cp, with added t, whicli, after
1 The lists of verbs of the fourth class aj-e not coin])lete, while those
of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common use.
128 INFLECTION. . [§108.
metathesis, is contracted with the preceding vowel ; as <^atVa),
show^ for <l>av-L-o)y flit, (fyavu) ; Krelvwy kill, for KTCv-i-oi ; atpco, raise,
for d/3-i-o); o-Tretpoj, so2^?, for o-Trcp-i-co. See § 16, 7 (c?).
Those in Ikw, i5j/a), and vpo) may be formed in the same way
from simple stems in Xv, vv, and vp, tt becoming I, and vC be-
coming v ; as Kptvo), Judge, for Kptv-L-tOj fut. Kptvw ; d/xvi/oj^ ward
off, for d/xviz-t-o), fut. afjivvo) ; (Tvpo), draw, for o-vp-t-w.
i\
See also evt^paivco (jevc^pav-) , Kepbaivto (KepBav-) , piaiva (piav-) , ^z;-
pmVo) {^rjpdv-), a-rjuaivo) {arjuav-), {/(paivoi (v(f)dp-), reipco (rev-), poetic
OelvQ) (^ej/-), yelvopai (yev-), aaipa) (adp-), xaipo) ix"P~)i fyf'P<«> (^y^P")*
Acetpco (<fp-), (pdeipco {(j)6ep-) , kXivo) (kXiv-), ttXvvco (ttXvv-), 6^vva>
(o^uj/-), alaxyvoi {ala)(yv-), 6\o(fivpopaL (pXo(pvp-), &C.
Note 1. '0(f)€i\<a (o</)6X-), &e obliged, owe, follows the analogy of
stems in ev, to avoid confusion with o^eXXo) (o0eX-), increase ; but in
Homer it has a regular form o^cXXco. Homer has ttKopat, press, from
stem cX-.
Note 2. Verbs of this division (2) regularly have futures and
aorists active and middle of the liquid form (§ 110, H. 2). For
exceptions (in poetry), see § 110, II. N. 4.
Note 3. Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this
class ; as depco and bepo) in Class 1. For /3aiV», &c. in Class 5, see V.
Not^e 1.
3. {Lengthened Vowel Stems.) (e) Here belong two verbs
in at(o with stems in av, Katw, burn, and KXatw, weep (Attic also
Koxi) and KAdoj) . These stems Kav- and KXav- (seen in KavVco
and KXava-o/xaL) became KaFt- and KXaFi-, whence Kat- and /cAat-
(seell. 2).
Note. The Epic forms other present stems in this way ; so Salu {da-),
burn, fxaiofiai. (yua-), seek, vaiu (va-), inhabit, dirvioj {ottv-), marry, and per-
haps daiofuii, divide.
V. Fifth Class. (N Class.) 1. Some simple stems are
strengthened in the present bj^ adding v; as cf>Odv-(a (cfiOd-),
anticipate ; tlv-io (tl-), pag / <f)OLvw (<^^t-), waste; 8d/ci/-oj (Sd/c-) ,
bite ; Ka/xv-w {Kap.-), be weary; Tepiv-io {rep.-), cut.
So ^alvco (iSa-, ^dv-, Note 1), nipo) (m-, see also VIIL), bvvo) (with
^va>), Hom. 6i)VQ) (with 6v<o), rush ; for iXavvto (eXd-), see N. 2.
2. Some consonant stems add dv, apaprdv-u) (dp,apT-), err ;
ajurOdv'opiou {alcrO-) , perceive ; /SXcuttolv-'j) (/5XacrT-) , sprout.
§ 108.] VERBAL STEMS. 129
If the last vowel of the simple stem is short, v (/x or y be-
fore a labial or a palatal, § 16, 5) is inserted after the vowel ;
as Xav6dv-w {XaO-, XavB-) , escape notice ; XaixjSdv-o) (Xdp- Aa/x^-),
tctke ; Oiyydvoi (^y-, Ovyy)i touch.
So av^av-oi (with av^-o)), hap6dv-(>i (8ap3-), dir-^xGavoyiai (ix^~)i
i(dv-(o (with i^-co), poetic Kixdv-(o {kXx-) , olbdv-oi (with old-fo), Class 7),
6\icr6av-a} (6\l(tO-), 6a(})paiv-op.aL {6a(Pp-, N. 1), 6cf}\i(TKdv-(o (o^X-,
6(f)XicrK-, VI.), with poetic dXiTaiv-ofiai {oXXt-, N. 1), dX<pdp-(i) (dX<^-),
cpidalvoi (e'piS-). With inserted v, y, or p., avddv-(o (aS-), Xayxdv-(o
(Xa;(-) , pav6dv-(o (pd9-) , Trvvddv-opai (nvO-) , Tuy;(av-o> (Ty;^-) , with po-
etic x^vbdpd) (xd8-), epvyydv-co (epvy-).
3. A few stems add ve : y8w€-o)(with ^v-w), s^ojt? i<:^, iKvi-ofiaL
(with iK-w), come, Kwi-m (kv-), ^e'ss; also dixTr-La-xy^-ofxaiy have
on, and vTr-tcrxv^-ofiaL, promise, from io-x-w (VIII.).
4. Some stems add w (after a vowel, wv) : these form the
second class (in vvixl) of verbs in jxi, as Bclkw/xl (8eiK-),
show, K€pdvvv-fXL (xeptt-), m/ic, and are enumerated in § 125, 5.
Some of these have also the present in wui (§ 122, N. 5).
NoTK 1. Baivo) Oa-, /3ai/-), y/o, and u(T(f)palvopai {oacfyp-,, 6(T<ppav-),
smell, not only add v or av, but lengthen ai/ to aiv on the principle of
Class 4. They belong here, however, because they do not have the
inflection of liquid verbs (IV. 2, Note 2). See also Kepbaiva), Honi.
dXiTaivopai (aXtr-, dXiTav-) and ipidaipo), with paivco and Tcrpaivai.
Aapvdo) (8dfi-), subdue, adds va.
Note 2. 'EXawo) (fXa-\ </ra'e, is irregular in the present stem
(probably for cXa-w-co). "OX-Xv-pi (oX-), destroy, adds Xx) instead of
w (perhaps by assimilation; to the stem oX- in the present.
VI. Sixth Class. ( Verbs in a-Kta.) These add o-k or (after
a consonant) lotk to the simple stem to form the stem of the
present; as yqpd-a-Kd) (yqpa-), grow old, €vp-L(TK(ji (evp-), Jind,
dp€-(TK(j) (dpc-), please, a-rcp-Lo-Koi {a-rep-), deprive.
These verbs are, further, oK-iaKopai, dp^X-lcrKc^, dpTrXaK-io-Koj
(poetic), dvaX-icTKOi, dnaip-tcrKco (poet.), dpap-ia-Kt^ (poet.), ^d-crKoi,
Qi-jSpoi-aKUi {^po-) , ^iai-<TKop.ai (^lo-), /SXco-o-kcc! (/loX-, 3Xq-), yeycav-la-KO),
yL-yvd)-(rK(o (yvo-), 8i-dpd-crK6) (§pa-), cnQvp-icrKoi (poet,), if^d-crKfo, Ovrj-
(TKO) {6av-, Ova-), 6p6i-(TKa> {6qp-, 6pQ-), IXd-aKopai, pedv-aKco, p.i-p.vT)-(TKoi
(/xm-), Tn-ni-a-KO) (Ion. and Pind.), 'jri-Trpda-KO), Tt-rpm-a-i^w (rpo-), <f)d-
oKoi, xd-o'Kco. See also the verbs in N. 3, and 6(j)Xi(rKdv(ii.
Note 1. Many verbs of this class reduplicate the present stem
(§ 109, 7, c) by prefixing its initial consonant with », as yi-yvai-aK(o
(yi/Q-). 'Ap'cp-tWw {dp-ap-) has an Attic reduplicatiou (§ 102, N. 1).
9
130 INFLECTION. [§ 108.
Note 2. Stems in o lengthen o to w before (r/co, as in ytyj/coaica) ;
and some in a lengthen a to rj, as in fi'ixvrjaKto (jivd-) and OvrjaKto {Bav-,
Bud-, § 109, 7, a).
Note 3. Three verbs, dXu-cr/ca> (dXv/c-), amc^, dLdd-a-KOj (didux-), teach,
and Xo-cr/co; (Xa\'-), speak, omit /c or x before cr/cw instead of inserting t. So
Homeric ettr/cw or &-/cw (et/c- or t/c-).
Note 4. These verbs, from their ending <ricw, are often called inceptive
verbs, although few of them have any inceptive meaning.
VII. Seventh Class. (E Class.) A few simple stems
add € to form the present stem; as So/ce-to (8ok-), seem, fiit.
Sd^w; a»^€-w {u)0-), push, fut. wcro) (§ 16, 2); yafxi-to (ya/A-),
marry, fut. (ya/Aeco) ya/xw.
These verbs are, further, yeywi^eo), yr)6ea), KrvTreco, Kvpeco, fiapTvpea>
(with fxapTvpofiaL) , ptTrreo) (with piTrro)) , cjiiKeoi (v. Epic forms) ; and
poetic 8aT€op.aL, bovneco, elkeoi, fnavpeoa, Kevreo), Ttareofxai, ptye'a>, cruyco)..
Topco), and ;^paio-/ie'o>. See also ttcktcco {-JreK-, Tre kt-).
Most verbs in cw belong to the first class, as ttouo) (Troie-).
Note. A few chiefly poetic verbs form present stems by adding a in
the same way to the simple stem : see jSpyxdoixai, yodoj, dripiaw, fjLTjKdofjLai,
flTjTldu}, fjLVKdoixai.
VIII. Eighth Class. {Mixed Class.) This includes the
few irregular verbs in which any of the tense stems are so
essentially different from others, or which are otherwise so
peculiar in formation, that they cannot be brought under an}'
of the preceding classes. The}' are the following : —
aipea ( A-) , take, fut. alp^aa, 2 aor. etXov.
aXe'^w (dXfK-), ward off, fut. aXe^rjaco (§ 109, 8), aXf^rjo-ofiai, and
dXe^oficu; 2 aor. o-XoXkov (Horn.) for aX-aXcK-ou (§ 100, 2, N. 4).
yiyvofiat (y(v- or yv-, ycve-, yd-), become, for yi-yevofxai, fut. ytvr]-
aofxai, 2 aor. eyepoiinp, 2 pf. yiyova (§ 109, 3) with yfydatrt, &C.
(§ 125, 4).
6^0) (JeB; F(o0-, ad-), he accustomed, 2 pf. etada, 2 plpf. elaOetv.
fibov (Fib-, 18-), saw, vldi, 2 aorist (no present act.); 2 pf. oiSa,
know (§ 127). Mid. ei'Sopat (poetic).
fiTTov (etV-, fp-,pe-), spoke, 2 aor. (no pres.); fut. (ep/o))^ ipio, pf.
fl-pr]-Ka. The stem eln- is for e-eir (orig. Fe-Fen-), and ep- (pe-j is for
fep- (Fpe-), seen in Lat. ver-hum (§ 109, 7, a). So ev-ena.
epxofiai (eXvB- or eX^-, eXevd-), go, fut. iXevaofiai (poet.), 2 aor.
epScD (fpy-), work, poetic, fut. ep^w; by metathesis epy- becomes
pey- in pe^w (Class 4). Originally the stem was Fepy-, as iu cpyoj',
wo7'k, German Werk.
§109.] MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS. 181
iaBlto (ed-, (pay-) J eat, fut. eBofiai, 2 aor. €(f>ayou.
6770) (Attic only in comp), be about : mid. enofiai, follow (o-ctt- or
cnr-i err-), fut. eyjro^ai, 2 aor. icnrofirjv.
e;^a) (ce;^- or cr;^-, o-;^f-), Aate, fut. e^ca or ctxW^j ^ aor. Zcrxov (for
(-(Tfx-ov). Also i(r;(&) (for (ri-o-e;(-o)).
opao) (oTT-), see, fut. oyj/ofiat, pf. icapUKa. See ftSoi/.
naax<o {irad-, nevO-) , suffer, fut. ireiaouai, 2 pf . nefrovBa, 2 aor. cTra-
TTiVo) (yrt-, TTO-), drink, fut. nionai, pf. TreVcDica, 2 aor. eniov.
irlirTui (ttct-, ttto-), /«//, for Tn-neT-o), fut. Treaovfiai, pf. 7re-7rr<o-Ka,
2 aor. eneaov (Dor. cireTov).
Tpe^co (Spa/x-, 8pafi€-), run, fut. bpap.ovp.ai,, pf. BedpdprjKa, 2 aor.
^epci) (oi-, cVf/c-, by redupl. and sync. iv-eveK, eVey/c-), &ear, fero;
fut. oio-a>, aor. ^i/ey»ca (§ 109, 7, i), pf. iv-i]vox-a (§ 109, 3, N. 2), tV-
rjvey-pai, aor. p. rjvexOrjP.
For full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue.
Note. Occasional Homeric or poetic irregular forms appear even in
some verbs of the first seven classes. See d/caxt^«' and ■xp.pddvui in the
Catalogue.
Modification of Verbal Stetng.
Remark. This section includes all those modifications of the
stem which follow recognized principles, or which occur in so many
verbs that they deserve special notice. For example, the change
from Tipa- in Tipdco to Tiprj- in riprjao), that from crrepy- in arepyoi to
iaropy- in 2 pf . ea-ropya. that from o-T€X-(stem of o-reXXo)) to oTfiX- in
€OTei\a and eordX- in earaX-Ka, and that from j3aX- (stem of jSaXXco)
to /3e/3Xf7- (for jde^Xd-) in ^e^XrjKa, all follow definite principles ; while
that from tti- to tto- in ttiVo) and that from ndS- to nevO- in 7racr;^a)
(§ 108, YIII.) are mere irregularities.
§ 109. 1. Most stems ending in a short vowel
lengthen this vowel in all tenses formed from these
stems, except the present and imperfect. A and e be-
come 7], and becomes w ; but when d follows e, t, or p,
it becomes d. E.g.
Tipdo) (ti a-), honor, Tiprj a-oa, eTiprj-a-a, rcTifirj-Ka, T€Tipr]-pai, inpr]-'
0T}v: 0tXea) (^iXf-), lore, (piXrjacii, ((piXrjora, 7rf ^iX?;<a, 7r€<f)lXr]pai, icpiXf}-
6tjv, ^tjXoq) (5t;Xo-), show, drjXaxTai, &C, ; SO ri^o), tlo-co (I); baKpvoi,
haKpvcroi (u). But eaa>, eacro) (d) ; Idopai, Ida-opai (d) \ 8pd(o, dpdaoi (d),
(dpdaa. dedpuKa.
This applies also to stems which become vowel stems by metathe-
sis (§ 109, 7), as ISdXXa (^dX-, /SXa-), throiv, pf fii^Xrj Ka; Kdfiv(o {Kaji-,
132 INFLECTION. [§ 109.
Kfia-), labor, K€Kfxr}-Ka', or by adding e (§ 109, 8), as ^oiiXofiai (/3ovX-,
/SouXf-), wish, ^ovXtj-aofiai, ^e^ovXrj-fiaL, e^ovXrj-drjv.
Note 1. Ava>, loose, generally has ii in Attic poetry in the pres-
ent and imperfect (generally li in Homer) ; in other tenses it has
V only in the future and aorist active and middle and in the future
perfect. 'A»cpoao/xat, hear, has aKpodcrofiai, &c. ; xP'^^i 9^^^ oracles,
lengthens a to j; ; as xPW^i ^c- ^^ rprja-o} and erprjo-a from stem
rpa-; see T€TpaLV(o, bore.
^OTE 2. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary to
the geneTST rule (§ 109, 1); as yeXaaty laugh, yeXaaofiai, eyeXaa-a',
dpKea>, suffice, dp<e(Tto, fjpKiaa; fxaxofiai {pa)(€-),Jight, p.ax((TOfiai (Ion.),
efiaxfcdprju. •*- --
(a) This occurs in the following verbs : (pure verbs) ayap.ai, albeo-
fiai, aKcopat, dXeco, dvva>, dpKCco, dpoco, dpvco, yeXdco, cXkixo (v. eX/cco),
c/ieo), €pd(o, ^eco, 6Xdco, KXdco, break, ^eco, tttvco, (mdco, TcXko, rpeo), ^Xao),
XaXdo); and Epic dKrjdeut, Koreco, Xoeo), vfiKcoi, and the stems (dd-) and
(a€-); — (other verbs with vowel stems) dpkoKat (dpe-), dxBopxit
(dxOe-), eXavvio (cXa-), iXd(TKop.aL (iXa-), peOvaKoi {pedv-) ', also all verbs
in avwpi and evvvpt, with stems in a and e (given in § 125, 5) , with
oXXu/Lit (oXe-) and opvvpL (dpo-^.
(b) The final vowel of the stem is variable in quantity in differ-
ent tenses in the following verbs : (pure verbs) alveco, alpea, fie'o), bind,
dv(o (v. dvv(o), epvu) (Epic), Bvco, sacrifice, KoXeo), Xva>, /xuto, ttoBco), tto-
veoy; — (other verbs) ^aivco (/3a-), evpla-Koi (fvp-, eupc-), /Lia;(o/iat
(/ia;^e-), jrivo) (tti-, no-), cfiddpa) {(jiBd-), ^Bivco {(^6X-).
2. Many vowel stems have o- added, before all endings
not beginning with a, in the perfect middle and first passive
tense S3'stems. E.g.
T€X€<o,Jinish, reTeXe-a-fiai, erereXea-fxrjv, ereXearBr^v (§ 97, 4); yeXaw,
laugh, eyeXd-a-Bijv, yeXaa-Brjvai', XP^^^ 9^^^ oracles, p^pjjo-to, K€XpT)-<T-pai,
iXPwBrjv.
This occurs in all the verbs included in 1, N". 2 (a), except dp6a>,
so far as they form these tenses, and in the following: d/couo), Spaw,
Bpavco, KeXevco, kXcIco (kXt^co), Kvaa, Kvaico, Kpoixo, KvXia), Xevca, veco, heap,
^va>, naioD, naXait), 7rava>, 7rpia>, aeica, tiVo), va>, x^^^ XP^^* XP^^f SLud po-
etic pai(o. Some, however, have forms both with and without a. See
the Catalogue.
3. In the second perfect the simple stem generall}^ changes
€ to o, and lengthens other short vowels, a to 17 (after p to a),
o to CO, t to ot, and v to cv. E.g.
2Tepy-a>, love, earopya', yiyvopai (yfv-), become, yeyova, iyeyoveiv',
TiKTO) (t€k-), bring forth, reroKa; (baivoi ((f)dp-), Tre(f)T]va', Kpd((o (Kpdy-),
cry, KCKpdya', tt}kco (raK-), melt, rerr^Ka, iTerfjKeiv', XeiTrco (Xin-),^eXoi7ra,
§109.1 MODIFICATION OF VERBAL STEMS. 133
eXeXoineiv; (f)€vy(o {(^vy-^,Jiee, 7r€(f)€vya, tTTi^evynv. So cyfipw (Jytp-^,
rouse ^ eyprjyopa (§ 102, N. 1).
Note 1. Tlpd(raa> (rrpay-), do, has nenpaya (§ 110, lY. (d), N. 2).
"eOco (eS-), am accustomed, has irregularly d'o^a {wd- for FaS-, § 104);
and prjywfju (pay-) has eppaya (p<oy-), cf. Tpco-yco (rpay-), § 108, II.
Note 2. This change of e to o occurs even in some first perfects
which aspirate the final consonant of the stem (§ 110, IV. />): these
are KeKXo(jf)a, from KkenTO) {kKott-), steal ; ("iXoxa, from Xey-co, collect;
n€nofjL(f>a from Tre/ATr-o), se7id; TeTpo(f)a (sometimes TeTpa(f)d) from rpeTr-a),
turn; TeTpocjya (perhaps second perfect), from Tpe(fi-a>, nourish. So i be-
comes 01 in Se'Sot/fa {hi-), fear. In riBrjpi (^e-), J9m^, € becomes et in re-
BeiKa and redeifiai', compare 7rip<i)(7ri-)i drink, TrenaKa and 7re7ro/xai (tto-).
4. In simple liquid stems of one syllable, c is generalty
changed to a jn the perfect active, perfect middle, and second
passive systems. £.g.
StAXo) (o-TfX-), send, ea-roKKa, eoraX/xai, iaroK-qv. <TTaKr](Top^ai\ K€ipa>
(Kep-), shear, KCKappai, eKaprjv (Ion.) ; (nrcipo) (o-nep-), sow, €cnrappaij
ianaprjv. So in bfpco, KT€iva>, peipopai, reXXo), and (^deipco.
Note 1. The same change of € to a (after p) occurs in (rrpecfxo,
turn, ea-rpap-fxai, ea-Tpd(f)T]v, aTpa<j)f)(Topai (but 1 aor. earpfcfiBTjv, rare) ;
rpeno), turn, rerpaipa (generally Terpocfja), TeTpafxp-ai, hpdn-qv (but
€Tpfcf)6r]V, Ion. €Tpa(f)6r]v) ; Tpe(f)(o, nourish, rerpof^a (late T€Tpa(f)a),
reOpappai, erpdcfirjv (but idpecfiOrjv) ; also in the second aorist passive
of /cXeVrei), steal, nXcKto, iceave, and Tepirco, delight, fKXaTnjv, inXaKrjVj
and (Epic) erdpniju (1 aor. UXecpdrjv, eirXexOrju, €T€p(f)6r]u, rarely Epic
€Tdp(f>6T}v). It occurs, further, in the second aorist (active or mid-
dle) of KTelva>f kill, Tep.va>, cuty TpeTra, and Tepiro) ', viz. , in eicravov
(poet.), erapiov, €Tap.6pr]v, eTpanov, eTpa7r6p.r)v, TeTapTrofirjv (Hom.) ; also
in several Homeric and poetic forms (see depKOfiai, nepda), and rrr^o-
aa).
Note 2. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with
monosyllabic liquid stems. TeiVco (rev-), stretch, in which rev- drops
V in this system (§ 109, 6), changes 6 to a in erddrjv and eK-radrjao-
p.ai.
5. Liquid stems lengthen their last vowel in the aorist
active and middle; as o-reAXo) (o-reA-), lo-TciAa. See § 110,
III. 2, and the examples.
6. Four verbs in vw drop v of the stem in the perfect and
first passive sj^stems, and thus have vowel stems in these
forms : — Kplvia ^KpXv-), separate, KiKpXKu, KiKpTfim, iKplOrjv ; kAiVo)
(kAii/-), incline, KCKAiKa, KCKAi/xai, kKXiOrjv, n-Awo> (ttAvi/-), wash,
'jriirXviw.Lf iirXvOrjv ; reiVw (j€v-), stretch, xeVaKa (§ 109, 4), rcra-
134 INFLECTION. [§109.
fiai, iTaOrjVy €K'TaBrj(TO}xai. So KxetVca in some poetic forms : see
also KepSaivoi.
Note. When final v ot Si stem is not thus dropped, it becomes
y before ku (§ 16, 5), and generally becomes or before /xai (§ 16, 6,
N. 4); as ^aiVw {(f)av-), neCJiayKa, neipao-ixai, €(})dv6T}V.
7. (a) The stem sometimes suffers metathesis (§ 14, 1) :
(1) in the present, as Ovrjo-KU) {Oav-, Ova-), die, (§ 108, VI. N.
2) ; (2) in other tenses, as ^aAXw (ySaX-, /?A.a-), throw, jSijSXrj-
Ktt, pipXrjixai, ipXrjdrjv; ScpKo/xat (BepK-), see (poetic), 2 aor.
^SpaKOV (SpaK-, § 109, 4, N. 1).
(5) Sometimes syncope (§ 14, 2) : (1) in the present, as
yiyvop-aL (ycv-) , become, for yL-yfy-ofxat ; (2) in the second ao-
rist, as irrTOfxrjv for i-7r€T-oiJL7]v ', (3) in the perfect, as irerawvpLi
(Trera-), expand, TreTrra/xat for Tre-Trera-fjiai.
(c) Sometimes reduplication (besides the regular reduplica-
tion of the perfect stem) : (1) in the present, especially in
verbs of the sixth class and in verbs in /xi (§ 121, 3), as yt-
yvwa-KO), know, yi-yvo/xai, i-crTrjfXL ; (2) in the second aorist, as
TrecOo} ijrW-), persuade, Tri-irWov (Ep.). Attic redupl. in ayw,
lead, r^yayov (dy-ay) ; see apapicTKOi. § 110, V. N. 2 ; § 100,
Notes 3 and 4.
8. E is sometimes added to the present stem, sometimes
to the simple stem, making a new stem in e. From this some
verbs form special tenses ; and others form all their tenses
except the present, imperfect, second perfect, and second
aorists (§ 90, N. 1). ^.g.
BovXofxai (j3ouX-), wish, ^ovXfjaroixai (/SouXe-, § 109, 1), &c.; ala-dd-
vofiai {al(T$-), perceive, ala-drja-ofjLai, (alaOe-}^ ^(xBrjfiai; p.ev(o (ixfv-),
remain, fxcfxevqKa (/xei/e-) ; fxaxofiai {p.ax-), fight, fut. (fiaxe-ofuii,) fiaxov-
fxai, ip.axicrdp.rjv, pipdxqpai', ;j(atpa) (x«p-)» ^^J<>i<^^i x^'-PW^ (X"*P^')»
KcxdprjKa (x^pe-).
(a) The following have the stem in e, in all tenses except those
mentioned; (1) formed from the present stem: dXe'^o), oKOopai (Ion.),
axOopai, ^ovXopai, ^oa-KO), Seo), wcmt, eSeXco and OeXto, epopai and etpo-
pai (Ion.), eppco, euSco, e\//"a), KeXopai (poet.), fxdxopai, pedopai (poet.),
fxe'AXo), peX(o, pv^oi, suck, o'iopai, o'lxopai. ocpfiXco, neropai', (2) formed
from the simple stem: alaOdvopai (alad-), dpaprdvo) (dpiapr-), avbdva
(dS-), dn-€X^^^c)paL (-fX^")' o.v^dv(o (au^-), /3Xacrrai/a) (/SXaar-), evplaKca
(fvp-), Kixdvo) (KtX')j Xd(7/cw (Xa/c-), pavddpco (jiad-), oXtcrBdva (pXiad-),
§110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 135
oWvfii (o\-), ocfAia-Kavo) (o^X-) ; see poetic dfinXaKia-Koi and aTra^to-fCoo,
and the stem (Sa-).
(6) The following have the stem in c in special tenses; (1) formed
from the present stem: fiiSao-KU), Kadi^di, /eXatco, fievoo, vcfico, naia}, nero-
fiai TvnT(o; (2) formed from the simple stem: dap6dvco (dapO-), Kr)da>
(KaS-), oacfipaivofiai (6(T(})p-), Treldo) (nXd-), peto (pv-)) (TTeijSco (oti/S-),
TvyxavQ) (t^X")' X^C^ (x^^ )' ^^® ^^^*^ yiyvo[xai, ex^* rpex'^' Xatpo)
{X"p-) forms both x"*P^' ^^'^ X°P^~-
Note. In o/xw/xt, swear, the stem o/i- is enlarged to 6fio- in some
tenses, as in afio-aa; in dXicrKOfmi^ be captured, aX- is enlarged to
a\o-, as in dXa)o-o/:iat. So Tpvx<>>, exhaust, rpvxoao'oi). So probably otxo-
fiai, be gone, has stem olxo- for ot^e- in the perfect olxa>-<a (cf . Ion.
oixri-p^i).
Formation of Tense Stems.
Remark. This section explains the formation of the seven
tense stems enumerated in § 92, 4. They are generally formed
from the simple stem of the verb (when this is distinct from
the present stem). But verbs of the second class commonly
have the lengthened stem (§ 108, II. Note) in all tenses
except in the second perfect, second aorist, and second pas-
sive tense s3'Stems. The verbs enumerated in § 109, 8 form
some tenses from stems lengthened by adding c. The stem
may be modified in different tenses as has been explained in
§ 109.
' § 110. I. {Present Stem.) The present stem is the stem
of the present and imperfect in all the voices.
The principles on which it is derived from the simple stem, when
they are not identical, are explained in § 108.
II. {Future Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add o- to
form the stem of the future active and middle. These vowel
stems lengthen a short vowel (§ 109, 1) ; ir^ /3, <f> with o- be-
come ij/; K, y, X with 0- become ^ ; t, 8, 6 before o- are dropped
(§16,2). Kg.
Tifidco, hmor, Ttju^o-o); Bpam, do, Bpaa-co; kotttco {kott-), cut, KoyJAay;
TSXaTTTo) (/3Xa^-), hurt, ^XayJAco, ^Xdyj/^ofxai ; ypdcfxo, write, ypd-^a, ypd-^o-
pai; TrXf/fO), Iwist, ttXc^co; npd(T(r(o {npdy-), do, Trpd^oa, irpd^Ofxai', rapda-
aui {Tapdx-)^ confu.<e, rapd^w, Tapd^op-m', (jipd^o) ((f>pa8-), tell, (f)pd(ra}
(for (})pad-(r(i>) \ neida, persuade, nela-o) (for neid-aoi). So antvhoi,
136 INFLECTION. [§ no.
pow, o-Treio-o) (for (rneub a-ca, § 16, 2 and 6, N. 1) ; Tpe(f)(o, nourish^
epeyjro), dpiyJAOfiai (§ 17, 2, Note).
2. Liquid stems add e (in place of o-) to form the future
stem ; this e is contracted with w and o/xat to to and ovfjiai,
E,g.
^alvoi ((jf)aj/-), .s^o?;', fut. ((fiave-co) (pavo), {(^ave-oixai) (fiavovixai; areX-
Xo) (arfX-), send, {crriKi-w^ oreXci), (^areXe-ofiai) a-TeXovfiat] vefxco, dwidey
(ff/xe-co) j/e/xco; KptVo) {KpXv-), Jud(/e, {KpXve-(o) KpXva>. '
Note 1. (^«^■c Future.) (a) The futures of KaXea, call, and
TeX€u>,Jinish, AcaXcVco and reXeaa (§ 109, 1, N. 2), drop o- of the futiire
stem, and contract KaXe- and reXe- with a> and o/xat, making KaXw,
KaXov/mat, TfXS) and (poetic) rcXo€/xat. These futures have the same
forms as the presents. So 6XXvp.i (oX-, oXe-), destroy, has fut. oXeaca
(Hom.), oXc'o) (Hdt ), oXo) (Attic).
So paxeaopai, Homeric future of pdxop.ai (paxe-), Jig^t, becomes
pxixovpai in Attic. KaOe^opai (e8-), sit, has Kadedovpai.
(6) In like manner, futures in ao-w from verbs in avwpi (stems in
a), some in fcrco from verbs in fwvpt (stems in e), and some in ao-o
from verbs in a^o) (stems in dd), drop o- and contract aco and eo to
S). Thus (TKebdvvvpi ((TKeda-), scatter, aKeddcro), (o-KfSdco) ff/cfSco; o-ro-
pevvvpi (a-Tope-), spread, aTopeaa), (aTopeto) aropoi); ^i^d^io (/St^afi-),
cause to go, ^i^da-co, (^t/Saw) /3tj3a). So eXavvco (eXa-), drive (§ 108, V.
N. 2), iXdo-ui, {eXncj) e'Xeo. For fut. eXdo), Kpeuoco, &c., in Homer, see
§ 120, 1, (6).
(c) Futures in Xa-o) and lo-o/^ai f i-om verbs in tfoj (iS-) of more than
two syllables regularly drop cr and insert e; then tew and leopai are
contracted to ia> and loiipai ; as Kopi^(o, car?'?/, Koplau), (/co/xieo)) /co/lii<5,
Kop.iaopai, (Kopuofxai) Kopiovpai, inflected like ^iXw, (f)iXovp.ai (§ 98).
See § 120, 2, (a).
(^) Though these forms of future are called Attic, because the
Attic dialect seldom uses any others in these tenses, they are yet
found in other dialects and even in Homer, while the Attic occa-
sionally uses the full forms in era.
Note 2. (Doric Future.) A few verbs sometimes add e to o- in
the stem of the future middle, and contract aeopai to aovpai. These
are TrXew, .sail, TrXcva-ovpai (§ 108, II. 2) ; rrveco, breathe, irvfv<Tovpai ;
ve(o, sivim, veva-ovpai', /cXaio), weep, KXavaovpai (§ 108, IV. 3); ^evyto,
fiee, (ftev^ovpai ; TriVro), fall, ireaovpai. See also Trai^co and TrvvBdvo-
fxai.
The Doric forms middle futures like these, and also active futures
in o-eo) contracted o-cS (§ 119, 6). These few are used in Attic with
the regular futures TrXevaopai, nveixropai, KXavaop.ai, (f)ev^op.ai (but
never neaopai).
Note 3. A few irregular futures drop a- of the stem, which thus
has the appearance of a present stem. Such are x^<^ aud x^°H-<^h
§110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 137
fut. of x^^fP^^^' iBofxai, from iadloi (eS-), eat; Triofxai, from niva>
(tti-), drink.
Note 4. A few liquid stems add <r like mute stems; /ceXXG>(KeX-),
/an</, KeXo-w; Kupco, ?neef, Kypcrto; Bepoyiai^ he warmed^ 6(p(royLai\ all po-
etic: so (jideipa ((p6ep-), destroy, Ep. fut. (pdepa-to.
III. (i<Vrs^ Aorist Stem.) 1. Vowel and mute stems add o-
to form the stem of the first aorist active and middle. The
lengthening of a final vowel of the stem and the euphonic
changes of mutes before o- are the same as in the future
stem. £J.g.
Ti/utio), €TifJLT](ra, eriixrjadfJLrjv', Spaca, edpaara; kottto), eKO\//"a, tKo'jra.p.r^v]
^Xd-rvTOi, €^\a^a; ypd(f>a>, eypa^a, (ypa\lrdixpv\ ttXcko), (irXe^a, enXe^d-
p-rju; TTpdaaoi, eirpa^a, eirpa^dfirjv :, Tapda-(ra), erdpa^a; (/)pa^a), ecfypaaa (for
€(j)pad-(Ta) ; n€td(o, eneiaa (§ 108, II. Note) ; air^vda, eaneiaa (for €(nrev8-
a-a) ; rpecfioi, c^pe>/^a, i6p(y\rdp.r)v (§ 17, 2, Note) ; tjjkco, mclty frrj^a
(§ 108, II. Note); TrXew, .sat/, ?7rXeuo-a (§ 108, II. 2).
Note 1. Three verbs in fit, dldcofii (8o-), c/we, trjfii (c-), 5en«/, and
Tidrjfxi (de-), put, form the aorist stem by adding k instead of o-, giv-
ing- edwKa, riKa, edrjKa. These forms are seldom used except in the
indicative active, and are most common in the singular, where the
second aorists Uoov, rjv, %Br)v, are not in use. (See § 122, N. 1.) Even
riKdyir)v and ddrjKdixrju occur, the latter not in Attic Greek.
Note 2. Xe'co, pour, has aorists ex^a (Horn, ex^va) and fx^dfirjuy
corresponding to the futures x^^ ^"^ ;(eo/Ltai (II. N. 3). Eiirov, aaid,
has also first aorist ctTra; and <^epa), bear^ has rjvcyK-a (from stem
iveyK-) .
For Homeric aorists like ipT^a-ero, iUffero, X^ov, &c., see § 119, 8.
2. Liquid stems form the first aorist stem by lengthening
their last vowel, a to >; (after t or p to d) and c to ct. E.g.
^alvut {(pdv-) , €(f)T}u-a, €({)r}vdpr]v (rare) ; (rTeXKa> (oreX-), tarfiK-a,
iaTfLX-dfirjV, dyyeXXo) (ayyeX-), announce, flyy€iKa,fjyy€i\diJLr]v; -nepalvca
{TTepdv-),Jinish, iivipava', piaiv(o(pidv-), stain, €p,idva', vep.(t>,diride, eveifxa,
€veip.diJir]v; KpivoHf judge, CKplva', dp.vv(o, keep off,rjp,vva,r)}xvvdp,r)v', <p6cipui
(<f>Oep-), destroy, icpdeipa. Compare the futures in II. 2.
Note 1. A few liquid stems lengthen av to av irregularly; as
KcpBaiva, gain, eKepbdva. A few lengthen pap to prjV, as rcTpaivoi, bore,
tT€Tpr)va.
Note 2, Atpa (dp-), raise, and aXXofiai (dX-), leap, have ^pa, r}pd-
fXT]v, fjXdfj.rju (augmented) ; but a in the other moods, as apa>, apas, upa-
fiai, dpalfiT]v, dXdp,€vos (all with a).
IV. (Perfect Stem.) (a) Perfect Middle Stem, The stem
of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive consists of
138 INFLECTION. [§ 110.
the simple stem (in verbs of the second class, of the present
stem) with the required reduplication or augment prefixed ; as
Av-o), AeAv/xat, iXiXvjxrjv ] AaV-co, XeXctTr- (§ 108, II. Note), Ae-
XeijjifxaLj iXcXiififJLTjv.
The stem may be modified (§ 109) as follows : —
(1) A short final vowel is regularly lengthened; as (piXe-ca, nerjii-
X»7fiat, eirecfitXrjfiTjV, Spaco, dedpdf.'.M. (§ 109, 1.)
(2) Some vowel stems add o-; reXe'-o), TercXecr-/iat. (§ 109, 2.)
(3) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change e to
a; as areWco (oreX-), earaX/xai, €a-Ta.\fir]v. (§ 109, 4).
(4) A few stems in v drop v, and others change v to <t. (§ 109, 6.)
(5) IMetathesis sometimes occurs; as /SaXXw (/3aX-), throw ^ )3«-
^\ri-tuxi, i^Xd). (§ 109, 7.)
For the euphonic changes made in consonant stems on adding the end-
ings, see § 97, N. 2.
(b) Perfect Active Stem. The stem of the first perfect and
pluperfect active is formed b}" adding k to the reduplicated or
augmented simple or present stem (§ 108, II. Note), except
when this ends in a labial or palatal mute. Stems ending in
TT or p, K or y, aspirate these letters, making them <^ or x, while
final <^ and ^ remain unchanged, ^.y.
Auo), XeXvK-, XcXu/ca, iKeXvKfiv] v4(o (w-, veF-), swim, vevevKa; TreiBco,
persuade, TreneiKa (for 7r€-7rf iO-ko). Kottto) (acott-) , cut, KeKocfya; /SXaTrro)
OXa/3-), Jiurt, j8e/3Xa0a; Trrjyo-o-o) (iTTrjK-), cower, eirrrjxa'': npacro-o} (npdy-),
do, n€7rpdxa, (Vf 7rpa;^6ti/ ; ypa(f)a>, write, ye'ypa^a, eyey pa(f)€iv', opvcraio
(opvx-)i dig, opQipvxo.' So Kop.i^(o (ko/iiS-), carry, KCKopiKa (§ 16, 1,
N. 2).
This stem may be modified (§ 109) in various ways: —
(1^ A short final vowel is regularly lengthened ; as (bikia), irecbl-
\rjKa. (§ 109, 1.)
(2) Most monosyllabic liquid stems and some others change e to
a; as (TTeXKuj (oreX-), ea-raXKa, earaXKeiv. (§ 109, 4.)
(3) A few lingual and palatal stems change e to o, as in the sec-
ond perfect. (§ 109, 3, N. 2.)
(4) A few stems in v drop v, and become vowel stems. (§ 109, 6.)
(5) Metathesis sometimes occurs; as /SaXXo) (^aX-, /3Xo-), /Sc-
^XrjKa. (§109, 7, a.)
§ 110.] FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS. 139
Note. The only forai of first perfect found in Homer is that in Aca of
verbs having vowel stems. The perfect in Ka of liquid and lingual stems,
and the aspirated perfects of labial and j)alatal stems, belong to a later
development of the language.
(c) Future Perfect Stem. The stem of the future perfect is
formed by adding a to the stem of the perfect middle ; as XeXv,
AeAvo--, AeAvcro/xat ; ypa(f>-, yeypa</>-, ycypai/^-, yiypdif/o/xaL ; XctTr-,
XeXcLTT-, XeXcL^}/-, AeXeu/^o^at ; Trpda-croi (j^pay-), ireTrpdy-, Trcvpai-,
imrpa.^op.ax.
Note 1. The future perfect is found in only a small number of
verbs. Its stem, when a consonant precedes o-, is subject to all the
euphonic changes noticed in the future stem (§ 110, II. 1).
Note 2. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the
future perfect active; Outjo-ko), die, has TfOvrj^o), shall be deadj formed
from TcdprjK-, the stem of perf . TidvrjKa, am dead ; and IdTr^fii, set, has
to-TTj^co, shall stand, from iarrjK-, stem of perf. tcm^Ka, stand. In
Homer, we have also Kexapfjo-io and K€xapr](rop.ai, from ;)(atpa) (x^')*
rejoice; and KeKadrjaa, (irreg.) from ;^a^a) (xad-), yield.
(d) Second Perfect Stem. The stem of the second perfect
and pluperfect is always the simple stem with the redupli-
cation (or augment) prefixed. The stem is generally modified
by changing € to o, or by lengthening other short vowels.
See § 109, 3, with the examples.
For second perfects and pluperfects of the jxi-form, see § 124.
Note 1. Vowel stems do not form second perfects; d/cou-o), Jiear,
is only an apparent exception, as dKfjKoa is for aK-rjKoF-a with F omit-
ted (§ 102).
Note 2. Few verbs have both a first and a second perfect. In
TTpdaa-o) (npay-), do, we have rreTrpaxa, have done, and TreVpaya, fare
(well or ill) ; so dv-olyco, open, dv-eaxa (trans.), dv-eaya (intrans.).
Note 3. The second perfect stem appears especially in the Homeric
dialect, which has many second perfects not found in Attic ; as vrpo-p^^ovXa
from /3oi5\o/mi, wish, fxe/xrjXa from /t^Xw, cmicem. Homer has many varie-
ties of the 2 perfect participle of the ^i-form ; in <3^t6s, gen. aOros (some-
times aSros), fem. aula, as yeyatis, /Se/Satis ; in -rjds, gen. •j/wtos or tjojos, fem.
Tjv'ia, as Tedu-nJjs, reOvqCiTo^ or -6tos, redu-rfvia. Herodotus has cws, eCoaa,
e6s, gen. ewros, eiLa-ns, as eo-reuis, &c., some forms of which {e.g. ia-rewra,
redvedTi) occur in Homer. The Attic contracts acis, owo-a, cbs, to ws,
tDo-a, OS {§ 69, N.), gen. wtos, (ha-ns, &c., but leaves T€0ueu)s (of 6vi]<TKui)
uncontracted.
Note 4. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle in
Homer often has a short vowel when the other genders have a long one; as
dprjpdi, apcCpvia', redriXws, reddCXvia,
140 INFLECTION". [§ 110.
V. {Second Aorist Stem.) The stem of the second aorist
active and middle is the simple stem of the verb, to which the
second aorist stands in the same relation in which the imper-
fect stands to the present stem ; as ActVoj (Aitt-) , 2 aor. eXXirov,
iXLTTo/xrjv (impf. IXetTTov, iXeiTTOjxrjv) ; Xafx/Sdvo) (\a(3-), take, 2 aor.
eXajSoVf iXajSoixrjv.
Note 1. A few second aorist stems change f toa; as T€fiv<o
(re/i-), cut, erafiov, €Tafi6fxr]v. See § 109, 4, N. 1.
Note 2. A few stems are syncopated (§ 109, 7); as ncTOfiai
(7r6r-),y7y, 2 aor. m. firTOfxrjv ior eTTfT-ofxijv] eyeipco (iyep-), rouse, rjypo-
fiTjv ioY ^yep-ofXTjv; rjXOov, went, from stem eXvd-, for Tp\.v6ov (Hom.);
enofiai (o-ctt-), follow, eanofinv, for ia-en-ofirjv', Zx<^ i^^X')^ have, eaxov
for €-(r€)(-ou. So the Homeric eK€K\6fxr]v, for i-Ke-KfX-oprjv, or K€K\6fiTju,
from KeXofiai, command; oKoKkov, for ak-a\€K-ov, from aXe|&) (aXex-),
rvard off: for these and other reduplicated second aorists, see § 100,
Notes 3 and 4.
Note 3. For second aorists of the /xt-form, like e^y\v, see § 125, 3.
VI. {First Passive Stem.) The stem of the first aorist pas-
sive is formed b}'- adding Oe to the stem as it appears (omit-
ting the reduplication or augment) in the perfect middle or
passive, with all its modifications (IV. a) : in the indicative,
imperative, and infinitive, Oe becomes 6y], In the future pas-
sive o- is added to Or], making the stem in Orja-, E.g.
Avco, XeXv/iat, iXvBrjv (Xv$i]-), (XvBe-o)) Xv6(b, Xvde-irjv, Xvdrj-vai, Xv
Bus (Xv^e-i^-), Xv6r)(T-opiai', TTpdcraa) {npdy-), TTiirpay-fMai, enpdx-Orjp
(§ 16, 1), TTpaxOrja-Ofiaf, TreiBay, persuade, neneKT-fiaL (§ 16, 3; § 108,
II. Note), eneiaBijv, Treta-dTjaofiai', (f)iX(a), ne-(}>L\r)-p.ai (§ 109, 1), ecfiiXr)-
Orjv', TLfidd), T€-TLfxr]-p.ai, (TiprjBqv, TifMrjOfjO-opxii', TfXeo), TeTeXf-a-fmi (§ 109,
2), €TeXe(r-6r]V, TeXfaBrjaofiai', kXivco, K€KXi-pai (§ 109, 6), €K\i-6r)v, kXi-
BrjaofiaL] reipco (rev-), Tera-pxn. (§ 109, 4 and 6), erdOrjv, iK-Ta6r](T0jxai.
Note 1. Tpeirco has TiTpafifiai, iTp^<f)6r}v (Ion. iTpd(f>d7)p) ; rp^ifxa has
reOpaixfmt, 4dpe<f)dT)u ; and arpecpoi} has ^arpafi/xac, with (rare) i(TTp^<f>dr)v
(Ion. and Dor. iaTpacpdriv). ^aivio has W^ac/iat (§ 16, 6, N. 4), but
i<pdv6r]u.
Note 2. N is added in Homer to some vowel stems before 6 of the ao-
rist passive ; as idpijio, erect, 'idpv/xai, Ibpiv-drjv (Attic ibpdd-qv). So Hom. c/cXiV-
etjv and iKpbdriv (§ 109, 6).
Note 3. For iTier}v{{oY iee-drjv), from Tldrifii {Oe-), and (Hdriv (for iOv-
6riv) from^i5w, sacrifice, see § 17, 2, Note. We have, however, 4dp^(f>6rjv and
Tedpd<f)-daL from Tp^<p(a, nourish, perhaps to distinguish these forms from
irpi^drjp and rerpd^dai from rpiiria, turn.
§ in.]
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS.
141
VII. {Second Passive Stem.) The stem of the second aorist
passive is formed b}^ adding c to the simple stem : in the
indicative, imperative, and infinitive, e becomes rj. In the
second future passive o- is added to this 7;, making the stem
in 7](r. The onl}' regular modification of the stem Ipthe change
of € to a explained in § 109, 4. U.g.
1^1'
BXaTTTO) (j3Xa/3-), hurt, e^\d^r)v, ^\a^rjaofiai'^ ypd0o), zvrite, €ypd(f)T]v,
ypa(l)T](TOfiai'^ pi-nra) {pX(p-), throw, €ppi<pr}v; (f)aiv(d (^av-), shofv, e(^dvr)v,
<pdvf]aopai; crrpe^ai^ turn, iarpd^r^v, crTpd(fir](Topai] TepTrco, amuse, irdp-
nrjv (Hom.) with subj., by metathesis, Tpdn-fia. See the examples
in § 109, 4, and N. 1.
Note 1. The simple stem of verbs of the second class, which
seldom appears in other tenses (§ 108, II. Note), is seen in the
second passive system; as o-j^tto) (o-aTr-). corrupt, iadirrjv, adnr](Top.ai\
TT)K(o (ra/c-), melt, erdKrjp; peco (pv-), flow, ippvr)v, pvrja-opxii', epeiTrca
(epiTT-), throw down, Tjpinrjv (poetic), but 1 aor. TjpeicpOrjv (Jpem-).
Note 2. nXiyo-o-ta (rrXT/y-), strike, has 2 aor. pass, iiikrjyrjv, but in
composition f^-enXdyijv and KaT-firXdyrjv (as if from a stem TrXay-).
Note 3. The only verb which has both the 2 aor. passive and
the 2 aor. active is TpeVo), turn, w^hich has all the six aorists.
§ 111. The following table shows the seven tense stems
(so far as the}" exist) of Avw, XctTrw (Xitt-), irpda-cru) (irpdy-),
(fiaLVio (<^av-), and a-TiXXo) (otcX-).
■"<1
»=.^ i.
I. Present (all voices).
II. Future Act. & Mid.
III. Aorist Act. & Mid.
Ha.) Mid.
IV. Perfect ?-?^^*-
1(c.)
l(d.)
.) 2 Perf.
V. 2d Aor. Act. & Mid.
VI.
( First) (a.) 1 Aor.
(Pass.i(&.) 1 Fut.
VII ( 2d j (a.) 2 Aor.
^^^' (Pass.) (J.) 2 Fut.
Xv- Xeiir-
irpa<ror-
()>aiv-
irreXX-
Xv<r- X€ix|/-
irpol-
<|>dve-
o-TcXe-
Xv<r-
irpol-
<|)T1V-
<rT€iX-
XcXv- XcXciir-
XcXiJK-
XcXvo"- XcXeiif/-
XeXokir.
ire'irpdY-
■JTCTrpdx-
ircirpol-
ircirpdY-
Iff
l<rraX.
IotoXk-
Xiir-
Xv0c(ti)- X€i<|)0€(ti)- irpax0€(Ti)- ^wBi(r\)-
Xv0t]<r- X€i<})0tio-- irpax0T]<r-
<f>dv<T,).
«|»avTi<r-
<rTdX€(Ti)-
otoXtio"-
142
INFLECTION.
[§ 112.
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
§ 112. 1 . The endings which are peculiar to the different
persons of the verb are called personal endings. These have
one form for the active voice, and another for the passive and
middle ; but the aorist passive has the endings of the active
voice.
2. The personal endings, which are most distinctl}^
preserved in verbs in yw-i and other primitive forms, are as
follows : —
ACTIVE.
Primary Tenses. Secondary Tenses.
Sing. 1. |jLi or — v or —
2. s (o-i) s
3. <ri (ti) or — —
Dual 2.
3.
TOV
TOV
TOV
TIIV
Plur. 1.
2.
3.
\LiV (|A6S)
T€
VO-i (VTI)
|Jl€V (|1€S)
T€
V or <rav
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Primary Tenses. Secondary Tenses.
<rat
Tttl
<r0ov
<r0ov
|i€6a
o-0€
flTJV
<ro
TO
o'Oov
o'Oi|v
<rec
Note. The active endings fit and at in the first and third person
singular are not used in the indicative except in verbs in fn, verbs
in a> having no endings in these persons. The original ending at of
the second person singular is found only in the Epic fa-a-i, ihou arty
in all other verbs being reduced to or. In the third person singular
Ti is Doric, as t'iBtj-tl for TiBr^ai ; and it is preserved in Attic in ea-Ti^
he is. In the first person plural /xey is Doric. In the third j^erson
plural v(TL always drops v and lengthens the preceding vowel, as in
Xvovo-i for Xvo-vai (§ 16, 6) ; the original form vri is Doric, as cfitpovrt
for (f)€pov(rt (hRt.feriint). The perfect indicative active of all veibs,
and the present indicative active of verbs in /it (§ 121, 2, d), have
dai (for avari) in the third person plural. ^
1 Among the original active endings, inherited from the parent language
of the Greek, Latin, Sanskrit, German, &c., were fit, <n, ti, in the singular,
and VTL in the third person plural. In the past tenses, these were fiist
shortened by dropping t, and became fx, s, t, and vt, in which form they
appear in Latin, as in era-m, eras, era-t, era-iit In fit, ai, and ti, and
in the original fies in the first person plural (compare Latin inus), we see
§ 112.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 143
3. In the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle, and
in both aorists passive (except in the subjunctive and opta-
tive) , the endings are added directly to the tense stem ; as
XeXv-jxaif AeAv-crat, AeAv-rai, AeAv-i^Tat, i-XeXv-ixrjv ; i-XvOrj-Vy
€-Xv6y]-<Sf C'XvOr), i-XvOrj-aav (§ 111).
So also in verbs in ftt, in most of the forms which are
peculiar to that conjugation (§ 121, 1) ; as <^a-/>ieV, </>a-T€, from
tf>y]fXL {<f>a.-), say ; rcrTa-/jiat, to-ra-o-ai, tcTTa-Tai, tcTTa-j'Tat, from
lo-TT^/xt, set (§ 123).
4. In other parts of the verb the tense stem appears in a
prolonged form, consisting of the fixed portion and a variable
vowel (sometimes a diphthong), to which the endings are
affixed. This formation will be seen by a comparison of the
present indicative middle of rt^ry/xi (rt^c-) with that of 0tA.c(o
(</)tXc-) in its uncontracted (Ionic) form : —
T^Oc-jJiai,
<}>iX^-o-|j,ai
Ti6€-{Ji€6a <f>i\6-d|ie6a
tIOc-o-ou
<t>iX€'.6-(<r)ai
T£e€-O-0€ <j>tX€'-€-O-0€
Tt06-Tat
<|>l\€'-€-Tai
Tt0€-VTat <|>iXe-o-vTaL
T{0€-<r0ov
<J)iX€-€-<r6ov
(For Ti0T]|ii see § 123.)
Compare also the perfect Xi-Xv-iiai, Xe-Xv-rai, Xi-Xv-aOc,
Xi-Xv-vTdL (§ 112, 3), with the present Xv-o-fxai, Xv-e-rai, Av-c-
the roots of the personal pronouns, /, thou, he, and we (compare /le, <r^, rbv^
and the Epic dfi-fies), which were originally appended to the verbal root,
instead of being prefixed as in English. These forms therefore really
include the pronoun, which is commonly said to be omitted.
A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the prim-
itive verb be (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin es-), as it
appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and Lithuanian
(the most primitive modern language, still spoken on the Baltic), will illus-
trate the (^reek verbal endings.
Singular.
Sanakrit.
Greek. Latin.
1. as-mi
l^-^l (for €0--|ii) [e]s-um
2. asi
la-a-i es
3. as-ti
l<r-TC es-t
Plural.
1. 8-mas
lo'-^v (Dor. elji^s) [e]s-u-mu3
2. s-tha
eo--W es-tis
3. s-a-nti
i-vrL (Doric) [ejs-u-nt
Old Slavic. Lithuanian.
yes-m' es-mi
yesi esi
yes-t' es-ti
yes-mi es-me
yes-te es-te
s-u-t' es-ti
144 INFLECTION. [§ 113.
a-Oe, Xv-o-vrau The vowel which thus completes the stem
is called a connecting vowel ; ^ and it appears (sometimes
with o and € lengthened to w and ci) even when the ending
is dropped (§ 113, 1), as in Aeyw (for Aeyo-/xi) and Xiyu (for
Aeyc-rt) .
Indicative.
§ 113, 1. The original connecting vowel in the indicative
of verbs in w (except in the aorist active and middle, and
the perfect and pluperfect active) was o before /a or v, and
elsewhere c. In the singular of the present and future
active, when fxt and tl were dropped and en became a-
(§ 112, 2, Note), the primitive o and c were lengthened
into 0) and et.^
The connecting vowel is a in all persons of the first aorist
middle ; also in the perfect and first aorist active, except
1 The name "connecting vowel" belongs to the doctrine formerly held,
by which this vowel was made a third element in the formation of the verb,
distinct from both the stem and the ending. The more correct view con-
siders it a part of the tense stem, which thus consists of the fixed portion
(e.g. Xey-, Xv-, \enr-, in the pi'esent) and a vowel sound which varies accord-
ing to the following letter (e.g. Xeyo- or \eye-). In the original language
it was uniformly a, as it appears in the Sanskrit bharn-mi (below). In an
elementary work, it is more convenient to treat this variable formative
suffix sepai-ately, so that the tense stems are given (as in § 95) in their
shorter forms (\v-, Xenr-, &c.).
2 The supposed original forms of the present indicative of X^w and the
Latin lego are thus given by G. Curtius (Griechisches Ferbum, I. p. 200).
The actual forms of the Sanskrit present bharami, I bear (= <p^po}, /o'o),
are given on the right, and the Attic forms of Xiyu on the left.
Attic Greek.
Primitive Greek.
Primitive Latin.
Sanskrit.
Iff
Ill
lego-m(i)
lege-s(i)
lege-t(i)
bhara-mi
bhara-si
bhara-ti
\iyo-[iiV X6Y0-|i€S
\iyi-r€ X€'y€-T€
Xc'-yovo-i Xe-yo-VTi
for Xe-yo-vo-i (§ 16, 6)
lego-mas
lege-tes
lego-nt(i)
bhara-mas
bhara-tha
bhara-nti
From Xeyo-fii comes Xiyw, from Xeye-crt comes X^yets, and from \eye-Ti
comes \f'7ei for Xeyeir (§ 7).
§ ns.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
145
in the third person singular where it is c In the pUi-
perfect active it is « ; but in the third person plural it is
€ (rarely ct).
2. The personal endings of the indicative, as the^^ appear
in verbs in w united with the connecting vowels, are as
follows ; —
Pres. & Fut.
j 2. CM
(3. €t
-i
(3.
CIS
CTOV
erov
0|i€V
€T€
ovoa
L ACTIVE,
Per/. Aor.
&
as
c
arov
OLTOv drtjv
OflCV
arc
oo-i av
Impf. & 2 Aor.
0¥
CS
C
erov
€TT]V
OflCV
ere
ov
(for ovo-i) (for avcri)
Plup.
€IV
CIS
Ci
CITOV
CITTJV
€l|l€V
CIT€
«rav
or cio-ay
II. PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Pres., Fut, avd
Fut. Per/.
Impf. Pass, (t Mid.,
& 2 Aor. Middle.
Aor. Middle. /^
s^-
ofiiai
Oflt,V
ajitiv
S. ■< 2. Ti or €1, (for co-ai, cai)
ov (for
60-0, CO)
CD (for oo-o, ao)
(3.
crat
€T0
arc
-Vs.
€<r0ov
CO-0OV
owr0ov
co-Oov
co-9nv
turQi\v
(I.
oHLcOa
ofiicOa
cLfjicOa
v.] 2.
€<r0€
co-Oc
ao-0€
(3.
ovrai
OVTO
OVTO
By adding these terminations to the unprolonged tense
stems as the}^ are given in § 111, all the tenses of the in-
dicative, except those included in § 112, 3, ma}^ be formed.
The latter may be formed b}^ adding the personal endings
given in § 112, 2 directly to the tense stems.
Note 1. The endings o-ai and a-o in the second person singular of
the passive and middle drop o- after a connecting vowel (§ 16, 4, N.),
10
146 INFLECTION. [§114.
and are then contracted with the connecting vowel (§ 9, 4, N. 1).
Thus, XvTj or Xvei is for Xvcaai, Xveat] eXvov is for eXvcao, iXveo;
eXvaco (aorist middle) is for eXvcraao, iXvaao. The uncontracted
forms (without o-) are common in Ionic Greek (§ 119, 2).
Note 2. The second persons ^ovXei (of ^ovXoiiaL, wish), o'lci (of
oiofxac, think), and oyjrei (of oyl^ofiai, fut. of opao), see) have no forms
in 7].
Note 3. A first person dual in fxeOov is found very rarely in
poetry; as XfXeinfieOop (pf. pass, of Xeino)).
Note 4. The Attic writers sometimes have r] (contracted from
the Ionic ea, § 119, 4) for €iv in the first person singular of the
pluperfect active, as ificfiadrjKT).
Note 5. In Homer top and a-dov are sometimes used for ttju and
(T0i]v in the dual. This occurs rarely in the Attic poets, who some-
times have TTjv for top in the second person. The latter is found
occasionally even in prose.
Subjunctive.
§ 114, The Subjunctive has the primary endings with
long connecting vowels, w, rj, and rj, for <o (or o) , c, and ct of
the indicative, as follows : —
Passive and Middle.
Sing. Dual. Plural.
(*>}Aai iOfteOa
W (for Tjo-ai, Tjai) T]<r0ov tjo-Gc
Tjrai T)(r6oy cavrai
For the perfect subjunctive passive and middle see § 118, 1.
Note 1. The aorist passive subjunctive (both first and second),
which does not omit the connecting vowel (§ 112, 3), has the active
terminations (^ 114) contracted with final t of the stem; as XvOe-coy
Xv^«; (f)av€-r]5, ^av^y; aTaXe-rj, (rraXfj.
Note 2. The subjunctive of verbs in rjjit and cufii has the above
terminations contracted with preceding f or o of the stem ; as Ti0a>
(for TiOe-d)), 5iSa>/xat (for Bibo-afxai), Ocofxep and Oaprai. (Ion. Oecofiep,
ekoiPTai). See § 122, N. 4 ; § 126, 7 (a).
Optative.
§ 115. The optative has the secondary personal endings
(§ 112, 2), preceded by a modal sign t or ir] (le before final v
of the third person plural) .
Active. |
Sing.
Dual.
Pluml.
1.
«>
<a{i.€V
2.
Tis
IJTOV
T1T€
3.
H
tlTOV
«<n (for «v<n)
§ 115.]
PERSONAL ENDINGS.
147
1 . Verbs in w have a connecting vowel o (in the first aorist
active and middle, a) in the optative. This is contracted with
t (or t€) , making oi or at (otc or ate) . The first person singu-
lar active has the ending /xl for v (§ 112, 2), except in some
contract forms (see 4). Adding the endings we have
Active.
Passive and Middi
.E.
Sing.
Dual.
Pltiral
Sing. Dual.
Phiral
1.
2.
Ol(lt
OITOV
Ol|l.€V
01T€
01|1T]V
010 (fox ouro) 010-60 V
oi|ic8a
oia-Qe
3.
01
ovn\v
Ol€V
OITO OIO-0T]V
OIVTO
Aorist Active
Aorist Middle.
1.
2.
CllUil
ais
aiTov
ai)JL€V
aiT€
aw (for aio-o) aio-dov
ai|Lc6a
aio-9€
3.
ai
aiTTiv
aicv
aiTO aia-dr\v
aiVTO
For periphrastic forms of the perfect optative see § 118, 1. For
the aorist passive see below, 3.
2. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in 17/xt
and (iifiL, the final vowel of the tense stem (a, c, or o) is con-
tracted with t into at, ct, or ol, to which the simple endings /xtju,
&C. are added ; as la-Ta-i-ixr^Vy ia-Taifxrjv ; dc-u-fx-qv^ Oetjxyjv ; 80-t-
fxrjv, SoLfirjv. (See § 122, N. 4.) See also the cases of per-
fect optative middle in yfjL-rjv in § 118, 1, Note.
3. The present and second aorist active of the ftt-form
(§ 121, 1), and both aorists passive in all verbs, have the
ending v in the first person singular and crav in the third per-
son plural. Here the modal sign is irj, with which a, c, or o of
the stem is contracted to atr/, cirj, or 0177 ; as la-Ta-L-rj-v, la-Tairjv ;
OTa-irj-fieVf (rraLrjfiev ; XvOe-irj-v, XvOcirjv ; So-irj-v, Botrjv.
In the dual and plural, forms with i for 177, and tcv for irjcrav
in the third person plural, are much more common than the
longer forms ; as o-TaL/xev, o-ratcv, for aVaiiy/Mcv, araCrja-av. (See
§ 123, 2.)
4. In the present active of contract verbs, forms in 01171/,
oLTj^i oL-q (for o-L-7}Vy &c.) aic more common in the singular than
the regular forms in oi/xt, ots, ot (see 1), but less common in
148
INFLECTION.
[§ 116.
the dual and plural : the third person plural in oi-qcrav is very
rare.
Both the fonns in oltjv and those in ot/xi are contracted with
a of the tense stem to wryv and w/xl, and with e or o to oLrjv and
ot/xi ; as TL/xa-o-irj-Vy TLfxaoirjv, TLfJuorjv ; <fiL\€-o-Lr)-v, (fnXeoCrjVy <f>L-
XoLTjv; Cr]Xo-o-Lr)-v, StjXooltjv, SyjXoirjv; T6/xa-o-t-/>ii, TiixdoLfj.L, TLfxioiJiL;
<f>iXe-o-L'fXLy (jiLXeoLfjiLy cfiiXoLfXL; 8rjXo-o-L-fx.Lt BrjXooLfiLj hT]XoLfjLL, (Scc
§98.)
Note 1. A few verbs have oirjv in the second perfect optative;
as fKne(p€vya, fKirecfxvyoirjp. The secoud aorist optative of exa>, havey
is axoirjv {axoi^L in composition).
Note 2. The Attic generally uses the Aeolic terminations tiasy
(le, and €iav, for ais, at, aiev, in the aorist optative active. See Xva
and (f)aiva> in § 96. .
Imperative. j
§ 116. 1. The personal endings of the imperative are as
follows : —
Active.
Passive and Middle.
Sing.
Dual. Plural.
Sing. Dtial Plural.
eior —
TOV TC
<ro <rOov o-Oe
T«
T«v Tftxrav or vt«v
o-0« <r0wv <r0(Dorav or <r6a>v
6l is always dropped after a connecting vowel.
2. The regular connecting vowel of the imperative is c ;
but before v it is o. In the aorist active and middle it is a.
But the second person singular in the aorist active ends in ov,
and in the aorist middle in at. The endings united with the
connecting vowels are as follows : —
Passive and Middle.
Sitig. Dual. Plural.
ov (for €<ro, €o) €<r0ov 6o-0€
€<r0o> €(r0(i)V C(r0a)(rav
or €O'0«v
Aorist Middle.
ai aa-Qov a<r0c
aa-Bn afrQtav acrCoxrav
or otrBuv
Active
Sing.
Dual.
Plural.
2.
€
€TOV
ere
8.
er»
€T«V
eroxrav
or ovTWV
Aorist Active.
2.
ov
arov
are
3.
axtt
aruv
ar&xrav
or avTwv
§117.] PERSONAL ENDINGS. 149
3. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active termina-
tions {6l, t(o, &c.) direct!}^ to Or) of the tense stem, after which
Ol becomes tl (§ 17, 3); as kvOrj-TL, Av^tj-tw, &c.
The second aorist passive adds the same teiTninations to rj
of tlie tense stem {Ol being retained) ; as (fidvyj-Oiy <f)avri-T(j) ;
a-TaXrj-OL^ (rraXT^to, &C.
Both aorists have €vto)v in the third person plural.
Note. For the form of the imperative in verbs in /At, see § 121, 2,
(b) and (c).
The Infinitive^ Participle, and Verbal Adjectives.
§ 117. 1. The terminations of the infinitive of verbs in w
(including connecting vowels) are as follows : —
Second Aorist Active
€€L-V (COnt. €L-v)
Perfect Active
e-vaL
Aorist Active
at
Aor. Pass, (no connecting vowel)
vat
Perf. Pass, and Mid. „
(T^at
Aorist Middle
a-a-Oai
Other tenses, Pass, and Mid.
€-(r6aL,
Jl /xt-forms add mt (act.) or a-Oax
(pass, and mid.) di-
recti}' to the tense stem.
2. The stem of the active participle ends in vt (t in the
perfect) , which is joined to the tense stem by o (a in the ao-
rist) ; except in the aorist passive (§ 112, 1) and in /xt-forms,
which add vt directly to the stem.
The passive and middle participle ends in /tevo? (stem
/jtcvo-), which is preceded by o (a in the aorist middle) ; ex-
cept in the perfect and in />tt-forms, which add /xevos directly
to the tense stem.
Note. Participial stems in vt add o-a to form the stem of the
feminine; as XvovT-aa, Xvovtra; laravT-a-a., lo-Taa-a', XvOevr-aa, Xvdelaa.
(§ 16, 6, N. 1.) Perfects in ws, otos (stem in t) have an irregular
feminine in via. Participles in fievos form the feminine in /xeVj;.
For the decleusiou of participles, see §§ 62, 68, 69.
150 INFLECTION. [§118.
3. The stem of the verbal adjectives in tos and t€o<5 is
formed b}^ adding to- or reo- to the stem of the verb, which
has the same form here as in the aorist passive (with the ne-
cessary change of <^ and x to tt and k, § 16, 1) ; as XvTosy
XvTio<s (stems Xv-ro-, \v-tco-) ; tpltttos, TrctcTTeos (stems rpiTT-TO-,
7reto--reo-) ; raKTOs, ra/creos, from Tacrcrw (stem ray-) , aor. pass.
Note 1. The verbal in tos is sometimes equivalent to a perfect
passive participle, as Kpiros, decided, tuktos, ordered ; and some-
times expresses capability, as Xurdv, capable of being loosed, clkovo-tos^
audible.
Note 2. The verbal in tcos is equivalent to a future passive par-
ticiple (the Latin participle in dus) ; as Xvrkos, that must be loosed,
solcendus ; nurjTeos, to be honored, honorandus.
For the impersonal use of the neuter in reov in an active sense,
see Syntax, § 281, 2.
PERIPHRASTIC FORMS.
§ 118. 1. The perfect subjunctive and optative middle
and passive is generally formed by the perfect participle with
w and ctiyi/, the subjunctive and optative of ct/xt, be ; as Xikv^ii-
vos (->?, -ov) w, AeAv/xeVos (->;, -ov) d-qv. See the paradigms.
Note. A few verbs with vowel stems form these tenses directly
from the stem: Krd-ofxai, KTccfiai, acquire, pi. KeKT-qfiai, possess : subj.
KfKToiifxai (for Ke-KTa (OfMat), kckttj, K(KTr}Tai; opt. K€KT(piir]v (for jce-zcra-
Oiprjv), KCKtSo, K€KTa)TO, SbUd KeKTrJlJLTJI/ (for KeKTT} l-flTJV, § 115, 2), K€KT^O,
K€KTJjTo, KeKTTjfxeda; — fiifjLvf](TKa) (ixva-), remind, pf. fiefxvrjfxai, remember :
subj. fi€fxva)fiai, ficjjLvaiixeOa (Hdt. /xf/ui/f co/ne^a) ; opt. fxefivwfxrjv (Horn.
fie fjLve^To), or fiffjLv^fxrjv. So poetic KekX^fMTjv (for K€Kkr]-i-pr)v) of KaXeco,
and Homeric \c\vto (for XeXu-t-ro) or XcXiivro of Xva. See also pr.
opt. daivvTO of dalvvfit.
2. The perfect subjunctive and optative active is more fre-
quently expressed by the perfect active participle with w and
€Lrfv than by the special forms given in the paradigms ; as XeXv-
Kws w and AeXvKws eirjv for XcXvKU) and XiXvKOLfxL.
Note. The perfect imperative can be expressed by the perfect
participle and icrOi, earo), &c. ; as dprjKcos earco, let him have spoken
(before a given time); elprjpevov eo-rw (§ 202, 2, N. 1). The forms
like XeXv/ce, XeXonre, &c. were probably used only when the perfect
had the meaning of the present; as xao-'«a' (x^**")? 9^P^y P^* i^^X^^^i
imper. Kcxrivare, gape. (See § 95, 1, Note.)
§ 119.] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FOEMS OF VERBS IN Q. 151
3. The future perfect active, for which very few verbs have
a special form (§ 110, IV. c, N. 2), is generally expressed by
the perfect participle with ea-ofiai (future of ct/xt, be) ; as iyvioko-
T€s iaofxiOa, we shall have learnt,
4. Even the perfect and pluperfect indicative are occasion-
all}' expressed by the perfect participle and dfxi; as yeyovw?
ia-TL for yeyoi/e, TreTroiyjKios ^v for e7re7rot?yKei.
5. The periphrastic third person plural of the perfect and
pluperfect indicative middle and passive, formed by the parti-
ciple and eio-t and ^o-av, is necessary when the stem ends in a
consonant (§ 97, 2). The participle maj^ be used in all gen-
ders ; as ovTOL XcXeL/xfievoL €L(TLy tkesc {men) have been left ; avrat
AcXct/A/Aevat €tcrt ; ravra XcXci/i/xeva co-ti (§ 135, 2).
Note. Here, however, the Ionic endings arm and aro for vtcu
and PTO (§ 119, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose; as rc-
Tax-arai and (Tcrdx-aro (Thucyd.) for Terayfievoi ela-i and ^aav.
6. A periphrastic future is sometimes formed by /xeXXw, in-
tend, be about (to do) , and the present or future (seldom the
aorist) infinitive ; as fxiWofxcv tovto ttoicii/ (or TroLya-av) , we are
about to do this. (See § 202, 3, Note.)
DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 0.
§ 119. 1. The Doric has the personal endings fi€s for ficu, rav
for T7;i/, nav for /xt^v, ovti for overt, a>VTi for axri, avri for aai. The poets
have fieada for fieOa.
2. When a is dropped in a-ai and ao of the second person (§ 113,
2, N. 1), Homer often keeps the uncontracted forms eai, T}ai, ao, co.
Herodotus always has eat and ao, but generally rj for rjai. In both
Homer and Hdt. eo may become fv. In Homer o-ai and ao some-
times drop <r even in the perf . and pluperf . ; as fiefxvrjai for fxefiurjaai,
ecra-vo for ctro-ucro; sometimes tr is doubled, as in KeKaaarai {KeKaa-fiai).
3. The Ionic has arai and aro for wat and vro in the third person
plural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for vro in the optative.
Before these endings n, /3, k, and y are aspirated ((f), x) I as KpvTrrai
(/cpu/3-), K€Kpv<f)-aTai:, Xcyco, \e\ex-aTai, XeXexaro. Hdt. shortens t; to
€ before arai and aro", as niKe-aTat (pf. of oIkcco), Att. aKfj-vrai] cVfrt-
fif-aro (plpf. of rt/xato), Att. (TeTtfirj-vro. Horn, rarely inserts S be-
tween the vowel of a stem and arai or aro (see (Xavvco and palva).
152 INFLECTION. [§ 119.
These forms sometimes occur in Attic (§ 118, 5, Note). Hdt. has
arai and aro also in the present and imperfect of verbs in /xt.
4. Homer and Herodotus have ea, eas, (e(^v), for Attic €iv, ets, ei,
in the pluperfect active, as iTfOrjTrea; whence comes the (especially
older) Attic 1st pers. in tj, as €fi(iia6r)KT) (§ 113, 2, N. 4).
5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the uncontracted forms
of the future (in ea and eofiai) of liquid stems ; as fieveo), Attic fi€VQ>.
When they are contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs in «<b
(§ 120, 2, a).
6. The Doric has aco), o-eo/xat (contracted era), o-oO/xat or aevfiai) for
tro), (Toixai in the future. The Attic has a-ovfxat in the future middle
of a few verbs (§ 110, II., N. 2).
7. In Homer o- is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the
future and aorist, as reXeo), reXeo-o-o) ; KoXeto, fxaXecro-a; KOfxi^co, fut.
KOfiiao) (§ 110, II., N. 1, c), Hom. cKoixLaaa, €KOfXL(TaaixT)v.
8. In Homer aorists with a- sometimes have the inflection of sec-
ond aorists ; as l^ov, l^es, from Uveofiai, come ; f^fjaero (more common
than e^Tjaaro) from /SaiVco, go.
9. In Homer rja-av of the aor. pass, indie, often becomes fv; as
&p[xr]6ev for apixrjdrja-av, from opfido), urge. So in the 2nd aor. act. of
verbs in fit (§ 126, 4).
10. Homer and Herodotus have iterative endings o-kov and a-Koprju
in the imperfect, and in the second aorist active and middle. Hom.
has them also in the first aorist. These are added to the tense stem,
with € (a in first aorist) inserted after a preceding consonant; as
if;(0), imp. €\-icrKov\ epvco, 1 aor. epva-acKe; (fxvyo) {(pvy-), 2 aor. (fyvye-
(TKov. Verbs in fa> have e-eo-Acoi/ or €(tkov in the imperfect; as koKU-
(TKov, 7rci)Xeo-K€To ; verbs in aa> have a-aa-Kov or aa/cov; as yodaaKe,
vLKoa-Kopev. Rarely other verbs have acrKov in the imperfect; as
KpvTTTaa-KOP from Kpyirro).
These forms are confined to the indicative, and they generally (in
Hdt. always) omit the augment. They denote repetition\ as ttw-
\k(TKeTo, he went (regularly) .
For /ii-forms with these endings see § 126, 5.
11. Some verbs have poetic stems, made by adding preceded by
a vowel (generally a or e) to the present or the second aorist tense
stem; as dpwad-, diaxaO-, cfAeyed-, from dpvva>, ward off, diaxa, pur-
sue, ^Xeyoj, burn. From these special stems are formed — sometimes
presents, as^Xfye^Qj; sometimes imperfects, as cStco/ca^oi/ ; sometimes
second aorists, as ea-xf&ov (a-x-)'-, and also subjunctives and opta-
tives, as €lKd6a>, (iKdOoipi, dpvva6oiTO] imperatives, as dpwdOaTe, dpv-
vdOov', infinitives, as apvuddav. diaxdOeiv, o-\t6((iv, crx^^^iv or axfOelv,
and participles, as eiKaOcov, ax^Oav or crx^dcau. As few of these stems
form a present indicative, many scholars consider ddiaxudou, tpyaOov,
§ 119.] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN 12. 153
&c., with the subjunctives, &c. second aorists, and accent the infini-
tives and participles fiico/ca^eii/, dnwaOelv^ clKadflp, flKadcov, &c.,
although the traditional accent is on the penult.
See in the Lexicon aXKadciv, dfxvpddo), di(oKdda>, eiKdOfiv, ipyddeiv,
fjepeBonai, fiyepidofxai, fxeraKidOo), o-^c'^w, (fi6iuv6to, (jAeytdo).
12. (^Subjunctive.) (a) In Homer the subjunctive (especially in
the 1st aor. act. and mid.) often has the short connecting vowels e
and o (Attic rj and w), yet never in the singular of the active voice
nor in the third person plural; as ipxxraofx^v^ aKyr]cr€Tfi p,vdr)a-ofiaij
ev^eai, drjXrjaeTai, dfidyj/eTai, eyfipofxev, lixeipfTai.
(b) In both aor. pass, subjunctives Herodotus generally has the
uncontracted forms in ceo, eaficv, eaxri, but contracts erj (or erj) to 7
(or T]) ; as d(j)aipc6€(o (Att. -6Si), ^aveacrt (Att. -axri), but <j)avfj.
(c) In the 2nd aor. pass. subj. of some verbs, Homer lengthens
€a>, fT/y, €T}, to CIO), firjs (or tjtjs), fir) (or t/t;), and has eiofiev, eiere, for
fcjpev, cr]T€', as dafieiat (from tbdnrju, 2nd aor. p. of dapvdoi, subdue) ^
dafieiTjs or 8ap.r}T)s, dafieirj or dafifir), daficifTc ; Tpaneiofxev (from erdpnTjif
of Tepna, amuse). This is more fully developed in the 2nd aor. act.
of the /xt-form (§ 126, 7, b).
(d) In the subj. active Homer often has afxi, rjaOa (or rjaOa), jytrt;
as fOfXafjLi, iOikrjcrOa, idtkrjtri.
13. {Optative.) The Aeolic forms of the aor. opt. act., etas, etf,
fiav (given in the paradigms of Xvw and ^aiVo)), are the common forms
in all dialects ; the Aeolic has also first persons in fia and cip.ev.
Homer sometimes has oto-^a in the 2nd person for ois ; as kKqI-
oKxOa. For aro (for vto) see above, 3.
14. (Tnjinitive.) (a) Homer often has €-fi€vat and e-fxcp for fi-v
in the infinitive active ; as d/xwep-fvat, dpwepev (Attic dpvveiv) ; eXBe-
picvai, iXdepev (iXdelv) ; d^epevai, d^epev (a$eiv). For the perfect (only
of the /ni-form, § 125, 4) see § 126, 9: the inf. in evai does not occur
in Homer. So Hom. pevai^ Dor. p£v, in the aor. pass. ; as opoKoOrj-
fifvai, 8arj-p.epaL (also da^vai), Hom.; alaxvv6^p,€v, Find.
(/>) Homer often has the uncontracted 2nd aor. inf. act. in etiv ;
as Ide'tip.
(c) The Doric has ev (§ 98, N. 5) and the Aeolic rjv for eiv in the
infin. ; Doric also rjv for e'eti/ or fli/; thus deldcv and ydpvep (Dor.) for
df I'Seti/ and yrjpvfiv ; (f)€pr]v and ^xi^ (Aeol.) for <f>€p€iv and ex? «' ; eiTriiv
(Dor.), finrjv (Aeol.), for elirelp.
15. (Participle.) The Doric and Aeolic have oiaa for ovara, and
aiSf ataa for aa, cura, in the participle ; as exoia-a, dpcyj/^ats, dpeyjraKra.
154 INFLECTION. [§ 120.
Special Forms of Contract Verbs.
§ 120. The present and imperfect of verbs in aa>, ew, and oo)
have the following dialectic peculiarities : —
1. {Verbs in aco.) (a) In Homer verbs in aa are often contracted
as in Attic. In a few cases they remain uncontracted ; sometimes
without change, as paLerdovo-i, vauracov, from i/aterao), dicell ; some-
times with a, as in Treii/dco, hunger, bi^doi, thirst ; sometimes with euv
for aov in the imperfect, as fifvoiveov from fxcvoivdoi, long for.
(b) Commonly, when they are not contracted in Homer, the two
vowels (or the vowel and diphthong) which elsewhere are contracted
are assimilated, so as to give a double A or a double O sound. The
second syllable, if it is short by nature or has a diphthong with a
short initial vowel, is generally prolonged ; sometimes the former
syllable; rarely both. We thus have ad (sometimes aa) for & or arj
(aa for aet or ai]), and ow (sometimes coo or coa>) for ao or aco (oa>
for aoi) :
6pd<js
for opdcis
opda
,, opdci or opdxi
op^ao-06
„ opdcore*
opdao-Oai
,, opdco-Oai
(jLvdao-Oai
„ fJLvdco-Oai
opddv
„ opdciv (Dor. opd€v)
6p<$o>
„ 6pd«
6p<$a>orv
,, opdovo-i {i.e. opaovo-i)
bp6iatra
„ 6pdov<ra {i.e. 6paovT-<ra, § 117, 2, K)
opdipcv
„ opdoicv
opowvrai
,, opdovrai
alridwo
,, alridoio
The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the word
could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse 5 as in Tj^wovres for
ri^dovT€s, i7/3a)oijUt for fj^Stoifii, fivdaa-dai for fivaeaSai, fjLvoiovro for
{f)lxvaovTo. In this case the second vowel or diphthong is not
lengthened (see the examples above) ; except in a final syllable, as
in fifvoivda (for -aft), or when axra or Gxrt comes from ovraa or ovai,
as in T^jSaxaaa, dpawcri, for rj^a-ovrcra, dpa-ovat.
This assimilation never occurs unless the second vowel is long
either by nature or by position ; thus opaofiev, opdere, opaeroy cannot
become 6poa>pLfv, opaare, opaaro. It extends also to the so-called
Attic futures in oo-qj, ato, w (§ 110, II. Note 1, b)\ as Aoo), eXo'coo-t,
Kpefioco, dafida, fia/iocoai, for eXda<a (eXaw), &c.
(c) The Doric contracts ae and a>; to t; ; this occurs in the dual of
a few imperfects in Homer, as Trpoo-avdrjTrjv (from npoaavdam), <poi-
§120.] SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 155
T^TTfV ((f)oiTd(o), <Tv\r]Tr)v (o-i»Xaco). So Hom. op-qai (or oprjai) for
opdem (Attic Spa) in the pres. ind. middle of opdca. See 2 (d).
(d) Herodotus sometimes changes aw, ao, and aov to ea, to, and
€ov, especially in 6pd(o, dpcoTdo), and ^otrao) ; as opeoj, opiovres, opeovai,
€ipb)T€OP, ((polreov. These forms are generally uncontracted; but eo
and eov sometimes become ev (2, a), as elpmrcvv.
In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in aco regularly.
(e) In Homer, e-fiemi (§ 119, 14, a) in the pres. infin. act. of
verbs in aco and eoj becomes r)p.€vai by contracting e with a or e of
the stem (1, c); as yorjfievai (yodco) for yoe-e[i€vai, Treivrjuevai. (Treivdo)) .
See 2 (r7).
2. (Vej'hs in eco.) («) Verbs in ew generally remain uncontracted
in both Homer and Herodotus. But Homer sometimes contracts fe
or cfi to fi, as rdp/Set (rdp^ee); and both Homer and Herodotus some-
times contract to or eov to ev (Hdt. especially in dyvoeco, 8iavo€op.ai,
6r)eop.ai, voeot), 7ro/,/a)); as noievai, dyvoevvres-, diavoevuro. So in the
Attic futures in Xa-co, Xcrnfiat (§ 110, II. Note 1, c), as KOfiievfieda
(Hdt.). Hdt. has generally ScT, must, but impf. cSte.
(h) Homer sometimes drops e in eat and to (for eo-ai, eo-o, § 119,
2) after e, thus changing eeai and teo to eat and eo, as fivdeai for
[xvdfcai (from fivdeop-ai), djroaipfo (for dnoaipeco) ; but he oftener con-
tracts e'eot and eeo to eiai and eio, as /xv^eiai, aiSeto (for atSe'eo). He-
rodotus sometimes drops the second e in e'eo ; as cpo^eo (also ^ojSeO),
alreo, i^rjyeo.
(c) In Homer, final € of the stem is often lengthened into « ; as
veiKelco, TTJ/et'o), for veiKeco, nveco. So in eVeXei'-ero from reXe'co, reXei'w.
A similar change takes place in eco of the 2nd aor. passive subjunc-
tive (§ 119, 12, c).
(fl) Homer has a present infinitive in rjfjiemi for €-€fi€vai (1, c), as
(f>L\T)p.evai {(j)i\ea>) for (biXe-efievai, Ka\T)p.€vai (/caXeco). So (poprjvai
{(f)op€-€iv) from (popeco. Homer has Doric contraction in the duals
6fMapTrjTr)v (SfiapTea)) and aTreiXj^rT/i/ (aTreiXe'co). See 1 (c).
3. (Fer&5 m ow.) (a) Verbs in oco are always contracted in He-
rodotus, but he sometimes has ev (for ov) from oo or oov, especially
in 6iKaido), think Just; as ddiKaievv, diKuievvros, diKaievai.
(h) They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few cases
in which forms in oco or wo occur resembling tliose made by assimi-
lation in verbs in aw (1, &); as dpocoai (from dpdw, plouf/h); brjiotatv
and (impf.) br}i6a>vTo (from 6;ytdw); idpaovaa and idpaovra (from
i5pdw).
156 INFLECTIOK [§121.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
Remark. The peculiar inflection of verbs in fxi affects only the
tenses formed from the present and second aorist stems, and in a
few verbs those formed from the second perfect stem. Most of the
second aorists and perfects here included do not belong to presents
in fii, but are irregular forms of verbs in o) ; as e^rjv {fiaiva)), tyvuiv
{yiyvaaaKO)), eirTcifirfv (TreTOfxai), and Tedvufxcv, reduairju, redvduai (2nd per-
fect of 6vi}(TK(o). See § 125, 3 and 4.
Tenses thus inflected are called /Ltt-forms. In other tenses verbs
in |ii are inflected like verbs in o) (§ 123, 3). No single verb exhibits
all the /ii-forms.
§ 121. 1. In the present and imperfect of verbs in /xt,
and in all other tenses which have the /xi-form of inflection,
the endings (§ 112, 2) are added directly to the tense stem,
except in the subjunctive and optative. The tense stem
almost always ends in a vowel, which, if short, is lengthened
(Note 1 ) in the singular of the present and imperfect indica-
tive active, and generally in all forms of the second aorist
indicative, imperative, and infinitive active. Thus </»7-/At,
<f)rj-(rij (fia-fx€v^ ^a-re, from stem ^a- ; cf. Xv-o-/x€V} Xv-€'T€j from
stem Av-. See § 112, 4.
Note 1. Here a and f are lengthened to rj, o to «, and v to v.
But in the second aorist, a after p becomes 5 in eSpdv, e becomes f i
in the infinitives 6elvai and eii/at, and o becomes ov in bovvai. (See
§ 125, 3, Notes 1 and 2.)
Note 2. The only verbs in yn with consonant present stems are
the irregular etVt, he^ and r^jiai, sit (§ 127). See also olba (§ 127,
vii.), and a few poetic second aorists and perfects (§ 125, 3 and 4).
2. The following peculiarities in the endings are to be
noticed in these forms : —
(a) The endings fxi and <n (§ 112, 2, N.) are retained in the first
and thii'd persons singular of the present indicative active ; as 0>;-/>tt ,
Q)) Qi is retained in the second aorist imperative active (§ 116, 1)
after a long vowel, as in o-ttiOi,, ^rjdi ; but it is changed to s in ides,
Soy, €?, and o-^e?. It is rare in the present, as ^a6i, Wi. The
present commonly omits 61, and lengthens the preceding vowel (a e,
o, or i;) to 1;, ei, ou, or v; as io-tij (for ia-Ta-Ot), riOei, didovi Set/cm
(See § 123.)
§ 122.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN ML 157
(c) In the second person singular passive and middle, aai and ao
are retained (see, however, § 122, N. 3) ; except in the second aorist
middle and in the subjunctive and optative, which drop o- and are
contracted (§ 114, N. 2; § 115, 2, 3). In the present imperative
hoth forms in cro and contracted forms in a> or ov (for da-o, tao, ocro)
occur, vao being always retained.
(d) In the third person plural of the present indicative active, a
is prefixed to the ending vai, making do-t (§ 16, 6), which is con-
tracted with a (but not with f , o, or v) of the stem ; as loraa-t (for
la-Ta-ava-i) , but Tide-dai, bido-dcri, deiKvv-dai. Contracted forms in elai,
oOori, and va-i, from stems in e, o, and v, are regular in Ionic, but rare
in Attic. In the third person plural, the imperfect and second aorist
active have aav, and the optative active has irj-aap or ic-v.
(e) The infinitive active adds vai to the tense stem ; as lora-mi,
riOe-vai, SoO-rai, 6ei-vai.
(j) The participle active (with stem in ain-, evr, ow, or vvt) forms
the nominative in fiy, as, ovs, or vy.
3. Some verbs in -q/xt and w/tt reduplicate the stem in the
present and imperfect by prefixing its initial consonant with i ;
as Si-Sio-fxi {So-), give, TL-Orj-fjn (^c-), put, for Ot-Orj-fjn (§ 17, 2).
From stem ora- we have t-a-Trj-fxi, set, for ai-a-Trj-fiL ; and from
c- we have I-yj-ixl (l-rj-fiL). See § 125, 2.
§ 122. There are two classes of verbs which have this
inflection : —
1. First, verbs in fii which have the simple stem or the re-
duplicated simple stem (§ 121, 3) in the present ; and all the
second aorists and second perfects and pluperfects of the /tt-
form. This includes all verbs in rjfXL and wftt (from stems in
a, e, and o).
2. Secondly, verbs in w/xi, which (with one exception) have
the /xi-form only in the present and imperfect. These add vv
(after a vowel, wv) to the simple stem to form the present
stem ; as Scik-, Sct/cvi;-, heUvv-ixLj ScLKVv-s, SiLKVV-aLj but SiLKVVixev,
S€LKVVT€ (§ 121, 1);
They thus belong, by the formation of the present stem, to the
fifth class of verbs in a> (§ 108, V. 4), and some of them (as beUw-
fii) use the present in via) (see Note 5).
Note 1. Some verbs in rjfu and ajfii have forms which follow the
inflection of verbs in ». Especially, in the imperfect of Ti$Tjfii and
158 . INFLECTION. [§123.
dt'Scu/xt, eriBeis and eriBei (as if from riBe'co), and eBiSovv, eSlBovs, eS/-
dov (as if fiom 8id6(o), are much more common tliau the regular
forms in rjv and cov. So in the second aorist, tlie foi-nis [e^T/i/, eOrjSf
€6r}~\ and [eSwi/, e'dois, eSco] never occur; and in their place the first
aorists in ku, edrjKa and edcoKa (§ 110, III. 1, N. 1) are used in the .sm-
ffular, while the second aorist forms eOfrou, &c., eborov, &c., are gen-
erally used in the dual and plural. See also Injii (§ 127), where r]Ka
is used in the same way.
Further, in the optative middle, Tidolixrjv, ndolo, tiBoIto, &c. (also
accented ridoio, tiOolto, &c.) and (in composition) Bolfxrjv, 6oio, 6oIto^
&c. (also accented o-vv-Oolto, 7rp6(r-6oia6€, &c.) occur with the regular
TiBeifiTjv, BeifiTjv, &c. See also Trpooiro, &c., under irjfit (§ 127).
Note 2. A few deponent verbs accent the subjunctive and opta-
tive as if there were no contraction. Such are dvvafxai, inlo-Tafiai, Kpe-
fiafiai, iTTpidixrjv (§ 123) ; as diivcofiai, bvvaiTo (not bvvoipaiy bwalro) ; and
sometimes other verbs in /xi. The infinitive irplacrdai is accented like
a first aorist.
Note 3. Avvafim and erriaTafiai generally have ebvva (or r)bvva>)
and ^TTio-TG), for ibvvacro and rjma-Taao, in the second person singular
of the imperfect.
Note 4. For the formation of the subjunctive and optative of
verbs in rjfit and w/xt, see § 114, N. 2, and § 115, 2 and 3. But the
contracted subjunctive from stems in a has a», fjs, fj, &c. (act.), and
aip.aL,rj, rjrai, &c. (mid.), as if from stems in e; which stems are
found in Ionic, as in (rre-c«>-/xei', crTe-co-cri (Attic crrcoficv, (ttuxti). See
§ 126, 7 (a).
Note 5. Verbs in w/xi form the subjunctive and optative like
verbs in <»; as b€iKvv-a>, beiKuv-oip-i, 8€tKvi>-ciip.ai, bciKw-oifirjv. In other
moods forms of verbs in pva> often occur ; as beiKvvova-i, opvvovai.
Note 6. Only one verb in j/v/xi, a^evpvfit (o-/3e-), quejich, has a
second aorist active; and this, ea^rju, was quenched, with infin. (r/3^-
vai and (Ion.) part. o-jSei's, is formed fi'om the simple stem in e
(§ 125, 3).
§ 123. 1. The following is a synopsis of lo-Trjfii, set,
(stem o-rd-'), TlOrjfii, put (stem ^e-), hlBcofii, give (stem
Bo-), and SeUvvfiL, show (stem BecK-, present stem BeiKvv-^,
in the present and second aorist systems.
As la-rrjixi wants the second aorist middle, e7rpidp.r)v, IhougJit (from
a stem irpia- which has no present) , is added. As bfiKwyn wants the
second aorist (§ 122, N. 6), eSw, / entered (from bvo), formed as if
from bv-pii) , is added in the active voice. No second aorist middle
in vyLr)v occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see Xuw, Trv(u>, (rfva>,
and x€o>). "Ebvv has no aorist optative in Attic; but two forms of
an old optative dvijv (for dv-irjv) occur in Homer, viz. dvrj and
§ 123.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
159
ACTIVE.
Pres.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
't<rTi]|Jti lO-Tw irTaCr\v t(m]
tC6tj|i,i Ti9w riQiCr\v rCQn
8£86){j.i 8i.8(3 8180 It] V 8£8ov
8eCKvv|jii 8eiKVi!&> 8€iKvt{oi|i.i ScCkvv
Infinitive.
Participle.
ijrrdvai.
lorras
Tl0€Vai
riQds
8i8($vai
8i8oi$s
8ciKv\Jvat
8€IKVWS
't<rTT]V
Imp. ,
l8£8ovv
^ I8€Ckvvv
'l<m]v
<rr<a
oTTaCtiv
<rTTi0i
erTt|VCii
jrrds
2Aor. ,
i^evu)
0«
e€CT]v
e^s
0€ivat
0€(S
(^8uv)
8(3
8oiT]v
80s
8ovvat
80VS
L^8vv
8v(a
SvOt
8vv(u
8ils
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
!t(rTd|iai lOTwjJLai i<rTaC|i.i]V tcrrdo-o t<rTa<r0ttt i<rTdfi,€Vos
Ti0e|JLai Ti0(tf)Jiai ti0€()jit]v t£0€O-o T£0€<r0ai ti0€|X€vos
8£8o(iai. 8i8ia|iai 8i,8oi)it]v 8£8o(ro 8l8o(r0ai 8i8d)i.€Vos
8e£Kvv|j.ai 8€iKVVb>|Aai 8eiKvvoi|jirv 8e£Kvv(ro 8€CKW<r0ai 8cikvv)j.€V0$
{urTd|iT]V
6Tl0€VtlV
18180 |XT]V
e8€iKvv|ti]V
2 Aor.
Mid.
' €irpid|JLT]v irpC(o[iai> irpiaC\i.r\v irplo
iQ(p.r\v 0w(i.ai 0€C|i.t)v 0ov
48d|j.T]v 8w|JLai 8oCp.T]v 8ov
irpCa<rQai irpid|icvot
0eo'0ai. 0^|i€vos
8d(r0ab 8<{[mvos
2. The peculiar forms of these verbs, which are in-
cluded in the synopsis, are thus inflected : —
160
INFLECTION".
[§ 123.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present Indicative.
Sing, -j 2.
(3.
l!<rTTjs
3. V<rTTj<rt
Dual
II
Plur. -j 2
(3
ta-rarov
torraTOV
tC9t]|u
tCOtjox
tC0€TOV
t{06TOV
X<rra\itv ri9t[Lev
2. \!<rTaT€ tIOctc
3. lirrdcri TiG^acrt
8C8a)|ii
8C8(i)s
8£8ci>(ri
8£8oTov
8C80TOV
8£8o)i.cv
8180T6
8i.86a<rb
Sc^KVVfib
8CIKVVS
BiCtCVVTOV
8c(kvvtov
ScfKWTC
8€iKvii6urb
Dual
Plur.
li:
1. X<m\v
Sing. ^ 2. t<mis
\i
1'^
(3.
toraTov
Imperfect,
irlBy\v
lTi0T|, irCQti
{§ 122, N. 1)
hid(rr\v
t<rTa|i€V It{6c[jlcv
3. tcrracrav IrCOco-av
(^5/5wj/) €8f8ow l86CKvt;v
(e5td(i;s) c8i8ovs c8cCkvvs
{i8ldu) cSiSov €8eCKVv
(§ 122, N. 1) •
c8C8oTov
I8i86tt]v
l8£8o(t€v
mZort
48C8o(rav
I8cCkvvtov
iSciKVVTtlV
ihtUvvrt
iBiCKwa-av
Sing. -< 2.
(3.
i<rT«
icrrgs
lOTTQ
Dual P- ^*^''**^
(. 3. lo-TTJTOV
Plur.
n. I
•J2. t
(3. I
l<rTTlT6
Presetvt Sulyunctive.
T10M
T10^S
T10^
Tt0T)TOV
Tl0TiTOV
T10«5}JLCV
Tl0t]T€
Tl0(0(ri
8i8(5
818^
8k8^
8t8«i)Tov
SlStOTOV
8k8iO|l,€V
8i.8<aTc
8i.8<tf<rb
8€lKVt$0»
SeiKvtfrjTov
8€lKVtST)T0V
SciKVVWfiCV
8ciKVV1]TC
8eiKvt!<i)(ri
123.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
161
Present Optative.
Sing. < 2.
(3.
Dual 5 2-
(3.
Plur. 3 2
(3
Dual
Plur.
!
ij;
Sing. I J
Dual
icrraC-qs
lOTaC-qTOV
ioTaiTJrqv
i<rTaCti|X€v
lOTai-qtrav
itrraiTov
icrraCTrjv
i<rrai\i€V
loTttlTe
lOTatcv
icrrdpTW
VOTOITOV
ICTToLTWy
ti9€£t]v
Tl0€tT]S
Tl9€tT]T0V
TlGciTJT'qV
Tl0€l"q(JL€V
Tl9ctT]T6
riQei7\a-av
Or thus contracted
TiOeiTOv
Tl0€tTTlV
Tl6£l|JL€v|
T10CIT6
T10€1€V
SlSofTjV
8k8oiT]S
8l8okT]
8i8oCtjtov
8t8oi^rTjv
8i8oiT][j.ev
8l8oi1]T€
8t8otTi<rav
8i8otTov
8k8oiTT]V
8i8oi|j.€v
81801T6
8i8okev
Present Imperative.
T10€T«
rCQerov
riQiruv
8180V
SlSoTO)
8180TOV
8i86t(ov
Plur.
ing. ^2
(3
Sing
Dual
Plur. •< 2.
3.
11
<(3.
i(rrwn rCQere 8k8oT6
lOTaTworav TtOcTwcrav 8i8dTci)(rav
or lirrdvTwv or tiOcvtwv or 8k8($vT(i>v
Present Infinitive.
b<rrdv(u r\Aivox 8i8dvai
Present Participle.
itrrds Ti0eCs 8k8ovs
Second Aorist Indicative.
?(m]V {ed-qv) (eSuv)
'^<mjs {edrjs) (eSws)
^OTT] [edr]) (eSui)
(§ 122, N. 1) (§ 122, N. 1
^(TPTITOV JOCTOV ^80T0V
ka-rr\Tr\v €0€'ttiv €8dTTjv
?(rTT](Ji€V {0e|JLcv l8o|uv
2o-TTlT€ 206T€ ?8oT€
2(m|orav ^0€(rav ^8o(rav
11
8€lKVtJoi|Al
8CIKVV01S
8CIKVVOI.
86tKVWOlTOV
8€tKVV0CTT|V
8£lKVt)oi(J.6V
8€lKVVOtT6
8€lKVV0k€V
8£lKVUTa>
8ciKVVTOV
8€IKVVT«V
8€IKVVT€
8€lKVt}T«0XlV
or 8eiKvvvTuv
8ckKvvvat
8€kKVvis
^8vv
tSvs
^8v
I
?8vT0V
€8^X11 V
S8v|JL€V
?8vT€
£8v(rav
162
INFLECTION.
Second Aorist
Subjunctive.
S^-
(rru
6(5
8»
StW
Sing.
h.
(TTTJS
8^.
8ca
8vxis
8t5Ti
Dual
\i
CTTJTOV
<rTf]TOV
0fJTOV
GfiTov
8c3tov
SWTOV
8iJtjtov
8tfT]T0V
Plur.
1'
(3.
aTfjTe
OTWO-t
0W(Ji,6V
efiT€
6»en.
8«|J[.€V
8«T€
8«<n,
8tJ«|i€V
8vt]T€
Second Aorist Optative.
Sing.
1^
(3.
<rTatT]s
0€fT,S
0€£t1
80CTIV
8oCtis
8o£ti
Dual
OTaiT]T0V
OTttl'^TTJV
0£Ct]TOV
0€liriTTlV
8oCt]tov
8011QTT]V
Plur.
(3.
OTaiT]|l€V
crrafTjTc
OTa^o-av
0€{T]|iev
0€IT1T6
0611] orav
8o£Tl(i€V
8o£t]T6
8o£Ti<rav
Or thus contracted : —
Dual
{I
crraiTov
0€tTOV
801TOV
OTaCTTlV
0€tTT|V
8oCttiv
Plur.
]'-■
orTa{fj,ev
OTttlTe
061H16V
0€lT€
80l(l€V
8oiT€
(3.
<rTai€V
66l€V
8oi€V
«S1w)7m;? ^om< Imperative.
Sing.
{I
<rrf]et
0^Ta>
8o's
h6r<a
8{)0(,
8vTfi>
Dual
«
<rTf]TOV
0€TOV
0e'T(av
80TOV
80T«V
SVTOV
8i}t«v
Plur.
11
<rTfiT€
0€'Te
80T€
8i)T6
OT-^Two-av
0eT(i>(rav
SoToxrav
8iiT(i)(ra'
[§ 123.
or CTavTwv or ^ivr<av
or 8<$VTa>v
Secand Aorist Infinitive.
trrf[Vox 0civai. 8ovva(>
Second Aorist 'Participle.
<rTds 0€(s 80VS
or 8vvTA>v
8{)vai
8ifs
§ 123.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
163
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present Indicative.
\'-
VcrTa)j.ai
TC0€|xai
8C8o|iai
8€lKW|Aai
Sing.
^•
l!<rTa<rat
T£0€<rat
SiSoo-ai
8€iKwo-at
(3.
ttrrarax
Tt0€Tai
8£8oTai
8€lKVVTai
Dual
n.
X<rra<rQov
Ti0€<r0ov
8£8o<r0ov
8cCkvvo^0ov
UxXai.
ia^aa-Qov
Tt06<r0ov
8i8o(r0ov
8CIKVVO-0OV
<1.
i(rTd}i.€6a
Tl0^|A60a
8i8d|j.e0a
8€lKVlJ|l€0a
Plur.
- 2.
icrrcwrwc
Tl0€<r0€
8(800-06
8€£kwo-0€
(3.
toTavTCU.
rWevrat
8£8ovTat
ScCKwvrai
-
Imperfect,
l^-
l(rTd|J.T]V
lTi0e>T)v
€8l8<$(iT)V
C8€IICVV)LT|V
Sing.
2-
tOTttO-O
lTl0€(rO
I8C800-0
IZdKWITO
(3.
toTaro
lTC0eTO
I8180TO
I8€Ckvuto
Dual
v..
Xtrraa-Qov
lTC0€<r0ov
48t8oo-0ov
lUUwa^ov
i<rra(rQr\v
hiQia-Qi\v
l8i8da-0Tiv
^8€lKVVa-0T]V
\^-
l<rrd|i.€da
^i0€'|i€0a
e8i8d|ie0a
l8eiKVvfu0a
Plur.
]^-
t<rTa<r0€
lTl0€<r0€
l8C8oo-0€
l8eCKwo-06
(3.
Ktrravro
4t£0€VTO
I8C80VTO
48€tKWVTO
Present Subjunctive.
(^■
i<rT«|iat
Ti0w|JLai
8i8w|iai
8ciKviki>|iiat
Sing.
- 2.-
lO-TTJ
TtO^
8i8(^
8ci.KVVT|
(3!
Itrrt^Tai
TlvTlTClt
8i8a)Tai
8€ikv\Jtit<u
Dual
{I
WTTfJcrOov
TiOfjcOov
8i8wo-0ov
8€ikviJtj O-0OV
lOT-qo-Gov
T10T]O-0OV
8i8«o-0ov
8eiKviJTio-0ov
(1.
icTTwjJLeea
Tl0WH€0tt
8i8(G|i60a
8€lKW(&U€0a
Plur.
■ 2.
l(rTf|(r06
Tl0Ti<r0€
8i8(So^€
86lKVVT]O-0t
(3.
ioTwvrai
Tl0«VTaU
SiSuvrai
SeiKvvuvTca
Present Optative.
r-
ioTttCn-qv
Tt0€C(ATlV
8i8oC)Ativ
8€IKW0C(J,T1V
Sing.
^•
io-rawo
T10€IO
818010
8ci,KVV0U>
(3.
urraiTO
T€0€ITO
81801TO
8ciKVl!0lT0
Dual
\l
io-Tai<r9ov
Tl06lOr0OV
8i8oio-0ov
8€iKv-ik>io-0ov
i<rTa£<r9T]V
Tl06£<r0TlV
8i8oCo-0Tlv
8€lKVVo£o-0T]V
\^-
t<rTa£n€0tt
Tl0€l(lC0a
8i8oC(i€0a
8€iKV\;o(|JL€0a
Plur.
V-
lorTaio-0€
Tl06t<r0€
8i8oio-0e
8ciKVVOlO-0€
(3.
l<rraivTo
T10€IVTO
81801VTO
SciKVVOlVTO
164
ing. ]
(3.
1
Dual
Plur.
INFLECTIOI
!T.
[§ 123.
Present Imperative.
2.
toTClO-O
tCOco-o
81800*0
hiUvvxro
or I'orrw
or t[9ov
or 8£8ov
3.
larrdorOw
TiO^crOb)
8i86(r0«
8aKvvo-0a)
2.
ia-raa-Qov
T£0eo-0ov
8£8oo-0ov
ScCkwotOov
3.
icrrdo-OcDV
Tl0€O-0a)V
8i8oo-0cDv
8€lKVl{o-0WV
2.
IWao-ec
TC0€(r0€
8C8OO-06
8ciKVVO-0€
3.
to-Tdo-Gwcrai/
' Ti0€'o-0o)(rav
8i86o-0a)o-av
8etKvi)(r0a)<rav
or lO-Tdo-OcDV or Ti6e<r0wv
or 8i8<5o-0«v
or 861KVVO-0WV
Preseiit Infinitive.
Vtrrao-Otti
T£0€<r0at
8C8oo-eai
SeCKVvo-eai
Present Participle.
lordficvos Ti0e[j.evos 8i8d)Ji€vos
Second Aorist Middle Indicative.
8ciKVV[X€V0S
Sing.
ing. ■j2.
(3.
Dual 52-
(3.
Plur. •j2.
lirpidjJLTiv
eTrptaro
6irpfao-0ov
l'irpido-0Tiv
^irpid}JL60a
l'irp£aa-06
lirpCavTO
^0ov
g0£TO
g0€O-0ov
C06O-0TJV
I0e>£0a
^060-06
g0evTO
l8o(LT]V
£8ov
S80TO
S8oo-0ov
c8d<r0T]v
I8d|ji60a
^8oo-0€
^8oVTO
Second Aorist Middle Subjunctive, )
Sing
Plur,
irpl(i)|j.ai.
irp^Tj
Trplt]Tai
'irpCT}o-0ov
TrptT]<r0ov
irpi(o)jic0a
TrpCiio-Oe
irpCuvrai
OfjTaw
0fio-0ov
Of] 0-00 V
e(d(ie0a
0fjo-0e
OwvTai
8w|iab
8w
8i5Tai
8(5(r0ov
8(ii)O-0OV
8(«p,60a
8(00*06
8a)VTab
§ 123.]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
165
Second Aorist Middle Optative,
Sing. -< 2.
(3.
Dual
(3.
■■\i
irpia£|iT|v
irpCaio
irpiaiTO
trpiato-Oov
irpLai(rOT)v
irpiaiixeOa
irplaicrOc
irpCaiVTO
9€t|Jt1]V
Bcio
0€ITO
0€i(r0ov
0ei<r0Tiv
0eC(JL60a
0610-06
061VTO
8oi)I.T]V
8010
SOITO
8oi<r0ov
8ol(r0T]v
8oi|i60a
8oi(r06
801VT0
Second Aorist Middle Imperative.
orpCb)
irpid<r0(i>
'7rpta<r0ov
7rpid<r0CDV
irp^a(r06
irpid(r0a>(rav
or irpid<r0a)v
00V
06'o^a>
06'o-0ov
0^o^(av
06'o-06
06o-0a)o-av
or 06'o-0wv
80V
86o-0a>
86o-0ov
8oo'0a)V
8oo-06
8do-0&)O'av
or 8oo'0(i)V
Second Aorist Middle Infinitive.
irpCao-0ai O6o-0ai 8do-0ai.
Second Aorist Middle Participle.
irpidpi6V0S 06'|1.6VOS 8dp.6V0S
3. The following is a full synopsis of the indicative of
XcTTrj^Ly rlOriiJbLy SlBcofic, and BeUvvfML, in all the voices : —
ACTIVE.
Pres. X<m\\Uy
set
t£0t,p.,
place
8£8a,p,
give
8€£kW|U,
show
Imperf. toTrrjv,
«t£0tiv
l8t8ovv
ISeCKWv
Fut. OT-^O-O)
O^o-o)
8<&o-«
Uiifd
ri. 2o-nio-a,se<
Aor. •<2. ^<m\v, stood
I'-
?0t]Ka
I06TOV, &C.
dual and plnr.
1^:
(in
l8a>Ka
28oTov,&c. 1. ffi6i|a
dual and plur.
^^^ INFLECTION. j-g 123.
1. tcmjKa ^
Perf J ^- ^o^ciTov, &c. I
in dual and plur. ( ^' •^^^«'«* L 8^8«Ka 1. Se'Seixa
Plupf. .
' 1. Ic-HjKClV
or €lO-T1QK6lV
2. ^OPTttTOV, &c.
in dual and plur.
stood
1. 4t60€£k€Iv 1. IScScfiKctv 1. IScSe^x*
Fut Perf. lo-'HJia,, shall stand
§ 110, IV. (c) N. 2.
' MIDDLE.
Pres. ^o-ra^ai, stand rCGcKat (trans.) 8£8o,xat 8.CKvv>at (trans.)
Impf. torTdjiriv |ti0.V,,v 48t8o>,iv ISaKw^riv
Fut. .rHjo-ofiai 0Vi<ro,«u -8ci<ro(iiat .86^10,101.
lAor. ^<m]<rdfiTiv (trans.) leTjKdfJiTiv (not Attic) I8€i{dntiv
2 Aor- le^H-lv -l8o>T]v
Perf. So-TafJLai (as pass.) rcOciixcu 8^8of&ai 8^6i7fiai
Plupf- (?) (?) l868d|jLTiv 48€8€C7jiTiv
PASSIVE.
Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect : as in Middle.
Aor. l<rTd0T]v hiOriv 48(J0tiv ISci'xGtjv
Fut. <rTa0ifio-o|xat T60^<roiiai 8o0^<ro|iai. 8€ix0^o-ofiai
Fut. Pf. k<rTfi^o]uu,, shall stand. (868€tgofjiai, late)
§124.] SECOND PERF. AND PLUPERF. OF MI- FORM. 167
Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the Ml-form.
§ 124. 1- A few second perfects and pluperfects are in-
flected like the present and imperfect of verbs in fit. But they
are never used in the singular of the indicative, the forms
(ccrratt), {riOvaa), (yeyaa), &c. being imaginary. The partici-
ple is formed in <o?, too-a, 09, which is contracted with a preced-
ing a to cos, wo-a, os (irregular for ws) .
2. The principal verbs which have these forms in Attic
prose are /?atV(u,^o, 2 perf. infin. P^jBavai ; Ovrja-KOi, die, TcOvdvai ;
and ta-rrjixi, set, corrami, with stems in a. All these have ordi-
nary perfects, ySc/J-^Aca, riOvrjKa, ccrrrjKa, which are always used
in the singular of the indicative. The second perfect and plu-
perfect of Lo-Trjfxi, (o-Ttt-) are thus inflected : —
SECOND PERFECT.
Sing, -j 2.
(3.
Dual
Plur.
(-3.
cative.
Subjunctive.
Optative.
Imperative.
itrrta
ka-r-^S
tit
%<rra9i
icrrarci
ttrrarov
Jlo-TaTov
loTTJTOV
lo-TTJTOV
loTatrjTOv or -aiTOv
60-raiViTT]v or -aCTTjv
icrrarov
la-raruv
^o-Tttfjiev
'da-rare
IcrrdoT.
loTWfJLCV
€OTTJT6
kcrrwri
60-ra(Tin€v or -atfjicv
€o^a(T]T€ or -aiT€
k(rraCri<rav or -aiev
t<rrart
ktrraroxrav
or lorrdvTwv
Infinitive. lo-Tdvau Participle. (Horn. lo-racSs, loTawora, loTaos),
Att. contr. i(mas, lo-rwo-o, Iotos (Ionic also -€c*s,-€«o-a, -€os ; Ep. -r\<as).
See § 110, IV. {d), N. 3. For the inflection, see § 69, Note.
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
Dual. ?oTaTov, lorrdTrjv.
Plural. ?o-ra|Ji€v, itrrare, <ifrraa-w^.
Note. For an enumeration of these forms, see § 125, 4.
168 INFLECTION-. [§ 125.
Enumeration of tbe Ml-formg.
§ 125. The forms which have this inflection are as fol-
lows : —
1. Verbs in /xtwith the simple stem in the present. These
are the irregular ei/xt, be^ el/xL, go, <^r]ixi, say, KcZ/xac, lie, and
T7/x,at, sit, all of which are inflected in § 127 ; with y]}xi, say, ^rj^
ought, and the, deponents aya/xat, Swa^nat, cTrto-Ta/Aat, epajxai, Kpi-
/xa/xaL.
See these in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly
Homeric) forms under arjiii, deaixai, dUfxai, Si'^j;/Aat, eSw, tXrjiii, Ktxdi^co,
ovoixat, pvofiai and epvopai, arevpai, ^e/jco; also ddpvrjpi, Kipvrjpi, Kpf)~
fivrjpt, pdpvapai, Trepuripi, niXvapai, niTvrjpt, <TKibvr]pL and KidvTjpi.
2. Verbs in fit with reduplicated present stems (§ 121, 3).
These are la-T-qpiL, tlOyj/jll, and StSw/xt, inflected in § 123, Lrjfxty
inflected in § 127, StSry^t, rare for Seco, bind, KixprjixL (xp^') ' ^^^^^»
ovLvrjfiL (om-), benefit, 7rt/jt7rA.r;/x6 (TrAa-), Jill, TTL/MTrprjixL (Tr/aa-),
burn.
See also lurapai (late), and Hom. /3t/3aff, striding, present partici-
ple of rare fii^rjpi.
Note 1. Tlip.n\r)iiL and TrlpTrprjfjn insert p. before tt; but the p.
generally disappears after p (for v) in ep-mTrXrjpt and ep-Trin-prjpi; but
not after j/ itself, as in iv-enlpiikaaav.
Note 2. ^Ovlvrjpi is probably for dv-ovr)-piy by Attic reduplication
from stem 6va-.
3. Second Aorists of the p.i-Form. The only second aorists
formed from verbs in /xt are those of ly]p.i (§ 127), of la-T-qpLLy
rL6yjp,L, and StSw/xt (§ 123), of cr/JeVw/xt (§ 122, N. 6) ; with
i7rpi(xp.r}v (§ 123, 1), the irregular oyvrjpLrjv (rarely Amftiyv) , of
ovivrjpLL, and kirXripL-qv (poetic) of 7ri/x7rXr;/xt.
See the last two in the Catalogue, and also Homeric aorist mid-
dle forms of piyvvpi, opvvpi, and Trrjywpt.
The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs in a are the
following : —
Baiva (/Sa-), gc. e^rju, /3w, ^airjv, ^rjdi, jBrivai, /3a?.
UeTopai (jTTa-, Trre-),./??/; act. (poetic) eTrr;/!/, (ttto), late), mair^vj
(iTTrjdi, TTTrjvai, late), irrds- Mid. enrdprjv, nrdardai^ nrdpevos.
§ 125.] ENUMERATION OF THE MI- FORMS. 169
[TXoo)] (TXa-), endure : erkrjv, tXw, rXaiTjv, tKtjBi, TKrjuaL., rXas-
^ddvo) {(f)da-), anticipate : ei^Or^v, cf)6a, (pdairjv, (p6fjvaL, (pdds.
AidpacTKut (dpa-), run: edpdv, eS/adp, e8pd, &c., Spw, dpas, dpa, &C.,
hpalrjv, dpdvat, dpds. Only in composition. (See Note 1.)
Kreivoi {ktu-, ktcv-), kill: act. (poetic) cktuv, cktus, cktu, eKTdfxev
(3 pi. enrdu, subj. KTeoopep, inf. KTafxevai, Krapiev, Hom.), Kvds- Mid.
(Horn.) eKTaprjv. ivas killed, KTaadai, Krdpevos.
'AXicTKopat (dX-), be taken : idXcov or ijXcoi/, was taken, dXw, dXolrjVf
dXoivai, dXovs-. (See Note 2.)
Btdo) (^10-), live : e^iav, /StcS, ^icarjv (not -oirjv), ^lavai, ^tovs (Horn,
imper. /Skoto)).
TiyvaxTKO) (yvo-), know : eyvcov, yj/cU, yvoirjv, yva6t, yvavai, yvovi.
Avco (8u-), enter: edvp, entered, 8v(o, (opt. § 123, 1,) 8v6i, dvvai, Bvs
(§ 123).
^vco {(f>v-), produce : e^Oi/, was produced, am, (f)va), (fivvai, (jyvs (like
Zdvp).
Add to. these the single forms, yrjpdvai (yrjpds, Hom.) of yrjpdaKco,
grow old ; dno-aKkrjvai, of aTroo-fceXXco, dri/ up ; (rx^s, imperat. of ej^o),
have ; ttWl, imperat. of ttlvco, drink.
See also in the Catalogue Homeric /it-forms of the following
verbs : dnavpd(o, aco, ^dWca, ^t^pa)(TKCo, kKvco, ktI^o), Xvco, ovrdco, neXd^O),
ttXcoo), nveoi, nTrjcraci), aevio, (pOivco, ;^/a) ; and of these (with consonant
stems), aXXopai, dpapiaKco, ykvro {yev-), dexop,ai, Xeyco (Xe;^-) eXeyprjVf
TrdXXo), TTepdo).
Note 1. Second aorists in rjv or aprjv from stems in a are in-
flected like €(TTr}v or inpidfxrjv ; but edpdv substitutes a (after p) for 17,
and cKTav is irregular.
Note 2. The second aorists of rlBripL, Irjpi, and SiSco/it do not
lengthen e or o of the stem (§121, 1) in the indicative (dual and
plural) or imperative ((LTov,€tp.ev, &c. being augmented): in the
infinitive they have delvai, elvat, and 8ovvai (§ 126, 9), and in the
imperative ^eV, «, and dos (§ 121, 2, b). The other stems in e have
eo-^rjv {-r)s, -rj) and o-^rjvai (§ 122, N. 6), and dnoaKXrjvai. The other
stems in o are inflected like eyvcov, as follows : —
Indie. eyvQjv, eyvcos, eyv<o, eyvcorov, eyuwrrjv, eyucopev, tyvoyre, eyvcoaav.
Subj. yvw (like S©). Opt. yvoirjv (like doirjv). Imperat. yva>6i, yvo)T(o,
yvarov, yvarcou, yv<oT€, yvcoTwaav or yvovroov. Inf. yva>vat. Part.
yvovs (lik:e Sous). The optative ^larjv is irregular.
4. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the fn-Form. The
following verbs have these forms in Attic Greek, even in
prose : —
"la-TTjpi (ara-)', see § 123, 2 (paradigm).
Baivco (jSa-), go; 2 pf. /^e/Sao-t (Hom. jSc^daai), subj. /3e/3(5(7t, inf.
^c^dvai (Horn, fie^dfiep), part, ^e^coy (Horn, -aws); 2 plup. (Hom.
/Se/Sao-aj/).
170 INFLECTION. [§126.
Viyvofiai (ycu-, ya-), become, 2 pf. yeyova, am; (Horn. 2 pf. -yeyaao-t,
inf. yeydixev, yeyaois), Att. yeycos (poetic).
QvTjaKco (Bav; 6va-), die ; 2 pf . reOvarov, reBvafxeu, Tedvare, rcBvacri,
opt. reBvalrjv, imper. reBvaBi, TeBvaro), inf. nOvdvai (Horn, redvdfxevai
or -vdfiev), part, redi^eays (Horn. reOurjas), 2 plup. creOvao-av.
AetSo) (hi-), Epic in pres., fear, Attic 2 pf. fieSia (Horn. belSia),
2 plup. ebebidv, both regular in indie, also 2 pf. dedifxev, SeSire, 2 plup.
cSeStaai/; subj. SeSt'j/, SeSiwo-i, opt. debielr], imper. debXBi, inf. SeSteVai,
part. SeSiwy. (Horn. 2 pf. deldifxev, imper. beidtOi, deidire, inf. SetSt'/icj/,
part. SfiSiws, plup. tSft'St/xei/, edeidia-av.)
[EiKoj] (t<-, eiK-), 2 pf. eotica, .s'eew ; also 2 pf. eoiyfxev, et^aa-i (for
ioiKdat), part. etKo)? (Horn. 2 pf. etfcroi/, 2 plup. €iktt)v), used with the
regular forms of eoixa, eoJiceii/ (see Catalogue).
OtSa (i8-), know; see § 127 (paradigm).
See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs
in the Catalogue: dvciyco, ^i^pwcrKOJ, eyeipo), ep^^ofxaif {Ka<j)-), Kpd^ay
fiaioiiai, 7rao-;^a>, Tret^w, 7ri7JTa>,[TXaa)], (jivoi.
5. Verbs in w/jli, with w (after a vowel, wv) added to the
verb stem in the present. These are all inflected like SecKWfXL
(§ 123)., and, with the exception of o-^evwfjLi, quench (§ 122,
N. 6) , have no /xt-forms except in the present and imperfect.
The following belong to this class : —
(Stems in a), Kcpd-wvfii, Kpe/xd-vvvfit, neTa-vvviii, cTK^hd-vvvfii ; (stems
in e), e-vvvfJLi, Kope-puvfxi, a-^e-vvvyn, (TTope-vuvp.L] (stems in a>), ^o>-vpvfii,
pat-vvvjXL, (TTpod-vvvpLi, ; (consonant stems), ay-vvp-i, ap-wpai, deiK-PVfii
(§ 123), elpy-vvfiL, ^cvy-vvfii dno-KTlv-vvp.L (v. KTeivco), p.iy-vvfii, o'ly-WfMi,
oX-\vp.L (§ 108, V. 4, N. 2), 6fi-vvfii, ofJLopy-vvfii; op-vvp.i, nr}y-vvp.L (Tray-),
Trrdp-vvixai, prjy-vvfiL (pay-), arop-vvp.!, (f)pdy-vvpi. See these in the
Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under
aivvpai, axwpai, ydvvpai, halvvpn, Kalvvp-ai^ Kiwfiai, opky-vvyn, rdvvp^i {v,
Tf iVa>), Tivvpai (y. nVco).
Dialectic Forms of Verbs In MI.
§ 126. 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some
doubtful) in which verbs in rjpi (with stems in e) and api have the
inflection of verbs in ea and oca ; as riBel, SiSotr, 81801. So in com-
pounds of iTjpi, as dvUis (or dviels), pcBiei (or -lel) in pres. , and Trpoteiv,
irpoteis, dplei, in impf . Hom. has imperat. KaO-ia-ra (Attic -rj). Herod,
has terra (for iott^o-i), vnep-criBea and npo-fTidee in impf., and Trpocr-
BeoiTo (lor -BfiTo), &c. in opt. For i8l8ovp, &c. and hlBfis, iriBcL (also
Attic), see § 122, 2, N. 1.
2. In the Aeolic dialect most verbs in am, ew, and ow take the
form in p.i ; as (fylXrjpL (with <j)ik€i(rBa, <^tXet), in Sappho, for (^tXcw,
&C. ; opT]p,i, KoKripL, aiPijpt.
§126.] DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI. 171
3. A few verbs in Horn, and Hdt. drop a- in o-at and <to of the
second person after a vowel; as imperat. irapiarao (for -aa-o) and
impf . ifiapvao (Horn.) ; e^ewla-Teai (for -aaai) with change of a to e
(Hdt.). So 6eo, imperat. for Occro (Att. Bov), and evdeo (Horn.).
4. The Doric has n, vri for ai, vcri. Homer sometimes has (rda
for o- in 2 pers. sing. , as didcoada (didoKrOa or didoiarOa), TidrjaOa ; v for
a-av (with preceding vowel short) in 3 pers. plur., as earav (for eo-rr}-
aav), lev (for letrai/), nportdev (for TrpoeTiBeaav)'., see § 119, 9. He some-
times has Bi in the pres. imperat. act., as didaBi, opvvBi (§ 121, 2, b).
5. Herod, sometimes has arat, aro for vrai, vto m the present and
imperfect of verbs in fii, with a preceding a changed to e ; as irpori-
Bearai (for -eirrai), ibvvearo (for -avro). For the iterative endings (tkov,
aKoixrjv, see § 119, 10; these are added directly to the stem of verbs
in /it, as la-Ta-a-KOP, do-aKov, ^(opvv-o-Kero, c-ctkov {elfiij be).
6. Some verbs with consonant stems have a 2 aor. mid. of the fit-
form in Homer ; as aX-ro, ak-fxevo^, from aXXonat, leap ; 2)p-To, with
imperat. opaeof opatv, opao, from Bpwpi, rouse. So 7rr}ywp,i {(eirqicro).
See § 125, 3.
7. (a) Herodotus sometimes leaves ea nncontracted in the sub-
junctive of verbs in rjp.i ; as Becopev (Att. Bapcv), diaBecovrai {-Bavrat),
air-uaxTi (Att. d<f)-iaai, from d(f)-ir]pi). He forms the subj. with ea
in the plural also from stems in a; as aTro-are-coai (-aTaai), iincrrk-
fovrai (for emara-ovrai, Att. iiriaTOivrai). Homer sometimes has
these forms with f o> ; as Becofiev, arkutpev.
(h) Generally, when the 2 aor. subj. act. is uncontracted in
Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened, e (or a) to « or
17, o to to, while the connecting vowels i] and a> are shortened to e and
o in the dual and plural, except before ai (for vai). Thus we find
in Homer: —
(Stems in a.) OcC^is, O^TJS
Pclfo (Attic Pw for Pa-<o) OeCt), O^t), dv-^tl
"^tl. P^TIj P^T1> 4>6^TI (Stems in o.)
o-rf|€TOV YV<Go>
<rT-^ojj.€V, <rT€{ojj,€V, <rTl«f«v 7v«t]S
(TT'^oxri, o-TcCtto-i, <{>9€0)cri YVwt], Sco^, Sca-qctiv
^(Gofjiev, 8(oo|i.ev
(Stems in €.) -yvwoxri, Swoxri
e€l«, 4<j>-€f« See also § 119, 12 (c).
(c) A few cases of the middle inflected as in (h) occur in Homer ;
as ^\r)-€Tai (v. /SaXXo)), aX-erai (^aXXopai), dno-Beiopai, KaTa-Beiofxai] SO
Kara-B^ai (Hesiod) for KaraBf-rjai (Att. KaraBfj).
172
INFLECTION.
[§ 127.
8. For Homeric optatives of daiwfxt, dvw, Xvoj, and (fiSlvco, — diavvro,
dvT}, and dvfxev, XeXCro or XeXvvro, (f)6ifirjp (for (f)6i-ifjLr)v), — see those
verbs in the Catalogue, and § 118, 1, Note.
9. Homer has fievm or fiev (the latter only after a short vowel)
for vai in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is rarely-
lengthened in the present; as nOe-fievai, rarely TiOrj-fievai. In the
2 aor. act. the vowel is regularly long (§ 121, 1), as aTrj-fxevm, yva>-
fxevai'^ but rlBrj^ii and dldcofii (§ 125, 3, N. 2) have Bk-^cvai and bo-
fxepai. For TTj-iievaL in the aor. pass, infin. see § 119, 14. In the
perfect of the /ni-form (§ 125, 4), we have ea-rorfievai, eara-fxevf
TfOvaixevai, redvafiev.
10. Homer rarely has rjfxevos for (fievos in the participle. For
perf. part, in as (cas, J?a)y)» see § 110, IV. (c?), N. 3.
Irregular Verbs of the MI-Form.
§ 127, The verbs cI/jli, be, dfxi, go, X-qjxi, send, ^rj/xi, say^
rjfiat, sit, KCLfiaL, lie, and the second perfect 6l8a, know, are
thus inflected.
I. El/At (stem CO--, Latin esse), he.
PRESENT.
Indicative.
Subjunolive.
Optative.
Imperativt.
Sing. <2.
(3.
k<rri
&
*«1
ta-Qi
Dual 1^3:
kfrriv
^TOV
IJTOV
€\Jt1Tov, ctrov
?<rTOv
2<rT«v
Plur. <2.
(3.
kfrri
clo-C
<3o-t
€\;T]<rav, ctcv
Icrroxrav,
€<rT«v, SvTwv
Infinitive, cTmu
Partic. wvy ova-a, ov,
gen. 6vT0<s, ova-T}^, &C.
VERBS
IN
MI.
IMPERFECT.
FUTURE INDIC.
(1. livor^
j2. -fjo-ea
(3. ^v "
lo-o|uii
^O-Tttt
■ 2. ^o-Tov or ■fiTov
3. •J^o-TTiv or iJTiiv
¥(re<rOov
?o-€(r0ov
0. ¥«v
2. -JiTc or ^<rT€
3. ■?i<rav
|lf
§127.] VERBS IN MI. 173
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Fut. Opt. i(Toifir]Vj ecroLo, e<TOLTo, &c. regular.
Fut. Infin. ' t(T€6-6ai. Fut. Partic, ia-ofievo^.
Verb. Adj. la-riov {(Tvv-€(TTiov) .
An imperfect middle rjfiriv, ivas, rarely occurs.
Note 1. In compounds of elfii (as in those of eJfii) the partici-
ple keeps the accent of the simple form ; as napcov, Trapovcra, irapov,
(Tvvovresy avvovai, avvovTcov. So in the subjunctive, where S) is con-
tracted from Ionic eco ; as Trapw, napfjs, &c. So Trapecrrai (for Trape'^
criTct) .
Note 2. Dialects. Pres. Indie. Aeolic ep.p.1, the most primi-
tive form, nearest to itr-ixi (see foot-note on p. 143). Ionic efff,
Horn. i(T(ri (for el) ; Ionic ei^icV (for icrp.iv) *, Ionic cao-t, Doric ivrl (for
€to-t).
Imperf. Hom. rja, ea, eoi/ (in 1 pers. sing.) ; triaOa (2 pers.) ; ^er,
€r)v, rjT]v (3 pers.) ; earau (for ^crai'). Hdt. ea, cay, eare. Later ^s for
^ada. Ionic (iterative) eo-fcoi/.
Future. Hom. ea-aofiaif &c., with fffo-eiTat; Dor. eVcrj, etrffoviTai ;
Hom. eorrat.
5M&y. Ionic eo), &c., coxrt; Hom. also eto).
Op^ Ionic €ois, €01.
Imper. Hom. lo-o-o (the regular form, § 116, 1).
Infin. Hom. epfievaij cfxevai, c/xev; Dor. ^juev or elfxev] Lyric e/i-
Partic. Ionic cwj', coOo-a, eoV.
174
INFLECTION.
[§ 127.
II. Elfio (stem t-, Latin i-re^, go.
Sinj
Dual
Plur,
PRESENT.
Indicative.
(1. 6l^t
( 3. €t<ri
Subjunctive.
lot
«I1
Optative.
ioCr]v {ioLfii]
tois
tot
>
Cto)
, (2. I'tov
(3. 1:tov
VtlTOV
Kt^tov
toiTOV
loCrqv
trov
Htwv
(1. 1>€V
■. < 2. i:t€
(3. twn
t«|16V
tTlT€
two-t
i!oi|i.ev
toiTC
toiev
tT€
iraxTttv or Wvtwv
Infinitive. tcVat.
Panic.
t(ov, ioi}(ra, iw,
gen.
tOl/TOS, lOUOT/S, &C,
IMPERFECT.
SiTtj^.
DuaZ.
PiumZ.
1. f|€iv or f|a
2. xfeis or Ti€t<r0tt iqcitov
3. xi^'' ^^ "Q^^^ Xi^Crr\v
or ^Tov
or ti'"iv
XI«iF^«v or fin€v
XJ€iT€ or igre
■n'co-av or •^o-av
Fcr&. 4<//'. tTOff, XtIov, iTrjreov.
Future eta-oiiai, and aorist da-dfii]v (or eeia-dfirjv) are Homeric.
Note 1. In compounds the participle has the accent of the simple
form; SiS. napiav, Trapiovaa, irapiovros, irapioixri. (See I. Note 1.)
Note 2. The present cTpn generally has a future sense, shall go^
taking the place of a future of epxofiai, whose future eXevaofiai is not
often used in Attic prose.
Note 3. Dialects. Pres. Ind. Hom. tlaBa for e?. Imperf.
Horn, fj'ia, Tj'iov (in 1 pers. sing.); rfU, §e, U (in 3 pers.); Xttjp (in
dual); ,70/xej/, ^'iov, TJ'ia-av Qa-av), taav (in plural). Hdt. ^'ia, ^'icj
rj'iaav.
Suhj. Hom. 'ijia-Bay Xtjcti. Opt. Hom. Ulri (fpr XoC). Irifin. Hom.
i-fiepai, or t-p.€u (for l-iuai)^ rarely Xfip-evcu.
§127.] VERBS IN MI. \\ ■'
III. "Ir)^i (stem 6-), sendy^'^
(Fut. -^o-o), Aor. YjKa^ Perf. cTica, Perf. Pass.
Aor. Pass. eWyjv).
ACTIVE.
Present.
Indie. r>7jut, inflected like TiOrjiii ; but 3 pers. plur. laa-i.
Subj. tw, t^s, ly, &C. Opt. Ultjv, ultjsj Uirj, &c. (See
N. 1.)
Imper. tct, tero), &c. i^i/zTt. teVat. Partic. Uls,
Imperfect.
iciv, r«9, t€t ; terov, tCTiyv ; te/xev, tere, teo-av. Also fiyv (in
r](f>L7]v, § 105, 1, N. 3), and ltj (Horn.). See d<l>Lrffu.
Future.
^(TO), i^crcts, "^(ra, &c., regular.
jPi>5f Aorist. "^;
ijica, ^Acas, tJkc, &c., Only in indicative.
Perfect (in compos.),
c&ca, euca9, cIkc, &C.
Second Aorist (generally in compos.).
Tndic. No singular : Dual, etroi/, emyv : Plur. et/xcv, cTtc,
€x(Tav.
Suhj. w, ^5, fi ; Tyrov, T^rov ; w/xo', ,7x6, axrt.
Op^. en^v, etryg, cny ; ctTyrov, ilrjrrjv ; etrjixev Or cTfiey^ etrjre OF
€tr€, ctrjcrav Or ctev.
Imper. cs, Itco ; ctov, Itcdi/ ; ere, crwcrav or Ii'twi'.
J^«. ctrnt. Partic. cts, ctcra, ei/.
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE.
Present.
Indie. Ufxai. Subj. t(o/x,at. Opt. Uifirjv. Imper, tetro or tov.
Injln. LcaduL. Partic. Uiiivo<i. (All regular like ri^c/xat, &c.)
176 INFLECTION. [§127.
Imperfect,
lifirjv, inflected regularl}^ like iTiOifirjv.
Fut. Middle (in compos.). First Aorist Middle (in compos.)
^orofiaL, &c. rjKaixrjv (only in Indie),
Perfect and Pluperfect (in compos.).
Perf, Ind. clfxai. Imperat. ela-Oo}. Inf. ilcrOai. Partic. elfie-
yos.
Plup, €Lfxr)v<) cto-o, etro, &C.
Second Aorist Middle (generally in compos.).
Ind. eip-qv^ eLO-Qj etro ; elarOov, etcrOrjv ', ci/xe^a, clcrOe, ctvTO.
Subj. w/x,at, ^, -^Tttt ; ycrOov : w/x,€^a, -^cr^e, wvrat.
Opt. eLfxrjv,, elo^ etro ; ilaOov-, ^Icrdrjv ; et/xc^a, clcr^e, ^vto,
(See N. 1.)
Imper, ov, eo-^w ; ecr$ov, ecr^wv ; ecrOe, eaOoxrav or eaOwv.
Injin. la-Qai. Partic. c/xevos.
Aorist Passive (in compos.).
Ind. eWrjv (augmented). Subj. iOia. Part. iOets.
Future Passive (in compos.). Verb. Adj.
iO-QO-op.ai, &C. €T09, creos.
Note 1. The optatives dcjiLoire and dcfyloicv, for dc^ulr^Te and d(/)t-
eiei/, and rrpooiTo, Trpooiade, and irpooivTo (also accented TrpooiTo, &c.),
for TTpoelTo, TTpnelo-Oej and npoelvTo, sometimes occur. For similar
forms of TiOrjfjii, see § 122, N. 1.
I^OTE 2. Dialects. Hom. aor. trjKa for rjKa; efxev for eli/ai;
eaav, €p.T]v, euro, &c., by omission of augment, for ela-av, etfirjv, elvrOf
&c., in indicative. In dvlrjixi, Hom. fut. dpecrto.
IV. ^rjfjbi (stem (j)d''), %ay.
Present.
Indie. <j>r)ixL, ^17?, <f>7](TL', ^arov, fparovi <f>afi€v, ^are, ^axrC.
Subj. (fiC), 4*V^^ 4'Vf ^^' Opt. (jiaiTjv, cf>aLrj^^ (jjalrj, &C.
Imper. cf>d9i or cjiaOi, cf>dT(o ; <f>dTov<, <^aTcoi/, &c.
InJin. (fidvuL. Partic. (not Attic) ^as, (f>d(Ta^ <jidv ; gen.
<^ai/T09, <^acr77s, &C. (§ 25, 3, N. 2).
§127.) VERBS IN MI. 177
Imperfect.
€<f>a(Tav,
Future. A orist.
<f>rj(r(i)f cfy-qcreLVj <f>Yj(T(iiV. €^r;o-a, (j>T^<ro)j t^rJaat/At, <firj(Tai^ i^iqcrwi.
Verbal Adj. (^aro?, ^areog.
A perfect passive imperative necpaa-Bco occurs, with participle
7rf(j)aafievos.
Note 1. Dialects. Pres. Ind. Doric <^a/xi, ^ari, (fyavri] Horn.
^rjaOa for ^^/V. /^?/. poet, ^dfiev. Impf. Horn. <^^i/, ^^y or (f)^crda<,
d>^ (Doric €0d and <^a), e^af and cf>dv (for e(paaau and (pda-av). Aor.
Doric ^aore for €(fir](T€.
iN'oTE 2. Homer has some middle forms of ^j;/it; pres. imperat.
(f)do, (pdaBco, (f>d(r6€'^ in fin. (f)dcr6ai', pariic. (})dfi€vos \ imperfect €(f}dfiT]v
or 0a/iiyj/, e(J3aTo or (pdro, ecpaiTo and (jydvTO. Doric fut. (jidcrofiai.
These all have an active sense.
V. ^Hfiac (stem rja-")^ sit.
(Chiefly poetic in simple form : in Attic prose KdO-rjixat is
generally used.)
Present {with form of Perfect).
Ind. riixai, vjcrai, rja-raL ; rj(r6ov ; yjfieOaj ^aOcf ^vrai, Imperat.
^<TOf ^(T^o), &C. Inf, ya-6at. Partic. yfxeyos.
Impel feet (luithform of Pluperfect),
^[xrp/, ^<ro, ^(TTo ; ■^aOoVf rjcrOrjv ; ^p€Oa, ^aOc, ^VTO.
KdOrjfjiaL is thus inflected : —
Present.
Ind. KoiOrjfiaLy KaOrjarai, KaO-qrat (not KaO-rforai) ; KaOrjo-Oov ;
KaOrjfxcOa, KaOrja-Oe^ KaOyjVTai. Suhj. KaOwfiai, KuOrj, KaO^raiy &C.
Opt. KaOoLixrjv, Ka^oto, KaOolro, &c. Imperat. KaOrjo-o (in com-
edy, KaOov), KaO-qa-Oo), &C. Inf. KadrjadaL. Partic. KoOrjfjievo^.
12
173
INFLECTION.
[§ 127.
Imperfect.
iKaBrjixfiVy iKaOrja-o, cKct^T/To, &C., also KaOi^fxrjv, KaOrja-o, KaOrja-TO
and KaOrJTOj &c.
Note. Dialects. Homer has earai and etarai (for rjvrai), taro
and flaro (for ^i/to). Hdt. has Karrjaai, Kar^aro, Karearai, KoreaTOt
and iKaTiUTO.
VI. Kelfiac (stem /cet-, /ce-), Zze.
Present {with form of Perfect). Indie, icet/xat, Kcto-at, Ketrai :
Kcto-^ov ; Ket/xe^a, Kela-Qe, /cetvrat. 5?*^*. awe? Ojt?^ These forms
occur : KerjTaiy hia-Keqa-O^^ KiOiTO, Trpocr-Kcoivro. Imper. Kilcro,
Kctcr^o), &C. Infin. kChjBox. Partic. Ket/xevog.
Imperf. eKet/tiyv, iKciao, eKetro ; (.KtKrOov, iKeiaOrjv ; iKecfieOa,
€K€L(TOe, €K€LVTO.
Future. KCLo-ofxaL, regular.
Note. Dialects. Homer has kearai, Keiarai, and Kiovrah for
<ceTi/Tai; Kf<TK€To ioY €K€LTo] KtaTo and Keiaro for €K€Lvto; subj. K^rat.
Hdt. has KifToi, KeeaOai, and cKeero, for kcItui, &C.J and always Kmrai
and €K€aTo for /cfTzo-ai and €kuvto.
VII. OZSa (stem tS-)' ^^^«^-
(OtSa is a second perfect of the stem i8- : see cTSov in Cata-
logue and § 125, 4).
SECOND PERFECT.
. 5'
ing. ■j2.
(3.
aur. -^2.
(3.
Indicative.
otSa
olorOa
oISc
tjTTOV
toTOV
t<r(j,€V
toT€
l'<ra<rt
Infinitive. ctSci/at.
Subjunctive.
€l8(3
clSfjs
€18b
&c.
regular.
Optative.
cIScItiv
C18€IT)S
&c.
regular
Imperative.
IVGi
X,<rT<a
tcTTOV
t<rT€
toTftxrav
Participle. ci8w9, €i8ma, 61809,
gen. €iS6T0<;, ciSua? (§ 68).
§ 127.] VERBS IN MI. 179
SECOND PLUPERFECT.
Sing. Dtutl. Plural
1. ^Sciv or igST] , -gSeiiicv or '^o-^.ev
2. 'gSewrOa or ^'8i](r6a -qScitov or fjorrov 'Q'8€tT€ or ^cnrc
'qScls or 'q'Stjs
3. ifl86i(v) or ^8tj tJScCttjv or Ta<rTTiv igSctrav or ^<rav
Future, ctcro/tai, &c., regular. Verbal Adj. urriov.
N"oTE. The Ionic occasionally has the regular forms oi8as, o18a-
fjL€u, otdaari ; and very often idfieu for ta-fiev. Ionic fut. eldfja-o) (rare
in Attic).
Ionic jjBea, fjdee, j/Stare, Horn, rjeidrff, Tjei^i], Xaav, in pluperfect.
The Attic poets have^^Se/xei/ and ^bire (like ^beaav).
Horn. €i5o/Aei/, &c. for elba>yL€v in subj. ; Xb^ievai and Ibyav in infin. ;
Ibvla for elhvla in the participle.
Aeolic irro) for iotco in imperative.
Doric i<ravTi for lo-acri: see ta-afju.
PAET III
FORMATION OF WORDS.
§ 128. 1. {Simple and Compound Words.) A simple word
is formed from a single stem; as Xo'yos (stem Acy-), speech,
ypdcfioi (ypac^-), write. A compound word is formed by com-
bining two or more stems ; as Xoyo-ypd(j>os (Aoyo-, ypa^-),
writer of speeches.
2. (Verbals and Denominatives.) (a) When a noun or
adjective is formed directly from a root (§ 32, Note), or from
a stem which appears as the stem of a verb, it is called a ver-
bal or primitive ; as apxq (stem apx^--) t beginning^ formed from
"PX"' stem of ap')(iji ; ypa(f>€v<s (ypa<f>€v-)^ Writer, ypacfiiq (ypa^iS-),
Style (for writing), ypafifirj (ypa/x/xa- for ypacfi-fxa), line, (3, N.
2), ypa/xjua (ypa/t/xar-) , written document, ypacf}iK6<s (ypa^i/co-),
able to write, all from ypa^-, stem of ypa^w, write; 7roLr}'Tri<s^
poet (maker), Troi-q-cn^, TO^^Vi TroC-q-iia^ poem, Trotiy-xiKos, able to
make., from ttou-, stem of iroUia, make: so Sik-/; (St/ca-), justice,
from the root Sik-, KaKos, ia<f, from xaK-. See § 128, 3.
(S) When a noun, adjective, or verb is formed from the
stem of a noun or adjective, it is called a denominative or
derivative; as PacriXua, kingdom, from pa(TLke(v)- (§ 53, 3,
N. 1) ; dp^^ato?, ancient, from apxa- (stem of ap;^^*;) ; 8t/cato-
ctuvt;. Justice, from StKato- ; Tifid-m, honor, from rt/xa-, stem of
the noun ti/x-t}.
§ 128.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 181
Note. The name verbo2 is applied to the primitive words in (a) be-
cause generally their root or stem actually occurs as a verb stem. This,
however, does not show that the noun (or adjective) is derived from the
verb, but merely that both have the same root or stem.i The name applies
even to nouns or adjectives derived from a verb stem which is itself derived
from a noun stem (2, b); as avXrjrrjs, Jiute-player, from avXe-, the stem of
tti)\f'«, play the flute; the latter, however, is formed from the stem of
jii)X6-s, flute (§ 130, N. 2).
3. {Svffixes.) Roots or stems are developed into new stems
by the addition of syllables (not themselves stems) called
iuffixes. Thus in § 128, 2, final a- in ap^a-? ev in ypa^ev-, i8-
in ypa^tS-, /xa- in ypafjcfxa-, fiar- In ypafxjjLaT-, lko- in ypa^iKO-,
&c. are suffixes.
Note 1. Rarely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical with the
verb stem ; as in 0i5Xa^, a guards from stem <pv\aK-, seen also in (pvKdaaw,
J guard {%10S, IV.).
Note 2. The iinal consonant of a stem is subject to the same euphonic
changes before a suffix as before an ending (§ 16); as in ypdfi-fw, for ypatp-
tm (§ 16, 3), X^^is for Xey-CLS (§ 16, 2), St/caa-r^s for 5iKa5-Trjs (§16, 1).
Note 3. A final vowel of the stem may be contracted with a vowel of
the suffix; as in dpxcuos, ancient, from dpxa- and lo-s (§ 129, 12). But
such a vowel is sometimes dropped, as in ovpdv-ios, heavenly, from oipavo-
and 10- s, /SacrtX-iKos, kingly, from §acrCKe{v)- and iko-s. The vowel is some-
times changed : especially from o to e in denominative verbs (§ 130, N. 2),
as in OLKi-o), dwell {oIko-s, house), — cf. oiKi-rrts, house-servant, and oIkcTos
{oIk€-ios, § 129, 12), domestic; — sometimes from a to &>, as in o-r/oaTici-TT/s,
soldier (jcrrpaTia'), St/ceXtt6-T?;s, Sicilian (St/ceXia-).
Note 4. Many vowel stems (especially verb stems) lengthen their final
vowel before a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (§ 109, 1); as Troirj-fw,,
volri-cris, ttolti-tikI/S, iroi-q-Tr}^, from Trote-. Many add c before /* and r of a
suffix, as in the perfect and aorist passive (§ 109, 2); as KeXev-a-T^s, com-
mander, KiXev-a-fxa, command, from KcXev- (/ceXeiJw), /ce/cAeu-(r-/xat.
Note 5. In many verbal nouns and adjectives, especially those in os
and 7], the interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified,
as it is in the second perfect (§ 109, 3). A change of e to o is especially
common. Thus X-ndr], forgetfulness, from Xa^- (cf. X^Xrjda); ydvos, offspring,
from ycv- (cf. y^ova); Xoiirds, remaining, from XtTr- (cf. X^Xonra); (rropyq,
affection, from (rrepy- (cf. ^aropya); iro/xT-n, sending, from ttc/xtt- (cf. iri-
irofxtpa, § 109, 3, N. 2); rpdiros, turn, from rpeir-; <pX6^, flame, gen. 0Xo7-
6$, from <pXey: So also in adverbs; see avX-X-nP-drjv, § 129, 18, {b).
1 The root ypa<f>- contains only the general idea write, not as yet devel-
oped into a noun, adjective, or verb. By adding a it becomes ypa<pa-, the
stem of the noun ypa<f>-n, a writing, which stem is modified by case-endings
to ypa(pa-i, 7/3a<^d-s, &c. (§ 45, 2J Note). By adding o or e (the so-called
connecting vowel, § 112, 4) it is developed into 7pa0o(c)-, the full form of
the present stem of the verb ypd<t>w, write, which is modified by pei-sonal
endings to ypd<f>o-fi€v, we write, ypd^c-re, you wrUe, &c.
182 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 129.
FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
I. —NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AND ADVERBS.
§ 129, The chief suffixes by which the steins of nouns,
adjectives, and adverbs are formed are as follows : —
NOUNS.
1. The simplest and most common suffixes are o- (nom. o? or ov)
and a- (nom. a or jy). Nouns thus formed have a great variety of
meanings; as \6yo-s (Xoy-o-), speech, from Xey- (stem of Xeyo), § 128,
3, N". 5); yLax-q (n-ax-a-), battle, from ^ax- (stem of fidxofiai, Jight) '^
rpoTTosj turn, from rpen- (stem of rpeno), turn)', aroXos, expedition,
aToXrf, equipment, from oreX- (stem of o-tcXXcd, send).
. 2. (Agent.) The following suffixes denote the agent in verbals,
-^ and the person concerned with anything in denominatives: —
(a) eu- (nom. evs) '• ypa(f)-€v-s, writer, from ypacji- (-ypa^w); yov-ev-Sf
parent, from yev-; imr-ev-s, horseman, from Iniro- (iTTTroy) ; nopBfi-ev-Sf
ferryman (7ropBfi6s,^erryJ^ See § 128, 3, Notes 3 and 5.
Note. A few nouns in evs have feminines in eia (with recessive accent,
§ 25, 1, N.); as ^aalXeia, queen (cf. 3, N. 2).
(h) Tt\p- (nom. TTjp) : a-arfjp, saviour, from (t<o- (aaxo, o-a>^a>, save).
Top- (nom. Tcop) : prjTcop, orator, from pe- (epea, epm, shall say) .
[ Ttt- (nom. TTjs): Troi^r^y, poet (maker), from note- (ttoUo))', opxr)-
\ a-Trjs, dancer, from opx^- (6px€op,ai, dance) ; Ittttottis, horseman, from
\ imro- (iTTiros, horse).
To these correspond the following feminine forms: —
T€ipa- (nom. rcipa) : trwreipa, fem. of a-ooTrjp.
rpia- (nom. rpta) : Troirjrpia, poetess ; opxTjarpia, dancing-girl.
TpiS- (nom. rpli) : opxrjaTpis, dancing-girl, gen. -Ibos;.
Ti8- (nom. Tis): 7rpo(f)^Tis, prophetess ; olKeris, female servant.
Note. Verbals in rrip and rpts are oxytone : those in riop, rpia, and
reipa have recessive accent (§ 25, 1, N.).
3. (Action). These suffixes denote action (in verbals only) : —
X Ti- (nom. ris, fem.): ma-Tis, belief from mB- (ndOco, believe).
cri- (nom. ais, fem.) : Xv-ais, loosing, from Xu- (Xvco).
cria- (nom. o-td, f em ) ; doKipa-aia, testing, (doKipd^o), test).
|jio- (nom. p6s, masc ): a7ra(r-fi6s, spasm {(nrd-co, draw, § 128, 3, N. 4).
§129.] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. . 183
Note 1. The suffix fia- (nom. iitj, fern.) has the same force as simple
o- (§ 129, 1); as yvcb/n], knowledge (yvo-), rdXfir], daring (roX/ta-), 68/1%
odor {6i^(a, 68-).
Note 2. From stems in ev (eF) of verbs in euw come nouns in tia de-
noting action; as ^acriXeia, kingly power, kingdom, TratSeca, edttcation (cf.
2, a, Note).
4. (Result.^ These suffixes denote the result of an action (in
verbals only) : —
jtar- (nom. fia, neut.) : irpay-fjia, thing, act, from irpdy- (irpdaa-oi,
do)] p^ixa, saying Qhing said), from pe- (hit. e/>a>)5 Tp.fj-fia, section,
gen. TfxrjfjLaTos, from r/xe-, re/x- (rep-vo), cut).
€o-- (nom. OS, neut.) : \dxos (Xaxear-), lot, from Xa^- (Xayxdua, gain
by lot); Was (e^eo-), custom, from ed- (eloiOa, am accustomed) ; yevos
(yepea-), race, from yev- (yeyova, § 128, 3, N. 5).
^ ^ Note. Denominatives in os (stem in c<r-), denote quality (see 7).
5. {Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by
Tpo- (nom. Tpov, Latin trum) : apo-rpov, plough, aratrum, from dpo-
(ap6a>, plough) ; Xv-rpov, ransom, from Xu- (Xvw) ; XoC-rpo»', bath, from
Xou- (Xova>, wash).
Note. The feminine in rpd sometimes denotes an instrument, as x^'f'f^t
earthen pot, from xu- {x^oj, pour); ^iz-tr-rpa, scraper, from ^u- (?i>«, scrape) ;
sometimes other relations, e.g. ^tece, as iraXa^<r-Tpa, place for wrestling,
from iraXat- (jraXaLu), wrestle, § 109, 2).
6. {Place.) This is denoted TDy these sufllxes: —
Tt]pio- (nom. Trjpiov, only verbals) : 8iKa(r-Tf]piov, court-house, from
SiKoS- (biKci^oi, Judge).
€10- (nom. €101/, only denom.) : Kovpeiov, barber^s shop, from kov-
pev-s, barber: soXoy-eiov (\6yos), speaking-place, Mova-tiou (Movaa),
haunt of the Muses.
cov- (nom. a>i/, masc, only denom.) : dvbpaiv,men''s apartment, from
dvrip, gen. dvbp-6s, man ; dpircXav, vineyard, from apnekos, vine.
7. (Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjective
stems by these suffixes : —
TTiT- (nom. rrjs, fern.): veo-rrjs (veorrjr-), youth, from veo-s^ young;
1(t6-tt)s (la-oTTjT-), equality, from lo-o-s, equal (cf. Latin Veritas, gen.
veri-tdtis, virtus, gen. vir-tutis).
<rvva- (nom. avprj, fem.): diKaio-a-vvr], justice, from bUato-s, Just ;
, aa>(f)pn-(rvvr}, continence, from aaxfipaiv (o-axppov-) , continent.
V la- (nom. ta, fem.): ao^-la, wvidom (ao(f)6s), KaKia, vice (kukos),
dXrjBeia, truth, from aXrjOea- (akrjdrjs, true). See Note.
e<r- (nom. os, neut. 3 decl.): rdx-os, speed (raxvs, swift), ^dp-oSf
weight (^apvs, heavy). See § 128, 3, N. 3; § 129, -L, Note.
1«4 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§129.
Note. Adjective steins in etr- drop <r (§ 16,-4, N.), and those m oo
drop before the suflBjc ia ; as in dXiJ^eta (above), and eC^j/ota, good-will, from
8. (^Diminutives). These are formed from noun stems by the fol-
lowing suffixes : —
10- (nom. loi/, neut.) : rratS-toi/, little child, from ttoiS- (Trais, child) \
KTjir-iou, little garden (k^ttos). Sometimes also i8io-, apio-, v8pio-, vXXio-
(all with nom. in lov) ; olK-idiov, little house (otKoy) ; Trmb-apiov, little
child ; fieX-vdpiovy little song (/nc'Xos) ; ijr-vXKiov, little verse, versicle,
Latin versiculus (eTros). Here final co- of the stem is dropped.
lo-Ko- (nom. lo-fcos, masc.) and lo-Ka- (nom. ia-Krj, fem.): TraidiaKos,
young boy, TraidiarKr), young girl ; so veavio-Kos, veaviaKij.
Note. Diminutives sometimes express endearmeyit, and sometimes con-
tempt ; as iraTpLdiou, papa (iraTrjp, father), XwKpaTidiov, EvpiiridLOP.
9. (Patronymics.) These denote descent from a parent or ances-
tor (generally a father), and are formed from proper names by the
following suffixes : —
8a- (nom. drjs, masc. parox.) and 8- (nom. s for bs, fem. oxy-
tone) ; after a consonant i8a- and i8- (nom. tdrjs and is).
(a) Stems of the first declension (in a) add da- and d- directly ;
as Bop€d-8i]9, son of Boreas, and Boped-s, gen. Boped-dos, daughter of
Boreas, from Bopeas, Boreas.
(b) Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add tSa-
and tS-; as Upiap,-i8rjs, son of Priam, Upiafx-is, gen. npia/iiSoy, daugh-
ter of Priam, from Upiaixo-s. Except those in to-, which change o to
a, making nominatives in idbrjs and ids ; as Qecmddrjs and Georias,
son and daughter of Thestius (eeVrio-y).
(c) Stems of the third declension add ida- and iS-, those in €o
dropping v before i; as KeKpoTr-ibrjs, son (or descendant) of Cecrops,
K(Kpo7r-is, gen. idos, daughter of Cecrops, from Ke/cpo^^, gen. KeKpon-
09; 'Arpetdrjs (Hom. 'Arpetdrjs), son of Atreus, from 'Arpev-s, gen.
'ATpe-6)s; IIr)\(i8r}9 (Horn. UrjXetdrjs), son of Peleus, from UrjXev-s,
gen. nT^Xe-ws, Hom. also Hr^Xj^iaSj^s, as if from a form nrjX^ios (b).
Note. Occasionally patronymics are formed by the suffix tov- or ttav-
(nom. twv); as Kpoviwp, gen. Kpov^wvos or K/ooj/fo^os (to suit the metre), son
of Kronos {Kpbpo-s).
10. (^Gentiles.) These designate a person as belonging to some
country or town, and are formed by the following suffixes: —
€v- (nom. fU9, masc): 'Eperpievy, Eretrian ('Eperpia); Meyapcvs,
Megarian (Meyapa, pi.); KoXcovevs, 0/ Colonos (KoXcoi/o'-y) .
Ttt- (nom, TT/y, masc. parox.): Teyea-Trjs, of Tegea (Teyea), 'HTret-
pa)-TT]s, of EpirjiS (^Uneipos), SiKeXtco-r?;?, Sicilian (2i/ceXta). See
§ 128, 3, N. 3.
§129.] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 185
Note. Feminine stems in i8- (nom. Is, gen. i8os) correspond to mascu-
lines in ev-; as Meyapis, Megarian woman; and feminines in Tt8- (nora.
Tis, gen. TLbos)t to masculines in ra-y as SticeXtw-Tis, Sicilian woman.
ADJECTIVES.
11. The simplest suffixes by which adjectives (like nouns) are
formed from roots or stems are o- and a- (nom. masc. os; fern. 77, a,
or 09 ; neut. ov): <Tocf)-6s, <To(f>rj, (To(f)6u, wise; kuk-os, bad; \onr-6s, re-
maining (XtTT-, XotTT-, § 128, 3, N. 5).
12. Adjectives signifying belonging or related in anyway to a per-
son or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix 10- (nom^jips') :
ovpdv-ios, heavenly (ovpavo-i), otKetos, domestic (see § 128, 3, N. 3), 81-
Kmos,just (diKa-), 'ABrjvaios, Athe?iian ('AdTJvai, stem ^AOrjva-).
13. (a) Verbals denoting ability or Jitness are formed by iko-
(nom, iKos) , sometimes tiko- (tikos) : dpx-tKos, Jit to rule (apx<«>) >
ypa(f)iK6s, capable of loriting or j)ainting (ypdcfxa), ^ovXev-riKos, able to
advise (^ovXeixo), npaK-riKos, jfit fur action (practical), from npdy-
(Trpdaaro)) .
(b) Denominatives thus formed denote relation, like adjectives in
105 (12) ; nokefi-iKos, of loar, luarlike {TroXeixos), ^aatX-iKos, kingly (/3a-
aikevs), ^vo-iKoy, natural (<f)v(rLs}.
14. Adjectives denoting material are formed by ivo- (nom. ivos,
proparox.), as \id-ivos, of stone (XiOos); — and €o- (nom. foy, contr.
ovs), as xp^o'^os, xP^'^^^^i golden (xP^<^os},
Note. Adjectives in iv6i (oxytone) denote tiine, as eapiv6s, vernal {^ap,
spring), vvKrepivos, by night {uv^, flight, vvKrepos, by night).
15. Those denoting fidness (chiefly poetic) are formed by €vt-
(nom. €is, eaa-a, f i/) ; xapifis", graceful (xapis), gen. xap^eyros\ vXjjet?,
woody ; Latin gratiosus, silvosus.
16. Inclination or tendency is expressed by |jiov- (nom. ficov, fxav) ;
fiv^jfxav, mindful (pLvrjfXTj, memory), TXrj-p,(op, enduring (rXdco, endure),
imXr](Tp.(ov, forgetful (Xad-, Xav0dvio).
17. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by va-
rious suffixes besides the simple o- (11), as vo-, Xo, po-, ^lo-, or o-ifto-,
all with nom. in oy ; co-- with nom. in rjs, ey. Some of these are dis-
tinguished by an active or a passive meaning; as SciXo'y, timid, 8ei-
pos, terrible, (8«-, fear) ; sometimes the same adjective has both
senses ; as (f)o^fp6s, frightful and afraid.
Adjectives in rjs are generally compounds (§ 131, 6); a few are
simple, as yj^evb-rjs, false.
Note. For verbal adjective in tos and reos, see § 117, 3.
186 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 130
ADVERBS.
18. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives, as is explained iu
§§ 74, 75.
Adverbs may be formed also from the stems of nouns or verbs
by the following suffixes : —
(a) 86v (or 8d), 't\Z6v : dva-<f)av-d6v, openly (dva-cfiaivco, (j)av-)t poet,
also dva(f)avbd] Kvv-rj86v, like a dog (^kvcov, gen. kvvos).
(h) 8t]v or dStiv : Kpv^-drjv, secretly (KpvirTa, conceal) ; (rvWrj^-brju,
collectively (o-uXXa/x/Sai/o), Xaj3-, § 128, 3, N. 5) ; cnrop-db-qv^ scatteredly
(tTTreipo), sow, scatter^ stem cnrep) ; dve-drju^ profusely (dv-lijfii, let outy
stem €-).
(c) rl : ovopxKT-Ti^ hy name (pvofid^o), § 16, 1) ; iKKrjvia-ri, in Greek
(^iWrjui^o)) .
See also the local endings ^i, $€v, 5e, &c., § 61.
II. DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
§ 130* A verb whose stem is derived from the stem of a
noun or adjective is called a denominative (§ 128, 2, b). The
following are the principal terminations of such verbs in the
present indicative active : —
1. &(a (stem in a-) : Tt/ido), honor, from noun rifif] (Tt/xa-)» honor.
2. CO) (e-): dpiOfieo), county from dpi6p.6s, number (Note 2).
3. 00) (o-): fxiarOoco, let for hire, from fiiaSo-s, pay.
4. evu (ev-) : ^aaiKevco, be king, from ^aa-i\ev-s, king.
5. a^w (aS-): diKaCa, Judge, from S/k;; (biKa-), justice.
6. 1^(0 (iS-): eXmCa), hope, from eXn-i'y (eXTriS-), ^o/9e.
7. atv« {av-): ar]p.aiva>, signify, from o-^/xa (aTjfiaT-), sign.
8. vvtt (vi/-): ^bvvca, sweeten, from ^Su-j, SM;ee^
For the relations of the present to the simple stem, see § 108.
Note 1. Desiderative verbs, expressing a desire to do anything, are
sometimes formed from other verbs and from nouns by the ending o-eio; (stem
in <T€L-), sometimes aw or law (a- or ta-); as dpa-a-eiu), desire to do {dpd-u));
yeXa-aeica, desire to laugh {yeXd-w); <pov-du}, be blood-thirsty {<p6uos); kXuv-
a-idu, desire to vjeep (/cXa/w, stem /cXau-), § 128, 3, N. 4.
Note 2. The final letter or syllable of the stem from which a denomina-
tive verb is formed is specially sxibject to modification (§ 128, 3, N. 3). Thus
many verbs in ew come from stems in o, as (pcXi-u, love (cpLXo-s). Some come
from stems in -ea (§ 52, 1), dropping e<r ; as evrvx^ii}, be fortunate, from
evTvxvs {evTVX'^<T-), fortunate.
\
§131.] COMPOUND WORDS. ' 187
Note 3. Verbs formed from the same noun stem with different end-
ings sometimes have different meanings ; as iroXefikoj and (poetic) TroXe/iifw,
make war, TroXe/tow, make hostile, both from irdXe/MO-s, war; BovXooj, en-
slavey dovXevb}, be a slave, from 5ov\o-s, slave.
COMPOUND WORDS.
§ 131. In a compound word we have to consider (a) the
first part of the compound, {b) the last part, and (c) the mean-
ing of the whole.
Remark. The modifications which are necessary when a compound con-
sists of more than two parts will suggest themselves at once.
(A.) First Part of a Compound Word.
1 . When the first part of a compound is a noun or adjec-
tive, onl}^ its stem appears in the compound.
Before a consonant, stems of the first declension generally
change final a to o ; those of the second declension retain o ;
and those of the third add o. Before a vowel, stems of the
first and second declensions drop a or o. JS.g.
QaXao-ao-KpcLToip (^SaXaatra-) , ruler of the sea, ;(opo-5t8d<r*caXos (xopo-),
chorus-teacher, Traido-rpi^rjs (ttoiS-), trainer of boys (in gymnastics),
Kc(f)a\-aXyT]s (xe^aXa-), causing headache, x^P'VY^^ (x°P°")' (orig.)
chorus-director : so IxOvo-cjxiyos (lxBv-),fsh-eater, (^vtrio-Xoyos, enquir-
ing into nature.
Note. There are many exceptions. Sometimes 97 takes the place of ;
as x°V-<l>^poi (X<"7> libation), bringer of libations, eXa07?-^6Xos (^Xa0o-s),
deer-slayer. Stems in €<t {§ 52, 1) often change eo- to ; as reixo-fiaxia
(reixeo--), wall-fighting. The stems of vavs, ship, and jSoOs, ox, generally
appear without change {vav- and ^ov-); as pav-/xax^O; sea-jight, ^ov-k6\os,
herdsman. Sometimes a noun appears in one of its cases, as if it were a
distinct word ; as »'eu)<r-otKos, shiy-house, vavai-wopos, traversed by ships.
2. Compounds of which the first part is a verb are chiefly
poetic.
(a) Here the verb stem sometimes appears without change
before a vowel, and with c, t, or o added before a conso-
nant. E.g.
Uf'id-apxos, obedient to authority ; pev-c-nToXefxas, steadfast in bat-
tle ; apx-i'-TiKToavy master-builder ; Xin-o-yapos, marriage-leaving {adul-
terous') .
188 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 131.
{h) Sometimes a- is added to the verb stem (generally o-t
before a consonant). JE.g.
UXrj^-nriros (TrXrjy-), horse-lashing; Xvcti-ttovos, toil-relieving; arpc
ylri-8iKos ((rTp€(^-)^ justice-twisting ; rfpyjri-voos (jepTr-), soul-delighting.
3. A preposition or an adverb may be the first part of a
compound word ; as in 7rpo-/3dXXo), throw before, det-Aoyta, con-
tinued talking, ev-yevrj^, well-born. Bat no changes in form occur
in these, except when a final vowel is elided (§ 12, 2), or when
irpo contracts o with a following e or o into ov, as in Trpovxa
(Trpo, €X^)i ^^^^ before; irpovpyov (jrpo^ cpyov) , forward, <f>pov8oi
{rrpoy oSds), gone (cf. § 17, 2, Note). Euphonic changes occur
here as usual ; as in cyxo}pLo<: (cV and x<'V"? § l^i ^)-
4. The following inseparable particles are used only as
prefixes : —
(a) av (a- before a consonant) , called alpha privative, pre-
fixed to nouns and adjectives, rarelj^ to verbs, with a negative
force, like English un-, Latin in- ; as dv-cXcu^cpos, unfree, dv-
atSi;?, shameless, dv-o/Aoto?, unlike, d-Trats, childless, d'ypa<f>o<s, un-
written, d-6eo<;, godless.
(b) Sv(T-, ill (opposed to cv, well), denoting difficulty or
trouble ; as 8uo--7ropos, hard to pass (opposed to ev-7ropos) ; hva-
T^x^^? unfortunate (opposed to ev-r^x^s).
(c) \rq- (Latin we), a poetic negative prefix; as vrj-^oivoq^
unavenged ; vrj-jxepri/js, unerring.
{d) rjfjLL- (Latin semi-) , half; as rjixC-6€o<s, demigod,
Note 1. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry, — apt-, ept-, 5a-,
fa-, as dpi-yvuTos, well-known ; 8a-<f>0Lvb%, Moody.
Note 2. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting union) ; as
in d-\oxos, bedfellow (from Xexos).
(B.) Last Part of a Compound Word.
5. At the beginning of the last part of a compound noun
or adjective, a, e, or o (unless it is lengthened by position) is
generally lengthened to rj or w. Mg.
IrpaT-rjyos (arrpaTo-s, ayco), general; vir-qKoos (iVo. aKovw), obe-
dient* KaT-r]p€(f)T}s (Kara, €pe(f)a>), cooered ; en-awpos CeVi, ovopa), nam-
ing or named for; Kar-nyopos (Kara, and stem of dyopd), accuser. (See
§ 12, 2.)
§132.] COMPOUND WORDS. 189
6. The last part of a compound noun or adjective may be
changed in form when a suffix is added (§ 129). This takes
place especially in compound adjectives, and when an abstract
noun forms the last part of a compound noun. E.g.
^Xo-Tt/xoff (ti/xi^), lionor-lovlng ; iroXv-Trpdyficov (npayfia), meddle-
some; avT-dpKTjs (avTos, dpKeoy, suffice), self-sufficient ; dv-ai8ris (aldeo-
fiai), shameless; KaKo-T]6rjs (^Bos), ill-disposed; — Xi6o-^oXia (\i6oSi
jSoXiy), stone-throwing, vav-p.axia {vavs, p-dxr})y sea-fight.
Compound adjectives in j;? are especially frequent (§ 129, 17).
Note. An abstract noun compounded with a preposition may retain
its form ; as irpo-^ouX^, forethought.
7. A compound verb can be formed directly only by prefix-
ing a preposition to a verb ; as Trpocr-dy<a^ bring to. Indirect
compounds (denominatives) are formed from compound nouns
or adjectives, which themselves may be compounded in various
ways. E.g.
Ai^o/3oXca>, throw stones^ denom. from \i0o-^6\os, stone-thrower;
Karriyopeo), accuse, from KOT-riyopoi, accuser (cf. 5). See § 105,
1, N. 2.
(C) Meaning of Compounds.
§ 132. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three
classes, distinguished by the relation of the parts of the com-
pound to each other and to the whole.
1. Objective compounds are those composed of a noun and
a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the noun stands to
the other part in some relation (commonly that of object) which
could be expressed by an oblique case of the noun. E.g.
Aoyo-ypd(f>os, speech-'Writer (\6yovs ypdcfxov) ; p,ta-dpdpayrroi, man-
hating (pi(r<ov dvOpwiTovs) ; (TTpar-qyos, general (armg-leading, (TTparov
ayav); d$i6-\oyos. worthy of mention (n^ios \6yov)', dp,apT-i-voos, erring
in mind {afxaproav vov) ; lad-^eos, godlike {laos Sea) ; Tepir-i-Kepavuos, de-
lighting in thunder (repTrofxevos Kfpavva) \ 8io-Tp€(f)r)s, reared hy Zeus
(cf. Bu-Trer^s-, fallen or sent from Zeus, and Au-rpecprjs, a proper name).
So with a preposition : ey-xcaptos, native (Jv rfj x^P9) I ecfi-iTrmos, be-
longing on a horse (t^' imra).
Note. When the last part of an objective compound is a transitive ver-
bal in OS formed by the suffix o- (§ 129, 1), it generally accents the penult
if this is short, otherwise the last syllable. But if the last part is iutran-
190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§132.
sitive or passive (in sense), the accent is recessive. Thus \oyo-ypa.<f>o^,
speech-writer ; \l6o-^6\os, throioer of stones, but Xi.66-^o\os, pelted with
stones ; firjrpo-Krduos, matricide, matricidal ;. arpaT-Tjyos, general ; X070-
iroids, story-maker.
2. Determinative compounds are nouns or adjectives in
which the first part, generally as adjective or adverb, quali-
fies (or determines) the second part. ^.g.
*AKp6-7r6Xis, citadel (aKpa uoXis) ; fiea--r)fi^pia (fifo-j) fjfiepa, § 14, 2,
N. 1), mid-day; yf/evdo-fiavTis, false prophet ; 6p,6-8ov\os., fellow-slave
{ofiov 8ov\cvoiv) ; 8v(r-fia6r]s, learning with difficulty ; dxv-ireTrjs, swift-
flying ; dfKpi-OeaTpov, amphitheatre {theatre extending all round)\
a-ypac{>os, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like fjLfXi-rjbrjs (f}bvs)i
honey-sweet, *Aprji-6oosy swift as Ares (Ares-swift).
Note. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative,
made of two nouns or two adjectives, and signifying a combination of the
two things or quahties. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like an
adjective or adverb. Such are larpo-ixavTis, physician-prophet (a prophet
who is also o. physician); ^Kpo-fidxa^pa, sword-sabre; dvdpo-irais, man-child;
yXvKiJ-TriKpos, sweetly bitter ; deo-ravpos (of Zeus changed to a bull).
3. Possessive or attributive compounds are adjectives in which
the first part qualifies the second (as in determinatives), and
the whole denotes a quality or attribute belonging to some
person or thing. £.g.
* Apyvpo-To^os, with silver bow (apyvpovv ro^ov exoav) ; KaKo-bai}i<ov,
ill-fated (kukov daip.ova exoav) ; iriKpo-yafios, wretchedly married {niKpoc
ydfxov ex^^) ' ofxo-vofios, having the same laws; eKaroy-KecjiaXos, hundred-
headed ; d€Ka-€Tr)s, of ten years (duration) ; dyado-cidrjs, having the
appearance (eiSo?) of good ; ev-Oeos, inspired (having God within) ;
uiKv-TTOvs, swift-footed (oxeU 7r68as f^wj/) , — but Trod-axijs (nodas oiKvs) ,
foot-swift, is a determinative.
Remark. In compound verbs, the original verb remains the funda-
mental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition prefixed.
Other compounds than those here mentioned present no difficulties in re-
spect to meaning.
PART IV
SYNTAX.
DEFINITIONS.
§ 133, 1. Every sentence must contain two parts, a
subject and a predicate. The subject is that of which
something is stated. The predicate is that which is
stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence Aap€Lo<;
^aartXeveLt Darius is king, Aapelo^ is the subject and
fiaa-iXevei is the predicate.
Note 1. When any part of elixl, he, connects the subject with a
following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i. e. means
of coupling) , and what follows is called the predicate ; as Aape^os
eoTi ^ao-iXevff, Darius Is king, 2oX<ui/ earl (To<p6s, Solon is tvlse, where
fo-ri is the copula. (See § 136, Rem.)
Et/ii, however, can form a complete predicate, as in etVl Oeoij Gods
exist ; it is then called the substantive verb.
Note 2. The simple subject and predicate may each be modified
by additional words or clauses ; as Kvpos, aKovaas a ehev, ela-riXdeu
els TTju TToKiv, Cyrus, on hearing what he said, went Into the city, w^here
KOpof, cLKova-as a elnev, is the modified subject, and the rest is the
modified predicate.
2. That upon which the action of a verb is exerted is
called the object. The object may be either direct or
indirect : thus, in eBtoKe ra '^^^pr/fjuara rS dvSply he gave the
money to the man, ')(prifjbara is the direct object and avhpl
is the indirect (or remote) object.
192 SYNTAX. [§134.
Note. Some verbs, called transitive^ generally need the addition
of an object to complete the sense. Others, called intransitive^ admit
no such addition ; as anr]k6ov, I departed.
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
SUBJECT.
§ 134. 1. The subject of a finite verb is in the nomi-
native ; as 6 avrjp rfKdevy the man came,
A verb in 2^ finite mood is called a finite verb (§ 89).
2. The subject of the infinitive mood is in the ac-
cusative ; as Xeyovac Tov<i dvBpa<i airekOelvy they say that
the men went away,
3. But the subject of the infinitive is generally omitted
when it is the same as the subject or the object of the
leading verb ; as /SovXerat aireXOelVi he wishes to go away ;
(fyrjal rypd<f>6cv, he says that he is writing; irapaivovfiiv
(Toi fievecv, we advise you to remain.
So when it is the same with any important adjunct of the lead-
ing verb ; as Kamvpyov eari KpiBevr dnoOavelv, it is like a malefactor to
die by sentence of the law (§ 138, N. 8, b).
Note 1. The subject nominative of the first or second person is
omitted, except when special emphasis is required. (See foot-note,
page 143.)
The nominative of the third person is omitted: — r
(a) When it is expressed or implied in the context ;
(b) When it is a general word for persons ; as Xeyovai, they say,
it is said ;
(c) When it is indefinite; as mo'^e ^v, it was late; koKcos e;^ft, it is
well ; 8r}\ol, it is evident (the case shows) : so in the impersonal con-
struction with the verbal in reoPj as in Treicrreov (cWl) t<5 vofia, we
must obey the law (§ 281, 2).
(«/) When the verb implies its own subject, as Kijpva-a-ei, the her-
ald (Krjpv^) proclaims, eadXmy^ey the trumpeter sounded the trumpet^
K(o\v€i, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like napea-Kev-
aa-rai fioi, preparation has been made by me (7 am prepared), like ven-
tum est in Latin, the subject is really the idea of preparation^ &c,
contained in the verb. See § 198.
§ 135.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 193
(e) With verbs like vet, it rains, dorpaTrret, it lightens^ aeifi, there is
an earthquake (it shakes), where, however, some subject like Zevs or
6e6s was originally supplied.
iN'oTE 2. Many verbs in the thii-d person singular have an infini-
tive or a sentence as their subject. These are called impersonal verbs.
Such are TrpeVei and irpoo-rjKd, it is proper, eveari and e^eari, it is possi-
ble, doKel, it seems good, avfi^aiveL, it happens, and the like ; as e^ea-riv
vfiiv TovTo noielv, it is in gour power to do this (to do this is possible for
gou). So also Set and -x^pi], it is required, we ought ; as del rjfias drrfX-
ddv, we must go awag (here, however, the infinitive might be consid-
ered an object, and del and xpn might be classed under Note 1 (c) ;
cf. § 172, N. 2).
The name impersonal is applied with still greater propriety
(though less frequently) to the verbs included in (c) and (d) of
Note 1.
Subject NomiuatiTe and Verb.
§ 135. 1. A verb agrees with its subject nominative
in number and person ; as {iycb} Xeyo), I say^ ovto<; Xeyei,
this man says, ol avhpe^ Xeyovaiv, the men say,
2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regularly
takes a singular verb ; as ravra iyevero, these things hap-
pened, TO, olKrifiara eireaevy the buildings felL So ahv-
vard iart (or dBvvaTov icrrt), it is impossible.
But exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting
persons. Several are found in Xenophou.
3. A singular collective noun may take a plural verb ;
as TO 7r\rj6o<; i'\lrrj(j>La-avTo TToXepLetv, the majority voted
for war.
Note 1. IVhen several subjects are connected by and, they gen-
erally have a plural verb. But the verb often agrees with one of
the subjects (generally the nearest), and is imderstood with the
rest. The latter generally happens when they are connected by or
or nor. E.g.
Sxjfx<f)a>vovfi€v eya> Koi v/ifi?, / and you agree : aocftoi e-yw Ka\ av rifieVf
I and you were wise ; koi (tv koi ol dbf\(f)o\ naprjaTe, both you and your
brothers icere present. 'E/xt ovre Kaipos . . . ovt (Knis ovre (})6^os
ovT aWo ovdev firrjpep.
13
194 SYNTAX. [§136.
Note 2. /f the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in
the first person rather than the second, and in the second rather than
the third. (See examples under N. 1.)
Note 3. A verb in the dual may follow two subjects in the sin-
gular, or even a plural subject denoting two persons or things. But
even a subject in the dual may have a verb in the plural. (See II.
iv. 453; v. 10,275; xvi. 218.)
Note 4. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nomina-
tive; as al ;^op?;'ytai iKavav evdatfiovias aTjfielov eVrii/, tlie pa)jnients
for choruses are a sufficient sign of prosperity.
Note 5. Rarely a singular verb has a masculine or feminine sub-
ject in the plural; as eort be inTa crrddioi i^ 'A/SwSou is rrjv dirauTioVj
and there is a distance of seven siades from Abydos to the opposite coast.
In such cases the subject follows the verb, and its plural form seems
to have arisen from an afterthought.
See also the phrases €(ttlv o1, ike, § 152, N. 2.
predicate noun and adjective.
§ 136, With verbs signifying to he^ to become^ to ap-
pear, to he named, chosen, considered, and the like, a
noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same case as
the subject. U.g,
OvTos eoTi ^aa-iXevs, this man is king; ^AXf^avdpos Bios oivofid-
^cTo^ Alexander was named a God ; r}pe6r} o-Tparijyos, he was chosen
general; rj noXis (j)povpLou KaTearrj, the city became a fortress; ovtos
fCTTiv €v8aifj,(ov, this man is happy; fj nokis fieydXrj eyevero, the city be-
came great ; Tjv^rjrai fieyas, he has grown {to be) great.
Remark. The verbs which are here included with the copula
elfii (§ 133, 1, N. 1) are called copulative verbs. The predicate
nominative with the passive verbs of this class represents the predi-
cate accusative of the active construction (§ 166).
Note 1. The predicate adjectioe agrees with the subject in gen-
der and number as well as in case (§ 138, Remark).
Note 2. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusa-
tive expressed (§ 134, 2) is in the accusative; as ^ovXerai rbv vlov
(ivai (ro(f)6vy he wishes his son to be wise. So when the participle is
used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 280) ; as rjdeaav t6v
Kvpov ^aaiXta yevofievov, they knew that Cyrus had become king.
Note 3. (a) A\Tien the subject of ehat or of a copulative infini-
tive is omitted because it refers to the same person or thing as a
§ 137.] APPOSITION. 195
nominative, genitive, or dative connected with the leading verb
(§ 134, 3), a predicate noun or adjective which belongs to the omit-
ted subject is generally assimilated in case to the preceding nomina-
tive, genitive, or dative. But it may stand in the accusative instead
of being assimilated to a genitive or dative ; especially a predicate
noun is very seldom assimilated to a genitive. E.g.
(Norn.) BovXerai a-o(f)6s elvai, he wishes to be ivise ; 6 *A\e^avbpo9
ecjiaa-Kev et.pat Aios vlos, Alexandtr asserted that he was a son of Zeus.
(^Gen.) Kvpov ibiovro wy npoOvfioTaTov yevfadai, they asked
Cyrus to be as devoted to them as possible ; but (with a noun) 'A^?;-
vaioiv iderjBrja-av cr(pl(ri ^orjOovs yeveadai, they asked the Athenians to
become their helpers.
(Dat.) vvv crot, e^eariv dv8p\ yevea-Bai, it is now in your power to
show yourself a man; npfnec ctol elvai 7rpo6vfi(o, it becomes you to be
zealous ; but also avp-cpepcL avrois cf)i\ovs tivat, it is for their interest
to befriends.
(b) So when b, participle (in any case) represents the leading
verb, and its noun the leading subject; as ^\6ov eVt ttm rav doKovv-
TOiv elvai (ro(Pcov, I went to one of those who seemed to be wise : ttoXXoi
Toiv 7Tpoa7roiT]o-ap,evcov eluai aocftKTTcov , many of those who professed to
be sophists. So toIs doKovaiv eluai ao(f)oh.
Note 4. The same principle (N. 3) applies to the predicate of
av or of the participle of a copulative verb; as rjdeaav (To(j)ol oWeff,
they knew that they were wise (but fjdfcrav rovrovs aocfiovs ovras, they
knew that these men were wise). See Note 2.
Note 5. For the application of the same principle to all adjective words
which refer to the omitted subject of an infinitive, see § 138, N. 8.
APPOSITION.
§ 137. A noun annexed to another noun to describe
it, and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it
in case. This is called apposition. E.g.
Aapclos 6 /3ao-iXeu?, Darius the king. "Adrjvai, peyaXrj ttoXis, Athens^
a great city. 'Yp.as rovs cro(Povs, you, the wise ones. 'Hficbv rwv 'A^i;-
vaicov, of us J the Athenians. Qepia-TOKXrjs fj<(o (sc. eyw), / Themisto-
cles am come. ^iKrjoios koX Avkcov ol 'A;^aioi, Philesius and Lycon, the
Achaeans.
Note 1. Possessive prononns and adjectives may have a geni-
tive in apposition with a genitive which they imply ; as 6 epo? tov
ToXanrapov /3io?, the life of me, miserable one; ^Adrjuaios <ov, noXccos rrjs
pfyio-TT)^, being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city. So rii vperepa
avTiov (for TO. vpoiv avTcov), your own (§ 147, N. 4).
196 SYNTAX. [§ 138.
Note 2. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive
(§ 168) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts,
especially when the latter include the whole of the former; as oiVi'at
ai fiev TToWai ircTrroiKcaav, oKlyai be Trfpi^trav, most of the houses had
fallen, hut a few remained (where we might have twv oIkicov). So ov-
Toi iiWos ak\o Xe'yei. This is called partitice apposition.
Note 3. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence,
being in the nominative or accusative as it is more closely con-
nected in thought with the subject or with the object of the sen-
tence; as KclvTaL neaovres, ttio-tis ov afiLKpa TroXei, thejj lie ]>rostrale, —
no small {cause of) confidence to the citij ; 'Ekevrjv Kravco^ev. MeveXea
XtiTTTjv TTiKpdv, Ict US kill Helen, {which ivill be) a bitter grief to Menelaus.
Note 4. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the
object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as Xinroi rjyovro
Ovfiara t<5 'HXiw, horses were brought as offerings to the Sun (in
active, iTTTTouff liyeiv OvjxaTa, to bring horses as offerings); avup-axovs
e^eis Beovs, you will have Gods as allies. So rvxflv rtvos ^I'Xov, to
gain some one as a friend : ;(pa)/iat rovro) (fyiXa, I treat him as a friend.
So rivos bLbda-KoXoi tJkctc ; as teachers of what are you come f See
§ 166, Note 2.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
§ 138. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender,
number, and case. This applies also to the article and
to adjective pronouns and participles. E.g.
'O ao(f)bs dvTjp, the wise man ; rov ao<pov dvbpoi, ra ao^m dvbpi, top
ao(p6v av8pa, T<t)v (TO(f)a)u dvbpcov, &c. Ovtos 6 dur^p, this man ; tovtov
Toi) dvbpos, TOVTiov Toov dvbpccv. At iipo rov aTOfiuTos vrjes vavfia)(Ovaai,
the ships engaged in battle before the mouth {of the harbor). It includes
predicate adjectives with coi)ulative verbs, the case of which has
already been considered (§ 136) ; as ai apiarai doKotaai elvai (fivo-ets,
the natures which seem to be best.
Remark. The adjective may be either attributive or predicate.
An attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the inter-
vention of a verb (like all the adjectives above, except lipiaTai). The
predicate adjective may be connected with its noun by the copula
(§ 133, 1, N. 1), or by a copulative verb (§ 136); as 6 dvfjp dyaOof
icTTLv, the man is good ; KaXelrai dya36s, he is called good : or it may
stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of ft/xt';
as TTTTjvas 5ttoK€tr ras eXTrt'Say, you are pursuing hopes which are winged
(i.e. hopes being winged) ; dOdvarov rr]v pvr]p.r)v KaTokciyj/ova-iv, immortal is
the memory they ivill leave behind them (i.e. ttjv pvtjjjltjv ovaav dddvarov)',
TTOicl Toiis Mrjdovs dcrScvels, he makes the Medes {to be) iceak (§ 166).
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with respect to
the article ; see § 142, 3, and the examples.
§138.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 197
Note 1. (a) An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns
generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, and is
understood with the rest; as t6v dyadov twbpa koI yvvaiKa, the good
man and woman; iraprl kuI Xoyco kol firjxavTj, by every word and de-
vice.
(b) But such an adjective is occasionally plural if it belongs to
several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two; as awippopoiv iari
KOL dv8p6i KOL yvvaiKos ovToi TToiclv, it is the part of prudent ijpersons) ,
both men and women ^ thus to do.
Note 2. (a) A predicate adjective is regularly plural if it be-
longs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two. If the
nouns are of different genders, the adjective is commonly masculine
if one of the nouns denotes a male person^ and commonly neuter if
all denote things. Thus, eiSe narepa t€ kiu p,T]Tepa kol d8€X(f)ovs koI
ri]v iavTov yvvaiKa ai;^/xaXa)rous yeyevrip-evuvs, he saiv that both his
father and his mother, his brothers, and his own wife had been made
captives : noXefios kol a-Tda-is 6\e$pia rals TToXecrlp ea-riv, war and fac-
tion are destructive to states.
(b) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of
the nearest or most prominent noun; as Trpoppi^os avros, rj ywf], to.
naidla, dwoXoifirjv, may I perish root and branchy myself, my wife, my
children.
(c) A predicate adjective is sometimes neuter, being used like a
noun (§ 139), even when its noun is masculine or feminine; as
KaXbv Tf dXrjBeta, a beautiful thing is truth.
Note 3. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons
may take a plural ;;ar^iciy9/e ; as TpoiW iXovres 'ApyciW aroXos, the
Argives^ army having taken Troy.
Note 4. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the
grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person ; as 0iXe t€kvov, dear
child I
Note 5. The masculine form of the dual is very often used for
the feminine in adjecti^^e pronouns and the article ; as rovrui ra> rixvo.-,
these two arts. Especially rare are the feminines to, ravra.
Note 6. Avo, two, is often used with a plural noun. "Oa-ae, the
eyes, and bovpe, two spears, in Homer, may have plural adjectives.
Note 7. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we should
use an adverb or adverbial phrase; as iKovres ^Xdov, they came icill-
iugly; opKios aoi Xeyta, I say it to you on my oath ; TrpSyros 8' e^epe-
five NeWcop, and first, Nestor inquired. There is often, however, a
great distinction between the adjective and the adverb; as Trpwroy
avTovs eidov, 1 was the first to see them; irpatrovs avrovs ttSoi/, they
were the first whom I saw; rrpa>Tov (adv.) avrovs dbov, first (of all
that I did) 1 saw them.
198 SYNTAX. [§ 139.
Note 8. (a) When the subject of an infinitive is omitted be-
cause it refers to the same person or thing as a nominative, geni-
tive, or dative connected with the leading verb (jf 134, 3), adjectives,
adjective pronouns, and participles which belong to the omitted sub-
ject are generally assimilated in case to the preceding nominative,
genitive, or dative; but they sometimes stand in the accusative
(agreeing with the omitted subject) instead of the genitive or da-
tive, rarely instead of the nominative. This occurs chiefly in the
predicate of eluai, or of a copulative verb ; for the usage in such
cases and for examples, see § 136, Note 3.
(b) With the infinitives of other verbs, the assimilation of an ad-
jective to a subject nominal we is regular and very rarely neglected ;
after a genitive, assimilation seldom (if ever) occurs, and the accusa-
tive is regular; after a dative either the dative or the accusative may
be used. E.g.
(Norn.) Ovx 6ixo\oyr)(ra) aKXrjros rJKeiv, I shall not admit that I am
come unbidden ; uvk ecprj avrosi d\X cKelvov arpaTrjyelv, he said that not
(he) himself, but he (Nicias) icas general; he said ovk (cycb) avros
{(TTpaTiTyco) aXX ckclvos a-TpaTrj-yel, cwtos being adjective (§ 145, 1) and
eWi/off substantive.
(Dat.) (do^cu avToii (TvaKevacrafx^vots a (i^ov Koi 6^07rXi(ra/Ae-
pois npoievai, they decided to pack up what the// had and arm themselves
completely, and to advance (A nab. ii. 1, 2); but edo^ev avrols irpocfyv-
XoAcay KaraaTTja-avTas avyKaXelv tovs OT/jarifOTas-, they decided to
Station pickets and to assemble the soldiers {ib. iii. 2, 1) ; in i. 2, we
find two datives and an accusative.
(Accus. for Gen.) KUKovpyov eWt Kpi0€VT^ a.7ro6ave2v, (TTpaTrjyov
de fiaxt'^p-evov tols nok€p.iots, it is like a malefactor to die by the sen-
tence of a court, but like a general (Jo die) fighting the enemy ; biop-ai
v/xcoi/ fx€ fjivrjixevovi rav elprjixeuav to. dcKaia \}rr}<f)L(ra(rBai, I beg of you
to remember what has been said^ and to vote what is just.
AdjectlTe used as a Noun.
§ 139. 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the
article, ma}^ be used as a noun; as 6 SUaLo^, the just man;
6 l-x6p6s^ the enemy ; <^l\o<s, a friend; Ka^rJ, a base woman ; ro
jxeaov or jxicrov., the middle ; ot KaKoi^ the bad ; rots ayaOoZq, to the
good; row Kparovvroiv^ of those in power ; KaKa, evils ; to. Ovyrd,
mortal things ; ot ypai}/dfX€voL '^wKparyv, the accusers of Socrates
(§276, 2).
Note. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; as rfj vo-tc^
pa'iq. (sc. f]p.ipa), on the next day.
§140.] " THE ARTICLE. 199
2. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is
often used as an abstract noun ; as to KaXov, beauty (== kuX-
Xo<s) , TO StVatov, Justice (== tLKaLoo-vvrj) .
Note. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasion-
ally thus used for the iufinitive, which is a verbal noun; as to be-
bi6s,fear (== to dedievai) ; iu rw }xtj fieXeTojvTi, in the not practising
(== ev T(o fXT] fxeXcTav) ; both ill Xhucydides. So in Latin, opus est
niaturato, there is need of haste.
THE ARTICLE.
Homeric Use of the Article.
§ 140. In the oldest Greek (as in Homer) the arti-
cle appears generally as a demonstrative or personal pro-
noun, sometimes as a relative, ^.g,
Tfjv 5' f-yca ov Xvcrco, hut I will not free her; tov de K\ve^o7^os*A7r6X-
Xtav, and Phoebus Apollo heard him ; 6 yap rjXde Boas eVi v^as 'A;(aicoi',
for he came, &c. As relative, wvpa noXXa to. Ka'uTo, many f res which
were burning ; hoapa to. edcoKav, gifts which they gave.
Note 1. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as
nouns (§ 139, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek; as oi yap apiaToi
iv vrjv&lv KeaTai, for the bravest sit in the ships ; oi aWoc, the others ; rd
T iovTa TO. T eaofieva, both things that are and things that are to be.
Note 2. (a) When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it
is generally a pronoun,. with which the noun is in apposition; as
6 8' e^pax€ x^^K^f^s^Aprjs, and he, brazen Ares, roared; rj 8' dUova
afia Tola-i yvvT] kUv, and she, the woman, went with them unwilling.
(b) Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these :
avTap 6 Tolai yepa>v ohov rjyefiouevfv, but he, the old man, showed them
the way ; tov S" olov iraTfp evpov, and they found him, the father, alone.
(c) Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is
that found in examples like these: ore 8f) ttjv vqaov dc^UcTo, when
now he came to the island ; to re o-Oevos ^Qpiavos, and the might of
Orion; ai Se yvvalKcs 'urrdfxevat BavfiaCov, and the women stood and
wondered.
(<-/) It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an
article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual transi-
tion, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true definite
article.
200 SYNTAX. [§ 141.
Note 3. The examples in Note 2 (c) are exceptional ; and in such
cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in
Latin. Thus deivrj fie KXayyt) yevcr apyvpeoio fiioio would in Attic
Greek require jj KXayyrj and tov ^lov (§ 141).
Note 4. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article be-
ginning with r in the place of the ordinary relative, — of which he
uses only the forms oy, rj. o1, and at, except after prepositions. Thus
opvis Ipos., Tw ovvop.a ^olvi^, a sacred bird, whose name is Phoenix. In
other respects, he uses the article as it is used in Attic prose.
Note 5. The Lyric poets follow the Homeric usage with respect
to the article more closely than Herodotus ; and the Attic poets, espe-
cially in the lyric chorus, admit Homeric uses.
Attic Use of the Article.
«•
§ 141. In Attic Greek the article generally cor-
responds to the English definite article the; as 6 avrjp,
the man ; twv TroXewv, of the cities ; tol<; '' EWtjctcv, to the
Grreeks,
Note 1. The Greek uses the article in certain cases in which the
English generally omits it. Such are the following: —
(a) Proper names may take the article ; as 6 ^(OKpdnjs or 2a)Kpd-
TTjSi Socrates.
(b) Abstract nouns very often take the article ; as ^ dper^, virtue^
r] bKaiocrvvT}, justice ; fj evXa^cia, caution. But dperrj, &c. are also used
in the same sense.
(c) Nouns qualified by a demonstrative or possessive pronoun
regularly take the article ; as ourop 6 dv^p, this man ; 6 €p,6s TraTrjp, my
father ; nepl rfjs fjpeTcpas nokecos, about our state. (See § 142, 4.) So
with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a personal, demonsti'a-
tive, or reflexive pronoun depends; as 6 Trarrjp fiov, nu/ father; 6 ifxav-
rov naTTjp, my own father (§ 142, 1, Note) ; 6 Tovrav Trarrjpy their
father.
(d) ToiovTos, TO(TovTos, TOLocrde, roa-oo-de, and rrfKiKovros may take
the article ; as top toiovtov au8pa, such a man. It is always used with
fielva, such a one.
Note 2. The article is sometimes used, where we use a posses-
sive pronoun, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing
mentioned in the sentence ; as epxfTai Mavdavrj npos rov Trarepa, Man-
dane comes to her father (lit. to the father) .
Note 3. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar
expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an
§ 142.] THE ARTICLE. 201
attributive adjective ; as ol totc av6pamoi, the men of that time ; rov
TToKm KaS/iov, of ancient Cadmus; oi iv aarei 'aBtjvoioi, the Athenians in
the city.
Here a noun denoting men or things is often omitted; as ol ew
aoTfi, those in the city ; rots t6t€, to those of that time ; oi d/u^l IlXd-
Tcam, those about Plato (generally Plato and his school^ or simply
Plato).
Note 4. The nouns y^, land^ rrpdyfiara, things or affairs, vlos,
son, and sometimes other nouns which are readily suggested by the
context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjec-
tive or genitive is added; as els tt]v eavrwu (sc. yrjv), to their own
land; €K TTJsTrcpioiKidos, from the neighboring country ; to, Trjs xroXecoff,
the affairs of the state ; Ilfpi/cX^s oSavdimrov (sc. vios), Pericles, the son
of Xanthippus ; ttju raxlo'Trju (sc. 686v), the quickest way. Expressions
like TO. T»)s 1uxr}s, TO T^s opyrjs, with no definite nouns understood,
sometimes do not differ from Tv^j/, Fortuiie, and opyf], ivrath.
Note 5. Instead of repeating a noun with new adjuncts in the
same sentence, it is sufficient to repeat its article; as oi rcov TroXirau
naides /cat oi Ta>v aX\(ov, the children of the citizens and those of the
others.
Note 6. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (§ 258), may take a
neuter article ; as to ddevat, the knowing ; a-oi to fiq a-iyrjaai Xoittop ^v,
it remained for you not to be silent.
Note 7. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole
clause considered as a noun; as to yp(o$i aravTov Travraxoi) 'art XP7~
a-ifMov, the saying ^^ know thyself ^^ is everywhere useful.
Note 8. A predicate noun seldom has the article; as vv^ rj
rifiipa eyevero, the day became night ; ovtoI elcri kukio-toi dvdpaynav, these
are the worst of men. But when the predicate refers definitely to
distinct individuals, it may have the article; as elai 8' ovtol oi fldo-
T€s ToXijdts ; and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ?
Position of the Article.
§ 142. 1. An attributive adjective which qualifies a
noun with the article commonly stands between the arti-
cle and the noun ; as o (ro(l)6<; avrjpy the wise man ; rwv
fieyakcov TroXecov, of the great cities.
The position of such an adjective with reference to the article
(with the two modifications mentioned in 2) is called the attributive
position, as opposed to the predicate position (see 3).
202 SYNTAX. [§ 142.
Note. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions
which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are pre-
ceded by the article (§ 141, N. 3), and to dependent genitives (ex-
cept partitives and the genitive of the personal pronoun) ; as 6 iixos
Trarfjp, my father ; rj arj yir,rr)p, thy mother; 6 efiavrov narrjp, my own
father ; ol ev acrrei avOpatiroi, the men in the city ; ov8e)s tSuv rore 'EXXfj-
i/cov, none of the Greeks of that time ; to rat ovri xjrevdo?, the real false-
hood ; els TTjv cKetviop noXiv, into their city ; ol rcov Orjliaicov crTpaT-qyol.,
the f/enerals of the Thebans (2, N. 2). For participles, see 2, N. 5.
Two or even three articles may thus stand together ; as to. tijs
tS>p noXkcov 'i'vxrjs ofiixara, the eyes of the soul of the multitude.
2. The article together with any of these qualifying
expressions may follow the noun, in which case the noun
itself may have another article before it. E.g.
*0 avr]p 6 (ro({)6s, or civfjp 6 aro<p6s, the wise man (not, however, 6 dvfjp
ao^os, see § 142, 3; ai noXeis ai drjixoKparovpevat, the states which are
under democracies ; avdp<anoi ol roTc^the men of that time; npos ddiiciav
Tr)v ("iKpaTov, with regard to pure injustice.
Kfmark. Of the three attributive positions, the first (e.g. 6 aocpbs av-qp)
is the most common and the most simi)le and natural ; the second (6 avrjp
6 aotpos) is the most formal ; the third {aurjp 6 crocpos) is the least common,
especially in the more careful prose writers.
Note 1. The article at the beginning of a clause may be sepa-
rated from its noun by /xt j/, de, re, ye, yap, 8t], and sometimes by other
words.
Note 2. The partitive genitive (§ 168) rarely stands in either of
the positions here mentioned, but either precedes or follows the gov-
erning noun and its article, like a predicate; as ol kqkoI tojv noXiTwv,
or Tojv TToXiroJi/ ol KaKoi, the bad among the citizens (rarely ot twv ttoXi-
Ta>v KaKo'i). Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occa-
sionally have this position, as tS)v naXaicov rj cjiiXoaocjiia, the phdosophy
of the ancients.
Note 3. (o) 'O aXXos generally means the rest, seldom the other;
ot aXXoL, the others : as 17 aXXrj ttoXis, the rest of the state (but aXXr] no-
Xis. another state) ; ol aXXot "EAXj^i/es, the other Greeks. Both 6 (iXXos
and KXXos (rarely erepos) may have the meaning of besides ; as evdai-
povi^opevos vTTo Tav TioXiToiv Koi ra>v ciXXcuv ^ev(ov, congratulated by the
citizens and the foreigners besides; ov yap rju x^P"^^^ °^^^ aXXo oev-
dpop, for there was no grass nor any tree either (lit. any other tree).
(b) UoXvs with the article generally (though not always) means
the greater part, especially in ol noXXoi. the multitude, the majorijy^
and TO iToXv,the greater part. So ol nXeioves, the majority, to nXelop,
the greater part, ol nXclaroi, and to nXelcrTop, the greatest number or
part.
§142.] THE ARTICLE. 203
Note 4. When a noun has two or more qualifying words, each
of them may take an article and stand in either of the above posi-
tions (1 or 2), or all may stand between one article and its noun ; as
17 'Attikt) t) TToKata (f)(i)vf], the ancient Attic speech: ra Tci\-q to. eaurtoi/
TO. fiuKpd, their own long loalis ; eneixnov els ras oKXas 'ApKadiKas noXets,
they sent to the other Arcadian cities ; fj vir' ^ApeTtjs 'HpaxXeous Ttaidev-
ais, the instruction of Hercules by Virtue. Occasionally one stands
between the article and the noun, while another follows the noun
without an article ; as tj iv fidxjj ^vfjL^oXf] ^apela.
Note 5 When an attributive participle (§ 138) with dependent
words qualifies a noun with the article, either the participle or tlie
dependent words may follow the noim; as t6v peovra irorapov bta rfjs
TToXecop, the river which runs through the city ; f] iv tg> ^adfxa enip.ovff
yevopxvrj, the delay which occurred at the Isthmus. But sucJi expres-
sions may also take either of the positions 1 or 2.
Note 6. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, rbv Ey-
^pdr-qv TvorapLOVy &c., rather than the river Euphrates. So sometimes
with names of mountains (rarely with those of cities or islands).
3. When an adjective either precedes the article, or
follows the noun without taking an article, it forms a
predicate, and some part of eifjul^ be, is implied (§ 138,
Remark) . E.g',
*0 dvfjp a-o(j)6s or (ro(f)6s 6 dvrjp (sc. icrriv), the man is tvise, or wise is
the man : iroXXoi ol navovpyoi, many are the evil-doers : e<pi]p,epovs ye
ras Tvxas KeKrrjpeday we possess our fortunes for a day (sc. ovaas).
The predicate force of such adjectives can often be expressed by
a periphrasis ; as toi? Xoyois ^paxvrepois exprjro, the words ivhich he
used icere shorter, lit. lie used the ivords {being) shorter: fjyovvro avrovo-
fimv T(ov ^vp,pdxoov, they presided over their allies (being) independent,
i.e. the allies over whom they presided were independent. So iroa-ov ayei
TO o-Tpdrevpa; how great is the army which he is bringing? § 138, Rem.
The position of such an adjective with reference to the article is
called the predicate position.
4. When a demonstrative pronoun qualifies a noun with
the article, it takes the position of a predicate adjective (3),
and either precedes the article or follows the noun. E.g,
OvTos 6 dvrjp^ this man, or 6 dvrjp ovros (never o ovtos dprjp). Uepi
Tovrmv TOiv noXeoiv, about these cities. ^
Note 1. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added,
the demonstrative may stand between this and its noun, contrary to
the rule ; as 17 a-revr) avrrj obos, this narrow road ; tw d(f)iKOfi€va rovrcp
$eva, to this stranger who has come. See Note 3 (b).
204 SYNTAX. [§143.
Note 2. "EKaaros, eKarepos, a/i(/)o), and dix<l)6Tepos have the predi-
cate position (3), like a demonstrative; but with eKaaros the article
may be omitted. Tolovtos, too-ovtos, rotoade, roaoade and TT]\t,KovTos,
when they take the article, have the attributive position (1).
Note ,3. (a) A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun
(whether partitive or not) has the predicate position (3), while that of
other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the attributive position
(1) ; as jj/xcov rj TToKis or rj noXis TjfiwVf our city (not rj rjfjLwv TrtlXis);
rj TovTcoi/ noXis, these men^s city (not ^ noXis tovt(op) ; iieT€nep.y^aTo
*A(rTvdyT]s ttjv eavrov Ovyarepa kol tov Tralda air^s, Astyages sent for
his own daughter and her son.
(h) But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may
stand between this and the noun; as ^ boKovaa rjfiav nporepov
a-co(f)po(rvvr)^ what previously seemed to be our modesty, fcjee Note 1.
Note 4. The adjectives aKpos, p^aos, and ea-xaros, when they are
in the predicate position (3), mean the top (or extremity), the middle^
the last, of the thing which their nouns denote ; as pear} fj dyopd,
the middle of the market (while 17 p^aij dyopd would mean the middle
market); aKpa fj ;(eip, the extrendty of the hand.
The article here may be omitted entirely.
Note 5. nS? and avpnas, all, and oXos. whole, generally have the
predicate position; as ndvres oi av8p€s or ol avbpes Trairey, all the men;
oXtj f] ttoXls or T) noXis oXrj, all the city. But they can also be used like
attributive adjectives, preceded by the article; as 37 Trdaa St/cfXia,
the ivhole of Sicily, to oXov yevos, the entire race.
The distinction here was probably not greater than that between
all the city and the ivhole city in English. We find even ot irdvTes
noXiTQi, the ivhole body of citizens.
Note 6. Avtos as an intensive pronoun, ipse, has the predicate
position ; as avrbs 6 dvrjp, the man himself. But 6 avros dvrjpy the same
man (§ 79, 2).
Pronominal Article in Attic Greek.
§ 143. 1. In Attic prose the article retains its origi-
nal demonstrative force chiefly in the expression fiev
... % the one . . . the other. E-g.
*0 p€V ovbev, 6 de noXXa Kephalvfi, one man gains nothing, another
gains much. Aft tovs p,(v eivai Bvarvx^h, rovs S' fvrvxf'is, some must be
unfortunate, and others fortunate. Tcoi/ TrdXecoi/ at /xeV rvpavvovvTai, ai
he dT)p,oKpaTovvTai, of states, some are governed by tyrants, others by
democracies.
§ 144.] PRONOUNS. 205
Note 1. The neuter to fiev ... to fie may be used adverbially,
partly . . . partly. For tovto iiiv . . . rovro be in this sense, see
§ 148, K 4.
Note 2. 'O 5e, &c., sometimes means and he, hut lie, &c., even
"when no 6 /ueV precedes : as ^Ivdpcos ^Adrjvaiovs iir^ydy^To ' ol de . . .
TJX$op, Inaros called in Athenians ; and they came.
2. A few other relics of the demonstrative meaning of
the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following ; —
Top Koi top, this man and that : to koI to, this and that ; to. koi to,
these and those; as eSei yap to koi to 7!oii)o-at, koi to firj Troi^arai, fur
we ought to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the
other.
Upo Tov (or TTpoTov), be/ore this, formerly.
Kal TOV or koi ttjv, before an infinitive ; as koi tov /ceXf vtrat hovvat
(sc. Xeyerat), and (it is said) he commanded him to give it. Cyr.
i. 3, 9.
So occasionally t^, therefore, which is common in Homer-
PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 144, 1. The nominative of the personal pronouns
is seldom used, except for emphasis. (See § 134, N. 1.)
Note. The forms e'/xou, ipoi, and e^ie are more emphatic than
the enclitics pov, poi, pe. The latter seldom occur after prepositions,
except in irpos pe.
2. (a) The pronouns of the third persoh, ov, ol, e,
a-(l>cov, (T(^i(Ti^ &c., when they are used in Attic prose, are
generally indirect reflexives, that is, in a dependent clause
(or joined with an infinitive or participle in the leading
clause) referring to the subject of the leading verb. E.g',
^o^ovvrai prj ol ^Adijvaioi o-cf)L(riv eTreXBaxnv, they fear that the Athe-
nians may attack them; ebeovro vpwv prj o-(^as irepiopdv (^deipopevovs,
they begged you not to see them destroyed. See § 79, 1, N. 1.
(6) In Homer and Herodotus they are generally per-
sonal pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect)
reflexives. E.g'.
SYNTAX. [§ 145.
*Ek yap (r(f)ea>v (j)pfvas etXero UaWas "Ad^vrj, for Pallas Athena bereft
them of their senses (Mom.) ; avrUa de oi evdovri eneo-rrj oveipos, and
soon a dream came to him in his sleep (Hdt.).
§ 145. 1. AvTo^ in all its cases may be an intensive
adjective pronoun, himself, herself, itself, themselves, like
ipse. This is always its force in the nominative of all
numbers, except when it is preceded by the article and
means the same (§ 79, 2). E.g.
Avrbs 6 OTpaTT^yos. the general himself; en avTo7s to7s atyiaXoip,
on the very coasts; iivi(TTr)p.r] avrr], knowledge itself. (See § 142, 4,
N. 2.)
Note. A pronoun with which airos agrees is often omitted ; as
Tavra eTToifire avroi (sc. v/xfl?), you did this yourselces ; nXeva-Ttov els
ravras avrols efijBaaiv (sc. vplv)^ you must sail^ emharli'ing on these
yourselces {in jierson). So avrbs e(j)r) (ipse dixit), himself (the master)
said it.
2. The oblique cases of auro? are the ordinary personal
pronouns of the third person. E.g.
^Tparrjyov avrbv aivebei^e, he designaterl him as general. See four
other examples in Xen. Anah. i. 1, 2 and 3.
For /xiV, VLP, and o-c^e, see § 79, 1, Notes 3 and 4.
Note. The oblitpie cases of alros are often used where the
indirect reflexives (§ 144, 2) might stand, and sometimes even where
the direct reflexives (§ 146) would be allowed; as djiXcos rrjv eavTov
yvoofiijv drrecfiaiveTo '2(i)KpdTr]s npos tovs ofiiKovvTas avrco ySoci'ak'S used to .
declare his oum opinion plainly to those who conversed with him, where
ol might have been used (Xen. Mem. iv. 7, 1); but in i. 2, 3, we
have eXiri^eiv eiroiei tovs avvbiaTpi^ovras eavra. The union" of an
intensive and a personal pronoun in avTos explains this freedom of
usage.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 146. The reflexive pronouns refer to the subject of
the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a de-
pendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading
verb, — i.e. they are indirect reflexives. E.g-.
Tvcodi a-avTou, know thyself ; enear(f)a^ev eavrov, he sleto himself ;
Ta apia-Ta ^ovXeueaBe vfilp avrols, take the best counsel for yourselves.
§ 147.] PRONOUNS. 207
*0 rvpavvo<! vofii^ei tovs noKiras virrjpcTf^p eavr^, the tyrant thinks that
the cilizens are his own sercanls. (See § 145, 2, Note.)
Notp: 1. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word
which is not the subject; as otto cravTov eyco o-e SiSa^w, / will teach
you from your own case {from yourself). In fact, these pronouns
correspond almost exactly in their use to the English reflexives,
myself thyself, himself &c.
Note 2. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for
the first or second; as 6eT fjp.as dvcpeadai iavTovsj we must ask our-
selves.
Note 3. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal
(§81); dLaXeyofieOa r]yLlv avrols, we discourse ivith one another (i.e.
among ourselves).
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 147. The possessive pronouns are generally equiva-
lent to the possessive genitive of the personal pronouns.
Thus r}/jL6T6po(; irarrip^ =z 6 Trarrjp '^fiwv, OUT father.
The possessive is regularly preceded by the article.
See § 167, 1; § 141, N. 1 (c); and below, N. 4.
Note 1. The possessive is occasionally equivalent to the ohjcctiv^
genitive of the personal pronoun ; as jj eV?) evvoia, which commonly
means my good-will {towards others), rarely means yood-ivill (showii)
to me.
Note 2. In Attic prose, o-c^tVfpor, their, is always (directly or
indirectly) reflexive, and 6s, his, her, its, is not used at all. (See
§ 144, 2.)
Note 3. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive genitive
(§ 167, 1) the words my father can be expressed in Greek in five
forms: 6 epos narrip, 6 narrip 6 epos, Trarrjp 6 e^os (§ 142, 1, 2), 6 narrjp
pov, and (after another word) pov 6 narrjp (as e^j; pov 6 Trarrjp). So
6 aos iraTTjp, &c.
Note 4. Our own, your own (when your refers to more than one),
and their own are generally expressed by rjpeTepos, vperfpos, and
a-cfiercpos, with avrcov in apposition with f]pa>v, vpwv, or o-c^wi/ implied
in the possessive (§ 137, N. 1); as top riperepov avrav narcpa, our own
father; rrj vpcrepa avrav prjrpi, to your oion mother; tovs (r(fieTepovs
avrav naidas, their oivn children. In the third person iavrcov can be
used; as tovs iavTav iraibas (also (r(f)a>v avTwv iralbas, without the
article) ; but very seldom rjpoiv (or vpav) avrtoi/.
In the singular, expressions like tov epov avrov Trarepa for top
ipxwTov narepa, &c. are poetic.
208 SYNTAX. [§148.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 148. OvTO<; and oSe, this, generally refer to what
is near in place, time, or thought ; i/celvo<;, Ihat, refers to
what is more remote.
Note 1. The distinction between ovros and oSe, both of which
coiTespond to our this, must be learned by practice. In the histo-
rians, ovTos (with TOLuvTos, ToaovTos, and ovtoh) frequently refers to
a speech just made, while oSe (with roioabe, roo-oaSf, and Side) refei'S
to one about to be made; as rdde elnev, he spoke as follows, but ravra
€i7r€v, thus he spoke (said after the speech).
Note 2. Ovtos is sometimes an exclamation; as ovtos, tI irouh ;
You there ! what are you doing 1
Note 3. The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the
unemphatic demonstrative which is often used in English as the
antecedent of a relative, as 1 saio those who were present. Hei*e a
participle with the article is generally used; as elbov tov^ Trapovras;
if a demonstrative is used (eldov tovtovs ol nap^aav, J saw these men
who were present), it has special emphasis (§ 152, N. 3). A relative
with omitted antecedent sometimes expresses the sense required ; as
elbov ovs eXa/3ej/, / saw (those) whom he took (§ 152).
Note 4. ToCro /xcV . . . tovto be, first . . . secondly, partly . . .
partly, is used nearly in the sense of to fieu . . . to de (§ 143, 1, N. 1),
especially by Herodotus.
For ovTotri, odi, eKcivoai, ovTcoa-i, coSi, &c., see § 83, N. 2.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
§ 149. 1. The interrogative rt? ; who ? what ? may-
be either substantive or adjective ; as t/W? elSov ; whom
did I see ? or rtm? dvSpa<; elhov ; what men did I see ?
2. Tt? may be used both in direct and in indirect
questions ; as rt ^ovXerac ; what does he want ? ipayra tl
^ovXeaOe, he asks what you want (§ 241, 1).
In indirect questions, however, the relative oaTis is more common ;
as cpcoTa o TL ^ovXeade.
Note. The same principles apply to the pronominal adjectives
7ro(roy, irolos, &C. (§ 87, 1.)
§151.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 209
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
§ 150. The indefinite rU generally means some, any,
and may be either substantive or adjective ; as tovto
Xeyec tc<;, some one says this ; avOpwirot; ti^, some man.
It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a or a7i ;
as elhov dvdpcoTrov rcva, I saw a certain man, or I saw a
man.
Note. Occasionally rls means every one, like rrai ns; as €v fiev
Tis 86pv 6T]^da6<Ot let every one sharpen well his spear. Horn.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
§ 151. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender
and number ; but its case depends on the construction of
the clause in which it stands. U.y,
EiSoi/ Tovs avBpas ot varepov rjXOov, I saw the men who came after-
wards ; oi avbpes otis fides dnfjXdov, the men whom you saw went away.
Note 1. The relative follows the person of the antecedent; as
vpe7s oi TOVTO 7roi6tT6, you who do this ; eya os tovto iirolrjaa, 1 who
did this.
Nc^TE 2. (a) A relative referring to several antecedents follows
the rule given for predicate adjectives (§ 138, N. 2). It may be
plural if it refers to a collective noun (§ 138, N. 3) ; as to nXijOos
otnep BiKacrovaiv, the multitude who will Judge.
(b) On the other hand, oa-ns, whoever, may have a plural ante-
cedent ; as ndvTa o ri ftovXovTai, everything, whatsoever they want.
Note 3. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes used
as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (§ 140); as koI bs devruTos
^\df, and he came second; 6 yap yepas eVrt $av6vTa>v, for this is the
right of the dead.
A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the
Platonic 7 §' o?, said he (where rj is imperfect of r)pi, say). So /cat
or, and he, koL ol, and they, and (in Herod.) 6s koi os, tiiis man and
that. (Compare t6v koL t6v, § 143, 2.) So also 6s peu . . . os Se, in
the oblique cases, may be used for 6 ph . . . 6 8e.
Note 4. In the Epic and Lyric poets the enclitic tc is often
appended to relative words without affecting their meaning; as ovk
210 SYNTAX. [§ 152.
dteis a T€ <f)r}(rt ; dost thou not perceive what he says ? Sometimes it
seems to make the relative more indefinite, like tis in ocrris, whoever ^
quicumque.
But olos T€ in Attic Greek means able, capable, like Bvvaros, being
originally elliptical for toiovtos olos, such as, and re having no
apparent force.
Omission of the Antecedent.
§ 152, The antecedent of a relative may be omitted
when it can easily be supplied from the context, especially
if it is indefinite (§ 229). U.g.
"EXa^ev a e^ovXero, he took what he wanted ; fTraOev onoaovs edvvaro,
he persuaded as many as he could ; a firj olda oide otofxai (IShai, what
I do not know I do not even think J know; eyu) koi hv iyoi Kparo) ^evov-
fi€v irapa aoi, I and those whom I command will remain with you.
In such cases it is a mistake to say that ravra, e/cfhoi, &c. are
understood: see N. 3. The relative clause here really becomes a
substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself.
Note 1. Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antecedent;
as ^X6cv ore rovTo tidev, he came when he saw this (for the^i, when).
Note 2. The following expressions belong here: — eariv ot,
some (§ 135, N. 5), more common than the regular el(r\v ot, sunt
qui, there are (those) who; €v loi (from eVt, = evfan or eveiai, and o1),
some; iviore (evt and orf), sometimes: fo-rtv ov, somewhere:
tariv fj, in some way ; eariv ottcos, somehow.
Note 3. When a clause containing a relative with omitted ante-
cedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a
demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted ante-
cedent ; as a (^ov\€To ravra eXa^ev, what he wanted, that he took,
entirely different from ravra a {jSovXcro eXo^ev, he took these (definite)
things, which he wanted; a TToiflv alaxpov, ravra vo/ii^e H-V^^ Xtyau
etvai KoXov, what it is base to do, this believe that it is not good even to say
(here ravra is not the antecedent of a, which is indefinite and is not
expressed). See § 148, N. 3.
Assimilation and Attraction.
§ 153. When a relative would naturally be in the
accusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimi-
lated to the case of its antecedent if this is a genitive or
dative. E.g.
\
§154.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 211
*Ek t5>v TroXfwi; cav ex«, from the cities which he holds (for as exei) ;
To7sdya6ois ols c'xo/xei', with the good things which we have (for d exo-
fi€v) . This is often called attraction.
Note 1. When an antecedent is omitted which (if it could have
been expressed) would have been a genitive or dative, the assimila-
tion still takes place ; and a preposition which would have belonged
to the antecedent passes over to the relative ; as efijjXcoo-e tovto ols
enpaTTe, he showed this bg what he did (like e«6tWs a) ; avv ols e'x^
TO. aKpa KaTaXr)\lrQfxai, I icill seize the heights with the men whom I have
(as if it were avv rols dvdpdaip ovs ex^) '•< ovSev cjv ^ovXeaBe npa^ere,
you will do none of the things which you wish (like (Kelvcov a). See
§ 148, N. 3.
Note 2. A relative is very seldom assimilated from any other
construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case
than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; as av ^Tri'o-ret
TToXXous, many of those whom he distrusted (like eKeivav ols). Even the
nominative may be assimilated; sls ^XdnTfadai dcf) a>v rjp.lv napeaKeva-
trrai, to be injured by what has been prepared by us (like dn-' eKeiv(OP a).
Thuc.
Note 3. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs ; as
BLeKopi^ovTo ev6vs 66ev vnc^iOevro Traidas KaiyvvaiKas, they immediately
brought over their children and women from the places in which they had
placed them for safety (where oBev, from which, stands for cKelSev of,
from the places whither). Thuc.
Note 4. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the case
of the relative, when this immediately follows ; ascXfyopon TrdvTcov
Ziv deovrat irfnpayoTfs eUv, they said that they had done all things which
they needed (where irdvTcov hv for Trdvra hv is very irregular) .
This inverted assimilation takes place in olbeXs oaris ov, every-
body^ in which ovhfis follows the case of the relative; as ovbevi 6t<^
ovK dTTOKpiverai (for ovdeis ioTiv oro)), he replies to everybody.
Note 5. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions
with ofos-; as xapiC^adai oia aoi dv8pi, to please a man like you (for
ToiovTco oios av).
§ 154. The antecedent is often attracted into the rela-
tive clause, and agrees with the relative. E.g,
Mr] dc^eKr^aBc vpav avrStv rjv K€Krrjcr3c So^av KaXrjv, do not take
from yourselves the good reputation which you have gained (for rr]V
KoKrjv do^av fjv KeKTrjade) : here notice the omission of the article.
Even the subject of a verb may be attracted ; as o'tx^rai (pevyoav bv
^yfs p,dpTvpaj the witness lohom you brought (for 6 p-dprvs ov rjycs) has
run aivay.
Note. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (§ 153);
as dp.a6eaTaToi i(TT€ hv eyw olba 'EXKfjvcov you air 'he most ignorant of
212 SYNTAX. ^ [§155.
the Greeks whom I Icnow ; J^ ^? to irpwrov to-x^ yvvaiK6s, from the wife
which he took first ; avv § ei^c bwdfiei, with the force lohich he had
(for (Tvv TTJ 8vvdfJLei Tjv il)(ev).
Kelative in Sxclamations, &.c.
§ 155, Oto9, 6Vo9, and cw? are used in exclamations ;
as 6 a a irpdyfiara ep(;et9, how much trouble you have!
CO? ao-T6to9, how witty !
For the relative in indirect questions see § 149, 2.
Relative not repeated.
§ 156, A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in
the same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pro-
noun commonly takes its place. E.g.
'E/ceii/ot Tocvvv, ols ovk i)(api^ov6^ ol XeyovTes ovS' e(f)i\ovv avrovs
toanep vpds ovtoi vvv, those men, then, whom the orators did not try to
gratify, and whom they did not love as these now love you (lit. nor did
they love them as, &c.). Dem. Here avrovs is used to avoid repeating
the relative in a new case, ovs-
Note. Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is under-
stood in the latter part of a sentence; as ^Apialos de, bu fipels rjdeXopfv
^aa-Ckia KaBiaTiivai,, Ka\ edoiKap-ev koI i\d^op,€v Tncrrd, and Ariaeus,
whom we wished to make king, and Qo whom) we gave and (Jrom
whom) we received pledges^ &c. Xen.
THE CASES.
Remark. The Greek is descended from a language which had
eight cases, — an ablative, a locative, and an instrumental, besides the
five found in Greek. The functions of the ablative were chiefly-
absorbed by the genitive; those of the instrumental and locative
chiefly by the dative.
I. NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
§ 157. 1. The nominative is used chiefly as the sub-
ject of a finite verb (§ 134, 1), or in the predicate after
verbs signifying to be, &c. (§ 136).
§ 159.] ACCUSATIVE. 213
2. The vocative, with or without w, is used in address-
ing a person or thing ; as w avSpe^ 'AOrjvalot,^ O men of
Athens I aKovecf;, Alax^vT] ; dost thou hear, Aeschines ?
Note. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations, and
even in other expressions, where the vocative is more common ; as
<5/ioi iyoi beiKos, O wrelc/ied me ! So r} UpoKvq cK^aive, Procne, come
out!
II. ACCUSATIVE.
Remark. The primary purpose of the- accusative is to denote the
nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or indirect
object denoted by the dative. It thus bears the same relation to a verb
which the genitive generally bears to a noun. The object denoted by the
accusative may be the external object of the action of a transitive verb, or
the internal (cognate) object which is often implied in the meaning of even
an intransitive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions,
as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other single
category.
Accusative of Direct CExternal> Object.
§ 158. The direct object of the action of a transitive
verb is put in the accusative ; as rovro aco^ei, rjfjLa^;, this
preserves us ; Tavra TrotovfjLev, we do these things.
Note 1. Many verbs which are transitive in English, and
govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in Greek.
(See § 171, § 184, 2, and § 188, 1, N. 2.)
Note 2. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransi-
tive in English ; as ofiovixaL tovs Biovs, 1 will swear hy the Gods ;
ndvras eXaOev, he escaped the notice of all.
Note 3. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nonns occasionally
take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive
(§ 167, 3; § 180); as emo-Trifioves rjaap to. tt poa-rjKovra, they were
acquainted with what was pi'oper. Xen. So ra fierecopa cfypovTKTTTjSt
one who ponders on the things above (like (ppovri^oiv). Plat.
Cognate Accusative (Internal Object).
§ 159. Any verb whose meaning permits it may take
an accusative of kindred signification. This accusative
repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may
follow intransitive as well as transitive verbs. E.g.
214 SYNTAX. [§159.
"HSo/uai ras fxeyLCTTas r}Bovds, I enjoy the greatest pleasures. Evrv-
Xov(n TovTo TO €VTv\T)ixa, tltey enjoy this good fortune. So ttltttciv
neo-Tjfia, to Jail a Jail ; voaov voaeiv or voaov acrOevelv or voaov KafivfLv,
to suffer under a disease ; dfxdpTrjfjLa afxaprdveLu, to commit an error {to
sin a s«n) ; dovXeiav dovXevetv, to be subject to slavery; dySiva dycovi-
^eaOai, to undergo a contest: ypa<pr}v ypdcpeaOat, to bring an indict-
ment : ypa(f)r)v diojKdv, to prosecute an indictment ; diKtjv o^Xeti/, to lose
a laiDSuit ; vlktjv viKav, to gain a victory; p-dxqv vikclv, to gain a battle;
7Top.7rr]v nepircLv, to Jorm or conduct a procession ; TrXrjyfjv rvitTeiv, to •
strike a blow.
Remark. It will be seen that this construction is far more ex-
tensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusatives
of kindred formation and meaning, as vUr^v pikuv, to gain a victory ;
but also those of merely kindred meaning, as pdxqv vikuv, to gain a
battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the verb to
one of many applications ; as ^OXvfxma vlkuv, to gain an Olympic vic-
tory ; ydfjLovs ia-Tidv, to give a wedding Jeast ; ^rjcfiio-pa vimv, to carry a
decree {to gain a victory with a decree) ; to UavaOrjvaia n^ixTreiv, to cele-
brate the Panaihenaea by a procession.
For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive
verb, see § 198.
Note 1. The cognate accusative may follovr adjectives or even
nouns; as KOKoy irda-av KUKiav, bad with all badness; dyaBos rrdaap
dperrjv, good with all goodness: dovXos ras fxeyiaTas dovXeias, a slave
to the direst slavery.
Note 2. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate
accusative, its noun being implied in the verb ; as p.eyd\a dpaprd-
V€iv,{ec. apapTripara) to commit great Jaults ; ravTo, Xvnovp.ai kol ravra
Xa'^P<*>i 1 have the same griejs and the same joys. So tI xph^opai.
TOVTO) ; (= Tiva ;^peiaj/ ;^p^cro/iat ;) what use shall I mati.-. oj this? and
ouSeV xPW^H'"-'- TovTcp, I shall make no use oJ this (§ 188, 1, N. 2).
So xpW'-H-o^ ovSeV, good Jor nothing (N. 1). See § 160, 2, Note.
Note 3. Here belongs the accusative of effect, which expresses
a result beyond the action of the verb, which is effected by that
action; diS Trpea-^evova-t Tr)u elprjvrjv, they negotiate the peace {as am-
bassadors, 7rpeV/3ety), but Trpea^eveiv rrpea-^eiav, to go on an embassy.
Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a stick.
S>o diiter verbs of looking (in poetry) ; as ''A /a?; SeSopKcVm, to look
war {Ares); tj ^ovXtj e^Xe'^e pdnv, the Senate looked mustard.
Note 4. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative and
another object at the same time; as ypd^eo-^ai Tiva ttjv ypa<prju
ravTr]v, to bring this indictment against any orie : r]8iKT)(rapev tovtov
ovbev, we did this man no wrong; TavTa bibaa-Ke /xe, teach me this
(§ 164); Toa-ovTov ex^oi ixOaipo) ere, so great hatred do I Jeel for thee;
Trjv iidxrjv Toi)s ^ap^dpovi viKTjaas, having dejeated the barbarians in the
battle.
§ 160.] ACCUSATIVE. 215
Note 5. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which
follows verbs of motion expressing the ground over tvhich the motion
passes; as 686v Uvai (eKBelv, Tropeveadai, &c.), to go (over) a road ;
ttXcii/ daXaa-a-av, to sail the sea ; opos Kara^aiveiv, to descend a mountain;
&c. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning. See § 179, 2.
Aceusative of Speciflcation.— Adverbial Accusative.
§ 160. 1. The accusative of specification may be
joined with a verb, adjective, noun, or even a whole
sentence, to denote that in respect to which the expression
is used. E.g'.
Tu(^X6? el TO. opfxara, you are blind in your eyes ; koKos to eiSoy,
heauti/ul inform; uTreipot to TrXrjdos, infinite in number; bUaios tov
TpoTTov, Just in his character ; beivol fidxrjv, mighty in battle ; Kapucj ttiv
K((()a\r}v, I have a pain in my head , ras (jipevas vyialveLv, to be sound in
their minds; Sia^cpei tt]v (fyvaiv, he differs in nature; Trorapos, Kvdpos
oi/o/Lia, evpos 8vo likiOpoiv, a river ^ Cydnus by name, of the breadth
of two plethra ; ''EWrjues flat to yevos, they are Greeks by race; koL to.
HLKpa rreipiopaL duo dccov oppdaBai, even in small matters I try to begin
with the Gods.
Note. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche^
or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part ; but
often a character or quality, or any circumstance to which the
meaning of the expression is restricted.
2. An accusative in certain expressions has the force,
of an adverb. E.g-.
TovTov TOV TpoTTov, in this way, thus ; ttjv Taxio-TTjv (sc. 686v), in the
quickest way ; ttju dpxrjv, at frst (with negative, not at all) ; tcXos,
Jinally ; npolKa, as a gift, gratis ; x^pt"* /^'' ^^^^ -'^^^^''^ ^.f' ^^<r)v, in the
manner of; to irpoiTov or irpSnov, at first ; to Xoittou, for the rest ;
TaWuf in other respects ; ovdfv, in nothing, not at all ; tL ; in what^
why ? t\, in any respect, at all ; Tavra, in respect to this, therefore. So
ToijTO pep . . . TovTO 8e (§ 148, N. 4).
Note. Several of these are to be explained by § 160, 1, as
ToXXa, Ti; lohy? rnOra, rouro (with peu and 5c), and sometimes ouScV
and Tt. Some are to be explained as cognate accusatives (see § 159,
Notes 1 and 2), and some are of doubtful origin.
216 SYNTAX. [§ 161.
AccnsatlTe of Extent.
§ 161. The accusative may denote extent of time or
space. E.g,
hi cTTTovhai iviavTov etTovrai, the truce is to he for a year : efidve
rpfiy rjfxepas, he remained three days ; aTre'xei S' tj nXdraia tcov Qtj^cou
(TTadlovs i^dofiTjKovra, and Plataea is seventy stades distant from
Thebes.
Note. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes hoio
long since; rplr-qv rfdrj rjfiepav eTridcdrjfxrjKev, this is the third day
that he has been in town.
A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like rplrov eras tovtl
(this the third year), i.e. two years ago; as dnrjyyeXOr] ^iXinno9 rpirov 7
Teraprop €tos tovtI 'Hpaiov t6i;^o? TroXiopKOiP, two or three years ago
Philip was reported to be besieging Heraion Teichos.
Terminal Accusative (Poetic>.
§ 162. In poetry, the accusative without a preposition
may denote the place or object towards ivhich motion is
directed. E.g.
Mvrja-TTJpas d(})lK€To, she came to the suitors. Odyss. ^Ave'^rj
fieyav ovpavbv Ov\v firrov re. II. To KoiXov " A p y o s /3as (pvyds,
going as an exile to the hollow Argos. Soph.
In prose a preposition would be used.
Accusative after Ni] and Md.
§ 163. The accusative follows the adverbs of swear-
ing vT) and /ia, by.
An oath introduced by vri is affirmative ; one introduced by
fta is negative ; as vi] rov Ata, yes, hy Zeus; fxa tov Ata, no, by
Zeus.
Note 1. When /ua is preceded by val^ yes, the oath is affirmative ;
as va\, fia Ala, yes^ by Zeus.
Note 2. Ma is sometimes omitted when a negative precedes;
as ov, T6vb"'0\vfinov, no, by this Olympus.
165.] ACCUSATIVE. U 'Ij'^' -^ ' 217 §^
\<\ ' ^A
Two Accusatives with one Verb)^«^< • .{ T
§ 164, Verbs signifying to ask, to demanct^^i^l ^ahA.J^^
to remind, to clothe or unclothe, to conceal, to deprive^
and to divide, may take two object accusatives. E.g.
'Eai/ Tty (T€ ravra i^€Ta(rj^ {f any one shall ask you these questions ;
jLieXXere tovs Beovi aiTflv^dyadd, you are about to ask hlessings of the
Gods; TOVS TToidas rfju fiov(TiKf)v 6iSao-«6t, he teaches the boys music;
TT)v ^vfj.fxa)(^iav dva/jLiixprjCTKovTes tovs ' Adrjvaiovs, reminding the Athenians
oj the alliance ; eKbvei e/^e Tr)v (adrjra, he strips me of my dress ; (jltj fxe
Kpv\j/ijs TovTo, do not conceal thi'i from me; rrjv Beov tovs o-recjiavovs
a-ecrvXrjKaaiv, they have robbed the Goddess of her crowns ; to o-Tpdrevfia
Kareveifxe Scofieica fieprj, he divided the army into twelve parts (Jie made
ttvelce divisions of the army).
In many cases, as in the third and last examples, one of the
accusatives is cognate; see § 159, N. 4.
Note 1. In poetry some other verbs have this construction ;
thus xpoa viCfTo oXfirjv, he washed the dried spray f^om his sJdn; so
TifKopeladai Tiva alp.a, to punish one for blood (shed).
Note 2. Many verbs of this class sometimes have other con-
structions. Thus verbs of depriving may take the genitive of a
person with an accusative of a thing, tlvos n; sometimes the reverse,
Tivd Tivos (neut.). For verbs of reminding, see § 171, 2, N. 3.
Note 3. The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs is
really a cognate accusative; see § 159, N. 4.
§ 165. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say
anything of a person or thing take two accusatives.
E.g.
TavTi fxe noiova-tv, they do these things to me; tI fi elpydao) ; what
didst thou do to me f TrXeitrTa koko. ttjv ttoXii/ iroioijcnv, they do the most
evils to the state. Tavrl ai) roX/uay rjpds Xeyeiv ; dost thou dare to say
these things ofusf Ov (fypovriaTiov o tl epovaiv oi ttoXXoI r)p.ds, we must
not consider what the multitude will say of us.
Note 1. These verbs often take ev or koKcos, well, or kokws^ ill,
instead of the accusative of a thing; tovtovs €v ttouI., he does them
good ; vp-ds kukws ttou'i, he does you harm ; kukcos rjpds Xeyft, he speaks
ill of us.
" The passive form of these expressions is not (v (or KaKS)s) -iroifl-
a&ai, €v (or KOKciys) XcyeaBai, to be done well by, to be spoken well of
&c. ; but ev (or kukSis) Trdaxfiv, to experience good (or evil), and cw
(or KaKa>s) aKoviiv, bene (male) audire, to hear one^s self called.
218 SYNTAX. [§ 166.
Note 2. npao-o-o), do, very seldom takes two accusatives in this
construction, Trotew being generally used. Ev Trpda-o-co and kukcos
npd(raa> are intransitive, meaning to be well off, to be badly off.
Note 3. Verbs signifying to do may take the dative of a person ;
as dya^oi' Ti TToioCcrt r^ TroXet, they do some good to the state.
§ 166. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint,
to make, to consider, and the like, may take a predicate
accusative besides the object accusative. E.g.
Tt TTjP TToXiu Trpoaayopeveis ; what do you call the state f — SO KaXoiiai
fxf TovTo TO ouofia, they call me by this name ; arpaTrjyov avrou diredei^ey
he appointed him general ; evepyerrju top ^iXimrou fjyovpro, they thought
Philip a benefactor ; Trdvrcov beairor-qv iavTov nenoirjKev, he has made
himself master of all.
Note 1. This is the active construction of which the passive
appears in the predicate nominative with passive verbs (§ 136).
Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; as rou? avp.-
fid^ovs TTpodvixovs TToielaOai, to make the allies eager; ray dfxapTiai
fx€yd)<as rjy^v, he considered the faults great.
Note 2. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusa-
tive in apposition with the object accusative ; as eXo/3e tovto blopov,
he took this as a gift ; iinrovs ayeiv Ovp-ara tw rjkim, to bring horses as
offerings to the Sun. Especially an interrogative pronoun may be so
used; as rlvas tovtovs 6pa> ; who are these whom I see f (§ 142, 3.)
Note 3. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the
action of the verb upon its direct object; as naidevfLv nvd (To(f)6v (or
KCKov), to train one {to be) wise (or bad) ; rovy vUls Innoras edida^ev, he
taught his sons to be horsemen. See § 159, N. 3.
Note 4. In the passive, when the object accusative becomes the
subject nominative (§ 197, 1), the predicate accusative (of every
kind) becomes a predicate nominative. See § 136, Rem.; and
§ 137, N. 4.
III. GENITIVE.
Remark. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of
a verb, so the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun.
When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it seems to depend on
the nominal idea which belongs to the verb: thus eiridv/jiC) involves iiridv-
fjuay (as we can say iindvfxu} iTridv/xiav, § 159) ; and in kindvixC) toijtov, I have
a desire for this, the nominal idea preponderates over the verbal. The
Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow either to pre-
ponderate in the construction, and after some verbs it allows both the
accusative and the genitive. In the same general sense the genitive follows
verbal adjectives. It has also uses which originally beloncred to the abla-
tive; for example, with verbs of separation and to exjjress source. (See
Rem. before § 157.)
§ 167.] GENITIVE. 219
Genitive after Xouns CAdnominal GenitiTe>€
§ 167. A noun in the genitive may limit the mean-
ing of another noun, to express various relations, most of
which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in
English. The genitive thus depending on a noun is
called adnominal.
The most important of these relations are the following : —
1. Possession: as ^ tov Trarpos otKta, the father^ s house;
vjfxuiv yj Trarpt?, our country. So rf tov Atds, the daughter of
Zeus; TO. Twi/ Oeojv, the things of the Gods (§ 141, Note 4).
The Possessive Genitive.
2. The Subject of an action or feeling : as ri tov S-qfiov
ewota, the good-will of the people (i.e. which the people feel).
The Subjective Genitive.
3. The Object of an action or feeling : as Sea to Uava-a-
vLov /Ato-os, owing to the hatred of (i.e. felt against) Pausanias ;
at TOV x^'-H'^^^^ Kaprepr^crct?, the endurance of the Winter. So
TMV Oeuiv opKOL, oaths (sworn) in the name of the Gods (as we
sa}' ^eous ofxvvvaL, § 158, N. 2). The Objective Genitive.
4. Material, including that of which anything consists :
as /Souiv dyiXr], a herd of cattle; aXcros rjjxepwv SeVSpcov,
a grove of cultivated trees ; Kprjvr) ri8€o<s vSuto^, a spring of fresh
wafer; 8uo xoiVtices a\<f)LT<j)v, two quarts of meal. Genitive
of Material.
5. Measure, of space, time, or value: as Tptwv rjfjLcpwv
68o9, a journey of three days ; okto) trraStwv T€txo9, a wall of
eight stades (in length) ; TpiaKovTa TaXdvTiov ova-La, an estate
of thirty talents; 8iKat ttoWwv TaXdvTwv, lawsuits of (i.e.
involving) many talents. Genitive of Measure.
6. The Whole, after nouns denoting a part : as iroXXol
Twj/ prjTopoiVy many of the orators; dvrjp tCjv iXevOepuiv,
SYNTAX. [§ 168.
a man (i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive.
(See also § 168.)
These six classes are not exhaustive ; but they will give a general idea
of these relations, many of Avhich it is difficult to classify.
Note. Examples like *A6r}vSiv ttoXis, ihe city of Athens^ Tpoirjf
TTToXUdpov, the city of Troy^ in which the genitive is used instead of
apposition, are poetic.
§ 168. The partitive genitive (§ 167, 6) may follow
all nouns, pronouns, adjectives (especially superlatives),
participles with the article, and adverbs, which denote a
part. E.g;.
Oi ayaOoi rwv dvOpanav, the good amove/ the wen; 6 Tjpiav^ rov
dpiBfiov, ihe ha f of the number; avdpa ol8a tov Srjpov, J know a
man of the people : tois dpavlrais rwv vavrav, to the upper benches of
the sailors; ovdels twv naidcov, no one of the children; navTcov ra)v
prjropcov deivoraros, the most eloquent of all the orators ; 6 ^ovXofxevos
T(ov *A6r]vaicov, any one 7vho p leases of the A then ians ; dla yvvaiKav,
divine among women (Horn.); ttoC tt}? 7^s ; ubi terrarumV where on
the earth? ris twv ttoXltc^v; who of the citizens? dls r^y rjpipas^
twice a day ; eiy tovto dvolas, to this pitch of folly ; €v rovrto napa-
aKfvfjs, in this state of preparation ; a pev dimKei rov '^r)(f)iapaTos
ravT eariv, these are the parts of the decree ichich he prosecutes (lit.
ichat parts of the decree he prosecutes, &c,) So opdorara dvOpwrrcov
Xeyety, thou speakest as the most correct of men (jnost correctly j)f men) \
ore hfivoraTos aavrov ravra rjaOa, when you were at the height of your
power in these matters. See § 142, 2, N. 2.
Note 1. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender
with a dependent partitive genitive. But sometimes, especially
when it is' singular, it is neuter, agreeing with pipo^, part, under-
stood; as TOiv TTo\€p,ia>v TO TToXu (for ol TToXXoi), thc greater part of the
enemy.
Note 2. A partitive genitive sometimes depends on tI? or p^pos
understood; as ecfyaaav cmpiyvvvaL a-(f)a)V re npos cKeivovs kqi eKeivojv
npos favTovs, they said that some of their own men had mixed with them,
and some of them with their own men (tivus being understood with
o-^wi/ and eKeluoov). Compare § 169, 2; § 170, 2.
Note 3. Similar to such phrases as nov y^s ; els tovto dvolas, &c.,
is the use of exco and an adverb with the genitive; as ttcos e^ei?
^o^rjs; in what state of opinion are you ? ovtco Tponov ex^is, this is
your character (lit. in this state of character) \ as elxe toxovs, as fast
as he could (lit. in the condition of speed in which he was)] so cos elx^
TTofieoi/; €v ex^tv (\)peva>v^ to be right in his mind.
§ 170.] GENITIVE. 221
Genitive after Verbs.
§ 169. 1. Verbs signifying to be, to become, or to
belong- take a genitive which is equivalent to the pos-
sessive or the partitive genitive. E.g-.
'O vofios ovTos ApoKovToi eariv, this law is Dracoes. Ueviau
cf)epeiu oi/ rravros, aXX' dvdpos (to<\>ov^ to bear ptwerly is not in the
poicer of every one, but in that of a wise man. Aapeiov yiyvovrai 8vo
nalSes, two sons are born {belonging) to Darius. Tovratv yeuov fioi,
become (one) of these for me.
2. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to
7nake, to consider, and the like, which generally take
two accusatives (§ 166), may take a partitive genitive in
place of the predicate accusative. E.g,
*Efi€ Bks ra>v irfircicrp.evwv, put me dozen as (one) of those who are
persuaded. Tovro rrjs rjnerepas dfXfXeias av m Belrj dtKaiojs, any one
might Justly consider this to belong to our neglect.
Note. When these verbs become passive, they still retain the
genitive ; as 26\(ov tcou inTu troc^La-rSiv €KXrj6rj, Solo7i luas called
(one) of the Seven Sages.
3. The genitive after verbs sometimes expresses other
relations of the adnominal genitive. E.g.
To T^ixos (TTabicop rjv oktcd, the wall was (one) of eight stades (m
length) ; eneidav eroiv fj ti? rpidicovTa, when one is thirty years old : —
Genitive of Measnre. Ot artcjiavoL pohoav ^(rav. the crowns were
(made) of roses ; to relxos TreTroirjTai \i6ov, the wall is built of stone ;
— Genitive of Material. Ov tmv KUKovpycov oiktos (sc. earip), there
is 710 pity felt for the evil-doers; — Objective Genitive.
§ 170. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action
affects the object on/t/ in part. E.g.
TIep.iT€i Tcov At; 8 0)1/, he sends some of the Lydians (but •tripirfi rovs
Avbovs, he sends the Lydians). Uivei rov o'ivov, he drinks of the wine.
T^s y^s €T€fiov, they ravaged (some) of the land.
2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying
to share (i.e. to give or take a parf) or to enjoy. E.g.
MfrfT^oi' T^? Xeiap, they shared in the booty; so often fieraTrotei-
crOai Tiuos, to claim a share of anything (cf. § 171, 1) ; dnoXavofiev riov
222 SYNTAX. [§ 171.
aya6a)Vy we enjoy the blessings (i.e. our share of them'); ovt(os ovato
TovTOij/, thus may est thou enjoij these, iio ov TrpocrrjKei ixoi ttjs dpxrjs,
I have no concern in the gocernment ; fiereaTL not. tovtov, I have a share
in this (§ 184, 2, N. 1).
Note. Many of these verbs also take an accusative. Mfre^w
and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like fi^pos, i>art ;
as 'i<Tov peTe^eL eKaaros tov ttXovtov fiepos, each has an e(/ual share
of the wealth (where pepovs would mean that each has only a part of
a share). This use of p.4pos shows the nature of the genitive after
these verbs.
§ 171. 1. The genitive follows verbs signifying lo take
hold of^ lo toucli^ lo claim, lo aim al, lo hit, to attain, to
miss, lo make trial of, to begin. E.g.
*EXa/3ero rrjs ;^e£poff avrov, he took his hand; ovre Trupo? ovre
epcoTos €Kav ciTTTopai, I wiliingly touch neither f re nor love; t7)s
^vv€(r€0)s peTairoiovurati they lay claim to sagacity; aTO)(d^€a6ai rtov
dvOpoiTTcov, to aim at the men: ttjs dper^s e(j)iKeadai, to attaiii to
virtue; ervx^ rrji 8ikt]9, he met with justice ; o-^aXXfrat ttjs eXnldos,
he fails of (^attaining) liis hope ; neipdadai rov rcixovs, to make an
attempt on the wall; ov noXepov ap)(op€v, we do not begin war.
Note. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative, with
a genitive of the part taken hold of; as 'fka^ov rrjs C(^vr)s Tov^Opourav,
they seized Orontas by his girdle.
2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to taste, to
smell, lo hear, to perceive, to understand, to remember,
lo forget, to desire, to care for, lo spare, to neglect, to
admire, to despise. E.g.
^EXevBcplrjs yevadpevoi, having tasted of freedom (Hdt.) ; Kpop-
pvoiv 6(T(ppaivopai, I smell onions; ^covrjs aKoveiv, to hear a voice;
alaOdveadai, pepvriadai, or e7n\au3dvea6ai tovtov, to perceive, remem-
ber, or forget these things; avuievai dWrjXcov, to understand one
another; Ta>v padrjpdrcov (niOvpa, 1 long for learning ; xpr)pdT(tiv
(ficldeaOm, to he sparing of money ; do^rjs dpcXelv, to neglect opinion ;
ayapat Trjs dperrjs, I admire virtue; KaTa(f)pov€lu tov Kivdvvov, to
despise danger (cf. § 173, 2, Note).
Note 1. Verbs of hearing, learning, &c. may take an accusative
of the thing heard, &c., and a genitive of the person heard from; as
TovT(ov ToiovTovs dKovca Xoyovs, I hear such sayings from these men ;
TTvdeaOai tovto vpav, to learn this from you. The genitive here belongs
under § 176, 1. A sentence may take the place of the accusative;
HH TovTcdv iiKove Ti Xeyovcriv, hear from these what they say. See also
dvodexopaL, accept (a statement) fro?n, in the Lexicon.
§ 172.] GENITIVE. 223
Note 2. The impersonals jxeXei and fierafieXei take the geni-
tive of a thing with tlie dative of a person (§ 184, 2, N. 1); as
fieXei fxoi TovTov, I care for this ; ^(TOfxe'KcL <toi tovtov, thou repentesl of
this. Upoar]K€i, it concerns, has tlie same construction, but the geni-
tive belongs under § 170, 2.
Note 3. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a
person and the genitive of a thing; as fir] /x' dvafivrjo-rjs kukc^v, do not
remind me of ecils (i.e. cause vie to remember them)'^ tovs Traidas ycv-
areov mfiaros, we must make the chihlren taste blood.
But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives (§ 164).
Remark. Most of the verbs of § 171 may take also the accusa-
tive. See the Lexicon. *Ofco, emit smell (smell of), may take two
genitives ; as t^s K€(f)a\rjs o^co /nupou, / emit a smell of perfume (§ 170, 1)
from my head.
3. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule or
to command. E.g-.
"Kpcos Tap Bfoiv ^acrCKfVfi, Love in I'ing of the Gods ; UdXvKpaTrjs
2dfiov €Tvpdvu€i, Pobjcrates teas tyrant of Samos ; 6tt\ltQ>v Koi
inTTfoiv eo-TpaTr)y€i, he was general of infantry and cavalry; rjye'iTai
nauTos Kol epyov /cat Xoyovj he directs everything that is done and
said.
This construction is sometimes connected with that of § 175, 2.
But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or rider implied
in the verb, while there it depends on the idea of comparison (see
Remark before § 167).
Note. For other cases after many of these verbs, as the dative
after fiyeofiai and dvda-aa, see the Lexicon.
§ 172. 1. Verbs signifying fulness and ivanl take tlie
genitive of material (§ 167, 4). E.g'.
Xprjpdrcov (vrropfi, he has abundance of money ; oi rvpavvoi inai-
vov omoT€ (Tnavi^fTe, you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise.
2. Verbs signifying to fill take the accusative of the
thing filled and the genitive of material. E.g.
"Y bar OS rrjv KiikiKO wXrjpovv, to fill the cup icilh icater.
Note 1. Atofiat, T want, besides the ordinary construction (as
TovTcov ideovTo, they icere in want of these), may take a genitive of the
person with a cognate accusative of the thing; as 8eT}<Top.at. vpoiv
p.€Tpiav derjaiv, I icill make of you a moderate request. See § 159, N. 4.
Note 2. (a) Aft may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an
accusative) of the person besides the genitive; as Sel /not tovtov,
224 SYNTAX [§ 173.
/ need this; ov ttoXXoC ttopov fic Set, / have no need of much labor
(cf. ov del fi€ ikdelv).
(b) Besides the common phrases ttoWov del, it is far from it,
oXiyov del, it wants little of it, we have in Demosthenes ovde ttoX-
\ov del (like ttuvtos del), it icants everything of it (lit. it does not even
leant much). For oXiyov and fiiKpov, almost, see the Lexicon.
Causal Genitive.
§ 173. 1. The genitive often denotes a cause, especially-
after verbs expressing emotions, as praise or dispraise^
pity, anger, envy, or revenge. E.g.
TovTovs T^9 ToXyLT^s Bavfxd^eLv, to admire these for their courage ;
evdaiyovl^d) ere tov rpoirov, I congratulate you on your character;
TOVTOVS olKreipco TT]s voa-Qv, I pit g these for their disease ; Tav ddiKr}'
fiaTcov opyi^eoSai avTols, to be angry ivith them for their offences;
^rjXovvTes Ttjv noXiv tt]s Mapa6wvi fidxv^^ envying the city for the battle
at Marathon; tovtov aoi ov (pdovrjo-o), I shall not grudge you this;
TOVTOVS Trjs aprrayrjs Tip.wprjo-ao'Oai, to take vengeance on these for the
robbery. Most of these verbs may take also an object accusative.
N'oTE 1. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive
(where eveKa is generally expressed) ; as t?)? tcov 'EXXrjvav eXevOepias,
for the liberty of the Greeks (Dem. Cor. § 100). See § 262, 2.
Note 2. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive; as dvTnroiel-
trdai TO) ^acriXel ttjs dpxrjs, to diymte with the king about his dominion ;
EvpoXTTos r]ix<pi(T^rjTr)(Tev 'Epex^el Ttjs TToXecos, Eumolpus disputed with
Erechtheus about the city (i.e. disputed its possession with him).
2. Verbs signifying to accuse^ to prosecute, to convict,
to acquit, and to condemn take a causal genitive denoting
the crime. E.g.
AiTiapai avTov tov (f)6vov, I accuse him of the murder; eypdyjraTO
avTov Trapavofxcov, he indicted him for an illegal proposition ; diwKei
pe dtapcov, he prosecutes me for bribery {for gifts); KXeava dapoiv
eXovTes Koi kXottijs, having convicted Clean of bribery and theft ;
€(f)evye Trpodoa-ias, he ivas brought to trial for treachery, but dnec^vye
Trpodoaias, he teas acquitted of treachery ; ttoXXwv ol Trarepes rjpap
prjdia-pov Bdvarov KaTeyvcoaav, our fathers condemned many to death
for favoring the Persians (for TvoXXa>v and 6dvaTov see Note).
Note. Compounds of Kara of this class commonly take a
genitive of the person, which depends on the Kard. They may
§175.] GENITIVE. 225
take also an object accusative denoting the crime or punishment.
Olbfis avTos avTov Karqyoprjtrf tranoTe^ no man ever himself accused
himself: KaTo^evhovral fiov [jLeyaXa, they tell great falsehoods against
me; ^oi^ov ddiKiav KaTrj-yopelv, to charge injustice upon Phoebus;
€via>v erreKTav vfxas aKpircov Odvarov KaTa\lfr](f)i(ra(T6ai, they persuaded
you to pass {sentence of) death upon some without a trial.
Verbs of condemning may take three cases, as in the last example
under § 173, 2.
3. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations^ to
give the cause of the astonishment. E.g.
'Q noVetSoi/, rris rexvrjs ! Poseidon, lohat a trade! *fl Zcv
fiaaiXfv, rrjs XenTorrjTos Tuiv (j)p€vS)v ! King Zeus! what subtlety
of mind !
Genitive of Separation, of Comparison, of Source.
§ 174. The genitive may denote that from which any-
thing is separated or distinguished.
On this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting
to remove., to restrain^ to release, to abandon, to deprive,
and the like. E.g.
'H vriaos ov nokv Sie'x" rrjs rjireipov, the island is not far distant
from the main-land ; tnio-Trjpr} x<^pi'C'^H'^^V dpeTrjs, knowledge separated
from virtue; \v(t6v p.e dca-p-cov, release me from chains ; eireaxov rrjs
reixv^f ois, they ceased from building the wall : ttoo-wi/ dTrca-Teprjo-de ;
of how much have you been deprived? €7rava-av avrov ttjs arpaTr^ylas,
they deposed him from his command ; ov iravcaOe rrjs fiox&VP^^^^ V^^
do not cease from your rascality. So (Xttov (avra) rov kt) p v kg s pifj
Xchreadai, they told him not to he left behiml the herald (i.e. to follow
close upon him) ; f] fTria-ToiXf), ^v ovtos (ypayjrev cTroXft^^fiv n/xcSi/, the
letter which this man wrote loiihout our knowledge (lit. separated
from us).
For the accusative after verbs of depriving, see § 164.
§ 175. 1. The comparative degree takes the genitive
when rj, than., is omitted. E.g.
KpeiTTav eWt rovrtov, he is better than these; veois to cnydv Kpelrrov
f(TTi Tov XaXeiv, for youth silence is better than prating; jrourjpLa
BoTTov BavcLTov Tpcx^t, wickcdncss runs faster than death.
Note 1. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison
may take a genitive : as hcpoi tovtcov, others tJian these ; varepoi Trjs
226 SYNTAX. [§176.
fidxrjs, too late for (later than) the battle ; t^ va-Tepala r^s fidxrjsy on the
day after the battle. So TpiirXdaiov fjjxav, thrice as muck as we.
Note 2. After rrXeov (TrKelv), more, or eXaaa-ov, less, rj is occasion-
ally omitted without affecting the case; as irefi^co opuls err avrbvy
frXeii/ i^aKoaiov^ rou dpidfiov, I ivill send birds against him, more
than six hundred in number (§ 160). Aristoph.
2. The genitive follows verbs signifying to surpass, to
he inferior.) and all others which imply comparison. E.g,
"AvOpcoTTos ^vveaei vTrepex^i rav aXXcoi/, man surpasses the others in
sagacity; tov ttXtjOov^ nepiylyveadai, to be superior to the multitude;
varepi^fLv Ta>p Kaipwv, to be too late for the opportunities. So Tap
tX'^pf^v vLKdaOai (or rjaadaOai), to be overcome by one''s enemies; but
these two verbs take also the genitive with vno, and the dative.
So Ta>v exOpcov Kparelv, to prevail over one''s enemies, and ttjs OaXdaarjs
Kparfiv, to be master of the sea. Compare the examples under
§ 171, 3.
§ 176. 1. The genitive sometimes denotes the source. E.g,
HovTo €Tvxdv aov, I obtained this from you: tovto efiaOev vfiav, he
learned this from you. Add the examples under § 171, 2, N. 1.
2. In poetry the genitive occasionally denotes the agent
after passive verbs, or is used like the instrumental dative
(§ 188). E.g,.
^Ev^Ai^abf) Kelaai, a as d\6xov (r(j)aye\s Alyicrdov re, thou liest
noiv in Hades, slain by thy ivife and xiegisihus. Eur.
np^o-ai TTvpos drjioio Bvperpa, to burn the gates with destructive
fire. 11.
These constructions would not be allowed in prose.
Genitive after Compound Verbs.
§ 177. The genitive often depends on a» preposition
included in a compound verb. E. g.
UpoKeirai, rrjs 'ArrtK^s oprj pcyoKa, high mountains lie before
Attica; tcop vpcTepoav diKaicov irpotcTTaaOai, to stand in defence of
your rights ; vncpecpavrjaav tov X6(pov, they appeared above the hill;
ovTojs vfiaiv vn€pa\ya>, I grieve so for you ; ent^duTes tov tcixovs,
having mounted the tcall; dtvoTpiirci fie tovtov, it turns me from this.
For the genitive after certain compounds of /card, see § 173, 2,
Note. See also §193.
180.] GENITIVE. 227
Crenltive of Price or Value.
178. The genitive may denote the price or value of a
thing. E.g,
Ao^a ;(/37;/ixarQ>j/ ovK wvrjrr) (sc. ia-rlv), glory is not to he hougJit
with money ; nocrov didaaKct ; for what price does he teach f fiia-dov
vofiovs el(T(fi€pci, he proposes laws for a bribe; 6 dovXos irevre fxvau
Ti[xaTai, the slave is valued at Jive minas. So Tifiarai 8' ovp fioi 6 dvfjp
Bavarovy so the man estimates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes
death as my punishment) . Plat. So also 2^o8piai/ vTr^yoi/ Oavdrovt
they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (cf. § 173, 2).
Note. The genitive depending on a^ios, worth, worthy, and its
compounds, or on d^Loa, think worthy, is the genitive of price or
value ; as a^ios eari davdrov, he is ivorthy of death / QefiiaTOKXea rav
fieyiartiiv r)^i(o(rau, they thought Themistocles tvorthy of the highest
honors. So sometimes armos and driad^a take the genitive. (See
§ 180, 1.)
Genitive of Time and Place.
§ 179. 1. The genitive may denote the time within
ivhich anything takes place. E.g.
Uepa-ai ovx rj^ova-i bcKa iratv, the Persians will not come within
ten years. T^s vvktos eyevero, it happened within the night (but ttjv
vvKTa means during the whole night). So dpaxp-rjp eXa/i/Saj/e rrjs rjfxipas,
he received a drachma a day {each day).
2. A similar genitive of the place within which is found in
poetry. E.g.
'"H ov< "Apyeos rjev 'A;^aitKoG; was he not in Achaean Argos?
Odyss. So in the Homeric Tredioio BUlv, to run on the plain (i.e.
ivithin its limits), and similar expressions. So dpia-TepTJs x^*po^>
on the left hand, even in Hdt.
Genitive with. Adjectives.
§ 180. The objective genitive follows many verbal
adjectives.
1. These adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning or
derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g.
228 SYNTAX. [§ 181.
MeToxos <ro0iay, partaking of wisdom (§ 170, 2). *E7rfi^o\os emarrj'
firjs, having attained to knowledge ; efiireipos kukoov, experienced in evils;
Tov apicTTOv a-ToxacTiKOi, aiming at the best (§ 171, 1). KarrjKoos rcbp
yoveoiv, obedient (lit. hearkening) to his parents ; eniorTfjfKov rcbv diKaicop,
understanding his rights ; eVt/xeXj^s ayaOcav, diJ.€\rjs kokcou, caring for the
good, neglectful of the bad ; <^ei8coXoi ;(p77/xaro)i', sparing of money
(§ 171, 2). 'EyxpaT))? iavrov, being master of himself ; dpxiKos dvbpwv, ■
Jit to rule men (§ 171, 3). Meorop KaKoou, full of evils ; eprjfMoi avpfxd-
X^Vj destitute of allies ; r) yj^vxr) yvp.vr) tov o-oifxaTos, the soul stript of the
bodg ; Kadapos (j)6vovj free from the stain of murder (§ 172, 1). "Evoxos
deikias, chargeable tvith cowardice (§ 173, 2). Aidcfyopos rwv aXXcoi/,
distinguished from the others (§ 174). "A^ios ttoXXcoj/, worth much
(§ 178, Note). ^
Note 1. Especially, adjectives of this class compounded with
alpha privative (§ 131, 4, a) take the genitive; as ayevaros KaKd>Uj
without a taste of evils ; dp.vr]p.cov tu>v Kivbvvcov, forgetful of the
dangers; diradfjs KUKciv, without suffering ills : dKparfjs ykcaa-arjs,
without power over his tongue.
Note 2. Sometimes these compounds take a genitive of kindred
meaning, which depends on the idea of separation implied in them ;
as arrais dppevcou Tvalhoav, childless (in respect^ of male children;
arip.os 7rd(Tr)s TLfirjs, destitute of all honor ; ddoipoTaros XRVI^^"^^^}
most free from taking -bribes.
2. Some are kindred to verbs which take the accusa-
tive. Ei.g,
* IloXfcoff dj/arpenrtKo?, svhversive of the state ; npaKriKos rav /caXwy,
capable of doing noble deeds; (jjiXofxaOrji ndarjs dXrjOeias, fond of
learning all truth.
§ 181. The possessive genitive sometimes follows
adjectives denoting possession or the opposite. E.g.
OlKfla rav ^aaikevovrav, belonging to the kings ; Upos 6 x^P^s r^?
*ApT€pLbos, the place is sacred to Artemis ; koivov dnavroiv, common to
all: drjixoKparias aXXdrpia, things not belonging to democracy.
For the dative after such adjectives, which with some of them is
more common than the genitive, see § 185.
Note. Some adjectives of place, like ivavrlos, opposite, may take
the genitive instead of the regular dative (§ 185), but chiefly in
poetry; as ivavrioi ea-rap 'A;(aiw^, they stood opposite the Achaeans.
Hom.
§ 183.] GENITIVE. 229
Genitive with Adverbs.
§ 182. 1- The genitive follows adverbs derived from
adjectives which take the genitive. E.g.
Ot efXTreipas avrov e;^oi/re$', tliose luJio are acquainted with Mm;
dva^las t^9 TroXeas, in a manner unworthy of the state; efxaxopro
d^ioos \6yov, they fought in a manner worthy of mention.
2. The genitive follows many adverbs oi place. E.g.
Eto-to Tov epvixaros, within the fortress ; e^co tov reixovs, outside of
the wall; exro? tcov opcav, witliout the boundaries; x<^pi-s tov o-cofiaros,
apart from the body ; [xera^v o-ocpia^ kol dfiaSias, between wisdom and
ignorance ; ntpav roii norap-ov, beyond the river; TrpoaOei/ rov crrpa-
Tonedov, in front of the camp : dp,(()OT€pa)6ep t^s 68ov, on both sides
of the road: evdv ttjs ^aar^Xibos, straight to Phaselis.
Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly ivros^ within;
dixa, apart from ; iyyvs, "yx^i vreXay, and TrXijainv, near ; Troppco
(Trpoaoy), far from ; ontaOcv and Karoncv, behind; and a few others of
similar meaning*. The genitive after most of them can be explained
as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separation ; that after ev6v
resembles that after verbs of aiming at (§ 171, 1).
Add pa and Kpyc^ta, without the knowledge of sometimes take the
genitive. '
Note. nX»7»/, except^ «XP* ^^^^ ^^'XP*' until, avev and arep,
without, €V€Ka (ovveKa), on account of and puTa^v, between, take
the genitive like prepositions. For these and ordinary prepositions
with the genitive, see § 191.
Genitive Absolute.
§ 183. A noun and a participle not connected with
the main construction of the sentence may stand by
themselves in the genitive. This is called the genitive
absolute. E.g.
TavT enpaxBt] Kovavos (TTpaTrjyovvTos, this teas done trhen
Conon ivas general. Ovbev Ta)v bcovTcov ttoiovptcov vpa>v KaKois ra
irpdypara e;^€t, affairs are in a bad state while you do nothing which you
ought to do. Qecov didovroiv ovk av €K(f)vyoi KaKa, if (he Gods should
grant (it to be so), he could not escape evils. "Ovros yj/^evdovs ea-riv
dnaTTj, when there is falsehood, there is deceit.
For the various relations denoted by the genitive absolute, sea
§§277,278.
230 SYNTAX. [§184.
IV. DATIVE.
Remark. The primary use of the dative case is to denote that
to or for which anything is or is done : this inckides the dative of
the remote or indirect object, and the dative of interest. It also
denotes that hy which or with which, and the time (sometimes the
place) in which, anything takes place, — i.e. it is not merely a dative,
but also an instrumental and a locative case. (See Remark before
§ 157.) The object of motion after to is not regularly expressed by
the Greek dative, but by the accusative with a preposition. (See
§ 162.)
Dative expressing To or For.
§ 184, The dative is used to denote that to or for
which anything is or is done. This includes, —
1. The dative of the indirect object after transitive verbs,
which is generally introduced in English by to. E.g.
Aidaxri fiiadou tw aTparevfiari, he gives pay to the army; vni-
axvelral aoi deKa ToXavra, he promises ten talents to you (or he promises
you ten talents) ', ^orjSeiav nen'^ofiev toIs (Tviiixaxois^ ive will send aid
to our allies; eXeyov rw ^aa-iXel ra yey evrjfieva, they told the king
what had happened.
2. The dative after certain intransitive verbs, many of
which in English take a direct object without to. E.g.
Ei!;^o/xai rots Oeols, I pray (to) the Gods; BiKaioavvrj XvaiTfXel r^
exovTi, justice is advantageous to (or profits) the one having it; rois
vofxois TTeiderai, he is obedient to the laws (he obeys the laws); ^or^del
Tols (f) i\ o I s, he assists his friends ; dpeaKci rois ttoXltois, it is pleas-
ing to (or it pjleases) the citizens; clkc apdyKj], yield to necessity;
"^ ov nicTTevei Tols (piXois, he does not trust his friends ; rois Qrj^aiois
oveidiCovaiv, they reproach the Thebans ; tL iyKokeis rjfilv; lohai have
you to blame us for? eTrijped^ovo-iv dWrjXois, they revile one another ;
opyl^eaOf rots- dbiKova-iv^ you are angry ivith the offenders. So
TTpeneL poi Xeyeiv, it is becoming 7ne to speak; TrpocrrjKei p,oL, it belongs
to me; doKcl fioi, it seems to me; 8ok(o p.oi, methinks.
The verbs of this class which are not translated with to in
English are chie% those signifying to benefit., serve., obey.,
defend^ assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, or an}' of
their opposites ; also those expressing friendliness, hostility^
abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats.
§184.] DATIVE. 231
Note 1. (a) The impersonals Set, fierfari, fieXei, /Mera/ieXet,
and Trpoa-rjKei take the dative of a jierson with the genitive of a thing ;
as Set fxoL TovTov, I have need of this : fieTea-TL fioi tovtov, I have a share
in this ; fieXei fioi tovtov, I am interested in this; npoarjKei fioi tovtov.
I am concerned in this. (For the gen. see § 170, 2, § 172, N. 2.)
(Ji) AeT and xph take the accusative (very rarely the dative) when
an infinitive follows. For Set (in poetry) with the accusative and
the genitive, see § 172, N. 2.
Note 2. Some verbs of this class may take the accusative. Others,
whose meaning would place them here (as ftto-ew, hate), take only the
accusative. AoiSope'co, revile, has the accusative, but XoiBopeonai (mid-
dle) the dative. KfXevw in Attic Greek has only the accusative
(commonly with the infinitive) ; in Homer generally the dative.
3. The dative of interest (or of advantage or dis-
advantage'), which is generally introduced in English by
for. E.g.
nS? avr]p uvtS novel, every man labors for himself ; 26\a>v ^Adrj-
vaioLs vofiovs edrjKc, Solon made laios for the Athenians; ol Kaipoi
TrpoelvTat TJj TrdXet, lit. the opportunities have been sacrifced for the
state {for its disadvantage)'^ eXnida e;^ei (ra>Tr]pias t^ TrdXet, he has
hope of safety for the state.
Note 1. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements of
time ; as tw Tjdr) 8vo yeveal i^BiaTOy two generations had already passed
away for him (i.e. he had seen them pass away). Hom. 'Hpepat ^aav
rri Mvti\t)vtj ia\(OKvia inTa, for Mitylene captured (i.e. since its cap-
ture) there had been seven days. 'H/xepa rjv TreprnTr) eTrnrXeovai tols
*A6rjvaiois, it was the ffth day for the Athenians sailing on (i.e.
it was the fifth day of their voyage).
Note 2. Here belong such Homeric expressions as Tolaiv dveaTr),
he rose up for them (i.e. to address them) ; roio-t p.v6oov rjpxcv, he began
to speak before them.
Note 3. In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an accusa-
tive of the thing and a dative of the person; as Aavaolai Xotyoi
tiavvov, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danai).
Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Aapaolai apvvtiv meanw
to defend the Danai. For other constructions of apvvuj see the
Lexicon.
Ae'xofxat, receive, takes a dative in Homer by a similar idiom;
as Be^aTo ol (TKrjnTpov, he took his sceptre from him (lit. for him).
Note 4. Sometimes this dative has nearly the same force as a
possessive genitive; as ol innot avTols StSeirat, their horses are tied
(lit. the horses are tied for them) ; 8ia to ianapBai avTw to o-rpaTcvpa,
because his army has been scattered {for him) ; rjpxpv tov vuvtikov toIs
232 SYNTAX. [§ 185.
2vpaKo<Tiois, they commanded the navy for the Syracusans (i.e. the
Syracusans^ navy).
Note 5. The participles ^ov\6ji€vos, riboiievos, 7rpoa-8e-
Yofi€j/off, dx^ofxevos, and a few others, may agree with a dative,
the phrase being equivalent to the verb of the jparticiple ; as avra
fiovXofxcvoi iariv, it is to him wishing it (i.e. he wishes it).
Note 6. Here belong the so-called ethical dative, in which the
personal pronouns have the force oi for my sake, &c., and sometimes
cannot easily be translated ; as W aoi fxaQqao^xai ; what am I to learn
for youf ncos rjfilv ex^is ; how are you (we wish to know) f
4. The dative of possession, after ei/jul, yiyvo^ai,
and similar verbs. E.g.
UoXKoi fiot <j)iXoi (laiv, 1 have many friends ; navra'^aoi ytprja-eraij
all things will belong to you; eamv dvOparra Xoyia-p-os, man has
reason; 'iTrirla fiovco t(ov dbiK^av Traibis eyivovro, to Hippias alone of
the brothers there were children born.
5. The dative denoting that with respect to which 21,
statement is made, -^ often belonging to the whole sen-
tence rather than to any special word. E.g,
"Kiravra rw (fio^ovfieva \//'o^et, everything sounds to one who is
afraid ; a-c})a>p jxeu ivroXr] Alos ex^i TeXos, as regards you two, the order
of Zeus is fully executed.
So in such expressions as these: eV Sf^m eanXeouTi, on the right
as you sail in (with respect to one sailing in); a-vveXovTi, or w?
avveXovTi etVeti/, concisely, or to speak concisely (lit. for one having
made the matter concise). So m efxoi, in my opinion.
§ 185, The dative follows many adjectives and ad-
verbs of kindred meaning with the verbs included in
§ 184, and some verbal nouns. E.g:
Ava-p.evr)s tols ^iXois, hostile to his friends ; vttoxo s rots vofiois,
subject to the laws; (niKivdwov rfj noXei, dangerous to the state;
PXa^e pov TO) a-Mfxari, hurtful to the body; evvovs eavrw, kind to
himself; evavrios avra, opposed to him. (For the genitive after
fmi/rtos,, see § 181, Note.) 2v fi(j)€ povr cos avra, profitably to him-
self: e fiTTodoov ifxoi, in my way. So KaradovXaxris tS>v ''EXXrjvcov roig
'ABijvaiois, subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians.
§ 187.] DATIVE. 233
Dative of Resemblance and Union.
§ 186. The dative is used with all words implying
resemblance, union, or approach. This includes verbs,
adjectives, adverbs, and nouns. E.g.
2Kta7s (oik6t€s, like shadows ; ofxiKovai rots KaKols, they associate
with the bad; tovs (pevyovras avrols ^vufjWa^ev, he reconciled the
exiles with them ; SfioKoyovaiv dWfjXois, they agree with one another;
biaXiyovTai tovtols, they converse with these; rovs tmrovs yfrocpois
nXrjcnd^eiv, to briny the horses near to noises. "OfxoLot rots Tv(f)Xois,
like the blind; Kvfiara lara opea-aiv, waves like mountains (Horn.);
rois avTols Kvptp oTrXoty aTrXiafievoi, armed with the same arms as
Cyrus. 'Eyyvs oSw, 7iear a road ^also the genitive, § 182, 2);
afia TTJ rjfiepa, as soon as (it was) day ; ofxov tw tttjXw, together with
the mud ; to. tovtols e'^e^^s, what comes next to these.
Note 1. To this class belong not merely such verbs as 8ia-
\eyofiai, discourse with, but also fiaxoixai, TroXefieco, and others
signifying contend with, quarrel with; as /iia;^ea^ai roiy Qrj^aioif,
to fight with the Thebans ; noXefxova-iv rjixlv, they are at war with us;
ipi^ovcriv d\\r]\ois, they contend with each other; hia^epccOai toIs
TTovrjpois, to be at variance with the base. So €s x^tpas eXOelv tivi, or
€s Xoyovs i\6elv tlvi, to come to a conjiict (or words) with any one.
Note 2. After adjectives of likeness, an abridged form of
expression may be used; as K6p.ai XapiTeaa-Lv 6p.olai, hair like
(that of) the Graces (Horn.); ras iVas nXriyas ifioi, the same number
of blows with me.
Dative after Compound Verbs.
§ 187. The dative follows many verbs compounded
with eV, G-vv, or eVt ; and some compounded with Trpo'?,
irapdy irepi, and viro. E.g.
Toi? v6p.oLs ep.{X€i/a)v, abiding by the laws; ai rjSovai e7naTr)fiT}u
ovbepiav "^vxfl (}nvo(.ovcnv, pleasures produce no knowledge in the
soul; eVe/cetiTo Tw nepi/cXel, they pressed hard on Pericles ; epavra
(TvvTjbdv ov8ev eTTio-ra/Liei/ft), / was conscious to myself that I knew
nothing (lit. with myself)] ^8tj Trore a-oi inrjXdev ; did it ever occur to
you? Upoa^aXXciv Ta Tei)(io-p.aTt, to attack the fortifcation ; aSeX-
^os dvbpl Trapdrj, let a brother stand by a man (i.e. let a man^s
brother stand by him); tols kukoIs TrepnriTTTovo-Lv, they are involved in
evils ; vTroKeiTai to nedinv rw iepw, the plain lies below the temple.
This dative sometimes' depends on the preposition (§ 193), and
sometimes on the idea contained in the compound as a whole.
234 SYNTAX. [§ 188.
Causal and Instrumental Dative.
§ 188. 1. The dative is used to denote the cause,
manner, means, or instrument. E.g.
Cause : ^ArroBvrjo-Kei vocrm, he dies of disease ; ttoWclkl^ ay vol a
Afxaprdvofxev, ice often err through ignorance. Manner: Apo'/xw
T]7reiyovTo, they pressed forward 07i a run ; ttoWtj Kpavyfj €7re\6e7v, to
advance with a loud shout ; rij akr]6iia, in truth ; tw ovtl, in reality ;
^la. forcibly ; ravTT], in this manner, thus. Means or Instrument :
^Opcofiev To7s ocpOaXfioLs, we see with our eyes; eyvaxrdrjo-av rfj <TK€vf}
Toiu oTrXoiv, they were recognized by the fashion of their arms; kukoIs
laaOai kukcl, to cure eoils by evils; ovSely enaivov Tjdovals iKTi^aaro,
no one gains praise by pleasures (§ 205, 2).
Note 1. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of manner;
SiS dvvaros rw acafiari, strong in his body ; TrdXts, Qd>\faKos ovojxarii
a city, Thapsacus by name (cf. § 160, 1).
Note 2. Xpaofxai, to use {to serve oneU self by), takes the
instrumental dative; as ;(paji/rai dpyvplco, Jthey use money. A
neuter pronoun {e.g. rl, t\, 6 rt, or tovto} niaj)/be added as a cognate
accusative (§ 159, N. 2); as W rouroty xph'^J^tJ^'- > i^^'hat shall I do with
these? (lit. what use shall I make of thesjn). No/xiX<«> has sometimes
the same meaning and construction as^pdo/xat.
2. The dative of manner is:iised with comparatives to
denote the degree of difference. E.g.
IToXXo) Kpfirrov eariv, it is much better (better by much) ; rfj
K€c{)a\fj jjicl^cov (or eXdrraji/), a head taller (or shorter); tootovt^
rjdiov ^o), / live so much the more happily ; rexvrj dvdyKT]^ dadeveaTepa
liaKpio, art is weaker than necessity by far.
So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other expressions
which imply comparison ; as paKpa KdWiard re koI apicrra, by far the
most beautiful and the best; beKa ercai 71 p6 ttjs ev SaXa/xii/i uavfiaxiaSf
ten years before the battle of Salamis.
3. The dative sometimes denotes the agent with passive
verbs, especially with the perfect and pluperfect. E.g.
TovTo fjhr] (TOL TrenpaKTai, this has now been done by you; iveihrj
7rape(TK€vaa-To tois KopcvOiois, when preparation had been made by the
Corinthians {when the Corinthians had their preparation made).
Here there seems to be a reference to the agent's interest in the
result of the completed action expressed by the perfect and plu-
perfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly expressed by
uTTo, &G. and the genitive (§ 197, 1) ; rarely by the dative, except iu
poetry.
§ 189.J DATIVE. 235
4. With the verbal adjective in -Teo<?^ in its personal
(passive) construction, the agent is expressed by the
dative; in its impersonal (active) construction, by the
dative or the accusative. See § 281.
5. The dative is used to denote that by v^hich any
person or thing is accompanied. E.g.
'^HXOov ol Tlepa-ai naixTrXrjOei o-to'Xo), the Persians came with an
army in fall force; rjixels koL Innois toIs dwaTcoTaTots kol dvdpda-t
7rop€vci}fi€da, let us march both with the strongest horses and with men ;
ol AaKedaip-ovioi tw re Kara yrjv arpara npocre^aWov rw T€L)(icrfJLaTi Koi
Tois vavariv, the Lacedaemonians attacked the wall both with their land
army and with their ships.
This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces, and is
originally connected with the dative of means or instrument. The
last example might be placed equally well under § 188, 1.
Note. This dative sometimes takes the dative of airos for
emphasis; as ixlav (yavv) avrols dvdpd(riv flXov, they took one
(ship) men and all (§ 145, 1, Note). Here the instrumental force
disappears, and the dative may refer to any class of persons or
things : thus bevbpca avrrjcnv pi-Cwh ^^^^^ ^'■^^ i/ie/r very roots. Hom.
Dative of Time.
§ 189. The dative without a preposition often denotes
time when. This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting
dat/^ night, month, or year, and to names oi festivals. E.g.
Tfj avrfi rjjxepa diredavev, he died on the same day; 'EpfiaT. fit a vvktI
ol TrXetorroi TrcpicKoiTrjo-av, the most of the Hermae were mutilated in one
night; ol Sa/xtot e^enoXiopKrjdrja-av evdrat p,r)vi, the Samians were
taken by siege in the ninth month; reTapro) erei ^vve^rjcraif, they came
to terms in the fourth year; cbo-TTfpet Qea ixo(f)opioLs vrja-Tevoncv, we
fast as if it were on the Thesmophoria. So r^ vcrTepaia (sc. Tjufpa)^
on the following day, and BevTcpa, rpirrj^ on the second, third, &c., in
giving the day of the month (§ 139, 1, Note).
Note 1. Even the words mentioned, except names of festivals,
generally take iv when no adjective word is joined with them.
Thus iv wKTi, at night (rarely, in poetry, vvktl), but fxia vvktI, in one
night.
Note 2. A few expressions occur like va-repa xpova, in after
time; x^i-H-^vos &pa, in the winter season ; vovp.rjVLa {new-moon day), on
thefrst of the month; and others in poetry.
236 SYNTAX. [§ 190.
Dative of Place (Poetic).
§ 190, In poetry, the dative without a preposition
often denotes the place ivhere. E.g.
'EXXaSi paicov, dwelling in Hellas; al0ept vaicov, dwelling in
heaven; ovpecri, on the mountains; t6^' &ixol(jlv excoi/, having the
bow on his shoulders; fxi^vei dypm, he remains in the country. Horn.
'Ho-^ai Sd/Aois, to sit at home. Aesch. Nvv dypoiai Tvyxdveiy now
he happens to be in the country. Soph.
Note 1. In prose, the dative of place is chiefly confined to the
names of Attic denies; as 17 MapaOwvi paxn, ihe battle at Marathon;
but kv "Adrjvais. Still some exceptions occur.
Note 2. Some adverbs of place are really local datives ; as
TavTtj, T^Se, here ; oUoi, at home ; kvk\(o, in a circle, all around. See
§ 61, n! 2.
PREPOSITIONS.
§ 191. The prepositions were originally adverbs, and it is
chiefly as such that they appear in composition with verbs.
They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns
(or words used as nouns) with other parts of the sentence.
Besides the prepositions properly so called, there are certain
adverbs used in the same way, which cannot be compounded
with verbs : these are called improper prepositions, and are
av€v^ arepj a^pi, f^^XPh f^^Ta^v, cj/CAca, ttXtJv, w?. All of these
take the genitive, except w?, which takes the accusative.
I. Four prepositions take the genitive only: avri, (xtto,
CK (ii) , TTpo, — with the improper prepositions avev, arep, axpi,
IJ'^XPh f^^TCL^^) eve/ca, ttX^v.
1 . clvtC, instead of, for. Original meaning, over against, against.
In COMP. : against, in opposition, in return, instead.
2. dird (Lat. ab, a, Eng. off), from, off from, awaxj from ; originally (as
opposed to eV) separated from.
(a) of PLA.CE : a(f> 'i-mrov /xaxeadai, to fight on horseback (from a
horse).
(b) of TIME : ciTrb roirov tov xp^^ov, from this time.
(c) of CAUSE : dirb ardaecou iKTrlTrreiv, to be driven out by factions.
In COMP. : from, away, off, in return.
§191.] PREPOSITIONS. 237
3. Ik or l| (§ 13, 2; Lat. e, ex), from^ out of; originally (as opposed to
airb) from within.
(a) of PLACE : €/c Iiirdprrji (pe&y^i, he is banished from Sparta.
(&) of TIME : €K waXaioTdTov, from the most ancient time.
(c) of ORIGIN : 6vap eK Aids iariu, the dream comes from Zeus. So
also with 2mssive yfivhs (instead of utto with gen.): Ti/j,da6ai
iK Tivos, to be honored by some one (the agent viewed as the
source).
In comp. : out, from, away, off.
4. <irp<J (Lat. pro), before:
(a) of PLACE : irpb dvpwv, before the door.
(b) of TIME : Trpb Trjs tidxns, before the battle.
(c) of PREFERENCE : irpb ToijTuv, in preference to this.
{d) of protection: irpb iraiduv fidx^cxdai, to fight for one' s children.
In COMP. : before, forward, forth.
5. So &vev, &T€p, without; dxph tJ^XPh until; p.€Ta^6, between; hcKa,
on account of; irXiiv, except.
II. Two take the dative only : iv and o-w.
1 . ky, in, equivalent to Lat. in with the ablative :
(a) of PLACE : €v 'ZirdpT'd, in Sparta ; — with a word implying
number, among: iv b-qpn^ Xiyeiv, to speak (among) before the
people.
{b) of TIME : kv Toi^ry ry trei, in this year.
In COMP. : in, on, at.
2. a-vv or |vv (Lat. cum), ivith, i.e. in company with or by aid of.
In COMP. : with, together.
III. One takes the accusative oxAj : ct? or c?, — with the
improper preposition ws.
!• €ls or Is, into, to ; originally (as opposed to e/c) to within (Lat. in with
the accusative or inter):
(a) of place : i<f>vyov els Meyapa, they fled into Megara.
(6) of TIME : 6is vvKTa, (to) till night ; els rbv Hiravra xp(>vov, for all
time.
(c) of NUMBER and MEASURE : els SiaKoaiovs, (ainounting) to two
hundred ; eis Sijpafiiu, up to one's j)ower.
{d) of PURPOSE or REFERENCE : xPVf^o.'i'o- dvaXiaKeiv els Tov x6\efwv,
to spend money on the war ; xPW'-P-os ets rt, useful for any-
thing.
In COMP. : into, in, to.
2. «s, to, only with persons : elaupai Cos riva, to go in to (visit) any otic.
238 SYNTAX. [§ 191.
IV. Three take the genitive and accusative : Bud, Kara, virep.
1. 8id, through (Lat. di-, dis-).
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : 5i aairlbos ^XOev, it went through a shield.
(b) of TIME : 8ca vvktSs, through the night.
(c) of MEANS : dt epfiTjv^cas \4yeiv, to speak through an interpreter.
id) in various phrases like 5t' oUtov ^x^cu, to pity ; dia 0tXtaj tVmt,
to be in friendship {with one).
(2) with the accusative, on account of, by reason of: bC 'M-fjvrjv, by
help of Athena; 8ia toCto, on this account.
In COMP. : through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-).
2. Kara (cf. adverb kcItci), below), originally down (opposed to dvd).
(1) with the genitive:
(a) down from: aWeaOai /caret t^s Tr^rpas, to leap doion from the
rock.
(p) down upon : Kara ttjs KetpaXrjs Karaxetv, to pour down upon the
head; also against, lender, concerning.
(2) with the accusative, down along ; of motion over, through, among,
into, against ; also according to, concerning.
(a) of PLACE : Karcc povu, down stream ; Kard. yrjv kcu daXaaaav,
by land and by sea.
{b) of TIME : Kara rbv irdXefiov, during (at the time of) the war.
(c) DISTRIBUTIVELY : Kara Tpeis, by threes, three by three ; Kad'
ijixepau, day by day, daily.
In COMP. : down, against.
3. virip, over (Lat. super).
(1) with the GENITIVE :
{a) of PLACE : virkp TTJs KetpoKrjs, over (his) head; virkp riji daXdaayjs,
above (away from) the sea.
(5) for, in behalf of (opposed to Kurd) : fidxeadat viripTivos, to fight
.for one (originally over him); vtrep aod deSoLKu, I fen r for
you ; vTT^p Tivos \eyeLv, to speak in place of one ; in the orators
sometimes concerning (like irepi).
(2) with the accusative, over, beyond, of place and measure.
In COMP. : over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of.
V. One takes the dative and accusative {\Qry rarely the
genitive) : dva.
dvd (cf. adverb dvw, above), originally up (opposed to Kard).
(1) with the DATIVE (only Epic and Lyric), up on : dva aKi^rrpc^, on a
sceptre.
§ 191.] PREPOSITIONS. 239
■ (2) with the accusative, up along ; and of motion over^ through^
among (cf. /card).
(a) of PLACE : avit. povv, up stream ; apdi. cTparbv, through the army
(Horn.).
(J) of TIME : avb. traffav rT)v rjixipav, all through the day.
(c) In DISTRIBUTIVE expressions : ava r^rrapas, by fours.
In COMP. : up, back, again.
(3) with the genitive, only in the Homeric expression, dva vrjbs paiveiv,
to go on board ship.
VI. Seyentsike the gemtivey dative, and accusative: afjicf>i,
CTTi', fJiCTo., Trapa, Trcpt, Trpos, vtto,
1. d|i(f>C (Lat. amb-), connected with &\L^a>, both; originally on both
sides of; hence about.
(1) with the GENITIVE (rare in prose), about, concerning.
(2) with the dative (only Ionic and poetic), about ; hence concerning,
on account of.
(3) with the accusative, about, near, of place, time, number, etc.:
d/i0' &\a, by the sea; d/ji^l deiXriv, near evening; dfi4>l rd e^-fiKovra,
about sixty (circiter sexaginta); so d/i.0t rt ?x^^''> to ^^ (busy) about
a thing.
In COMP. : about, on both sides.
2. Iirf, on, uj)on.
(1) with the genitive :
(a) of place : iirl Tiipyov, mi a tower ; sometimes towards : irrl
2d/Aou TrXet;', to sail (upon) towards Samos.
(b) of time : ecp' 7}ixC}v, in our time.
(2) with the dative :
{a) of place: iirl rrj 9a\d<xari oUeiv, to live upon (by) the sea.
(b) of TIME : iirl ry (j-qixe'np, upon the signal; iirl rotjrois, thereupon.
(c) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, on account of, in the power
of; and in many other relations : see the Lexicon.
(3) with the accusative, originally up to ; then to, towards, against :
dva^alveLv e0' tinrov, to mount a horse ; iirl de^cd, to the right.
In COMP.: upon, over, after, toward, to, for, at, against, besides.
3. |ji€Td (akin to (jUotos, Lat. medius), amid, among.
(1) with the genitive, with, on the side of: fierd. rOsv vvjijidx^v toU
irokefxiois fidx^cOai, with (the help of) the allies to fight with
{against) the enemy (§ 186, N. 1).
(2) with the dative (poetic, chiefly Epic), among.
240 SYNTAX. [§191.-
(3) with the accusative :
(a) into {the midst of), after (in quest of), for (poetic).
{h) generally after, next to: ixera rhv TrSXe/xov, after the war ; fiiyi-
aros /xera tov "larpov, tlie largest {river) next to the Ister.
In COMP. : with (of sharing), among, after {in quest of) : it also denotes
change, as in fieravoiw, change ones mind, repent.
4. irapd, ly, near, alongside of {see Note 1).
(1) with the GENITIVE, from beside, from.
(2) with the dative, near : irapa Kijpc^ 6vt€s, being near Cyrv^.
(3) with the accusative, to {a place) near, to; also by the side of, beyond
or beside, except, along with, because of.
(a) of PLACE : &(f>i,KV€7Tai irapa Kvpov, he comes to Cyrus.
{b) of TIME : irapa irdvTa tov xP^^ov, throughout the whole time.
(c) of CAUSE : Trap A rrjv rjfxeTipav afjLiXeiav, on account of our neglect.
(d) with idea of beyond or beside, and except: ovk iari irapa ravra
dWa, there are no others besides these ; irapa rbv vbixov, con'
trary to tlie law (properly beyond it).
In COMP. : beside, along by, hithervmrd, wrongly (beside the Tnark), over
(as in overstep).
5. irepl, around (on all sides).
(1) with the GENITIVE, abotct, concerning (Lat. de): wepl irarpbs ipeadai,
to inquire about his fatlier ; also (poetic) above; Kparepos irepi
iravTwv, mighty above all.
(2) with the dative, about, around, concerning, seldom in Attic prose.
(3) with the accusative, nearly the same as d(U0^.
In COMP. : around, about, exceedingly.
6. irpds, at or by (in front of), akin to irpd.
(1) with the genitive :
(a) in front of, looking towards : irphs Opg/cijs Ketadai, to be situated
over against Thrace ; — in swearing : Trpos Bf.(hv, before (by)
the Gods. Sometimes pertaining to (as character): 9i Kapra
irpbs yvvaiKos iarip, surely it is very like a woman.
Q>) from (properly from before) : tljx7)v irpbs Ztjvbs exovres, having
honor from Zeus; sometimes with passive verbs (like virb):
irpbs TLvos (pCKuadaL, to be loved by some one.
(2) with the dative :
{a) at : 6 KOpos ^v irpos Ba^vXuvi, Cyrus was at Babylon,
(b) in addition to : irpbs to<!tols, besides this, furtliermore.
§ 191.] PREPOSITIONS. :^41
(3) with the accusative:
(a) to: livaL xpbs''OXvfi'7rov, to go to Olympus,
{b) towards: irpbs Boppdv, towards the North; so of persons: wiarus
5iaK€?a6at irpds riva, to be faithfully disposed towards one;
Trpbs dWi^Xovs -rjcrvxiO'V dxov, they kept the peace towards one
another.
(c) witJi a view to, in reference to : vpbf tL fie raOr ip<inq.i, (to what
end) for what do you ask ine this? irpbs ttjv dtjpafiiv, according
to one's power.
In COMP. : to, towards, against, besides.
7. vir6, under (Lat. sub), by.
(1) with the GENITIVE :
(a) of PLACE : vTrb yrjs, under the earth; sometimes /rom under,
{b) to denote the agent with passive verbs: rifidadai virb tup ttoXi-
TUP, to be honored by the citizens,
(c) of cause: vwb d4ovs, through fea,r ; v^' i]doprj$,throtcgh pleasure.
(2) with the dative (especially poetic) : dapeip vir 'IX^y, to perish under
{the walls of) Ilium.
(3) with the accusative :
(a) of PLACE, under, properly to {a place) under.
(b) of TIME, towards (entering into) : inrb p^ktu, jv^t before night
(Lat. sub noctem): sometimes during.
In COMP. : under, secretly, slightly, gradually.
Note 1. Further details of the meaning and use of the prepo-
sitions must be learned by practice and from the Lexicon. In
general, the accusative is the case used with prepositions to denote
that towards which, oner which, along which, or upon which motion
takes place ; the genitive, to denote that from which anything pro-
ceeds; the dative, to denote that in which anything takes place.
It will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case often
modifies the expression by which we translate a given preposition :
thus irapd means near, alongside of; and we have Trapa tov ^aai-
Xeojs, fi'om the neighborhood of the king ; napa rw /3a(TtXet, m the
neighborhood of the king ; Trapa tov ^aaiXea, into the neighborhood
of the king.
Note 2. The original adverbial use of the prepositions some-
times appears when they are used without a noun; this occurs
especially in the older Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus nepi,
roundabout or exceedingly, in Homer ; Trpoy Se or /cat irpos, and besides,
in Herodotus.
Note 3. The preposition of a compound verb may also stand
separately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears ; as eVt
Kve<j)as rjXde (KV€(f)as €7rrj\6c), darkness came on; rjfilv an 6 Xoiyov
dfivvai (aTrapivvat), to ward off destruction from us.
This is called tmesis^ and is found chiefly in Homer.
16
242 SYNTAX. [§ 192.
Note 4. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to
"which it belongs ; as vewv uiro, rraibos iripi ; oKicras ano (for drroXe-
o-as). For the accent see § 23, 2.
Note 5. A few prepositions are used adverbially with a verb
understood; as Trdpa for ndpeo-Ti, cttl and pera (in Homer) for
€7T€(TTi and fi€T€<TTi. So €VL foY iveoTi, aud ava, up ! for dvaara {dvd-
aTT]di). For the accent see § 23, 2.
Note 6. Sometimes ds with the accusative or €k or dno with the
genitive is used in expressions which themselves imply no motion,
with reference to some motion implied or expressed in the context ;
as al ^vvohoL €s TO Ifpov iyiyvovTo^ the synods were held in the temple
(lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the temple to
hold the synods) ; toT? e/c IlvXov \r}(f)6ei(Tt (eoiKorey), like those cap-
tured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylos, i.e. the captives
from Pylos; 8if]p7raaTo koi avra rd dub rwv oIkioSv ^v\a, even the
very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been stolen. So
€v with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion, referring
to rest which follows the motion; as ev rw noTapw eTreaov, they fell
(into and remained) in the river; so ev yovvaai Tri-nreLv, to fall on
one^s knees. These are instances of what is called the constructio
praegnans.
§ 192. (Recapitulation.) 1. The following prepositions
take the genitive: dix4>L, dvri, (xtto, 8ia, eK (e|), €7rt, Kara, /xera,
Trapa, Trept, irpo, irpos, vttc/o, vtto, — i.e. all except ci9, ev, crvv, dvd.
Also the improper prepositions avcv, arcp, ax/oi, i^-^xph p-^ra^v,
€V€Ka, TrXrjv.
2. The following take the dative : d.fji(f>L, dvd, iv, cVi, /xera,
irapdf Trept, Trpo?, avvj viro.
3. The following take the accusative: dp<f>L, dvd, Sid, et? (es),
cTTt, Kara, /Acra, rrapd, Trcpt, vrpo?, vTrcp, vtto, — i.e. all except
dvTt, aTTo, e/c, cv, Trpo, o-w. So also w? (with words denoting
persons) .
§ 193. A preposition is often followed by its own case
when it is part of a compound verb. U.g.
HapeKopl^ovTo ri]v ^Irakiav, they sailed along the coast of Italy;
€(r^\6e /xe, it occurred to me; rj prjrrfp o-vveTrparrev avrco ravra, his
mother assisted him in this (i.e. (TrpaTre crvv avra). For examples of
the genitive, see § 177; for those of the dative, see § 187.
§ 196.] ADVERBS. 243
ADVEKBS.
§ 194. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs. E.^,
OvTOis eliv€v, thus Tie spoke; ays dvvafiai, as I am able; irpStrov
aTrrjXde, he first ivent aivay ; to dXrjdcjs kukop, that which is truly evil;
fiaXXov 7rp€7r6vT(os rjyi'juccryi.ivr], more becomingly dressed.
For adjectives used as adverbs, see § 138, N. 7. For adverbs preceded
by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see § 141, N. 3.
For adverbs with the genitive or dative, see §§ 168 (with N. 3); 182, 2;
185 ; 186. For adverbs as prepositions, see § 191. For negative adverbs,
see § 283.
THE VERB.
VOICES.
Active.
§ 195, In tlie active voice the subject is represented
as acting ; as rpeirw tov<; 6(f>6aXfjLoi>(;, I turn my eyes ; o
waryp (piXel tov TralSa, the father loves the child; 6 Xtttto^
Tpix^h the horse runs.
Note 1. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive
verbs; as rpexoi, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle
or passive voice includes many deponent verbs which are active and
transitive in meaning; as /SovXo/nai tovto, I icant this. Some transi-
tive verbs have certain intransitive tenses; as eorrrjKa, I stand, eo-Trjv,
1 stood, from tarrjixi, place. Such tenses are said to have a middle,
or sometimes even a passive, meaning.
Note 2. The same verb may be both transitive and intransi-
tive; as eXavvo), drive (trans, or intrans.) or march. The intransi-
tive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object; as
fkavvcLv (Ittttou or apixa), TeXevrdv {top /St'oi/), to end {life) or to die.
Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, &c.
Passive.
§ 196. In the passive voice the subject is represented
as acted upon; as 6 iral^ virb tov irarpo^ (^CKelTav, the
child is loved by the father.
244 SYNTAX. [§ 197.
§ 197, 1. The object of the active becomes the subject
of the passive. The subject of the active, the agent, is
generally expressed by vtto and the genitive in the pas-
sive construction. (See § 196 and the example.)
Even a genitive or dative used as a direct object can become the
subject of the passive ; as KaTa(f>pov€lTai vn^ efxov, he is despised hy me
(cf. KaTa(^pova> avrov, § 171, 2); nia-TeveTai vno rmp dpxofievoiv, he is
trusted hy his subjects (cf . Tnarevovaiv avr^, § 184, 2) ; so dpx6fJ.evoSf
ruled over, is passive of apxa>, rule (§ 171,' 3).
•
!N'oTE 1. other prepositions than Ino with the genitive of the
agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic prose. Such
are rrapd, Trpos-, ex, and duo.
Note 2. When the active is followed by two accusatives, or by
an accusative of a thing and a dative of a person, the case denoting
a person is generally made the subject of the passive, and the other
(an accusative) remains unchanged. E.g.
Ovdev aWo diddaKeTui avdpconos, the man is taught nothing else (in
the active ovdeu aWo diddcrKovat top dvdpaTrov). "AXXo tl fxel^op
€TnTax0r}o-€(T6e, you will have some other greater command imposed on
you (active, SKKo tl pei^ov vpXv eiriTd^ovaiv, they loill impose some other
greater command on you). Of €7nTeTpap,[ji,evoi ttjp cf)v\aKr)v, those to
tvhom the guard has been intrusted (active, emTpeneiv rfjv (f)v\aKTjv rov-
Tois-). AKpOepav euTjfifievos, clad in a leathern jerkin (active, ivdrrrfiv
Tl Tivi, to jit a thing on one). So eKKOTrrecrdaL rov 6(f)6akfx6v, to hare
his eye cut out, and divoTep.v€(T6ai rrjv Ke(pa.\r]v, to have his head cut off,
&c., from possible active constructions eKKOTrreiv rl rtz/t, and dnoji-
fiveiv ri tivl (§ 184, 3, N. 4). This construction has nothing to do
with that of § 160.
The first two examples are cases of the cognate accusative of the
thing retained with the passive, while the accusative or dative of
the person is made the subject (§ 159, Notes 2 and 4).
2. The perfect and pluperfect passive generally take the
dative of the agent (§ 188, 3).
The personal verbal in -t€o<; takes the dative, the imper-
sonal in -T€ov the dative or accusative, of the agent (§ 188, 4).
§ 198, The subject of the passive may be a neuter
adjective which represents a cognate accusative of the
active construction ; or the passive may be used imper-
sonally, the subject being implied in the idea of the verb
itself. U.ff,
§199.] THE VERB. — VOICES. 245
'Ao-e/Selrat ovbev, no act of impiety is committed (act. da-c^clv ovbeu,
§ 159, N. 2). 8o TrapfaKevaarai, preparation has been made (it is
prepared) ; afxapTaverai, error is committed (it is erred) : cf . ventum
est. This occurs cliiefly in such participial expressions as to. rjo-e-
^rjixeva, the impious acts which have been committed : to. Kivdvvev-
6evTa, the risks ivhich icere run ; ra r] fiaprrjixeva, the errors which
have been made, &c. (See § 134, N. 1, </). Even an intransitive
verb may thus have a passive voice.
Middle.
§ 199. In the middle voice the subject is represented
as acting upon himself, or in some manner which concerns
himself.
1. As acting on himself: irpaTrovTO irpo^ XTjaretav,
they turned themselves to piracy. This, though the most
natural, is the least common use of the middle.
2. As acting for himself or vnth reference to himself:
6 hrifjLo^ TideraL v6fiov<;, the people make laivs for them-
selves, whereas tIOtig-l v6fjLov<; would properly be said of a
lawgiver; tovtov fieTaire/iiTrofiai, I send for him Qo come
to me') ; aTreTrefju'TreTo avrov^, he dismissed them.
3. As acting on an object which belongs to himself:
r}\6e Xvcr6fjLevo<i dvyarpa, he came to ransom his (jovm)
dayg-hter. Hom.
Remark. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in
the last example.
Note 1. Often the middle expresses no more than is implied in
the active; thus rpoVatoi/ la-raa-Oai, to raise a trophy for themselves^
generally adds nothing but the expression to what is implied in
rpoTvaiov toraj/at, to raise a trophy ; and either form can be used.
The middle sometimes appears not to differ at all from the active
in meaning; as the poetic Ideo-dai, to see, and Ibelv.
Note 2. The middle sometimes has a, causative meaning; as
ibi8a^dfir]v ere, I had you taught.
This gives rise to some special uses of the middle ; as in Sai/et^w,
lend, Bavei^ofiai, borrom (cause somebody to lend to one^s self). So
fito-Bci), let, nia6ovpxii, hire (cause to be let to one^s self) ; / let myself
for pay is ifiavrbv fxiadco.
Note 3. The middle of certain verbs is peculiar in its meaning.
Thus, d7To8id(ofii, give hack, cmohibopiai, sell ; ypd(f)a>, write or propose
246 SYNTAX. [§200.
a vote, ypdcfiofiai, indict; rificopio rivi, I avenge a person, rificopovfiai
Tiva, I avemje myself on a person or 1 punish a per son ; ai,T(o, fasten,
a.TTTop.ai, cling to (fasten myself to); so exofiai, hold to.
The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both
active and middle; thus ypacprji^ai can mean either to be ivritten or
to he indicted.
Note 4. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense ;
as dSt/cw, wrong, ddiKrjaoixai, I shall be wronged.
TENSES.
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
§ 200. The tenses of the indicative express action as
follows ; —
Present, continued or repeated present action : ypac^w,
/ am writing or / write (habitualh') .
I31PERFECT, continued or repeated past action : eypa<^oi/,
I was writing or I used to write.
Perfect, action finished in present time : yiypa(f>a, I have
wi'itten.
Pluperfect, action finished in past time : eyeypac^etv, I had
written.
Aorist, simple past action (N. 5) : eypaxj/a, T wrote.
Future, future action : ypai/^w, / shall write or / shall he
writing.
Future Perfect, action to be finished in future time :
ycypai/^erat, it will have been written.
Note 1. In narration, the present is sometimes used vividly for
the aorist; as nopeverai np6<: fiaaCKia § tdvparo rdxiorra, he goes
(went) to the king as fast as he could.
For the present expressing a general truth, see § 205, 1.
Note 2. The present and especially the imperfect often express
an «//<'wp/'e^ action ; as ttc lOovaivvpas, they are trying to persuade
yon; ' AXouifija-ov edidov, he offered (tried to gii'c) Halonnesus ; a
iirpda-ar^To ovk iyevero, luhat was attempted did not happen.
Note 3. ' (o) The presents r^Ka, I am come, and oixofiai, lam
gone, have the force of perfects; the imperfects having the force of
pluperfects. (Cf. N. 6.)
§ 200.] TENSES. 247
(h) The present elfxi, T am f/oinff, has a future sense, and is used
as a future of epxofJiai, iXevo-ofxai not being ordinarily used in Attic
prose.
Note 4. The present with noKat or any other expression of
past time has the force of a present and perfect combined ; as
rrdXai aoi tovto Xeyo), 1 have long been telling you this (jvhich I now
tell).
Note 5. (a) The aorist takes its name (dopiaros, unlimited^
tinqualifed) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none
of the limitations (opoi) as to completion, continuance, repetition, &c.
which belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds exactly to
the so-called imperfect in English, whereas the Greek imperfect
corresponds to the forms I was doing, &c. Thus, eirolei tovto is
he icas doing this or he did this habitually ; 7re7roirjK€ tovto is he has
already done this; iirciroir}K€L tovto is he had already (at some past
time) done this; but eVoiTyo-e tovto is simply he did tJiis, without
qualification of any kind.
(/;) The aorist of verbs which denote a state or condition generally
expresses the entrance into that state or condition ; as nXovTa, I am
rich ; enXovTOvp, I was rich; inXovTr^aa, I became rich. So i^aaiXeva-e,
he became king ; rjp^i, he obtained office.
(c) The distinction between the imperfect and aorist was some-
times neglected, especially in the earlier Greek. See ^aivov and /3^
in //. i. 437 and 439; ^oXXeTo and ^oXcto in //. ii .43 and 45;
eXinev and Xetne, II. ii. 106 and 107.
Note 6. Some perfects have a present meaning; as Bvrja-Keiv,
to die, T€6vr]K€vai, to be dead; ylyveadai, to become, yeyovevai,
to be; pipvrjaKCLv, to remind, p.epvrja6ai, to remember; KaXelv, to call,
K€KX^a6ai, to be called. So oida, I know, novi. This is usually
explained by the meaning of the verb.
In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as
58eii/, / knew (§ 127). (Cf. N. 3, a.)
Note 7. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future;
as €t /ze ai(rdr](T€Tai oXtoXa, if he shall perceive me, I am ruined
(peril). So sometimes the present; as oTroXXu/xai, I perish! (for
1 shall perish).
Note 8. The second person of the future may express a per-
mission, or even a command ; as irpd^m olov av deXrj^, you may act
as you please; nduTcos Se tovto dpdcreis, and by all means do this
(you shall do this). So in imprecations; as dnoXc'iaOe, to destruction
with you! (lit. you shall perish). See § 257^ where the future with
ov fir] is explaine.d in this way.
Note 9. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic
future, denoting that a future act will be immediate or decisive ; as
248 SYNTAX. [§ 201.
<^pa^e Kcu 7r€7rpd^€Tai, speak, and it shall he (no sooner said than)
done. Compare the similar use of the perfect infinitive, § 202, 2, N. 2.
§ 201, The division of the tenses of the indicative
into primary and secondary (or historical^ is explained
in § 90, 2.
In dependent clauses, when the construction allows
both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and
optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly follows
primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses.
E.g:.
UpcLTTova-Lu a av ^ovXavTai, they do whatever they please;
tnpaTTov a ^ovXoivTo, they did whatever they pleased. Aeyovaiv
oTi TovTo ^ovXovTat, they say that they wish for this; cXe^av on
rovTo ^ovXoivTo, they said that they loished for this.
These constructions will be explained hereafter (§§ 233, 243).
Remark. The gnomic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to
present time (§ 205, 2) ; and the historic present is secondary, as it
refers to past time (§ 200, N. 1).
Note 1. The only exception to this principle occurs in indirect
discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always be re-
tained, even after secondary tenses. See § 242, § 248, Note, § 216, 2.
Note 2. The distinction into primary and secondary tenses
extends to the dependent moods only where the tenses keep the
same distinction of time which they have in the indicative, as in the
optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (§ 203).
An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent
conditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might
otherwise be in the subjunctive : thus we should generally have
npaTToiep av a ^ovXoivro, they would do whatever they (inight please)
pleased (see the first example under § 201). See § 235, 1. Such an
optative seldom assimilates the subjunctive or indicative of a final
or object clause (§ 215) in prose; but oftener in poetry. It very
rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse, although it
may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (§ 244, N. 1).
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
A. Not in Indirect Discourse.
^ § 202* In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in the
optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect discourse
(§ 203), the tenses chiefly used are the present and aorist.
§ 202.] TENSES. 249
1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the present
denotes a continued or repeated action, while the aorist denotes
a simple occurrence of the action, the time of both being pre-
cisely the same. E.g.
*Eav TTOifj Tovro, if lie shall do tliis (habitually^, lav Troirjar] tovto,
(simply) if he shall do this; el ttolo'ii) tovto, if he should do this
(Jiabitually), el iroirjo-eie tovto, (simply) if he shoidd do this; noiei
TOVTO, do this (habitually), noirjo-ov toxjto, (simply) do this. Ovtoh
viKTja-aifii T eyoi koX vofjLi^oifirjv aocpos, on this condition may I
gain the victory (aor.) and be considered (pres.) wise. BouXerai tovto
noieluy he ivishes to do this (habitually); /SoiiXerai tovto Troi^crat,
(simply) he wishes to do this.
This is a distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has
(for example) only one form, si faciat, corresponding to el noioir)
and el TToirjaeiev. Even the Greek does not always regard it; and
in many cases it is indifferent which tense is used.
2. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions,
represents an action unfinished at the time at which the pres-
ent would represent it as going on. E.g.
AedoiKa fiT) \r]6-qv ireirocr) Krj, I fear lest it may prove to har^e caused
forgetfulness (fj,f) iroifi would mean lest it may cause). Mr^bev'i ^orj-
Oelv OS fifj TTpoTepos $e^or} BrjKOis vfuv fj, to help no one who shall not
previously have helped you (6s ai/ /x^ . . . . ^orjd^ would mean who
shall not previously help you). Ovk av hia tovto y eXev ovk ev6vs deSca-
KoTes, they would not (on enquiry) prove to have failed to pay imme-
diately on this account (with didoiev this would mean they would not
fail to pay). Ov ^ovXeveadat en copa, dWa ^e^ovXevadai, it
is no longer time to be deliberating^ but (it is time) to have finished
deliberating.
Note 1. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command
that something shall be decisive and permanent ; as TavTa elprja-Oai,
let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this
{which folloivs) be said once for all ; p-expf- rovde oipicrOca vpS>v r) ^pa-
BvTrjs, at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed. This
is confined to the third person singular passive; the rare second
person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active is used
only when the perfect has a present meaning (§ 200, N. 6).
Note 2. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or
permanence (like the imperative, N. 1), and sometimes it is merely
more emphatic than the present; as elirov Tr)v dvpav KeK\ela6ai, they
ordered the gate to be shut (and kept so) ; rjXawev enl tovs Meucovost
toar eKeivovs eKirenX^x^^'' '^"^ rpe^eiv enl to. oTrXa, .so that they icere
(once for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. The regular
250 SYNTAX. [§208.
meaning of this tense, when it is not in indirect discourse, is that
given in § 202, 2. See § 95, 1, Note.
3. (a) The future infinitive is regular!}^ used only to
represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (§ 203).
(b) It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in place
of the regular present or aorist, to make more emphatic
a future idea which the infinitive receives from the con-
text. JS.g.
^EberjBrjaav rav Meyapecov vava\ (r(pas ^u/x7rpo7re/x\//'f ti/, they asked
the Merjarians to escort them with ships: ovk dTroKcoXixrciv dvvarol
ovres, not being able to prevent. So rarely after otare, and to express
a purpose. In all these constructions the future is strictly excep-
tional, the only regular forms of the infinitive out of indirect dis-
course being the present and aorist, except in the few cases in which
the perfect is used (§ 202, 2) and in the case mentioned in the
following Note. See also § 203, N. 2.
Note. One regular exception to the principle just stated is
found in the periphrastic future (§ 118, 6), where the present and
future infinitives with /xeAXto are equally common, but the aorist
seldom occm's.
4. The future optative is used onl}^ in indirect discoui'se
and constructions which involve this (§ 203, N. 3).
B. In Indirect Discourse.
Remark. The term indirect discourse includes all clauses de-
pending on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts
or words of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the
general structure of the sentence. It includes of course all indirect
quotations and questions.
§ 203. When the optative and infinitive stand in indirect
discourse, each tense represents the corresponding tense of the
same verb in direct discourse. E.g.
''EXfyev on ypd(j)oi, he said that he was writing (he said ypd^ay, I
am loriting); eXeyeu oVt ypd^oi,he said that he would write (he said
'ypa\//'a), / will write)', ikeyev on ypd-^fiev, he said that he had
written (he said eypa>|/-a) ; eXeyfj/ ort y(ypa(f)cbs c'lrj, he said that
he had already written (he said yeypa^a). "Upero c'i tis efiov tlij
aocfxarepos, he asked whether any one was wiser than I (he asked
cart Tis ;)'
§ 203.] TENSES. 251
^(71 ypd(f)€iv, he says tJiat he is tcrifing (he says ypat^w) ; (fyrjal
ypdxireiv, he says that he icill loriie (ypdxj/co); (pTjal ypd-^ai, he says
that he wrote {€ypa\l/ay, (f>r](Tl yeypa^evai, he says that he has written
(y€ypacf)a).
Eineu oTi avbpa ayoi ov elp^ai 8eoi, he said that he was Iringing a
man whom it was necessary to confine (he said avbpa aya> ov eip^ai
del). 'EXoyl^ovTO a>s, el pr] pdxoiVTO, aTroaTrjaoivTo ai ttoXcls,
they considered that, if they should not fght, the cities would revolt
(they thought edv prj /xa;(&)/x6^a, aTroa-Trja-ovTai, if we do notfght,
they wilt revolt).
These constructions will be explained in § 243, § 246, and § 247.
Here they merely show the different force of the tenses in indirect
discourse and in other constructions. Compare especially the
difference between (fyrjal ypd<peLv and (firjal ypdyj/ai under § 203
with that between (SovXeTai ttokIv and ^ovkerai noiiicrat under
§ 202. Notice also the same distinction in respect to the present
and aorist optative.
Note 1. The present infinitive may represent the imperfect as
well as the present indicative; as rivas eiixds vnokap^dvcr evx^o'Sai
TOP ^(Xlttttou or ecrnevdev ; ivhat prayers do you suppose Philip made
when he was pouring libations? (i.e. rtVa? rjvxeTo;). The perfect
infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluperfect. In such
cases the time of the infinitive must always be shown by the
context (as above by or eanevdev).
So rarely the present optative represents the imperfect indicative
(§ 243, Note 1). See § 204, Note 1.
Note 2. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c. form an in-
termediate class between verbs which take the infinitive in indirect
discourse and those which do not (see Rem. before § 203); and they
allow either the future infinitive (as in § 203) or the present and
aorist (as in § 202). E.g.
^HXTTi^of pdxr)v eaeadai, they expected that there tcould be a battle
(Thuc); but a oviroTe ifkntcrev nadelv, ichat he never expected to
suffer (Eur.). 'Ynfo-xero poi ^ovXevaaadaL, and vTrea-x^To firjxavrjv
Trapeze IV (both in Xen.).
The construction of indirect discourse (the future) is the more
common here. In English we can say 1 hope {expect or promise)
to do this, like noielv or Troirjaai; or I hope I shall do this, Jike
7roij;o"e«/.
Note 3. The future optative is never used except as the repre-
sentative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse (as
in the examples under § 203), or in the construction of § 217 (which
is governed by the principles of indirect discourse). Even here the
future indicative is generally retained. See § 217, and § 248,
Note.
252 SYNTAX. [§204.
III. TENSES OF THE PARTICIPLE.
§ 204, The tenses of the participle generally express the
same time as those of the indicative ; but they are present,
past, or future relatively to the time of the verb with which
they are connected. E.g.
^Afiaprdvei tovto Trotwv, he errs in doing this; rj fxapravc tovto
TToicov, he erred in doing this ; dfxapT-qa-eTai tovto ttolcou, he will err in
doing this. (Here Trotav is ^v^t present^ then/jas^, th.e,n future ^ abso-
lutely; but always present to the verb of the sentence.) Taura
fiTTovre? aTTrfkdov^ having said this, they departed. Ov ttoWoI 0ai-
vovTai ^vveX66vTes, not many appear to have joined the expedition.
*E7TTJv€o-av Tovs elprjKOTas, they praised those tuho had (already)
spoken. Tovto ttoltjo-wv epxcTai, he is coming to do this; tovto Troirf-
aoiv rjXdev, he came to do this. "AneXde ravra Xa/3coi/, take this and be
off (Xafioav being past to aneXde, but absolutely future).
Note 1. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as
olda KaKeivco (roicf)povovvT€, ccrre ^coKparei avurjcTTrjv, I know that they
both were continent as long as they associated with Socrates (i. e.
€(ro)(f>pov€iTr]v). See § 203, Note 1.
Note 2. The aorist participle in certain constructions does not
denote time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses a
simple occurrence without regard to time (like the aorist infinitive in
§ 202). This is so in the following examples: —
"Etvx^v e\6oiv he happened to come; k'Xadeu iXBuiv, he came
secretly; e(f)6r] eXdwv, he came frst. (See § 279,4.) IlfpaSfti/ rj)i/
yrjv TixTjdela-av, to allow the land to be ravaged (to see it ravaged j.
(See § 279, 3.) So sometimes when the participle denotes that m
which the action of the verb consists (§ 277) ; as €v y enoLTjo-ai
dvapvTjaas fx€, you did well in reminding me.
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
§ 205, 1. The present is the tense commonly used in
Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an
habitual action ; as ifkolov eU Arjkov ^AOrjvaLOL irefiirovaiv^
the Athenians send a ship to Delos {annualhj).
2. In animated language the aorist is used in this
sense. This is called the gnomic aorist., and is generally
translated by the English present. E.g,
§ 207.] THE PARTICLE "AN. 253
"Hv tls TovTcav Ti Trapa^alvrj, ^rjixlav avrois eTre^etraj/, i.e. they
impose a pejia/tj/ on all who transgress. Mi" rjfiepa rbv jxev KadilXev
v\f/^66ev, Tov 5' rjp* avco, One day {often) brings down one man from a
height and raises another high.
Note 1. Here one distinct case in past time is vividly used to
represent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as
TtoWciKLs, oflen^ ^'drj, already, ovnto, never yet., illustrate the construc-
tion; as dOvfiovvres avdpes ovTToi rpoTraiou eo-rrjcrav, disheartened men
never yet raised a trophy, i.e. never raise a trophy.
Note 2. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric
similes; as ^pnre 8' as ore tls 8pvs rjpnrev, and he fell, as when some
oak falls (lit. as when an oak once fell).
Note 3. The gnomic aorist sometimes occurs in indirect dis-
course in the infinitive and participle, and even in the optative.
3. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. ^.g.
To de fifj ip.7Toha>v dvavTaycovia-ra ei/voia T€Tifxr]Tai, but those tcho are
not before men's eyes are honored with a good will which has no
rivalry.
The gnomic perfect may be used in the infinitive.
§ 206. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used
with the adverb dv to denote a customary action. E.g.
AirjpcoTcov av avTovs ti Xeyoiev, 1 used to ask them (7 would often
ask them) what they said. TJoWaKis ^Kovaafiev av vfids, we used
often to hear you.
Remark. This construction must be carefully distinguished
from the ordinary apodosis with av (§ 222). It is equivalent to our
phrase he would often do this for he used to do this, and was probably
developed from the past potential construction (§ 226, 2, N. 2).
Note. The Ionic has iterative forms in -o-kov and -arKOfirjv
in both imperfect and aorist. (See § 119, 10.) Herodotus uses
these also with av, as above.
THE PARTICLE "AN.
§ 207. The adverb dv (Epic /ce) has two distinct
uses.
1. It is joined to all the secondary tenses of the indica-
tive (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the
optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote that the action
254 SYNTAX. [§ 208.
of the verb is dependent on some condition^ expressed or
implied. Here it belongs to the verb.
2. It is joined regularly to et, t/, and to all relative
and temporal words (and occasionally to the final particles
CO?, oiTw^, and 6(f>pa), when these are followed by the
subjunctive. Here it belongs entirely to the particle or
relative, with which it often forms one word, as in idv,
orav, iTrecBdp.'
There is no English word which can translate av. In its first
use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb (^ovXoito av.,
he would wish ; eXoifjLrjv av, I should choose}. In its second use it has
no force which can be made apparent in English.
Eemark. The above statement (§ 207) includes all regular uses of &v
except the Epic construction explained in § 255, and the iterative con-
struction of § 206.
The following sections (§§ 208-211) enumerate the various uses of &v :
when these are explained more fully elsewhere, reference is made to the
proper sections.
§ 208« 1. The present and perfect indicative never take av,
2. The future indicative often takes av (or kc) in the early
poets, especially Homer ; very rarely in Attic Greek. U.g.
Kai K€ Tii a>8' epeei, and perhaps some one will thus speak; aXKoi^
o1 K€ fjL€ Tinrja-ova-i, others who will honor me {if occasion offers). The
future with av seems to have been an intermediate form between
the simple future, ivill honor, and the optative with av, would honor.
One of the few examples found in Attic prose is in Plat. Apol.
p. 29 C.
3. The most common use of av with the indicative is when
it forms an apodosis with the .secondary tenses. It here
denotes that the condition upon which the action of the verb
depends is not or was not fulfilled. See § 222.
For the past potential construction with &v, see § 226, 2, N. 2; for the
iterative construction with 6.v, see § 206.
§ 209. 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with av
only in the constructions mentioned in § 207, 2, where av
belongs to the introductory word. See § 223, § 225, § 232, 3,
§ 233; also § 216, 1, N. 2.
§ 211.] THE PARTICLE 'AN. 255
2. In Epic poetry, where the subjunctive is often used
nearl}' or quite in the sense of the future indicative (§ 255),
it may, hke the future (§ 208, 2), take av or kc. JE.g.
El 8e K€ /ij) doicoaiv, eyo) Se K€V avTOS eXco/xai, and if they do not
give her up, I will take her myself.
§ 210. The optative with av forms an apodosis, with
which a condition must be either expressed or impUed. It
denotes what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled
(§ 224).
Note. The future optative is never used with av. See § 203,
N. 3.
§ 211, The present and aorist (rarely the perfect) infini-
tive and participle are used with av to form an apodosis.
Each tense is here equivalent to the corresponding tense of the
indicative or optative with av, — the present representing also
the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect.
Thus the present infinitive or participle with av may repre-
sent either an imperfect indicative or a present optative with av ;
the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an aorist optative with
av ; the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect opta-
tive with av. E.g.
(JPres.) ^t}(t\v avrovs iXevdepovs av civai, eZ tovto eTrpa^av, he
saijs that they would (now) be free (Jjaav av)^ if they had done this ;
(l)r]a-\v avTovs i\evdepovs av elvai, ei tovto Trpd^eiav, he says that they
would (hereafter) be free (eiev av), if they should do this. OiSa avTovs
fXevdepovs av ovTas, d tovto enpa^av, I know that they would (now)
be free (rjaav av), if they had done this; ol8a avTovs iXcvOepovs av
ovTas, €1 TavTa npd^etav, I know that they would (hereafter) be free
((lev av), if they should do this.
(A or.) ^aaiv avTov e\6elv av (or oiba avTov eXdovTa av), fl tovto
eyei/ero, they say (or I know) that he would hare come (rfkOfvav),
if this had happened ; <paa\v avTov eXdelv av (or olda avTov (X66vTa
&v), el TOVTO yevoiTo, they say (or / know) that he would come
(eXdoL av), if this should happen.
(Perf) El /X77 Tcis dpcTas cKeivas TrapecrxovTO, irdvTa Tavff vno twv
^ap0dpcov av eaXaKevai ((j)r](T€iev av Tis), had they not exhibited (hose
exploits of valor, we might say that all this would have been captured
by the barbarians (eaXcoxet av) ; ovk av fjyoiifjLat avrovs diKrjv d^iav
BeBaKfvai, el avroav KaTa\I^T](fii(rai(T6e , I do not think they would (then,
256 > SYNTAX. [§212.
in the future) Tiave suffered proper punishment (SeSwKorfs hv^uv),
if you sJiould condemn them.
The context must decide in each case whether we have the equiva-
lent of the indicative or of the optative with aV. In the examples
given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question.
Note. As the early poets who use the future indicative with ap
(§ 208, 2) do not use this construction, the future infinitive and
participle with av are very rarely found.
§ 212, 1. When dv is used with the subjunctive (as in
§ 207, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory
word only by monosyllabic particles like /xcV, 8e, re, ydp, &c.
2. In a long apodosis dv may be used twice or even three
times with the same verb ; as ovk av rfy^la-O' avrov kov eTrtSpa-
/xetv; do you not think that he ivould even have rushed thither'^
In Time. ii. 41, dv is used three times with irapix'^a-Bai.
3. "Av may be used elliptically with a verb understood ; as
ot otKerat piyKOvcriv ' aX)C ovk av irpo rov (sc. eppeyKov) , the slaves
are snoring; but in old times they wouldn't have do7ie so. So in
<f>o/SovfX€vos wcTTTcp OLV cl TTttts, fearing like a child {uio-Trep av
€<j>oft€LTO el TTtttS ^v) .
4. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate verbs,
dv generally^ stands only with the first ; as ovSev av 8ta</)opov
Tov eripov ttoloT, dXA' cTrt ravrov ajxcfiOTCpOL loiev, he would do
nothing different from the other, but both would aim at the same
object (dv belongs also to touv) .
Note. The adverb rdxa, quickly, soon, readily, is often prefixed
to dv, in which case rdx dv is nearly equivalent to Xaas, perhaps.
The dv here always forms an apodosis, as usual, with the verb of
the sentence; as rdx civ eXdoi, perhaps he would come.
THE MOODS.
§ 213. 1. Tbe indicative is used in simple, absolute
assertions ; as ypd(j)6i, he ivriles ; ejpa^jrev^ he tvrole ;
jpdyjrei, he will ivrile ; yeypacj^ev, he has ivritten.
It has a tense to express every variety of time which is
recognized by the Greek verb, and it can thus state a sup-
§213.1 THE MOODS. 257
position as well as make an assertion in the past, present,
or future. It also expresses certain other relations which in
other languages (as in Latin) are generally expressed bj^ a
different mood. The following examples will illustrate these
uses : —
El TovTo aXrjdes earrt, x"^'P**' if ^^"* *^ true, I rejoice (§ 221); €i
eypayjrev, TfXdov av, if he had written^ I should have come (§ 222);
ft ypd-^ci, yvMaofiai, if he shall write (or if he icrites), I shall know
(§ 223, N. 1). 'ETTt/xeXeTrai ontos tovto yevfja-frai, he takes care that
this shall happen (§ 217). Aeyet otl tovto iroiel, he says that he is
doinfi this; sometimes, elirev on tovto notel, he said that he was doing
this (he said ttoio)). EWe fj-e cKTeivas, a>s fifjiroTe tovto € it o ltj a Uy
that thou hadst killed me, that I might never have done this! (§ 251,
2; § 216, 3). Ei^e tovto dXTjOes rjv, O that this were true! (§ 251, 2).
Remark. These constructions are explained in the sections re-
ferred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of giving any
precise single definition, which will be of practical value, including
all the uses even of the indicative. With the subjunctive and
optative it is equally impossible.
2. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown by
the following examples : —
"Epx^TQi Iva tovto tBff, he is coming that he may see this (§ 216);
^oficiTat firi TOVTO yevrjTai, he fears lest this may happen (§ 218).
'Eai/ eXdrj, totjto Troirjaoi, if he shall come (or if he comes), I shall do
this (§ 223); edv tis (XOrj, tovto ttoiS), if any one {ever) comes, I
(altvays) do this (§ 225). "Orav eXdrj, tovto noifja-co, when he shall
come (or when he comes), I shall do this (§ 232, 3); oTav tis (X6tj,
tovto TTotw, when any one comes, I (always) do this (§ 233).
"lanev, let us go (§ 253). M^ 6avfida-T)Te, do not wonder (^25i).
Ti fiVo); ivhat shall I say? (§ 256). Ov firj tovto yevrjTai this
(surely) loill not happen (§ 257). "iSco/xat, I shall see (Hom., § 255).
These constructions are explained in the sections referred to.
Remark. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most
primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative ;
this is seen in the -Homeric independent construction, iSco/xm, / shall
see; (tirriai tis, one will say. Then, in exhortations and prohibi-
tions it is still future ; as tco/zei/, let us go ; fir] TroifjarjTe tovto, do
not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future pur-
pose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional
relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in
general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly present)
m its time.
17
258 SYNTAX. [§ 213.
3. The various uses of the optative are shown by th&
following examples : —
'HX^ei/ tua tovto tSot, he came that he might see this (§ 216); €<po-
^fiTo fxr) TOVTO yevoiTo, he feared lest tfiis should happen (§ 218).
El eXdot, TovT av Troirja-aifxt, if he should come, 1 shoidd do this
(§ 224) ; ei Tis e\6oc, tovt cVoiovj/, if any one (ever) came, I (always)
did this (§ 225). "Ore e\6oi, tovt av Troifjo-atui, whenever he should
come (at any time when he shoidd come), 1 should do this (§ 232, 4);
ore Tii eX6oi, tovt enoiovv, ivhenever any one came, 1 (always) did this
(§ 233). 'ETre/xeXftro ottcbs tovto yevrjo-oiTo, he took care that this
should happen (§ 217). EtTiei/ (or eXeyev) on tovto Troioirj (Troirjo-oi
or noiTjaeie), he said that he ivas doing (would do or had done) this
(§ 243).
*'EX^ot av, he might go (if he should wish to) (§ 226, 2). EWe /^j)
oTToXoii/ro, O that they may not perish ! M?) yivoiTo, may it not
happen (§ 251, 1).
These constructions are explained in the sections referred to.
Remark. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and less
distinct form of expression than the subjunctive, in constructions
of the same general character. This appears especially in its inde-
pendent uses; as in the Homeric 'EXei/771/ ayoiTo, he may tale Helen
away (cf . aye'o-^co, let him take) ; loififv, may we go (cf . 'iuifxev, let us
go) ; fit) yevoLTo, may it not happen (cf. fir) yevT]Tau let it not happen) ;
eXoiTo av (Horn, sometimes eXoiTo alone), he would take (cf. Horn.
cXT/rm, sometimes with kc, he 7cill take). So in future conditions;
as el yevoLTo, if it should happen (cf. eav yivrjTai, if it shall happen^.
In other dependent clauses it is generally a correlative of the sub-
junctive, sometimes of the indicative; it expresses the changed
relation of a dependent subjunctive or indicative in these con-
structions when the verb on which it depends is changed from
present or future to past time. The same change in relation is
expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, is,
&c. to should, would, might, did, was, &c. To illustrate these
last relations, compare epx^^"^'- ^^"^ *%' <l>o^eiTaL prj ycvrjTai. iav
Tis fXOri tovto TToim, cTTi/ieAeirat oiruis tovto yevqa-fTai, and Xcyfi
oTi tovto 'rrou7, with the corresponding forms after past leading
verbs given in § 213, 3.
4. The imperative is used to express commands and
prohibitions ; as tovto ttolcl, do this ; firj (j>€iiyeTe, do
not fly.
5. The infinitive is a verbal noun, which expresses the
simple idea of a verb without restriction of person or
number.
§215.] THE MOODS. 259
§ 214. The following sections (§§ 215-257) treat of all
constructions which require an}^ other form of the finite verb
than the indicative in simple assertions (§ 213, 1). The
infinitive and participle are included here only so far as they
are used in indirect discourse or in protasis and apodosis.
These constructions are divided as follows : —
I. Final and Object clauses after im, ws, ottw?, and /xtJ.
II. Conditional sentences. III. Relative and Temporal sen-
tences. IV. Indirect Discourse. V. Causal sentences.
VI. Wishes. VII. Commands, Exhortations, and Prohibi-
tions. VIII. Homeric Subjunctive (like Future Indicative) .
— Interrogative Subjunctive. — Ov /xiy with Subjunctive or
Future Indicative.
I. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER tva, w?, oTrwg, ^rj.
§ 215. The clauses which depend on the socBlled final
particles ha, &>?, oirco^, that, in order that, and /jlt], that not,
lest, may be divided into three classes : —
A. Final clauses, expressing the purpose or motive ; as
epxerat ha tovto 'IBy, he is coining- that he may see this.
Here all the final particles may be used.
B. Object clauses with otto)? after verbs signifying to
strive for, to care for, to effect ; as aKoirec ottco^; tovto
r^ev7](7€Tat, scc to it that this is done.
C . Object clauses with fiij after verbs oifear or caution ;
as (jio^etTai firj tovto tyevrjTac, he fears that (or lest^ this
may happen.
Remark. The first two classes (sometimes classed together as
fnal) are to be distinguished with special care. The object clauses
in B are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand in
apposition to an object accusative like tovto', as o-xoVft tovto, onois
fir) ae oyjreTai, see to this, namely, that he does not see you. But a final
clause could stand in apposition only to tovtov cvcku, for the sale of
this, or 8ia tovto, to this end ; as epxerai tovtov evcKa, Iva fjfias tdjji
he is coming for this purpose ^ namely, that he may see us.
260 SYNTAX. [§ 216.
Note 1. The negative adverb in all these clauses is /n^; except
after firj, lest, where ov is used.
Note 2. "Ocppa, that, is used as a final particle in Epic and Lyric
poetry.
A. Final Clauses.
§ 216. 1. Final clauses take the subjunctive after
primary tenses, and tlie optative after secondary tenses.
Aiavoelrai rfjv yi^vpav X€crat, co? firj dia^rJTe, he thinks of breaking
up the bridge, that yoa mag not jhiss over. AvcrufXel eaaai iv tco
TrapovTL, nrj Koi tovtov noKefiLov irpoo-SayfxeBa, it is expedient to alloio
it for a time, lest roe may add him to the number of our enemies. Ilapa-
KaXcls larpovs, ottcds pf} d-nodavr], you call in physicians, that he may
not die. ^l\os e^ovXero elvm ro2s peyi(TTa dvvapevoLS, Iva abiKbiv pff
hthoir) bUrjv, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he
viight do wrong and not be punished. Tovtov evcKa (^iXoav ^ero beiaOaii
6)ff avvepyovs e^oi, he thought he needed friends for this purpose ^
namely, that he might have helpers.
Note 1. The future indicative very rarely takes the place of
the subjunctive in final clauses after otto)?, ocppa, and p,r]. This is
almost entirely confined to poetry. See Odyss. i. 56, iv. 163; //.
XX. 301.
Note 2. The adverb av (kc) is sometimes joined with ««•, orro)?,
and ocfipa before the subjunctive in final clauses; as wy av pdOrjg,
avTaKovaov, hear the other side, that you may learn. It adds nothing
to the sense that can be made perceptible in English. In Homer
and Herodotus it occasionally occurs even before an optative.
2. As final clauses express the purpose or motive of some
person, they admit the double construction of indirect dis-
course (§ 242) . Hence, instead of the optative after secon-
dary tenses, we can have the mood and tense which would be
used when a person conceived the purpose in his own mind ;
that is, we can say either yXOev ha tSoi, he came that he
might see (§ 216, 1), or rj\.6€.v tva 1817, because the person
himself would have said epxopLai Iva IB w, I come that I may see.
(See § 248, Note.)
On this principle the subjunctive in final clauses after
secondary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular
optative. E.g.
§217.] THE MOODS. 261
Ta rrXoia KoriKavcrfv, Iva fxt] Kvpos 8ia^^, he burned the vessels j
that Cyrus might not pass over.
3. The secondary tenses of the indicative are used in final
clauses with ii/a, sometimes with ws or ottws, to denote that
the end or object is dependent on some unfulfilled condition
or some unaccomplished wish^ and therefore is not or was not
attained. E.g,
Tt /i' oil \al3oov €KT€ivas evdvs, wp edfi^a nrjnoTc; &c., why did you
not take me and kill me at once, (hat I might never have shown f &c.
^fO, </)ei), TO fif] TO. npdyfxaT di^Opwirois ^X^iv (puivrjv., Iv ^<rav fxrjdev oi
deipoi \6yoi, Alas ! alas! that the fads have no voice for wen, so that
words of eloquence might be as nothing.
B. Object Clauses with Sircos after Verbs oi Striving, Ac.
§ 217, Object clauses depending on verbs signifying
to strive for^ to care for., to effect., regularly take the
future indicative after both primary and secondary tenses.
The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as
the correlative of the future indicative, but commonly the
indicative is retained on the principle explained in § 216, 2.
(See § 202, 4.) E.g,
^povTi^^ oTTcos fiT)8€P avd^tov T^s Tipris Tavrrjs irpd^eis, take heed
that you do nothing unworthy of this honor. ^EprjxavSpieda ottms
/MT/Seiy TovTo yvoicroiTo, ive were planning that nobody should know
this (here yi/axrerai would be more common). "'Enpaacrov ottohs tis
^orjdeia fj^ei, they were trying to effect {this), that some assistance
should come.
Note 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive or optative
is used after these verbs, as in final clauses. In this case ws also
may be used. "Oncos av or ws av may be used before the subjunc-
tive, never before the regular future indicative. M17 is sometimes
used for ottcos jjlt], generally with the subjunctive.
Note 2. The future indicative with ottcos sometimes follows
verbs of exhorting, entreating, commanding, and forbidding, which
commonly take an infinitive of the object; as diaKfXevovraL oirats
TifKoprja-erai navras rovs roiovrovs, they exhort him to take vengeance
on all such.
Note 3. The construction of § 217 is not found in Homer; but
such verbs as are mentioned in Note 2, and verbs signifying to con-
262 SYNTAX. [§ 218.
sidevj to try, and the like, take orrcos or cos with the subjunctive and
optative, as in final clauses. E.g.
Ai(ra((r6aL de fiiv avTos ottcos vrjfieprea ("ltttj, and implore him thyself
to speak the truth: Xiaaero d' aiet ^H^aiorof KkvToepyov 6tt(os Xixreiep
"Aprja, he irnplored him to liberate A?-es. So ^pacro-erai &s k€ verjrai ;
^ovXevov OTTois o^' apLara yevoiro.
Note 4. Both ottcos and ottcos htj are often used with the future
indicative in exhortatiojis ov prohibitions, some imperative like tr/coTrft
or o-KOTreiTe, take care, being understood. E.g.
''Ottcos ovv eaecrOe a^Loi ttjs (Xevdeplas, (see that you) prove your-
selves worthy of freedom. "Ottco s fjioi /ui) epels on eari to. bcobeKa tis ($,
see that you do not tell me that twelve is twice six. For a similar ellipsis
of a verb oi fearing^ see § 218, N. 2.
C. Object Clauses with K-^ after Verbs of Fearing, &c.
§ 218. After verbs denoting /(?ar, caution^ or danger^
^rj, that or lest^ takes the subjunctive after primary tenses,
and the optative after secondary tenses.
The subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain
the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the mind.
M.g.
^o^ovfiat firj rovTo yevrjrai (vereor ne accidat), I fear that this
way happen: (po^ovfjiaL prj ov tovto yfprjrat (vereor ut accidat),
J fear that this may not happen (§ 215, N. 1). ^povri^co pfj KparicTTov
^ fxai (Tiyav, I am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent. OvKeri
eTTfTiOevTo, bediores p-fi dTTOTfJirjOeLTjcrav, they no longer made attacks,
fearing lest they should be cut off. 'E(po[SovvTo prj ri TrdBrj, they feared
lest he should suffer anything (§ 216, 2).
Note 1. The future indicative is very rarely used after prj in
this construction. But ottcos fir) is sometimes used here, as in the
object clauses of § 217, wdth both future indicative and sub-
junctive.
Note 2. M^ with the subjunctive, or ottcos fxr) with the future
indicative, may be used elliptically, a verb of fear or caution being
understood. E.g.
Mr) dypoiKOTepov § to dXtjOes etVfii', (I fear that) the truth may be too
rude a thing to say. 'AXXa pfj ov rovr ^ ;(aXf7roi', but (I fear that) this
viay not be a difficult thing. See § 217, N. 4.
Note 3. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear which
are present or past. Here /x^ takes the present and past tenses of
the indicative. E.g.
§ 220.] THE MOODS. 263
Ae8oiKa firj nXrjycov deet, I fear that you need blows. ^o^ovfxtOa (jl^
dfMcfyoTepcov cifxa rj ixaprrjKafMcv, we fear that yoe have missed both at
once. Aeidco firj dq navra 6ea vrjfiepTea eiTrei/, I fear that all which the
Goddess said was true. Horn. "Opa fir] ttuI^cov cXeyev, beware lest he
was speaking in Jest.
II. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
§ 219, 1. In conditional sentences the clause con-
taining the condition is called the protasis, and that
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The
protasis is introduced by eZ, if.
The Doric al for el is sometimes used in Homer.
2. The adverb du (Epic Are) is regularly joined to el in
the protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive ; el with
du forming eaz/, du (a), or ijp, (See § 207, 2.) The
simple el is used with the indicative and optative.
The same adverb du is used in the apodosis with the
optative, and with the secondary tenses of the indicative
in the construction of § 222.
3. The negative adverb of the protasis is regularly /jurj,
that of the apodosis is ov.
Note. When ov stands in a protasis, it always belongs to some
particular word (as in ov ttoXXoi, feiv, ov <Plpiy t deny)^ and not to
the protasis as a whole ; as idv re vv koi "Awtos ov </> ^ r e fdu re (f)^Te,
both if you and Anytus deny it and if you admit it.
Classification of Conditional Sentences.
§ 220* Conditional sentences in Greek have six forms.
The classification is based chiefly on the time to which the
supposition refers, partly on what is implied with regard to
the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction
between particular and geheral suppositions exi)lained in II.
264 . SYNTAX. [§220.
I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditions.
The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of
(a) present or past and {b) future.
Present and Past Conditions.
(a) In present or past conditions, the question of fulfil-
ment has already been decided (in point of fact), but we may
or may not wish to imply by our form of statement how this
has been decided. In Greek (as in English or Latin) we
may, therefore, state such a condition in one of two ways : —
1. We may simply state a present or past condition, imply-
ing nothing as to its fulfilment ; as if he is {now) doing this,
tl TovTO TrpdaaeL; — if he was doing it, el cTrpao-o-e ; — if he did ity
ct €7rpa$€ ; — if he has (already) done it, el iriTrpa-^a. The apodosis
here expresses simply what is {was or will he) the result of
the fulfilment of the condition. Thus we may say : —
Et TT pa a- are I tovto, koXcos e^ei, if he is doing tJiis, it is well;
el TTpdaa-et tovto, TjpdprqKeu, if he is doing this, he has erred; el
TTpda-aeL tovto, KaXws e^ei, if he is doing this, it will be icell. Et
enpa^e tovto, KoKms exei {ftx^v, eaxev, or e^ei), if he did this, it is
{ivns or will be) well. So with the other tenses of the indicative.
(See §221.)^
So in Latin: Si hocfacit, bene est; Si hoc fecit, bene erit.
2. "We ma}'^ state a present or past condition so as to impl}'
that it is 7wt or was not fulfilled ; as if he were {now) doing
this^ el TOVTO eTrpa<T(Te', — if he had done this^ el tovto eirpa^e
(both implying the opposite) . The apodosis here expresses
what would be (or would have been) the result if the condition
were (or had been) fulfilled. The adverb av in the apodosis
distinguishes these forms from otherwise similar forms under
(cf) 1. Thus we may sa}^ : —
El eTTpaa-cre tovto, koXws av eJx^v, if he were (now) doing this, it
vmuld be well ; el eirpa^e tovto, Ka\a>s av eax^v, if he had done thiSy
it would have been well. (See § 222.)
In Latin: Si hoc facer et, bene esset; Si hoc fecisset, bene fuisset.
§220.] THE MOODS. 265
The Greek has no form implying that a condition is or was fulfilled,
and it is hardly conceivable that any language should find such a form
necessary or useful.
Future Conditions.
{h) We ma}^ state a future condition in Greek (as in
English and Latin) in either of two ways. ^
1. We may say if he shall do this, iav Trpda-o-r) (or Trpd^r/)
TovTo (or, still more vividl}^ ci Trpa^ct tovto), making a dis-
tinct supposition of a future case. The apodosis expresses
what will be the result if the condition shall be fulfilled.
Thus we may say : —
'Eap rrpda-a-rj (or Tpd^rj) tovto, KokCos e^ei, ifJie shall do tJiis^ it
will be well (sometimes d npd^ei tovto). (See § 223.) In Latin:
Si hoc faciei (or si hoc feceril}, bene erit ; sometimes Si hoc
facial.
2. We may also say if he should do this, cl Trpda-o-oi (or
TTpa^ete) tovto, still supposing a case in the future, but less
distinctly and vividh' than before. The apodosis corresponds
to this in form (with the addition of ai^) , and expresses what
would be the result if the condition should be fulfilled. Thus
we can say : —
El IT p da (TO I (or Tvpd^cie) tovto, KaXws av e;(ot, if he should
do this, it would be well. (See § 224.) In Latin: Si hoc facial,
bene sit.
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
The supposition contained in a protasis may be either
particular or general. A particular supposition refers to a
definite act or a definite series of acts ; as if he (now) has this,
he will give it ; if he had it, he gave it ; if he had had the power,
he would have helped me ; if he shall receive it (or if he receives
it) , he will give it ; if he should receive it, he woidd give it.
A general supposition refers to any one of a class of acts,
which may occur (or may have occurred) on any one of a
series of possible occasions ; as if ever he receives anything.
266 SYNTAX. [§220.
he {always) gives it ; if ever he received anything^ he {always)
gave it ; if he had {on each occasion) had the power, he would
{always) have helped me ; if ever any one shall (or should) wish
to go^ he will (or would) always be permitted.
Although this distinction is seen in all classes of con-
ditions (as the examples show) , it is onl}' in the present and
past conditions which do not imply non-fulfilment, i.e. in
those of {a) 1, that the Greek distinguishes general from
particular suppositions in construction. Here, however, we
have two classes of conditions which contain only general
suppositions.
{a) When the apodosis has a verb of present time express-
ing a customary or repeated action (§ 205), the protasis may
refer (in a general way) to an}- one of a class of acts which
can be supposed to occur within the period represented in
EngUsh as present. Thus we may say : —
'Eai/ TLs KXeTTTTj, KoXdCerai, if {ever) any one steals, he is {in all
such cases) punished ; edu tis TrpdcrcTT] (or Trpd^rj) tolovtov rt, xaXe-
naivoixev avra, if {ever) any one does such a thing, we are {aiways)
angry loith him. (See § 225.)
{h) When the apodosis has a verb of past time expressing
a customary or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a
general way) to any one of a class of acts which can be sup-
posed to have occurred in the past. Thus we may say : —
El Tis icXeTTTot, iKo\d^€To., if {ever) any one stole, he toas {in all
such cases) punished ; ei riy Trpdaa-oi (or irpd^ete) toiovtov ti,
i xaXenaivofiev avra, if {ever) any one did such a thing, we were {always)
angry with him. (See § 225.)
Remark 1. Although the Latin sometimes agrees with the Greek
in distingu<ishing general conditions from ordinary present and past
conditions', using sifaciat and sifaceret like idv Tvpdacrrj and et Trpao--
o-oi above, it yet commonly agrees with the English in not recogniz-
ing the distinction, and uses the indicative alike in both classes.
Even the Greek sometimes (especially in poetry) neglects the distinc-
tion, and uses the indicative in these general conditions (§ 225, N. 1).
Remark 2. In external form the present general condition coin-
cides with the more vivid futm^e condition, {h) 1, both being ex-
pressed by idv and the subjunctive, and the form of the apodosis
alone distinguishing them. But in sense there is a much closer
connection between the general present condition and the ordinary
§ 222.] THE MOODS. 267
present condition expressed by el and the present indicative, (a) 1,
with which in most languages (and sometimes even in Greek) it
coincides also in form (see Remark 1). On the other hand, edv
with the subjunctive in a future condition generally agrees in sense
with et and the future indicative (§ 223, N. 1), and is never inter-
changeable with et and the present indicative.
1. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences.
A. Present and Past Conditions*
1. Simple Particular Suppositions.
§ 221. When the protasis simply states a present or
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the
fulfilment of the condition, it takes the indicative with
el. Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis.
E.g.
El 6€oi Ti dpaxriv al(rxpov, ovk flaXv Beoi, if the Gods do anything
disf/racej'ul, there are no Gods. Eur. Ei eyct) ^aldpov dyvoa>, koX
eixavTov iniKiXTjafxat. ' dWa yap ovderepd eari tovtqjv, if I do not knou)
Phaedrus, I have forgotten myself ; but neither of these is so. Et Beov
rji'f OVK riv al(TXpoK€p8f)s, if he was the son of a God, he teas not ava-
ricious. 'AXX' 6t doKel o-ot, rrXeconev^ but if it pleajies you, let us sail.
Ka/cto-r dTroXolfXTjv, SauOiav d firj 0tXoJ, may I die most wretchedly, if
I do not love Xanthias.
Note. Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of
this class if it expresses merely a present intention or necessity that
something shall be done; as aipe TrXrjKrpou, el fxax^l', raise your
spur, if you are going to fight. Aristoph. Here el /xeXXfis p.dxea6ai.
would be the more common expression in prose. It is important to
notice that a future of this kind could not be changed to the sub-
jmictivp, like the ordinary future in protasis. (For the latter see
§ 223, N. 1.)
2. With Supposition contrary to Fact.
§ 222. When the protasis states a present or past
supposition, implying that the condition is not or was not
fulfilled., the secondary tenses of the indicative are used
in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis takes the
adverb av.
The imperfect here refers to present time or to a
268 SYNTAX. [§ 222.
continued or repeated action in past time, the aorist to
an action simply occurring in past time, and the (rare)
pluperfect to an action finished in past or present time.
E.g,
Tavra ovk av ihvvavro rroielv, cl fxfj dialrrj fxeTpia ixpotvrOj they
would not be able (a.s* they are) to do this, if they did not lead an
abstemious life. Et rjaav avdpes dyadoi, o>s av (jyrjs, ovk av nore
ravra Zivatrx'^^i {/^^'^^ ^''^"'^ ^^'^^ f/ot»r/ inen^ as you say, they would
never have suffered these things (referring to several cases), kai to-coy
av aireOavov., 6t p-r] rj apx^ KaTfXvOrj, and perhaps I should have
perished, if the government had not been put down. El dneKpivco,
Uavas av ^dr) e fx€ p,adr]Kr] (§ 113, 2, N. 4), if you had answered, I
should already have learned enough (which now I have not done).
El pLT} vfXfls ^X^ere, iiropevo peOa hv em tov jSao-tX/a, if you
had not come (aor.), we should now be on our way (impf.) to the
King.
Note 1. Sometimes av is omitted in the apodosis, as in English
we may say it had been for it would have been, or in Latin aequius
fuerat for aequius fuisset ; as ft /xj) fjap-ev, (f>6^ov rrapeo-x^v, if we had
. not known, this had (woidd have) caused us fear. ISo KaXov rjv
avT^ el OVK eyevvT^drj 6 avdpconos eKelvos, it had been good for that man
if he had not been born. N. T.
) Note 2. The imperfects ebei, xp^" o^ ^XP^^-> ^^h^-> and others
/ denoting necessity, propriety, obligation, possibility, and the like, are
] often used with the infinitive to form an apodosis implying the non-
/ fulfilment of a condition. /^Ai^ is not used Here, as these phrases
simply express in other Words what is usually expressed by the
indicative with av. I Thus, edei ere rovrov (fnXelv, you ought to love
him (but do not), or you ought to have loved him (but did not), is
equivalent to you would love him, or would have loved him (ecjyiXds
hv TovTov), if you did your duty (ra deovra). So e^^v aoi tovto
TTOi^a-ai, you might have done this ; elKos rjv ae tovto 7roifj(rai, you
would properly have done this. The real apodosis is here always in
the infinitive. "O.cjie'Kov with the infinitive in wishes is used in the
same way; see § 251, 2, N. 1, and the examples.
Wheii the present infinitive is used, the construction refers to
the present or to continued or repeated action in the past ; when the
aorist is used, it refers to the past.
Note 3. In Homer the imperfect indicative in this class of
sentences (§ 222) always refers to the past. We occasionally find a
present optative in Homer in the sense in which Attic writers use
the imperfect indicative; and in a few passages even the aorist
optative with /ce in the place of the aorist indicative (see //. v. 311
and 388).
§224.] , THE MOODS. 269
B. Future Conditions.
1. Subjunctive in Protasis with Future Apodosis.
§ 223. When a supposed future case is stated dis-
tinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall g-o, or if Ig'o),
the protasis takes the subjunctive with idv (Epic et Ke).
The apodosis takes the future indicative or some other
form expressing future time. E.g.
El iiev K€V MeveXaou 'AXf^avSpo? KaraTrecfivrjf avroi tmiff 'FXevrjv
ix^T(a Koi KTrjfiara navra, if Alexander shall slay Alenelaus, then let
him have Helen and all the goods himself. Horn. "Ap tis avdiarrj-
rai, TTfipaaofieBa x^i-pova-dai, if an)/ one shall stand opposed to us, we
shall try to overcome him. *Eai/ ovv irjs vvu, nore eaet oLkoi; if there-
fore you go now, when will you be at home?
Remark. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go
express the force of the Greek subjunctive; but the ordinary
modern English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly-
future.
Note 1. The future indicative with ei is very often used for the
subjunctive in conditions of this class, as a still more vivid form
of expression; as et /LU7 KaOe^eis y\a)(ra-av, ea-rai aoi KaKa, if you
do not (shall not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble. This
common use of the future, in which it is merely a more vivid form
than the subjunctive, must not be confounded with that of § 221,
Note.
Note 2. In Homer el (without tiv or /ce) is often used with the
subjunctive, apparently in the same sense as ei k€ or rjv, as d 6e vq
iSiXrj oXea-ai, but if he shall wish to destroy our ship. The same use of
el for edp is found occasionally even in Attic poetry. See § 239, N. 1.
For the Homeric subjunctive with k€ in apodosis, see § 255,
Note.
2. Optative in Protasis and Apodosis.
§ 224, When a supposed future case is stated in a
less distinct and vivid form (as in English, if I should g-o),
the protasis takes the optative with et, and the apodosis
takes the optative with du. E.g>
Ei»;p ^oprjTo^ ovk av, el 7rpd<r(rois KoKStg, you tootdd not be en-
durable, if you should be in prosperity. Ov ttoXXi) av dXoyia etrj, ei
270 . SYNTAX. [§225.
dyo^olro rov Bavarov 6 toiovtos; would it not he a great absurdity^
if such a man should fear death? OIkos §' avros, d ({)Boyyr}v Xa/3oi,
aa(f)€crTaT hv Xe^eifp, but the house itself, if it should find a roice,
would speak most plainly.
The future optative cannot be used in protasis or apodosis, except
in indirect discourse representing the futui'e indicative (see tlie
third example under § 247).
Note 1. "Av is very rarely omitted in an apodosis of this class.
Most examples occur in Homer; as 6 ou dvo y avdpe ^e'poiev, which
two men could not carry (if they should try). But au is sometimes
omitted in the Attic poets after such expressions as ovk ea-B' on as
and OVK eariv oaris (see Aesch. Prom. 292, Eur, Ale. 52).
Note 2. For the Homeiic optative used like the past tenses of the
indicative in conditions, see § 222, N. 3.
II. Present and Past General Suppositions.
§ 225, In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses
a customary or repeated action or a general truth., and the
protasis refers in a general way to any one of a class of
acts. Here the protasis has the subjunctive with idv
after present tenses, and the optative with el after
past tenses. The apodosis has the present or imperfect
indicative, or some other form which implies repetition.
Hv eyyvs eXBr) Bdvaros, ov8€\s jSouXeToi BvfjarKfiv, if death comes
near, no one is (erer) wiUinfj to die. "Anas: \6yos:., av aTrfj ra Trpdyfiara,
Hdraiov tl (jiaiverac Kol Kevov, all speech, if deeds are wanting, appears
a v^iin and empty thing. Ei riva^ Bopv(ioviievovs a'taBoiro, Kara-
ar^epuvvai ttjv rapaxrjv eneiparo. if he saw any falling into disorder
(or whenever he saw, &c.), lie (always) tried to quiet the confusion.
El TL9 dpTeinoi, evBvs TeBvi]Kei, if any one refused, he was imme-
diately put to death.
Remark. The gnomic aorist ('§ 205, 2), which is a primary
tense (§ 201), can always be used here in the apodosis with the
subjunctive depending on it; as rjv ns napa^aivrj. (w'tav avrols
eneBecrav, if any one transgresses, they impose a penalty on him.
Note 1. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the
subjunctive or optative in general suppositions; that is, these sen-
tences may follow the construction of ordinary present and past
suppositions (§ 221), as in Latin and English; as « ns dvo fj koi
§226.] THE MOODS. , 271
jrXeovs ris ^fiepas Xoyl^erai, fiaTaios ia-riv, if ant* one counts on two
or even more days, he is a fool. See § 233, N. 1.
Note 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis (§ 223, N. 2), el is some-
times used with the subjunctive in poetry for idv or ei kc.
Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences.
Ellipsis and Substitution In Protasis or Apodosis.
§ 226. 1 . The protasis sometimes is not expressed in its
regular form with el or idv, but is contained in a participle,
or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence.
When a participle represents the protasis, its tense is alwaj'S
that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indica-
tive, subjunctive, or optative. The present (as usual) includes
the imperfect. E.g.
Has dUrjs ova-rjs 6 Zevs ovk dn6\cci\cv ; how is it that Zeus has not
been destroyed, if Justice exists? (el dUr) eariv). Iv de K\vtov eiaei
rdxa. hut you will soon hiotv, if you listen (= eav Kkvjjs). 'AnoXovfiai
fiT) TovTO fiaBayv, I shall be ruined unless I learn this {eav fxi] fidOoi).
TomOra rav yvvat^X avvvaiav exots, such things would you have to
endure if you should dwell among women (i.e. el crvvvaiois). 'Htti-
crrrjaev nv ris oKovaas, any one would have disbelieved such a thing if
he had heard it (i.e. el rJKovaev). Mafifxav fi' Ap alTrjaratn-os (sc. aov^
^Kov croi ({)epa)v av aprov, and if you {ever') cried for food (el atTTjaeias,
§ 225), / used to come to you luith bread (§ 206).
Aia ye vfxds avrovs TraXai av oTroXtuXfire, if it had depended on
yourselves, you zvould long ago have been ruined. Ovto) yap ouceri
Tov XoiTTov 7rda\oifieu av kukws, for in that case ire should no longer
suffer harm (the protasis being in ovtoi). Old* &v diKaicoi es kukov
Trea-oifxi ti, nor should I justly (i.e. if I had Justice) fall into any
trouble.
2. The protasis is often altogether omitted, leaving the
optative or indicative with av alone as an apodosis.
(a) Here there is sometimes a definite protasis suggested •
by the context or by the circumstances. Eg.
Ovk ecrOioviTi 7rKeia> fj bvvavrai (f)epeiv' biappayelev yap av. they do not
eat more than they can carry; for (if they did) they ivoidd burst.
Hycrf rrjv elprjvrjv oficos' ov yap ^v o ri av (TroielTe, you still kept the
peace ; for there teas nothing ivhich you could have done (if you had
not).
272 SYNTAX. [§ 226.
(b) Sometimes, however, the implied protasis is too indefi-
nite to be expressed (in Greek or in English) , as often when
it is merel}^ if he pleased^ if he could ^ if he should try^ if there
should be an opportunity^ if we should consider^ if what is
natural (or likely) should happen, &c. Sometimes it is even
too vague to be reall}^ present in the mind. Thus arises the
potential optative and indicative (with av), corresponding to
the English forms with may, can, must, might, could, would,
and should. E.g.
"icrat? au Tis imTifiTjcreie rots (IprjixevoiSj perhaps some one might (or
may} find fault with what has been said. 'Hbecos S' au tyoay epoinrjv
AeTTTivrjv, and 1 should be glad to ask Leptines. ToOro ovt av ovtos
exoi Xeyeiu ovff vfiels TreKrSfirjre, neither could (can) he say this, nor
loould you believe it (if he should). Ovk av fieOfi/jirjv tov Opovov, I
won^t give up the throne (/ would n^t on any condition). ILoi ovv rpa-
TTolfieO^ av; whither then can we turn?
QaTTov ^ TLs &v aero, quicker than one would have thought. Krvnov
nas Tis rja-der* av cra(f)o>S', every one must have heard the sound. So
Tiyfjo-co av, you would have thought; cldes av, you might have seen;
CI. Latin crederes, diceres, videres, &c.
So ^ovXoLfirjv av (velim), I should wish (in some future case);
i^ov\6p,T]v av (yellem), I should (now) wishj I should prefer (on some
condition not fulfilled).
Note 1. The potential optative sometimes expresses a mild
command, and sometimes is hardly more than a future, or a softer
expression for a mere assertion ; as x^po'is av eio-to, you may go in ;
\eyois av, you may speak (for speak) ; kXvols av ^'8r), ^di^e, hear me
now, Phoebus. Ovk av ovv irdvv yk ri a-novdalov f'lrj f] diKaioo-vvrj,
Justice will not then turn out to be anything very excellent: see also the
fourth and fifth examples under (b). Ovk hv dpvoifirjv tovto, I
will not (iDould not) deny it.
In these cases and in most of those under (b), the form of an
apodosis was unconsciously used with no reference to any definite
condition.
Note 2. The potential indicative sometimes expresses what
would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have happened (and
perhaps did happen) , with no reference to any unfulfilled condition ;
as t) yap piv ^(oov ye Kix'fjo-cai, rj Kev ^Opearrjs Krdvev v7ro<p6dfxevoi, for
either you will fond him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed
him before you (Od. iv. 546); 6 Ofaadpevos Tray av ri? dvr)p rjpdaOi]
dd'ios elvuL, every man who saw this (the ' Seven against Thebes ') would
have longed to be a warrior (Aristoph,). See § 206, Rem.
3. The apodosis may be expressed b}^ an infinitive or
participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its
§227.] THE MOODS. 273
own tenses of the indicative or optative (§ 203, with Note 1).
If the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av, this
particle is used with the infinitive or participle. E.g.
'Hyovfxai, d tovto Troteire, ndvTa koXws e;^etz/, / believe that, if you
are doing this, all is well; rjyovfxat, iav tovto ttoitjtc, ndvra Ka\a>s
e^etv, / believe that, if you shall do this, all will be well; olda vfxds idu
TavTa yevTjTai ev rrpd^ovTas, I know that you will prosper if this is
(shall be) done. For examples of the infinitive and participle with
av, see § 211.
4. The apodosis may be expressed in an infinitive not in
indirect discourse (§ 260, 1), especially one depending on a
verb of wishing, commanding, advising, &c., from which the
infinitive receives a future meaning. E.g.
BovXerat eXOelv edv tovto yevqTai, he wishes to go if this shall be
done; KeXevco vfj-ds idv "dvvrjo-de dnfXdelv, I command you to depart
if you can (§ 226). For the principle of indirect discourse which
appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see § 248, 1.
Note 1. Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in the con-
text, and in such cases ft or edv is often to be translated supposing
that or in case that; as aKovcrov Kai tfxov, edv aoi tuvtci 8ok^, hear me
also, in case the same shall please you (i.e. that then you may assent to
it) ; 01 8' (MKTcipov, el dXaxrolvTo, and others pitied them, in case they
should be captured (i.e. thinking what they would suffer if they should
be captured). See § 248, 2. So npos rfjv noXiv, el eTri^oijdolev,
ix^povv, they marched towards the city, in case they {the citizens) should
rush out (i.e. to meet them if they should rush out). On this principle
we must explain at Kev Trta? ^ovkeTai, 11. i. 66 ; at k e6ekrja6a,
Od. iii. 92; and similar passages.
Note 2. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for
effect; as el p.ev daxrova-i yepas, if they (shall) give me a prize ^ — very
well (11. i. 135; cf. i. 580).
Mixed Constructions. — A^ in Apodosis.
§ 227. 1. The protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to
different forms. This happens especially when an indicative
with el in the protasis is followed by an optative with av in the
apodosis, the latter sometimes having another protasis implied,
and sometimes being a potential optative (§ 226, 2). U.g.
'Elvvvye bvcTTVXov p.ev, jras Tavavri^ av npdTTovTes ov cra>^olfie6*
av J if we are now unfortunate j how could we help being saved if we
18
274 SYNTAX. [§ 228.
should do the opposite f Et ovtoi 6p6m direa-rrjcrav, vfiels av ov
Xpcoiv apxoire, if the. "^e had a right to secede, you cannot {could not)
possibly hold your power rightfully.
Note. Sometimes a protasis contains the adverb av, belonging
not to el, but to the verb. Here the verb is also an apodosis at
the same time; as « /xi) TroiT^o-atr' av tovto, if (it is true that) you
would not do this (i.e. if it should be necessary), which differs entirely
from et fi?) iroiTja-aiTe tovto, if you should not do this; el rnvro
laxvpov rjv av avrw TeKfirjptov, if this would have been a strong proof J or
him (if he had had it).
2. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the conjunc-
tion Sc, which cannot be translated in English. E.g.
Et be Kf pf] daxoariv, eya> de Kev avTos eXco/xai, but if they do not give
her up, then I will take her myself.
El after Verbs of Wondering, Ac.
§ 228» Some verbs expressing wonder^ contentment., dis^
appointment., indignation., &c. take a protasis with d where a
causal sentence would seem more natural. So miror si in
Latin. U.g.
Qavpn^cii 8' eycoye el fXT]8e\s vpa>v prjv evOvfielrai firjT opyi^erai, and I
wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry (lit. if no one
of you is, &c., 1 wonder). See also § 248, 2, for the principle of
indirect discourse applied to these sentences.
Note. Such verbs are especially 6avixd^a>, alarxvvopai, ayairdon,
and dyavaKTea. They sometimes take on, because, and a causal
sentence (§ 250).
III. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Remark. The principles of construction of relative clauses include all
temporal clauses. Those introduced by ^ws, irplv, and other ■f)articles mean-
ing until, have special peculiarities, and are therefore treated separately
(§§ 239, 240).
§ 229. The antecedent of a relative is either definite
or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to a
definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place,
or manner ; it is indefinite when no such definite person,
thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite
§232.] THE MOODS. 275
and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or
understood. E.^.
{Definite.^ TaOra a ex'^ opas^ you see these things which I have;
or a €x<^ Spas- "Ore fjSouXero rjXdev, (once) ivhen he wished^ he came.
(Indejinile.) Tldpra a au ^ovXcavraL e^ovcriv, they will have every-
thing which they may want ; or a av ^ovXcovrat c^ovctlv, they will have
whatever they may want. "Orav eXOij^ tovto Trpa^co, when he shall come
(or when he comes), I will do this. "Ore ^ovXolto, tovto eirpaaa-cvj
whenever he wished, he (always) did this. 'Qs civ eiTro), Troico/iej/, as I
shall direct, let us act.
Definite Antecedent.
§ 230. A relative as such has no effect on the mood
of the following: verb. A relative with a definite ante-
cedent therefore may take the indicative (with ov for its
negative) or any other construction which could occur in
an independent sentence. E.g-.
Tiff ((xff 6 x«poff drJT iv a ^e^rjKafiev ; i.e. the place in which, &c.
*Ea)ff eo-ri Kaipoi, dvTiXd^eade twv 7rpayp.aT(ov, (now) ichile there is an
opportunity, &c. Tovto ovk enoirjcrev, €V(o top dr)pov eTiprja-ev av, he did
not do this, in which he would have honored the people. So 6 p-rf
yevoiTo, may this not happen.
Indefinite Antecedent. — Conditional Relative.
§ 231. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent
has a conditional force, and is often called a protasis,
the antecedent clause being called the apodosis. Such
a relative is called a conditional relative. The negative
particle is /x??.
Note. Relative words (like et, if) take av before the subjunc-
tive. (See §207, 2.) ^ With ore, oTrore, eVei, and eVetSj;, <?i/ forms
oral/, oTTOTav, endv or ejrrjv (Ionic enedv), and infiMv. "^A with av may
form &v. In Homer we generally find 6t€ /ce, &c. (like et «e, § 219, 2),
or oTe, &c. alone (§ 234).
§ 232. The conditional relative sentence has four
forms (two of present and past^ and two of future con-
ditions) which correspond to the four forms of ordinary
protasis (§§ 221-224).
276 SYNTAX. [§233.
1. Present or past condition simply stated (§ 221). E.g.
"O Ti ^ovXerai ddxTO), I will give him whatever he (now) wishes
(like €t TL jSovXfrat, dcoarco, if he (now) wishes anything, I will give it).
*A ixTi oiSa, ovSe oio/Ltai clbevai, what I do not know, I do not even think
I know (like el' riva firj ol8a, if there are any things which I do not
know).
2. Present or past condition stated so as to imply that
the condition is not or was not fulfilled (^supposition con-
trary to- fact, § 222). E.g.
*A ixrj € ^ovXcTo bovvat, ovk av edcuKcv, he tvould not have given what
he had not wished to give (like ei nva yLt] f^ovXero dovpai, ovk av edixxsv,
if he had not wvihed to give certain things, he would not have given
them). Ovk av ene^^etpovfiev TrpdrTeiv a fifj rjnicrTdfXfda, we should
not (then) be undertaking to do (as ice now are) things which we dui
not understand (like el nva fxr} rjiria-Tcifxeda, if there were any things
which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a supposition
not realized). So 6j/ y^pas erer/xei/, Od. i. 217.
This case occurs much less frequently than the others.
3. Future condition in the more vivid form (§ 223).
E.g.
''O ri av ^ovXrjrai, daxro), I will give him whatever he may wish
(like idv Ti ^ovXrjrai, dot)(Ta), if he shall wish anything, I will give it).
"Orav firj aOevo), TreTrdva-ofiai, when I (shall) have no more strength^
I shall cease. ^AXoxovs koI vrjma rtKva a^ofiev ev vrjeaaiv, cttt) j/ TrroXtc-
6pov eXcofiev, we will carry them as soon as we shall have taken the
city. Horn.
Note. The future indicative cannot generally be substituted for
the subjunctive here, as it can in common protasis (§ 223, N. 1).
4. Future condition in the less vivid form (§ 224). E.g.
"O Ti. ^ovXoiTo, 8oLr]v av, I should give him whatever he might
wish (like ei ti ^ovXolto, Soitjv av, if he should ivish anything, I should
give it). linvoiv (pdyoi &v oTrore ^ovXoito, if he were hungry, he
would eat whenever he might wish (like ei nore ^ovXoiro, if he should
ever wish).
§ 233. The conditional relative sentence has the same
forms as other conditional sentences (§ 225) in present
and past general suppositions, taking the subjunctive after
present tenses, and the optative after past tenses. E.g.
"O Ti cLv ^ovXrjrai SiScojLit, 7 (always) give him whatever he wants.
(like (dv Ti ^ovXr}Tai, if he ever wants anything). "O n ^ovXoito
§235.] THE MOODS. 277
ebiSovv, I (always) gave him whatever he wanted (like ci ri ^ovXoiro).
^vixfiax^'tv TovTois eOekovaiv arravres^ ovs av opSxri Trapea-Kevaarfxevovs^
all wish to be allies of those whom they see prepared. 'HvIk av oIkoi
yevtourai, Spcotrii/ ovk dvdo-x^Ta, when they get home, they do things
unbearable. Ovs p-tv Xboi evraKTcos lovras, rives re elev rjpoDTa, /cat
en el nvOoiro en^vei, he (always) asked those tvhom he saw (at any
time) marching in good order, who they were ; and when he learned, he
praised them. 'ETretS^ he dvoix^^lr], ela^eifxev napa TovlaKparr], and
(each morning) when the prison was opened^ we went in to Socrates.
Note 1. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the sub-
junctive or optative here, as in the general suppositions of common
protasis (see § 225, N. 1). This occurs especially in poetry after
the indefinite relative oorts, which itself expresses the same idea
of indefiniteness which os with the subjunctive or optative usually
expresses; as oa-ns fifj tS)v dplarav airrerai fiovKevfiaTCDv, KaKtaros
elvai 8oKel, whoever does not cling to the best counsels seems to be most
base. Soph, Antig. 178. (Here 6s av fifj anrijTai would be the com-
mon prose expression.) Such examples belong under § 232, 1.
Note 2. Homeric similes sometimes have a>s, &s re, a>s ore, as os
(seldom &s kc, &c.), with the subjunctive, where we should expect
the present indicative, which is sometimes used; as as yvvfj kXui-
jjari, . . . . &s ^Odvaevs, &c., as a wife weeps, so did Ulysses, &c.
Odyss. viii. 523. See Odyss. v. 328; //. x. 5; xi. 67.
§ 234. Conditional relative sentences have most of the
peculiarities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the
protasis and apodosis may have different forms (§ 227, 1);
the simple relative is sometimes found in poetry with the sub-
junctive (like €t for idv or et kc, § 223, N. 2) ; the relative
clause may depend on an infinitive, participle, or other con-
struction (§ 226, 3 and 4) ; and the conjunction 8e may
connect the relative clause to a following antecedent clause
(§227,2).
Agslmilation In Conditional Relative Clauses.
§ 235. 1. When a conditional relative clause referring to
the future depends on a subjunctive or optative referring to
the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood
with its leading verb. E.g.
^Edv Tives ot hv dvvayvrai tovto rroiSxri, Kokats c^«, if any loho may
he able shall do this, it will be well; el rives ot dvvaivro tovto Troiolev,
Kokats hv ixoi, if any who should be (or were) able should do this, it
278 . SYNTAX. [§236.
would he well. EWe ndvTfs ot dvvaivro tovto Troiolfv, that all who
may be (or icere) able would do this. (Here the optative ttoioUv,
§ 251, 1, makes ol bvvaLvro preferable to oX av duvtovrai, which would
express the same idea). Tedvairjv ore ^ui firfKen ravra fxeXot, may
I die whenever I shall no longer care for these (orau fj-eXj] would express
the same idea). So in Latin: Injurias quas ferre nequeas defugi-
endo relinquas.
2. Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence depends
on a secondary tense of the indicative impl3'ing the non-ful-
filment of a condition, it takes by assimilation a similar
form. E.g.
EX Ttvcs ot ihvvavTo TOVTO enpa^av, KokSys ap dx^v, if any tvho had
been able had done this, it would have been wed. El iv eKelvrj ttj ^oivfi
T€ Koi TO) TpoTTcp cXeyou ev oh €Te6pdfip,7]v, if I were speating to you
in the dialect and in the maimer in which I had been brought up (all
introduced by el ^ivos ervyxavov cop, if I happened to be a foreigner).
So in Latin : Si solos eot> diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset,
neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes.
Note. All clauses which come under this principle of assimilation are
really protases, and belong equally under § 232, 2, 3, or 4. This princi-
ple often decides which form shall be used in future conditions.
y
Kelatlve Clauses expressing Purpose, Kesult, or Cause.
§ 236. The relative is used with the future^ indicative
to express a purpose. E.g.
Tlpea^eiap 7re/u.7reii/ tJtls tout e pel kol napea-Tai toIs Trpdyfiaaip, to
send an embassy to say this, and to be present at the transactions. Ov
yap ea-Ti p.oi ;(p^/xara, onoBep eKTlaco, for I have no money to pay the
Jine with.
The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite ; but the nega-
tive particle is always p.r}, &^ in final clauses.
Note 1. In Homer, the subjunctive (with Ke joined to the rela-
tive) is commonly found in this construction after primary tenses,
and the optative (without Ke) after secondary tenses. The optative
is sometimes found even in Attic prose, usually depending on
another optative.
Note 2. 'E</)* w or e(^' wre, on condition that, which commonly
takes the iufinitive'(§ 267), sometimes takes the future indicative;
as eVt TOVTcp vTre^LOTTapai, ecj)^ are vtt ovdevos vpecop ap^ofiai, I with-
draw on this condition, that / shall be ruled by none of you. Hdt.
Note 3. In this construction the future indicative is very
rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses.
§ 239.] THE MOODS. 279
§ 237, " fi(TTe. (sometimes w?), so ^Aa^, wMcli generally
takes the infinitive (§ 266, 1), is sometimes followed by
the indicative to express a result. The negative is ov,
E.g,
OvTcos dyvcofiopoas ^XfTe, coare eXiri^ere avra xpV^Ta yfvrja-eaOat; are
you no senaeLess that yua expect them to become good?
Remark. When aare takes the infinitive (with negative /mi;), the
action of the verb is stated more distinctly as a result depending on
the action of the leading verb ; the indicative emphasizes the action
rather as an independent fact. Thus, in the preceding example, we
might have had cXTri^eti/, when the more natural translation would
have been are you so senseless as to expect. Sometimes it is indiffer-
ent whether the indicative or the infinitive is used with coo-re.
Note, A simple relative sentence with os or ootis sometimes
denotes a result ^ where ©ore would be expected ; as ris ouras evijOijs
fo-Tiv, ocrris dypoel; who is so simple as not to knowf
§ 238. The relative is sometimes equivalent to on, be-
cause^ and a personal or demonstrative. The verb is in the
indicative, as in ordinary causal sentences (§ 250). U.g.
Qav[xa<TT6v noiels, o s Tjf/iv oibiv Sidcos, you do a strange thing in
giving us nothing (like on av ovdev didcas). Ao^as dfiadfjs dvai, 6s: ... .
e/ce'Xevc, having seemed unlearned, because he commanded^ &c.
Compare causal relative sentences in Latin.
Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before tliat.
§ 239. 1. When eo)?, ecrre, a%/3t, /^e%/3i, and 6(f>pa,
until, refer to a definite point of past time, they take the
indicative. JE.g.
^rjxov TToKiv, €(09 €Trrj\0ov fls irorafiov, I swam on again, until I
came into a river. Hom. Tavra (ttolovv, fiexpt^ (tkoto^ eyepero, this
they did until darkness came on.
2. These particles follow the construction of conditional
relatives in the last three forms which correspond to or-
dinary protasis, and in general suppositions. E.g,
^Enla-x^s, ear av koi ra Xoina Trpoo-fidBrjSi wait until you (shall)
learn the rest besides (§ 232, 3). Elrroifi ay ... . Ico? Traparetpaiixt
TovTop, I would tell him, &c., until I put him to the torture (§ 232, 4;
§ 235, 1). 'HSeoJS a» TOVTta crt StcXeyd/if/i/, cius avr^ .... dTTfhdiKa,
280 SYNTAX. _ [§240.
/ should (in that case) gladly have continued to talk with him until I
had f/iven him back, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2). *A S' aj/ do-vvraKTa jj,
dvdyKT} ravra df\ Trpdy^iara rrapex^'-^i ^^^ "^ x'^P^^ ^"/S;/, whatever things
are in disorder, these must alu:ai/s make iruuble until they are put in
order (§ 233). UepuixiPo^ev eKacrroTe, eoo? dvoLx^^'^V '"^ bcapLwrrjoiov,
we waited each day until the prison was opened (§ 233), or U7itil the
prison should be opened (Note 2).
Note 1. The omission of av after these particles and npiv, when
the verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after cl or
ordinary relatives (§ 223, N. 2), occurring sometimes in Attic
prose; as fifXP'- ttAoOs ■yeV/^rai, Thuc. i. 137.
Note 2. Clauses introduced by ea>s, &c. and by Trpiv frequently
imply a purpose ; see the examples under 2. When these clauses
depend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of
indirect discourse (§ 248, 3), like final clauses (§ 216, 2). See
examples under § 248, 3.
§ 240. 1. When irpiv^ before^ until, is not followed by
the infinitive (see below, 2), it takes the indicative, sub-
junctive, or optative, following the principles already-
stated for ^W (§ 239). U.g.
OvK rju d^e^rifi ovdev, rrpiv y eyco a(f)iaLv eSf i^a, &c., there was no
relief, unfit / showed them, &c. (§ 239, 1). Ou xpr} ne evdevde aTreXOdv,
TTplv av Sw diKrjp, I must not leave this place until he is punished
(§ 232, 3). OvK av elbdrji iTp\v 7r€ iprjde itj s^ you would not know until
you had (should have) tested it (§ 232, 4; § 235, 1). *ExpTJv fxirj npoTe-
pov avp.^ov\ev€iv, nplv f}p.ds ebida^av, &C., they ought not to have
given advice until they had instructed us, &c. (§ 232, 2; § 235, 2).
'Opcoai Tovi npea-^VTepovs ov TrpoaBev aTnovras, Trpiv av dcfiao-iv ol
apxovTfs, they see that the elders never go away until the authorities
dismiss them (§ 233). Ov8ap.66ev dcf)i€o-av, ttoIu napaOelfv avrols
apiarov. they dismissed them from no place before they had set a meal
before them (§ 233). 'A7n;ydpfve firjdeva ^aXXeiv, nplv Kijpos € fiTrXTj-
a-Oeir] 6f)pa>v, he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus should be sated
with the hunt (§ 239, 2, N. 2; § 248, 3). ^
For TTpiv without av with the subjunctive, see § 239, N. 1.
2. In constructions in which -n-ptv (following the principle
of etJ9, § 239) might take the subjunctive or optative, these
moods are generally used only when the leading verb is nega-
tive or interrogative with an implied negative. It takes the
indicative (when that would be allowed by the construction)
after both negative and affirmative sentences, but chieflj^ after
negatives.
§242.] THE MOODS. 281
When TTpiv does not take the indicative, subjunctive, or
optative, it is followed b}" the infinitive (§ 274). In Homer,
the infinitive is the form regularly used after TrptV, without
regard to the leading sentence.
Note. JJpiv is by ellipsis for Trpiv rj (priusquarn), and is prob-
ably for npo-LOP (irpo-ip), a comparative of wpo, before. Tlplv 7,
nporepov 7, and npoadep rj may be used in the same construc-
tions as irpiv itself.
IV. INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
General Principles.
§ 241. 1. A direct quotation or question gives the exact
words of the original speaker or writer. In an indirect
quotation or question the original words conform to the
construction of the sentence in which they are quoted.
Thus the words ravra fiovXofxai may be quoted either directly,
"Keyei T15 ^^ ravra ^ovXo fiai,^^ OV indirectly^ \eyei ris on ravra ^ov-
Xerai or (f)rj(Ti ris ravra ^ovXcaBai, some one says that he wishes for this.
So fpcdra " ri jSouXei;" he asks, " what do you want V^ But ipara ri
/SovXerat, he asks him what he wants.
2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by ori, or w?,
iliat^ or by the infinitive (as in the example given above) ;
sometimes also by the participle.
Note. "Ori, that, occasionally introduces even a direct quota-
tion; as in Anab. i. 6, 8.
3. Indirect questions follow the same rule as indirect
quotations in regard to their moods and tenses.
Note. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even
single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indirectly
express the words or thought of any person, even past thoughts of
the speaker himself (§ 248).
§ 242. 1. Indirect quotations after ort and w<; and
indirect questions follow these general rules : — "
(a) After primary tenses, each verb retains both the
mood and the tense of the direct discoui-se.
282 SYNTAX. [§ 248.
(ft) After secondary tenses, each indicative or sub-
juijctive of the direct discourse may be either changed to
the same tense of the optative or retained in its original
mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the indica-
tive implying non-fulfilment of a condition (§ 222) and
all optatives are retained unchanged.
Note. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the
optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sentences.
The aorist indicative likewise remains unchanged when it belongs
to a dependent clause of the direct discourse (§ 247) ; but when it
belongs to the leading clause, it is changed to the optative like the
primary tenses (§ 243).
2. When the quotation depends on a verb which takes
the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed to
the corresponding tense of the infinitive or participle
(av being retained when there is one), and its dependent
verbs follow the preceding rule.
3. "^Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative
in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form ;
but av belonging to a relative word or particle in the
direct form (§ 207, 2) is regularly dropped when the sub-
junctive is changed to the optative in indirect discourse.
Note. "Kv is never added in the indirect discourse when it was
not used in the direct form.
4. The negative particle of the direct discourse is
regularly retained in the indirect form. But the infini-
tive and participle occasionally bave firj where ov would
be used in direct discourse (§ 283, 3).
Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse.
Indicative and Optative after Brt and cos, and in Indirect
Questions.
§ 243. When the direct form is an indicative (with-
out ai/), the principle of § 242, 1, gives the following rule
§ 243.J THE MOODS. 283
for indirect quotations after 6tc or w? and for indirect
questions : —
After primary tenses the verb retains both its mood
and its tense. After secondary tenses it is either
changed to the same tense of the optative or retained
in the original mood and tense. E.g.
Aeyci oTi ypdcjiei, he says that he is writing ; Xe'-yei on Zypacfxv,
he says that he was writing: Xiyci on eypa^ev, he says that he lurote ;
Xe'^ei on y€ypa(f)€v, he will say that he has written. 'Epcora n ^ov-
"k OPT a I, he asks what they want; dyvoS) tl ttoitjo-ovo-iv, I do not
know what they will do.
'Einev on ypa.(f)oi or on ypd(j)€i, he said that he was meriting (he
said ypd0<o). EtTrei/ on ypdyj^oi or on ypdyjrfi, he said that he
would write (he said ypd-^o)). Elnev on y pdyj/^ eieu or on eypayfrev,
he said that he had written (he said eypayj^a, I wrote). EtTrev on
y€ypa(})Qis ftij or on y€ypa(f)€v, he said that he had ivritten (he said
yeypa<f>a, I have written).
(Opt.) ^Enfipoaiirjv avra dciKvvvai, on oloiro peu elvai (to^os^ eXrj
fi' ov, I tried to show him that he believed himself to be wise, but was not
so (i.e. oUrai p€V . . . etrn 8' ov). 'Ynenvoav on avTos ra/fft npd^oiy
Sx^TOj hinting that he woidd himself attend to things there, he departed
(he said avrbs rdfcei Trpd^co). '^EXe^av on TVifi-^fie trc^ay 6 ^Ivbav
^aaikevsy KeXevcov epcoTav e^ orov 6 TroKefios elij, they said that the
king of the Indians had sent them, commanding them to ask on what
account there was the war (they said enefi-^ev rjpds, and the question
was e/c TLVos eariv 6 jroXefios;). ^Hpcro £i ns efiov ftr] (ro^a}Tepos,
he asked whether there was any one wiser than I (i.e. co-rt ns ao^ii-
Tfpos ;) .
(Indic.) "EXeyov on eXni^ova-i ae kol ttjv noXtv e^dv ixoi x<ip''V^
they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to me.
*H/cp d' dyyeXXcov ns cas 'HXdreia KaT€LXr)7rTai, some one was come
with a report that Elatea had been taken (here the perfect optative
might have been used). ^AnoKpivajxevot, on irip-y^ova i npea^eis,
€v6vs dnf}XXa^av, having replied that they would send ambassadors, they
dismissed them at once. 'Hiropovv n nore Xeyei, 1 ivas uncertain what
he meant (tl ttotc Xeyei ;). 'E^ovXevovTO tlv avTov KuTaXe lyjrova tv,
they were considering (the question) whom they should leave here.
Note 1. The imperfect and pluperfect regularly remain un-
changed in this construction after secondary tenses (§ 242, 1, N.).
But occasionally the present optative represents the imperfect here ;
as dneKpLvavTo on ov8e\s fxdpTvs Trapei?;, they replied that there had been
no witness present (ovBe'is irap^v), where the context makes it clear
that napeir) does not stand for TrdpeaTi. See § 203, N. 1.
Note 2. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative
to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in this construction,
284 SYNTAX. [§244.
instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative ; as iv airopla
Tjaav^ €VuooiifX€voi on enl rals jSacrtXews 6vpais rjcrap, npovdedaxeaav
hi avToiis ol iSap^apoi, they were in despair, considering that they were
at the Kimfs gates, and that the barbarians had betrayed them. (See
the whole passage, Anab. iii. 1, 2.) This is also the English
usage.
Subjunctive or Optative representing the Interrogative
Subjunctive.
§ 244, In indirect questions, after a primary tense, an
interrogative subjunctive (§ 256) retains its mood and
tense ; after a secondary tense, it may be either changed
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the sub-
junctive. E.g.
BovXevopai oiras (re airohpay^ I am trying to think how I shall
escape you (nas o-c aTroSpto;). Ovk old' el XpvadvTo. Tovrta Soi, I do not
know whether I shall gire them to Chrysantas here. Ovk e^o) ti tiTrto,
I do not know what I shall say (ri etirco ;) Non habeo quid dicam.
'EnrjpovTo el irapaboleu rrjv ttoKlv, they asked whether they should give
up the city (napadccpev Tr]V noXiu ; shall we give up the city?). 'HjTopet
o Ti ;^pj7cratro ra irpdyfiari, he was at a loss how to deal with the
matter (ri xPW'^H-'^'- >) • 'E/SouXeuoin-o e'lre KaraKavcraxTiv evre Tt
aXKo ;Yp^o-<ovrat, they were deliberating whether they should burn
them or dispose of them in some other way.
Note 1. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the
optative when the leading verb is in the optative, contrary to the
general usage in indirect discourse (§ 201, N. 2); as ov< av exois
o ri eiTTois, you would not know what to say.
JSToTK 2. ^ In these cases el (not tav) is used for whether, before
the subjunctive as well as the optative: see the second example.
Indicative or Optative vidtli &v.
§ 245. An indicative or optative with av retains its mood
and tense (with av) unchanged in indirect discourse after on
or (OS and in indirect questions. JE.g.
Aeyei (or eXeyev) otl tovto av eyevero, he says (or said) that this
would have happened ; e\eycv on ovtos BiKalois av diroddvoi, he said
that this man would justly die. 'Hpwrwi/ el bolev av ra TrKrrdf they asked
whether they tvould give the pledges {doiijTe av;).
§247.] THE MOODS. |][ "^" 2^5 '
Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotation.
'-tf>
V^T^^-rv
§ 246. When the infinitive or participle is used '^^tLt^
indirect discourse, its tense represents the tense of the
finite verb in the direct form to which it corresponds, the
present and perfect inckiding the imperfect and pluper-
fect. Each tense with av can represent the correspond-
ing- tenses of either indicative or optative with dv. E.g.
'Appaa-relv Trpo^ao-t^frai, he pretends that he is ill; e^afioacv
appaa-Telp tovtovI, he took an oath that this man was ill. Kara-
(Txflv <f}T]ai TovTovs, he says that he detained them. "Ecfuj XPVH-^^*
eavra tovs Qrj^aiovs iiri.KeKrjpvx^vai., he said that the Thehans had
offered a reward for him. 'ETrayye XXcrat ra diKaia Troirja-eiv,
he promises to do what is right. See examples under § 203,
and N. 1. ^ ^ ^
"Uy/fike TOVTOVS €pxop.evovs, he announced that these were coming
(ovTot ipxovTai); ayyfXket, tovtovs i\66vTas, he announces that these
came: dyyeWcL tovto yeprjaofievov, he announces that this will he
done: rjyyeCke tovto y€vr]a-6p,€vov, he announced that this ivould he
done: fjyyfCke tovto yfyevijfievou^he announced that this had been
done (toiito yeyevrjTai).
See examples of av with infinitive and participle under § 211.
Note. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse and its
tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends on
a verb implying thought or the expression of thought^ and when also
the thought, as originally conceiced, would have been expressed by
some tense of the indicative (with or without nu) or optative (with
au), and can therefore be transferred without change of tense to the
infinitive. Thus in ^ovXeTat eXBdv, he ivishes to go, eXBelv repre-
sents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is
not in indirect discourse. But in (f)r)a\v eXddv, he says that he wenty
tkdsiv represents ^\6ov of the direct discourse.
Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences.
§ 247. When a compound sentence is indirectly-
quoted, its leading' verb follows the rule for simple sen-
tences (§§ 243-246).
After primary tenses the dependent verbs of the quo-
tation retain the same mood and tense. After secondary
tenses, all primary tenses of the indicative and all sub-
286 SYNTAX. [§ 247.
junctives may either be changed to the same tense of the
optative or retain the mood and tense of the direct
form. But dependent secondary tenses of the indicative
are kept unchanged. E.g.
Av vficls Xe'-yr/re, noirjaf iv ((jujalv) o fxrjr ala)(^vvr}v fJL-fjT dbo^iau
avra (jyepei, if you {shall) sarj so, he says he will do tvhatever does not
hriruj sJiame or discredit to him. Here no change is made, except in
TToirjo-eiv (§ 246).
'AnfKpivaTo on fiavBdvoiev a ovk €7riaTaivTo,he replied, that they
were learning what they did not understand (he said fiavddvovcnv a
OVK emaTavrai, which might have been retained). Et riva (pfvyovra
X'qyJAoiTo^ 7Tpor}y6pcv€V otl ois TroXep-ico ;;(pi70"otro, he announced that
if he should catch any one running away, lie shotdd treat him as an
enemy (he said ei riva \rjy\ropai, xPV^^opai, § 223, N. 1). 'Ei/o'/xt^fi/,
oa-a TTji ■nokccas TrpoXd^oi, ndvTa raiira /Sf/Saicos e^eiv, he hcliered
that he should hold all those places securely which he should take from
the city beforehand {oa av TrpoXa/Sco, e^co). 'ESo<ei poL ravTij irfipdadai
(TQ)6fjvai, ivOvpovpivco on, edv piv \d6a>, (ToaBr^a o pai,. it seemed best
to me to try to gain safety in this way, thinking that, if J should
escape notice, I should be saved (here we might have had ei Xddoipi,
aatdrja-oiprju). "Ecfjaa-av tovs audpas dnoKTevelv ovy ep^ovat (covras,
they said that they should till the men whom they had living (dnoKTe-
vovpev ovs exopev. which might have been changed to dnoKrevelv
ovs exoiev). npodrjXov ^v {tovto) i aoptvov, cl pfj KcoXvcreTe, it
was plain that this would be so unless you should prevent {tovto
(o-rai, €1 pr) KcoXvo-ere, which might have become el prj kcoXv(toit€).
"HXtti^ov Tovs '2iKiKovs Tavrrj, ovs perene pyj/avro, dtravrijcTfaOai, they
hoped the Sikels lohom they had sent for would meet them here (N. 2).
Note 1. One verb may be changed to the optative while another
is retained; as Sj^Xaxras on eroipoi elai pdxea-6ai, ei ns e^e pxotro,
having shown that they were ready to fght if any one should come
forth (eToipoi eiaiv, fdv ns «^epx^^"0' This sometimes causes a great
variety of constructions in the same sentence.
Note 2. The aoinst indicative is not changed to the aorist opta-
tive in dependent clauses, because the latter tense is commonly
used to represent the aorist subjunctive. In dependent clauses in
which confusion would be impossible (as in causal sentences, which
never have a subjunctive), even an aorist indicative may become
optative.
For the imperfect and pluperfect see § 242, 1 (&), Note.
Note 3. A dependent optative of the direct form naturally
remains unchanged in all indirect discourse.
Note 4. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indicative
is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading clause
(§ 243, N. 2).
§248.] THE MOODS. 287
§ 248. The principles of § 247 apply also to any
dependent clause (in a sentence of any kind) which
expresses indirectly the past thoughts of any person, even
of the speaker himself.
This applies especially to the following constructions : —
1. Clauses depending on an infinitive after verbs of wish-
ing^ commanding^ advising^ &c., which imply thought^ although
the infinitive after them is not in indirect discourse (§ 246,
Note).
2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied
in the context (§ 226, 4, N. 1) , or with the apodosis expressed
in a verb like OavfjLaCo) (§ 228).
3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention or purpose ^
especially those introduced by ews or TrptV after past tenses.
4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regularly
take the indicative.
This afiects the construction of course only after past
tenses. U.g.
(1) 'E/3ouXoz/ro iXBelv, et tovto ye volt o, they ivished to go if tliis
should happen. (Here i^ovKovro eXdelu, iav tovto yevrjTai might be
used, expressing the form, if this shall happen, in which the wish
would be conceived. Here ekOflv is not in indirect discourse.
(§ 226, 4; § 246, N.) 'Efce'Xeuo-ei/ 6 Ti dvvaiVTO Xa^ovras fX€Ta8i(iyK€iv,
he commanded them to take lohat they coidd and pursue (he said 6 ti
av dvurja-df, what you can, and therefore we mio^ht have had o ti av
bvvcovTai). Upoflnov avTols fif) vavfiaxelu Kopivdiois, ^v fxr) eVt KepKvpau
TrXeaxri Koi fieXXoia-LV airo^alvciv, they instructed them not to enyaye
in a sea fight tvith Corinthians, unless these should he sailing against
Corcyra and should he on the point of landing. (Here the direct
forms are retained, for which d p-r] nXeonv koi peXXoiev might
have been used.)
(2)''QiicTeipov, el aXoio-oLVTo, they pitied them, in case they should
he captured (the thought being el dXayo-ovrat, which might have
been retained). ^vXoKas a-vpn-epTrei, onays cj)vXdTToi€v ovtov, koi el twu
dypiav Ti (Pave IT) 6r)pia)v, he sends (^sent) guards, to guard him and {to
he ready) in case any of the savage heasts should appear (the thought
being edv Tt (pavfj), TdXXa, ^u eTi vavpaxelv ol ^ABrjvaloi t oX prj cr on a- 1,
TtapecTKevd^ovTo, they made the other preparations, (Jo he ready) in case
the Athenians shoidd still venture a naval hattle. "Exaipov dyanav el
Tis edaoi, I rejoiced, heing content if any one would let it pass (the
288 SYNTAX. [§249.
thought was dyairS) eX n? edaei). ^EOavixa^cv el tis dpyvpiov npar-
TOLTo, he wondered that any one demanded money (Xen. Mem.
i. 2, 7) ; but in the same book (i. 1, 13) we find cOavfiaCe 8' el fxri
i^avepbv avrois e(TTLV, he wondered that it was not plai7i.
(3) ^novbas enoLrjcravTO eais dnayyeXBe it] ra "Kex^devra els Aa/te-
Baifiova, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should
he reported at Sparta (then- thought was eu)s av dnayye\6fj, which
might have been retained). Ov yap 8i] acpeas drriei 6 6e6s t^? d-rrot-
KirjSj irp\v dfj dTTiKoyvTat es avrrjv AijSvrjv, i.e. U7itil they should come,
&c. (where diriKoivTo might have been used). Hdt. Mevovres
earaaav omrore Trvpyos Tpcowi/ opfirja-eie, they stood waiting until (for
the time when) a column should rush upon the Trojans. Hom.
(4) Kai i]Tee arjua Ideadai, 6 m pd oi yafx^polo ndpa Upoiroio
(fiepoiTo, he asked to see the token, which he was bringing (as he
said) from Proeius. Karrjyopeov tcov Alyiirqrecov rd ireiTonq Koiev
TTpobovres rrju 'EWdba, they accused the Aeginetans for what (as they
said) they had done in betraying Greece.
For the same principle in causal sentences, see § 250, Note.
Note. On this principle, final and object clauses with Iva, ottcos,
o)ff, p,i], &c. admit the double construction of indirect discourse, and
allow either the subjunctive or future indicative (as the case may
be) to stand unchanged after secondary tenses. (See § 216, 2.)
The same principle extends to all conditional and all conditional
relative and temporal sentences depending on final or object clauses,
as these too belong to the indirect discourse.
"Ottcbs and Homeric "O in Indirect Quotations.
§ 249. 1. In a few cases ottws is used for ws or on in
indirect quotations, cliiefl}- in poetry. E.g.
TovTo p.r] fioi cf)pd(\ oTTcoff ovK eiKaKos, do not tell me this, that you
are not base. Soph.
2. Homer rarel}^ uses o (neuter of 09) for ort. E.g.
Aev(TaeT€ yap to ye ndpTes, o p,oi yepas epxerai aWrj, for you aU see
this, that my prize goes another way. riyvcoaKcjv o 01 avros vneipexe
X^^pas 'AttoXAcoi/, knowing that Apollo himself held over him his hands.
V. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
§ 250. Causal sentences express a cause or reason., and
are introduced by on, w?, because., eTrel, eireihr), ore, oirore,
since^ and by other particles of similar meaning. Tliey
§251.] THE MOODS. 289
take the indicative after both primary and secondary-
tenses. The negative particle is ov. E.g.
Krj8eTo yap Aavaav, on pa Bvrja-Kovras oparo, for he pitied the
Danai, because he saiv them dying. "Ore roijid' ovtojs ^x^*' TrpoarjKeif
&c., since this is so, it is becoming, &c.
Note. On the principle of indirect discourse (§ 248), the optative
may be used in a causal sentence after a past tense, to imply that
the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person than the
speaker; as t6v IlepiKXea eKaKi^ov, on arpavqyos u>v ovk iire ^dyoi,
they abused Pericles, because {as they said) being general he did not
lead them out. Thuc. (This assigns the Athenians^ reason for abus-
ing him, and does not show the historian's opinion.)
VI. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
§ 251. 1. When a wish refers to the future, it is ex-
pressed by the optative, either with or without eWe or el
yap (Horn, aide., at yap'), O that., O if. The negative is
/Lt?;, which can stand alone with the optative. E.g.
At yap ip.o\ Tocr(Ti)vhe Oeul bvvapiv napadelev, Q that the Gods would
clothe 7)1 e icith so much strength. Hom. To fxei/ vvv ravra n prja-a-ois
rdnep iv x^P^*^ ^X^^^' /^'' ^'*^ present may you continue to do these
things which you have now in hand. Ildt. E'lBe (f>i\os rjpiv yevoio,
O that you may become our friend.. MrjKeTt, C^rjv eyco, may I no longer
live. 'Te6vaiT)v, ore p.oi fir)K€Ti raiira peXoi, may I die when J shall
no longer care for these things (§ 235, 1).
For the distinction between the present and aorist see § 202, 1.
Note 1. In poetry ft alone is sometimes used with the optative
in wishes; as ei /ioi yevoiro <\)66yyos iv ^paxioaiv, that 1 might
find a voice in my arms. Eur.
Note 2. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes prefix as (not
translatable) to the optative in wishes; q,s as dnoXoiro koI aXXos oris
Toiavrd ye pe^oi, likewise may any other perish who may do the like.
Note 3. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone
sometimes expresses a concession or permission , sometimes a command
or exhortation ; as aZris ^ Apyelrjv 'EXevrju MeveXaos ayoiro, Menelaus
may take back Argive Helen. TcOuairjs, Si Tlpolr,^ ndxravc BeXXepo-
(fiovTijv, either die, or kill Bellerophontes. Here, and in the optative
alone in wishes, we probably have an original independent use of
the optative; while all the forms of wishes introduced by ei^e, et
ydp, or ft are elliptical protases, as is seen by the use of ft, and by
the force of the tenses, which is the same as it is in protasis.
19
290 SYNTAX. [§252.
2. When a wish refers to the present or the past, and
it is implied that its object is not or was not attained^ it
is expressed by a secondary tense of the indicative with
eWe or el yap, which here cannot be omitted. The imper-
fect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis
(§ 222). E.g,
Ei^e TovTO eTToiet, that he loere doing this, or O that he had done
this. Et^e ToxJTo eiToirjaev, that he had done this; el yap ixfj
iykvfTo TOVTO, that this had not happened.
'EXff elxfs ^cXtlovs (jypevas, that thou hadst a better understanding.
Et yap ToaavTrjv bvvapiv elx^ov, that I hdd so great power. EWe (rot,
t6t€ crvv€y€v6p,r)v, that I had then met with yo'a.
Note 1. The aorist a)(}>€\ov of o(/)6iXa), debeo, and in Homer some-
times the imperfect axpeWov, are used with the infinitive in wishes,
with the same meaning as the secondary tenses of the indicative ; as
a(f)€\€ TovTo TToidv, would that he were doing this (lit. he ought to he
doing this), or loould that he had done this (habitually); axjieXe tovto
TToiTJcrai, tvould that he had done this. For the distinction made by
the different tenses of the infinitive, see § 222, N. 2.
Note 2. "QcpeXov is negatived by p.r) (not ov), and it may even
be preceded by eWe, el yap, or <us; as pr) ttot cocfyeXov XiTrelv tt}v
iKvpov, O that I had never left Scyros ; el yap c^ipeXov oloi re eluai, O
that they ivere able, &c. ; so ojy w^eXcs oXeadai. As this is really an
apodosis, like e8ei, &c., with the infinitive (§ 222, N. 2), the nse of
fWe and et yap with it is an anomaly : /xj) should perhaps be con-
structed with the infinitive.
VII. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS,
EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS.
§ 252. The imperative expresses a command, exhorta-
tion, or entreaty ; as Xeye, speak thou ; (f>evy6, begone !
ikderco, let him come ; 'x^atpovrcov, let them rejoice.
Note. A combination of a command and a question is found in
such phrases as oto-^' 6 SpSo-oi/; do — dost thou know what?
§ 253. The first person of the subjunctive (generally
plural^ is used in exhortations. Its negative is firj, E.g.
"lafiev, let US go ; iSw/xei/, let us see; fifj tovto jroicofiev, let us
not do this.
§256.] THE MOODS. 291
Note. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by-
aye (ny ere), <^epe, or tOi, come! These words are used without
regard to the number or person of the verb which follows; as aye
fliflV€T€ 7tdvT€S'
§ 254, In prohibitions, in the second and third per-
sons, the present imperative or the aorist subjunctive is
used with firj and its compounds. E.g.
Ml) ttoUl tovto, do not do this (Jidlntually) ^ or do not rjo on doing
tJns ; yLY} 7roir](TT]S .TovTo, (simply) do not do this. M17 Kara tovs
vofiovs 8iKd(rr]T€' fif) ^orjOrjcrrjTe tw ttctzovBotl dcivd' /1117 evop/eetre,
do not Judge according to the laws ; do not help him who has suffered
outrages ; do not abide by your oaths.
The two forms have merely the usual distinction between the
present and aorist (§ 202, 1).
Note. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes
occui's in prohibitions ; the second person very rarely.
VIII. SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE
(IN HOMER). —INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.—
SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH
OV fJLT].
§ 255, In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sen-
tences sometimes has the force of a future indicative. E.g-.
Oi) yap na> Toiovs iBov dvepas, ovbe tbcofiai, for I never yet saiv nor
shall I ever see such men. Kai nore tls ctTrrja-tv, and one icill (or
may^ some time say.
Note. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take
av or Kk to form an apodosis. See § 209, 2, with the example.
§ 256. The first person of the subjunctive, and some-
times the third, may be used in questions of doubt, where
a person asks himself or another what he is to do. It is
negatived by prj. It is often introduced by ^ovXeu or
^ovXeade (in poetry OiXet^ or deXere). E.g.
EiTTo) ravra; shall I say this"? or ^ovXci eiTrw ravra; do you wish
that I should say this? Hdi TpaTrafxai; ttol 7rop€vda>; ichither shall
I turn? ivhither shall T go? Tlov bf) jSouXei Ka6L^6p.evoi dvayvwyav;
where now loilt thou that we sit down and read? Tt tls flvai rovro (f)rj;
what shall any one (i.e. /) say this is?
So in Ti 7rd6(o; what will become of me? what harm will it do me?
(lit. what shall I undergo ?)
292 SYNTAX. [§257.
§ 257. The subjunctive and future indicative are
used with the double negative ov fjnj in the sense of the
future indicative with ov, but with more emphasis. E.g:
Oif ht) 7riBt]Tai, he will not obey. Oure yap yiyvcTai, ovre yeyovey^
aide ovv fif) yevrjrai, for' there is not^ nor has there been, nor will
there ever be, &c. Oi; rror e^ ifiov ye fif) ivadrjs robe, you never shall
suffer this at my hands. Ov tol fjLrjnoTe ae . . . aKovra tis a^ei, no one
shall ever take you against your will, &c.
The double negative here seems to have merely the force of
emphasis, and the subjunctive is a relic of the old usage (§ 255).
The aorist subjunctive is generally used in these expressions.
Note. This construction in the second person sometimes ex-
presses a strong prohibition ; as ov fi^ Kara^rja-ei, do not come down
(lit. you shall not come down) ; ov jx^ aKMyj/rjs, do not mock.^ The
future indicative and the aorist subjunctive are both allowed in this
sense. The imperative force is to be explained as in the future
used imperatively (§ 200, N. 8).
THE INFINITIVE.
§ 258, The infinitive has the force of a neuter verbal
noun, and may take the neuter article in all its cases. It
may at the same time, like a verb, have a subject or ob-
ject ; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives.
§ 259, The infinitive as nominative may be the sub-
ject of a finite verb, especially of an impersonal verb
(§ 134, N. 2) or of earl', or it may be a predicate
(§ 136). As accusative it may be the subject of another
infinitive. E.g,
2vv€^r] avra i\6e'iv, it happened to him to go : i^rjv fxeveiv, it was
possible to remain; ^dv ttoXXovs ex^P°^^ ^X^'^^y is it pleasant to have
many enemies f ^r)o\v e^elvai tovtois fxeveiv he says it is possible for
these to remain (jieveiv being subject of i^elvai). To yvdvai eniaTr}-
fir)v \aj3elv cVrti/, to learn is to acquire knowledge. Tovro eari to d^t-
Keiv, this is to commit injustice. To yap Sdvarov de^ifvai ovbev aXXo
earlv fj doKeiv aocpov clvai pfj ovra, for to fear death (the fear of
death) is nothing else than to seem to be wise without being so.
Note. These infinitives usually stand without the article ; but
whenever it is desired to make the infinitive more prominent as a
noun (see the last examples), the article can be added. See § 260,
1, N. 2.
§260.] THE INFINITIVK 293
§ 260. The infinitive without the article may be the
object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object
accusative, sometimes that of a cognate accusative, and
sometimes that of an object genitive.
1. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse may follow
any verb whose action naturally impUes another action as its
object. Such verbs are in general the same in Greek as in
English, and others must be learned by practice. E.g,
BouXfrat iXBelv, lie wishes to go: ^ovXerai roiis TroXtVay noXefiiKovs
€tvai, he wishes the citizens to he warlike ; tvapaivovfiev aoi ^eveiVy
we advise you to remain; irpociXiTo noXefirjaaiy he preferred to make
war ; KeXevet ere fXTj dneXOelv, he commands you not to depart ; d^iov-
(TLv apx^tv, they claim the right to rule ; d^Lovrai davelv, he is thought
to deserve to die ; 8eo[xai vfxuiv crxjyyuwpLriv poi ex^ftv, I ask you to have
consideration for me. So KcoXvfi ae ^adiCeiu, he prevents you from
marching ; ovTre'tpvKe dovXeveiv, he is not born to he a slave: dva^dX-
Xerai TovTo noLelVi he postpones doing this ; Kivdvvevei davelv, he is
in danger of death.
Note 1. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and aorist,
and these do not differ in their time (§ 202, 1, 2, and 3). In this
construction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any
other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of the verb gene-
rally gives it a reference to the future ; as in n^toOrat 6avfXv (above)
davclv expresses time only so far as davdrov would do so in its place.
Its negative is /x^ (§ 283, 3).
Note 2. When the infinitive is the object of a verb which does not com-
monly take this construction, it generally has the article ; as rb reXevTrjaai.
irdvTwv i) ireirptaixipT} KariKpivev, Fate adjudged death to all. Occasionally
even the ordinary verbs included in § 260, 1 (as verbs of wishing) take the
infinitive with t6 as an object accusative, chiefly in poetry ; as t6 5/9d»' oiiK
7jd€\r](Tav, they were not willing to act.
2. The object infinitive in indirect discourse (§ 203) follows
a verb implying thought or the expression of thought., or some
equivalent phrase. Here each tense of the infinitive corre-
sponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See
§ 246, with the examples and Note.
Note 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to say^ —
(a) (f)r)ixL regularly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse ;
(b) eiTTov takes ort or a>s with the indicative or optative ;
(c) Xeyco allows either construction, but in the active voice it gen-
erally taKes oTi or wy.
294 SYNTAX. [§261.
Note 2. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indirect
discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation ; as cireidrj
be yiveaOai errl rfj oIkIo., (e(f)r]) dveccyfxevrju KaraXa^^dveiv rfjv Bvpap,
ana when they came to the house, the// found the door open (Jie said).
Herodotus allows this even after ti, if, and 6ioVt, because.
§ 261. !• The infinitive without the article limits the
meaning of many adjectives and nouns. U.g.
Avvaros woielv tovto, able to do this' beivos Xeyeiv, sHlled in
sjieaking ; a^ios tovto Xa^elv, worthij to receive this. irpoOv^os Xe-
•yeti', eager to speak; fxaXaKol KapTcpeip, (too) effeminate to endure:
eTTLo-TTjfKav \ey€Lv re /cat aiyav, knowing how both to speak and to be
silent.
^AvdyKT] ia-Ti ndvTas aTreXdelv, there is a necessity that all should
withdraw; Kivdwos rjv avrco it a 6 civ rt, he was in danger of suffering
something; &pa dnievai, it is time to go away; iXnidas ex^i tovto
TToiTJaat, he has hopes of doing this. __
Note 1. Adjectives of this class are especially those denoting
ability, ftness, desert, readiness, and their opposites ; and, in general,
those corresponding in meaning to verbs which take the infinitive
(§ 260, 1). Nouns of this class are such as form with a verb (gen-
erally 6t/xi) an expression equivalent to a verb which takes the
object infinitive. Most nouns take the infinitive with the article as
an adnominal genitive (§ 262, 2).
Note 2. The article is sometimes prefixed to the infinitive here,
as after verbs (§ 260, 1, N. 2). This snows more clearly its char-
acter as an object accusative ; as to ^iq ttoXltkHsv 8pdv e^vv dp,rjxavoSf
I am incapable of acting in defiance of the citizens.
2. Any adjective or adverb may take the infinitive
without the article as an accusative of specification
(§160,1). :E.g.
Qeafia al(rxpov 6 pap, a sight disgraceful to behold : Xoyoi v[xlp xPT
aipcoraToc aKovo-ai, words most useful for you to hear . to ;(aX€7ra)Tara
evpclp, the things hardest to find ; TroXtTcia ^aXfTTj) o-t'^^j/, a govern-
7)ient hard to live under. KaXXtcrra (adv.) ibelp, in a manner most
delightful to behold.
Remark. This infinitive is generally active rather than passive ;
as TTpdyjia ;(aXe7r6i/ ttoicIp, a thing hard to do, rather than ;^aX67r6i»
TTOieladai, hard to be done.
Note. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive on this
principle; as Qavpa IdiaBai, a wonder to behold. ^ApiaTevearKe fid-
Xe(T6ai, he was the first infighting (like fJidxnv)- Horn.
§263.] THE INFINITIVE. 295
§ 262. 1- The infinitive may depend on a preposition,
in which case the article »Toi), tgS, or to must be pre-
fixed. E.g.
Tlpo Tov Tovs opKov9 uTT o8o vpai , before taking tlie oaths; npbs rm
fiTjbeu eK Trjs Tcpeafiiiai Xa^elv, besides receiving nothing by the embassy^
dia TO ^svos €ivai ovk av oUi d8iKr}6r]vai ; do you think you tcould not
be wronged on account of your being a stranger f
2. The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with the
article., can stand in most of the constructions belonging
to those cases ; as in that of the adnominal genitive, the
genitive after a comparative or after verbs and adjectives,
the dative of manner., means., &c., the dative after verbs
and adjectives, and sometimes in that of the genitive of
cause or purpose (§ 173, 1). E.g.
Tov 77 1 el V (TTidvfiia, a desire to drink; KpeTrrov rovXaXeiv, better
than prating; enecrxoficv tov baKpveiv, we ceased our weeping (§263);
ai'ideif Toi) KaraKovctv tivos daiv, they are unused to obeying any one.
T(S (Pavepns elvai toiovtos &v, by having it evident that he was such a
man; tw Koa-plcos Cfjp Tncrrfveiv, to trust in an orderly life; laov ra
npo(TTeveiv, equal to lamenting beforehand. Mivms to Xtjotikov Ka6rj~
pel, Tov Tcis Trpoaodovs p,aWov levai avr^f Minos put down piracy, that
his revenues might come in more abundantly. Thuc.
§ 263. 1. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or
freedom from anything allow either the infinitive With tov
(§ 262, 2) or the 'simple infinitive (§ 260, 1). As the infin-
itive after such verbs can take the negative /xrj without affect-
ing the sense (§ 283, 6), w^e have a third and fourth form,
still with the same meaning. (See Note, and § 263, 2.) E.g.
Etpyei (re tovto TToieXv, elpyei ere tov tovto Troieiv, etpyet ere fifj
TovTo notelv, eipyet ae tov p,r) tovto Troieti/, all meaning he prevents
you from doing this. Tov ^iXittttov ivape\6elv ovk ebvvamo Koikvaai,
they could not hinder Philip from passing through. Tov dpairerev-
€iv ciTreipyovai, they restrain them from running away. "Onep earxe p-rj
TTjv Tle\o7r6wr}(Tov iropBelp, which prevented (him) from ravaging
Peloponnesus. "E^ei avTovs tov p.ri Karabvpaij it will keep them
from sinking.
Note. When the leading verb is negatived (or interrogative im-
plying a negative), the double negative pi] ov is generally used
rather than the simple pr] with the infinitive (§ 283, 7) so that we
296 SYNTAX. [§264.
can say ovk flpyei ae fir) ov tovto TToieiVy he doen not prevent you from
doing this. T ov firi ov iroielv is rarely (if ever) used.
2. The infinitive with to fxrj (sometimes with to alone) may
be used after expressions denoting hindrance^ and also after
all which even imply prevention^ omission^ or denial. This
infinitive with to is less closely connected with the leading
verb than are the forms just mentioned (1), and it may often
be considered an accusative of specification (§ 160, 1), and
sometimes (as after verbs of denial) an object accusative.
Sometimes it expresses merely a result. E.g.
Top ofiiKop fipyov to jxrj to. eyyiis ttjs TroXcai KaKovpytlv , they pre~
vented the crowd from injuring the neighboring parts of the city. kwXu-
o-et (TiTo 8pav, he will prevent you from acting (§ 260, 1, N. 2). Kt/iw-
pa napa Tpcis d(f)€laav ylrrjcfiovs to pi] 6avaT(o (r)piS)(rai, they allowed
Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of death (they let him off
from the punishment of death), ^o^os avO' vttvov TrapaaraTel, to pi]
^\i(papa avp^aXelv, fear stands by me instead of sleep, preventing me
from closing my eyelids.
Thus we have 2i fifth and a sixth form, tlpyfi (re to pi] tovto not-
€7v and etpyet ere to tovto noiflv, added to those given in § 263, 1,
as equivalents of the English he prevents you from doing this.
Note. Here, as above (1, Note) pi] ov is used when the leading
verb is negatived ; as ovdiv yap avTw tuvt inapKea-ei to pi] ov ttc-
crelv'tfor this will not at all suffice to prevent him from falling .
§ 264* The infinitive with its subject, object, or other
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent clauses) may^ be
preceded by the article, the whole standing as a single noun
in any ordinary construction. E.g.
To de pr)T€ TraKai tovto TTfTrovdevat , necjirjvevai Te Tiva f]p7v avp'
pLa^lav TovTcov avTippoTTOv, hv ^ovXapeOa xPW^^'-i ''^^ "^^P eKeivcov evuoias
fvepyeTqp* av eycoye Oeirjv, but the fact that we have not suffered this
long ago, and that an alliance has appeared to us to balance these, if
we shall wish to use it, — this I should ascribe as a benefaction to their
good-will. Dem. (Here the whole sentence to ... . xRW^^^f- i^ the
object of 6tlr]v.)
§ 265, The infinitive without the article may express
a purpose. E.g.
Ol apxovTes, ovs ftXcaBf apx^iv pov, the rulers, whom you chose to.
rule me. Tijv noXiv <f)v\dTT€iv avTois irapibdiKav, they delivered the
§267.] THE INFINITIVE. 297
city to them to guard. At yvvalKcs ntelv (fiepovaai, the women bringing
them (something) to drink.
Note. In Homer, where aare is seldom used in its sense of 50 05
(§ 266, N. 3), the simple infinitive may express a resw/f ; as tls acfxoe
^vverjKe /xa;(e(r^at,* who brought them into conflict so as to contend?
§ 266. 1. The infinitive after cocrre, so that, so as, ex-
presses a result, E.g,
Hi/ TTfTraiSeujMeVos ovTOis., wcrre Trdw pabicas exdv dpKovvra, he had
been so educated as very easily to have enough. 2v 8i £r;^oXa^ets, wore
Oavp-d^iiv e/ie, and you delay, so that I wonder.
2. The infinitive after wcrre sometimes expresses a
condition, like that after €<^' o5 or €</>' wre (§ 267) ; and
sometimes a purpose, like a final clause. E.g,
*E^6v avTois tS>v \oi7rS)v apxciv 'EWtjvchv, axrr^ avrovs vnaKoveiv
/Sao-iXel, it being in their power to rule the rest of the Greeks, on condi-
tion that they should themselves obey the King. Udv iroiovaiv aart
diKTjv pf) dtdovai, they do everything so that they may not suffer punish-
ment (Iva pr) StSwo-i might have been used).
Note 1. '12? sometimes takes the infinitive like ©are, generally
to express a result, seldom to express a. purpose.
Note 2. "Qore may also take the indicative to express a result
(§ 237). For the distinction see § 237, Rem.
Note 8. "flore in Homer usually means as, like wo-rrep. (See
§ 265, Note.)
Note 4. (a) The infinitive with axrre or cos sometimes follows a
comparative with ^ ; as eXdrro) ep^cov bvvapiv ^ worrc tovs <^CKqvs co^e-
Xeiv, having too little power to aid his friends.
(b) Sometimes ware is omitted ; as voa-qpa pel^ov ^ <^ep€Lv, a dis-
ease too great to bear (§ 261, 2, with Rem.).
Note 5. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns which commonly take the
simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with coare or tby ; as
■^rjcpiadpfvoi axTTc dpvveiv, having voted to defend them; TreiOovatv &aT€
e7nxeipT]o-ai, they persuade them to make an attempt; (f)povipa)Tepoi &(TTe
padelu, wiser in learning ; oXiyot u)s eyKparels elvai, too few to have the
power ; dmyKr] eocrre Kiv8vvev€iv, a necessity of incurring risk (§ 261, 1).
§ 267. The infinitive follows €(/>' m or €</>' wre, on con-
dition that, sometimes for the purpose of, E.g,
298 SYNTAX. [§268.
*A0if/xci' (re, cm tovtco /LtcVroi, e(f)^ are ixrjKeri ^iXotro^cij/, we re-
lease i/ou, (nit on this condition, that you kIuiLI no longer he a philoso-
pher. AlpeOevTfs e0' rare |^vyypdx//"at vofxovs, chosen for the purpose
o/ compiling laws.
For the future indicative after these words, see § 236, N. 2.
§ 268, The infinitive may stand absolutely in paren-
thetical phrases, generally with w? or oaov. E.g,
To Ae'Xra lari i/eojo-rt, cos \6yf^ etTreii/, dvairecjiTjvos, the Delta has
recently, so to speak, made its appearance. So as enos elirclv, so to
speak; as o-wToficos (or avveXovri, § 184, 5) eiTreiv, to speak concisely ;
TO ^vfinav eiVeii/, on the ivhole : cbr aTretKao-at, to Judge (i.e. as far
as toe can Judge) ; oaov ye fi etSe'j/ai, as far as I know : ois e'fioi 8o-
Kclu, or ifioL 8oK€iv, as it seems to me : ov ttoXXq) Xoyw eiTreti/, not to
make along story y in short. So oXi'you Seii/, to want little, i.e. almost;
ill which Sell/ can be omitted.
Note. Tn certain cases clvai seems to be superfluous; especially
in iK(ov elvai, willing or willingly, which generally stands in a neg-
ative seuteuce. So TO vvv e IV at, at present ; to Trjixcpov eiuai to-day;
TO in eKcivnis elvai, as far as depends on them ; ttju irpa>Trjv elvai^ at
first (Hdt.); as -noKaia clvai, considering their aye (Thuc.) ; and
some other phrases.
§ 269. The infinitive is sometimes used like the im-
perative, especially in Homer. E.g,
M17 TTore kclL (tv yvvaiKi irep rJTnos eivai, be thou never indulgent to
thy wife.
Note. The subject is here in the nominative; but in the three
following constructions it is in the accusative.
§ 270. The infinitive sometimes expresses a wish, like
the optative. This occm-s chiefly in poetry. E.g.
Zev Trdrep, fj A'lavra Xax^'iv fj Tvbeos vlovy Father Zeus, may the lot
fall either on AJax or on the son of Tydeus (Hom.).
Note. This construction depends in thought on some word like
€vxop,ai, I pray, or dos, grant, which is often expressed; as dbs Tio-a-
adai.
§ 271. In laws, treaties, and proclamations the inflnitive
often depends on eSo^e or ScSo/crat, he it enacted, or kcXcuc-
Tttt, it is commanded ; which may be expressed in a previous
sentence or understood. E.g.
§275.] THE PARTICIPLE. 299
AiKa^eiv be ttjv iv *Apeta) irdya (j)6vovy &c., and (be it enacted) that
the Senate on the Areopagus shall hare jurisdiction in cases of murder^
&c. "Ett) de eivai ras o-rrovbas irevTTjKopray and that the treaty shall
continue Jifty years.
§ 272. The infinitive, with or without to, may be used to
express surprise or indignation. E.g.
Trjs fxcoplas ' to Aia vofil^ecv, opra ttjXikovtovI, what folly! to believe
in Zeus when you are so big! So in Latin: Meue incepto desistere
victam !
§ 273, In narration, the infinitive often seems to
stand for the indicative, when it depends on some word
like Xeyerac, it is said, in a preceding sentence. U.^.
*AmKOfi€vovs de €9 to "Apyos, hiaTlOardaL tov (jiopTov, and comitig
to Argos, they were (it is said) setting out their cargo for sale (Smri-
Bea-duL is an imperfect infinitive, § 203, N. 1). Hdt. i. 1. See Hdt.
i. 24, and Xen. Cyr. i. 3, 5.
§ 274. nptv, before, before that, until, besides taking
the indicative, subjunctive, and optative (§ 240), also
takes the infinitive. This happens in Attic Greek chiefly*
after affirmative sentences, but in Homer without regard
to the leading verb. U.ff.
'ATTOTre/iTrouo-ii/ avTov np\u d*coC(rat, they send him away before hear-
ing him. Mecrcrrjvrjv elXop-eu nplv Tlepaas Xa^eiv ttjv ^aaiXeiav, we took
Messene before the Persians obtained their kingdom.
For irpiv with the finite moods, see § 240.
Note. Iip\v rj, irpoTepov rj, TrpocrOev fj^ before that, sooner than,
and even va-repov rj, later than, may take the infinitive like irpiv
alone. See § 240, Note.
THE PARTICIPLE.
§ 275. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three
uses. First, it may express a simple attrihute, like an ordi-
nar}' adjective ; secondly, it ma}' define the circumstances
under which an action takes place ; thirdl}^, it may form part
of the predicate with certain verbs, often having a force
resembling that of the infinitive.
300 SYNTAX. (§276.
§ 276. 1. The participle, like any other adjective,
may qualify a noun. Here it must often be translated
by a relative and a finite verb, especially when it is pre-
ceded by the article. E.g,
'O Tvapoiv XP^^^^^ ^^*^ present time ; Beoi aUv eovres, immortal Gods
(Horn.); TTo'Xis fcaXXei 8La(j)epova-a, a city exceUin^i in beauty: dvfjp
KoXays Trenaidevfievos, a man who has been well educated (or a well-
educated nian)\ ol npea^ets oi vno *iXtWou 7r€p.(j)6€VT€s, the ambas-
sadors who were sent by Philip; avdpes ol tovto iroirjcrovTeSf men ivho
are to do this.
2. The participle preceded by the article may be used
substantively, like any other adjective. It is then equiva-
lent to he who or those who with a finite verb. iJ.g,
Ot 7r€Treicrp.€voi, those who have been convinced .; irapa toU apiarois
8 o /cover 11/ eivat, among those who seem to be best : 6 ttjv yvcoprjv tovtiju
fiTTft)!/, the one ivho gave this opinion: rois 'ApKudcov a^erepois ovat,
^vpLiiaxois TTpodnov, they proclaimed to those who were their allies among
the Arcadians.
§ 277. The participle may define the circumstances of
an action. It expresses the following relations : —
1. Time ; the tenses denoting various points of time, which
is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (§ 204). E.g.
Tavra firpa-m a-Tparrjytov , he did this while he was general: ravra
7rpd$€i arrpaTrjycip, he will do this while he is general: rvpavvevaas
fie err] rpla 'imrias €xa>p€i « Siyetov, and when he had been tyrant three
years, Hippias withdrew to Sigeum.
2. Cause, manner., means, and similar relations, including
manner of employment. E.g.
Ae'yo) §€ rovTov €U€Ka, ^ovXopcvos So^ai aoi onep ep,ol, and 1 speak
for this reason, because I wish that to seem good to you which, &c.
Ilpoe/Xero /xaXXoi/ roiy vopois cfxpevatv dnnOaveiv ^ 7rapavop.a)v ^fjVy
he preferred to die abiding by the laws rather than to live transgi-essing
them; tovto enoirjo-e \ada)v, he did this secretly ; aTTedrjfxei TpirjpapxSiV,
he was absent on duty as trierarch. Arji^op-evoi ^axnv, they live by
plunder.
3. Purpose or intention ; general!}^ expressed by the fiUure
participle. E.g.
§277.1 THE PARTICIPLE. 801
^HXOe \v(T6fi€V09 dvyuTpa, he came to ransom Ms datifjhter. Horn.
UefiTreiv irpea-^cis ravTa epovvras koI Avo-avdpov alrrjo-ovraSi ^o send
ambassadors to say this and to ask for Lysander.
4. Condition ; the tenses of the participle representing the
corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or opta-
tive, in all classes of protasis.
See § 226, 1, where examples will be found.
5. Opposition or limitation ; where the participle is generally
to be translated by although and a verb. E.g.
*OXtya hvvdp.fvoi irpoopav ttoKKo. eirixfipovixeu Trpdrreiv, although
we are able to foresee few things, we try to do many things.
6. An}' attendant circumstance, the participle being merely
descriptive. E.g.
"Epxerai rbv viov exova-a, she comes bringing her son ; TrapaXw
^ovres Tovi Boicorous iarTparcvcrav eVi $ap<raXoi/, taking the Boeotians
with them, they marched against Pharsalus.
Note 1. (a) The adverbs ap.a, fiera^v, evSvs, avrUa, and
€^ai.(f)vr}s are often connected (in position and in sense) with the
temporal participle, while grammatically they qualify the verb of
the sentence; as dp.a KaraXa^ovres Trpoo-eKiaro (rcf)i, as soon as
they overtook them, they pressed hard upon them : Ne/ccu? fxera^v
opvcra-Mv itravcraTo, Necho stopped while digging {the canal). Hdt.
(/>) The participle denoting opposition is often strengthened by
Kainep or kui, even (poetic also koI . . . nep) , in negative sen-
tences ov8e or fiTjbe, witli or without nep; or by koi ravra, and that
too : as eTTOLKTeipa) viv Kaincp ovra Sva-fxevrj, T pity him, even though
he is an enemy. Ovk av npodoiTjv, ovde irep Trpdaa-cou Ka<<oi, I would not
be faithless, even though I am in a wretched state.
Note 2. (a) The participles denoting cause or purpose are often
preceded by w?. This shows that they express the idea of the sub-
ject of the leading verb or that of some other person prominent in
the sentence, without implying that it is also the idea of the speaker
or writer ; as tov IlepiKXea iv alria fiYoi/ as ire ia-avra (T(f)ds noXe-
fieli^, they found fault with Pericles, on the ground that he had per-
suaded them to the tear; dyauuKTovaiu w? fieydXcov rivwv aTrecrTf prj-
fie vol, they are indignant, because (as they say) they have been de-
priced of some great blessings.
(b) The participle denoting cause is often emphasized by art,
oiov, or ola, as, inasmuch as: but these particles have no such
force as as (above); as arc irais wj/, r/Sero, inasmuch as he was a
child, he was pleased.
302 SYNTAX. f§ 278.
Note 3. "Qcnrep, «.«?, very often precedes a conditional ipartici-
ple, belonging" to an implied apodosis, to which the participle forms
the protasis; as axmep ^8rj (ra(pa>s cidoTa, ovk edeXer^ aKoveiv,
you are unwilling to hear, as (j/ou would be) if you already knew it
tcell. Here cocrirep means merely a.t : the //" belongs to the meaning
of the participle. Compare oio-nep ei Xeyots, as if you should say.
We find even cocnrep av d . . . rjyovjjLevoi, as if you believed (Dem.).
The participle thus used witli axTTrep has ov for its negative, not
liV (§ 283, 4).
§ 278. 1. When a participle denoting any of the
relations included in § 277 belongs to a noun which is
not connected with the main construction of the sentence,
they stand together in the genitive absolute.
See § 183, and the examples there given. All the particles men-
tioned m the notes to § 277 can be used here.
Note. Sometimes a participle stands alone in the genitive abso-
lute, when a subject can easily be supplied from the context, or
when some general subject, like avdpcoircov or npayixaToov, is under-
stood; as ol TroXe'ixLoi, 7rpo(n6uTu)v, recos pev T)avx(iC^v, but the enemy, as
they (men before mentioned) came on, kept (/uietfor a time: ovtco 5*
exovTcov, eiKOi iaTiv, k. t. X., and this being the case (sc. Trpay/xarcoi/), it
hi likely, &,'c. So with verbs like vei, &c. (§ 134, N. 1, e) ; as
vovTos TToXXo), when it was raining heavily (where originally Aids was
understood).
2. The participles of impersonal verbs stand in the accusa-
tive absolute^ in the neuter singular, when others would be in
the genitive absolute. So with passive participles and 6v
when they are used impersonall}'. E.g.
Ol S' ov ^orjOrja-avTes, biov, 17161? dn^Xdov ; and did those who
brought no aid when it was needed escape safe and sound ? So
€v ?ie napaa-xov, and when a good opportunity offered; ov Trpoa-rj-
Kov, improperly (it being not becoming); tvxov, by chance (it having
happened); Trpoarax^^v pot. when I had b^en commanded : elprj-
pevov. when it has been said: ahvvaTov ov. it being impossible; dnoaprj'
TOP TToXei (sc. 01/), when it is forbidden by the state.
Note. The participles of personal verbs sometimes stand with
their nouns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom unless they
are preceded by ois or coajrep (§ 277, Notes 2 and 3).
§ 279. The participle may be used to limit the mean-
ing of certain verbs, in a sense which often resembles
that of the infinitive (§ 260, 1).
§279.] THE PARTICIPLE. 303
1 . In this sense the participle is used with the subject of
verbs signifying to begin^ to continue^ to endure^ to persevere, to
cease^ to repent, to be weary of, to be pleased, displeased, or
ashamed ; and with the object of verbs signif3'ing to cause to
cease. E.g.
"Ap^ofxai Xeycou, I will begin to speak ; ovk dve^ofxai ^(ov, I shall
not endure to live, tovto €x<^v fitareXfi, he continues to have this
(4, Note); dneipTjKa rpex^^^ ^ ^"* tired of running ; rois epcorcoai
Xatpco diroKpivop-evos, 1 delight to answer questioners : ("Keyxo-
p.€voi TJx6ouTo, they were displeased at being tested , alcrxvv€Tai tovto
Xey(ov, he is ashamed to sag this (johich he sags); ttju <pi\o(To(f)iav
navaov Tama \eyovaap, make Philosophy stop talking in this style.
NoTK 1. Some of these verbs- also take the infinitive, but gene-
rally with some difference of meaning; thus, alo-xvveTai tovto Xe-
y€iv, he is ashamed to say this (and does not say il), — see above;
dnoKdpvfi tovto TToieiv, he ceases to do this, through ireariness (but
tovto noia>Vi he is weary of doing this). But see the last example
under 3.
Note 2. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with cx^
may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry; as Bavfid-
aas €X(o Tode, J have loondered at this. In prose, tx^ ^'^ih a partici-
ple generally has its common force; as Tr]v npo'iKa exft \a^a>v, he has
received and has the dowry (not simply he has taken il).
2. The participle may be used with the object of verbs
signif3"ing to perceive (in any wa}'), to Jind^ or to represents,
denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived,
found, or represented. E.g.
'OpS) <re KpvTTTOvra, I see you hiding; rJKov<rd crov \eyovTos, I
heard you speak : evpc Kpovidrjv oTep rjfKvov aXkcov, he found the son
of Cronos sitting apart from the others (Hosn.) ; TreTroirjKe tovs ev^Aibov
Tip.a>povp.€vovs, he has represented those in Hades as suffering
2)unishment.
Note. This muf^t not be confounded with indirect discourse,
in which 6pco o-e Kpv-nTovra would mean 1 see that you are hiding ;
dKovui ae Xeyovra, I hear that you say (a/cou'o) taking the accusative).
See §280.
3. With verbs signif3ing to overloolc or see, in the sense of
cdlow, — Trcptopaw and €<j>opdoi, with TrcpictSov and cVetSoi/,
sometimes dhov, — the participle is used in the sense of the
object infinitive (§ 260, 1), the present and aorist participles
804 SYNTAX. l§280.
differing merely as the present and aorist infinitives would
differ in similar constructions (§ 202, 1). E.g.
M^ nepudcofiev v^ picrdela-av rrjv AoKedaifioua Koi KoracfipovT]-
Belaav, let us not allow Lacedaemon to he insulted and despised. M17
/i.' Ibeiv Bavovd^ vtt' ao-reoi/, not to see me killed by citizens (Eur.).
nepudelvTrjuy^v t p,T) delo-av , to allow the land to be ravaged (Thuc. ii.
18). (But in ii. 20, we find ncpudelv rfju yijv Tixijdrjvai, referring
to the same thing.) See § 204, N. 2.
4. With the following verbs the participle contains the lead-
ing idea of the expression: XavOdvo), escape the notice of;
rvyxav(j>i happen ; <f)Odv<D, anticipate. The aorist participle
here does not denote past time in itself, but coincides in
time with the verb (§ 204, N. 2). Kg.
Arjo-ere Bia(f>6apevT€ s, you will be corrupted before you know it.
''Etvxov Kadrjpevos evravda, I happened to be sitting there; ervxf Kara
TovTo Tov Kaipov cXdcov, he happened to come (not to have come) just at
that time. "Ecfidrjcrav roiis Ilepo-as aTriKoixevoi, they came before the
Persians (Hdt.). OuS' apa KipKrjv eXOovrei iXrjdofiev, nor did we
come without Circeh knowing it (Honi.). See examples under
§ 204, N. 2.
The perfect participle here has its ordinary force.
Note. The participle with 8tarfXfa>, continue (§ 279, 1),
o 1^0 fiat, be gone (§ 277, 2), 6 a p, 1^03, be wont or be frequent^ and
some others, expresses the leading idea; but the aorist partici-
ple with these has no peculiar force; as oXxfrai (pfvyau, he has
taken Jlight (§ 200, N. 3); ov Oapi^eis Kara^aiviov els tup Ufipata,
you don't come down to the Peiraeus very often.
§ 280. With many verbs the participle stands in
indirect discourse, each tense representing the corre-
sponding tense of the indicative or optative.
Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to knoiv, to hear
or learn, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove,
to acknowledge, and dyyeXXo), to announce. E.g.
*Opa> be p! epyov beivou e ^€ ipyacr pe vrjv. but 1 see that I have done
a dreadful deed ; rJKovae Kvpov Iv KiXiKiq ovra, he heard .that Cyrus
was in Cilicia (cf. § 279, 2, with N.); orau kXvtj ^^ovt* 'Opeo-r7;i/,
when she hears that Orestes will come; olda ov8ev eTriarrdpevos, I
know that I understand nothing ; ovk fjdeaav avrbv TcdvrjKora. they
did not know that he was dead; enftddv yvaiaiv dntarovpevoiy
after they find out that they are distrusted; pepvtjpai iXdcav, I re-
§ 281.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 305
member that I went; fxenvrjixat avrov e\66vra^ I remember that he
went; del^co tovtov cxOpop ovra^ I shall show that this man is an
enemy (pass, ovroy bet\6ri(TiTai ex,6pos &v)\ avrio Kvpop arparev-
oura nparos ^yyetXa, 1 Jirst announced to him that Cyrus was on his
march.
See § 246 and examples ; and § 211 for examples of the participle
with dv representing both indicative and optative with av.
Note 1. ArjXos elp.L and cfiavepos et/xi take the participle in
indirect discourse, where we use an impersonal construction; as
drjXos Tjv olofievosj &c., it was evident that he thought, &c. (like drj-
Xoj/ rjv oTt oioiTo).
Note 2. With crvvoi8a or a-vyyiyvma-KO) and a dative of
the reflexive, a participle maybe in either the nominative or dative;
as avvotda €fxavT<o rjdtKruMevco (or rjdiKTjfievos), I am conscious to
myself that I have been wronged.
Note 3. Most of the verbs included in § 280 may take a clause
with oTi in indirect discourse. Most of them are found also with
the infinitive, old a takes the infinitive regularly when it means /
know how ; as olda tovto p.a6elv, I know how to learn this (but olba
TovTo {Maddiv, I know that I learned this).
Note 4. 'Qs may be used before this participle in the sense ex-
plained in § 277, N. 2. The genitive absolute with as is sometimes
found where we should expect the participle to agree with the object
of the verb; as <ap TroXe/xov ovtos Trap' vfiav drrayyeXco ; shall I
announce from you that there is war? (lit. assuming that there is war,
shall I announce it from you?) where we might have TroXffiop Bvra
with less emphasis, and in closer connection with the verb.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -rc'os AND -riov.
§ 281, The verbal in -t€09 has both a personal and
an impersonal construction.
1. In the personal construction it is passive in sense,
and expresses necessity., like the Latin participle in -dus.
E.g.
'0(^eXj;rea (joi rj noXis ecrTiv, the city must he benefited by you.
*AXXas fifTUTre fxTTTfas dvai {€(f>r]), he saiil that other (ships) must
be sent for. *0 Xeyo3 prjTenv hrrlv. what 1 say wunt he spoken.
The noun denoting the agent is here in the dative (§ 188, 4).
See 2.
306 SYNTAX. [§ 282.
2. In the impersonal construction the verbal is in the
neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes plural),
with ecni expressed or understood. It is active in sense,
and is equivalent to hel with the infinitive.
The agent is generally expressed by the dative, some-
times by the accusative. These verbals may have an
object like their verbs. E.g,
Tavra rjfiiv (or i7fias') TToirjTeov iariv, we must do this (equivalent
to Tovra fjfiCLS del Trocrjaai, § 184, 2, N. 1). 01(tt€ov rdde, we must
bear these things (sc. rjfxlv). Ti av xivTa Troirjreov etr] ; what would
he be obliged to do f ^^y^r)^L(TavTo TroXefirjrea clvai, they voted that they
jHUSt go to war (= bclv TroXe/xflv). Tot's ^v^fxdxovs ov Trapadoria
Tois ^ABrjuaiois, we must not abandon our allies to the Athenians,
The Latin has this construction (but seldom with verbs which
take an object accusative) ; as Eundum est tibi (Ireov eari aot) , —
Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello utendum est nobis (ra TroXe/xo)
Xpr](TTeov iarrip fjpiv), we must go to war. (See Madvig's Latin Gram-
mar, § 421.)
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
§ 282. 1. All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjec-
tives, and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect
questions. The relative ocms and most other relative words
may be used in indirect questions. (See § 149.)
2. The principal direct interrogative particles are rj and apa.
These imply nothing as to the answer expected ; but apa ov
implies that an affirmative, Spa p-^ that a negative, answer is
expected. Ov and p,^ alone are often used with the same
force as with apa. So fiuv (for p,^ ow). E.g.
'H (rxo\f) ea-rai; will there be leisure? 'Ap' elcri tiv€9 a^ioi; are
there any deserving ones? *Ap' ov 0ovXeade eXOelv ; or ov ^ovXeade
eXedv; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not)'^ Apa pr]
^ovXeade iXdelv ; or pf) (or pa,v) /3ovXe(r(9e eXdclv; do you tvish to go
{you don't wish to go, do you)'^ This distinction between ov and pr/
does not apply to the interrogative subjunctive (§ 256), which
allows only prj.
§ 283.] NEGATIVES. 307
3. "AXXo TLT]; is it anything else than 9 or simply akXo tl;
is it notf is sometimes used as a direct interrogative. U.g.
"aWo Tl ^ ddiKovnev ; are we not (is it anything else than that
we are) in the wrong? — liWo tl o/xoXoyoO/xei; ; do we not agree?
4. Indirect questions may be introduced by ci, whether;
and in Homer by ^ or rjL E.g.
'Hpoyrrjaa el /3ovXoiro eXdelv, I asked whether he wished to go.
"QiX^^to nevaofxevos 7 ttov er (trjs, he was gone to inquire whether pos-
sibly you were still living (Hoiii.). Ovk olba el tovto 8c5, / do not
know ivhether I shall give this (here el is used even with the sub-
junctive : see § 24A).
5. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect) may be
introduced by irorepov (Trorepa) . . . ^, whether . , . or. Indirect
alternative questions can also be introduced by ct . . . ^, ctrc . . .
ctT€, etre . . . ^, whether .,,or; and in Homer by rj (jje) . . .
TLoTepov eas apxeiv rj SKkov KaBLOTrjs ; do you allow him to rule, or
do you appoint another? 'E/SouXcucro el trep.TTOiev Tivas fj irdvTes toteVf he
was deliberating whether they should send some or should all go.
NEGATIVES.
§ 283, The Greek has two negative adverbs, ov and /jl-^.
What is said of each of these applies generally to its com-
pounds, — ouSets, ovSc, ouT€, &C., and /otrySets, jtAi/Sc, ftiyrc, &C.
1 . Ov is used with the indicative and optative in all inde-
pendent sentences (except wishes,, which are generally elliptical
protases, § 251, 1, N. 3) ; also in indirect discourse after on,
and ws, and in causal sentences.
Note. Tn indirect questions, introduced by el, whether, fif) can be
used as well as ov ; as j3ovXo/iai epeo-Oai el p.a6a>v Tis Tl Koi p.ep.vr]p.evoi
fxf] oldev, I want to ask whether one who has learnt a thing and remem-
bers it does not know it? Also, in the second part of an indirect
alternative question (§ 282, 5), both ov and p.r} are allowed; as cr*co-
rrapev el Trpenei rj ov, let us look and see whether it is becoming or not;
el Se aXrjdes fj fxrj , Treipdaofiai fiaOelv, but I will try to ledrn whether
it is true or not.
308 SYNTAX. [§ 283
2. Mrj is used with the subjunctive and imperative in all
constructions (except the Homeric subjunctive, § 255, which
has the force of a future indicative). Mtj is used in all Jincd
and object clauses after ti/a, ottw?, &c. ; except after /x^y, lest^
which takes ov. It is used in all conditional sentences, in
relative sentences with an indefinite antecedent (§ 231) and
the corresponding temporal sentences after ews, TrptV, &c.
(§§ 239, 240), in relative sentences expressing a purpose
(§ 236), and in all expressions of a wish with both indicative
and optative (§ 251).
3. Mr) is used with the infinitive in all constructions, both
wath and without the article, except that of indirect discourse.
The infinitive in indirect discourse regularl}^ has ov, to retain
the negative of the direct discoui-se ; but some exceptions
occur.
4. When a participle expresses a condition (§ 277, 4) it
takes fjLrj ; so when it is equivalent to a relative clause with
an indefinite antecedent^ as 61 fxr] povXofjLivoi, any who do not
wish. (See, however, § 277, N. 3.) Otherwise it takes ov.
In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes
/atJ irregularly (3).
5. Adjectives follow the same principle with participles,
taking fjirj only when they do not refer to definite persons or
things (i. e. when they can be expressed by a relative clause
with an indefinite antecedent) ; as ol fxrj dyaOol TroXtTai, {any)
citizens who are not good, but ol ovk dyaOol TroXtrat means
special citizens who are not good.
6. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as those of
hindering, forbidding^ denying^ concealing^ and distrusting) are
followed by the infinitive, the negative ^rj can be added to
the infinitive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative
cannot be translated in English, and can alwa3^s be omitted
in Greek. For examples see § 263.
[§ 283. NEGATIVES. 309
7. When an infinitive would regularly be negatived by
firj, — either in the ordinary way (3) or to strengthen a pre-
ceding negation (6), — if the verb on which it depends has a
negative, it generally takes the double negative fxrj ov. Thus
BiKaLov ia-TL fxr] tovtov a(f>€LvaL, it IS just not to acquit him^
becomes, if we negative the leading verb, ov hiKaiov icm /xrj
ov TOVTOV d<^€ti/at, it is not just not to acquit him. So ws oxf^
oatov o-oL ov fji-q ov jSorjdeiv SiKatoavvrj, since (as you said) it
was a failure in piety for you not to assist justice. Again,
ctpyct o-e ^7} TovTo ttouIv (§ 263, 1), he prevents you from doing
this, becomes, with ctpyct negatived, ovk ctpyct a-e ixrj ov tovto
TTotctv, he does not prevent you from doing this.
Note. M^ ov is used also when the leading verb is interroga-
tive implying a negative; as ri efnrobcjv fifj ovx'i v^piConevove
ano6av€Lv; what is there to prevent («*) from being insulted and
perishing f
It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to express
an exception to a negative statement ; as noXeis xaXfTrai Xafielv, (jlt) ov
iroXiopKia, cities hard to capture, except by siege.
8. When a negative is followed by a simple negative (ov
or firj) in the same clause, each retains its own force. If
they belong to the same word or expression, they make an
affirmative ; as ovSk tov ^opfxiuiva ovx opa, nor does he not see
Phormio (i. e. he sees Phormio well enough). But if they
belong to different words, each is independent of the other ;
as ov St' aiTiipiav ye ov <f>-q(T€LS ex^iv o tl ctTn;?, it is not surely
through inexperience that you will deny that you have anything
to say ; ov jxovov ov rruOovTai, they not only do not obey ; el /xy
Upo^evov ovx vTrcSc^avTo, if they had not refused to receive
Proxenus {had not not received him) .
Note. An interrogative ov (§ 282, 2), belonging to the -whole
sentence, is not counted as a negative in these cases; as o vac inX
rov hrjp.ov . . . ovk rjOeXrjaav avarpaTeveiv ; were they nut unwill-
ing, &c.?
9. But when a negative is followed by a compound negative
(or by several compound negatives) in the same clause, the
310 * SYNTAX. [§283.
negation is strengthened; as avcv rovrov ovSels cis ovhkv
ovSevos av v/awv ovScttotc ykvoiTo a|tos, if it were not for
this, no one of you would ever come to be of any value for any-
thing .
For the double negative ov /x^, see § 257.
PAP.T Y.
VERSIFICATION.
ICTUS. — RHYTHM AND METRE.
§ 284* 1- Everj^ verse is composed of portions called
feet. Thus we have four feet in each of these verses : —
^r\(To\^fv Trpos \ tovs (rTpa\Triyovs. |
Far from j mortal | cares rej treating, j
2. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls a
special stress of voice called ictus (stroke)^ and another part
on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot on
which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of the
foot is called the thesis.^ The regular alternation of arsis
and thesis in successive feet produces the rhythm {harmonious
movement) of the verse.
3. In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the
rhj'thm depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words,
with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, however,
the ictus is entirely' independent of the word-accent ; and
the feet (with the ictus marked) are c^rjo-o, — fiev Trpo?, — tov's
o-Tpa, — rrjyov^. In Greek poetry a foot consists of a regular
combination of syllables of a certain length ; and the place
of the ictus here depends on the quantity (i. e. the length or
shortness) of the S3'llables which compose the foot, the ictus
naturally falling upon a long syllable (§ 285, 3). The regu-
1 The term Aptris (raising) and dia-is (placing), as they were used by
nearly all the Greek writers on Rhythm, referred to the raising and putting
down of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that d^a-is de-
noted the part of the foot on whicli the ictus fell, and apais the lighter part.
Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use, and referred arsis
to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering of the voice in reading.
The prevailing modern use of these terms unfortunately follows the Roman
writers.
312 VERSIFICATION. [§ 285.
lar alternation of long and short sj^llables in successive feet
makes the verse metrical^ i.e. measured in its time. The
rhythm of a Greek verse thus depends closely on its metre,
i.e. on the measure or quantity of its syllables.
Note. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most
modern poetry is simply this, that in modern poetry the verse con-
sists of a regular combination of accented and unaccented syllables,
while in ancient poetiy it consists of a regular combination of long
and short syllables. The rlujthm is the one essential requisite in the
external form of all poetry, ancient and modern; but in ancient
poetry, rhythm depends on metre and not at all on accent ; in mod-
ern poetry it depends on accent, and the quantity of the syllables
(i.e. the metre) is generally no more regarded than it is in prose.
Both are equally rhythmical; but the ancient is also metrical, and its
metre is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English
poetry is strictly only rhythm. ^
It is to a great extent uncertain how the Greeks distinguished or
reconciled the stress of voice which constituted the ictus and the
raising of tone which constituted the word-accent. Any combina-
tion of the two is now very difficult, and for most pei'sons impos-
sible. In reading Greek poetry we usually mark the Greek ictus
by our accent, which is its modern rejn-esentative, and neglect the
word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care should al-
ways be taken in reading to distinguish the words, not the feet,
FEET.
§ 285. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the
short syllable (^), which has the value of J^ or an i note in
music. This is called a time or mora. The long syllable ( — )
has twice the length of a short one, and has the value of a |
note or J in music.
1 The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best he seen in
modem Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient lan-
guage are retained, the rhythm is generally accentual and the metre is no
more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses
in a translation of the Odyssey : —
■^dXXc rhv \ &v8pa, ©eld, tov iroIXvTpoirov, | 8<ms To|<rovTOvs
Toirovs 8iIf]X0€, irop 1 9TJ<ras t^s | Tpotas tt|v 1 ?v8o^ov 1 irdXtv.
The original verses are : —
"AvSpa jJLOt I 2vv€ir6, | Movira, irolXvTpoirov, | os \iaKa. \ iroXXcL
nXd7X^il> ^l'"'€^ Tpoi|T]s Ulpbv TTToXflfiOpov I|ircpcr6v.
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through force of
acquired habit ; for these verses have much more of the nature of modem
poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm is precisely what we
are accustomed to in English.
285.]
FEET.
313
2. Feet are distinguished according to the number of times
which they contain. The most common feet are the follow-
ing : —
(a) Of Three Times (in |- time)
Trochee —^ <^atvc
Iambus w — t<jirjv
Tribrach www Xcyerc
(h) Of Four Times (in ^ time).
,J^ .^ -'^
Dactyl
WW
^atVere
J //
Anapaest
WW
(ri/So/xaL
/.N
Spondee
CtTTWV
J J
(c) Of Five Time:
? (in |- time).
Cretic
— W —
(jiaivcTOi
J /J
Paeon primus
\J KJ \J
eKxpeVere
J s^ *^ /
Paeon quartus
\J \J \J
KaraXeyui
///J
Bacchius
W
a<^eyy7}s
^J J
Antibacchius
w
cf)aLvr)T€
J J -^
(d) Of Six Times
r (in J time).
Ionic a majore
WW
CKAetTrere
J J ^-^
Ionic a minore
WW
TTpocrihea-Oai
^/J J
Choriambus
WW
iKTpCTTOfJLaL
1 N ^ 1
S S 6 4
Molossus (rare)
(SovXivwv
J J J
Ditrochee
w w
fX0V(T6/ia.VTL<S
J /J .^
Diiambus
w w
aTraWayrJ
J^J /J
see § 302.
314 VERSIFICATION. [§286.
Note. The feet in | time («), in which the arsis is twice as
long as the thesis, form the douhle class (yevos binXdcreov), as opposed
to those in | time (/>), in which the arsis and thesis are of equal
lenoth, and which form the e(]ual class {yevos taou). The more
complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of five and six
times are not considered here .
3. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The first
syllable of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last syllable of
tiie iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form the arsis, the
remainder of the foot being the thesis ; as _l ^,
-i- W v^?
Note 1. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two
short syllables (§ 286, 1), the ictus properly belongs on the two
taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first.
Thus a tribrach used for a trochee (j. w) is vl/ w w ; one used for
an iambus (^ jS) is ^ ^ kj- So a spondee used for a dactyl is
j_ _; one used for an anapaest is _ jl- Likewise a dactyl used
for an anapaest (_ v^ w for for ^ vy _) is _ v^ w- The only
use of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are to repre-
sent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a long
syllable.
Note 2. Although the principal ictus (which alone has been
considered) falls on the arsis, there is generally also a subordinate
ictus on the thesis or on some syllable of the thesis. (See § 299.)
4. A verse is sometimes introduced by an incomplete fool,
consisting of one or two syllables equivalent in time to the
thesis of the fundamental foot of the verse. This is called an
anacrusis {ava.Kpova-L<s, upward heat). (See § 289, 3, N.) The
mark of anacrusis is a following (•).
For the hasis, introducing a logaoedic verse, see § 299, 2.
RESOLUTION AND CONTRACTION. — IRRATIONAL TIME. —
SYLLABA ANCEPS.
§ 286. 1. A long sj'Uable, being the metrical equivalent
of two short ones (§ 285, 1), is often resolved into these ; as
when a tribrach ,^ w w stands for a trochee _ ^ or an iambus
^ — On the other hand, two short syllables are often con-
tracted into one long syllable ; as when a spondee stands
§287.] EHYTHMICAL SERIES. 315
for a dactyl _ ^ v^ or an anapaest ^ ^ — The mark for a
Ions: resolved into two short is ^^ ; that for two short con-
tracted into one long is ^^.
2. A long sj-llable in the arsis may be prolonged so as to
have the measure of three or even four short s^'Uables. A
single syllable ma}^ thus represent a whole foot, including
both arsis and thesis: this is called syncope. A syllable
which includes three thnes is marked i— (J J ; one which
includes four times is marked i_i (J ).
3. On the other hand, a long syllable ma}' in certain cases
be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable in
verse. Such a syllable is called irrational, and is marked >.
The foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (ttovs
aXoyos) . Thus, in aXX air k^^poiv {j_ \j j^ >), the apparent
spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called
an irrational trochee ; in ^ovvai ScKrjv (> _i_ w ^) that which
takes the i^lace of the first iambus is called an irrational
iambus.
4. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic dac-
tyl (marked -\^ w) and cyclic anapaest (marked v^ w— )» which
have the time of only three short syllables instead of four.
The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee _ ^, especially
in logaoedic verses (§ 300). The cyclic anapaest takes the
place of an iaml)us ^ _, and is found especially in the iam-
bic trimeter of comedy (§ 293, 4).
5. The last syllable of every verse is common, and may l)e
considered long or short to suit the metre, without regard to
its usual quantity. It is called syllaha anceps. But the con-
tinuous systems described in § 298 allow this only at the end
of the last verse.
RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. — CATALEXIS. — PAUSE.
§ 287. 1. A rhyth7nical series is a continuous succession
of feet of the same measure. A verse may consist of one
such series, or of several such united. Thus the verse
TToAAa Ttt Setva, KOvBev dv\\0poi7rov Sctvorepov rrcXet
316 VERSIFICATION. [§288.
consists of a First GljTonic (§ 300, 4),-\^wl_v^!_w|i_
(at the end of a verse, -\^wl_wl_w I — A), followed by
a Second Gl3'conic, _w|-v^wl_v/l_A. Each part forms
a series, the former ending with the first syllable of avOpw-n-ov
(see above) ; and either series might have formed a distinct
verse. A rhythmical series generally ends after the arsis of
the third foot in the dactylic hexameter (§ 295, 4). See
§ 288.
2. The verse must close in such a way as to be distinctly
marked off from what follows.
(a.) It must end with the end of a word.
{b.) It allows the last S3ilable {syllaba anceps) to be either
long or short (§ 286, 5).
(c.) It allows hiatus (§8) before a vowel beginning the
next verse.
3. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close is
called catalectic (/caraXryKTiKos, stopped short), A complete
verse is called acatalectic.
4. The time of the omitted S3dlable or syllables in a cata-
lectic verse is filled by a pause. A pause of one time^ equiva-
lent to a short syllable (w), is marked A (for A, the initial of
Xctft/ia); a pause of two times (_) is marked A.
CAESURA AND DIAERESIS.
§ 288* 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs when-
ever a word ends before a foot is finished ; as in three cases
in the following verse : —
iroA-Xas I 8' L(ji6i\{Xov<s i/rv|;^as "At'lSi Trpot | ai/^O'.
This becomes important only when it coincides with the
caesura of the verse (as after icfiOc/xov^) , This caesura is a
pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more melo-
dious or to aid in its recital, regularl}^ occurring at the end of
a rh}i;hmical series which does not end the verse (§ 287, 1).
In some verses its place is fixed : see § 293, 4 ; § 295, 4.
2. When the end of a word coincides with the end of a foot,
the double division is called diaeresis (Statpccrt?, division);
as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis be-
§289.] , VERSES. 317
comes important only when it coincides with a natural pause
in the verse produced hy the ending of a rh3'thmic series ; as
in the trochaic tetrameter (§ 291, 2) and the dactylic pen-
tameter (§ 295, 5).
Note. The following verse of Aristophanes (Clouds, 519), in
trochaic (f) rhythm, shows the irrational long (§ 286, 3) in the
first, second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (§ 286, 4) in the
third; syncope (§ 286, 2) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis
and pause (§ 287, 3 and 4) with syllaba anceps (§ 286, 5): —
raKr]\dri vrj | top AL6\vv\\(rov top \ €K6pe lyjravra \ fie.
_>|_>|-ww|i_ll_^ |_>|_w|_A
A rhythmical series (§ 287, 1) ends with the penult of Aiopdaou.
This is a logaoedic verse, called EupoUdean (§ 300, 7)
VERSES.
§ 289. 1- Verses are called Trochaic^ lamhiCj Dactylic,
&c., from their fundamental foot.
2. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one
foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter^ pentameter,
or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in tro-
chaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by
dipodies (i. e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one di-
pody (or two feet) , a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of six
feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet. In most kinds of verse,
there are catalectic as well as acatalectic forms (§ 287, 3).
3. Rhythms are divided into rising and falling rhythms.
In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iam-
bus and anapaest ; in falling rhythms the thesis follows the
arsis, as in the trochee and the dactyl.
Note. It will be seen that prefixing an anacrusis (§ 285, 4)
of the same time as the thesis to a falling rhythm will change
it to a rising rhythm ; as _ v^ | _ ^ with w prefixed becomes
w — I w __ 1 »^ ; and — w v-/ 1 _ v^ w I _ with kj kj prefixed becomes
WW — I WW — Iww_. Many modern wi-iters treat all iambic
and anapaestic verses as trochaic and dactylic with anacrusis;
as w:_w|_w|_w for w_|w_|w_|wA;
and ww:_ww | _ww|_ww|_A
for wv^ — Iv^w |ww Iww •
318 VERSIFICATION. . [§291.
4. In Greek poetry, the same kind of verse ma}- be repeated
without interruption, as in tlie heroic hexameter (§ 295, 4) and
the iambic trimeter of the drama (§ 293, 4). Secondly, simi-
lar verses maybe combined into distichs (§ 295, 5) or into
snnple systems (§ 298). Thirdly, in lyric poetry, verses may
be combined into strophes of complex rhythmical and metrical
structure, with antistrophes corresponding to them in form.
In the following sections, the .principal rhythms found in
Greek poetry are described.
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS.
§ 290, Trochaic verses are measured by dipodies (§ 289,
2). The irrational trochee jl > (§ 286, 3) in the form of a
spondee can stand in the secotid place of each trochaic dipody ;
so that the dipody has the form, j_ ^ j_^. In trochaic verse,
therefore, the tribrach j, ^ ^ can stand in an}' place for the
trochee j_ ^; and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all
the even places, that is, in the second part of ever^' dipod}^
An apparent anapaest (^ ^ > for _i_ >) is sometimes used
as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The C3'clic dac-
tyl -w w (§ 286, 4) sometimes stands for the trochee in
proper names in both parts of the dipody.
§ 291, The following are the most common trochaic
verses : —
1. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic) : —
(j)T](roiJifv Trpop I Tovs arpaTrjyovs. \j >
^vxaycoyel j ^uxpdrrjs. \^ >
— \j — \j
_ w_ A
2. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and
a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There
is a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipod}",
where the first rhjahmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See
§ 293, 3.
a ao(f)a)ra\Toi Bcaraij \\ 8evpo tov vovv \ 7rp6a-)(fT€.
— v./ — w| \J >ll v^ > I \J A
§293.] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 319
In English poetiy each series is general^ made a separate
verse ; as
Tell me not in moiimful mimbers,
Life is but an empty dream.
3. The Ith^^phallic, which is a trochaic tripody^ not allow-
ing irrational feet, —
flfjTTOT eKTaKflT). \j \ \^ \ \^
For trochaic systems see § 298, Note.
IAMBIC RHYTHMS.
§ 292, Iambic verses are measured b}^ dipodies (§ 289, 2).
The irrational iambus > _ (§ 286, 3) in the form of a spon-
dee can stand in the ^rs^ place of each iambic dipod}^, so that
the dipod}' has the form ^ j_ y^ _l. In iambic Averse, there-
fore, the tribrach ^ \i, ^ can stand in an}^ place for the iam-
bus ^ j_ and the (apparent) spondee can stand in all the odd
places, that is, in \h.<^ first part of ever}' dipod}'. An apparent
dactyl (> ^ v^ for > j_) is sometimes used as the equivalent
of the irrational iambus ; and the C3'clic anapaest ^ ^j—
(§ 286, 4) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody,
especially by the Attic comedians (§ 293, 4).
§ 293. The following are the most common iambic
verses : —
1 . The monometer, —
Trpof rr\v 6e6u. > kj
2. The dimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), —
^;r;Xc5 ae Ttjs \ ev^ovKias- > w |> w
Koi TOP \(tyOV I TOP ^TTO). > w \ ^ w A
3. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is
a regular diaeresis (§ 288, 2) after the second dipody, where
the first rhythmical series ends (§ 287, 1). See § 291, 2.
ttnep Tov avbp 1 vncp^aKel, || koi firj yeXcor | offArjaeis.
>_v^__|vy_vy_i > ~ ^ — |w_-wA
320 VERSIFICATION. [§293.
In English poetiy each series is generally made a separate
verse ; as
A captain bold | of Halifax
Who lived in conn | try quarters.
4. The TRIMETER ACATALECTic, the iMOst common of all
iambic verses, in which most of the dialogue of the Attic
drama is composed. It never allows any substitution in the
last foot. With this exception it ma}- haA^e the tribrach m
any place. The irrational iambus > _ in the form of a spon-
dee can stand in the first place of ever}' dipody. The trage-
dians allow the (apparent) dactyl > 6 w only in the first and
third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place ;
but in proper names they allow the anapaest in every place
except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl > vl/ w in all
the odd places, and the cjxlic anapaest in every place except
the last (§ 292) . The most common caesura is that after the
thesis of the third foot.
The following scheme shows the tragic and the comic iam-
bic trimeter compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being
enclosed in [ ] .
vy — \J -:-
>_
vy -i- v^ _L.
w
>_
>
www www
w
> w w
>
WW— [ww— ]
[w
www www www
WW [> w w]
][ww-] [ww-l
In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables,
even where they are allowed. The following are examples
of both the tragic and the comic form : —
(Tragic) x^o^os /tev els | TrjKovpov rj\KOfjLeu TreSoi/,
2Ki6T]V is oi\fiov, a^arov els \ iprjixlav,
"Hcpaiarre, aoi \ de xp^ fxeKfiv | eTTto-roXaff.
(Comic) Q> Zcv /SacrtXev • | to xPW^ "^^^ \ vvkt^u oaov
anepavTov ov\Be7ro6* T][j.epa \ yevrjacrai;
anoXoio fi^r', | St TroXepe, 7roX\Xmv ovfCKa.
The Iambic Trimeter appears in English as the Alexan-
drine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza : —
And hope to meiiit Heaven by maklhig Earth a Hell.
For iambic systems, sec § 298.
§295.] DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 321
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS.
§ 294. The onl}- regular substitute for the dact}-! is the
spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short s^^lla-
bles of the dactyl (_l. — from ^ ^ w) •
§ 295, The following are the most common dactylic
verses : —
1. The dimeter, —
flVOToBolKOS dofMOS W W I \J W
fioipa 8i\coK€i w v^ I
2. The trimeter (acatalectic and catalectic), —
TiapOeuoi I 6fi^po<f)6\poi ^ k^ \y \ vywl A
3. The tetrameter (acatalectic and catalectic), —
ovpavi\oiST€ 6e\ois doi\pr]p.aTa. v^w| \j \j \ | s^ \j
eX^er* e\7royl^6p€\vai bvva\p.LP. _wwI_wvyI_ww|_A
4. The Heroic Hexameter, the Homeric verse. It always
has a spondee in the last place, often in the first four places,
seldom in the fifth. An hexameter with a spondee in the^^;^
place is called spondaic. The most common caesura is after
the arsis of the third foot : if this divides the thesis, it is called
a feminine caesura. The caesura sometimes occurs after the
arsis of the fourth foot. A diaeresis at the end of the fourth
foot is called bucolic, from its frequent occurrence in bucohc
poetr3\
For examples see the Iliad and Odj^ssey.
5. The Elegiac Distich consists of an heroic hexameter
followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This last verse
consists realty of two dactylic trimeters with syncope (§ 286, 2)
in the last measure ; as, —
IlaXXa? *A\dr}vai\i] | x^^P^S vlncpOev e|;^ft.
At the end of the pentameter verse we can place _ x
(§ 287, 4) in place of i— i. The verse probabl}' arose from a
322 VERSIFICATION. [§ 297.
repetition of the first penihemim {Tr€v6-y)fit-iJAphy five half feet)
of the hexameter. But syllaha anceps (§ 286, 5) and hiatus
(§ 8) are not allowed after the first trimeter, but onl}^ at the
end of the verse (§ 287, 2). The last two complete feet are
alwa3^s dactyls. A diaeresis (§ 288, 2) divides the two parts
of the v^-se.
The following is an Elegiac Distich : —
ris fie iSi'los, ri Be \ reprrvoVj a\v€v xP^o-^\r}S ^ AcfipolblTrjs ;
Te6vai\i]v ore | pot || fxrjKeTi | ravra /xe|Xot.
wwl wv^l — wv^l — wwl v-/wl
I — wv^li_ill — wwl wv^Il—I
Note. In the Homeric verse and in Lyric poetry, a long vowel or
a diphthong is often shoi-tened at the end of a word when the next
word begins with a vowel. E.g.
S) TTOTToi, I ^ fxaXa I 8f] fi€Te\^ov\€v\(rav 0eo\ | aXXcos.
Xpv(re(o d\va (rKr)\nTpa, KoX i\\laa-€TO \ nduras ^ A\xaiov5 (§ 10).
This sometimes occurs in the middle of a word. Sometimes a
short final vowel occurs in Homer where a long one is required by
the verse. This can often be explained by supposing a following
semi-vowel to have been doubled in pronunciation. Many anom-
alies in Homeric quantity are explained by the omission of Vau
or Digamma (§ 1, Note 2) ; as rolov ol ( ) for toIov Foi»
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS.
§ 296. Anapaestic verses are measured by dipodies
(§ 289, 2). The spondee and the dactyl (_ _l and — ^ ^)
may stand for the anapaest.
Note. The long sjdlable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two
short, making ^^y^ vl/ ^ for w v^ _i_.
§ 297. The following are the most common anapaestic
verses : —
1. The monometer, —
rpoTTOP al\yv7noiv. w w ! vy w ^ '"^
Koi 6epis I alvelv. ^o' w |
avp<p<o\vos opov. I v-/ v^
§299.] LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS. 328
2. The dimeter acatalectic, —
fieyav ck \ $vfiov \ KXdCov\T€s''ApTj. ww_| I Iww_
otr' €K\iraTioLS \ aKyeai \ Traidcov. Iww — I — \j \^ \
Aud the 6 1 live of peace \ sends its branch |es abroad.
3. The dimeter catalectic, ot paroemiac, —
^pav I crTpaTLa\Tiu dpco\yav. lv>'w — |ww — |v^
ovTOi I 7rXovTr]\cr€T€ Tray [res. 1 Iww — I w
The Lord | is advancling. Prepare |ye! l_1 v^wjl |^w_i_| \^
4. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a
syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is
a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. See § 291, 2.
TTpoo-xere tov vovv \ rois ddavdrois || fjfuv, toIs al\ep covctl,
ToTs aWepioiSf \ tolotlv dyrjptas, \\ rols a(f>6iTa fXTj\8op.€Voi(rLV.
§ 298. An anapaestic system consists of a series of anapaes-
tic dimeters acatalectic, with occasionally a monometer, ending
always with the paroemiac (or dimeter catalectic). These are
very frequently employed in both tragedy and comedy. E.g,
deKQTov p.kv €Tos Tob^ €7ret Ilpidiwv
fieyas dvribiKos,
MeueXaos ava^ r}b* 'Aya/ie/xi/for,
diOpovov ALodev Koi dLa-Krjnrpov
Tifi^s oxvpov (evyos 'ArpetSaj/,
arokov *ApyeiQ}V ;(iXtovaurav
Trjo-b* dno ;(a)pa?
^pav, arpaTi5)Tiv dpcoydv.
Note. Iambic and trochaic systems are sometimes formed on the
same principle, consisting of iambic or trochaic dimeters acatalec-
tic, with occasionally a monometer, ending always with a dimeter
catalectic.
LOGAOEDIC RHYTHMS.
§ 299. 1. Logaoedic rhythm is a rhythm in | time, having
the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom of
construction. Besides the trochee — w , it admits the irrational
trochee — >, the tribrach www, the cyclic dactyl -w w, and
the syncopated trochee i —
824 VERSIFICATION. [§ 300.
2. The first foot of a logaoedic verse often allows special
freedom, and it is then jcalled a basis. The basis may be a
trochee or an irrational trochee — >, and sometimes a
tribrach kj \j \j. An apparent iambus (probably with
ictus w — ) sometimes occurs (see § 300, 7) ; and rarely
even two short syllables, v^ w, stand for a basis in tyric
poetry. Great license is permitted in using different forms
of basis, even in verses which otherwise correspond precisely
(§ 289, 4), as in § 300, 7. A basis is marked x.
When a verse has more than one rhj'thmical series
(§ 287, 1), each series ma}^ begin with a basis (see § 300, 7).
Sometimes an anacrusis (§ 285, 4) precedes a logaoedic
verse, either with or without a following basis.
§ 300. The following are some of the most important
logaoedic verses : —
1. Adonic: a-vfifxaxos ecra-o. — o* v^ I — \j This Is the final
verse of the Sapphic stanza (6.)
2. First Pherecratic : eirTairvKoLcn Qrj^ais.
Catal. ■^evBea-i ttoikiXois-
8. Second Pherecratic : TraiBbs 8va(j)opou arav.
Catal. exdlcTTcov dveixcou.
4. Ghjconic : (Three forms) : —
(a) fxfj Kara rov ve&viau, —y^ vy I
(b) Qrj^a rav rrporepav (f)dos. _? > [
(c) (f)S)Ta jSai/ra Traua-ayia. _y w |
5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza: —
(a) d(rvP€Tr]fii rSiv duejiav a-rda-iv
v-/ : w\^ I _^ 1 — v^ Kj\ w I — A
(a) TO fiev yap evOev KVfia KvKivdfTai
(6) TO 5' evdeu • afifxes 8* dv to pL€(T<Tov
v-': — v^l v^l \j \ \j
(c) voii (f)opr)fj,€0a crvv fxcXalva.
-^ KJ I — w \^ I — \j \ — v^
Compare in Horace, —
Vides ut alta stet nive candidum, &c.
■\J w I
-wl
w
~W KJ 1
— ^
l_A
-^>|-^wl
— \J
J^>l
—\^ \j
l_A
V.I-
_wl_
_A
y^ 1
_wl
_A
w I-wvy 1
_ A
§301.] FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 825
6. Sapphic: iTOLKi\\66pov \ dBdvar \ *A^po]8ira.
l_> I
Three Sapphics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza.
; S> Be
(Oflf\
/ot, Kare|p<B || npos v
fias €\Xev6e
p(os.
- >
_>
-^ ^ L_ II JL w
— >
— >
_ A
w —
See § 288, Note
Note. Nearly all the verses here described as logaoedic have
been called choriambic (§ 301, 1). If we consider the dactyl here
as _ w w and not as -^ kj , it forms w w _ with the follow-
ing long syllable; and thus, by the division hitherto common, the
Pherecratics become (1) \j\j — | \j v^ and v^- w | w ,
(2) _ w 1 _ v^ w _ I w and ^i; I _ v^- w _ ; the Glyconics
become (1) \j\j — I w _ w _, (2) _ c? | _ v^' w _ | w _,
(3) >3;| w| \j \j ; and the Sapphic becomes
_^|_w|_ww_|w_vy, with the Adonic _ w v^ __ | w.
RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
§ 301, Some of the more important rhythms with feet of
five or six times (§ 285, 2, c, d) are the following : —
1. Choriambic rhythms, with the choriambus _ ^^ ,^ — as the
fundamental foot : —
TraiSa fiev av\Tds noaiv ai|ra df/xei/a.
\j \j 1 \J\J — I — v^vy
Note. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most so-called
choriambic verses are here explained as logaoedic (§ 300, Note).
2. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore ^ \j as the
fundamental foot, —
Tre7repaK€v | jxev 6 ir€pa-e\7rTo\is ^^rj
)3ao-iXetoff | (rrparos fls dvlriTropou yei\TOva ;(a)pav.
A ditrochee _ ^ _ ^ often takes the place of two long syl-
lables and the two following shorts. This is called anacldsis
(dvaKXao-is, breaking up) :
ris 6 KpaiTTv^ \ 7ro8i 7rr}8r)\p,aTog fVTr€\Tfjs dvacraoap;
WW Iww Iww — wf W
326 VERSIFICATION. [§302.
3. Cretic rhj'thms, in which paeons occur by resolution of
long syllables (_ w w w or w vy w _ for _ w _) : —
oi'K dva\(rxr}(Toixai • \ nrjbe Xe'ye | fioi crv Xoyov.
KaTUTefiS) j Toi(riv tTrljreCo-t KarlrvfiaTa.
— \J — I W I WWV^ I WWV^
KJ W "^ I K^ I W i W
4. Bacchic rh3'thms, with the bacchius w as the funda-
mental foot : —
Tts axoii I tIs odjxa. \ npoaeTTTll \ fi 6.(f>eyy'fis ;
\j |w \ \j |w
DOCHMIACS.
§ 802. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in
tragedy to express great excitement, are based upon a foot
compounded of the bacchius and the iambus, \j I ^ — ?
called the dochmiiis. This peculiar foot appears in nineteen
different forms, by resolving the lohg syllables and admitting
irrational longs in place of the two shorts. Its most common
forms are ^ I w — and kj \j kj—^ kj — As examples
may be given
hva-oKycl TV)(a. \j { w
TTTcpocjiopov defjias. w w vy \ K^
yuaodiov pev ovV' "^ \j \J | w (for ^ | v^ _«)
pcyaXa peyaXa Kai, w w w w v-' | w (for w | w )
(fiepoipav ^octkclv. \j | > (for \^ \ kj )
irpoirepy^as a^, \ xLva dpoels Xoyov } Vw>'— .— .w— I \yv^v>_w«.
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF YEEBS.
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF VEEBS.
Note. — This catalogue professes to contain only those verbs in ordinary
use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present diffi-
culties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some
form before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not found in writ-
ers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the present
indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a
form which is given for completeness and marked as later. Tenses which
are not used by Attic writers, in either prose or poetry, or which occur
only in lyrical parts of the drama, are enclosed in [ ], except occasionally
the present indicative of a verb which is Attic in other tenses.
The simple stem of each verb, when this does not appear in the present,
i.e. unless the verb is of the first class (§ 108, I.), is given in ( ) directly
after the present indicative. The class of each verb (§ 108) is given in ( )
at the end, unless it belongs to the first class, when it is left without a
number. Verbs in ixl of the second class (in vfn, § 108, v. 4) are marked
(II.) ; other verbs in m are marked (I.). A few Epic irregularities are not
noticed in the classification.
The modification of the stem made by adding c in certain tenses (§ 109,
8) is marked by prefixing (e-) to the first form in which this occurs. A
hyphen prefixed to a form (as -TjVe/ca) indicates that it occurs only in com-
position. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in
later Greek ; and it is not always inserted when the occurrence of cognate
forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in
good use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every
tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority
within a fixed period.
The imperfect or j)luperfect is generally omitted when the present or
perfect is given.
A.
[(aa-), injure, infatuate, stem, with aor. &a<Ta, aaa ; a. p. adaBriv ; pr. mid.
darat, aor. aaadix-qv, erred. Epic]
"A-yaiAai, admire, [Ep. fut. dydaofxai, rare,] rjydadrjv, '^yaadfirjv. (I.)
^ 'AyyeXXci) (d77e\-), announce, dyyeXd [d77eX^w], ijyyeiXa, ijyyeXKa, ijyyeX-
fiai, riyyeXdriv, fut. p. dyyeXd-nffofMc ^ a. m. -ijyyeCKdiJLijv. Second aorists
with X are rare or doubtful. (4.)
/
330 APPENDIX.
'AYcCpo) (ayep-), colled, a. ijyeipa ; [Ep. plpf. p. ayif/ipaTo ; a. p. ipfipOypfy
a. ra. (rf/eLpdfjLrjv) cw-ayeiparo, 2 a. m. dyepbiifjv with part, aypofxevo^.^ (4.)
"A^vviii (Fay-), in comp. also ayviju, break, a$w, ^a^a, [rarely Epic 9j^a],
2 p. -^a [Ion. irjyo'], 2 a. p. ^y w [Ep. &yr)v]. (II.)
"Ayw, ZcacZ, fi^w, ^^a (rare), 17x0 (in comp.), ^yfxai, "^x^V, dx&T^o-ofiac ; 2 a.
■^yayov, ijy ay bjxyiv ; fut. m. a^ofxai (as pass.), [a. m. d^d/xTju, (Ion.).]
[(a8€-), be sated, stem with aor. opt. ddrjaeiev, pf. part. ddrjKws. Epic]
[(a€-), rest, stem with aor. aecra, S.<ra. Epic]
*Aet8«, sing, deicro} and deicrofxac, i}ei(Ta. In Attic prose, ^a>, qcofxai (9<J"w,
rare), Tjca, rjadrjv.
*A€tp« (dep-), to^e w^, f. dpw, a. ijeipa, rj^pdrju, [-^epfiai late, Horn. pip. p.
dupTo for ^'epro ; a. m. deipdfirjp.] Ionic and poetic. In Attic prose
always al'pw (dp-) dpQ, ^pa, ^pKa, ^p/J.ai, -fjpdrjp ; dpov/JMi, i}pdixT]v. Poetic
2 a. m. dpdfiTjv. (4.)
['ArjiJit (de-), blow, inf. d^vai, d-qfievai, part, dels ; imp. Eriv. Mid. ^17/iai,
imp. drifj-rju. Poetic, chiefly Epic] (I.)
Al8eo(j,ai, poet. al'So/xat, respect, albiaopxii, ^defffxai, yjUcdrjv, -^deadfjiriu.
[Horn, imperat. alSeio]. § 109, 2.
^ Alveo), praise, abeaoj [alvrjau}], rjveaa [^V?;o-a], -yveKa, --gprj/xaL, igvidrju,
§ 109, 1, N. 2.
[Al'vvftat, take, imp. alv^/xrjv. Epic] (II.)
Vf Alpeo) (eX-), to^e, alp-qao), "^priKa, -yprjixai. [Hdt. dpaipTjKa, dpalprjfiai], -gpidrjVf
^ aipedrjffofiat ; fut. pf. rip-qaoixat. (rare); 2 a. elXoi', eXw, &c.; eiXofXTju, ^Xw-
/^ai, &c. (8.) ,
Al'pw, Attic prose form of deipu. See delpia.
Al(r0dvo|xai (atcrd-), perceive, (c-) aiadrja-ofiai, -^a-Oi^fMt, yffdS/irjv. Pres.
atado/jiai (rare). (5.)
A.i<r\vv(ii (al<rxvp-), disgrace, alaxvvd, rjixxvva, [p. p. part. ■^a'xvfJi-fJ'-^foi Ep.,]
-qo-X^vOtjv, felt asJiamed, alaxwd-fjaofiai ; fut. m. aiaxwoviiai. (4.)
*At<i), Aear, imp. d'Cov, [aor. -^Ib-a.] Ionic and poetic
[*Atft>, breathe out, only imp. dioj'. Epic. See ^77^11.]
['AKaxt^w, afHict, redupl. pres., with dx^« and dxcvo, be grieved (only in
pr. part, dxe'w, dxe(>wv), and dxop.ai, Je grieved; fut. d/caxijo^w, aor.
d/cdx^ca ; p. p. dKax^jPiaL (d/c7?xe'5aTai), d/cdxw^at, dKax'nfJt.epos or d/ci/-
X^/J-evos ; 2 aor. ■f]Kaxov, dKaxd^v. See dx^^f^'- ^^^^ ^X^f^^'- Epic]
['AKaxH-tvos, sharpened. Epic perf. part, with no present in use.]
*AKeo|iai, heal, aor. '^Kead/njv.
*Akt]8€<i), neglect, [aor. d/cTjSeo-a Ep.]. Poetic.
'Akovo) (dx'oi;- for dKoF-), hear, dKoiaofxaL, iJKOvaa [Dor. pf. ^/fovfca], 2 pf.
dK-fiKoa (for aK-rjKoFa, § 102), 2 plpf. rjKrjKdeiv or aKTjKdeiv ; ijKO^adrjv,
aKovffO'^a'OfJiat.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 33]
'A\do|jiai, wander, [pf. dMXrj/jLai (as pres.), w. inf. d\d\7](T$ai, pt. dXaX??-
fievos], a. dX-qdrjv. Chiefly poetic.
*AX8a£v« (aX5av-), nourish, [Ep. 2 aor. ijKbavov.'] Pres. also dXd-^a-Koj.
Poetic. (4.)
*AX€i<}>« (aXr^-), anoint, dXeix/zcj, ifXeiypa, -dX-^Xi<pa (or -ei<pa), dX'qXifjLfjiai,
ifXd(f>dt)v, -dXet(t>drj(TOfiai (rare), 2 a. p. -TjXi<p7)v (rare). Mid. f. dXelxJ/o-
fxai, a. TfXeLxpdixtjv. (2.)
'AX€'|« (dXeK-), ward off, fut. [Ep. ctXe^iJo-w] aXe^Tjo-o/xat or dXi^o/xai ; aor.
■fjXe^Tja-a (-^Xe^a, rare), rjXe^d/jLriv ; [Ep. 2 a. dXdXKOv for dX-aXe/c-oj'.] (8.)
[*AX€0|xat, ai702C?, Epic ; aor. -^Xed/xi/j/.]
*AX€va>, awr^, dXci/crw, ^eyca, '^Xevdfirjv.
*A\i<a, grind, dX^ffca (dXw), ijXeaa, dX^Xe<r/Ctat or aX'^Xe/uat. § 102.
"AXOop-ai, be healed, («-) dXd-fiffojxai.
>l 'AXto-KojJiai (dX-, dXo-), &e captured, aX(a<TOfiac, ^Xwica or idXuKa, 2 aor.
/ ^Xwi* or edXwv, dXw [Epic dXt6w], dXoLrjv, dXQvai, dXo6s ; all passive in
meaning. § 109, 8, ^. No active dXiaKw, but see dv-oXCo-Kw. (6.)
*AXtTaivo}iai (dXtr-, dXirdv-), [with Ep. pres. act. dXirpaCvo)], sm ; 2 aor.
ifXlrov, [dXXr6fir]v, pf. part. dXir'qfjt.evos, sinning, Ep.]. Poetic, chiefly
Epic. (4. 5.)
'AXXdtro-o) {dXXdy-), change, aXXd^co, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. "fiXXdyrjv. (4.)
"AXXojiai (dX-), ?ca2?, dXoO/tat, ifXdfiriv ; 2 a. i]X6/i7]v (rare). [Epic 2 a.
dXcro, dXro, dXfievos, by syncope. (4.)
['AXvKxd^w and oXvkt^w, Je excited, imp. dXiKra^ov Hdt., pf. dXaXiicnjfiai
Horn. Ionic]
'AXvoTKO) (dXvK-), avoid, aXjJ|w [and ctXiJ^o/xat], ^Xu^a (rarely -aix-qv). Poetic.
'AXivcr/cw is for dXvK-aKU (§ 108, vi. N. 3). (6.)
*AX<|>dva) (aX0-), Ji7id, acquire, [Epic 2 aor. ?jX(pov.] (5.)
•AfJiapTdvw (a/JLapr-), err, (€-) afiapnfi<rofiai, i]fidpTT]Ka, i]fidpTr}fmi, rumpr-fi-
e-qv ; 2 aor. T^fmprov [Ep. -fjfJL^poTOv]. (5.)
•A|ipX£<rK« (dfipX-), dfi^Xbu} in comp., miscarry, [d/t^Xcio-w, late,] ^/i/3Xw<ra,
-ij/x^Xu}Ka, -'fip.pXwp.aL, rjfi^Xiljdijv. (6.)
*A|i6ipw (a>ep-) and dftcpSo), deprive, ijfiepffa, ijfi^periv. Poetic. (1. 4.)
'Afiir-^X" an(i d}jnr-£<rx« (aV^t and ^x^). ^"^'y' aJoM^, cZo«7i«, dfi<p4^u, 2 a.
ij/jLTTia-xov ; [Epic impf. d/xirexoi'.] Mid. dixvix^fiai, dfnriffxofiai, dfim-
cxviopLai ; imp. iifnreixofivv ; f. dfi(pi^ofiai ; 2 a. rjf^irKXX^fiw and tJ/attc-
(rx6firjv, § 105, 1, N. 3. See 2x" and t<rx«.
•A|wrXaKt<rKW (d/xirXaK-), err, miss, rjfxirXdKrjfxat ; 2 a. 'fjfiT\aKOV, part, d/i-
irXaKibv or dirXaKibv. Poetic. (6.)
["Anirwe, dfiTP^vdrjv, dfiTuvTO, all Epic : see awTri'^w.]
I *A|il{vfi» (dfu/j'-)» toa^^^ <# ; fat. dfwvQ, d/xvvoOfMi ; aor. ^/«Jw, ^jjvvd/xifjv.
332 APPENDIX.
*A|i<|)i-7V0€<i>, douht, riiKpiyvUov and -fj/JLcpeyvdeov, rjfKpiyvbriaa ; aor. pass.
part. dfjL^LyvoTjdeis. § 105, 1, N. 3.
*A(Jw}>i-€VVv}Ji.i (see 'ivwixC), clothe, fut. [Ep. dfKpL^aui] Att. -dfKpiQ ; r/fKpieaa,
rj/xcpiea/xai ; dfJ.(pieaofxai, dix(l)Leadixrjv (poet.). § 105, 1, N. 3. (II.)
*Aji.<j>io-pTiTe«, dispute, augmented r]fi^i<r- and Tj/xcpea- (§ 105, 1, N. 3);
otherwise regular.
'AvaivofJiai {dudv-), refuse, imp. ijvaLvofirjv, aor. -^vrjvdfirjv. (4.)
'AvaXlo-Kw and dvdX^o), expend, aVaXcicrw, dvdXwaa, and durjXwaa (/car-
7]vd\(j}(Ta) , dvakuKa and dvrjkwKa, dvdXojfiai and dvriXiVfjLai {KaT-7]vd\o}/jiai)y
dvdXuidrjv and dvrjXdodrjv, dpokwdrjaoixai. See dXiarKO|JLai.
'Avairvcci), take breath, comp. of dvd and irvetj) [irvv-): see irv^o}. [Epic 2
aor. imperat. afiirvve, a. p. dfiirvOpdrjv, 2 a. m. dfxirvvTo (for -fero).]
•Av8dv« (FaS-, d5-), ^?easc, (e-) [dST^crw, Hdt.; 2 pf. edda. Epic;] 2 aor.
&Sov [Ion. ^d5o»'. Epic evddov for efaSoj'.] Ionic and poetic. (5.)
*Av^X**> ^^'^^^ '^^P ' ^^® ^X"» ^'^^ § 1^5> 1» Note 3.
['AvirivoOe, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung. Epic] See ev-qvode,
'Av-oi-yvviAi and oyolyvi (see ot'yvv^lL), open, imp. dvicpyov {ijvoLyov, rare)
I [Epic dvi^yov] ; dmi^ia, dv^cp^a {ijvoi^a, rare) [Hdt. ctVot^a], dvecpx^"-) du^cp-
ynai, dveiljxOrji' (subj. aVoix^w, &c.); fut. pf. aVe4i^o;uai ; 2 pf. dviifya
(rare). (II.)
*Av-op0d«, 5C< upright, aug. dvwp- and Tjpujp-. § 105, 1, N. 3.
*Avv», Att. also dvvTw, accomplish ; fut, aVi/aw, dvixroinai ; aor. -fjuvaa,
rivvffdjx'qv ; pf. ijvvKa, ijvvafxai. (Always u.)
'Avw-yw, orcZcr, exhort, imp. ijvcoyov ; duiv^u, iji/u^a ; 2 p. dt'W7a (as pres. ),
with imperat. duuxOi-, du(vxd(o, dvi^xOe, 2 plpf. r]vd)yea. Ionic and poetic.
('Air-avpdo)), takeaway, not found in jjresent ; imp. dinjipwv (as aor.);
a. m. dTrr]vpdfirju (?); aor. part. aToOpas, dirovpafiei/o^. Poetic.
'Airacljto-Kw (a7rd0-), deceive, 2 a. '^Tra<f>oy [2 a. m. opt. ctTra^oi/AT;!']. Po-
etic. (6.)
'AtrexOdvoiiai (e'x^-), &e hated, (c-) d'rrex&VO'o/xaL, diriixQw^-'' > 2 a. ctTTT^x^^-
/i^?". (5.)
['Airdcpo-c, stf£;^< q^, subj. diroipcri, opt. -(rete. Only in 3 pers. Epic]
' AiroKTivvv|JLi and -v«, forms of diroKTdvo}. See kt£iv<i>.
'AirdxpT), t^ suffices, impersonal. See XPV-
"Atttw (d0-), touch, fut. ai/'w, a^o^at ; aor. ij^i'a, i]-<pd[iriv ; pf. i^/A/xai ; a. p.
^0^771'. (3.)
*Apdop,ai, pray, dpdaofxai, 7)pd<rd/j.7jv, ijpdfiai. [Ep. act. inf. dp^/xevai, to
pray.]
'ApapCa-Kta (dp-), fit, ^pcra, ifpdijv ; 2 p. dpdpa, [Ion. dprjpa, plpf. d'prfpeiv and
ijp-qpeiv ;] 2 a. 7}papop ; 2 a. m. part, dpfxspoi (as adj.), fitting. Att.
redupl. in pres. (§ 108, vi. N. 1). (6.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 333
i. 'Ap^o-KW (a/)c-), 'plmse, dpiau, ijpecra, -fipiffdriv ; dpiaoixai, 'npead/njv. § 109,
1, N. 2. (6.)
['ApTifJicvps, oppressed, pf. pass. part. Epic]
'ApKto), assist, dpKiaoi, i^pKeca. § 109, 1, N. 2.
*ApndTT« [Ion. dpp,o<ro-cD], poet, dpixd^w (apfxo5-), fit, ap/xdao), ijpfioa-a {<tvp-
dp/xo^a Find.), ijpfioKa, i]pfio(T/jiai, rjp/xoadrjv^'int. p. dp/xoad-qao/xai ; a. m.
7]pixo(rdpi,7]v. (4.)
*'Apvv|i.ai (dp-), i4;m, secure, pres. and impf.; chiefly poetic. Same stem as
atpcj (v. delpu}). (II.)
*A.p6<a, plough, ijpocra, [p. p. Ion. dprjpofiai,'] -qphdriv. § 109, 1, N. 2.
'Apird^w (dpirad-, dpiray-), seize^ dpirdao) and dpTda-ofiai [Ep. dpTrd^w], 17/'-
''^^ Tracra [:7/37ra^a], ■^pircLKa, ^piraap-ai, rjpirdadrju [Hdt. ijpTrdxOw]} dpiraadri-
aofiai. (4.)
*ApiS« and dpvraf draw water, aor. ijpv<ra, ripvcrdfirju, iipddrjv {rjpiadiiv, Ion.].
"Apxw, hegin, rule, dp^u, ^p^a, ^pxo., 'fipi/fiai. (mid.), iipx^Wt dpx6ri(rofiai ;
dp^o/JLai, -fip^dpL-riv.
['AriTaXXo) (aVtraX-), ^gWfZ; aor. driTrfKa. Epic and Lyric] (4.)
Avaivco {avdv-) or avalvw ; fut. avdvG} ; aor. 'rjvrjva, Tjvdvdrjv or avdvdrjv,
avavdrjffofjLat ; fut. m, auavoDyuat (as pass.). Augment rjv- or ay- (§ 103,
Note). Chiefly poetic and Ionic (4.)'
Av^dvb) or a{}|<i> (ai)^-), increase, (€-) au^ijo-w, av^r'i(rop.ai, r)^^r}<Ta, rjH^rjKa,
7){j^r]pai, r}v^ridr)v, ai^rjO-^aofiai. [Also Ion. pres. a^^w, impf. ae^oi'.] (5.)
['A<}>d(r<ro) (d0a5-), /ceZ, handle, aor. ijcpaaa ; used by Hdt. for a^dw or
d0dw.] (4.)
*A<|)-{t]Hi, ?e^ (/o, impf. a'^^^?" or ri(f)i7jv (§ 105, 1, N. 3); fut. d0^(ra;, &c.
See i-n/jLi, § 127.
[ 'A<|>v<r(r» (d0u7-), c?raw, ^oiir, a0y^a>. Epic] See a0jJw. (4.)
['A<}>vi(i), f?raw, d(f>v<T(>} (late), ijipvcra, rjcpvadpirjv. Poetic, chiefly Epic]
"AxOofiat, be displeased, (€-) dxO^o'op.ai, i)xO^<rdriv, dx^ecrdT^a-ofxai. § 109, 2.
["Axvup-ai (dx-), 5« troubled, impf. dxvvp^tjv. Poetic. (II.) Also Epic
pres. dxo(iai.] See dKax^t^^*
["Aw, satiate, ao-u, daa ; 2' aor. subj. ^dipav (or ew/xev), inf. d/xevat, to sati-
ate ones self. Mid. {dop.ai.) ddrai as fut. ; f. da-o/xai, a. dadfirjy. Epic]
B.
Bd^cD (/9a7-), speak, utter, -jSd^w, [p. p. Ep. /S^jSafcrat]. Poetic. (4.)
Baivto (/3df-, /3ai'-), (/o, ^riao/xai (poet, except in comp.), ^i^rjKa, -j3^j9a/iac,
-e/3d^77»' (rare); 2 a. ^^w (§ 125, 3); 2 p. (jS^iSaa) |Se^ &c. (125, 4); [a.
m. Ep. €j3r]crdixr]p (rare) and e^rjao/xrjv]. In active sense, cause to go, poet.
/8170-w, ^/397<ra. See § 108, v. N. 1. (5. 4.)
334 \ APPENDIX.
rBAXXw (/3aX-, p\a-), throw, f. [jSaX^w] jSaXw, rarely (e-) paW^ffo), p^pXrjKa,
^elSXrjfJLai [Ep. ^epoXrjfiai.], i^Xrjdrjv, ^Xridyjaoixai ; 2 a. ^^aXov, e^aXo/jirjv ;
fut. m. paXovfiaL ; f. p. pe^X-na-o/xai ; [Epic, 2 a. dual ^v/j.-§X7]tt]v ; 2 a.
m. e^X-nfJiW, with subj. ^XrjeTai, opt. jQX^o or jSXeto, inf. ^Xrjadat, pt.
pXrjfxepos ; fut. $i;/A-/3X^a-eat]. (4.)
BdirTO) (fia(f>-), clip, j3dxpu, i^a\f/a, pe^afXfxai, e^d^rjv and (poet.) €pd(pdr)v ;
fut. m. )8di//o/xai. (3.)
Bdo-KCi) (j3a-), poetic form of /SatVw, ^o. (6.)
Bao-rd^w (^aarab-), carry, /Sao-rdo-w, e^daracra. Poetic. (4.)
B^o-crw (jSt/x-), Att. ^TjTTW, cough, jS^^w, ^/37?^a. (4.)
[Btptini (/3a-), ^0, pr. part. jSi/3ds. Epic] (I.)
BiPptooTKii) {^po-), eat, p. pippcoKa, peppcofxai, [e^piaO-qv, 2 a. ^/Spwv ; fut. pf.
Pe^pwao/xai] ; 2 p. part. (jSe/^/sws) pi. /SejSpwres (§ 125, 4). [Horn. pres.
pe^pcbeo}.] (6.)
^ Bidw, Zwe, ^nbcro/xac, i^iu<Ta (rare), ^e^luKa, (j9c/3/w/xat) /Se/Stwrat ; 2 a.
e^^j/ (§125^3).
Bi<oirKO|j.ai OSto-), revive, i^Mcrdfirjv, restored to life. (6.)
1/ BXdiTTft) (/3Xa/3-), injure, ^Xd\{/w, ^/3Xai/'a, /3^/3Xa0a, pe^Xafifiai, i^Xdtpdrip;
2 a. p. i^Xd^rjv, 2 f. pXa^-naofxai ; fut. m. j8Xd^o/xai ; [fut. pf. ^e^Xdxpo-
flat Ion.]. (3.)
BXao-rdvo) (pXaaT-), sprout, («-) /SXao-r^o-w, i^XdaTija-a, ^epXdarrjKa (and
e/3\-); 2 a. ^^Xaarov. (5.)
BXeiro), see, fiXixpo/xai [Hdt. -pXixpco], ^^X€\pa.
BXCtto) or pXCo-a-o) (/xeXtr-, jSXrr-, § 14, N. 1), toA:e honey, aor. i^XXaa. (4.)
BXcoo-KU (/AoX-, /aXo-, /5Xo-, § 14, N. 1), gro, f. /noXoOfxai, p. fii/jL^XuKa, 2 a.
ijxoXov. Poetic. (6.)
Bodo), shout, ^or}<xoixai., e^brjaa. [Ion. (stem jSo-), -pdxrofxai, ^/3w(ra, i^uad-
fi7]v, {pe^ufjLai) pe^ufievos, ipibadriv. § 108, vii. N.]
BocTKW, /eec?, (€-) ^oa-K^a-u).
TV BovXop,ai, i6"i7Z, t(;2S^, (augm. i^ovX- or ^/SouX-); (c-) ^ovX-fjaofiai, /SejSoiJXi;-
' /xat, e^ovX-qO-qv ; [2 p. irpo-pi^ovXa, prefer.] § 100, N. 2.
[(Bpax"), stem, with only 2 aor. ^/Spaxe and ^pdx^, resounded. Epic]
Bpt6w, &c heavy, jSpltrw, ^^pTaa, pi^pWa. Eare in Attic prose.
[(Bpox"), stem, sioallow, aor. ^Ppo^a, 2 aor. p. dva-^poxds ; 2 pf. (?) ai'a-
^i^pox^v (Hom.). Epic]
BpvxdofAat i^pvx-), roar, p. pippvxa ; eppvxw^Mv '■> /S/'i'X'?^"^- § 108,
vii. N. (7.)
Bvv€« or Pv« (jSu-), stop up, j8if<rw, ?^v<ra, ^i^va/iai. Chiefly poetic. (5.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 335
i^ ra(U(i) (7ayu-), marry (said of a man), i.^a.\i.G} [7a/i^w], a. ^yrjfm, p. yeya-
fiTjKa, p. I). yeydfiTjfxai. Mid. marry (said of a woman), f. ya/iov/mi
[Epic yaf^iaao/xai {?), loill provide a loifc], a. iyTj/xdfirju. (7.)
rdvvjjLai (7a-), rejoice, [fut. (Epic) yav^aaofxac, pf. yeydvv/xai (later).] Po-
etic. (II. )
reywvcw (7w»'-), shout, yeyojvqccj, (iyeydjvTjaa) yeycovija-ac ; 2 p. ykyiava.,
subj. yeyihvui, imper. 7^7aji'e, [inf. y^yoiveii^v, part. 7e7wj'c6s.] § 109, 7
(c). (7.) Pres. also yey uda-KO). (6.)
FcCvofJiai (7^1'-), be born; a. eyeivdiirfv, begat. (4.)
/^ rcXdft), laugh, yeXaao/nai, iyiXaaa, iyeXdadrjv. § 109, 1, N. 2.
[FevTO, seized, Epic 2 aor. ; once in Hom.]
rTjGe'ft) (yrid-), rejoice, [yrjO-qcroj, iyrjdrjaa ;] 2 p. yiyr)9a (as pres.). (7.)
rT]pd(rK6> and ynp^^) groiv old, yTjpdao} and y^pdaofxai, ey-qpaaa, yey-qpaKa
{am old); 2 a. {iyrjpav, % 125, 3) [eynpa Hom.], inf. yripdvai, pt. yqpd^.
\ (6.)
'"'^^-iJi'YVOjJiai and "yCvofJiai (7^1'-, 7a-), become, yev/i<ro/jLai, yeyevri/xai, [iyev-qdrju
Dor. and Ion.]; 2 a. iyevdfiTjv [E]). yivro for lyhero\\ 2 p. ykyova, am,
l^ poet. (7^7aa) and 2 plpf. (e7e7dei;/), see § 125, 4. (8.)
[ Xfyvwo-Kw (7»'o-), nosco, hioiv, yvibcxofiai, [Ion. aV-^7»'W(Ta,] ^piaKu, iyvoi-
a-fxai, iypibcdrjv ; 2 a. ^yoji', perceived. § 125, 3. (6.) '
rvd|nrT« (7va/i7r-), &€?i(?, yudfi^pu, [^yvafi\f/a, -iypdfi^drjv.'} Poetic, chiefly
Epic] (3.)
[To6.(i>, bewail, 2 aor. (70-), 7601'; only Epic in active.] Mid. yodofiat,
poetic, impf. 700x0; [yo-Zjao/Mai (Epic), as active]. § 108, vii. N. (7.)
^ rpd<|>w, write, ypdxj/io, &c. regular ; 2 a. p. iypd(f)7]v {iypd(p6r]u is not class-
ic); 2 f . ypaipT^aofxai ; fut. pf. yeypd\l/ofmi.
(8a-), stem, teach, learn, no pres., [(e-) dai^crofiai, SeddrjKa, SeSdrnmat ; 2 a.
m. (?) inf. deddaadai ; 2 p. (5^5aa) § 125, 4 ; 2 a. 8i8aov or idaov,] 2 a.
p. iddrjv. Poetic, chiefly Epic.
[AaC^w (5at7-), rend, 8ai^(a, iddl'^a, 8€8diyp.ai, e8atx0riv. Epic and Lyric]
(4-)
AafvOfii (5at-), entertain, 8alcr(j}, eSaiaa, (iSala-Orjv) Saicrdeis. [Epic 8aiuv,
impf. and pr. imperat.] Mid. Saimj/J.ai, feast, Salaofiai, i8ai(Tdfi7]u ;
[Ep. pr. opt. 8aivvTo for Satvut-ro, 8ai.piaT for 8aii>vt-vTo. § 118, 1, N.] (II.)
Aabixai (5a-), divide, [Ep. f. Scto-o^uat,] iSacrd/xrjv, pf. p. S^Sao-^uat [Ep. S^Sai-
fmi]. § 108, iv. 3, Note. (4.) Pres. also SaWofiai (Sar-), divide^ to
which 8daofmi, iSacdfjLTjv, and 848a<Tfiai can be referred. (7.)
336 APPENDIX.
AaC<a (5a-), kindle, [Ep. 2 p. did-rja, 2 plpf. dedrieiv ; 2 a. {iSadfxrjv) siibj.
8d7]Tai.] Poetic. § 108, iv. 3, N. (4.)
AdKvw (5a/c-, d-rjK-), bite, drj^ofiai, Ubrj-yfiaL, ^brix^W> SrjxO-ncofjLat. ; 2 a.
eduKov. (2. 5.)
Aafivdo) and 8d}JiVT]|JLi {dafi-, dfia-), also pr. Saftd^a) (dafiad-), tame, stcbdue,
[Ep. f. da/xQ {\Y. dafidq., bajxowai) for dafidaio, iddfj.aaa, [dedfMrjfMai,] ida-
fxdadrjv (§ 16, 1) and ed/j.ijdTjv ; 2 a. p. eddfirjv ; [fut. pf. dedfj^-^aofiai ;
fut. m. Sa/ido-cro/xat,] a. m. idaixaadfxrju. See § 108, V. N. 1. (4. 5).
AapOdvo) {8apd-), sleep, 2 a. tdapdov, poet, edpadov ; (€-) p Kara-dedapdrj-
Kws ; KaT-eddpdrjv (Isiter). (5.)
AaTeo(i.ai : see 8a£o|iai.
[Ae'a|JLai, appear, only in impf, S^aro. Horn.]
, AiBia, fear : see stem {di-, Set-).
~v^ [ A€l8w, /gar ; see (5i-, Set-).]
■ AeiKVvjj.1 (SetK-), s/iow, 5e/^w, eSei^a, d^Seixa, S^Seiy/iiai, iMxO-rfv, dei-
^ Xdrjaofiai; dei^ofiai, idei^dfirjv. See § 123. (II.) [Ion. (5e7c-), -5^|w,
-^8e^a, -5e'6e7/Aai (Ep. deideyfiat), -idexdWi ide^dfiriv.]
A^[ico (5e/i-, dfie-), build, ^deifia, [d^d/xrifiai], idei/jLd/xrjv. Chiefly Ionic.
AepKO(Jiai, see, ibipx^W > 2 a. ^bpaKov, (edpdKTjv) Spanels ; 2 p. 8i8opKaf
§ 109, 3, 7 (a), and 4, N. 1.
Acpo), flay, depC), edeipa, d^dap/j-ai ; 2 a. iddprjv. § 109, 4.
[Aevofxai, Epic for S^ojuat.] See Zi<a, want.
A(xo]i.ai, receive, S^^ofiai, deSeyfxai [Horn, bix^^'^a.'- for deSixo-rai, § 106, 1,
N.], edexBV} ede^dfJLriv ; [2 a. m. chiefly Epic {ed^yix-qv) Ukto, imper.
Se'^o, inf. bix^ai, part, deyfievos (sometimes as pres.).]
c Ac'w, bind, Si^trw, ^57;<7a, 5^5e/ca (rarely SidrjKa), d^defiai, ed^d-rjv, bcd-qaop-ai. ;
fut. pf, ded-^a-oimi.
Ae'oD, want, need, («-) .5eT7(rw, Id^rjcra [Ep. ^577(ra,] 8e8^7)Ka, 8e8i7jfiai, I8e'f]0y)v.
Mid. Siofxai, ask, 8er}aofiaL. From Epic stem Seu- (c-) come \e8eir}<Ta
(once in Horn.), and 5ei5o/iat, Seui^ao/Aat]. Impersonal Sci, debet, there is
need, [one] ought, be-qaei, iS^rjae.
[At]pid«, act. rare (87}pL-), contend, fut. 8r)pi(xo} (late), aor. i8-^pTa-a (Theoc),
aor. p. 87)pivdr]v as middle (Hom.). Mid. 8r)pidofiaL and 8r]piofxai, as act.,
8r]pi<7oiJ.ai (Theoc), iSr)pT(Tdfj.7)v (Hom.).] § 108, vii. Note, (7).
[A{\<a, Epic pres. with future meaning, shall find."] See (8a-).
(Ai-, 8€i-), stem, fear ; [Epic pres. 86C8w, fut. Selaofmi,] aor. ?5et(ra, pf.
5e'oot/ca, § 109, 3, N. 2 [Ep. 8€i8oLKa, § 101, 1, N.]. From stem 5t-, [Ep.
impf. 8iov,'\ 2 pf. Se'Sia, 2 plpf. ^5e5/ei^ [Ep, Se^Sta, &c.]. See § 125, 4.
[i\Iid, Zlo^ai, frighte7i, pursue, 8iufjt,ai, 8ioifjLrii>, 8i€<Tdai, 8t6/j.evos\ also
hU^ai,fear, flee; impf. act, iv-Sieaav, chased away: poetic, chiefly Epic]
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 337
Aiairdo), arbitrate, w. double augment in perf. and plpf. and in compounds ;
diaiTT^cru, dirjTrja-a {dir-edirirritxa), dedL-^TrjKa, SediyTTjfiai, dirjr-^dTjv {i^-edij}-
T^dTjv); diatT-^ao/jiai, KaT-edi-rjTrja-dfxrjv. § 105, 1, N. 2.
AkdKovcd), minister, ididKdvovv ; didKOv^aca (aor. inf. diaKovrjaai), deStdKdprj-
fjLai, e5idK0V7idr]u. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment
5t77- or 5e5t77-. See § 105, 1, N. 2.
A£8T|(jLt, hind, chiefly poetic fonn for 5^w. (I.)
^AiSdo-Kft) (5i5ax-), for 5t5ax-<TKw (§ 108, vi. K 3), teach, 8i8d^(o, idlSa^a
\edi5dcrK7jcra], dedidaxci, 8€8Ldayfx.ai, idtddx^V^ y Sidd^ofjuii, idida^dfirjv. (6 )
/. Ai8pdo-K(i) (Spa-), only in comp., run away, -dpdaofjLac, -d^SpdKa; 2 a. -iSpdv
[Ion. -^dp-nv], -dpCj, -dpalrjv, -Spdvai, -dpds (§ 125, 3). (6.)
/ Al8o)fjLi (5o-), give, dibaca, ^Suku, 5^5w/ca, &c.; see inflection and synopsis in
§ 123. [Ep. dSfievai or Sofxev for dovvai, fut. dtddiau for Scicw.] (I.)
[A£^T]p.ak, seek, with 17 for e ; di^-qcTofiai. Ionic and poetic] (I.)
Aix|/da), ^Mrs^, dixj/i^croo, idixprjira. § 98, N. 2.
, AoK^cd (5o/c-), seem, think, 56^a>, ^5o^a, d^dojfiai, iddxdv^ (rare). Poetic
5oK^(T(a, edoKTjaa, dedoKtjKa, 8e56Kr)fMi, edoKTfidrjy. Impersonal, 8ok€i, it
seems, &c. (7.)
Aovireo) (Soutt-), sound heavily, i8oijTrif]<ra [Ep. ^Soi/Triyo-a ; 2 pf. 5^5ou7ra,
SeSouTTws, /aZZe?i.] Chiefly poetic. (7.)
Apdci>, do, 8pd<xu, Updaa, 8i8pdKa, 8i8pdfiai, (rarely 848pa(X/iai), {iSpdaOrjv)
8pa(Td€ls. § 109, 2.
Avvajiai, be able, augm. ^5w- and 'fj8vv- (§ 100, N. 2) ; pr. ind. 2 p. sing.
poetic Si/j'^ (Att. & Dor.) or 8ijvri (Ion.); 8vi'i^(roiJ.ai, 8€8ijv7jiJ,ai, i8vviidr\v
(rarely i8vvdcr6r]v), [Ep. i8vv7}o-d/xrjv.'\ (I.)
^ AvcD, enter or cawse to eri^er, and 8vv<«> {8v-), enter ; Sia-co {v), ^Svaa, 8i8vKa,
8€8vfiaL, i8^6r]v {v); 2 a. ^8vv, inflected § 123, see also § 125, 3; a. m.
iSvffd/iriv [Ep. i8v<r6/x7jv, inflected as 2 aor.]. (5.)
E.
^ *Ed» [Ep. eldb}], permit, idau, e(d<ra [Ep. iaaa], cfara, ffd/tot, elddrjv ;
idaofiai (as pass.). § 104.
'"Eyyv&ta, proffer, betroth, augm. ■^71;- or he^x}- {hn^l'^-)'
'E^cCpo) (^76/3-), rm'se, rouse, eyepw, ifyeipa, iy/jyep/xac, 'fyyipOtjv; 2 p. JTB^j"
^ yopa, am awake [Hom. iypriydpdacri (for -6pa(n), imper. iyp-fffopdt (for
-bpare), inf. iypifiyopdai or -6p0at] ; 2 a. m. ijypofiTjv [Ep. ^7p6;c477J'.] (4.)
•'E8«, eat, see ^(rOCo>.
"ESofjiai, (^5- for aeS- ; cf. sed-eo), sit, [fut. inf. i<f>-4<r<T€<r0ai (Hom. ) :] aor.
ia-a-dfjLrjv and feo-o--, eladfir}v. [Act. aor. elo-a and ^<r<ra (Horn.).] (4.) See
Ktfii and Ka6^^o|Jiai.
*E8^a) and GAco, t^t's^, imp. ff^eXoi/ ; (e-) ^Of\-fi<T(d, i^^A r?<ra. ■hN^vKo..
338 APPENDIX.
'EGiJo) (idtd-), accustom, idicru, ddXaa, eWiKa, eWta-fiai, dOlcdnv. § 104.
(4.)
"EGw, he accustomed, [only Ep. part. W(av;] 2 p. {<h6- for Fwd-) e'C(^a [Ion.
ew^al, as present , 2 plpf. cW^etv. § 104 ; § 109, 3, N. 1. (8.)
El8ov [lb-, Fid-), vid-i, savj, 2 aor., no present ; t'5w, iSoijxi, ide or i5^, i5erj/,
l5(J}y. Mid. (chiefly poet.), €'t8o|iat, seem, [Ep. eicrd/Ai;!' and ^eicr- ; ] 2 a.
fibbfnjv (in prose rare and only in comp.), saw, = eldou. OlSa (2 pf. as
pres. ), know, pip. ^Seti/, knew, f. daofxai ; see § 125, 4; § 127. (8.)
EiKa^w (ei'/caS-), ?naA:e ZzA:e, eUdau), etKaaa or -^Kaaa, (tKaar/xai or yKaa-fjuHf
elKda-drji', elKacdrjaofiai. (4.)
(E'lKco) not used in pres. (tV-), resemble, ajqiear, imp. eZ/coi', f. cf^w (rare), 2
p. ^OkKa [Ion. olKa\ (with eoLyfxev, [tCKTov,] d^dai, eiK^uai, et/cws, chiefly
. poetic); 2 pip. i<i);<et.v [with et/cTi;i']. Upoarji^ai, art like [and Ep, ^i/cro
or liVcTo], sometimes referred to ita-KO). impersonal ^olkc, zY seems, &c.
For eot/ca (k-), see § 109, 3 ; § 104. (2).
[ElXeo) (e\-, ei\-), ^?ress, roll, aor. lAcra, pf. p. eeXfiai, 2 aor. p. idXrjv or
dXT?!/ w. inf. ak-qixevai. Pres. pass. etXo^uai. Epic. Hdt. has (in comp.)
•etXrjca, -etXTj/mai, -eiXj'jdrjv. Pind. has plpf. eoXei.] The Attic has etX^o-
fxai, and efXXw or e'iWb}. See i'XXo). (4. 7.)
El|Ji{, be, and Et|jii, flro. See § 127, I. and II.
EIttov (er- for Feir-, ieir-), said, [Ep. eenrov,] 2 aor., no present ; clVw, et-
TTOijxi, diri [Ep. imp. fo-Trere], dir^iv, drruii/ ; 1 aor. ciTra (opt. diraifxi,
imper. ctroj/ or dirov, inf. eiTrat, pt. eiTras), [Hdt. dTr-€nrd/j.r}v.] Other
tenses are supplied by Horn, etpio {ep-), and a stem pe- : f. epicj, ipQ ; p.
etp-qKa, dprjixai. ; a. p. ipp-fjdrjv, rarely ipp^Orju |Ion. ei/je^T;!']; fut. pass. p?;^^.
o-o/xat ; fut. pf. dprj(rop.ai, § 101, 1, N. See cve'irw. (8.)
El'pYVvfii and cip^vvo), also dpyw (dpy-), shut in; e'ip^w, dp^a, dpyp.ai,
dpxOrjv Also ^pYo), c/3^w, e/)^a, [(e/)7/Aat) 3 pi. epxarai w. plpf. epxaro ;
epxBv"; Epic]. (II.)
El'pYw (eip7-), sJmt out, dp^w, dp^a, dpyfxai, dpxOrjv ; efpfo/iat. Also [?P7«,
-ip^a, -epy/xai, Ionic]; ep^o/xai (Soph.). [Epic also iepyia.]
|Eipop.a(, (Ion.), ask, eipifiaofiai. See ^pofiai.]
Eipw (ip-), say, Epic in jncsent. See etirov.
El'pw {ip-), sero, join, a. -dpa [Ion. -l/9o-a], x>. -e?/)/fa, elp^at [Ep. t'e/j^uot]. (4.)
['Eto-Kft), ZtX-eji, com])are; poetic, chiefly Epic: pres. also tV/cw.] See
e'lKw. (7.)
*EKKXT]<rid^«, mZZ an assembly {iKKXtjala) ; aiigm. i/KKXr}- and ^^exXi;-.
§ 105, 1, N. 2.
---\ 'EXavvw, for eXu-vv-u (§ 108, v. 4, N. 2), poet. eXdw (eXa-), c??-ru<?, warcA, f.
' ' (eXdcroj) eXw [Epic i\d(T(TU and Aow ;] ^Xacra, e'XT/Xa/ca, iXriXa/xai [Ion. and
late -aa-p-ai, Horn, jjlup. eX^X^Saro], i}Xddr)u [-riXd<Tdijv'\ lou.]; ^Xacrd./xi?*'.
(5.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 339
ty •EX^YX«» confute^ iXiy^u, -ffXey^a, iXifiXey/mi (§ 97, 4), 'n\4rxfir)v, iXe^xH'
cofxai.
*EXt<ro-w and €i\l(r<r<i) (eXt/c-), roll, e\l^<a, e'iXi^a, e'iXiyfxai, eiXixBrjv ', [Epic
eXi^ofxai, iXi^diJ.r}v] (4.)
"EXkw (late eXxi/w), pull, eX^w (rarely eXKvffu), eiXKvaa, eiX^u/ca, etXKVcrfiac,
ciXKvadTjv. § 104.
["EXiTft), cause to hope, 2 p. eoXwa, hope; 2 plpf. euXireLv. § 109, 3. Mid,
eXiro/xaL, hojje. Epic]
'EjJie'a), vomit, fut. c/^iw (rare), ifiov/xai ; aor. ij/xeaa. § 109, 1, N. 2.
*Efi.iroXd(i>, traffic, ifxiroX-rjau, &c. regular. Augm. tj/jlit- or iue/jLiT'. § 105,
1, N. 3.
'Evaipo) (emp-), kill, [Ep. a. m. ivrjpdfiijp,] 2 a. ijvapov. Poetic. (4.)
'Evc'iro) (ei/ and stem creTr-) or Ivveirft), say, ie^Z, (Ep. f. ivi-airrjiTU) and eVt'i/'w;]
2 a. €i/i'<nrov, w. imper. tviaire [Ep. cwcTre?], inf. iyiaireTv [Ep. -e'/iev.]
Poetic. See etTroi/. (8.)
|*Evirivo0€, defect. 2 pf,, si7, Zie on, (also past). Epic] See dviqvode.
'EvtiTTw (^J'tTT-), c7iic?e, [Ep. also ivi<7<T(a, 2 a. hivTirov and •^j'^TraTroi', § 100,
N. 4.1 (3.)
"Evvv|ii (e- for feo--), ves-tio, clothe, pres. act. only in comp. ff. eVo-w, a.
cVcra, p. cV/xaij or ei/xai ; [eacrdfJiTjv or ectra-.] In comp. -eVw, -ecra,
•iadfXTjv. Chiefly Epic : d/x^i-ivuv/xi is the common form in prose. (II.)
*EvoxX^«, harass, w. double augment ; ijviixXovv, x ivoxX-q<ro), -qvilixX-qaa,
i)v6xXriixai. § 105, 1, N. 3.
*EopTd^« (fopraS-], Ion. bprd^w, keep festival ; impf. (dpra^ov. § 104,
Notel. (4.)
'Eiravpco) and liravpCa-KO) (avp-), both rare, en/o?/, [f. iiravp-^a-o/xai,] a.
iirrjvpdfxrjv, 2 a. iirTjvpdfjt.Tjv, [Dor. and Ep. iiravpov ] Chiefly poetic.
(6. 7.)
'ETrio-Tajxai, understand, imp. -^irKTrdfiriv, f. iinaT-qaofmi, a. ■f]in(TT'qdr]v ;
pres. ind. 2 p. poetic iiriarg. [Ion. ^Trt'o-Tcat.] (Not to be confounded
with forms of icpiffTrj/xi.) (I. )
"Eirw (o-fTT-), &e «/ter or &26S7/ t«i7^, imp. etirov, f. -ei^w, 2 a. -ecirov (for
i-a-€T-ov), [a. p. irepi-^cpOrjv Hdt.,] — all chiefly in comp. Mid. 'iiroiiai
[and ^cTTTOAiai], follow, imp. eivo/XTju and €Tr6/j.7]v ; '4\l/ofiat ; 2 a. kairoixtiv
and -ia-irofirjv, a-iru/xat., &c., w. imp. [o-7reto (for (TTreo),] o-ttoO.
"Epaiiai, ?o?)e, (dep.) j^oetic for epdw ; -rjpdadrjv, ipaadriaofiai, [•^paadpiriP
Epic] (I.)
K 'EpYd^optai, w;or^, fZo, augm. elp- (§ 104), i pyd(ro/Jiai, eipyacr/xai, elpyda-dtjUf
tipyaadfXTjv, epyacrdrjcro/iai.
"EpSo) and ?p8« (f6/)7-), worA:, c?o, ep^w, Ip^a, [Ion. 2 p. eopya, 2 plpf.
^wp7eii']. Ionic and poetic. See p^t«.. (8.)
4
/
340 APPENDIX.
'Ep€C8«», prop, epela-ci) (later), ijpeLa-a, \-ijpetKa, epi^peia-fiat and. rjprjp- with.
eprjpedaTai and -aro,] rjpeiadrjv ; ipeiaofULi, "^peiad/xrjv.
'EpcCKW {eptK-), tear, burst, ifpei^a, epripiyp-ai, 2 a. ijptKov. Poetic. (2.)
'Epelirw {epiTT-), throw down, ipeixj/ca, ijpeixl/a, [epTfipiira, have fallen, epi^piiX'
Plul], 'qpe'Kpdrjv ; [2 a. tjplttov, rjpiTrrjv ', a. m. •rjpei^pa/ji.rjv.] (2.)
'Epe'o-o-w {eper-), strike, row, [Ep. aor. -npeca.] § 108, iv. 1, Note. (4.)
[*Ept8a£v«, contend, for ipi^o) ; aor. m. inf. epib-qffaadai. Epic]
*Epi^w (eptS-), contend, TJpia-a, [-qpLcrdp.riv Epic] (4.)
"Epo|j.ai (rare or ?) [Ion. etpop-at, Ep. Iptw or cpc'ojiai], for epurdu, ask,
fut. kp-qaoiiai [Ion. eip7}(xoixai\, 2 a. T^pd/xrjv. See c'lponai.
"Epirw, creep, imp. elpirov ; fut. ep^po). Poetic. § 104, N. 2.
"Eppw, go to destruction, (i-) epp-qaw, -^pprjaa, -rjpprjKa.
'Epvyydvo) {ipvy-), eruct, 2 a rjpvyov. (5.) [Ion. tpeijyofjLai, kpe^^op-ai. (2.)]
'EptiKw, A-oM hack, [Ep. f. epi^lw,] ^/3u^a, [Ep. 2 a. •^pi^/caKOj'. ]
[*EpiJw and elpvw, dravj, fut. 6/)i;w, aor. etpvaa and epvaa, pf. p. etpvfxai and
eipvafxai. Mid. cptio|JLai and cipvojiai, toArg under one's protection, epvao-
fiai and e^/)-, ipvadfxr]p and €lpv<xdp.riv ; with Horn, forms of pres. and impf.
elpijarai (u), ^piJo-o, epuro and etpuTo, etpvvTO, epvadat and dpvadai, which
are sometimes called perf. and plpf. Ejiic] See pvofjiat.
"Epxoiitti (eXiid; eXeu^-), g^o, come, f eXeiaofiai (Ion. and poet.), 2 jkJX^-
Xu^a [Ep. eXi^Xovda and e^X^Xou^a], 2 a. '^Xdov (poet. '^Xvdov). In Attic
prose, cZyui is used for eXeijaofiai (§ 200, Note 3). (8.)
*Eo-9i(«), also ^crOo) and 28a) ((pay-), edo, ca^, fut. edo/xai, p. iSriSoKa, kSi^Se-
c/xai [Eji. eSijSo^at], rjh^adyjv ; 2 a. etpayov ; [Epic pres. inf. eSfxemi. ; 2
perf. part. e5775ws,] (8.)
'EcTTido), /cas^, augment elo-rt- (§ 104).
Ei58«, sZcg/?, impf. eddov or TyOSoi/ (§ 103, N.) ; (c-) euSVw, [-eijSrjaa]. Com-
monly in Ka6-ev8a>. § 109, 8.
Ev6p7€T€«, cZo good, evepyeri^aci}, &c. regular : sometimes augmented evrjpy.
(§105,2).
EvpCo-KCi) (evp-), find, (c-) evp-f](T(x}, eijp-rjKa, eijprjfJLai, evpidr}v, evpedTjao/xai ;
2 a. e^pou, €vp6p.T]v. Sometimes augmented rjvp- (§ 103, Note). § 109,
1, N. 2 (J.) (6.)
Ev(j>paCv(o (6i)</)pa;/-) ) c^<^^^, f- ({icppavd ; a. eijc^pdva (or rjijcpp-), [Ion. also
€vcppT]va ;] a. p. eixppdvd-rjv (or -rjvcpp-), f. p. evcppavdi^aofxai ; f. m. evcppa-
vovfiai. § 103, Note. (4.)
"Ex" (cfxO^ ^«v«, inip- f?X<"' ; ^'?'«' or (TX'^cu}, eaxwo-, ^(^XVf^^h efrx^Ov
(chiefly Ion.); 2 a. ecrxov (for i-aex-ov), (Txw, ct^oit;*' (-(r%or/ii)> <''Xf's>
o-xci'', o'X'^'' > poet, eax^^ov, &c. ; [Horn. pf. part. avu-oxoKdiiS, plpf. f^r-
tixaro, t^gre s^?<<.] Mid. ^X^Hiai, cZi^igf <o, c^Ojuat and o-xv(^o/xai, tax^'
fiW (8.)
"Eij/a), cook, (c-) e\}/ri(T(j} and i'^-^ffofiai, ^\pTj(ra, [yyprjuai, rjpr.drfy.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 341
Z.
uZaut, live, w. f^s, fi?, &c. (§ 98, N. 2); impf. e^uv and etw ; f^<rw, ^Jo-o-
/xat, €^r]<Ta, e^r]Ka. Ion. fc6a>.
ZeuYWjii (fu7- cf. jug-um), yoke, i^u^o;, c^eu^a, e^evyfiai, i^eijx^rjv ; 2. a.
p. e^u^v. (2. II. )
Zc'ci), boil, poet, ^etw, f^o-w ; efeaa, [-efe(r/iat Ion.].
Zwyvvjit (i"w-), gird, ei^uaa, l^ojafMi, e^ua-d/xr]!/. (11.)
^ 'H8o|iai, be pleased, Tjdo/J.'qv; vtrOriv, i]<TdT^<roimi, [slot. m. •i7craro Epic]. The
act. i\^a, w. impf. ijdoy, aor. ^(ra, occurs rarely.
'Hjtai, 52;'^ ; see § 1 27.
*H}it, say, chiefly in imperf. ^v 5' e7(i, said I, and ^ 5* 6's, said he (§ 151,
Kote 3). [Epic ^ (alone), he said.'] "B/jli, T say, colloquial. See
'HjiiJw, hmv, sink, aor. fiixvaa, [pf. vTr-e/Mv-^-fivKe (for -e/t-Tz/xv/fe, § 102) Horn.].
Poetic, chiefly Epic.
0.
0d\Xa) {6a\-), bloom, [2 perf. ridrjXa (as present), plpf. re^iJXei;'.] (4.)
[©do\iai, gaze at, admire, Doric for dedofMat, Ion. drj^o/xai ; ddaop-ai^ eddffd-
fiTjV (Horn. opt. ^Tjo-atar').]
[0do|JLai, 7nilk, inf. drjadai, aor. idTjadfjLrju. Epic]
(0a'7r- or Ta<|), for ^a^-), astonish, stem with [2 perf. Tidrjira, am aston-
ished, Epic plpf. iredriTrea', 2 a. iracpov, also intransitive.] § 17, 2, Note.
00,^X0) {Ta<p- for ^a0-), ftwr?/, ^di/^oj, Wa\pa, Te6a/x/xaL, [Ion. ed6.(p9r]v,
rare ;] 2 a. p. iTd(pr]v ; 2 fut. ra^vjo-o/iat ; fut. pf. reddyj/oixat. § 1 7, 2,
Note. (3.)
0eCva) (^ej'-), smite, devu, idei,va ; 2 a. ^deuov. (4.)
0€\(i), zyw^, (€-) deXifia-u, ediXtja-a (not in indie.) ; see I6(X&>.
0€po|JLai, warm one's self, [fut. depaojxat., 2 a. p. {idiprjv) subj. ^epew
Chiefly Epic]
0e'(D (^u-), rw7t, fut. deicofxai. § 108, II. 2. (2.)
0177^© (017-), <02tc/i-, 6L^o/xai or redi^o/xai (?), 2 a. idXyov. (5.)
[0X«x«, bruise, 6\ct(T(a, idXaaa, ridXaa-fmi, idXdffdriv. Ionic and poetic]
0XiPw (5\t^-), squeeze, dXixJ/u, ieXi\J/a, [W^Xt^a late,] ridXififiai, idXi4>6r)tf ;
ieXlfirjv ; [fut. m. dXixpofiat. Horn.]. (2.)
4
342 APPENDIX.
.©vqcrKO) {dap-, Ova-), die, 6avovfxai, ridvriKa ; fut. pf. redvij^u}, § 110, iv. (c),
N. 2, or redv-q^oixai', 2 a. ^davov \ 2 p. [Tedvaa) § 125, 4, part, redveus
[Horn. T€du7]d)-j\. In Attic prose always airo-davodixai and dir-idapov. (6.)
0pdo-a-a) and dparru {rpax-, Opax-), disturb, aor. idpa^a, idpdxOrjp (rare);
[p. TeTprixa, be disturbed, plpf. TerprixeiP, Horn,] See rapda-croj. (4.)
Gpavci), bruise, dpaiao), Wpavaa, r^dpavafxai and redpav/xai, idpava-drjp.
§ 109, 2. Chiefly poetic.
©pviTTO) {rpvcp- for dpv<p-), crush, ^dpvxpa, TiOpv/xfiai, i6pi^<pdr}p [Ep. 2 a. p.
-erpixprjp], dpvxpoimi. § 17, 2, Note. (3.)
©pwo-Kco {dop-, dpQ-), leap, fut. dopov/xai, 2 a. ^dopop. Chiefly poetic. (6.)
0v« (u), sacrifice, imp. ^^uo;/ ; ^ytrw (v), edvaa, riOvKa, redv/xai, ir^driv
(u), dvaofxai,, idvadfjiTjP. § 17, 2, Note.
©v(a or Gvvo) (u), rage, rush. Poetic: classic only in present and imperfect.
'IdXXw (i'aX-), send, fut. -taXw, [Ep. aor. trjXa.] Poetic. (4.)
[*Idx«) shout, taxop ; 2 jjf. {taxo-} dfi^iaxvLa. Poetic, chiefly Epic]
*I8pi;a), place, idpvau, 'ibpvaa, 'idpvKa, t^pvixai, idptjdrjp [or i5p{>p6r]p, chiefly
Epic]; idpiJa-ofxai, Idpvadixrjp.
"Ttfii (15-), seat or sit, mid. t^ojiai, sit; used chiefly in Kad-i^u), which see.
See also 'qp.at. (4.)
"iTifxi (e-), send; see § 127. (I.)
^ 'lKV€'o|j.ai (k-), poet, i'/cw, comg, i^ofiai, tyfiai ; 2 a. Udfirip. In prose usu-
ally d^-cKPeofiaL. From t/ca;, [Ep. imp. Ikoj', 2 a. i^op, § 119, 8. J (5.)
'IXdo-KO(j.ai [Ep. iXdofiai] (tXa-), propitiate, IXdaopiai, iXdadrjp, IXaad-
fj-VP. (6.)
["IXtjjjli, be propitious, pres. only imper. 'CX-qdi. or I'Xa^t ; pf. subj. and opt.
IX-qKO), iXriKoi/jLL (Hom. ). Poetic, chiefly Epic] [I.]
"IXXft) and I'XXofxai, roll, for etXXw. See elXeo).
*Indo-<r« (§ 108, iv. 1, N. ), lash, aor. t^aao^a. (4.)
IirTd|xai (Trra-), /?/, impf. iTrrdfi-qp ; 2 a. m. iirTdfirjp. Active 2 a. ^tttjv
w. pt. Trrds. See ir^Toiiai, (I.)
["lo-djii, Doric for ol8a, kiioio.]
["lo-Kw : for synopsis and inflection see i'taKCi}.]
"I(rTT]|jit {ara-), set, place: see, for synopsis and inflection, § 123. (I.)
*I<rxvatva) (tVxJ'di'-), make lean or dry, fut. i^xvoivCo, aor. icx^dpa [l^(rxJ'?;wi
Ion.], a. p. laxpdpdrjp ; fut. m. laxpo-povixau (4.)
"lo-xio (for (Ti-o-exw, tcxw), Mt;e, hold, redupl. for ^x^ (j^^X'^)- See ^x***
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 343
K.
KaSaCpu (^Ka6ap-), purify ^ Kadapw, iKddrjpa and iKdddpa, KCKidapnai,
€Ka6dp67]v ; Kadapov/xai, eKadrjpdiXTjv, (4.)
KaO-e'^onai (eS-), sit cloicn, imp. eKade^ofjLTjp.^ f. Kadedov/xau See 2^o|itti.
KaOevSb), sleep, imp. iKddevbov and KadrjOSov [Epic /ca^eCSoj'j, § 103, Note;
fut. (€-) Ka0€v5^au) (§ 109, 8). See ciiSw.
Kad^^ci), sc<, 5iY, f. KadiQ (for Kadiaoj), Ka6i^^(xo/Mai ; a. iKddXaa or Kadlaa,
iKadLadfjLTjv. See I'Jw. . For Kddrj/xai, see fj^iai.
KaLvv|iai for KaS-vv/xai (^aS-), ^iCccZ, p. K^Kaa-pLai [Dor. iceKa5-/x^»'osJ. (H.)
Kaivo) (/cai'-"), ^2^^, f« Kovw, 2 a. tKavov, 2 p. Kekova. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
Kaio) (/cau-), or Kaw, burn; kaijcru ; eaavcra, poet, e/cea [Epic ?/c97a] ; -/c^-
KavKa, KiKavfJuit, iKavO-qv, Kavdrjaofiai, [2 a. iKdrfv ;j fut. mid. Kaiaofiai
(rare) . (4.)
;. KoXeo) (KttXe-, icXe-) , call, f. /caXw (rarely Ka\i<T<ji) ; iKdXeaa, k^kXtiku, k^-
KXrjixai (opt. K€K\yo, K€K\r]/x€6a), eKk-ljdrjv, KXrjdTjaoiJiaL ; fut. m. KaXovfxai,
a. iKaXead/xrjv; fut. pf. K€KX-i](Tonai. § 109, 1, N. 2 ; § 118, 1, N.
KaXuTTTC* (/caXiJ^-), corcr, KaX6\f/u), iKdXv^a, KeKdXvixfxai, iKaXv^drjv, KaXv-
<pd7)(yofjLaL ; aor. m. iKaXv\pdiJ.r]v. In prose chiefly in compounds. (3.)
Kd(JLV(«) (/fttju-), ?aior, Ka/xoO/xai, KiK/xrjKa [Ep. part, kck/xtius] ; 2 a. ^mfioVf
[Ep. e/caju6^(.7?t'. ] (5.)
Kdji-irro) (/ca^TT-), toicZ, Kd/xxj/o}, €Kaix\pa, KiKa/a/xai (§ 16, 3, N.; § 97, N. 3),
eiidfjicpdriv. (3.)
Karrj^op^ft), accuse, regular except in omission of the augment, /carTjyi-
pouj/, &c. See § 105, 1, N. 2.
[(KacJ)-), jsan^, stem with Hom. perf. part. KeKa<pt)(li$ ; cf. redv-qus.^
[Ke8dvvv|ii, Ep. for CKe5dvvvp.L, scatter, CKidaaaa, eKeddffdTjv.] (II.)
Keifiai, lie, Keiaofxat] see § 127-
KcipcD (/fep-)> shear, f. /ce/jtS, a. t/cei/Da [poet. e/cep<ra], KiKapfiai, [{iKipdr/v)
KcpOeis ; 2 a. p. iKdprjv ;] f. m. Kepovfiai, a> m. eKeipdfnjv [w. poet. part.
/ce/jcrd/zfj'os.] (4.)
[KcKaSov, deprived of, caused to leave, KCKaobfi-qv, retired, KeKaS-fjau, shall de-
prive, reduplicated Hom. forms of xdiw.] § 100, N. 3. See xo-t"-
V KeXevb), command, KcXeiJo-w, iKeXcvcra, KeK^XevKa, KCK^Xevafmi, iKeXevadrjv.
§ 109, 2. Mid. chiefly in compounds,
K^XXo) (/fcX-), land, KiXaw, CKcXaa. Poetic. See 6kA.Xo>. (4.)
KeXopiai, order, [Ep. (e-) KfXri(TO(.taL, iKeX-qadfx-rjv ; 2 a. m. k€kX6htjv or
iKexXofirju (§ 100, N. 3).] See § 110, v. N. 2. Chiefly Epic.
KcvTw, prick, Kevrria-b}, iK^vTrjaa, [KeK^t^TTjfjLai Ion., iKevrrjOrjv later, ci/y-
KevT7]drj(T0fiac Hdt.j. [Hom. aor. inf. K^vaai, from stem kcpt-. (7.)]
Kcpdwv|u (xe/aa-, /cpa-), miar, iKipdcra [Ion. CKprjo-a], KiKpa/mi [Ion. -i;A'aO»
•344 APPENDIX.
iKpidrjv f Ion. --/idrjv] and iKepdadrjv ; f. pass. Kpadi^cro/xai ; a. m. iKepaa-A-
fivv. (II.)
KepSaCvo) {KepSav-), gain, f. KepdavQ [Ion. Kepdav^o) and icepS'^o-Ojuai], ^/c^p-
Sd/za [Ion. -T/m or rjaa], -KeKepdTjKa (/cepSa-, § 109, 6). (4.)
KcvSw (/ci;^-)> ^*^^> /cei^o-w, [l/ceuaa ;] 2 p. KiKevda (as pres.) ; [Ep. 2 a.
/ClJ^OJ', Subj. K€K^6u}.] (2.)
KrfSu (/fa5-)> "^^^j (*") [f'^S^crw, -iKi^drjaa ; 2 p. /c^KiySa]. Mid. Ki^dofxaif
sorrow, iKrjSecrdfJLriv, [Ep. fut. pf. /ce/ca5?70-o;aac.] (2.)
KT)pv(rcr(i) {KTjpvK-), proclaim, Krjpij^io, iKifjpv^a, KeK-^pvxO', KeK'^pvyp.ai, iKT]-
p^xQWi KTjpvxdvo'Ofw.i ; K-qpi^opjOLL, eKr)pv^dp,7]v. (4.)
[K£8vii|Jii, spread, Ion. and poetic for aKe8dvvvp.L.] (I.)
[K^vvjiat; jnore, pres. and imp. ; as mid. of kivcw. Epic] (XL)
K£pvT])j,i and Kipvdw: see K€pdvvv|xi,.
Ki\avoi (klx-), find, (€-) «:tx^o-o/iat, [Ep. ^Kt-xwo-p-riv] ; 2 a. iKixov [and ^/c£-
X?;!' like ea-rrju]. Poetic. (5.)
KCxpil|Ji.«. (xpa-)* ^«^cZ, [x/>^o-« Hdt.], ex/)i7<ra, KixPVfMt ; ixfiWo-M^- (I-)
K\d5« (KXayy-, Kkay-), clang, KXdy^co, €K\ay^a ; 2 p. K^KXayya [Ep. ac^-
KXrjya, part. KCKXifiyovres ;] 2 a. eKkayov ; fut. pf. K€K\dy^op.ai. (4.)
K\aCci> and K\do> (/cXav-), tweep, K\ai(Top.ai (rarely KXavaovpui, sometimes
KXanr/a-bj or KXd-rja-b)), CKXavcra and iKXav<jdp,riv, K^KXavp-ai; fut. pf. (im-
pers.) KCKXaTLKTCTai, (4.)
K\^, &rga^, cKXaa-a, K^KXacrpui, iKXdffdrjv ; [2 a. pt. /cXds.] § 109, 2.
KXelo), sAw^, kXeiaco, €KXei(Ta, ^^/cXei/iat or KiKXeia-p-ai, iKXeiad-qv, KXeLad-qco-
jxai.', fut. pf. KeKX€l(Top,at ; a. m. iKXeiadp^rjv. [Ion. pres. KXtjCo), ^xXiyta-a,
i KCKXi^TpLac, iKXrjiadrjv or e^^Xi^f^??*'.] Older Attic KXijo), KXrjau, CKXyaa,
'K^KXriKa, KiKXrjp.ai, -iKXya6r]j/.
KX^irro) (icXeTT-), s^eaZ, /cXei/'W (rarely KX4\l/oixat) , eKXexpa, KiKXo<j>a, k^-
KXep,fiai, (jKX4(pdr]v) KXetpdeb; 2 a. p. iKXdirtjv. § 109, 3, N. 2. (3.)
KXtvd) (/cXrj/-). &s»i^, incline, kXivQ, e/cXim, [^^icXr/ca, later,] /c^/cX^iai, c/cX/-
^T^i/ [Ep. iKXlvBrjv], KXXdrj(Top.ai ; 2 a. p. iKXivrjv, f. KXXvfjffop.aL ; fut. m. «:Xi-
voO/ittt, a. €KXi.vdp.r)v. § 109, 6. (4.)
KXvw, ^ear, imp. IkXuoj' (as aor.) ; 2 a. imper. /cXO^t, KXvre [Ep. KinXvOi,
KiKXvTe]. Poetic.
KvaC(i>, scrape (in compos.), -Kval<T<a, -eKvaiaa, -K^KvaiKa, -K^KvaL(xp,a(., -eKvai-
adrjv, -Kvaiadriaopai. Also Kvdo), with ae, ar) contracted to 17, and aet,
a-Qtori (§98, N. 2).
KoTTTw (kott-), cw^, K6\p(i), eKOxpa, -KiKO(pa [2 p. KeKoirds Epic], K^KopLfiaL ;
2 aor. p. €k6t7jv, 2 fut. p. Korr-^aoput ; fut. pf. -/ce/c6i/'o/Aai ; aor. m. e/co-
\f/dpLr]v. (3.)
Kop^vvv|J,i (/co/)6-), satiate, [f. Kopiao) Hdt., aco/j^oj Horn.,] eKdpecra, kckS-
peap,ai [Ion. -'>;/m«], eKopiadriv ', [Ep. 2 p. pt. KCKopi^dis, a. m. hopead-
fiV"'] (H.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 345
Kopvo-o-w (Kopvd-), arm, [aor. Kbpvffo-e and Kopvaffdfjievos (Horn.), pf. p. /ce-
\ Kopvdixivoi.] Poetic, chiefly Epic. (4.)
[KoTcu, he angry, aor. kKbreca, eKOTeadfirju, 2 pf. pt. Ke/corijcis, angry,
Epic]
Kpd^cD (/c/oay-), cry out, fut. pf. KeKpd^o/Mi (rare), 2 pf. KiKpdya (imper. k^-
Kpaxdi'), 2 a. -iKpayov. (4.)
KpaCvw (ff/Mxi'-), accomplish, Kpavd, ^Kpdva [Ion. ^/cpi/j/a], iKpdp6r]v, Kpavd-fi-
cofxai ; f. m. Kpapoufiai ; p. p. 3 sing. K^KpavTai (cf. Tre^airat, § 97,
Note 3, d). Ionic and poetic. [Epic KpaiaCvw, aor. iKprjriva, pf. and pip.
KeKpdavrai and KeKpdavro ; iKpddvdrjv (Theoc.).] (4.)
Kp^jiajxai, ^^Tig', (intrans.), Kpe/xT^aofxai. (I.)
Kp6}j.dvvv(JLL {Kpefia-), hang, (trans.), KpefiQ (for Kpejxdau), iKpi/xaaa, iKpe/xd-
(xOtjv ; le Kp€fiaad/X7}v.^ (H*)
Kpi]nvT]|JLi, suspend, mid. Kpi^fivafxai ; only in pres. and impf. Poetic. (I. )
Kp{^« (KpXy-), creak, squeak, [2 a. {^KpiKOp) 3 sing. KpUe-^ 2 p. {K^KpTya)
KeKpiybres, squeaking. (4.)
V Kptvw (^KpTv-), judge, f. /fptvcD, ^KpTva, K^KpiKa, KiKpt/xai, iKptdrjv [Ep. ^/cptV-
^771/], KpW'qaofiai, ; fut. m. Kpcuovfiai, a. m. [Ep. ^/c/atJ'd/ATyj'.] § 109, 6.
(4.)
Kpovo), Jea^, Kpoicw, ^KpQvaa, K^KpovKa, -niKpovfiai and -K^Kpovafxat, iKpoi-
adrjv ; -Kpoicrofmt, iKpovad/xrjv.
KpiJirTw, {Kpv^-, Kpv<p-), conceal, Kp{i\}/u}, &c. regular; 2 a. p. iKp}j<pr]v (rare),
2 f. Kpv<f>'riaofxai or Kpv^riao/Mai. (3.)
I KTdop.ai, acquire, KT-^ao/mi, iKTrja-d/xrjv, K^KTTjfiai. or ^KTijfjLai, possess (subj.
K€KTu}fiat, opt. KeKTTjfjiTjv OT KeKTi^Tjv), iKT-^drjv (as pass.) ; KCKTi^cofiai
(rarely e/cr-), shall possess. § 118, 1, Note.
( KtcCvo) (fcrev-), ^t'ZZ, f. /crevw [Ion. Kreviw, Ep. also /crai'^aj], a. ^Kreiva,
(p. iKTayKa, rare), 2 p. ^/ croyg ; [Ep. ^/crd^T^i' ;] 2 a. iKToivov (l/crai' poet.
§ 125, 3) ; 2 a. m. poet. iKTdjxrjv (as pass.) ; [Ep. fut. m. -/crai'eojuat.]
§ 109, 3, 4 (w. N. 1), 6. In Attic prose diroKTdv<a is generally used. (4.)
KtC^w (/cTtS-), found, Krtffu, inrXaa, ^KTiafiai, iKTia-drjv ; [aor. m. iicna-d'
/xvv (rare)]. (4.)
KrCvvvfit and ktivvvo), in compos,, only pres. and impf. See ktcCvw. (II.)
KTuircw (KTyTT-), sound, cause to sound, iKTdirrjaa, [2 a. ^ktvttov.I (7.)
KvXtci), more frequently icvXivSo) or kvXivS^ci), roll, iK^Xia-a, KeK^Xiafiai,
iKvXiadrjv, -KvXtad-^^a-oixai.
Kvviot (kv-), kiss, iicvaa. (5.) Upotr-Kwiia is generally regular.
KvTTTW (kv<P-), stoop, KTjxJ/b} and Kixpo/xai, aor. cKvxpa, -pt KiKv<pa. (3.)
Kvpo), wee^, chance, KJ^pau, tKvpaa. Kvpcw is regular.
346 APPENDIX.
AaTxdvw (Xax-), obtain by lot, Xifj^ofiai [Ion. \d^o/mi], ef\7;xa, [Ion. and
poet. XiXoyxa,] (^etXriyfxai) elKij-yixivos, iXi^x^V '> 2 a. eXaxop [Ep.
XeX-l (5.)
Sj Aa)i.pdva) (\a^-), take, X-fiypajJucii, €tXrj<pa, etXrjfifxai (poet. X^Xrjfx/jui) , fXiJ-
' ^^T^j/, X7]<p6i^(T0fmt ; 2 a. iXa^ov, iXa^ofxriv [Ep. inf. Xe\a^^<r^ai. ] [Ion.
Xdfx\}/oimL, XeXd^rjKa, X^Xafifiai, eXd/JLcpdrjv ; Dor. fut. Xd^oO/iat.] (5.)
Ad(J.irci), s7iz?w, Xd/j-xJ/co, eXafixpa, 2 pf. X^Xafiira ; fut. m. -Xdfi\l/ofiai Hdt.].
>J AavOdvw (\a^-),poet. X^^w, ?ie Aic?, escape <^e oioticc of (some one), X'?7(7w,
y [eXT^cra], 2 p. XAt^^o [Dor. Xe'Xct^a,] 2 a. IXa^oj' [Ep. X^Xadov.] Mid.
forget, X-qaofiai, XiX-qafiaL [Horn. -aafJiaC], fut. pf. XeXriao/xai, 2 a. iXadd-
/jLrjp [Ep. XeXadofXTjv.] (5.)
Ado-Kw for XaK-a-KU} (\a/c-), speak, (e-) XaK^aofiaL, eXdK-rjaa, 2 p. XAd/ca
[Ep. XiXrjKa w. fem. part. XeXaKv^a :] 2 a. eXa/cov [\eXa/t6/t77i']. Poetic
§ 108, vi. N. 3. (6.)
[Add), XcD, t^is/i, X^s, X^, &c. ; Infin. Xrjv. § 98, K. 2. Doric]
ly Aiyo), say, X^fw, eXe^a, XiXeyfmi {di-eiXeyfiat), iXix^rjv ; fut. Xex^Tjcro/xat,
X^^ofiai, XeX^^o/xat, all passive. For pf. act. cfpij/ca is used (see dtrov).
*^i A^Yw, gatlier, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), Xi^w, iXe^a, eiXoxa,
! etXeyfmi or X^Xey/nai, iX^x^V^ (rare) ; 2 a. p. i Xiyrj v, f. Xeyr]crofxai. [2 a.
m. eX^y/jLTjv (X^kto, imper. X^^o, inf. X^x^ai, pt. X^7^ej'os)]. [The Horn.
forms X^^o/mai, iXe^dfitjp, eXe^a, and eXiyfi-qv, in the sense _pw< io res^, res^,
are generally referred to stem Xcx-, whence X^xos, &c.]
AdiTbi (XtTT-), Zca-ye, Xc/i^w, XiXeififiat, kXe'Kpdrjv; 2 p. X£Xoi7ra ; 2 a. eXirrov,
eXiTTOfJivv. See § 95 and § 96. (2.)
[AcX£t]^ai, part. XeXcTjfji^vos, eager (llom.y]
Aiva, stone, generally Kara-Xeiju) ; -Xei/o-w, -eXevcra, eXeiffdrjVf -Xevad^aofxau
§ 109, 2.
AijGo), poetic : see XavOdvu.
Aritjft) (XtjXS-) , jylunder, act. rare, only impf. eXiJl'^oi'. Mid. XTi't^op-ai (as .
act.), [fut. XTjtaofiat, aor. kXyfCadfiriv, Ion.]. Eurip. has tXrjad/Jiijv, and
pf. p. X4Xri(TiJ.ai. (4.)
At{r<ro|Aat or (rare) XCronai (Xrr-), supplicate, [eXiadfirjv, 2 a. iXiTofirjv].
[Ao€a>, Epic for Xoi5w ; Xoeaao/xai, iXUaca, eXoecadfxrjv.]
Aovb) or X<Jft) wash, regular. In Attic writers and Herod, the pres. and
iniperf. generally have contracted forms of Xow, as tXov, eXov/xev, XoiJ-
fxevos,
Avw, loose, see § 95 and § 96 ; [Epic 2 a. m. iXijfjLrjv (as pass.), Xiro and
\vTo ; pf. opt. XiXvTo or XeXOvTO, § 118, 1, Note.]
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. '
C^^Jr
M.
MaCvw (itwi»'-)> fnadden, a, e/iijm, 2 pf. iiifiriva, am mad, 2"
Mid. (AaivojJLai, J<? ??iac?, [/Aai'oO/-tai, eiJ.i]vd/xT}v.] (4.)
Maio)j.ai (/ia-) , sceA;, fidaofiai, efMiadfirjv. Chiefly Epic. See § 108, iv. 3,
Note, and /xdofiai. (4.)
^ MavGdvo) {fJiSd-), learn, (€-) fMadriffofiai, fxe/xddrjKa ; 2 a. efxaOov. (5.)
Mdo|Jiai, only in contract form [fxufmi (imper. /juheo or /xw<ro, inf. fiQadai,]
. pt. fMu/x€vos), desire eagerly; 2 p. {fi^/xaa) § 125, 4 [part. fxefiaJjs {-utos
or -6tos).] a second p. fiifiova (/uej/-) supplies the singular of (/ie>aa).
Mapvajiai, /grAi (subj. fidpvuiJLai, imp. fxdpvao); a. €fxapvdadT]v. Poetic.
(I.)
Mapirro) {fxapT-), seize, iidpypb), efiapxpa [2 pf. fi^fiapira Epic]. Poetic. (3.)
Mdo-o-ci) (itia7-), knead, fid^ta, &c. regular; 2 a. p. efidyrjv. (4.)
/' Mdxo)j,ai [Ion. ixax^ofiai], fight, f. fxaxov/xaL [Hdt. fiax^cofiai, Horn, /ua-
X^ofiaL or /Aaxi7a'o/Aat], p. fxeiJ.dxVH-0-h a. e/xaxeadfi-qv [Ep. also hfxaxwo-'
fir]v ; Ep. pres. part, fiax^i-ofj-evos or /uaxfoy/ievoj].
[Me'Sojiat, <A^7^^' o/, j?Za)i, (€-) ytteSiJo-O/Ocai (rare) . Epic]
M€0-tT]|i.i, sewc? away; see tT^/it (§ 127). [Hdt. pf. pt. fj-efxeri/x^uoi.]
M€0iJ<rK« (fjiedil-), make drunk, e/xidvffa, kfieduadrjp. See |i.eOvu. (6.)
McOiJw, &g drunk, only pres. and inipf.
Mc(po|i.ai (At6/)-), obtain, [Ep. 2 pf. 3 sing. e/i/Aope ;] impers. et/xaprac, it is
fated, cifxapfx^yr] (as subst.), i^aie. (4.)
M^XXci), intend, augm. e/ti- or tj/m-; (c-) /leW^a-u}, i/jLiWrjffa,
Mc'Xft), concern, care for, (e-) ixck-fjcrw [Ep. fxeX-^ffofiai, 2 p. fi^firfXa] ; fie/xi-
"X-qfiai [Ep. fiifi^Xerai, fie/j-^XeTo, for fiefjLcXrjrai, fiefiiXTjTo]; {i ixeXrjd'tjv)
fji€XT]6eis. MeXeL, i^ concerns, impers. ; p.€X-f)aei, cfifXriae, fxefiiXrjKe.
Mc'jjLova (Aie"-), desire, 2 perf. with no present. § 109, 3. Ionic and poetic.
See (idofiai.
„ Mevw, remain, f. ^icw [Ion. /iev^w], e/ietm, (c-) fiefiivrjKa.
McpjiTip^tft) (§ 108, iv. b, N. 1), ^(m(?<;r, [fiepfi-npi^^o, kjiepii'fipL^a] (Attic
-e/xep/xripccra). Poetic. (4.)
Mrfio^i.ai, devise, ix-qaofiai, efirjadfiTjv. Poetic.
MT]Kdo|iai (fx.aK-, fj.T]K-), bleat, [2 a. part. ;mK(liv ; 2 p. part. fiefiriK(I)i, )ue-
Ma/cma ; 2 1% e/i^/A^/coj/.] Chiefly Epic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.)
MT^Tidw (Epic -6a;), ^;Zfm. Mid. |Jiif]Tido)j.ai and |i.T]Tto)iai (Pind.), /xt/tI-
<ro/iai, €fir!TTad/jL7}v. Epic and Lyric] § 108, vii. Note. (7.)
MiaCvo) (/xtttJ/-), stom, fiiayQ, e/xidva [Ion. efilrjva], /MffiiaafMaif ifiidf0r}v,
fjnapd-^a-o/xat. (4.)
348 APPENDIX.
MCyvv^i ifuy-) and jtCo-yw, mix, fd^ca, e/xi^a, /xi/j,iyfiai, ifdxBrjv, fiixd-^ao-
/Mn ; 2 a. p. efjLiy7]p, [Ep. fut. fiiyTfja-o/xai ; 2 a. m. e/it/cro and fUKTo ; fut.
pf. fiefii^ofiai.^ (H*)
VA/ MijJLVTJcrKa) (^fxua-), remind; mid. remember; fivi^cru, cfivrjca, fi^/xv/jfiac,
// remember y i/xurjadrjp (a,s raid.) ; tiP7)ad-i^<To/j.at, fivrjaofxai, fX€fMV7i<rofiai ; efjLpri-
adfirju (poet.). M6)iVT]}iai (memini) has subj. fieixvCJiMi, opt. jxi^ivt^-qv
or jxefivy/xr)]/, imp. /xefxi'Tjao [Hdt. fxifiveo], inf. fjiefxfrjadai, pt. fji.e/j.vr]fUPos.
§ 118, 1, Note. (6.)
[From Ep. /xvaofiai come efivwovro, /xvwdfievos, &c.] § 120, 1 {b).
MtcrycD, wtoj, pres. and impf. See y-lyvv^i.
Mv^o), Slick, [Ion. fiv^iw, aor. -efiij^Tjaa (Hom.)J.
Mv^o) (/AU7-), grumble, mutter, aor. efiv^a. Poetic. (4.)
MvKdo|JLai ifivK-), bellow, [Ep. 2 pf. fx^fivKa ; 2 a. /jlvkov ;] ifxvxV'^^M'W'
Chiefly poetic. § 108, vii. Note. (2. 7.)
Mva>| shiU (the lips or eyes), aor. e/Aucra, pf. fiifivKa,
N.
Ufaita (ya-), dwell, [evaaaa, ima-adfxrjv,] hdadrjv. Poetic. § 108, iv. 3,
Note. (4.)
Ndo-<r« (va5-, J'ay-), stuff, [eva^a,] vivaafiai or vivayfiai. (4.)
[N€tK^« and vciKctw, chide, veiK^aio, ipeiKea-a. Ionic, chiefly Epic]
I^c|i(i>, distribute, f. yc/tw, ^vei/xa, (i-) pevifiijKa, pep^/xTj/xac, hefii^drjp ; vefioO-
fiai, epeifidfirjp.
Neofxai, go, come, or (as future) will go. Chiefly poetic.
1. New (pv), swim, -tpevaa, -pipevKa ; f. m. part, pevaoifiepoi. (2.)
2. N^ca, heap up, eptjaa, v^prifiai or p^prja-fiai. [From Ion. VT)4a>, prjTja-a,
P7]7j(xai, &c.]
3. N€« and vf\Qa), spin, priffoi, iprjaa, hi^d'qp ; [Ep. a. m. v-^aaPTO.]
NC^w later pIttto} (vX^-), wash, pixpcv, epitpa, pipififiai, [-€pi<pdT]P ;] pi\pofxaif
ipixpdfirip. § 108, iv. (b), N. 2. (4.)
!N'C(r(ro)j.ak (ytr-), go, fut. pi(rofiai (sometimes pla-a-ofiai.) . Poetic. (4.)
Noia, thinJc, perceive, vorja-u, &c., regular in Attic. [Ion. epucra, -vhuKa,
vevcofiai.] (7.)
Nojjit^w (vo/jud-), believe, fut. pofiLw [po/iiffu late], aor. hdfuffa, pf. V€p6'
tuKa, vepo/JUfffiai, aor. p. evofuadrjp, fut. p. vofxiffd'^(TO/Mi, (4.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 349
&
E^», scrape, [aor. e|c<ra and ^iava, chiefly Epic], e^ecrfiat. § 109, 2.
giipaivft) (^r;^av-), c?/*?/, ^rjpaivQ), i^-rjpdva [Ion. -j^mj, i^-qpaafiai. and e^^-
pa/xfiai, i^Tjpdvdrjv. (4.)
'^v<a, polish, e^vaa, e^vafiat, e^ij(r9r]v ; aor. m. e^va-dfitjv. § 109, 2.
o.
'OSoiroi^w, make a way, regular; but pf. udoireTrolTjKa (^udoTreToiTjfi^vT]) .
So sometimes 65onropiw,travel.
('08u-), he angry, stem with only [Horn, didvadfxrjv, d8(v5v(r/jLai.].
'Oloi (65-), smell, (c-) d^rjau flon. ofeVo;], (3;^r;o-a [Ion. (fi^eo-a], 2 p. dlSwSa
(late), [pip. 68u}5eiv Horn.] (4.)
OtYVVfii and oiyo, open, oifw, ^i^a [Ep. also &i^a], -eciT/fiai, a. p. part.
olxdds ; fut. pf. d.v-€(^cTai. See dv-oi-yvvjii. (II.)
OlSe'cD and oiSdvo), siyeZZ, [oiST/trw (Ion.),] ^rjaa, ^-qKa.
OlvoxocM, pour wine, oluoxo7i<ru, oivoxbri<ra (Epic and Lyric). Impf. 3 p,
otVoxoet, ^oxou, ecfivoxoei.
Otonai, think, in prose generally olfxai and y/iTyv in 1 per. sing. ; oirja-o/xai,
(^d-rjv. [Ep. act. otw (only 1 sing.), often oioj ; otofxai, oCadp-riv, ihtad-qv.]
Otxopiai, 6g gone, (€-) olxv'^ofx.ai, otx^Ka or (Jj%a;/ca (Avith irreg. w for t;),
§ 109, 8, Note ; [Ion. otxw°-i- or 0xvi^o-h doubtful in Attic].
*Ok€XX<«) (oKeX-), run ashore, aor. CoKciXa. Prose form of /ceXXw. (4.)
*O\i<r0dvw, rarely oXiadabu} (^oXiad-), slip, [Ion. (b\ia6r](ra, wXtV^7;/ca] ; 2 a.
&>\i.(jdov. (5.)
•JL,''OXXu|ii (probably for oX-j/U'/Ltt) rarely dXXuoj (6X-), destroy, lose, f. (5X<3
' [dX^tro;, oX^wJ, tuXetra, -oXdiXeKa ; 2 p. 5XwXa, perish, 2 plpf. oXwXeiv
(§ 102, Note 2). Mid. dXXv/xai, perish, oXov/xai, 2 a. (bXdfirju. In prose
generally d7r-6XXu/it. § 108, v. 4, Note 2. (II.)
V- "OlAviJiii and opivva) (6/U-, o^io-), swear, f. o/xovfiai, &fioa-a, dfidfioKa, dfiufxo-
fffiac (with ofXibfjiOTai) , wfxodrjv and (hiibad-qv, d/xoadrja-ofiai, a.m. -ufio-'
adfjiw. § 102, N. 2. (II.)
•0|jidpYvv|it (^o/xopy-) , tf;ipc, ofxop^cj, dfidp^ofiat, ijfxop^a, (bfiop^dfiTp' ; dir-
ofiopxOds. Chiefly poetic. (II.)
\j*OvCvr\^i (dm-), benefit, dvrja-u), Covrjaa, (I}pr)dr]v ; 6vria-o/j.ac ; 2 a. m. (hvdfirjv
or (rare) (hvrnxrjv. [Horn, imper. ovriao, pt. dj/Ty/zevosJ. § 125, 2, N. 2. (I.)
["Ovoiiai, insult, (inflected like Bibofiai) ; 6vb<xop.ai, (bvoad/xijv (Epic also
wvdfirjv), -d}v6<rdrjv. lonic and poetic] (I.)
'O^^vw (o^vv-), shar]jen, -o^vvio, Hi^vva, -H^v/mimi, -(b^iivdrjv, [6^vp6i^ffOfxat].
In prose only in compos. (4.)
'Oirvtft) (dxru-), marry, fut. drruffu), § 108, iv. 3, N. Pres. dTriJw (doubt-
ful). (4.)
360 APPENDIX.
/ *Opdo) (6pa-, Sir-), see, imperf. ^(ipojf [Ion. upuv or &peov ;] i-^ofxai, eupdKa or
eopcLKa, eiJjpdfxai or Cj/iifiai, &<p67]u, otpdrjaofjiai ; 2 p. ^TrwTra (Ion. and poet.).
For 2 a. eWou, kc, see ctSov. [Horn. pres. mid. 2 sing, oprjai.] (8.)
'OpYaivw (opyau-) , 6c angry, aor. &pydva, enraged. Only in Tragedy. (4.)
'OpcYCD, reach, opi^w, &pe^a, [Ion. &peyfiaL, Horn. p. p. 3 plur. opupexarai,
pip. 6/)W/3^x«''"oJ ^pex^W ; ope^ofjiac, ihpe^d/xrjv.
"Opyvp-i (op-)» ^a^5g, rowse, d!/9<rw, (Dpaa, 2 p. dSpwpa (as mid.) ; [Ep, 2 a.
dipo/aoj'.] Mid. rise, rush, [f. opoO/xai, p. opupefiai,] 2 a. wpofi-qv [with
cDpro, imper. 5/3(ro, 3/)(Teo, Spaev, inf. ujpdai, part. 5/3/iej'os]. Poetic. (II.)
'Opvoro-w or opvTTO) (6pii'7-), cZi«7, 6/)u|w, wpv^a, -opwpvxa. (rare), opupvyfMai
(rarely wpvyfiai), top^jx^v^ > f- P* -o/oux^^o"o/Aat, 2 f. opvxv'^oixai.) ; [ibpv-
^ajx-qv, caused to dig, Hdt. ] (4.)
'0<r<|)paivop,at (^oa<pp-), smell, (e-) oacpp-qaofiai, d}<r</>pdvdrjv (rare), 2 a. m.
wcr<pp6/xr]v. § 108, v. N. 1. (5. 4.)
[OuTa^o), wound, ovrdaw, oijTaaa, ovraafiai. Chiefly Epic] (4.)
[Ovrata, wound, ovrrjaa, ovr-^drjv ; 2 a. 3 sing, odra, inf. ovrafxevai and ovri'
fiev ; 2 a. mid. ovrdfievos as pass. Epic]
/'Otj)££X« (o0e\-), § 108, iv. 2, N. 1 [Ep. reg. 60AXw], owe, ow^rA?, (e-)
6(pei\riab}, ihtpdXrjaa, (^uxpeiXriKa ?) a. p. pt. d<p€i\T)6eii ; 2 a. utpeXov, used
in ims/ics (§ 251, 1, Note 1), that/ (4.)
*0<}>^\Xti) (60eX-), increase, [aor. opt. o^eXXeie Horn.] Poetic, especially
Epic (4.)
''0<|>Xio-Kdvft) (o0X-, 60Xt(rK-), &« guilty, incur (a penalty), (c-) oftA-qau),
HxpXrjaa (rare), wcpXrjKa, CocpXrjfmi ; 2 a. cD0Xoj' (inf. and pt. sometimes
6<pXeiv, 6(pXij}v). (6. 5.)
n.
IXaC^w (rraiS; iraiy-), sport, Trai^ovfrni, iiraiaa, iri-rraiKa (jiiraixo. later),
TT^Traicr/xat. § 108, iv. {h), N. 1. (4.)
Xlaio), strike, TraiVw, poet, (c-) Traii^aru}, ^iraicra, iriiraiKa, iiral<T$r)v.
TlaXaCa, wrestle, TraXaicrw, iirdXaiffa, iTaXaiae-rjv. § 109, 2.
ndXXw (TraX-), brandish, HriXa, iriiraXfiai ; [Horn. 2 a. dinreiraXdou, as if
from TriiraXov ; 2 a. m. ^ttoXto and TrdXro. J (4.)
Ilapavofieo), transgress law, augm. irapriv- or wapev-, irapavev. § 105, 1,
Note 2.
IlapoLveb), insztZi (as a drunken man') , imp. ^rapi^ovv; irapoivfjco), iwap^
vrjaa, ireirap(^r}Ka, ^Tapi^v-qdr^v.
ndo-o|jiai, flit., slmll acquire (no pres.), pf. TriTdfiai, eirda-dfjLtjv. Poetic.
Not to be confounded with irda-o^iai, iTrdadfxrjv, &c, of iraT^o/xac.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 351
H&a-a-a or iraTTO) (§ 108, iv. 1, E".), sprinTcle, irda-cj, ?7racra, iird-
/cd-nu. (4.)
Ildcrxw {irad-yirevd-'), suffer, irdaofJiai. (for irevd-troixai, § 16, 6, N. 1); 2 p.
Tiirouda [Horn, iriiroade and TreTra^fta] ; 2 a. ^irddov. (8.)
IIaT^op.ak (TTar-), ea^, "n-daofiai (a), iwaad/j.rji' ; [Ep. pip. TreTrdcr/iTjv.] Ionic
and poetic. See ird<ro}JLai. ^7.)
""^^-IlciOco (TTt^-), persuade, irelao), iirei<ra, ireireiKa, Triirei(r[xai, eireiadijv (§ 16),
TreLad'i'ja-ofj.ai ; fut. m. ireicrofMi ; 2 p. TreiroiOa, trust, [Ep. iTreiridfxep, pip.
for eireiroLOeiixep ;] poet. 2 a. ^indov and €Tnd6iJ,7]v [Ep. iriiTLdov and ireindo-
/j,r)v. [Epic («-) irid-fjao}, ireindr^ao}, Trt^^cras.] (2.)
ncivctw, hunger, regular except in having t; for a in contract forms, inf.
rreivrjv [Epic TreiviJ/Aevat], &c. See § 98, N. 2.
IleCpco (t€/)-), pierce, wepu (?), ^ireLpa, Triirapixai, \_-tirdprjv\. Ionic and
poetic. (4.)
Il€KT€ci) (7re/f-, ireKT-), comb. Epic pres. TreiVw ; [Dor. fut. tre^Cj,'] aor. ^ire^a,
iwe^dfirjv, iTex^V^- Poetic. (3. 7.)
IleXd^w (ireXad-) and poet. ireXdcj (TreXa-, irXa-), bring near, approach,
pres. also ireXdOo}, ajyproach ; f, TreXtD (for ireKdcrii}) , eiriXaaa, ir^irX-nixai,
iir^Xdadriv awd iirXddrjv ; eireXaa-dp.Tjp; [2 a. in. eirXi^fxijv, approached.] (4.)
IleXa) and ircXofiai, Je, imp. iweXov, itreXdfirju [syncop. eVXe, cttXco (eVXei;),
eirXero, for tTreXe, &c. ; so eTri-irXdfxevos and Trepi-TrXo/iei'os]. Poetic.
W II^p,iro}, 5g?ic?, ir4fi\p()}, €7r€fx\pa, T^irofKpa, 7re7re/A/iat (§ 97, N. 3, a), ctt^^i-
00771/, ■jr€fX(pdrj(roixai ; iripLipofiai, eTefixl/d/xrju. See pf. p. of ir^crcra).
IleiraCva) (TreTrai'-) , make soft, iiriirdva, iireirdvd-qv, ireiravdrjffoixai. (4.)
IIep8o(i,ai, Lat. pedo, 2 fut. (pass.?) -Trapdrjao/xai, 2 p. ir^iropSa, 2 a. -exapdov.
HcpOd), destroy, sack, iripaoj [irepa-ofiai (as pass.) Horn.], tirepcra, [Ep. 2 a.
(w. ir/5a0- for -rrepd-) eirpadov, iTpadbjxrjv (as pass.) with inf. iripdai..']
§ 109, 7 {a). Poetic.
II^pvT]p.i, mid. iripvafxai : poetic for Trnrpd(TKO}. (I.)
Ilto-o-w or ircTTw (TreTr-), coo^', ir^ypo}, tire\pa, Triirefi/JMc (§ 97, N. 3, a;
cf. T^fiiru), eir^tpdriu. § 108, iv. 1, N. (4.)
! Il€Tdwu|i.i (Trera-), expand, ireTdffw (TrercD), iirhaaa, iriirTa/Juii (ttctt^-
raa-futi late), iir€Td<Tdr]u. (II.)
niroppai (TTfT-, ITT-'), fly, (e-) irT-rjcofxai (poet.. TreTTycro/iat) ; 2 a. m. C7rr6-
/LtTjj/. To V'irTap.ai (rare) belong ,2 a. eirrriv (poet.) and iirTdfnjv. The
forms ireiroTijfxai and €iroT7]dr]v (Dor. -d/xat, -ddrju) belong to TroTdofiai.
Ilevdopiai (irvd-) : see irvvOdvofxai. (2.)
nT|"yvv|ii (7rd7-), fix, freeze, tt^^w, eirrj^a, iir-^x^V^ (rare and poet.); 2 a. p.
iirdyrjv, 2 f. p. irdyqcofxai. ; 2 p. Triiryjya, be fixed ; [Ep. 2 a. m, /car-
iiTTjKTo ;] TrriyvvTo (doubtful) pr. opt. for Tr7f^vioi.TO (Plat.) ; [Tr^foyitat,
iint^dixriv.'] (II.)
352 APPENDIX.
[IIiXvajJLai, approach, pres. and impf. Epic] (I.)
t^ IIifjnrXiiiJLi (TrXa-), fill, ttX^ctw, eTrXrjaa, 'iriirXTjKa, ir^irXrjafiai, iirX-^a-dTjv, I
•n-XTjaerjaofiai ; a. m. €T\7]<rdfji,r]v (trans.); [Ep. 2 a. m. exXri/xrjv.] § 125/
2. (I.)
nijxirpTiiJLi (irpa-), burn, irp^(T(a, eirprja-a, iriirp-qfiaL and TriTprja-fMai, iirp-^aOrjv;
[Ion. f. irp-qaoiiai, flit. pf. ireirp-qaofiaL.'l § 125, 2. Cf. Trprjdu}, blow. (I.)
Hivvo-Kw (ttivv-), make wise, [Horn. aor. iiriyva-a-a ;] chiefly Epic. See
irvc'ft). (6.)
^ IIivw (7rr-, TTO-), dri7iJc, tut. Trio/tai {movfrni rare) ; viTruKa, iriiroixai, iirb-
dr}v, irod-qaoixai ; 2 a. eirlov. (8.)
IlnrCo-Kw (TTt-), give to drink, TrtVw, eTrlaa. Ionic and poetic. See
irivo). (6.)
IIiirpd(rK6> (repa; Trpa-), sell, [Ep. irepda-o}, eTipaffa,] iriirpdKa, irirpdixai
[Horn, ireirep'nfiiuos], eirpde-qv [Ion. -T^/iat, -77^771'] ; fut. pf. Teirpdaofiat.
■ j The Attic uses dToduxrofiai and dredd/xTjp in fut. and aor. (6.)
Vn^iTTft) (ttct-, ttto-) for TTt-TeT-o;, /aZZ, f. irecrovfiai [Ion. Tretr^oAiat] ; p. ir^irrajKa,
pai-t. ■jreTTTcis [Ep. ireirtTjds or -ec6sj; 2 a. ^ireaoy [Dor. ^TrerocJ. (8.)
[IIiTVTifii, spread, pres. and impf. act. and mid. Epic and Lyric. See
ircTdvwjti.] (I.)
nXd^o) (7rXa77-), cause to wander, e'7rXa7^a. Pass, and mid. irXdtonai,
wander, irXdy^oimi, will wander, iirXdyx^v^, wandered. Ionic and
poetic, (4.)
nXdo-cro) (TrXar-?), form, [ttXc^o-w Ion.], eirXdca, ir^irXa<rixai, kirXdadrjv ;
eTrXaffdfirjv. § 108, iv. 1, N. (4.)
TTKiKta, plait, knit, irXi^oj, eirXe^a, [irivXexa or iriwXoxo- Ion. (rare)], tt^-
TrXey/Mtt, eirX^x^V^, TrXex^^^'oiMai ; 2 a. p. •iirXdKTjjV ; a. m. eTXe^dfiTjv.
IlXe'w (ttXi;-), 5at7, TrXeiirofiai or TrXeucrou/uai, eirXevaa, iriTXevKa, Tr^irXev-
<r/j,ai, eirXeitjdrjv (later). [Ion. and poet. irXwti), TrXuaofMi, eirXiocra, iri-
irXwKa, Ep. 2 aor. eTrXwy.] (2.)
£ IIXifi<ror« or irXTJTTO) {TrXrjy-), strike, irX-q^w, eirXrj^a, iriirXr^fxai, iirXrjxdvv
(rare) ; 2 p. Tr^irXriya (rare) ; 2 a. p. iirX-fjy-rjv (in comp. -6^X07171') ; 2 f.
pass. 7rX777i7(ro/Aarand 'irXayqcofiai ; fut. pf. 7re7rX??^o/iat ; [Ep. 2 a. tt^-
TrXrjyov (or eiriTX-), reTrXrr/ofirjv ; Ion. a. m. f 7rX?7^d/i?7i'. ] § 110, vii. N. 2.
(2. 4.)^
TlXtva (tXvv-), wash, irXvuCi, eirXvva, iriirXviiai, ewX^dtju ; [fut. m. (as pass.)
irXvvovfiai, a. iTrXrJmfii^v.'] § 109, 6. (4.)
Uvea) (ttvi;-), blow, breathe, Trveia-ofiat. and irvevaovfiai, eirvevca, 'triirvevKa,
[Ep. iriirvvfiat, be wise, pt. ireTrvvfiivos, wise, plpf. ir^7ri/i5cro.] [Ep. 2 aor.
&/j,-Tvv€, dfi-Tvvro, a. p. dpL-trvivd7}v ;] see diiirwe. See irtyvo-Kw. (2.)
TLviyiJi {irvXy-), choke, -irpi^w [later •irpL^ofjt.ai, Dor. Trvi^oO/iai], eirvi^a, iri-
TTvcy/xai, iTTviyrju, irvXyrjaopui.. (2.)
Ilodco), desire, irodi^a-(a, wodrjaofiai, eirodrjaa ; and irodiaopiai, iirbdecra. § 109,
1, N. 2 (&).
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 353
(IIop-, irpo-), give, allot, stem whence 2 a. iiropov (poet.), p. p. iritrpufiai^
chiefly impers., Trewporrai, it is fated (with TreirptoiJiivr], Fate). See |Ji,€ipo-
p.ai.
yUpaa-a-a or irpaTTw (Trpdy-), do, irpd^u), tirpa^a, Tr^Trpaxa, rriirpaytiaij
i-n-pdxdW) trpaxdrjcToixaL ; fut. pf. ir^Trpd^ofmi ; 2 p. TreTpdya, have fared
(well or ill) ; mid. f. irpd^ofiat, a. erpa^dfirju. (4.)
[npTJOPO-w {irpif/-), do, Tprj^io, ^irpr]^a, ireTrprixa, iriirprfYfJ-ai, eTpi^x^V^f ""e-
irpTjya ; Tprj^o/xai, eirprj^dfnjv.'] Ionic for irpdo-o-ca. (4.)
(irpia-), bui/, stem, with only 2 aor. eTrpidfiyjv, inflected throughout in
§123.
Ilpto), saw, eirpTcra, iriirpta-fiai, lirpla67}v. § 109, 2.
nrdpvvfiai {irrap-), sneeze ; [f. TrrapC} ;] 2 aor. eTrapov, [eVrapo/ATji'], (eVra-
pTj;/^ TTTapeis. (II.)
IItijo-o-ci) (TrrcT/f-, irTrjK-), cower, eTrrrj^a, eTTTrjxo- From stem Trraic-, poet.
2 a. {•ewraKov) KaTaTrraKcov. [From stem irrdf-, Ep. 2 a. KaTaiTTrp-riv,
dual; 2 pf. pt. TreTrrTjws.] (4. 2.)
IItio-o-w (§ 108, iv. 1, N.), j^ound, {^eirrXaa, eirTca-fJiai.] (4.)
IItuo-o-w {iTTvy-), fold, tttv^w, eirrv^a, tirTvyfiai, -iirTvxdr]v ; irTv^ofiaiy
iTTV^d/JLTJV. (4. )
j IIvvOdvo)Jiai (ttli^-), Jiear, enquire, irei5(ro/iat [Dor. ireva-ovfiai], Tiirvfffiai ;
2 2i, eirvdoiJLTjv. (5.) Poetic ireuOoixat ( Try ^-). (2.)
P.
PaCvft) (pa-, pdu-), sprinkle, pavQ, eppdva, ippaff/Mi, (eppdvOrjv) ^avBeU.
[From stem pa- (cf. ^alvoj), Ep. aor. epacraa, pf. p. eppddarai, plpf. eppd-
daro, § 119, 3.] See § 108, v. N. 1. Ionic and poetic. (5. 4.)
I'PaCta, strike, paiao), eppaia-a,] eppaicrdrjv ; [fut. m. (as pass.) -paia-ofxai.]
Poetic, chiefly Epic.
'Pd-n-Tw {pa(f>-), stitch, pd^u), eppaxpa, eppa/xfiai; 2 a. p. kppa<f>7}v; a. m. eppa-
^^dixT)v. (3.)
'Pdtr<rw or pdrrw (pa7-)» throw doion, pa^u), eppa^a, -^ppaxOrju. (4.)
*P^j;a» (pey-), for epSw, do, ^^^w, fpc^a (rarely eppe^a) ; [Ion. a. p. pexOeirj,
pexdeis.] (4.)
'P^'w {pv-), flow, pc6<T0fiai, eppevaa, (€-) tpp^rjKa; 2 a. p. eppiijv ; pv^ao-
nai. § 108, ii., Note. (2.)
(*P€-), stem of etprjKa, eiprffiat, ippi^drjv (eppidrjv), pridr/ffOfMC, elp-nffofmi. See
ctirov.)
'Pij-yvvjti (pay-, pvy-), poet, pyjacw, Ireak ; prj^ca, ^pp^^a, [-epprjyfjiat rare,
epp-nx^rjv rare ;] 2 a. p. ippdytjv ; payvaofmL ; 2 p. eppuya^ be broken
(§ 109, 3, N. 1); [pTi^o/tat,] kppri^dfxriv. (2. II.) ""^-"
354 APPENDIX.
*PfY^ci) (pTy-)i shudder, [piyrjcw,] epplyrjffa, [2 p. ^pplya (as pres.)] Poetic,
chiefly Epic. [7.]
'Pi-yow, shiver, piyucro), eppiyioa-a ; inf. piyuv or piyow, § 98, Note 3.
'PiTTTCi) (pi^-), throw, pl\p(a, €ppi\f/a (poet. €pt\f/a), tppltpa, eppi/xfiai [poet.
yl' peppifi/Jiai, Horn. pip. epipnrTo], ippicpdrju, picpd^ao/iai ; 2 a. p. eppi'
^r)v. Pies, also piTTTcw. (3.)
'PvojJLai {v), defend, pvaojxai, ippvad/xrjv. [Epic, inf. pvcrdai for pveadai ;
impf. 3 pers. eppvro and pi. pdaro. § 119, 3.] Poetic. See cpvo).
'Pvirdo), be fold, [Epic pvirow ; Ion. pf. pt. pepvircap-evos].
*Pwvvv|JLi (pw-), strengthen, tppuaa, eppufiai (iniper. eppuaOf farewell), ippd)-
ad-nv. (II.)
S.'
SaCpu (o-cfp-), sweep, aor. pt. cripas; 2 p. <ri<Tr)pa, grin, esp. in part, (tco-t;-
pcis [Dor. o-eo-a/jcis.] (4.)
SoXir^^w ((raX7rt77-), sow?ifZ a trumpet, aor. e(rdX7rt7^a. (4.)
[Dadu, save, a-adjau), e<rdw<ra, eaacodrjv, aaua-ofiai ; imperf. 3 sing, (xdw (for
eadca) as if from Aeol. a-dufit ; imperat. adio (for (xdov). Epic]
UPevvvfii ((TjSe-), extinguish, a^ia-w, to-/3e<ra, •^a^rjKa, ea^eafiai, ia^iaOTjv,
2 a. ecr/ST/i' ; -a^rjao/iai. (II.)
lUPo), revere, [imp. ^ae^ov late], aor. p. €ai(pdr)p, w. part. (Te<p6e[s, awe-
struck.
Sefo), s7ia^^, o-efcrw, eaeiaa, a^ffeiKa, a-iffeia-fiai, €(rela-6r)v ; a. m. €a€LC&tn}v ;
[Ep. imp. eo-o-e/o^'ro].
2evo> (cru-), move, wrgrg, [a. effffeva, iffaevd/xrfv ;"] ecffvfiai, caaiOtjv or iavdt]v ;
2 a. m. iaa^ipL-qv (with eavro, criro, crvfievos). Poetic. (2.)
. Zi])Jia£vci} (crr;yu,a/'-), show, arjfiavC}, earifiTjva (sometimes ea-fjfxava) , aecT-qfm-
fffiai, i(n)fidvdir)v, crrjfxaudrjaofjiai ; mid. ar)p.avovp.ai, €(X7}fj.7)vd/x7)v. (4.)
STJiro) (craTT-), rot, (tt)-^(j}, 2 p. cia-qxagg/j^n^ pres.) ; <ri(X7]iJt.fiai ; 2 a. p. iad-
Trrjv, i'. caTrrjaopLai. (2.)
SKairro) (crKa^-^, rftgr, (TKd\}/(i3, €<TKa\pa, ecTKa^a, ^(XKafifxat, 2 aor. p. eaKd-
ip-qv. (3. )
[ SK€8dwv|J.i ((TfceSa-), scatter, f. c/feStD [<r/ce5(£(7w,] co-zce'Sao-a, {iaKidaa-fmi)
eV/ceSacr/ieVos, iffKeSdadrju ; eaKedacrdfirjv. (II.)
2KeXXw (o-fceX-, (r/cXe-), fZr?/ tip, [Ep. a. t'<r/c77Xa,] ^aKXrjKa ; 2 a.
icTKXrjP (d7ro-(r/cXijmt). (4.)
^ . 2K€irT0jiai (o-«:e7r-), w'ettJ, crKi\popLai, i(JKe\pdfjt.r}v, ecr /ce^t/iat, fut. pf. t<TK^\po,uat,
[ea-K^<p6r}v, Ion,]. For pres. and impf. the better Attic writers use
(xkottCj, o-Koirov/xat, &c. (see o-KO-irew). (3.)
SKTJTTTa} (cTKTjTr-), ^rop, -(TKri'f/u}, ^(XKrjxJ/a, -eaKTjfifMi, ecTKytpOrjv ; CK-qxpofxai,
eaKTjipdfirjv. (3.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
■•" • ■; ■■ -'^^
SkCSvtii&i, mid. a-dSvafmi, scatter, chiefly poetic for (rK€84vw|ii. (I.) *- iN
Skottco), view, in better Attic writers only pres. and impf^ ac.t. .jqid mid. .^
For the other tenses cr/c^^o/xat, kaKc^pdii-qv, and ta-Kefi/xai of^'}if^f^MttenM^ "^ j!^
used. See CTKeirrojiai. ^*''*'^t:?'^<Ri-
Skwittci) ((T/cwtt-), jeer, (rK6\f/o/xai, eaKwxf/a, i<TK(l}<j>6r]v. (3.)
2p,dw, sinear, with ?/ for d in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), tryic^ for <xfiq., &c.
[Ion. (T/icw and cuijxw], aor. p. 5ia-(r/jir}xdeis (Aristoph.).
Zirdo), draw, (Tirdaia (a), tairaca, ecnraKa, ia-n-aa/xai, ea-rrdaOrjv, ciracO-ficro-
fiat; awda-oixai, eairaadfjLrjv. § 109, 1, N. 2 ; § 109, 2.
i Sircipo) (a-irep-), sow, airepC), ^aireipa, ^<nrap/JLai ; 2 a. p. ea-irdprjv. (4.)
^ ZircvSo), j90i*r a libation, ffrreiffu, eaireia-a, taireKTixai ; airtiao/jLai, eaireiad-
/X7}u. § 16, 3 and 6.
Srcipw ((TTi/S-), ^readZ, -e<rT€i\pa, (e-) ia-Tl^rifxai (§ 108, ii. Note). Poetic. (2.)
Stc^xw (o'T'tX-). 9'o, [-^o-ret$a, 2 a. effTixop.] Poetic and Ion. (2.)
StcXXo) (o-reX-), se?i6?, areXCo [<TTe\iu}], laTeiXa, carakKa, ea-TaXfiai ; 2 a. p.
ccrdXTjv ; -aToK-qaopiai ; a. m. iaTu\dp.7}v. § 109, 4. (4.)
Srcvct^w {(TTepay-), groan, a-revd^oj, karha^a. (4.)
Srcp^o), Zove, arep^o), ecrrep^a ; 2 p. earopya. § 109, 3.
^ 2tcp^(i), dejJrive, also <rT6pto-K« ; (xrepriffo}, laTiprjcra [Epic eerT^pea-a], ecT^-
p7;Ka, i<TTeprjixai, iaTeprjdrjv, aTeprjdT^crofxai ; 2 aor. p. iaTiprjv, 2 fut. (pass.
or mid.) aTeprjaofiai.
[2T6v|xai, pledge ones self ; 3 pers. pres. ffTevrai, impf. arevTo. Poetic,
chiefly Epic]
StC^o) (a-Tiy-), prick, ari^oj, eo-rt^a, cariypLai. (4.)
2lTop^vvv|Xi or OTTopvvfJLi {(TTope-), aropC) (for ffTopicroS), iarSpeaa, [iaropi-
cdrjv], earopead/JLTjv. (II.)
wSrpecfxo, turn, arplxf/w, ^aTpexj/a, ea-rpafifiat, earp^tpOriv (rare in prose) [Ion.
e(XTpd(p6r]v] ; 2 pf. ea-T£0(pa (rare) ; 2 a. p. t(rTpd(p7}i', f. <TTpa<pTf}aofjLai ; mid.
(TTp^XpOfiaL, €<TTp€\f/dfJi7]V. § 109, 4, N. 1.
2tp«vvv|xi (a-rpoj-), same as (rTop^vvv|ii ; crrpwcrw, tarpuaa, iaTpcofiai, karpdj-
e-nv. (II.)
STv-yco) ((TTi^Y-), dread, hate, iffr&yrjaa [eaTV^a], [eaTiyriKa,'] larxriifi-qv ;
2 f. p. aTvyy}<Top.aL ; [Ep. 2 a. e(rTi;7oi'.] Ionic and poetic. (7.)
[2tv4)€X£^o) {(TTV(}}e\Ly-), dash, aor. icrrvcp^Xi^a. Epic] (4.)
SC'po) {ai'p-), draw, [fut. a-vpu) late,] aor. ^avpa, iavpdixrjv. (4.)
2!4>d^a) (cr0a7-), sZ«7/, Att. prose gen. {rcJ)dTTft) ; (r<f>d^u), ta<f)a^a, eacpayfxai,
[i(T(jidx&'')v (rare)] ; 2 aor. p. €a<pdyr)v, fut. fftpayria-o/xai ; aor. mid. -iacpa.- _
^dfX7]v. (4.) . '-^
I14>dXXa) ((T0a\-), ^Wp, deceive, <7<pa\Cj, ecr^TjXa, ecr^aX/tat; 2 a. p. ea-^dX-rjy,
f. a<pa\ifi(yo/xai ; fut. m. (r(f>a\ovfiai. (4.)
2w^(i> (trwS-), save, [also Ep. o-c^w, w. subj. (r6i7S, a-(57/, &c]; aibcrci}, cataaa,
aia-ujKa, ff^auff/mi (or -w,uai), ia-(i)9rjv, crw^Vo/^ct' J cibaofiai, ia-wa-d/xrjv. (4.)
356 APPENDIX.
T.
(ra-), take, stem with Horn, imperat. r^.
[(Ta^-), seize, stem with Hom. 2 a. pt. Teraydiv.'] Cf. Lat. tango.
[TaviSw, stretch, ravvau, eravvaa, Terdwafjixii, €TaPij<x6r]u ; aor. m. irayva-ad'
fxrjp. § 109, 2. Epic form of Tilv<a.]
Tapdo-<r« (rapax-), disturb, rapd^oj, erdpa^a, Terdpayfiai, erapdxdrjv, ra-
paxdrjf^oixai. ; rapd^ofMai ; [Ep. ])L {reTpvxo-} Terpijx^s, disturbed; pip.
Terprixei.] (4.)
Tdo-trw {ray-), arrange, rdt^w, tra|a, riraxa, rerayfiai, tTdxOfjv, raxdv-
(TOfiaL ; rd^ofjLat, ha^dfirjv ; 2 a. p. erd7i7»' ; fut. pf. Terd^onau (4.)
Tcivw {rev-}, stretch, tcpw, ^reiva, rhaKa, T^ra/xai, ^rddrjv, xadT^aofxaL ; re-
voOfjLai, ereivdfirjp. § 109, 6. (4.)
TiKm, finish, (reXeVw) reXw, ireXeaa, rer^XcKa, rer Aec/zai, irekiadriv; fut.
m. [reXeo/iatj reXovnai, a. m. eTeXea-dfirjv. § 109, 2.
Tc'Wo) (reX-), cazfsc <o Wsc, rwc, aor. ^reiXa ; [plpf.p. irhaKro.] In compos.
•TeTaXfMai, -e'TeiXd/xrjv. § 109, 4. (4.)
[(Ten-), /?i£?, stem with only Hom. redupl. 2 a. t^t/ulov or ^^rer/ioi'.]
T€|xv« (re/A-, T/ie-) [Ion. rdixvoi, Hom. once reVw], czti, f. rc/Lt^ T^T/xr)Ka, ri-
TiJ,r)iJ.ai, ^Tfiridrjv, rpi-qd-qcofiai ; 2 a. ^repLov, irepLbp-riv (or irafj.-) ; fut. ra.
-re/toGjuat ; fut. pf. TCTiUijo-o/xai. See TjJitj-yw. (5.)
Tcpirw, amuse, r^pxf/o}, ereprpa, er^pcpdrjv [Ep. eTdp(p9T]v, 2 a. p. irdpir-qv
(with subj. Tpaireiw), 2 a. m. (T)eTa/37r6/A7;^] ; fut. m. Tip^ofiai. (poet.),
[a. iTepypdp.-nv Epic] § 109, 4, N. 1.
[T€po-o|iai, become dry, 2 a. p. ir^pcr-qv. Chiefly Epic. Fut. act. r^po-w in
Theoc]
[TcTCiijjLai, Hom. perf.; generally in part. TeTirjfievoi, with TeTt77ws, both
passive, dejected, troubled.]
[TcTfiov or ?T€Tjiov (Hom.), found, for re-re fx-ov.] See (rcfi.-).
Terpaivw (rerpa^-), bore, late pres. Tirpaivw and rirpdw ; [fut. -rerpavio}
Ion., aor. ererprjva,] -irerpfivdp.'qv. From stem (rpd-), aor. ^rprjaa,
pf. p. Terprjfiat. § 108, v. N. 1 ; § 109, 7 (c). (5. 4.)
Tevx« (tux-). i^^<^i?«^^> wza^e, rci^^w, ^rev^a, [Ep. rirevxa. as pass,,] r^ru-
7/xai [Ep. T^revyfiai, er^xOw (Ion. erei/x^^") ; fut. pf. rereij^ofxai ;] f. m.
reij^ofiai, [a. ercu^d/x?;!'.] [Epic 2 a. (rii/f-) rervKetv, rervKdpirjv.] Po-
etic. (2. )
Ti^Kw (raK-), melt, [Dor. rff/cw), riy^w, ?r7;^a, irrjxOvv (rare) ; 2 a. p. erd-
AfT^i/ ; 2 p. riTTjKa (as mid.). (2.)
Tt0Ti|ji,t (de-), put ; for inflection and synopsis, see § 123. (I.)
TtKTw {t€k-), beget, bring forth, re^ofiai (poet, also t^^w, rarely reKovfjuii),
cre^a (rare), irexdw (rare) ; 2 p. riroKa ; 2 a. h-CKOv, ereKSfMrju. See § 108,
iii. (end). (3.)
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 357
Tiya (rt-), Avitli t, pay, fta-cj, ^riaa, r^TlKa, -Tiriafiaiy -iTiadrjv. (5.)
[TiTaivw {tXtclv-), stretch, aor. (eTiTTjm) TLTTjvas. Epic for T€lv<a.'\ (4.)
[TiTpdw, bore, late present. J See Tcrpaivw.
TiTpwo-Kw {Tpo-), wound, Tpwab), irpuaa, T^rpufiai, irpibd-qPf rpudi^cTo/xai;
[fut. m. TpJxTofjiai Horn.] (6.)
TXdft), bear, dare, syncop. for (raXa-w), pres. not classic ; f. rXria-ofxai, [Ep.
a. irdXaa-ffa,^ p. TtrXriKa [with Epic /it-forms (§ 125, 4) TerXa/xet/, re-
TXairjVf r^rXadi, TtTXa/xemi and TerXd/iev, TerXiycis] ; 2 a. ^tXtjv [Dor.
IrXdv.] Poetic.
[TuTJ-yw (rfxay-), cut, poet, for t^/aj/w ; r/t^^w (rare), hfirj^a, 2 a. ^fiayou,
iTixdyT]v (Tfxdyev for er/td7770-aj').] (2.)
TopecD (rop-) , 2nerce, pres. only in |Ep. dvrt-Topew^a] j f. [rop^w,] rarely
T€TOp-f]<Tij}, [a, iroprjaa, 2 a. ^ropoi'.] (7.)
, Tp^TTO) [Ion. rpctTTw], ^itr?i, rpi^ui, ^rpexf/a, rirpoipa or Tirpa<pa, Tirpafifxai,
iTpe(f>dr)v [Ion. erpd^^Tjj'j ; f. in. rpei/'O/xai, a. m. erpe-^dix-rjv ; 2 a. [^r/act-
TTo;/ Ep. and Lyr.], erpdirrju, eTpairdfirju. § 109, 3, N. 2, and 4 with Note 1.
This verb has all the six aorists.
Tpccfxo (rpetp- for dpe<f)-, § 17, 2, Note), nourish, dpixj/u, ^dpexpa, rirpo^a
(late T€Tpa<ps^, re^pa/i/xai (inf. Tcdpd<f)dai), idp€<pd7iv (rare) ; 2 a. p. erpd-
07?;' ; [Ep. 2 a. ^rpacpov as pass.] ; f. m. dpexj/oixai, a. m. €6pe\f/dfn]v. § 109,
sTN. 2 ; and 4 with N. 1.
Tpex« ('■p^X- for ^P^X; § 17, 2, Note ; Spa/j.-), run, f. dpafMov/xai (-Opk^oiiai
only in comedy), ^^/)e|a (rare), -dedpdfirjKa, -Sedpdfxrjfiat ; 2 p. -dedpofia.
(poet.), 2 a. Upaixov. (8.)
TpecD {tremble), aor. irpeaa. Chiefly poetic.
Tptpb) (r/or^-), ?•?/&, Tpi\l/(a, ^rpt\f/a, rhpiipa, rerpififiat, erpitpOrjv ; 2 a. p.
hpi^riv, fut. p. rpifiriffofiai ; fut. pf. Terpi^o/xai ; f. m. rpl-^oixxu, a. m.
erpi\l/dur}p. (2.)
Tpi^o) (r/)i7-), squeak, 2 p. rerpTya as present. Ionic and poetic. (4.)
Tpvx", exhaust, fut. [Ep. rpiJ^w] rpvxii<ro} {rpvxo-, § 109, 8, N.), a. erpiJ-
XWfftt, p. part. T€Tpvx(afi€vos, [a. p. Irpxrxia^W Ion.].
TpcS^o) (r/)a7.), grjiat^;, rpih^opxii, [-^rpw^a,] -Terpuyfrni. ; 2 a. ^rpayov. § 108,
^ii. (end). (2.)
Tvyxavw (tux-, '■«»^-). ^^'^ happen, rei^ofxai, [Ep. ^riJxT/aa,] TeTiJx'?'ca or
rereyxa ; 2 a. trvxov (5. 2. )
\Tv7rT« (xiTTT-), strike, (e-) Tuirriycrw, ^rui/'a [fTjj7rr7;(ra later], {rervfiiiat Ion.
and poet.] ; 2 a. ^rvirov (rare), kriirrjv (poet.) ; Tvirr-qaoixa.!. (as pass.);
a. m. €TV\l/dfir]p. (3.)
Tc4>« (ri;0- for dvip; § 17, 2, Note), raise smoke, smoke, ridufifiai, 2 a. p.
-iT6<pr)v, 2 f. p. -rHipT^ffoiMU. (2. )
358 APPENDIX.
^'
X
YTri<rxve'o|iai Ion. and poet. (iirtcrxojjLai (strengthened from vHx^/xai),
promisey viroaxwof^h vireaxwai, {vweax^OTju) once in virocrxidrjTi,
(Plat.); 2 a.m. vweaxofiijv. See il(rx<«) and ^X,"* (5.)
Y^aivM {v(pai'-), weave, v^ai^Q, vcprjva, v<paa-ixai. (109,6, N.), v4>dv6r]v ;
aor. m. u^T/m/x?;*/. (4.)
Yo), rain, vcrw, 5(ra, iafiai, VcrOrjv. [Hdt. f/'croftai as pass.]
*a£v« {<l)av-), show, f. (pavQ [(pavecS], a. ecprjva, 7re<payKa, iricpacrjuai (§ 109,
6, N.), i(j)dvdr]v ; 2 a. p. ^(fxivrju, 2 f. (pavri(yo/j.ac ; 2 p. iri^rjva ; f. m.
(pavovfiai, a. m. e<pTjv6.ixr)v (rare and poet.), s/ioiycr^, but d7r-e(pr]vd/jLrjv, de-
clared; [Ep. iter. 2 aor. ^dfeaKe, apj^eared.] For Epic Te(p'qaoixai, see
<|>da). See § 95 ; § 96 ; § 97, 4. (4.)
4>dtrKa) (0a-), s«i/, only pres. and inipf. See ^ii\ilC. (6.)
4>do), s/ime (pres. late), jHom. imperf. 0de, fut. ])f. 7re0^o-erai.]
4>€i8o|xai. (0t5-), sjyare, 0et(ro/iai [Horn. 7re0i5^cro/ioi], icj>eL<xdfir]v, [Horn. 2 a.
7re0t5aya77J/.] (2.)
(<}>€V-, <j)a-), ^'i7Z, stems whence [Horn. 7re0a;uat, Tr€<pi^aofiai ; 2 a. redupl.
7re0i'oj' or ^Tr€(puov, with ])art. 7re0i'ajj'].
^epo) (ot-, ^i^c/c-, iuejK- for ej'-ei'e/c-), 6car, f. oib-w, a. ijueyKa, p. eu-ripoxa,
iv-qveyixai, a. p. riuex^V > f- P- ^''fX^'^co/iui and oiaOrjaofiai ; 2 a. ijveyKou ;
f. m. oiao/xai (sometimes as pass.); a. m. ijvtyKdixrjv, 2 a. m. ijveyKOfi-qv
(very rare). [Ion. ijveiKa and -a/nrjv, ■fjfeiKov, ivfjveiy^iai, ijvelxOw \ Hdt.
di'-oro-at or di'-Jia-at, inf. from aor. 4^a (late) ; Hom. aor. imper. olae for
oto-oi', pres. imper. (pepre for 0epeTe.j (8.)
4>€V7w (01^7-) /ce, (petj^ofiaL and (pev^oOfiat (§ 110, ii. N. 2), 2 p. iricpevya
(§ 109, 3); 2 a. e<pvyov; [Horn. p. part, irecfyvyixivos and 7re0uf6res.] (2.)
4>T]jii (0a-), say, (prjffw, €(pr}<Ta ; p, p. imper. irecpdadw, part, irecpaafxivos.
Mid. [Dor. f. 0c[<ro/iai]. For other forms and inflection, see § 127. (I.)
^9dvci> {(pda-), anticij^ate, (pddao} and (pdrjaojxaL, €<pddaa, [e0^a/ca late ;] 2 a.
act. e^O-rjp (like ea-r-qv), [Ep. 2 a. m. (p6d/j.€uos.] (5.)
^Oeipci) ((pOep-), corrupt, f. (pdepu) [Ion. -(pdepeio, Ep. 0^^/)(rw], a. eipBeipa,
p. ecpdapKa, ecpdapfiai ; 2 a. p. i^ddprjv, 2 f. p. (pOapijcTopMi. ; 2 p. 5i-
€(f>6opa; f. m. <p6epoOfj.aL [Hdt. 0^a/9^o^iat]. (4.)
4»0iva» [Ep. also 0^ia;], i^;as^e, c^ccai/, (pdiaoi, ecpdiaa, ecpdifiai, [icpdidrjv ; fut.
m. (p&iao/nai ;] 2 a. m. icpdifirjv [suhj. <t>dl(j3p.aL, opt. <{>6ifx-r}v for <f>di-t-fj.r}v,
imper. 3 sing. (f>6i<rdo}, inf. (pdlcrdai], part. (pOifxevos. Attic t. Epic i; but
always t in ((pdtfiai, icpdtdriv, ecpdtfi-qv (except in contr. opt. <f>6ifir)v).
Epic 0^iw has generally i. Chiefly poetic. The present is generally
intransitive ; the future and aorist active are transitive. (5. )
CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 359
*tX^» (0rX-), love, ^tXiJo-w, &c. regular. [Ep. a. m. icplXdfirjv ; inf. pres.
(piXTjixemi, from Aeolic (pLXrj/Mi.] (7.)
4>Xda), bruise, [fut. ^Xctcrw (Dor. <t>\a<X(jG3), aor. e^Xacra, e^Xaafiai, ecpXd-
adriv. ] See OXdw.
4»pd7vi5nt {(ppay-), fencci mid. <j>pd'yvv|xai ; only in pres. and impf. See
<|>pdor(r(i>. (II. )
^pd^w («^pa5-), ^e/Z, 0/)aVw, €(ppaaa, irecppaKa, Tr^(ppa<XfMi, [Ep. pt. 7r€0/)a-
S/i^i/os,] e<ppd(xdriu (as mid.); [^pacro^at Ep.], e^/xicrd/iT/j' (chiefly Epic).
[Ep. 2 a. ir^cppadov or eTr^^paSoi'.] (4.)
4>pd<r<rw (<t>pay-), fence, <ppd^(o, e#a^a, iri<ppa.yimi, iippdxdv^ J itppa^dfirju.
See <})pd'yw|i,t. (4.)
4»p£<ro-« or <|)pCTT« ((f>pTK-), shudder, <ppi^(a (late), l0pt^a, ir^^pt/ca. (4.)
4>pC7« {(fypvy-), roast, 0pi/^w, €<ppv^a, ir^cppvyfiat, [etppvyriv.] (2.)
^. 4»vXd(r(rw {(pvXaK-), guard, (pvXd^w, iipvXa^a, irecpiLiXdxO', iretpdXayixai, €<pV'
Xdx^W > <t>vXd^ofJiat., icpvXa^dfirjv. (4.)
^6p«, ?«,«:, [e^vpaa,] vitpvpjxai, e<l>ijp67}v ; [fut. pf. Te^jjpffOfiai Find.].
^vpdoD, mix, is regular, (pvpdcu, &c.
4>v«, (y), produce, cpua-co, €(f>v<Ta, ir^tpvKa, be (by nature), with 2 p. {iri<pva)
§ 125, 4 [Ep. we^vdai, kjx-irecjyiri, Tre^ucis]; 2 a. €(f>\jv, be, be born, (subj.
0i}w); 2 a. p. e^uTji' (subj. 0i;a))j fut. m. <pif<rofMt..
Xd^ft) (xa5-), 2/ie?<f, rehire (pres. only in dva-xd^u), [Ep. f. x<^<^of^^* »•
-eXdO'o'a (Find.), a. m. ix°-^dix7]v (Epic, once in Xen. bLa-xdcaadaC); 2 a.
m. K€Kadbixr]v ; fut. K€Kadr}a-(a, will deprive (§ 110, iv. c, N. 2 , 2 a. K^Ka-
8ou, deprived.] (4.)
Xalpw (xap-)> rejoice, («-) x^-'-P'^'^'^y KexdprjKa, KexdprjfJMi and Kixo-pp-ci-, 2 a.
p. cxdp-qv, [Ep. a. m. XVP<''-T0, 2 a. m. Kexap^p-rju ; 2 p. pt. Kcxapv^^ >
fut. pf. K€xapri(ro}, K€X(ip'ri<yofjuit (§ 110, iv. c, N". 2).] (4.)
XaXotcD, loosen, [xaXdaoo Ion.,] exdXd<Ta [-a$a Find.], exo-Xdadrfv. § 109, 2.
XavSdvw (xa5-), ^W, 2 a. exddov. From stem (xe»'5-), [Epic fut. x^^'^'O"
fMi, (§ 16, 6, N. 1), 2 pf. /c^xavSa.] (5.)
Xd(rK6>, later x^'^va) (xa»'-)> 5'«:2'^. f- x°'^o^l^h 2 p. k^xW^ (as pres.), 2 a.
exavov. Ionic and poetic. (4.)
Xe^cD (x^S-), fut. x^<^ov/jiai (rarely -x^a-ofiac), ^x^aa, 2 p. -K^x^Sa ; 2 a. exe-
(Tov ; a. m. €x^(^dfir]v ; p. part. Acexeo-ZA^vos. (4.)
X^o) (xi'-)* pour, f. x^w [Ep. Xf«5w], a. ex^a [Ep. ex^i^a]* 'K^X^ku, K^xvfiai,
ex^^Vi x^^V<^ofiai ; a. m. ix^dpt.'qv, 2 a. m. exv/xrjv. § 108, ii. 2, N. ;
§ 110, iii. 1, N. 2. (2.)
[(XXa8-) stem of 2 pf. part. /cexXdSws, swelling, (Find.).]
360 APPENDIX.
Xow, heap up, x^<^^> ^X^^^t •k^X^K'^) Kixf^<^f^^h ^X^'^^W^ X^<^^V<^onai»
§ 109, 2.
Xpaio-jjiew (xpaiafi-), avert, help, late in present ; [Horn. xP<^i-<^I^W(^, ^XP^*-'
(TfiTjaa ; 2 a. expatc/xoi']. (7.)
Xpdo|jiai, use, (perhaps mid. of XP'^^)f XPMofiai, hxfi'r}<Ta.ixriv, KixPV/^^i;
expvcrdyjv, [fut. pf. /cexp^ao^Mit Theoc.]. For XPW^'- [Hdt. x/oarai], &;c.
see § 98, Note 2.
Xpdd), give oracles, XPV<^^> ^XPVO'C', k^XPVKC; K^xpvcfJ^'- {-Wcll ?), kxPM^W'
Mid. consult an oracle, [xfivf^o/mi, ixpv^^o.M^-] § 98, Note 2. For
XPV^ and XPV = X/3?7f"S and XPV^^h see XPiaS"'
Xp^ (impers.), irreg. pres. for xprj-o-i, there is need, (one) ought, must, subj.
XPVy opt. XP^^V, inf. xPV^o-h (poet. xp^;'); imperf. xp^" or ixpw. 'Airo-
Xptl, «^ suffices, inf. dTroxp^;', imperf. dw^xPVy [Ion. dvoxp^, diroxpav^
dirixpa ;] diroxpvo'ei, dTrixPV*^^' (!•)
XpT]t« (XP??5-), Ion. XP'H^l*** w.'a?i<, «s^, XPW^ [^on. xp^td'w], txpv<^a., [Ion.
exp^i"(ja]. Xp^s and xp^ (as if from xpdu)), occasionally have the meaning
of XP^/fets. XPVt^t- (4.)
XpCci), anoint, sting, xpla-o), expt<ra, KixP^P^f- (or -t(r/tat), €Xpl<T67)v.
XpwvvtJjJii (xpw-), coZor, also XP<^1<*>> KixP^<^P^o-h expi^<yOW' (H-)
^d«, nt5, with 97 for d in contracted forms (§ 98, N. 2), ^^, ^^v, e^i;, &c.;
gen. in compos., -xpi^au}, -exj/rja-a, -xp-fjcoimi., -kyj/rjcdixriv.
"■ '^'cvSo), deceive, ^eiJcrw, erj/evaa, e^eucr/uai, ixpeiadriv, ypevad-fjaofiai, ; xpe^a-ofiai,
e\f/evad/j,r]v. § 16, 1, 2, 3.
^1JX« ii^vx-), cool, ^<i^(*}, exj/v^a, eyj/vyimi., ixf/ix^W, [^vxH(^oiiaL Ion.]; 2 a.
p. kyl/vxw or (generally later) ixl/vyrju (stem ^uT-)* (2.)
ft.
'i20l« ((1&0-), push, impf. gen. ew^ow (§ 104); dicrw [poet. w^tJctw], Iwo-a [Ion.
Sxra], eioa-fxaL [Ion. -cDcr/iat], iioadrjv ; uxr6iicop.aL ; f. m. ^aofiai, a. m.
ewadfXTjv [Ion. uxTdfirjv]. (7.)
V 'ilv^ojitti, 6w?/, imp. eiovotJixriv (§ 104) or Covo^ifitjv ; dv-fjaoimi, icovqfxai, kuuTj-
drjp. Classic writers use iirpiafirjp (§ 123) for later wTiffd/xTjv (or ktav-qffd'
INDEXES.
N. B. In these Indexes the principal references are made to
the pages of the Grammar. But a more precise reference to some
part of the page, or to a section, sub-section, or note, is added
in a parenthesis whenever it seemed necessary. For forms of
verbs, see the Catalogue of Verbs. For forms of irregular nouns,
see pp. 50-52.
GEEEK INDEX.
A 1 ; open vowel 6 ; in contraction
(3, 4); becomes r] in temp, aug-
ment 119 (end); d changed to rj
at end of vowel verb stems 131
(1); in vbs. in /xi 156 (N. 1);
changed to v in 2d perf. 132 (3);
c changed to a in liquid stems 133
(4); Doric d for rj 25 (1); a as con-
nect, vowel 144, 147 (1); as suffix
182 (1), 185 (11).
a- or av- privative 188 (a); copula-
tive 188 (N. 2).
^ improper diplith. 6; by contrac-
tion 9 (end).
iiyaQ6s compared 65.
dyycXXo), pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (c);
w. pai-tic. 304 (end).
&ye and &"y€T€ w. imperat. 291 (top).
fi-yeucTTOs, &c. w. gen. 228 (N. 1).
fi,YnP<^S declined 54.
dYvws, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4).
&y\i w. gen. 229 (2).
fi-yo), augm. of ifyayov 120 (N. 4).
dScXjjxJs, voc. &5e\<p€ 33 (top).
-dSfjv, adv. ending 186 {b).
dSvvard eorrtv, &c. 193 (2).
'd^cD, denom. vbs. in 186.
•dTi8<&v, decl. of 47 (N. 2).
dep6os, decl. of 53 (2).
"Aews, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
ai, diphthong 6 ; augmented 122 ;
sometimes elided in poetry 12
(top); short in accentuation 19
(§ 22, K 1).
al, Doric for et' 263 (1).
al8«&s, decl. of 47 (N. 1).
otOe or at ^dp (for eWe, &c.) 289 (1).
■aCvta, denom. vbs. in 186.
atpo), 128 (top) 137 (2, N. 2); pf.
and plpf. mid. 114 (e).
-ats, -aio-a, in aor. partic. (Aeol.)
153 (15).
alirxpos compai'ed 64 (1).
dKovo), 2 perf. 122 (N. 2), 139 (d
N. 1) ; eD or kukus d^Koita 217
(end).
dKpodo(Lai, future 132 (N. 1).
&Kpos w. article 204 (N. 4).
dXc'^M, augment of &\a\Kov 120 (N,
. ^>-
dXT]d^s declined 56.
dXfo-KOnat 135 (N.)
dXXdar<r«, pf. and plpf. mid. inflect-
ed 112, 113, 114 (top).
dXXrjXwv declined 74.
dXXos, decl. of 76 ; w. art. 202
(N. 3).
dXXo Ti 4j ; or dXXo ti ; 307 (3).
dXtlo-KO), formation 130 (N. 3).
dXs declined 41.
dua w. dat. 233 : w. partic. 301
(N. 1).
doe's, dp^, &c., Dor. for iifxeis, &c.
73 (N. 7).
djids and d|i.<5s for rnxirepos (or ifids)
^ 74 (N. 1).
d}i'Tri(rxv4op.ai 120 (3).
dfi-vvft) 128 (top); w. ace. and dat.
(Hom.) 231 (N. 3); dfiwddu 152
(11).
dn<|>t w. gen., dat., and accus. 239,
242.
d(JL<biivwni, augment 124 (N. 3).
d)Ji(|>i(rpT|T^a>, augment 124 (N. 3).
du<|>« and d}j4<^T6pos 70 ; w. art. 204
(N. 2).
dv (Epic /c^), adv. 253^256 : see
Contents, p. xxiii. Two uses : in
apodosis 253, in protasis and final
cl. 254. In apodosis, w. second-
ary tenses of indie. 254 (3), 263
(2), 264 (2), 267 (2), 272 (&), 276
(2); w. optative 255 (§ 210), 263
(2), 265 (2), 269 (2), 272 (b), 276
(4); w. fut. indie. (Hom.) 254
(§ 208, 2); w. subj. used as fut.
864
GREEK INDEX.
(Horn.) 255 (2), 291; w. infin.
and partic. in apod. 255, 285, 273
(top). In protasis w. subj. 254
(end), 263 (2), 265 (1), 269 (1),
270 ; dropped when subj. becomes
opt. 282 (3). In final clauses w.
ws, Sttws, and 6(ppa 260 (N. 2).
Omitted in protasis (in poetry) 269
(N. 2), 271 (N. 2), 277; in apodo-
sis 268 (N. 1), 270 (N. 1); not
used w. ^5et, xPWy ^^- ^ apod.
268 (N. 2) ; repeated in long apod.
256 (2) ; ellipsis of vb. 256 (3) ;
used only w. first of several vbs.
256 (4). See cdv, ijv, dv(d), and
Tdxa.
&v (d) for idv {el &v) 263 (2).
avfordi'c£(Hom.) 12 (N. 3).
av- privative : see a- privative.
&v (a &v) by crasis 11, 275 (N.).
-dv for -6.WV in gen. pi. 31 (4).
dvd w. dat. and ace. 238, 239, 242 ;
w. gen. 239 (3).
&va, up! 242 (N. 5).
avd-yK-q w. infin. 294 (1).
dvaXCo-K« and dvaXdto augment 120
(N. 1).
dvdgios w. gen. 227 (N.).
&v€v w. gen. 237, 229 (K).
dv^X"> augment 124 (N. 3); w. par-
^ tic. 303 (1).
dv^p declined 48 ; avfip 11.
dvoi^o), augment 123 (§ 104, N. 1).
dvTt w. gen. 236.
d^ios declined 53. fi^tos and d^tow
w. gen. 227 (N.).
Airats, adj. of one ending 57 (N. 4);
w. gen. 228 (N. 2).
direipos w. gen. 228 (N". 1).
d-n-KTreci) w. dat. 230 (end).
dirXoos, dirXovs declined 55, 56.
dird w. gen. 236 ; for iv w. dat. 242
^ (N. 6).
diroSCSwjxi and diroSCSouai 245 (N.
3).
dTrdWvfii, augm. of plpf. 122 (N. 2).
'AiroXXwv, accus. 37 (N. 1); voc. 21
(1, K), 38 (N.).
diroXo7eo|j.ai, augment 124 (top).
dirTw and dirTO|i.ai 246 (top).
dp (Hom. for Apal2 (N. 3).
dpa, dpa ov, and dpa ^i\, interrog.
306 (end).
dpapf(rK(i>, Att. redupl. 122, 129
(end), 134 (c).
dp7vp€os, dp-yvpovs, declined 55 ; ac-
cent 34 (N. 2).
dpi- intensive prefix 188 (N. 1).
-apiov, dimin. in 184 (8).
dptrTjv or dpprjv 59 (N. 3).
do-o-a or drra 76 (2).
da-o-aordTTtt 77 (N. 1).
do-TTip, decl. 48 (N. 1).
dcrrpdirrei without subj. 193 (e).
dcTTv, declined 44.
-arai, -aro (for -Krai, -vto) in 3 pers.
plur. 151 (end).
dre w. partic. 301 (end).
drcp w. gen. 237, 229.
drcpos 11 (N. 2).
-aro (for -vto) : see -arai.
drra or drra : see do-o-a and drra.
avaCvw, augment 122 (end).
avTdpKT]s, ailrapKCS, accent 21 (1,
K).
avTiKa w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
avT<Js personal pron. 71 (1), 206 (2) ;
intensive adj. pron. 72 (N. 1), 206
(1); w. subst. pron. omitted 206
(1, N.); position w. article 204
(N. 6); for reflexive 206 (2, N.);
compared QQ (end). 6 aur6s 73 (2);
rairov, &c. 73 (N.).
avTov, &c. for eavrov 73.
6.i^Lr\\iif augment 124 (N. 3); opt.
forms 176 (K 1).
dx6o(i4v<}) rivC k<mv 232 (N. 5).
d\pi as prepos. w. gen. 237, 229
(N.); as conj. 279.
-d«, denom. vbs. in 186; contract
forms infl. 115-118 ; dial, forms
154, 155.
B, middle mute, labial, and sonant
8 ; euph. changes before a lingual
14 (1), bef. <r 14 (2), bef. fi 14 (3);
inserted between fi and X or /> 13
(N. 1); changed to ^ in pf. act.
138 (&).
paCvo), formation 129 (4, N. 1).
pdKXos {kx) 13.
Pao-iX6ia 30, 182 (a-, N.): /Sao-tXeta
30, 183 (N. 2).
Poo-iXevs declined 45 ; compared 66
(3).
GREEK INDEX.
365
Boo-iXcvd), denom. 186 ; w. gen. 223
(3); aor. of 247 (N. 5).
6X.£tt« {/xeXiT-) by syncope 13 (IST. 1).
Bop€as, Boppas, declined 31 (N. 1).
PovXop.ai, augment 120 (N. 2); ^o6-
Xet in indie, (not ^oijXr]) 146 (N.
2); ^ovXoi/xrjv dv and i^ovXo/xrju 6.v
272 (6); /SoivXei or ^oiXeade w. in-
teiTog. subj. 291 (end); ^ovXofjL^uii)
TLvL eaTLP, &c. 232 (N. 5).
poi)s declined 45, 46 ; stem in com-
pos. 187 (N.).
ppoTos itiop-), by sj'^ncope 13 (N. 1).
pvv^o) (/3v- ye.) 129 (3).
r, middle mute, palated, and sonant
8 ; w. sound of v before K,y, x, or
I 8 (top) ; euph. changes before lin-
gual 14 (1), bef. o-14(2);ch. tox
in pf. act. 138 (6).
■yatmrip, decl. of 48.
•ye'Yova as pres. 247 (N". 6).
7€Xa<r€C«, desider. vb. 186 (N. 1).
Y€vvd8as, adj. of one ending 57
(N. 4).
■yepas declined 47.
•Y€va> w. ace. and gen. 223 (N. 3):
yevofxaL w. gen. 222 (2),
■y-g omitted after article 201 (N. 4).
■yf-yas declined 40.
•yi-yvop-at 130, 134 (c); copul. vb.
194 (Rem.); w. gen. 221 ; w. poss.
dat. 232 (4).
YfyvwcTKft), redupl. in pres. 129 (end);
w for 130 (top).
"YXvkiIs declined 57, 58.
7pavs declined 45, 46.
Ypd<t>a) and 7pd<{>o|iai 245 (N. 3);
eypdcprjv 246 (top); ypdcpojxaL w.
cogn. accus. 214, w. gen. 224 (2).
A, middle mute, lingual, and sonant
8 ; euph. changes before lingual
14 (1), bef. PL 14 (3), dropped bef.
0- 14 (2); inserted in dvdpds (dp'/jp)
13 (IsT. 2), 48, before -arai and
-aro (in Hom.) 151 (end).
8a-, intens. prefix 188 (K 1).
8a£» (5a-) 128 (3, N.).
8ap.vdw (dafi-) 129 (4, N. 1).
8avc£t» and 8av€C|;o)i.ai. 245 (N. 2).
84s, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
84, in 6 jUv ... 6 84 204, 205 (N. 1
and 2); in apodosis 274 (2).
-8e, local ending 52 ; enclit. 23.
8€i, impers.: see 8€«, want.
8€£8oiKa and 8€i8ia (Hom.) 121 (top).
8eiKvvp.i, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; in-
flection of /ii-forms 159-165 ; w.
partic. 305 (top) ; partic. deiKviJS
declined 60.
8eiva, pron., declined 77.
8€op.ai w. gen. or w. gen. and ace.
223 (K 1).
84pKO|Jiat 133 (4, N. 1).
8€(r|ids (-0--) 181 (N. 5) heterog. 50
(2).
8€o-ir6TT]s, voc. of 30 (N. 2).
8€xaTai (Hom.) as perf. 124.
8€w, biTid, contraction 118 (N. 1).
8€a), want, contraction 118 (N. 1),
in Hdt. 155 (2, a). Impers. 8€i
193 (N. 2); w. gen. and dat. (rare-
ly ace.) 223 and 224, 231 (top); deiv
for 6X170^ detu, almost, 298 ; Siov
(ace. abs.) 302; ev6i, &c. w. d^ovres
70 (N. 2, b); ^dei in apod, without
dp 268 (N. 2). See 8€0|jLat.
8if]Xot without subj. 192 (c).
8i]X6s €lp.i w. partic. 305 (N. 1).
8'r]Xd(i), inflect, of contract forms 115-
118; infin. 10 (N. 2), 118 (N. 5);
pres. partic. drjXwp declined 62.
Afjp.'/JT'qp declined 48 (3); accent of
voc. 21.
-8t]v or -d8T]v, adv. in 186 (18).
-811$, patronym. in 184 (9).
8ia w. gen. and ace. 238, 242.
8iaiTdw, augm. 124 (top).
8taKov€«, augm. 124.
8iaX67op,ai, pf. 121 (top); w. dat.
233 (N. 1).
8iaT€X4« w. partic. 303 (1), 304 (N.).
8i8do-Ka), formation 130 (N. 3); w.
two ace. 217 ; causative in mid.
245 (K 2).
818(0^1, synopsis 159, 165, 166 ; infl.
of ^t-forms 159-165; redupl. 157
(3), 168 (2); impf. 158 (top), cona-
tive 246 (N. 2); aor. in ku 137 (1,
N. 1).
81KTIV, adverbial accus. 215 (2).
8iopv(r(r6>, augm. of plpf. 122 (N". 2).
8idTi 288 ; w. inf. (Hdt.) 294 (top).
866
GREEK INDEX.
SiirXdo-ios, &c. (as compar. ) w. gen.
225 (N. 1).
8i\j/dci), contraction 118 (N. 2).
8i«Kde« 152 (11).
SfjLois, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
8oi<6, Boioi (Honi.) 69 (N. 1).
-8ov (-5d) or -T]86v, adv. in 186 (18).
SoK^o) (doK-) 130 ; inipers. doKei 193
(N. 2); ^8o^e or didoKxai in decrees,
&c. 298 (end); (ws) ifiol boKelv
298.
Spao-eici), desider. vb. 186 (N. 1).
8pdo) 131 ; 2 a. ^Spct;/ 169 (N. 1).
Svvanai 168 (1); accent of subj. and
opt. 158 (N. 2); ^pw 158 (N. 3).
8vo declined 69 ; w. pi. noun 197
(N. 6).
8vor-, inseparable prefix 188 (b) ; augm.
of vbs. compounded with 124.
E, open short vowel 6 ; in contrac-
tion 9 (3, 4); as syll. augm. 119,
120, 121, before a vowel 123 ; be-
comes 71 in temp. augm. 119 (end),
rarely ei 121 ; length, to -q at end of
vowel verb stems 131 (1), in vbs. in
/it 156 (K 1); length, to ci when
cons, are dropped bef. a 15 (6), in
aor. of liq. stems 137 (2), in delvai
and dvai 156 (N. 1), in 2 a. p.
subj. (Hom.) 153 (12, c) in 2 a.
act. subj. of /ii-forras (Hom.) 171
(h), coj to el(j} in pres. (Horn.) 155
(c); changed to d in liq. stems 133
(4); ch. to in 2 pf. 132 (3), rarely
in 1 pf. 133 (3, N. 2), in nouns
181 (N. 5); fut. liquid stems in e
136 ; e added to stem in pres. 130,
in other tenses 134 ; inserted for <t
in fut. 136 (c); dropped by svncope
13, 47, 48; dropped in eeo (Hdt.)
and dropped or contracted in eai
and eo (Hom.) 155 (2, &); as con-
necting vowel 144, 145, 152 (10,
11).
1, pron. 71, 72 ; use in Attic 205.*
-tain plpf. act. (Ion.) 152 (4); contr.
to 77 in Att. 146 (N. 4).
-€ai, for €<rai in verbal endings, contr.
t0 77oretlO(K 1), H5(N. 1), 151
(2) : see -co.
Idv, for d &v 254, 263, 269, 270.
-cas, in ace. pi. of 3 decl., contr. to
ets9 (3, N.), 42, 43, 44; seldom
contr. in nouns in eus 45 (3, N. 2).
lavTov, declined 73 ; synt. 206.
€77vs, adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
€7eip« 128 (top); pf. and plpf. mid.
114 (e); Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1).
c-yx^^^Sj decl. of 44 (end).
€7(0, declined 71, 72 ; generally omit-
ted 192 (N. 1), 143 (foot-note).
ilvv (of 8a5<B) 158 (end), 169 (3);
synopsis 159 ; inflected 161, 162.
«, for e, Hom. pron. 72 (N. 2).
'mv, for o5 72 (N. 2).
€ett«, pf. and plpf. mid. infl. 114
(c).
€1, length, from e : see e ; from i 125
(II.), 127 {d); as augm. (for ee)
123, for redupl. in pf. 121 (top).
61, if, 263, 267, 269, 270 ; v:hether,
307 ; ei, eWe, and et ydp in wishes
289, 290.
ctSov w. partic. 303 (3).
6lKd0w, clKdeoi|ii, &c. 152 (11).
ciKwv, decl. of 47 (N. 2).
ciftapTtti, augm. 121 (top).
€l|iC, conjug. 172, 173; as copula and
as subst. vb. 191 (N. 1); w. pred.
nom. 194 ; w. poss. or part. gen.
221; w. poss. dat. 232 (4); lariv
O'i, ^(TTLV o5, i(7TLV Tj OV StTWS 210
(N. 2) ; €K(hu ehat, rb vvv elvaif
KUTCL TovTo ehai, &c. 298 ; accent
(enclitic) 23^ 24 ; accent of (uv,
6uTos 22 (3, N. 2).
ctjjii, conjug. 174; pres. as fut. 247
(top).
clo for od, 72 (N. 2).
etirov w. oTi or ws 293 (end) ; ws
(^TTOs) eiVei;/ 298.
€l'p7«, &c. w. gen. 225; w. infin. or
in fin. w. Tov and /a^ (6 forms), 295,
296.
€l'pT]Ka, augm. 121 (top).
-€is, -60-<ra, -6V, adj. in, decl. 57, 58,
15 (N. 2); formation 185 (15).
els w. accus. 237 ; for ev w. dat. 242
^ (N. 6).
€is, |Aia, ^v, declined 69 ; compounds
of 70.
eto-o), adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
€l'T€ . . . dn (ij) 307 (5).
6t«0a, 2 pf. 123, 130, 133 (3, N. 1).
GREEK INDEX.
367
CK or II, fonii 12 (2); k iinclianged in
comp. 14 (N. 1; 3, N.); e long
before liquid 18 (top); accent 24
(end); w. gen. 237, lor iy w. dat.
242 (N. 6).
^KaoTTos, €KdT€pos, &c. w. aiticlc 204
(K 2).
4k€ivos 75, 208: ^^/cetj/oo-/ 75 (K. 2).
4kci and ckciOcv 79.
€K6i<re 52, 79, 186.
Iktos, adv. w. gen. 229 (2).
Ikwv ctvai 298.
IXdo-orwv 66 (5), 15 (a).
i\avv<a, form of pres. 129 (N. 2);
fut. 136(&); sense 243 (N. 2).
iXdxeia (Horn.), eXdxtcrros 66 (5).
i\a.(a for iXaau) 136 (6) : see IXoco.
^Xc'tX"* pf- and plpf. infl. 112, 113,
114 (top).
2Waxov, &c., (Horn.) for ^Xaxov,
120 (N. 5).
(K6(a, Honi. fut. of iXaiJvu}, &c. 154
(end of 6).
IXiri^o), &c. w. fut. infin. or pres.
and aor. 251 (N. 2).
IXirCs, declined 40; accus. sing. 37(2).
l|j,avToO declined 73; synt. 206.
€Ji£0€V, €(Jt€lO, €fJL€0, €(WV 72 (N. 2).
€H€«vToi) (Hdt.) 74 (top\
ilLCv (Dor. for i/Moi) 73 (N. 7).
Ijifxcv or '4\L\Livai, gjicv or ^jicvai, for
elmi 173, 172 (9).
4|jLos 74, 207.
€|j.iTi'irXT|}jLt and IjiirCirpTUJii 168 (N. 1).
gjiirpoo-eev w. gen. 229 (2).
-€V for -Tjaav (aor. p.) 152 (9).
6V, w. dat. 237; in comp. 233; in
expr. of time 235 (N. 1); euph.
ch. bef. liquid 15 (6), but not
before o-, f; or /j 15 (N. 3).
IvavT^os w. gen. 228 (end); w. dat.
232 (end).
tviKOL w. gen. 237, 229 (N.).
?V€<rTi impers. 193 (N. 2).
ivQa, HvQiv 79.
^vi for ^vecTTL 242 (N. 5).
Ivioi and cviotc 210 (N. 2).
Ivoxos w. gen. 228 (top).
6VT0S w. gen. 229 (2).
15 : see €K.
€|ai4>vT|s w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
Kico-Ti impers. 193 (N. 2); i^ijv in
apod, without d*/ 268 ( N. 2).
i^ov, ace. abs. 302 (2).
?g«w. gen. 229 (2).
CO and cow contr. to ov 9 (2), to ev
(Ion.) 25 (3).
-€o for -€<To 145 (N. 1.), 151 (2).
^o for o5 72 (N. 2).
€oi for of 72 (N. 2).
goiKtt (iK-) 123, 132 (3).
k6s for 6's (poss.) 74 (N. 1).
€0v : see co.
cirdv and ciredv {iwel &p), 275 (N.).
iird and circtSTJ 275, 288; w. infin.
in or. obi. 294 (top).
lireiSdv 254, 275, 276.
€ir^v 254, 275, 276.
cirC w. gen., dat., and accus. 239; in
comp. 233.
2iri for ^ireart 242 (N. 5).
einQv\U(a w. gen. 222 (2), 218
(Rem.).
lirCarra^iaiieS (1); wliTTuUS (N.3);
accent of subj. aij^ opt. 158 (N. 2);
w. partic. 80^
€irpid(J(flv-(*rpia-) 158 (end); synop-
. sis 159; inflected 164, 165.
Ip^<r<rt«), stem eper- 127 (a, N.).
cpi-, in tens, prefix 188 (N. 1.).
cpiSaivo) 129 (4, N. 1).
ipiloiw. dat. 233 (N. 1).
?pis, accus. of 37 (2).
'Epp.£as, 'Epulis, declined 30.
ipwrana w. two accus. 217.
6S, stems of 3 decl. in 42.
Is w. accus. 237 : see ds.
-€<r<ri in dat. pi. (Hom. ) 49.
ka-a-i (Hom.) 173 (N. 2), 142 <N).
'^<ror«v 65.
'dim, until 279.
-€'<rT€pos, -£0-TaT0s 64 (N. 4).
i<rrC,w. ending ti 142 (N.); accented
^(TTi 24 (3, N. 1).
itrriv oi (oO, y, S'ttwj) 210 (N. 2).
€<rT«s (for ea-raws), loTwo-a, Icrrrfs
(Ion. eo-rews) 62 (N.), 139 (N. 3),
167.
?<rxaTos w. article 204 (N. 4).
'4<r<a w. gen. 229 (2) : see et<x(a.
IWGtiv for ededrjv 16 (2, N.).
?T€pos w. gen. 225 (N. 1).
l-nuetiv for edvdriv 16 (2, N.).
6v contr. from eo or eov (Ion.) 25 (3).
€v to € (through iF) 45 (N. 1), 126
(2).
368
GREEK INDEX.
ti, augm. of vbs. compounded w.
124 (2); w. TTot^oj, Trdtrxw, aKoOu,
&c. 217 (end); w. irpdcrau 218
(top).
€v, pron. for o5 72 (N. 2).
€v8atjia)v declined 66, 57; accent 21
(1, N.).
cileXiris, 57 (N. 3), accus. 37 (2).
€V€p"y€T€'«, augm. 124 (2).
€veu w, gen. 229 (2).
€i9vs w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
evKXe'ris, 43 (N. 4).
eiJvoos, eiJvovs, compared 64 (K. 3).
€vpia-K<a w. partic. 303 (2).
ei)pos, accus. of specif. 215 (1).
cvpvs, wide, Horn. ace. of 59 (N. 1).
-6VS, nouns in 45, 182 (2).
-€iJw, denom. vbs. in 186.
|4j>opd(o w. partic. 303 (3).
ki>' w or €<!> wT€ w. infin. 297 (end) ;
w. fut. ind. 278 (N. 2).
Ixpfjv or XP'H^ i^ apod, without dv
268 (N. 2).
?X<«> w. partic. for perf. 303 (N. 2).
exofiat 246 (top); w. gen. 222 (1).
4x®P^s compared 64 (1).
-€ft) for -aw in vbs. (Hdt.) 155 (1, d).
-€w in fut. of liquid stems 136 (2).
-6w and -ewv, Ion. gen. of 1st decl. 31.
-€ws, -€«v, Att. 2d decl. in 33.
'i<as, dawn 33 (N". 1).
il«s, conj. 274 (Rem.); while 27Q (3);
u7Uil 279, 280, expr. purpose 280
(N.^2), in indir. disc. 287 (3).
IwvTov, for iavTov (Hdt.) 74 (top).
Z, double cons. 7; origin 7 (§ 5, 2);
makes position 17; verb stems in
127 (i); syll. augment before 121
(2).
^a-, intens. prefix 188 (N. 1).
td», contr. form of 118 (N. 2).
-If, adv. in 52, 186.
-5», verbs in 127, 186; fut. of 136.
H, open long vowel 6; in Ton. for
Dor. d 25; a and e length, to t)
119, 131, d to 77 132, 156 (K 1
and b); conn, vowel in subj. 146;
-Tj for -ea in plpf. act. 146 (N. 4),
152 (4).
-XI for eaat or Tjffai in 2 pers. sing.
10 (N. 1), 145, 146, 151 (2).
■1^, whether (Hom.), or, interrog. 307;
than, omitted 226 (N. 2).
i\yfo\Kai w. gen. (or dat.) 223 (3).
r|8o}icv(i> <ro{ ccrrtv, &c. 232 (No. 5).
TJSvs compared 64 (1) ; ijdiup de-
clined 65.
■f|€, T)€, interrog. (Hom.) 307.
i]iCSr\s, &c. (olSa) 179.
XJeiv (el/At) 174.
■fJKKTTa (superl.) 65.
^K«, as perf. 246 (N. 3).
inXlKOS 78.
i^|xai, conjug. 177.
f||ids or iQp,as 72 (N. 5).
Ti}jL€T€pos 74, 207 ; w. aurwv 207
(N. 4).
Tj{jit-, insepar. particle 188 {d).
r]\iCv, ^pv 72 (N. 5).
^v for edv (e/ a^) 263 (2).
i]vCKa, rel. adv. 79.
iSirap declined 41.
'HpaKX^Tjs 43 (N. 3).
^pws declined 47 (N. 1).
-Tjs, comp. adj. in 185 (17); 189 (6).
-t]S, in nom. pi. of nouns in -ci/s 45
(3, N. 2).
X{<ri or xis, in dat. pi. 1 decl. (Ion.) 31.
^a-<ro}v (comp.) 65.
T]v, diphthong 6 ; augm. of eu 122
(end).
if|X« decl. 46.
if|«s (Ion.) decl. 47 (N. 1).
0, rough mute, lingual, and surd 8 ;
euph. changes before lingual 14
(1), bef. fi 14 (3), dropped bef. <r
14(2).
GdXao-o-a decl. 29.
Qa\iil(a w. partic. 304 (N.).
ediTTw iTa4)-) 16 (2, N.).
Odpo-os and Opdo-os 13 (top),
edo-o-tov 16 (2, K), 64 (1).
0dT€pov 11 (N. 2).
0avfidt« w. gen. 222 (2), 224 (1) ;
6avixd^(j} el 274.
OcXcis or 0€X6T€ w. interrog. subj. 291
(end).
-e€v, -Oe, local end. 52, 186.
0€ds, vocative 33 (top).
O^pojxai, fut. of 137 (N. 4).
GREEK INDEX.
369
0^p declined 41.
OtIjs declined 41.
-01, local end. 52, 186. -^linlstaor.
pass, imper. becomes rt after drj-
16 (3), 149 (3).
evT]U-Kft) {Oav-), metath. 134 (a); 77
for a 130 (N. 2); fut. perf. act.
139 (c, N. 2); perf. as pres. 247
(N. 6).
Oolfidriov (by crasis) 11.
eplg, rpix^s 16 (2, N.).
Ovydrtip declined 48.
I, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil, vowel
10, 44 (N. 3); length, to 1119 (end),
125 (II.), 128, 131, to et 125 (IL);
t added to demonstr. 75 (N. 2);
modal sign in opt. 146 (end); in
redupl. of pres. stem 129 (end),
157 (3), 168 (2); representing^ of
ja 15 (7), 16.
I'a for /iia (Horn.) 69 (N. 1).
Idojiat 131 (end).
-^8t]s, patronym. in 184 (9).
-CSiov, diminutives in 184 (8).
tSpts declined 57 (N. 2).
iSpoo), contraction 118 (N. 3).
l8pvv0Tiv (iSpOo:) 140 (VI. N. 2).
t€ or IT] as modal sign in opt. 146
(end), 147 (3).
-C|«, denominative verbs in 186.
i7]iLi conjug. 175, 176; aor. in /ca 137
(1, N. 1).
Uv€0(jiai 129 (3).
-iKOs, adj. in 185 (13).
tXcws adj. declined 54.
-IV in ace. sing. 37 (2).
tv, Doric for o'i 73 (N. 7).
iva final conj. 259, 260, 261.
-lov, diminutives in 184 (8).
-los, adj. in 185 (12).
linrdTa, nom. (Horn.) 31 (2).
'lorOjiot 52 (N. 2).
-Co-Kos, -ia-KT}, dimin. in 184 (8).
I'o-os w. dat. 233.
l<nr\\Li, synopsis 159, 166, 167; in-
flect, of /ut-forms 159-165; redupl.
of pres. 157 (3), 168 (2); fut. perf.
act. 139 {c, N. 2); partic. lards
declined 59.
l\Qvs declined 44.
*Iw, accus. 'lovp (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3).
-W, patronym. in 184 (9, N.).
-ictfv, -lOTOs, comp. and superl. in 64.
K, smooth mute, palatal, surd 8 ;
euph. ch. before lingual 14 (1),
bef. fi 14 (3), w. a- forms ^ 14 (2);
ch. to X in pf. act. stem 138 (6).
K in om 12 (2).
-Ktt in aor. of three vbs. 137 (1,
K 1).
KdppoXe (Kar^^aXe) 12 (IST. 3).
KaOc^ofiai and Ka9cv8«, augment 124
jN.3).
Kd6T]p.ai conjug. 177.
KaQil(a, augment 124 (N. 3).
KaGCoTTijii as copul. vb. 194 (Rem. ).
Kal Tov w. infin. 205.
Ka£-ircp w. partic. 301 (N. 1).
Kat« 128 (3).
KaKos compared 65.
KdKTav€ {KariKTave) l2 (N. 3).
KoXco), fut. in -dio, Q 136 (a); perf.
opt. (])oet.) 150 (1); perf. as pres.
247 (N. 6).
KoXds compared 65.
koXvPt] and KaXiJirrw 126 (III.).
KdjtiTTw, pf. mid. 14 (3, N. ), 114
(a).
Kdr (Hom.) for Kard 12 (N. 3).
Kard, prep. w. gen. and accus. 238,
242; in comp. 224 (end).
K^ra (/cat elra) 11.
KaTT]-yop4ci>, augment 124 (top).
KarOavciv (KaTadaveip) 12 (N. 3).
K€or K€vl2 (1, N. 1), 253.
K€i(Lai conjug. 178.
Kcivos (for tKetvos) 75 (end).
KcXevo) w. accus. and inf. 231 (2,
N. 2).
K^pas declined 47.
K€p8a£vft) 129 (4, N. 1), 133 (6).
K^ws, accus. of 83 (N. 1).
KT]pva-o-€i. without subj. 192 (d),
Ki\pr]\Li 168 (2).
KXaCo) 128 (3).
icXavo-idd), desider. vb. 186 (N. 1).
-KXe'T]s, proper nouns in, decl. 43.
KXcirrris, compared 66 (end).
kX^vo), drops V 133 (6); 114 (d).
KXi<r£Ti<|>i 52 (N. 3).
Kvdo), contraction 118 (N. 2).
KpiCa-a-civ, KpdTio-TOS 65 (1).
24
370
GREEK INDEX.
Kp^ua|iai 168 (1); accent of subj.
and opt. 158 (N. 2).
Kpi'vo), drops 1^ 133 (6).
Kpv<j>a w. gen. 229 (2).
KTaojiai, augm. of perf. 121 (N. 2);
perf. subj. and opt. 150 (1).
KT€£v« 128 (top), 133 (4, N. 1), 134
(top).
Kv8pds compared 64 (end).
kvkXw 236 (N. 2).
Kwc'co (kv-) 129 (3).
KVCiDV, KxlvTepOS, KVVTttTOS 66 (3).
KwXvift), accent of certain forms 110
(N. 3).
K<5s, accus. of, 33 (N. 1).
A, liquid 7, sonant 8 ; XX after syll.
augm. (Hom.) 120 jN. 5).
Xa-yxo-v" and Xa)i.pdvci>, augm. of
perf. 121 (top).
Xa|j.irds declined 40.
XavOdvo) (Xa^-) 129 (top); w. partic.
304 (4).
Xdo-Kw (XaK-), formation 130 (N. 3).
Xc'-yo), collect, augm. of perf. 121 (top).
Xiyta, say, constr. of 293 (end); X^-
yov(7L 192 (N. 1, h) ; Xeyerai
omitted 299 (§ 273).
Xct-iro) (XtTT-), synopsis 88, 89; mean-
ing of tenses 92; 2d perf. plpf.,
and aor. inflected 104-106.
\i<av declined 39.
XoiSope'o) w. ace. and Xoi8opeo{xai w.
dat. 231 (2, N. 2).
XvcD, synopsis 86, 87; meaning of
tenses 92 ; conjug. 94-103 ; Xvojv
and XeXvKws declined 59, 60; quan-
tity of u 132 (N. 1).
Xwb>v, XiSoTos 65 (1).
M, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ;
fi^X and fji8p for /aX and /ip 13
(N. 1).
-jjia, neut. nouns in 183 (4).
Hd, in oaths, w. ace. 216.
Hatop.at (/xa-) 128 (3, N.).
UttKpos, decl. of 53; fxaKpcp w. comp.
^234 (2).
(idXa compared (/taXXoi', fiaXiara) 67
(end).
MapaOwvi, &c., dat. of place 236
(N. 1).
(idxo|xaiw. dat. 233 (N. 1).
p-e'-yas declined 62, 63; compared 65.
p,e^a)V for fxel^cav 65, 15 (end).
-p,€0ov in 1st pers. dual 146 (N. 3).
^dyav 65, 15 (end).
p,€ipop.ai, augm. of perf. 121 (top).
p.€£cDv, p.€io-Tos 66 (5).
p.€Xas declined 58, 59.
jjLcXei w. dat. and gen. 223 (top), 231
(top).
p.eXX(i> augment 120 (N". 2); w. infm.
as periph. fut. 151 (6), 250 (K).
}M'(jLVTip.ai, perf. subj. and opt. 150
(1); as pres. 247 (N. 6); w. partic.
304 (end).
p.6V, iubixiv . . .6 5^ 204, 205.
-H€vai,-jji6v,ininfin. 153(14), 172(9).
Mcve'Xeojs and Mcvc'Xdos, accent 33
(N. 2).
p,€VT&v (1)}' crasis), 11.
pietrTifJLPpta 13 (N. 1).
p.€o-os, compar. 64 (N. 2); w. art.
204 (N. 4).
p-erd, prep. w. gen., dat., and ace.
239, 240, 242; ixiTo. (Hom.) for
fxireari 242 (N. 5).
p.€Tap,€X€t w. gen. and dat. 223 (top);
231 (top).
p,€Tagv w. gen. 237, 229 (N.); w.
partic. 301 (N. 1).
p.cTairoicop.ai w. gen. 221 (end).
p,€'TC(rTt w. gen. and dat. 222 (top),
231 (top).
p.6T6X« w. gen. 221 (end).
p-eVoxos w. gen. 228 (top).
fi€v 72 (N. 2).
p,expi, fvs prep. w. gen. 229 (N, ) 237;
as conj. 279, with subj. without
d:i'280 (N. 1).
p,i^, adv., not, 307-309; w. Xva, dlTrws,
&c. in final and object clauses 260
(N. 1); in protasis 263 (3); in rel.
cond. sent. 275; in wishes 289 (1);
w. imperat. and subj. in prohibi-
tions 290, 291; w. dubitative subj.
291; w. infin. *308 (3); 282 (4);
w. infin. and iba-re 279 (Rem.),
297 ; w. infin. after negative verb
295, 296. See ov (i^ and |i^ ov.
|jLTi8e, p^T€, &c. 307, 309; /xi^Sets and
liy)5k eh 70 (top).
JJ111K€TI, 12 (2).
ji^Tt]p, decl. of48(N. 1).
GREEK INDEX.
371
IMfJTis (poet.) 76; accent 24 (N. 3).
\Lii ov 309 (7), 295, 296; one syllable
ill poetry, 11 (N. S); /xr) . . . ov in
final cl. 260 (top).
-jjit in Istpers. sing. 85 (3, N.), 142,
147 (1), 156.
(jLiKpos compared QQ :
|jLifxvi^(rK6>, augment of perf. 121
(N. 2); -n for a 130 (N. 2). See
|xep,VT]iJLai.
jjL^v and vtv 72 (N. 4).
Mtvws, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
jxio-ew w. accus. 231 (2, N. 2).
fjno-eoo), middle of 245 (N. 2).
fivda, |iva, declined 30.
fioX- in pf. of j3Xwo-/cw 13 (IST. 1).
nop- in ^por6s 13 (N. 1).
-itos, nouns in 182 (3); adj. in 185
(17).
fiovvos iixbpos) 25 (3).
(xvpioi and |jivpioi 70 (2, N. 3).
|jivp£os, [ivpia 70 (2, N. 3).
jtwv [m odv), interrog. 306 (end).
N, liquid, nasal, and sonant 7, 8 ;
euph. cli. before lalnal and palatal
15 (5), before liquid and a 15 (6);
in €v and <xiv 15 (N. 3); dropped
in some vbs. in vw 133 (6), or
changed to a bef. /xat 15 (N. 4) ;
inserted in aor. pass. 140 (VI.
N. 2) ; in 5tli class of verbs 128,
129.
V, case-ending 35 (2, N.).
-vai, infin. in 149 (1), 153 (14),
172 (9): see -(JL€vai.
va£x.i, accent 23 (4).
va{« [va-] 128 (3, K).
vaos, VTjos, and vews 33 (N. 2).
vavs, declined 46; compounds of
{vavjxaxi-O', vavaliropos, vedicroLKOS,
&c.) 187 (1, N.); mO06 52 (N.
3).
vco) (j/i;-) 126 (2).
V€ws declined 33.
VTJ, in oaths, w. accus. 216.
VT)-, insep. neg. Y)refix 188 (c).
vf](ros declined 32.
VT|i)s (for vavs) 46 (N.).
vtt« (vr/3-) 127 (N. 2).
viv and ^iv 72 (N". 4).
v(4>a (accus.) 50 (3).
vo^llto w. infin. 285, 293 (2) ; w.
dat. like xpao^at 234 (IST. 2).
vdos, vovs, declined 34.
-vos, adject, in 185 (14).
vovjjLT]via 235 (N. 2).
-vo-i and -vti in 3d pers. plur. 15
(6), 142, 144, 145, 146, 157 {d).
-VTwv in 3d pers. pi. impel". 148.
vvktC and kv vvkti 235 (N. 1).
vxJv or vv (Ep.) 12 (1, N. 1); enclitic
P (4).
v<3i, vwiv 72 (N. 2).
viotrepos 74 (N. 1).
S, double consonant 7 ; surd 8 ; syll.
augni. before 121 (2).
|€ivos (Ion.) for Jc'vos 25 (2).
ivv for <rv'v, w. dat. 237.
O, open short vowel, 6 ; in contrac-
tion 9 (2), 10 (N. 2), 1 ; length, to w
119 (end), 132 (3); to ov 15 (6),
in Ion. 25 (2); for e in 2 pf. 132
(3>, rarely in 1 pf. 133 (3, N, 2),
in nouns 181 (N. 5); as conn,
vowel 144, 145, 147 ; as suffix 182
(1), 185 (11); at end of first part
of compounds 187 (1).
-o, case-ending in gen. sing. 35 (2,
N.) ; for -ao in 2nd pers. sing. 14
(end), 145 (N. 1).
6, T|, T<j, article, decl. of 71 ; syntax
199-205 ; in Hom. 199, 200, in
Attic 200, 201;bfiiv...b 8^ 204,
205 ; proclitic forms 24, when
accented 25 (N. 2). See Article.
6, rel. (neut. of 6's), for 6tl (Hom.)
288 (2).
oYSwKovTtt (Ion.) 69 (N.).
88€, fjSe, ToSc, demonstr. pronoun,
decl. 74, 75 ; syntax 208 ; w. arti-
^ cle 200 (c), 203 (4); 65^ 75 (N. 2).
oSov's, oSdvTos 37 (top).
o6 and oo contracted to ov 9 (2).
0€i contr. to ov 9 (4), to oi (in vbs.
^^ in 00)) 10 (N. 2).
ot,<a w. two gen. 223 (Rem.).
OTj contr. to 0) 9 (2), to 77 9 (2, K).
©■g and oei contr. to 01 (in vbs. in 6w)
10 (N. 2).
60€v 79 ; by assimilation 211 (N. 3).
372
GREEK INDEX.
ot, diphth. 6 ; in 2 pf. for t 132 (3);
augmented to y 122 ; rarely elided
12 (top); short in accent. 19 (2,
N. 1); oiin voc. sing. 46, 47 (N. 2).
ot, pron. 71, 72 ; use in Attic 205.
ol, adv. (whither) 79.
ola w. partic. 301 (end).
ot8a, conjug. 178, 179 ; w. partic.
304, 305 ; olaO' 6 dpaaou 290 (N.).
OlStirovs 49 (a).
-oiTiv, &c. iu opt. act. of contract vbs.
147 (4); in 2 perf. opt. 148 (N. 1).
-oiiv (Ep.) for -oiv in dual 34, 49.
o^KaSe, otKoGcv, oVkoi, oikovSc 52 ;
ohoi 236 (N. 2).
-010 in gen. sing. 34.
ol'o)x.ai, oUi in 2d pers. sing, indie.
^146 (N. 2).
olos 78 ; oiw o-ot 211 (N. 5); ofos re,
able, in Attic 210 (top).
-oto-a for -ov(ra in partic. 153 (15).
-oi<ri in dat. })lur. 34.
o)^XO|JLai, perf. 135 (N.); in prea. as
perf. 246 (end); w. partic. 304
(N.).
6XL70S compared 66 ; oXiyov '{8eiy)
298 (§ 268).
6XX-ujiL (6\-), form of pres. 129 (N.
2), future 130 (a).
6\n\i(a \v. dat. 233.
6\ivv\Li (6/X-, ofjLo-) 135 (N.); w. ac-
cus. 213 (N. 2).
gjiotos w. dat. 233.
6vap 50 (3).
6vlvr\^ii (dua-) 168 (N. 2)'.
6vo\ia. (by name) 215 (1).
ovoftd^ci) w. two accus. 218 ; in pass.
w. pred. noun 194.
6|vva), pf. and plpf. pass. 114 (d).
00 contracted to ov 9 (2).
-oos and -oov, nouns in 33, 34 ; ad-
ject, in 54-56.
gov for o5 78 (top).
6'rrt], oir-qviKa, oiroOev, Sirot 79.
6iria-Qfv\v. gen. ^229 (2).
oiroios, oircJo-os 78.
oiroTc rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; oird-
rav 254, 275.
oirorepos 78.
girov 79.
htrvLvi {dirv-) 128 (3, K).
girws, rel. adv. 79 ; as indir. inter-
rog. w. subj. or opt. 284 ; as final
particle 259, 260, 261, sometimes
w. 6.V 260 (1, N. 2); in obj. cl. w.
fut. ind. 261, rarely w. &v 261 (N.
1); oTTws fiq w. fut. after vbs. of
fearing 262 (N. 1), w. ellipsis of
leading vb. 262 (N. 2). 6w(as for
Cjs in ind. quot. 288.
6pd«, augni. of 123 (N. 1); w. par-
tic. 303 (2), in ind. discourse 304
(end).
(Jpvis declined 40 ; accus. sing. 37
(2); voc. sing. 38 (c).
Ss rel. pron. 77 : see Relative.
(5s, his, poss. (poet.) 74.
6s as demonstr. 209 (N. 3).
60-0-6 w. pi. adj. (Horn.) 197 (N. 6).
6o-T6ov, 6o-TOvv, declined 33, 34.
6a-Tis declined 77 ; Horn, forms 78 ;
as indir. interrog. 306 ( 1 ) ; w. plur.
antec. 209 (N. 2).
6o-(}>pa£vo|iai, formation 129 (4, N.
1); w. gen. 222 (2).
gr' for 6Te (not Srt) 12 (N. 2).
8t€, rel. 79, 275 ; causal 288 ; ^rav
254, 275.
5t€V or StTCU, OT€<i>, 0TC6)V, OT^OlO-l 78
(N. 2).
oTi, that, in ind. quot. 281, 282, 283 ;
in direct quot. 281 (2, N.); because,
causal 288, 289 ; not elided 12
. (N.,2).
OTIS, OTtVa, OTlVaS, 0TT€0, OTTl 78
(top).
ov length, from 15 (6); for in
Ion. 25 (2).
-ov in gen. sing. 28, 31, 32, 35 (2,
N.); for -eao in 2d pers. mid. 145.
ov, ovK, ovx 12 (2); accent 24 (end);
use 263 (3), 260 (top), 307-310 ;
oiiK iad' fiTTOJS, &;c. w. opt. (without
&v) 270 (N. 1). See ov jt^ and
p.'^ ov.
o^, ol, % &c. 71, 72 ; synt. 205.
ov rel. adv. 79.
ovU 307 ; ovbk eh and ovMs 70 (top).
ov8' ois 24 (end); oi>8k iroXXoO Set
224 (top).
ovSeis 70 (top), 307; oiShes kc. 70
(top); ovdeis o'orts ov 211 (N. 4).
OVK : see ov.
OVKCTl 12 (2).
OVK (6 €k) 11.
OV |Ji^ w. fut. ind. or subj. 292.
GREEK INDEX.
373
-oCv in ace. sing. (Hdt.) 47 (N. 3).
oi5v6Ka for ^j'e/ca 229 (N.).
ovm (6 ^7ri) 11.
ovpavoOk 52.
o«s, ear, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
oilre 307.
oiJTts (poet.) 76 (N". 1).
ovTos declined 74, 75 ; use of 208 ;
disting. from cKecpjs and 6'5e 208
(see N. 1); raijTa (dual) rare 197
(N. 5); w. article 200 (c), position
w. art. 203 (4); in exclam. 208
(N. 2); ref. to preceding rel. 210
(N. 3); w. fi^u and 5e 208 (N. 4);
raOra and roOro as adv. accus. 215
(2); o{jToai 75 (N. 2).
ovTcos and ovtw 12 (3).
ovx : see ov.
64>d\<a {6<f>€\-), owe, 128 (K 1);
(506X01/ in wishes 290 (N. 1, 2),
268 (N. 2).
6<}>eWft), increase 128 ("N". 1).
i^eXXo), ow;e (Horn. = d<f>d\b}), 128
(N. 1); impf. ^cpeWov in wishes
290 (N. 1).
6<J)£Xos 50 (3).
84>pa, as final part. 260 ; until 279.
-o« denoni. verbs in 186 ; infl. of
contr. forms 115-118.
-o«, &c. Hom. form of vbs. in aw 154
(6); Hom. fut. in 6w (for dau, dw,
w) 154 (endof &).
n, smooth mute, labial, surd 8 ; eu-
phonic ch. before lingual 14 (1),
bef. fj, 14 (3); with <r becomes ^14
(2); ch. to <p in perf. act. 138 (6).
irai^w, double stem 127 (N. 1).
irais, accent 22 (3, N. 1); voc. sing.
38 (c).
irdXai w. pres. (inch perf.) 247 (N.
4).
irdp for irapd (Hom.) 12 (N. 3).
TTopd, w. gen., dat., and accus. 240,
242 ; in comp. 233.
irdpa for -rrdpecrTi 242 (N. 5).
irapavoiJilcD, augm. 124 (top).
irapao-Kevd^o), impers. irap€<TKeija<xrai
192 (d), 245 (top).
iras declined 58 ; w. art. 204 (IST. 5).
irar^p declined 48.
iravo) and 7rat)0|j.ai w. partic. 303 (1).
irfiQa, pf. and plpf. mid. infl. Ill,
112, 113 (N. 2).
irctGojiai w. dat. 230 (2).
ircivdco, contraction 118 (N". 2).
Ileipaicvs decl. 45 (N. 3).
Treipo), i»f. and plpf. mid. 114 (e).
ire'Xas w. gen. 229 (2).
ir£>Tr«, pf. pass. 14 (3, N.), 114 (a);
Trefxireiv iro/xir-riv 214 (top).
ir^VTis compar. QQ (7).
tritrro), pf. pass. (cf. Trifiiru) 114 (a).
Trc'irwv declined 56, 57.
ire'p, enclit. 23 (4); w. partic. 301
(N. 1).
ir^pav w. gen. 229 (2).
Tr€pas declined 41.
irepi, w. gen., dat., and ace. 240,
242 ; in comp. 233 ; not elided in
Attic 12 (N. 2); iripi 20 (§ 23,
2).
nepiKXe'-qs, IlepiKXT]?, declined 43.
irepiopuo) w. partic. 303 (3).
■Trepi(nrwp.6vov 19 (§ 21, 2).
ireo-o-o) (TreTT-) 127 (IST.).
irri; 79.
iTTJ, indef. 23 (2).
nTiX€{8T]s (Hom. em7}%) 184 (c).
TrqXiKOs ; 78.
irT]viKa ; 79.
irfjxvs declined 43, 44.
m|i.irXi]p,t and ir£|i.7rpT]|j.i, redupl. 168
(N. 1).
irXaKocis, irXttKovs, declined 59 (N".
2).
irXeiv (for ir\iov) 226 (N. 2).
irXeCwv or ttXc'cdv, irXcicrros '^Q.
irXcKft), pf. and plpf. mid infl. Ill,
112, 113 (N. 2).
irX^w (ttXi;-) 126 (2); contr. 118 (N.
1); -rrXeiv ddXaaaav 215 (N. 5).
irX^v w. gen. 237, 229 (N.).
tr\r\ariov w. gen. 229 (2).
irX-^o-orw (7rXT77-), iirXdyrjv (in comp.)
141 (N. 2).
irXvvw 133 (6).
Trve«.(7rj'i;-) 126 (2).
•troQtv ; TToOe'v 79.
TToeC, enclitic 23 (2).
TTot; 79.
irof, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
TToicb) w. two accus. 217 ; w. partic.
303 (2); e5 and kukus Trotw 217
(end).
874
GREEK INDEX.
iroios ; iroios 78.
iroXeixe'w, TroXefJifJw w. dat. 233 (N.
1); distiug. I'rom 7roXe/>t6w 187
(N. 3).
iro'Xts, declined 43, 44 ; Ion. forms
44 (N. 3).
iroXXos, Ion. = ttoXi^s 63 (N. 1).
iroXiJs, declined 62, 63 ; Ion. forms
63 (N. 1); compared 6Q ; w. art.
202 (end); ol iroWoi and t6 iroXv
202 (end) 220 (N. 1); ttoXv and
TToXXd as adv. 67 (2); TroXXcp w.
comp. 234 (2) ; ttoXXou Set and
oude iroWov Set 224 (top).
tro\nri\v Tre'fxireiv 214 (top).
TToppo) or irpoo-ft) \v. gen. 229 (2).
Iloo-eiSdwv, lloo-tiSftiv, accus. 37 (2,
N. 1); accent of voc. 21 (1, N.).
irocros ; iroo-ds 78.
TTOTc; 79.
-iroTc, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
iroTcpos; iroTcpos (or -pus) 78.
TTOTCpov or TTOTCpa, interrog. 307 (5).
irov; 79; w. part. gen. 220 (N. 3).
iroiJ indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
irovs, nom. sing. 37 (top); ace. 37 (2).
irpdcs, declined 63 ; two stems of 63
(N. 2).
irpaa-arui {irpdy-), perf. 138 {b); 2nd
perf. 133 (3, :N'. 1), 139 {d, N. 2);
seldom w. two accus. 218 (top);
e5 and /caKws Trpdcrcrw 218 (top).
irpe'irei im|)ers. 193 (N. 2).
orpto-p^vTTJs, irpto-pvTTjs, irpco-pvs 51
(26).
irpeo-pevo), denom. verb 186.
irpiv, formation 281 (IstN.); w. finite
moods 280 ; w. infin. 281, 299 ;
Trpluij 281 (1st K).
irpd, w. gen. 237 ; not elided 12 (N.
2); contracted w. augment 123 (N.
1), or w. foil, e or 188 (3); irpb
Tov or irpoTov 205 (2).
TrpotKa, gratis, as adv. 215 (2).
irpos, w. gen., dat., and ace. 240, 241,
■^ 242 ; in compos. 233 ; irpbs, besides,
as adv. 241 (N. 2).
Trpoo-Scxop-evw [loi l<mv 232 (TT. 5).
irpoo-TJKei impers. 193 (N. 2); w. gen.
and dat. 222 (top), 231 (top);
irporrrjKov (ace. abs. ) 302 (2).
irpoo-eev w. gen. 229 (2); irpoadev -fj
(like irpiv Tj) 281 (top), 299 (N.).
irpocrraxOe'v (acc. abs. ) 302 (2).
irp6<rw w. gen. 229 (2).
-irpoTcpos 66 (2); irpbrepov ij (like
Trpluij) 281 (top), 299 (N.).
irpoiip-yov and irpoilx« 188 (3).
irpwTHTTOs 66 (2).
irpwTos 66 (2); t6 irpQnov or irpCyrov^
at first 21^ (2).
iruvedvoptai w. gen. 222 (2); w. par-
tic. 304 (end).
irco, indef., enclitic 23 (2).
irois; 79.
TTws, indef. 79 ; enclitic 23 (2).
P, liquid 7 ; sonant 8 ; p at begin-
ning of word 7 ; pp after syll.
augm. and in comp. after vowel
13 (§ 15, 2), 119; ix^p fox fxp \Z
(N. 1).
pd, enclitic 23 (4).
pqBios compared QQ.
patv«129 (4, N. 1).
pa«v, p^oTTos 66 (9).
pco) (^i;-) 126 (2).
pTJ^vvfjit {pay-), 2 pf. ^ppuya 133 (3,
N. 1).
pT]£8ios, pT]tT€pos, Q6 (9).
pi^ocD, infin. pLjwu 118 (N. 3).
pCs, nose, declined 41.
-poos, adject, in, decl. of 53 (2).
-pos, adject, in 185 (17).
2, two forms 6 (top); sibilant, semi-
vowel, and surd 7, 8 ; after mutes,
only in ^ and xp li (2); v before a
15 (6); linguals changed to tr be-
fore a lingual 14 (1), before fi li
(3); dropped between two conso-
nants 14 (4); dropped in stems in
eo- 42, in aat and (ro 145 (N. 1),
151 (2), 14 (end), 10 (N". 1); add-
ed to some A^owel stems 132 (2);
double, after syll. augm. 120 (N.
5), in fut. and aor. (Hom. ) 152
(7); movable in of/rws and e^ 12 ;
dropped in ^xw and Tcxw 131.
s as ending of nom. sing, 35 (2,
N.), 28, 32; of acc. pi. 35.
-o-at and -o-o in 2d pers. sing. 142,
145; drop o- 145 (N. 1), 14 (end).
o-dXiri-yl declined 39.
GREEK INDEX.
375
-<rav, 3d pers. plur. 142, 145, 147
{'6).
a-avTov 73, 206, 207.
o-ptvwjjti, 2d aor. ea^Tjv 158 (N. 6).
a-i 71.
tnavTOv 73.
o-cLet without subj. 193 (e).
0-610, o-c'etv 72 (N. 2).
-o-€iw, desideratives in 186 (N. 1).
(r€|iv6s, compared 64.
o-e'o, 0-6V 72 (N. 2).
O-€Ut0 ((7V) 126 (2).
o-etuvTov (Hdt). 74 (top).
-a-Qa (Horn.) in 2 pers. sing. subj.
act. 153 (rf), in ind. of vbs. in fit
171 (4).
-(tOov and -a-Qr\v in 2 and 3 p. dual
142; -adov for -0-^771' in 3 pers. 146
(N. 5).
-ort in 2 p. sing, (in e(X(rL) 142 (N.)
-o-t in dat. pi. 35; Ion. ta-t 31, 34,
35 (2, N.)
-<rt as locative ending 52 (N. 2).
-<rt (for -vTi, -vai) in 3 p. pi. 142,
145, 146, 157 (d).
-ori|xos, adject, in 185 (17).
criTos and (rira 50 (2).
oTKeSdvwfjLi, fut. of 136 {b).
-CTKOV, -a-Ko\iy]v, Ion, iterative end-
ings 152 (10); synt. 253 (K).
(TKoirioi w. Situs and fut. ind. 261;
w. (XKdirci or oKorrelTe omitted 262
(N. 4).
cTKOTos, decl. of 49 (a).
o-jidco, contraction 118 (N. 2).
-<ro in 2 pers. sing. 142, 145, 14
(end): see -orau
<r6s, poss. pron. 74, 207.
<ro4>os declined 53.
cnre'vSft), <nr€i<rw, euph. ch. 15 (N. 1);
pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (c).
<rT€ip«, pf. mid. 126 (N.).
jrreXXw, pf. mid. inflected 111, 112,
113 (N. 2), 114 (c).
<rToxd^o|i.ai w. gen. 222 (1).
<rTpaTTj7€w w. gen. 223 (3).
trv declined 71, 72; generally cm. 192
(K 1). .
<rvyYi7v«<rKci) w. partic. (nom. or
dat. ) 305 (N. 2).
<ru|iPa£v6t impers. 193 (N. 2).
oTJv or |vv w. dat. 237; in compos.
233.
<ruv€X6vTi (or ws (rvve\6vTi) elireiv
232 (5).
-o-vvT], nouns in 183 (7).
o-vvoi8a w. partic. (nom. or dat.) 305
(N. 2).
<r<l>^ 72 (N. 1, 2, 3); <x<f>4a 72 (top);
(xcpias, o-^etas, <Td)4iov. cSeLwv 72
(K 2).
Cr<(>€T6p09 74.
o-<j)uv or o-<}>£ 72 (N. 2); atpLv (noto-^O
inTrag. 72 (N. 1).
o-Aos for acp^repos 74 (N. 1).
0-9(0, <r(}>(oi, &c., (r()>a>^, (r<|>(i)'Cv 72
(N. 2).
(r<|)«l;T€pos 74 (N. 1).
(r(|>(3v avTwv, &c. 74 (N,).
(Txottiv (of^Xw) 148 (N. 1).
2«KpdTT]s, decl. of 43 (N. 1); ace.
49 (&); voc. 21 (1, K).
<rw}j.a declined 41; nom. formed 36
(1); dat. pi. 14 (2), 39.
<ra>Ti^p, <ra>T€p 21 (1, N.).
arw({>p(i>v compared 64 (N. 4).
T, smooth mute, lingual, surd 8 ;
dropped before a 14 (2); dropped
or ch. to a in nom. of 3 decl. 36
(1) ; VT dropped before a 15 (N.
1, 2), 37 (top).
-rd (Hom.) for -ttjs in nom. of 1st
decl. 31.
Tfi and Taiv (dual of 6), rare 71
(N. 2), 197 (N. 5).
-Ttti in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145.
rdXas adj., decl. of 57 (1).
T&XXa (ra &\\a) 11, 20 (§ 24, 2).
Tavrd, TavT<J, ravrdv, ravrov 73
(N;).
TavTT] adv. 79.
Ta<j>- for dacf)- {edrrrto) 16 (2, N.).
Tdxa w. dv (rdx a") 256 (§ 212, N.).
Tttxvs compared 64 (1), 16 (2, N.);
T7]v Taxio'Trjf 215 (2).
TdwV (= TOJJ/) 71 (N. 2).
T^, enclitic 23 (4); w. relatives 209
(N. 4); w. oros210 (top).
TcGvccSs 62 (N.), 139 (N. 3).
T€tv (Ion. = (Toi) 72 (N. 2).
Tilvia, drops »» 133 (6).
-T€ipa, fem. nouns in 182 (h).
TeXew, future in w, oO/xai 136 («); pf.
and plpf. mid. infl. 112, 113
(N. 2).
376
GREEK INDEX.
riKos, finally, adv. ace. 215 (2).
TC'O, T€V, TCVS, T€Oii (= ffov) 73 ( N. 7).
T€0, T6V (= ToO for TIUOS OV Tlfos),
TCW, TC«V, Ttoio-i 76 (N. 2),
-T€Ov, verbal adj. in 150 (3); impers.,
with subj. in dat, or ace. 306 ;
sometimes plural 306 (top).
-Te'os, verbal adj. in 150 (3); passive
305 (1).
Tcos Doric {=ro-6s) 74 (N. 1).
T€'pT|vdecl. of 59 (N. 3).
-Tcpos, comparative in 64.
Tc'pirw, 2 aor. vv. stem rapir- 133 (4,
N. 1).
Tco-o-apes (or tctt-), Ion. Ti<T<repes,
&c., declined 69.
T€Tpa£vft) 129 (4, N. 1).
TCTpciCT-i (dat.) 69 (end).
T6V, T€vs, ri(a, riutv 76 (N. 2): see
t4o.
Tews, accus. of 33 (N. 1).
T]Q, xfiSc 79.
Tt]\£KOS, TTjXlKOVTOS &C. 78.
-Tr]v in 3 pers. dual. 142; for -top in
2 pers. 146 (N. 5): see ~<rQov and
-O-0T]V.
TT]vCKa, TTiviKai/Ta, &c. 79.
-Ti^p, masc. nouns in 182 (&); syncop.
47, 48.
-TTJpiov, nouns of place in 183 (6).
-TT]s, masc. nouns in 182 (b).
Tigo-t and rfjs (= rats) 71 (N. 2).
tO for ee 13.
-Ti, adv. in 186 (18).
-Tt, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric)
142; in earl 142 (N.).
rCQr]\L\., synopsis 159, 165, 166; in-
flection of /ii-forms 159-165; re-
dupl. 157 (3), 168 (2); aor. in ra
and Kdfji,r]u 137 (1, N. 1.); partic.
Tibet's declined 60.
tUt« (re/f-) 126 (end of III.).
Tijidw, denom. verb 186 (1) ; stem
and root of 26 (N.) ; inflec. of
contr. forms 115-118; av. gen. of
'valicc 227 ; partic. rifidup, TLfiQu,
declined 61.
TijiTJeis, Ttp,f)s, decl. of 59 (N. 2).
Ti|i,a>peb> and Tip.(op^o|jLai 245 (N. 3).
Tiv, Doric i=(Tot) 73 (N. 7).
Tis interrog., declined 76; accent 22
(3, N. 2); subst. or adj. 208 (1);
in direct and ind. questions 208 (2).
tIs indef., declined 76; subst. or adj.
209; like Tras rts 209 (N.).
rita, stem and root of 26 (N.).
-TO in 3 pers. sing. 142, 145.
ToOcv 79.
Toi, enclitic 23 (4).
Tot, rat, art. = ol, al 71 (N. 2).
Tot, Ion. {=aoL) 72 (N. 2).
Toios, Toi6(r8€, ToiovTos 78, 200 (d).
Tot<r8€<r<ri or TOio-8€o-t (= Tol<78e) 75
(N. 3).
Tov koXtov, &c. 205 (2).
-Tov, in 2 and 3 p. dual 142; for
-TTjv in 3 pers. (Horn.) 146 (N. 5):
see -TT]v.
-Tos, verb. adj. in 150 (3).
Too-os, T0<rd<r8€, too-ovtos 78 ; to-
(TovTw w. compar. 234 (2).
t6t€ 79; w. art. 201 (top).
TOV for rivos, and tou for Ttv6s 76.
TovvavHov (by crasis) 11.
-Tpd, fem. nouns in 183 (5, N.).
Tpcis, rpCa, declined 69.
Tpeirw, ch. e to a 133 (4, N. 1); six
aorists of 141 (N. 3).
rpi^o}, Tpt'xw, &c. 16 (2, N.).
-Tpid, fem. nouns in 182 (b).
TpCpo), perf. act. 126 (N.); pf. and
plpf. mid. infl. Ill, 112, 113
(N. 2).
TpiTipTis, declined 42, 43; accent 43
(N. 1).
TpiirXdo-ios w. gen. 226 (top).
-TpCs, fem. nouns in 182 {b).
Tptx-os, gen. of dpi^ 16(2, N.).
-Tpov, neut. nouns in 183 (5).
TpoTTov, adv. accus. 215 (2).
Tpvx"> 'rpv\u<r<a 135 (N^.)-
Tpto^ft) {rpdy-) 126 (top), 133 (top).
Tp«s, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
TV, Dor. (== (7(^) 73 (N. 7).
TV"Yxdv» {tvx-) 129 (top); w. gen. 222
(1); w. partic. 304 (4) ; tvxov
(ace. abs.) 302 (2).
TvvT], Ion. (= aij) 72 (K 2).
Tt;7rT« w. cogn. accus. 214 (top).
Tu» for Tivi, and tw for nui 76.
T«, therefore, Horn. 205 (2).
-Tft)p, masc. nouns in 182 (6).
tJ>s 79.
Y, close vowel 6 ; contr. w. foil,
vowel 10 (5), 44; length, to v 119
GREEK INDEX.
377
(end); 125 (II.) 128, 131, to eu
125(11.)
-vSpiov, diminutives in 184 (8).
v8ft)p decl. of 52 (29).
v€t, irapers. 193 (top); ijovros (gen.
abs.) 302 (1, N.).
VI diphthong 6 (3).
-via in pf. part. fem. 59-61, 149
(end).
vtds decl. 52 (30); om. after art. 201
(N. 4).
v|i^, vfi€s (Dor.) 73 (N. 7).
v|i£T£pos 74, 207 ; vfi^repos airwu,
&c. 207 (N. 4).
vjjiiv, vjJLtv, <5fX}i€s, i»H.|iS ^K-H^*) &c. 72.
-WW, denom. verbs in 186, 128 (top).
■inrep, w. gen. and accus. 238, 242.
VTrt<rxv^O|xai 129 (3).
vird, w. gen., dat., and accus. 241,
242 ; in comp. 233.
viroirTcva), augment 124 (top).
viroxos w. dative 232 (end).
voTcpov ^ w. infin. 299 (N.).
v<rT€pos w. gen. 225 (N. 1); ixTript^
Xpov(^ 235 (N. 2).
i)^a.Lv<a, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 {d).
4>, rough mute, labial, and .surd 8 ;
not doubled 13 ; euph. changes
before lingual 14 (1), bef. <r 14 (2),
bef. At 14 (3); v before 15 (5).
4>a£vw, synopsis of 90, 91 ; meaning
of tenses 93 ; fut. and aor. inflect-
ed 106-110 ; pf. mid. 112, 113,
(N. 2), 114 {d), 15 (N. 4); forma-
tion of pres. 127 {cJ), of fut. 136
(2), of aor. 137 (2), of perf. act.
134 (N.), of aor. pass. 140 (vi. N.
2); synt., w. partic. 304, 305.
4)avjp<Js €1^1 w. partic. 305 (N. 1).
<}>€i8o(iai w. gen. 222 (2).
<|>€,oTepos, <J)cpTaTos, <j>^pt<rTos 65.
<i)€pa) 131 ; aor. in a 137 (1, N. 2).
cj>Tip,C, conjug. 176, 177 ; w. infin. in
indir. disc. 293 (end).
<|>ddvw w. partic. 304 (4).
({>iXe(», 4>iX», inflect, of contract forms
115-118 ; partic. <pi\4wv, tpiXQv,
declined 62.
4>lXos compared 6Q.
<|)\e'\j/ declined 39.
4>ktyie<a 152 (11).
(f>ovda), desid. verb 186 (N". 1).
<i>pd^ft>, pf. and plpf. mid. 114 (c).
<j>p^v, gender 49 (1); accent of com-
pounds 21 (1, N.).
4>povTC^a) vv. oTTws and fut. ind. 261 ;
w. fiTi and subj. or opt. 262.
<j>povTi<rT^S \v. accus. 213 (N. 3).
opovSos (irp6, odov) 188 (3).
<j>vX.a| declined 39.
< xov^cis, not contracted 59 (N. 2).
<j)»s (,<pows), light, accent 22 (3, N. 1).
X, rough mute, palatal, and surd 8 ;
not doubled 13 ; euph. ch. before
a lingual 14 (1), bef. <r (0 U (2),
• bef. A* 14 (3); v before x 15 (5).
Xal {kuL al) and xol (kuL oi) 11.
XapCcts declined 58 ; compared 64
(N. 5); fT dropped in dat. plur. 15
,(N. 2).
xdpiv as adv. accus. 215 (2).
X€^p declined 52.
X€ip«v (xepeLojv), x^^purTos 65.
\€« (XV-), pres. 126 (2); fut. 136 (N".
3); aor. 137 (1, N. 2).
xol (KOi oi) and x^l (xal at) 11.
XpaofMit w. dat. 234 (N. 2); w. dat.
and cogn. ace. 214 (N. 2).
Xpd«, contraction 118 (N. 2).
XPT 168 (1); w. infin. 193 (K 2).
Xpw or expw, contraction 118 (N.
4); in apod, (without &v) 268 (N.
2).
X»pa declined 29 ; gen. sing. 29 (2).
X«p£s w. gen. 229 (2).
^, double consonant 7 ; surd 8 ; syll.
augm. before 121 (2).
t|/d«, contracted 118 (N". 2).
tj/^<j)i<r|j,a viKdv 214 (Rem.).
n, open long vowel 6 ; length, from
119 (end), 132(3); for o in stem
of Att. 2d decl. 33 (2); nouns in
b) of 3d decl. 46, 47, voc. sing. 38
(3).
0), diphthong 6 ; by augment for ot
122.
w, interjection, w. voc. 213 (2).
»8c79,*208 (N. 1).
878
GREEK INDEX.
-wv, masc. denom. in 183 (6).
-«v in gen. plur. 35 (2, N. ), 32 ; -Cov
(for -dwv) in 1st decl. 28, 21 (2).
wv, partic. of ei/xi, 172 ; accent 22 (3,
N. 2).
wpq, w. gen., as dat. of time 235 (N.
-ws, nouns in (Attic decl.) 33 (2);
adj. in ws, wj/ 54 ; pf. partic. in ws
59-61 ; adverbs 67 (1).
«S, rel. adv. 79 ; in rel. sent. 275 ;
w. partic. 301 (N. 2), 305 (N. 4);
in wishes v. opt. 289 (N. 2); in
indir. iiuat, 281-283 ; causal 288,
289 ; as final particle 260, 261 (N.
1 and 3); like wrcre w. intin. 297
(N. 1); w. absol. infin. 298.
«s, prepos. w, accus, 237, 242 (3),
ais, thus 79 ; accent 24 (end).
wo-ircp, w. conditional partic. 302
(N. 3); w. accus. abs. 302 (2, N.);
(bffirep hv et 256 (3); accent 24 (N.
3).
wo-Tc, w. infin. 297 ; w. indie. 279 ;
ind. disting. from inf. 279 (Rem.);
accent 24 (N. 3).
wv, Ion. diphthong 6.
iDvTos, «vt6si t«vt6 (Ion. ) 72 (N. 6).
ENGLISH IE"DEX.
[N. B. See Note on p. 362.]
Abandon, rhs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Ability or fitness, verbal adj. denot.
185 (13).
Ablative, functions of in Greek 212
(Rem. )
Absolute case: gen. 229, 302 (1) ;
accus. 302 (2).
Abstract nouns, in compos. 189 (6) ;
w. art, 200 {b) ; neut. adj. w. art.
for 199 (2).
Abuse, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Acatalectic verses 316 (3).
Accent, general principles of 18-20 ;
of nouns and adj. 21, 22; in gen.
and dat., of oxytones 21 (2), of
Attic 2d decl. 21 (end), of 3d decl.
22 (3) ; of verbs 22, 23 ; of parti-
ciples 22 (N. 2) ; ef opt. in at and
OL 23 (N. 4), 19 (§ 22, N. 1) ; of con-
tracted syllables (incl. crasis and
elision) 20, 21 ; enclitics 23, 24 ;
proclitics 24. Accent and ictus in
verse 312 (N.).
Accompaniment, dat. of 235 (5); w.
ai/Tols 235 (5, N.).
Accusative case 27 ; sing, of 3d decl.
37 ; contract, ace. and nom. pi.
alike in 3d decl. 42, 45 (N. 1) ;
subj. of infin. 192 (2), 298 (§ 269,
N.) 299 ; after prepos. 238-242, in
compos. 242 (end) ; ace. absol. 302
(2), rarely w. partic. of personal
verb 302 (2, N.) ; in appos. w. sen-
tence 196 (N. 3) ; infin. as accus.
292, 293, 294 (2), 296 (2) ; re-
tained w. passive 244 (n. 2). Other
syntax of accus. 213-218 : see Con-
tents, p. XX.
Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2).
Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w. par-
tic. 304.
Action, suffixes denot. 182 (3).
Active voice 79 (1), meaning of tenses
92, 93 ; person, endings 142 ; use
of 243 ; form of, incl. most in-
trans. vbs. 243 (N. 1) ; object of,
as subj. of pass. 244.
Acute accent 18 ; of oxytone changed
to grave 20.
Addressing, voc. in 213 (2) ; nom. in
213 (N.).
Adjectives, formation 185 ; inflection
53-63 : see Contents, p. xvi. ; com-
parison 64-66 ; agreement w. nouns
196, 197 ; attributive and pred.
196 (Rem.) ; pred. adj. w. copula-
tive vb. 194 ; referring to omitted
subj. of infin. of copul. verb 194
(N. 3), 195, of other verbs 198
(N". 8) ; used as noun 198, 199 ;
verbal, w. gen. 227, 228, w. accus.
213 (N. 3) ; verbal in ros 150 (3),
in rios and riov 150 (3), 305, 306,
235 (4).
Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2).
Adonic verse 324 (1).
Advantage or disadv., dat. of 231 (3).
Adverbial accus. 215 (2). '
Adverbs, how formed from adj. 67,
186 ; from partic. 67 (N.) ; com-
parison 67 ; rel. 79 ; local, from
nouns or pron. 52 ; numeral 68,
69 ; syntax 243 ; w. gen. 220, 229
(2) ; w. dat. 232 (end), 233 (top) ; .
assim. of rel. adv. to an tec. 211
(n. 3) ; w. article for adj. 200 (end),
201 (top).
Advising, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2).
Aeolic dialect 2 ; forms of aor. opt.
in Attic 153 (13) ; form of infin.
and partic. 153 (14, 15) ; forms in
^i 170 (2).
Age, pronom. adj. denot. 78.
380
ENGLISH INDEX.
Agent, nouns denoting 182 (2) ; expr.
after pass, by gen. w. prep. 244 (1),
by dat. (esp. after pf. pass.) 234 (3),
244 (2) ; w. verbals in t4os by dat.,
w. verbal in t^ov by dat. or accus.
235 (4), 244 (2), 305, 306.
Agreement, of verb w. subj. nom.
193 (1) ; of adj. &c. w. noun 196 ;
of adj. w. nouns of diflf. gend. or
numb. 197 (N. 1-3).
Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 324 (5).
Alexandrian period 2.
Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 320 (end).
Alpha : see a ; privative 188 (a) ;
copulative 188 (N. 2).
Alphabet 5 ; obsolete letters 6 (N. 2).
Anaclasis in Ion. verse 325 (2).
Anacrusis 314 (4).
Anapaest 313; cyclic 315 (4); in
trochaic verse 318 ; in iambic verse
319, 320.
Anapaestic rhythms 322, 323 ; sys-
tems 323.
Anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2).
Anceps, syllaba 315 (5).
Anger, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1) ;
w. dat. 230 (2).
Antecedent of rel. 209-211 ; agree-
ment w. 209 ; omitted 210 ; as-
simil. of rel. to 210, of atitec. to
rel. 211 (N. 4) ; attraction 211, w.
assimil. 211 (end). Definite and
indef. antec. 274, 275.
Antepenult 17 (top).
Antibacchius 313.
Antistrophe 318 (4).
Aorist (first) 80 ; secondary tense 80 ;
tense stem 83 (III.), 137 (III.),
141 ; aor. in Ka in three vbs. 137
(1, N. 1) ; person, endings 142 (2) ;
conn, vowel 144 (1), 145, w. end-
ings 146 ; augment 84 (c), 119 ;
iterat. end. (TKovandaKofirju (Hom.)
152 (10) ; Hom. e and o (for y, co)
in subj. 153 (12) ; accent of infin.
act. 22 (1). Second Aorist 80
(N. 1); tense stem 83 (V.), 140
(V.), 141; secondary 80; pers.
endings 142 (2) ; conn. vow. 144
(1), 145, w. endings 145 ; augm.
84 (c), 119; redupl. (Hom.) 120
(N. 3) ; Att. redupl. 122 (N. 1) ;
iter, endings (Ion.) 152 (10) ;
Hom. in <r 152 (8) ; Ion. forms in
subj. act. of /ML-forms 171 (7) ; ac-
cent of infin. and partic. 22 and 23
(§ 26, N. 3). Aorist Passive (first
and second), w. act. endings 143
(1) ; tense stems 83 (VI., VII.),
140andl41(VI., VII), 141; conn,
vowel : none in indie. 143 (3), in
subj. and opt. 146 (N. 1), 147 (3),
none in imperat. 149 (3) and infin.
149(1) ; accent of infin. and partic.
22 and 23 ( N. 3 ) . Syntax of Aorist :
indie. 246, disting. from impf. 247
(N. 5), gnomic 252 (2), iterative
253; in dependent moods 248-251;
when not in indir. disc, how dis-
ting. from pres. 248 (end), 249(1),
opt. and infin. in indir. disc. 250,
251 ; infin. w. vbs. of hoping, &c.
251 (N. 2) ; in partic. 252, aor. not
past in certain cases 252 (N. 2),
304 (4). Indie, in apod. w. dv
254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. &u
253 ; in protasis 264, 265, 267,
268 ; in rel. cond. sent. 276 (2) ;
in wishes 290 (2) ; in final cl. 261
(3). Opt. w. &u 255, 269 (2), 276
(4). Infin. or partic. w. Av 255.
Aphaeresis 11 (N. 4).
Apodosis 263 (1) ; negative of (o6)
263 (3) ; in past tenses of indie,
w. &u 253 (end), 254 (3), 263 (2),
264 (2), 267 (2) ; various forms
in cond. sent. 264-266, 267-270 ;
w. protasis omitted 271 (2); repres.
by infin. or partic. 272 (3), 273 (4);
implied in context 273 (N. 1) ;
suppressed for effect 273 (N. 2) ;
introd. by 5i 274 (2).
Apostrophe (in elision) 11 (1).
Appear, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
304.
Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
218; w. ace. and part. gen. 221 (2).
Apposition 195 ; gen. in. app. w.
possessive 195 (N. 1) ; nom. or ace.
in app. w. sentence 196 (N. 3) ;
partitive appos. 196 (N. 2).
Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat. 233.
Arsis and thesis, n.sed in sense opp.
to the Greek 311 (foot-note).
ENGLISH INDEX.
381
Article, definite, declined 71 ; tc6 and
roLv as fern. 71 (N. 2) ; to'l and ral
(Epic and Doric) 71 (N. 2) ; pro-
clitic in some forms 24 ; in crasis
11 (N. 1); 6 auT65 73 (2). Homeric
art. as pronoun 199, w. adj. and
partic. 199 (N. 1). Art. in Herod.
•200 (N. 4) ; in Lyric and Attic
poets 200 (N. 5) ; Attic prose use
200, 201 ; position w. attrib. adj.
201 (end), 202 (2), w. pred. adj.
203 (3), w. demonstr. 203 (4) ; as
pronoun in Attic 204 (1), 205.
Ashamed, vbs. signif. to be, w. par-
tic. 303 (1).
Asking, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217.
Asj)irate, w. vowels 6 (end) ; w.
mutes 8 (2), 16 (1) ; avoided in
redupl. 16 (2) ; transferred in
Tpi(l>o}, 6p^\l/u}, &c. 16 (2, N.)
Assimilation of rel. to case of antec.
210 (end), w. antec. omitted 211
(N. 1) ; in rel. adv. 211 (N. 3) ;
antec. rarely assim. to rel. 211
(N. 4). See Attraction. Assim.
of cond. rel. cl. to mood of antec.
clause 277, 278. Assim. (Hom.)
in vbs. in dw 154 {b).
Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
Attic dialect 2 ; why basis of Gram-
mar 2. Attic 2d decl. 33 (2);
redupl. 122, 120 (N. 4); future
136 (N. 1).
Attraction in rel. sent. 211 ; joined
w. assim. 211 (end), 212 (top).
Attributive adjective (opp. to predi-
cate) 196 (Rem.) ; position of ar-
ticle w. 201-203. Attrib. com-
pounds 190 (3).
Augment 84 (c), 119-124 : see Con-
tents, p. xviii.
Bacchius 313 ; Bacchic rhythms 326.
Barytones 19.
Basis in logaoedic verse 324.
Be or belong, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
221 (top).
Become, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(top).
Begin, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(1) ; w. partic. 303 (1).
Belong, vbs. signif. to w. gen. 221
(top).
Benefit, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Boeotia, Aeolians in 1.
Breathings 6, 7 ; form 7 (N. 2).
Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam.
321 (4).
Caesura 316 (1).
Call : see Name.
Cardinal numbers 68-70 ; decl. of 69.
Care for, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2).
Cases 27 (3) ; meaning 27 (3, N. 1) ;
oblique 27 (end) : endings 35 ;
syntax of 212-242: see Contents,
pp. xx.-xxii.
Catalexis and catalectic verses 316 (3).
Causal sentences, w. conj. and indie.
288, 289 ; w. opt. (ind. disc.) 289
(N.), 288 (4) ; w. relat. 279.
Cause, expr. by gen. 224 ; by dat.
234 ; by partic. 300, 301 (N. 2).
Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. /aiJ
262.
Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif.
to, w. partic. 303 (1).
Choosing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 218;
w. ace. and part. gen. 221 (2).
Choriambus 313 ; choriambic rhythms
325 (1).
Circumflex accent 18 ; origin 18
(Rem.); on contr. syll. 20.
Circumstances, partic. denot. 300,
301.
Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(end), 222 (1).
Classes of verbs : eight of vbs. in
w 125-131, two of vbs. in fit 157.
Close vowels 6 (N.), 10 (5); stems
ending in 35 (top).
Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217.
Cognate mutes 8 (2, N.). Cognate
accus. 213-215.
Collective noun, w. plur. verb 193
(3) ; w. pi. pai-tic. 197 (N. 3) ;
foil, by pi. relat. 209 (N. 2).
Collision of vowels, how avoided 8
(§8).
382
ENGLISH INDEX.
Command or exhortation 290, 289
(N. 3), 262 (N. 4), 272 (N. 1), 247
(N. 8) ; verbs of commanding w.
gen. 223 (3).
Common Dialect 2.
Comparative degree 64-67 ; w. gen.
225 (1) ; w. dat. 234 (2).
Comparison of adjectives 64, irreg.
65, 6Q ; of adverbs 67 ; of some
nouns and pronouns 6^ (3).
Comparison, verbs denot. w. gen.
226 (2).
Composition of words: see Formation.
Compound words 180, 187-190 ; first
part of 187, second part 188 ;
meaning of (three classes) 189,
190. Compound verbs 189 ; aug-
ment 123, 124 ; accent 22 (§ 26
N. 1) ; w. gen., dat., or ace. 242
(end), 226, 233. Compound nega-
tives, 307 ; repetition of 309, 310.
Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus.
217 ; w. infin. and M 308 (6),
295 296.
Concession 272 (5), 289 (N. 3).
Conclusion : see Apodosis and Condi-
tion.
Condition and conclusion 263 (1) ;
conditional sentences 263-274 ; see
Contents, pp. xxiii. and xxiv. ;
classification of cond. sent. 263-
267 ; general and particular cond.
disting. 265, 266 ; comparison of
Latin gen. cond. 266 (Rem. 1) ;
cond. expr, by partic. 301 (4), 271
(1). See Protasis. Relative cond.
sent. 275-278 : see Relative.
Conjugation 84 ; of verbs in w 85-
155 ; of verbs in fit 156-179.
Connecting vowel 143 (4), 144 (foot-
note), 82 (foot-note) ; of indie.
144, 145 ; of subj. 146 ; of opt.
147 ; of imperat. 148 ; of infin. and
partic. 149 ; in iterative forms 152
(10) ; in forms in doj 152 (11) ;
omitted in perf. mid., aor. pass., and
;ut-forms 143.
Consider, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
218 ; w. ace. and gen. 221 ; in
pass. w. gen. 221 (N. ).
Consonants, divisions of 7, 8 ; eu-
phonic changes in 13-16 ; double
7 (2) ; movable 12 ; consonant
stems 82 (3), 35. Consonant de-
clension (Third) 35.
Constructio praegnans 242 (N. 6).
Continue, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Continued action, tenses of 246.
Contraction 8 ; rules of, 8-10 ; quan-
tity of contr. syll. 18 (§ 20, 1);
accent 20 ; of nouns : 1st decl. 30,
2d decl. 33, 3d decl. 42-47 ; of
adject. 54-58 ; of partic. 61, 62 ;
of verbs in aw, eio, and ow 115-
118 ; in gen. pi. of 1st decl. 29
(N.), of 2d decl. 32 (top); inreduph
(ee to et) 123 (top) ; in forma-
tion of words 181 (N. 3), 188 (3).
See Crasis and Synizesis.
Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (2).
Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 8 (2,
N.).
Copula 191 (N. 1).
Copulative verbs 194 (Rem.); case of
pred. adj. or noun with infin. of
194 (N. 3), 195 (N. 4, 5).
Coronis 10 (1).
Correlative pronominal adj. 78 ; adv.
79.
Crasis 10, 11 ; examples 11 ; quanti-
ty 18 (§ 20, 1) ; accent 20 (2).
Cretic 313 ; rhythms 326.
Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 315 (4).
Dactyl 313; cyclic 315 ; in anapaes-
tic verse 322, 314 (N. 1) ; in iam-
bic verse (apparent) 319, 320 ; in
trochaic verse (cyclic) 318 ; in loga-
oedic verse (cyclic) 323, 324.
Dactylic rhythms 321, 322.
Danger, vbs. of, w, fxTrj 262.
Dative case 27 (3) ; endings of 35,
28, 32 ; in 3d decl. 39 ; syntax of
230-236 : see Contents, p. xxi.
Prepositions w. dative 242 (2).
Declension 28 ; of Nouns 28-52 :
first 28-31, second 31-34, third
34-49, of irreg. nouns 49-52; of
Adjectives 53-63, first and second
decl. 53-56; third 56, 57, first and
third 57-59; of partic. 59-62 ; of
irreg. adj. 62, 63 ; of the Article 71 ;
of Pronouns 71-78. See Contents,
pp. xvi., xviL
ENGLISH INDEX.
383
Defend, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Degi-ee of difference, dat. of 234 (2).
Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217.
Demes, names of Attic, in dat. 236
(N. 1).
Demonstrative pronouns 74, 75 ;
synt. 208 ; w. article 200 (c), posi-
tion 203 (4) ; article as demonstr.
(Horn.) 199, (Att.) 204, 205; rel.
as dem. 209 (K 3).
Denominatives 180 (&) ; denom.
verbs 186.
Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and ix-q
308 (6), 295, 296.
Dependent clauses, moods in 248.
Dependent moods 80 (§ 89, N.) ;
tenses of 248-251.
Deponent verbs 80 (top) ; principal
parts of 84 (6) ; pass, and mid.
depon. 80 (2, N.).
Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225 ;
w. two ace. 217.
Derivatives 180 (ft).
Desiderative verbs 186 (N. 1).
Desire, vbs. expr. w. gen. 222 (2).
Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2).
Determinative compounds 190 (2).
Diaeresis in verse 316, 317, 319 (end),
321 (4), 322 (top), 323 (4).
Dialects 2 ; dialectic changes 25 ;
dial, forms of nouns and adj. 31,
34, 43 (N. 4), 44 (N. 3), 45 (N. 4),
46 (N.), 47 (N. 3) ; of numerals 69 ;
of the article 71 (N. 2) ; of pro-
nouns 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78 ;
of verbs in w 151-153, of contract
vbs. 154, 155, of vbs. in ixi 170-
172, 173, 174, 176, 177, 178, 179.
Digamma 6 (N. 2), 45 (N. 1), 46 (N.),
123 (N. 2), 126 (2), 139 {d, N. 1);
seen in metre 322 (1st note).
Diiambus 313.
Dimeter 317 (2) ; anapaestic 323,
dactylic 321 (1), iambic 319 (2),
trochaic 318 (1).
Diminutives, suffixes of 184 (8).
Diphthongs 6 ; improper 6 ( 3 and N. ) ;
in contraction 9 (1, 4) ; in crasis
10 {a), 11 {h) ; elision of (poet.) 12
(top) ; augment 122.
Dipody 317 (2).
Direct object 191 (2), 213 (Rem.) ;
of act. verb 213, 244. Direct dis-
course, question, and quotations
281.
Disadvantage, dat. of 231 (3).
Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. par-
tic. 303 (1).
Dispraise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224(1);
Disputing, vbs. of, w. gen. 224 (N. 2).
Distich 318 (4) ; elegiac 321 (5).
Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2) ;
w. infin. and /at? 308 (0), 295, 296.
Ditrochee 313; in Ionic rhythms 325
(2).
Divide, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
217.
Dochmius 313; dochmiac verses 326.
Doing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217.
Doric dialect 2 ; future 152 (6), in
Attic 136 (N. 2).
Double consonants 7, 14 (2), 17 (§ 19,
2).
Double negatives 309, 310, 292, 295,
296. See fiT) ov and ov fi-Zj.
Doubtful vowels 6.
Dual 26 (end).
Effect, accus. of 214 (N. 3.).
Elegiac pentameter and distich 321
(5).
Elisionll, 12; of diphthongs 12 (top);
Trepi, TTpd, 6ti, and dat. in t not
elided 12 ; accent of elided word 20
(3).
Ellipsis of verb w. &v 256 (3) ; of aKoirei
w. oTTWs and fut. ind. 262 (N. 4) ;
of vb. of fearing w. fiifi and subj.
262 (N. 2) ; of protasis 271 (2); of
apodosis 273 (N. 2).
Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1).
Enclitics 23, 24 ; w. accent if em-
phatic 24 (3, N. 1) ; at end of
compounds 24 (N. 3) ; successive
end. 24 (N. 2).
Endings 26 (2) ; case-endings of
nouns, 28, 32, 35 ; local 52 ; per-
sonal endings of verbs 142-150 :
see Contents, p. xviii.
384
ENGLISH INDEX.
Endure, v"bs. sigiiif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 221
(end).
Envy, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1) ;
w. dat. 230 (2).
Epic dialect 2.
Epicene nouns 27 (2, N. 2).
Ethical dative 232 (N. 6).
Euphony of vowels 8-12 ; of conso-
nants 13-16.
Eupolidean verse 31 7 ( 1 st N. ) , 325 ( 7 ) .
Exclamations, nom. in 213 (N.), voc.
213 (2), gen. 225 (3); relat. in
212 ; mark of 25.
Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2).
Exhortations : see Commands.
Expecting, &c., vbs. of, w. fut. pres.
or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2).
Extent, accus. of 216 ; adnom. gen.
denoting 219 (5).
Falling rhythms, 317 (3).
Fearing, verbs of, w. ^77 and subj. or
opt. 259, 262, sometimes w. fut.
ind. 262 (N. 1), w. pres. or past
tense of indie. 262 (N. 3) ; ellipsis
of 262 (N. 2).
Feet (in verse) 311, 312, 313 ; ictus
of, 311 ; arsis and thesis, 311.
Feminine nouns 27 (N. 3) ; form in
participles 149 (end), in 2 pf, par-
tic. (Hom.) 139 (N. 4). Feminine
caesura 321 (4).
Festivals, names of, in dat. of time
235.
Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and gen.
223 (2).
Final clauses 259-261, w. subj. and
opt. 260 (1), w. subj. after past
tenses 260 (2), rarely w. fut. ind.
260 (1, N. 1) ; w. &u or Ke 260 (1,
N. 2) ; w. past tenses of indie.
261 (3) ; neg. fiv 260 (top). Final
disting. from object clauses 259.
Find, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303
(2).
Finite moods, 80 (N,).
First aorist stem, 83, 137.
First passive stem, 83, 140.
Fitness, &c., verbal adj. denot., for-
mation of, 185 (13).
Forbidding, vbs. of, w. /a^ and infin.
308 (6), 295, 296.
Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (2) ;
w. partic. 304 (end).
Formation of words 180-190 ; see
Contents, p. xix.
Friendliness, vbs. expr. ; w. dat. 230
(2). •
Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w.
gen. 223 ; adject. 228 (top). Ful-
ness, formation of adj. expr. 185
(15).
Future 80, 82 ; tense stem formed
82, 135 (II.) ; of liquid verbs 136
(2) ; Attic fut. in w and -oOfxai 136
(N. 1) ; Doric fut. 152 (6), in Attic
136 (N. 2); second fut. pass. 141;
fut. mid. as pass. 246 (N. 4). Fut.
indie, expressing permission or
command 247 (N. 8) ; rarely in
final clauses 260 (N. 1) ; regularly
in object clauses with Sttws 261 ;
rarely with /^t^ after verbs of fear-
ing 262 (N. 1) ; in protasis 265,
269 (N. 1), 267 (N.) ; in rel.
clauses expressing purpose 278 ;
with €<p' V or ^0' V^f 278 (N. 2) ;
with oi ix-f) 292 ; with &v (Horn.)
254 ; periphrastic fut. with /i^XXw
151 (6), 250 (N.) ; optative 250
(4), 251 (N. 3), 261 (§ 217), never
w. Slv 255 (N.); infin. 250 (Sand
N.), 251 (N. 2), 285 ; partic. 252,
285, 300 (3).
Future perfect 80, 83 ; tense stem
formed 83, 139 (c) ; active form
in 2 vbs. 139 (c, N. 2), gen. peri-
phrastic 151 (3) ; meaning of 246,
as emph. fut. 247 (N. 9).
Gender, natural and grammatical 27
(2, N. 1) ; gi-ammat. design, by
article 27 (2, N. 1) ; common and
epicene 27 (2, N. 2) ; general rules
27 (N. 3) ; gen. of 1st decl. 28, of
2d 31, of 3d 49; gen. of adjectives
]97.
General disting. from particular sup-
positions 265, 266 ; fonns of 270,
276 ; w. indie. 270 (N. 2), 277
(N. 1) ; in Latin 266 (Rem. 1).
Genitive case 27 (3) ; accent 21, 22 ;
of 1st decl. 28-31 ; of 2d decl. 32-
34; of 3d decl. 35, 42 (1, N.), 44
ENGLISH INDEX.
385
(N. 2) ; syntax 218 (Rem.), 219-
229 : see Contents p. xx., xxi. ;
gen. absol. 229, 302 ; gen. of infin.
w. Tov 295 ; pred. gen. w. infin.
194 (end) 195, 198 (N. 8).
Gentile nouns, suffixes of 184 (10),
185 (top).
Glyconic verse 324 (4).
Gnomic tenses 252, 253 ; present 252
(1) ; aorist 252 (2), 253, 248(Rem.),
in infin., opt., and partic. 253
(N. 3); perfect 253 (3).
Grave accent 18, 19 ; for acute in
oxytones 20 (top).
Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2) ;
w. partic. 304.
Hellenes 1.
Hellenistic Greek 2 (end).
Herodotus, dialect of 2.
Heroic hexameter 321 (4).
Heteroclites 49 (end).
Heterogeneous nouns 50 (2).
Hexameter 317 (2) ; Heroic 321 (4).
Hiatus, liow avoided 8 (§8) ; allowed
at end of verse 316 (c).
Hindrance, vbs. of, w. fii^ and infin.
308 (6), 295, 296.
Hippocrates, dialect of 2.
Historic present 246 (N. 1), 248
(Rem.).
His^rical (or secondary) tenses : see
ndary.
'■bs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1).
fd, vbs. signif. to take hold of, w.
gen. 222(1),
Homer, dialect of 2 ; verse of 321
(4) ; Hellenes of 1 (end).
Hoping, &c., vbs. of, \v. fut., pres.,
or aor. infin. 251 (n. 2).
Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Hypothetical: see Conditional.
Iambus 313. Iambic rhythms 319,
320; tragic and comic iambic trim-
eter 320 : iambic systems 323
(N.).
Imperative 80 ; pers. endings and
conn, vowels 148, 149 ; of verbs
in fu 156 (end) ; syntax 258 ; in
commands 290 ; in prohib. w. fx-^
(pres.) 291 ; w. dye, (f)4pe, tdi, 291
(top); after olaff 6 290 (N.); per-
fect 249 (N. 1), 85 (end).
Imperfect tense 80 ; secondary 80 ;
from present stem 82 (I.), 135 (I.) ;
augment 84 (c), 119 ; person, end-
ings. 142 (2); conn, vowel 144
(1), 145, w. endings 145 ; A^t-
forms 156, 157 (end) ; iterat. end-
ings (TKov and CKOfXTju (Ion.) 152
(10), 253 (N.). Syntax 246 ; how
(listing, from aor. 247 (N. 5) ; de-
noting attempted action 246 (N.
2); how expr. in infin. and partic.
251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1), 285, in
opt. (rarely) 283 (N. 1) ; w. du
254 (3), 267, 268, iterative w. dv
253 ; in conditions 264, 267, in
Homer 268 (N. 3) ; in rel. cond.
sentences 276 (2) ; in wishes 290
(2); in final clauses 261 (3).
Impersonal verbs 192 (c, d), 193
(N. 2) ; partic. of, in accus. abs.
302 (2) ; impers. verbal in -riov
306 (top).
Improper diphthongs 6.
Inceptive class of verbs (YI.) 129,
130 (N. 4).
Inclination, formation of adj. denot-
ing 185 (16).
Indeclinable nouns 50 (4).
Indefinite pronouns 76, 209 ; pro-
nominal adj. 78, adverbs 79.
Indicative 80 ; personal endings and
formation 142-145; connect, vow-
els 144, 145 ; tenses of 246, 247,
primary and secondary (or histori-
' cal) 248. General use of 256, 257;
in final clauses : rarely fut. 260
(N. 1), second, tenses 261 (3) ; in
object cl. w. oirojs (fut.) 261 ; after
verbs of fearing w. fi-q : rarely
fut. 262 (N. 1), pres. and past
tenses 262 (end) ; in protasis :
pres. and past tenses 264 (1), 267
(1), in gen. suppos. for subj. 270
(end) ; future 265 (1), 269 (K. 1),
267 (N.) ; second, tenses in supp.
contr. to fact 264 (2), 267 ; in
cond. rel. and temp, clauses 276,
277, by assimilation 278 (2) ;
in apodosis 267, 269, second,
tenses w. dv 254 (3), 264 (2), 267,
386
ENGLISH INDEX.
268 ; potential indie, w. &v 272 ;
in wishes (second, tenses) 290 ; in
causal sent. 288 ; in rel. sent, of
purpose (fut.) 278 ; fut. w. i4> ^
or i<p' ^re 278 (N. 2) ; w. ^ws, &c.
279 ; w. irpip 280 ; in indirect quo-
tations and questions 281-283 ;
future w. ov fx-q 292. See Present,
Future, Aorist, &c.
Indirect compounds (verbs) 189 (7),
124. Indir. object of verb 191
(end), 213 (Eem.), 230. Indirect
Discourse 250 (Rem.), 281-288 :
see Contents, p. xxv. Indir. quo-
tations and questions 281, 306,
307. Indir. reflexives 205, 206.
Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 226
(2).
Inlinitive 80; endings 149; /xi-fonns
157 (e); syntax 292-299: see Con-
tents, p. xxvi. Tenses of, not in
indir. disc. 248, 249, in indir. disc.
250, 251, distinction of the two
uses 285 (N.) ; impf. and plpf.
suppl. bypres. and pf. 251 (N. 1);
w. Slv 255 ; gnomic aor. in 253
(N. 3), perf. 253 (3); w. ^cAXw
151 (6), 250 (N.); w. &<pe\ov in
wishes (poet.) 290 {N. 1, 2); nega-
tive of 308 (3), /XT? oi) with 309
(7), 295 (N.), 296 (N.). Rel. w.
infin. 294 (top).
Inflection 26.
Instrument, dat. of 234; suffixes de-
noting 183 (5).
Intensive pronoun 72 (N. 1), 206
( 1 ) ; w. dat. of accompaniment 235
(5, K).
Intention, partic. expr. 300.
Interchange of quantity 33 (N. 2),
45 (N. 1).
Interest, dative of 231, 232.
Interrogative pronoun 76, 208; pron.
adj. 78 ; adverbs 79 ; sentences
306, 307; subjunctive 291, 284.
Intransitive verbs 192 (top); cognate
object of 213 ; verbs both trans,
and intrans. 243 (Notes).
Inverted assimilation of relatives 211
(N. 4).
Ionic race and dialect 1, 2. Ionic
feet 313, rhythms 325.
Iota class of verbs { I V. ) 1 26-128. I
Iota subscript 6 (§ 3, N.).
Irregular nouns 49-52 ; adjectives
62, 63, comparison 65, 66; verbs
130, 131 (Rem.).
Italy, Dorians of 1.
Iterative imperf. and aorist w. &v
253 ; origin of 253 (Rem.). Itera-
tive forms in ckov, aK6fjL7}if (Ion.)
152 (10); w. civ 25d (N.)
Ithyphallic verse 319 (top).
Know, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304.
Koppa, as numeral 6, 68.
Labials 7 ; labial mutes 8 ; euphonic
changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; euph. ch.
of V before 15 (5) ; labial verb
stems 82 (3); 126 (III.), 127, in
perf. act. 138 (i).
Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304.
Letters 5 ; used for numbers 70 (N. 4).
Likeness, dat. of 233 ; abridged
expr. Av. adject, of 233 (N. 2).
Linguals 7 ; lingual mutes 8 ; eu-
phon. changes of 14 (1, 2, 3), v w.
ling, dropped bef. cr 15 (N. 1); ling.
verb stems 82 (3), 127 (b).
Liquids 7, 8 ; i' before 15 (6) ; w. t
in stems 16 (top) ; vowel bef.
mute and liquid 17 (3) ; li(|uid
verb stems 82 (3), 127 (2), 128,
future of 136 (2), aorist of 137 (2),
133 (5), change of e to a in mono-
syll. 133 (4).
Local endings 52.
Locative case 52 (N. 2), 212 (Rem:),
230 (Rem).
Logaoedic rhythms 323-325.
Long vowels, 17, 18 ; how augmented
120 (N. 1).
Make, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace. 218 ;
w. ace. and gen. 221 ; in pass. w.
gen. 221 (N.)
Manner, dative of 234 (1), w. com-
par. 234 (2) ; partic. of 300.
Masculine nouns 27 (N. 3) : see Gen-
der.
Material, adj. denoting 185 (14) ;
gen. of 219 (4).
ENGLISH INDEX.
387
Means, dative of 234; partic. of
300 ; suffixes denoting 183 (5).
Measure, gen. of 219 (5).
Metathesis 13, 134 (a), 138 (5).
Metre 312 (top) ; related to rhythm
312 (N.)
Mi-forms 156 (Rem.) ; enumeration
of 168-170. See Contents, p.
xviii.
Middle mutes 8 (2), 17 (end).
Middle voice 79 (end) endings 142 ;
conn, vowels 144, w. endings 145 ;
three uses 245 ; in causative sense
245 (N. 2) ; peculiar meaning of
245 (N. 3) ; fut. in pass, sense 246
(N. 4).
Miss, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (1).
Mixed class of verbs (Vlll.) 130, 131;
mixed forms of conditional sen-
tence 273.
Modern Greek 3.
Molossus 313.
Monometer 317.
Moods 80 ; finite 80 (N.) ; depend-
ent 80 (N.) ; general uses of 256-
258; constructions of (i.-viii.)
259-292 ; see Contents, pp. xxiii.-
xxvi.
Movable consonants 12.
Mutes 8 ; co-ordinate and cognate 8
(2); euphonic changes of 14, 15 ;
vowel before mute and liquid 17
(3) ; mute verb stems 82 (3), 125
(II.), 126, 127, fut. of 135 (1), aor.
of 137 (1), perf. act. of 138 {b).
Name or call, vbs. signif. to, w. two
ace. 218 ; w. ace. and gen. 221;
in pass. w. gen. 221 (N.).
Nasals 7, 8 (top).
Nature, vowel long or short by 17.
Negatives 307-310 : see Ov and MiJ.
Neglect, vbs. signif., w. gen. 222 (2).
Neuter gender 27 (2) : see Gender.
Neuter plur. w. sing, verb 193 (2) ;
neut. pred. adj. 197 (N. 2, c) ;
neut. sing, of adj. w. art. 199 (2) ;
neut. adj. as cognate accus. 214
(N". 2), 244 (end); neut. accus. of
adj. as adverb 67 ; neut. X)artic. of
iini)ers. Adjs. in accus. absol. 302
(2); verbal in t^ov 306.
Nominative case 26 ; singular of 3d
decl. formed 36, 37 ; subj. nom.
193, 212 ; pred. nom. 194, w. in-
fin. 194 (end), 195 (N. 4), 198
(N. 8) ; in exclam. like voc. 213
(N. ); in appos. w. sentence 196
(N. 3) ; inftn. as nom. 293, 193
(N. 2). Plur. nom., gener. neut.,
w. sing, verb 193 (2), rarely masc.
or fem. 194 (N. 5), 210 (N. 2).
Sing. nom. w. plur. verb : of col-
lect, noun 193 (3), of relative 209
(N. 2).
Nouns 28-52 : see Contents, p. xvi.
Number 26 ; of adject., peculiarities
in agreement 197.
Numerals 68-70.
Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230 (2).
Object, defined 191 (end) ; direct and
indirect 191, 213 (Rem.) ; direct
obj. (accus.) 213, as subj. of pass.
244; indirect obj. (dat.) 230-
232 ; gen. as object of verb 218,
of noun 219 (3), of adject. 227,
228 ; double obj. ace. 217. Ob-
ject of motion, by accus. w. pre-
pos. 230 (Rem.), 241 (N. 1), by
accus. alone (poetic) 216.
Objective genitive 219 (3). Objec-
tive compounds 189 (1).
Oblique cases 27 (end).
Omission of augment 124 ; of subj.
nom. 192 (N. 1) ; of subj. of infin.
192 (3), 194 (end), 198 (N. 8) ;
of antecedent of rel. 210 ; of yud in
oaths 216 (end) ; of &v in apod,
w. indie. 268 (N. 1), w. opt. 270
(N. 1) ; of protasis 271 (2) ; of
apodosis 273 (N. 2). See Ellipsis.
Open vowels 6 (§ 2, N.) ; in contrac-
tion 9 (top).
Optative 80 ; pers. endings and for-
mation 146-148 ; Aeolic forms in
aor. act. (Attic) 153 (13) ; Ionic
-aro for -jto 151 (end) ; peculiar
/it-forms 158 (top) ; in verbs in
pv/xi 158 (N. 5) ; periphr. forms of
perf. 150(1, 2), 85 (end). Tenses:
not in indir, discourse, pres. and
aor. 248 (end), 249 (1), perf. 249
(2), never fut. .250 (4) ; in indir.
388
ENGLISH INDEX.
disc. 250, 251, future 251 (N. 3),
261 ; how far (listing, as primary
an^ secondary 248 (N. 2), General
uses of opt. 258 {'6) ; in linal
clauses 260 (1) ; in obj. el. w.
Sttws (sometimes fut.) 261 ; w. /x-q
after vbs. of fearing 262 ; in prot-
asis 265 (2), 269 (2), in gen.
supi)os. 266 {b), 270 ; in apod. w.
&v 255, 269 (2), rarely without &v
270 (N. 1), w. df without protasis
expressed 271 (2), potential opt.
272 {b) ; in cond. rel. sent, (as in
protasis) 276 (4), in gen. suppos.
276 (end), by assimilation 277 (1);
w. ews, &c., icntil 279, w. Trpiv 280 ;
indirect discourse : w. 6tl or w5
282, 283, w. dp (retained) 284
(end) ; in dependent clauses of 285,
286; in any dependent clause expr.
past thought 287 ; in causal sen-
tences 289 (N. ); in wishes, alone
or w. eWe or ei ydp 289 (1), w. ei
alone 289 (N. 1), w. ws (poetic)
289 (N. 2), expr. concession, &c.
.(Hom.) 289 (N. 3). Future only
in indir. discourse 251 (N. 3), or
in obj. cl. w. oTTCJs (involving ind.
disc.) 261, rare in rel. cl. of
purpose 278 (N. 3) ; never w. dv
256 (N.).
Oratio obliqua : see Indirect Dis-
course.
Ordinal numerals 68.
Overlook, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (3).
Oxy tones 19.
Paeons 313 (c) ; in Cretic rhythms
326 (3).
Palatals 7 ; as mutes 8 (2) ; euphonic
changes of 14 (1, 2, 3) ; v before
15 (5) : pal. verb stems 82 (3),
126 [a), 127 (N. 1), in perf. act.
138 {b).
Paroemiac verse 323 (3).
Paroxytone 19.
Participle 80 ; formation 149 ; de-
clension 53 (end), 59-62; Doric
and Aeol. forms 153 (15) ; of
Ati-form 157 (f), 167 (1), 172 (10),
2 perf. iu au.5 or etis 62 (N.), 139
(N. 2, 3) ; accent 22 (end), 23
(top). Tenses 252; pres. t.s im-
perf. 252 (N. 1) ; aor. w. \avddvco,
Tvyxoifoi}, (t>6dvw, not past 304 (4),
252 (N. 2) ; partic. w. dfxa, /xera^ij,
evdvs, &c. 301 (N. 1, a), w. Kairrep
or KaL 301 (N. 1, b), w. ws 301 ( N. 2,
a), 305 (N. 4), w. are, oXov, ola, 301
(N. 2, b), w. (boTrep 302 (N. 3) ; fut.
of juirpose 300 (3) ; conditional
301 (4), 271 (1); as apodosis 272
(3), w. dv 273 (top), 255, 256 ;
perf. w. ?x^ forijiing peri])hr.
perf. 303 (N. 2), w. et>t forming
periphr. perf. subj. and o]>t. 150
(1, 2) or indie. 151 (4) ; iu gen.
absol. 229, 302 (1), accus. abs. 302
(2) ; panic, alone hi gen. abs. 302
(1, N.) ; plur. w. sing, collective
noun 197 (N, 3). Three uses of
partic. 299 ; for details of these,
in pp. 300-305, see Contents, p.
xxvii.
Particular and general suppositions
distinguished 265, 266.
Partitive genitive 219 (6), 220, 221,
222. Partitive apposition 196
(N. 2.)
Passive voice 79 (1) ; personal end-
ings 142 ; conn, vowels 144, w.
endings 145 ; aor. ))ass. fortjicd
like active 142 (1) ; use of 243-
245 ; subject of 244 ; retains one
object from active constr. 244 (N.
2) ; impersonal pass, constr. 244
(end), 245 (top), 192 (end).
Patronymics, suffixes of 184 (0).
Pause in verse : caesura 316 (1),
diaeresis 316 (end), 317.
Pentameter, elegiac 321 (end), 322.
Penthemim (2i feet) 322 (top).
Penult 17 (tox)").
Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2); w. partic. 303 (2andN.), 304
(end).
Perfect tense 80; primary 80 (2);
ten.se stem 83, 137-139 ; personal
ending 142 ; connect, vowel 144,
145, w, endings 145 (2); changes
in vowel of stem 131-134 ; augment
120, 121 ; Att. reduplic. 122 ; sec-
ond perf. 80 (N. 1), 83, 132 (3),
139 {d), of the /xi-foi-m 167, 169.
ENGLISH INDEX.
389
170 ; perf. mid. w. cr inserted 132
(2) ; perf. in Homer 139 (top).
Perf. indie. 246; as pres. 247 (N.
6) ; w. fut. meaning 247 (N. 7) ;
never w, du 254 (1) ; gnomic 253
(3) ; compound form 151 (4) ; 3
pers. pi. mid. in arai (for vrai) 151
(end) ; compound form 151 (4, 5),
111 (2). In dependent moods :
not in indir. disc. 249 (2), imperat.
249 (N. 1), infin. 249 (N. 2) ; opt.,
intin., and partic. in indirect disc.
250, 251, 281 ; infin. includes plpf.
251 (N. 1), \v. &v 255 (end) ; com-
pound form of pf. subj. and opt.
150 (1, 2), 85 (end).
Perfect active stem 83, 138 (6).
Perfect middle stem 83, 137 (end),
138.
Periphrastic forms, of perf. 150 (1,
2), 151 (4, 5) ; of fut. vv. /xeWta
151 (6), 250 (N.) ; of fut. perf. 151
(3).
Perispomena 19.
Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (1).
Person 'of verb 81 (top) ; agreement
w. subj. in 193 (1) ; subj. of first
or second pers. omitted 192 (N. 1),
third person 192 (N. 1) ; p. of rel.
pron. 209 (N. 1). See Personal
Endings. Personal endings of
verb 142-151 : see Contents, p.
xviii.
Personal pronoun 71-73, 205, 206 ;
omitted 192 (N. 1) ; of third pers.
in Attic 205 (a), in Hom. and Hdt.
205 (b); substituted for rel. 212
(§ 15'6).
Pherecratic verses 324.
Pity, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1).
Place, suffixes denoting 183 (6) ; ad-
verbs of 79, 52, w. gen. 229 (2) ;
accus. of (whither?) 216; gen. of
(within which) 227 (2) ; dat. of
(where?) 236.
Please, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230(2).
Pleased, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic.
303 (1).
Pluperfect 80 ; formation from perf.
stem 83 (IV.), 137-139: see Per-
fect ; endings 142 ; conn, vowel
145 (top), w. endings 145 (2) ; in -rj
for -€Lv 146 (N. 4) ; Ion. form in -ea
152 (4); augment 121 (4); Att-
redupl. 122 (N. 2); second plpf. 80
(N. 1), 83, 132(3), 139 (d), of the
fct-form 167, 169, 170 ; secondary-
tense 80 (§ 90, 2), 248 ; as impf. 247
(N. 6), in protasis 256, 257 (top),
267 (1), w. suppos. contr. to fact
267 (2), how disting. from impf.
and aor. 268 (top) ; w. au 254 (3),
267 (2); expr. in infin. by perf.
251 (N. 1), inf. w. du 255 (end);
compound form w. el/mL 151 (4).
Plural 26 (end) ; neut. w. sing, verb
193 (2) ; verb w. sing, collect, noun
193 (3) ; adj. or reiat. w. several
sing, noun's 197, 209 (N. 2, a) ;
plur. antec. of 6'crrts 209 (N. 2, 6).
Position, vowels long by 17.
Possession, gen. of 219 (1), 221 (top) ;
dat. of 232 (4).
Possessive pronouns 74, 207 ; w. ar-
ticle 200 (c), 202 (top). Possessive
compounds 190 (3). Our own^
your oivn, &c. 207 (N. 4).
Potential opt. and indie, w. dv 272
{b).
Praise, vbs. expr., w. gen. 224 (1).
Predicate 191 (1) ; pred. noun and
adj. w. verbs 194, 195, 198 (N. 8) ;
noun without article 201 (N. 8) ;
pred. adject. 196 (Rem.), 197 (N. 2,
7), 198 (N. 8), position of w. art.
203 (3) ; pred. accus. w. obj. ace.
218 ; infin. as pred. 292.
Prepositions, w. gen., dat., and accus.
236-242 ; accent when elided 20
(end); anastrophe 20 (§ 23, 2),
242 ; tmesis 241 (N. 3) ; augment
of comp. verbs 123, 124 ; prep, as
adv. 236, 241 (N. 2), 242 (N. 5) ;
in comp. w. gen., dat., or ace. 242
(end), 226, 233 ; w. rel. by as-
simil. 211 (N. 1) ; w. infin. 295
(top).
Present stem 82 (L), 85, 156, 157 ;
foi-mation 125-131.
Present tense 80 (1) ; primary, 80,
248; formation 125-131 ; endings
142 ; connect, vowel 144 (1), w.
endings 145 (2) ; of /ut-form 156,
157. Pres. indie. 246 ; historic
(for aor.) 246 (N. 1), 248 (Rem.) ;
390
ENGLISH INDEX.
gnomic 252 (1) ; expr. attempt
246 (N. 2) ; of TJKia and oi'xojaat as
perf. 246 (end) ; of elfii as fut. 247
(top); w. irdXai, &c. 247 (N. 4) ;
never w. &v 254. Pres. in depend-
ent moods : not in indirect disc.
hovv disting. from aor. 249 (1),
from perf. 249 (2) ; in indir. disc.,
opt. and intin. 250 (end), pres. for
inipf. in opt., intin., and partic.
283 (N. 1), 251 (N. 1), 252 (N. 1),
285.
Price, genitive of 227.
Primary or principal tenses 80 (2),
248 ; how far recogn. in dependent
moods 248 (N. 2).
Primitive word 180 (2).*
Principal parts of verbs 83 (5), of
deponents 84 (6).
Proclitics 24.
Prohibitions w. fii^ 291 ; w. oi fi-q 292
(N.).
Promising, verbs of, w. fut., pres., or
aor. inlin. 251 (N. 2).
Pronominal adj. and adv. 78, 79.
Pronouns 71-79, 205-212 : see Con-
tents, pp. xvii., xix. ; some encli-
tic 23 (1, 2), accent retained after
accented prepos. 24 (N. 1). See
Personal, Kelative, &c.
Pronunciation: see Preface, pp. x.-xii.
Proparoxytones 19.
Proiiecute, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
224 (2).
Protasis 263 ; forms of 263-267 ;
expr. in partic, adv., &c. 271 (1) ;
omitted 271 (2). In cond. rel. and
tempor. sentences 275 ; forms 275-
277.
Prove, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304
(end).
Punctuation marks 25.
Pure syllables 17 (§18, 2) ; verbs
82 (N.).
Purpose : expr. by final clause 259 ;
by rel. cl. w. fut. indie. 278, in
Hom. by subj. 278 (N. 1); im-
plied in cl. w. ews, irpiu, &c. 280
(N. 2); byinfin. 296 (end); by
€(j) 4* or i(f> qtre w. infin. 297 (end);
by fut. partic. 300 (3) ; sometimes
by gen. 224 (N. 1), by gen. of infin.
295 (2).
Quality, nouns denot. 183 (7).
Quantity of syllables 17 ; relation to
rhythm 312 (N.).
Questions, direct and indirect disting.
281 ; direct 306, 307, of doubt, w.
subj. 291 ; indirect, w. indie, or
opt. 281, 282, 283, w. subj. or opt.
284.
Recessive accent 19 (3).
Reciprocal pronoun 74 ; reflexive used
for 207 (N. 3).
Reduplication, of perf. stem 84 (c),
119 (c), 120, 121 ; of 2 aor. 120
(N. 3), 134 (c) ; of present 134 (c),
12P (end)^ in verbs in fic 157 (3),
168 (2) ; in plpf. 121 (4). Attic
redupl. in perf, 122, in 2 aor. 120
(N. 4), in pres. (of dpapiaKu) 129
(end).
Reiiexive pronouns 73, 206 ; used for
reciprocal 207 (N. 3) ; 3d pers. for
1st or 2nd 207 (N. 2). Indirect
reflexives 205 (a), 206 (end).
Relation, adject, denoting 185 (12).
Relative pronouns 77, Homer, forms
78 (top) ; pronom. adj. 78, ad-
verbs 79 ; relation to antecedent
209; antec. om. 210; assimilation
of rel. to case of antec. 210, 211,
of antec. to case of rel. 211 (N. 4);
assim. in rel. adv. 211 (N. 3) ;
attraction of antec. 211, joined w.
assim. 211 (N.) ; rel. not repeated
212 ; rel. as demonstr. 209 (N. 3) ;
in exclam. 212. Relative and tem-
poral sentences 274-281 : see Con-
tents, pp. xxiv., XXV.
Release, vbs. signif. to w. gen. 225.
RememlDer, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2) ; w. partic. 304.
Reminding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 217 ;
w. ace. and gen. 223 (N. 3).
Remove, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Repent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 303
(1).
Represent, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
303 (2).
Reproach, vbs. expr., w. dat. 230 (2).
Resemblance, vbs. implying, w. dat.
233.
Respect, dative of 232 (5).
ENGLISH INDEX.
391
Restrain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 225.
Result, nouns denot. 183 (4) ; expr.
by ware w. infiu. 297 (1), w. indie.
279.
Revenge, vbs. expr. w. gen. 224 (1).
Rhythm and metre, how related 311,
312; rising and falling rhythms 31 7
(3). See Anapaestic, Dactylic,
Iambic, &c.
Rhythmical series 315 (1), 316.
Rising rhythms 317 (3).
Romaic language 3.
Root and stem defined 26 (2).
Rough breathing 6.
Rough mutes 8.
Rule, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 22b (3).
San 6 (N. 2) ; as numeral 69.
Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 230
(2).
Saying, vbs. of, w. two accus. 217 ;
constr. in indirect discourse 293
(end).
Second aorist, perfect, &c. 80 (N. 1).
Second aorist stem 83, 140.
Second passive stem 83, 141.
Second perfect stem 83, 139.
Secondary (or historical) tenses 80
(2), 248; how far recogn. in de-
pend, moods 248 (N. 2).
See, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304,
303 (2, andK).
Semivowels 7 (end).
Sentence 191 (1); as subject 193
(N. 2).
Separation, gen. of 225, 228 (N. 2).
Septuagint 3.
Serving, vbs. of, w. dat. 230 (2).
Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen. 221 (end).
Short vowels 17 ; syllables, time of
312 (1).
Show, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 304.
Sibilant {<t) 7 (end).
Sicily, Dorians in 1.
Similes (Homeric), aor. in 253 (N. 2).
Simple stem of verb 81 (2) ; forma-
tion of present from 125-131.
Singular number 26; sing. vb. w.
neut. pi. subj. 193 (2), rarely w.
masc. or fem. pi. subj. 194 (N. 5),
210 (N. 2) ; several sing, nouns
w. pi. adj. 197 (N. 1).
Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2) ; 6^«223 (Rem.).
Q0( ' '
8.
Sonants and surds 8 (2, N.).
Source, gen. of 226 (1).
Space, ace. of extent of, 216.
Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222
(2).
Specification, ace. of 215.
Spondee 313 ; for anapaest 322 ; for
dactyl 321 ; for iambus or trochee
315, 318, 319, 320. Spondaic hex-
ameter verse 321 (4).
Stem and root 26 (2). Stems of
verbs 81-84, 125-141 : see Con-
tents, p. xviii. Simple stem 81
(2).
Strophe and antistrophe 318 (4).
Subject 191, modified 191 (N. 2) ; of
finite vb. 192 (1), omitted 192
(N. 1); of infin. 192 (2), 298 (§ 269,
N.), omitted 192 (3); infin. or
sentence as subj. 193 (N. 2); agree-
ment of subj. w. finite vb. 193 ; of
passive 243, 244.
Subjective genitive 219 (2).
Subjunctive 80 ; pers. endings and
formation 146 ; peculiar /xi-forma
158 (N. 2, 4) ; in vbs. in vvfii 158
(N. 5); Ionic forms 153 (12), in 2
aor. act. of /it-form 171 (7); peri-
phr. forms in perf. 150 (1, 2), 85
(end). Tenses : pres. and aor. 248,
249 (1), perf. 249 (2). General
uses 257 (2) : in final cl. 260 (1) ;
in obj. cl. w. Sttws or ws (for'fut.
indie. ) 261 ; w. ix-q after vbs. of
fearing 262; in jn-otasis 265 (1),
269 (1), in gen. suppos. 266 (a),
270 ; w. 6.V or /ce in prot. 254, 269,
270, in poetry without 6.v 269 (N.
2), 271 (N. 2); in apod. w. &v or k^
(Epic) 255 (2), 291; in cond. rel.
sent, (as in prot.) 276(3), in gen.
suppos. 276 (end), by assim. 277
(1), w. ^ws, &c., until 279, w. irplv
280 ; in exhortations 290 (end), w.
&y€, &c. 291 (top); in prohibitions
(aor. ) w. fi-q 291 ; w. oi fi-q 292 ; in
questions of doubt 291, retained in
indirect form 284 ; in rel. cl. of
purpose (Homer.) 278 (N", 1);
392
ENGLISH INDEX.
changed to opt. in indir. discourse
after past tenses 282.
Subscript, iota 6 (N.).
Substantive 28 (N.) : see Noun.
Suffixes 181.
Superlative degree 64-67.
Suppositions, general and particular
265, 266.
Surds and sonants 8 (2, N.).
Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 226 (2).
Swearing, particles of, w. accus. 216.
Syllaba anceps at end of verse 315
(5).
Syllabic augment 119 ; of plupf. 121
(4).
Syllables 17; division of 17 (N.);
quantity of 17, 18 ; long and short
in verse 312.
Syncope 13 (2); in nouns 47, 48;
in verb stems 134 (b); in feet 315
(2).
Synizesis 10.
Systems, tense 82 (4) ; anapaestic,
trochaic, and iambic 323.
Taste, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 222 (2).
Tau-class of verbs 126 (III.).
Teaching, vbs. of w. two accus. 217,
214 (N. 4).
Temporal augment 119 (J), 119 (end),
121 (3); of diphthongs 122 ; omis-
sion of 124. Temporal sentences:
see Relative.
Tense stems and systems 81-84 ;
formation of 1 35-1 41 ; table of 1 41 .
Tenses 80 ; primary and secondary
80, 248 ; of indie. 246, 247 ; of de-
pend, moods 248-251 ; of partic.
252 ; gnomic, 252, 253 ; iterative
253. See Present, Imperfect, &c.
Tetrameter 317 (2) ; trochaic 318 (2) ;
iambic 319 (end): dactylic 321
(3) ; anapaestic 323 (4).
Thesis 311 ; not Greek O^cis 311 (foot-
note).
Threats, vbs. expr. w. dat. 230 (2).
Time, ace. of (extent) 216 ; gen. of
(within which) 227 ; dat. of (poet-
ic) 235 ; expr. by partic. 300, 301
(N. 1).
Tmesis 241 (end).
Touching, vbs. of, w. gen. 222 (1).
Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 320.
Transitive verbs 192 (top).
Trial of, vbs. signif. to make, w. gen.
222 (1).
Tribrach 313 ; for trochee or iambus
314 (N. 1), 318, 319.
Trimeter 317 (2) ; iambic (acatal.)
320 (4), in English 320 (end).
Tripody, trochaic 319 (top).
Trochee 313. Trochaic rhythms 318,
319.
Trust, vbs. signif. to,w. dat. 230 (2).
Unclothe, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
217.
Understand, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
222 (2).
Union, &c. vbs. implying, w. dat.
233.
Value, genitive of 227.
Vau or Digamma 6 (N. 2); as numer-
al 68 ; dropped in noun stem 45
(N. 1), 46 (N.) ; in verb stems 123
(N. 2), 126 (2), 128 (3), 139 [d,
N. 1).
Verbals 180 (2), 181 (top). Verbal
nouns and adj. w. object, gen. 219
(3), 227 (end), with obj. accus. 213
(N. 3). Verbals in tos 150 (3); in
Tios or t4ov 150 (3), 305, 306, 235
Verbs, conjugation and formation of
79-179 : see Contents, pp. xvii.,
xviii. ; syntax of 243-306 : see
Contents, pp. xxii.-xxvii.
Verses 316 (2) ; catalectic and acata-
lectic 316 (3).
Vocative case 27 (3) ; sing, of 3d
decl. 38 Lin addresses 213 (2).
Voices 79 (I) ; uses of 243-246. See
Active, Middle, Passive.
Vowels 6 ; open and close 6 (§ 2, N.).
Vowel declension (1st and 2d) 28,
35. Vowel stems of nouns 28, 31
(N.), 35 (top); of verbs 82 (3),
131 (end), 133 (6), w. vowel length-
ened 131 (1); with 0- added 132
(2). Connecting vowels 143 (4),
144.
ENGLISH INDEX.
393
Want, verbs signif. 223.
Weary of, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic.
303 (1).
Whole, gen. of (partitive) 219, 220.
Wishes, expr. by opt. 289 (1); by
second, tenses of indie. 290 (2) ;
by ioipfXov w. infin. 290 (N. 1);
negative /A97 289, 290 (N. 2); by in-
fin. 298.
Wondering, vbs. of, w. el 274, 287
(2) ; sometimes w. on 274 (§ 228,
N.'
lOAN DEPT.
u locr riate Stamped below, or
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
.a^^r^
b 2'.'A^3
m^
^^%
'^:.
i
A^i^
^W^
?^$!|
^..•^^■--■t
a
* •*•
f,i
%
r,^,A:
ff',
':#:
roi
h ^
f